SPECIFICATION NO. CP21-01 PROJECT NO. 18020

PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION THOUSAND OAKS 34

SPECIFICATION NO. CP21-01

PROJECT NO. 18020

ENGINEERING SERVICES

NOTICE TO BIDDERS, SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS SOURCES OF INFORMATION

DURING BIDDING PERIOD

PLAN HOLDERS LIST & OTHER INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE ON THE INTERNET AT: http://vcpublicworks.org/es/

PROJECT DOCUMENTS ON EBIDBOARD AT:

http://www.ebidboard.com/public/projects/index.asp?mbrguid=2B485702-FFAE-4327-A8B7-F1C22BE001D2

TECHNICAL QUESTIONS on plans and specifications Please EMAIL questions early in the bidding period as an addendum may be required.

FOR BID QUESTIONS, or to confirm number of Addenda issued, EMAIL TO: [email protected] Spec Number must be referenced on all bid questions

Please do not call other staff members or consultant. Note that our consultants are directed to refer all calls to the Project Managers.

DIRECTIONS TO VENTURA COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER Ventura County Government Center is currently closed to the public due to

COVID-19 From US101 (Ventura Freeway), take Victoria Ave off ramp, north (towards mountains) about one mile to Telephone Road, then right on Telephone Road one block and turn left at Lark St. into the Government center parking lot. From CA126 (Santa Paula Freeway), take Victoria Ave off ramp, south (away from mountains) about one mile to Telephone Road, then left on Telephone Road 1 block and turn left at Lark St. into the Government center parking lot.

ONLY AFTER BID OPENING BID RESULTS: are available on the internet site shown above, usually within 24 hours after bids are opened and Include abstracts of unit prices, totals of all bids & subcontractor's list for low & 2nd bidder. Click on “BIDS & SUBS”.

LOW BIDDER - ONLY AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT ALL QUESTIONS concerning project AFTER AWARD should be directed to the Project Manager

named in the Notice of Award

Any other information can be requested at (805) 654-2039

7/17/2020 NOTICE TO BIDDERSourceR.doc

mailto:[email protected]

COUNTY OF VENTURA PUBLIC WORKS AGENCY

VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION THOUSAND OAKS 34

SPECIFICATION NO: CP21-01 PROJECT NO: 18020

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Notice of Inviting Bids…………………………………………. 1 page

Proposal………………………………………………………... 12 pages

Prevailing Rates of Wages…………………………………… 1 page

Excerpts from the California Labor Code…………………… 13 pages

Excerpts from PCC 9204 January 1, 2017…………………. 4 pages

Ventura County Standard Specifications Table of Contents……………………………………... 8 pages

Ventura County Standard Specifications…………………… 77 pages

Technical Specifications – Table of Contents…………...…. 4 pages

Technical Specifications…………………………………….... 680 pages

Appendix H – Permits..……………………………………….. 18 sheets

Appendix I – Radio Tower Plans…………………………….. 13 sheets

Plans..…………………………………………………………... 168 sheets

Updated 01/15/2021

COUNTY OF VENTURA NOTICE INVITING FORMAL BIDS

Sealed bids will be received by mail at the County Surveyor's Public Counter, 3rd Floor, Administration Building, 800 South Victoria Avenue, Ventura, California 93009-1670, on December 9, 2021, and opened at 2:00 p.m., for Specification No. CP21-01, VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION – THOUSAND OAKS 34, which consists of construction of a 9,318 square-foot, single story fire station and a 2,000 square-foot accessory building (garage) with associated improvements on a 1.9 acre vacant site for the County of Ventura. Work includes but is not limited to the following: onsite improvements, new fire station building, exercise building, ancillary building, masonry site walls, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and alarm, vehicle exhaust system, communications and electrical systems, vehicle fueling, and emergency generator. The estimated cost of construction is $ 10,000,000.00. The plans, specifications and proposal forms for this project are filed in the office of the Ventura County Surveyor and are, by reference, made a part of this Notice. Construction bidding documents, including plans, specifications, addenda and any supplementary documents are now available on the Ventura County Web Site at: https://www.vcpublicworks.org/es/contracting/

then click on “Contract Bidding Opportunities” and then “eBidBoard Website” where the documents may be viewed, downloaded and printed. Printed copies of the document can be purchased at most commercial printing companies that have internet access. A List of Plan Holders is available on the Website shown above. An abstract of bids received will be available at the same web site under Bids & Subs. When projects are awarded, the award notification to the State will be posted under Awarded Contracts. Bids must be submitted by mail only on the proposal form furnished with said documents. Subcontractor list must include a valid Contractor’s License Number. Contractor and any subcontractors must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations prior to bid time and shall be verified during bid verification processes. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid guarantee in the amount of not less than 10% of the amount bid, PAYABLE TO THE COUNTY OF VENTURA and guaranteeing that the bidder will enter into a contract in accordance with the terms of the bidding documents if award is made. The bid guarantee shall be in one of the following forms: a bid bond written by an admitted surety insurer on the form included with the Proposal form, a cashier's check drawn by a National bank, a check certified by a National bank or cash. An electronically transmitted copy of the bid bond form, included in the Proposal form, may be used but the form must have the original signatures of the principal and surety. Copies of the completed bond will not be accepted. Bidders must have a Class B California Contractors license, and will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, each in the amount of 100% of the contract price. In accordance with Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code, securities may be substituted for funds withheld. Bidders, contractors, and other interested parties can obtain wage rates pertaining to Ventura County projects at the link provided below. California general prevailing wage rates for construction can be obtained from the following Web site: http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/index.htm. The awarded contractor must post copies of the prevailing wage determinations at each job site.

https://www.vcpublicworks.org/es/contracting/

http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/index.htm

1

PROPOSAL FOR

VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION – THOUSAND OAKS 34

LOCATED IN

VENTURA COUNTY, CALIFORNIA

MAKE BID GUARANTEE TO COUNTY OF VENTURA USE FORM PROVIDED (SEE PARAGRAPH 9, INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS).

SPECIFICATION NO. CP 21-01 INCLUDING 168 SHEETS OF PLANS

BIDS WILL BE RECEIVED BY MAIL ONLY (SEE SECTION 13 OF THE PROPOSAL) BIDS WILL BE OPENED AT 2:00 PM ON DECEMBER 9, 2021

AGENCY IS ALLOWED 60 DAYS TO AWARD A CONTRACT (SEE SECTION 2-1.1). THE STARTING DATE OF CONTRACT WILL BE 28 CALENDAR DAYS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT (SEE SECTION 6-7.4). COMPLETION TIME IS 310 WORKING DAYS (SEE SECTION 6-7). LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ARE $ 2,000.00 PER CALENDAR DAY (SEE SECTION 6-9). CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE CLASSIFICATION REQUIRED IS CLASS B. LIABILITY INSURANCE CLASS REQUIRED PER SECTION 7-4 IS L-B. FEDERAL-AID CONTRACT PROVISIONS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS. NON-MANDATORY PREBID MEETING: 2:00 P.M. on Wed. 11/17/2021 at the project site:

2977 Mountclef Blvd, Thousand Oaks, CA 91360 THE NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PROPOSAL IS 12

BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE

NAME: _______________________________________________________________________ MAILING ADDRESS: ____________________________________________________________ CITY: ____________________________ STATE: ___________ ZIP CODE: ______________ DELIVERY ADDRESS (CONTRACT RELATED DOCS), IF DIFFERENT FROM MAILING ADDRESS: _____________________________________________________________________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER: (______)_______-__________ FAX No. (______)________-_________ eMAIL ADDRESS: _____________________________

Spec. No. CP21-01

2

PROPOSAL Instruction to Bidders

1. LICENSING OF BIDDER. Before submitting bids, bidders shall be licensed in accordance with the provisions of Sections 7000 through 7145 of the Business and Professions Code of the State of California in the classification required for the work bid on. The bidder's license number, classification, and expiration date shall be inserted on page 7 of the proposal form. The bidder's name shall correspond in all respects with the name shown on the license. License numbers and names are checked with the State.

2. SITE INSPECTION. Personally visit the worksite before submitting your bid to ascertain the existence of any surface or subsurface conditions affecting the cost of the work.

3. INTERPRETATION AND QUESTIONS. Carefully review the plans and specifications for any errors, omissions, or ambiguities. If you discover any or have specific questions, notify the Agency far enough in advance of the bid opening to allow time for the issuance of appropriate written addenda, if necessary. Send the notification about any errors, omissions, ambiguities or questions to [email protected]. Written addenda shall be the sole means for modifying the plans and/or specifications prior to the bid opening. The Agency shall not be bound by oral communications purportedly modifying or interpreting the plans and/or specifications regardless of when or by whom such oral communications are made and you should not rely upon such oral communications in preparing your bid.

4. BID ITEMS. State in figures the unit prices, lump sum prices and extensions as indicated which shall be the prices for which you propose to supply all materials and services and perform all work required by the plans and specifications. All items described are to be construed as complete and in place. Include in the bid amount for items listed on the proposal form the cost of performing all work shown on the plans or required by the specifications for which a specific bid item is not provided. Bid on all items listed under Schedule of Work and Prices unless otherwise indicated in the proposal form.

5. SIGNING OF BID. Fill in all indicated blanks in this proposal using typewriter or ink and sign with ink. Proposals signed by an agent other than an owner, partner or corporate officer shall be accompanied by a power-of-attorney. Proposal form must be dated.

6. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT. The non-collusion affidavit required by Public Contract Code 7106 is included on page 5 of this Proposal.

7. BID FORM NOT TO BE ALTERED. Do not change the wording of this proposal. Any additions, deletions, conditions, limitations or provisions by the bidder will render the proposal irregular and may cause its rejection.

8. CORRECTING BID. Explain over your signature any erasures or deletions of information entered by the bidder in this proposal. Modifications submitted separately from this form will not be accepted

mailto:[email protected]

Spec. No. CP21-01

3

9. BID GUARANTEE. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid guarantee in the amount of not less than 10% of the amount bid and guaranteeing that the bidder will enter into a contract in accordance with the terms of the bidding documents if award is made to him. The bid guarantee shall be in one of the following forms: A bid bond written by an admitted surety insurer on the form included with the proposal form, a cashier's check drawn by a national bank, a check certified by a national bank or cash. An electronically transmitted copy (FAX) of the bid bond form included in the proposal form may be used, but the form must have the original signatures of the principal and surety. A FAX of the completed bond will not be accepted. Note: Performance and Payment Bonds are required from the bidder to whom a contract is awarded. See specifications Subsection 2-4 for contract bond requirements including limitations on the sureties that may issue the bonds.

10. SUBMITTING BID. Submit your bid by mail on one copy only of this proposal form, with addenda acknowledged by inserting the addenda numbers on page 7 of this proposal and with bid guarantee attached, in a sealed envelope addressed to:

Public Works Agency, County of Ventura, County Surveyor's Public Counter, 3rd Floor - Hall of Administration, 800 South Victoria Ave., Ventura, California 93009-1670.

For proper handling, mark outside of envelope as “SEALED BID”, and show the project title and the bidder's name and address. Do not enclose other documents in the bid envelope.

IMPORTANT: Proposals received that are not signed will not be considered. Late bids will not be opened or considered. Bids must be on this form. Electronically transmitted bids, bid modifications

or bid withdrawals will not be considered. Notwithstanding anything stated, directed or indicated in the other bidding documents, the only items to be included with this proposal are:

1. This proposal form, signed and dated with addenda acknowledged. 2. The bid bond with original signatures of surety representative and contractor, or

other bid guarantee as specified in 9 above. 3. Subcontractors and off-job fabricators list completed in accordance with Public

Contract Code Section 4104. 11. TIME OF BID CLOSURE. The bid box will be closed promptly at the time specified on the first sheet of the proposal form. Time can be obtained from http://www.time.gov/timezone.cgi?Pacific/d/-8 (local standard time).

12. DELIVERY OF BID. Due to the COVID-19 crisis, in-person delivery of bids has been suspended. In person

delivery will not be accepted; only bids received by mail shall be accepted.

http://www.time.gov/timezone.cgi?Pacific/d/-8

Spec. No. CP21-01

4

13. MAILED BIDS (Including Express Delivery). Bids received in the County's Mail Room by 8 a.m. on, or before, the bid opening date will be considered to have been placed in the bid box on time, whether or not actually delivered to the bid box on time. U. S. Postal Service Special delivery, Registered and Certified mail may slow actual receipt of bids. Bidder is solely responsible for sending bid early enough to insure delivery to the County on time. For mailed bids, mark "SEALED BID” in large letters on the outside of the delivery envelope and clearly show the Spec No.

Electronically transmitted bids or modifications will not be considered. 14. WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL. Proposals may be withdrawn by the bidder prior

to the time stated for opening bids upon written request, signed by the bidder or his authorized agent and submitted in the same manner as a bid. To retrieve a bid from the bid box may take 10 or more minutes as it requires a written request to withdraw the bid, the positive identification of the person requesting the withdrawal, and the opening of the bid box.

15. ERRORS. Bidder will not be released on account of errors. Where a discrepancy occurs between unit prices and totals, the unit price shall govern in computing the total. If a unit price is omitted, it will be determined from the item total, if entered. If both the unit price and line total for any item are omitted, the bid will be considered non-responsive in accordance with Paragraph 4 above. If the total Bid Price is not equal to the sum of the Item Totals (as corrected) the Total Bid Price will be corrected. If no monetary symbol ($ or ¢) is entered with a unit price, lump sum or extension, a dollar sign will be assumed to be the bidder's intent.

16. SUBCONTRACTOR LICENSE NUMBERS. License numbers for subcontractors must be provided at the time the bid is received. 17. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION PROGRAM. No contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under Labor Code section 1771.1(a)] No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded a contract for public work on a public works project unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 18. LABOR COMPLIANCE MONITORING. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. The Prime Contractor shall post job site notices prescribed by regulation. (See Chapter 8, California Code Regulation section 16451(d) for notice that previously was required for projects monitored by the Compliance Monitoring Unit.)

Spec. No. CP21-01

5

PROPOSAL

I, the person whose signature is affixed to page 7 of this proposal, submit this proposal to the Board of Supervisors of the County of Ventura and hereby declare:

1. That the bidder has read this proposal and has abided by and agrees to the

conditions herein and has carefully examined the project plans and read the specifications and does hereby propose to furnish all materials and do all the work required to complete the work in accordance with the plans and specifications for the unit prices or lump sums named in the Schedule of Work and Prices.

2. That the addenda indicated on page 7 of this proposal are acknowledged. 3. That the bidder, as Principal, acknowledges himself as being bound by the

attached bond or other acceptable bid guarantee. 4. NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION

The bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or to refrain from bidding. The bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder. All statements contained in the bid are true. The bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, to effectuate a collusive or sham bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for such purpose. Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the bidder.

Signature of Officer _____________________________________________________

Printed Name of officer:__________________________________________________

Spec. No. CP21-01

6

PROPOSAL Contractor's Name _________________________________________________________

List of Subcontractors Listing shall comply with the provisions of California Public Contract Code, Section 4104.

Name of Subcontractor

Contractor’s License Number

Business Address Items of Work

If more space is needed, attach additional sheets. Public Contract Code Section 4104 provides that bidders must list:

(a)(1) The name, the location of the place of business, and the California contractor license number of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater.

(b) The portion of the work that will be done by each subcontractor under this act. The prime contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each portion as is defined by the prime contractor in his or her bid.

Spec. No. CP21-01

7

PROPOSAL

Schedule of work and prices for: VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION – THOUSAND OAKS 34

Item No. Units

Approx Quantity Item Description

Payment Reference

Unit-Prices (In

Figures)

Item Total (In Figures)

1 LS 1 All Work (Excluding Excavation Safety) Completed Per Plans and Specifications

9-2

2 LS 1 Excavation Safety 7-10.4.23 LS 1 Release on Contract 9-4 $1.00

Total Amount Bid

The following addenda are acknowledged: Number Dated (Bidder must fill in number and date of each addenda or may enter the word “None “ if appropriate) Call (805) 654-2068 to determine addenda that have been issued.

I make the above proposal and certify or declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the statements made on Page 5 of this Proposal, and below my signature, are true and correct.

Dated ________________________________

Signature:________________________________

Printed Name:_____________________________ At ________________________________

(City and State)

Position: ________________________________________

(Sole Owner, Partner, President, etc.)

License No.______________________ Company Name ___________________________

License Classification________ Type of Organization _______________________ (Individual, Partnership, Corp.)

License Expiration Date_____________

Spec. No. CP21-01

8

Enter } Name & } Address } of Bonding } Company }

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we ___________________________

__________________________________________________________________, Principal, and_____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________, Surety, are held and firmly bound unto COUNTY OF VENTURA Obligee, in the sum of Ten Percent of the total amount of the Bid for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our legal representatives, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, Principal has submitted or is about to submit a bid or proposal to Obligee on a contract for VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION – THOUSAND OAKS 34

NOW, THEREFORE, if that contract be awarded to principal and principal shall, within such time as specified, duly execute the contract in the prescribed form and deliver the same to obligee with all required bonds/performance securities, certificates of insurance and such other items as required in the bidding or contract documents then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect, and if the contract is awarded to principal and principal fails, within the time specified, to duly execute the contract in the prescribed form and deliver the same to obligee with all said required items, then surety shall pay obligee the full sum of this bond.

Surety, for value received, hereby agrees that no extension of time, change, alteration, modification, or addition to the bidding or contract documents, or of the work required thereunder, shall release or exonerate surety on this bond or in any way affect the obligation of this bond; and surety does hereby waive notice of same. Signed, sealed and dated

__________________________________________________ (Principal)

by____________________________________________(Seal)

__________________________________________________ (Surety)

by________________________________________________ Attorney-in-Fact

INDICATE COMPLETE ADDRESS OF SURETY TO WHICH CORRESPONDENCE CONCERNING THIS BOND SHOULD BE DIRECTED.

Telephone No. Form PW-B-1

Spec. No. CP21-01

9

PROPOSAL Contractor Questionnaire

CONTRACTOR NAME:_______________________________________________

It is the policy of the County of Ventura to conduct business only with responsible contractors who possess the trustworthiness, quality and fitness to satisfactorily perform County contracts. County of Ventura officials will investigate with reasonable diligence the responsibility of contractors submitting proposals before awarding, or recommending the award, of contracts.

To assist officials with this effort, please respond to the following questions:

1. Are any owners, CSLB qualifier, or officers of a sub-contractors, included in the bid package, affiliated with the bidder?

YES_______ NO_______ If answered yes, please give the names and license numbers of sub-contractor owners, CSLB qualifiers, and officers:

________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2. Has any owner, CSLB qualifier, or officer employed by bidder operated as contractor under any other name or license within the last 5 years?

YES_______ NO_______ If yes, please give the names and license number for all firms and provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Spec. No. CP21-01

10

3. Is the bidder a subsidiary, parent company, holding company, or affiliate of any other construction firm?

YES_______ NO_______ If yes, please give names and details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________

4. Has the bidder changed names or license numbers in the past five years?

YES_______ NO_______ If yes, please provide details: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5. At any time in the last five years has bidder, or any of its owners or officers, been convicted of a crime involving the award of a contract of a government construction project, or bidding or performance of, a government contract?

YES_______ NO_______ If yes, please provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6. Is bidder currently a debtor in a bankruptcy case? YES_______ NO_______

If yes, please provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Spec. No. CP21-01

11

7. Was bidder in bankruptcy at any time in the last five years? YES_______ NO_______

8. At any time in the last five years has bidder been assessed liquidated damages after completion of a project under a construction contract with either a public or private owner?

YES_______ NO_______


9. In the last five years has bidder, or any other firm with which bidder’s owners, officers, or

partners was associated with, been disbarred, disqualified, removed, terminated for convenience, or otherwise prevented from, bidding on or completing any government agency or public works project for any reason?

YES_______ NO_______


10. In the last five years, has bidder been denied an award of a public works contract based on a finding by a public agency that bidder was not a responsible bidder?

YES_______ NO_______

If answered yes, please provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Spec. No. CP21-01

12

11. In the last five years, has bidder been denied an award of a public works contract based on a finding by a public agency that bidder was not a responsive bidder?

YES_______ NO_______

If answered yes, please provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

12. At any time in the past five years has any surety company made any payments on bidder’s behalf to satisfy any claims made against a performance or payment bond issued on bidder’s behalf, in connection with a construction project public or private?

YES_______ NO_______

If answered yes, please provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

13. In the past five years, has any insurance carrier, for any form of insurance, refused to renew the insurance policy for your firm?

YES_______ NO_______ If answered yes, please provide details below: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PREVAILING

RATES OF

WAGES

S:\PWA Forms\Plans&SpecsPkg\Prevailing Wage Requirement 2020

COUNTY OF VENTURA

PUBLIC WORKS AGENCY

PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES

As provided in Subsection 7-2.2 of these specifications, and in accordance with Section 1770 (Amended by Stats. 2017, Ch. 28, Sec. 17. (SB 96) Effective June 27, 2017), et. seq. of the California Labor Code, determinations of the generally prevailing wages for various classes of workers in Ventura County have been made by the California Director of Industrial Relations as required by the California Labor Code.

As required by California Labor Code Section 1777.5, properly indentured apprentices shall be employed on the work in the minimum ratio of not less than one apprentice for each five journeymen in a craft or trade classification. Travel and subsistence shall be paid in accordance with California Labor Code Section 1773.8. The body awarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the contract stipulations to effectuate this section. The stipulations shall fix the responsibility of compliance with this section for all apprenticeable occupations with the prime contractor.

The determinations made by the State are available on the Internet at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/Index.htm and are on file in the office of the Public Works Agency The rate fixed for each craft, classification, or type of work shall be not less than the prevailing rate

paid in the craft, classification, or type of work.

The Contractor shall post a copy of the wage rates at each jobsite at a location readily available to the workers.

(Rev. 1/29/2020 )

http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/Index.htm

EXCERPTS

FROM THE

CALIFORNIA

LABOR CODE

1

Excerpts from the California Labor Code

These excerpts from the Labor Code include the sections listed in specification Section 7.2.2.2 that are required by Labor Code 1775(b)(1) to be included in all subcontracts. These excerpts also include sections recommended by the CA Department of Industrial Relations that contain information on the contractor registration requirements. These sections are furnished for the convenience of the contractor and in no way limit the required compliance with all laws.

1725.5. A contractor shall be registered pursuant to this section to be qualified to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, subject to the requirements of Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code or engage in the performance of any public work contract that is subject to the requirements of this chapter. For the purposes of this section, “contractor” includes a subcontractor as defined by Section 1722.1.

(a) To qualify for registration under this section, a contractor shall do all of the following:(1) (A) Register with the Department of Industrial Relations in the manner prescribed by thedepartment and pay an initial nonrefundable application fee of four hundred dollars ($400) toqualify for registration under this section and an annual renewal fee on or before July 1 of eachyear thereafter. The annual renewal fee shall be in a uniform amount set by the Director ofIndustrial Relations, and the initial registration and renewal fees may be adjusted no more thanannually by the director to support the costs specified in Section 1771.3.

(B) Beginning June 1, 2019, a contractor may register or renew according to this subdivision inannual increments up to three years from the date of registration. Contractors who wish to do sowill be required to prepay the applicable nonrefundable application or renewal fees to qualify forthe number of years for which they wish to preregister.

(2) Provide evidence, disclosures, or releases as are necessary to establish all of the following:

(A) Workers’ compensation coverage that meets the requirements of Division 4 (commencingwith Section 3200) and includes sufficient coverage for any worker whom the contractoremploys to perform work that is subject to prevailing wage requirements other than a contractorwho is separately registered under this section. Coverage may be evidenced by a current andvalid certificate of workers’ compensation insurance or certification of self-insurance requiredunder Section 7125 of the Business and Professions Code.

(B) If applicable, the contractor is licensed in accordance with Chapter 9 (commencing withSection 7000) of the Business and Professions Code.

(C) The contractor does not have any delinquent liability to an employee or the state for anyassessment of back wages or related damages, interest, fines, or penalties pursuant to any finaljudgment, order, or determination by a court or any federal, state, or local administrativeagency, including a confirmed arbitration award. However, for purposes of this paragraph, thecontractor shall not be disqualified for any judgment, order, or determination that is underappeal, provided that the contractor has secured the payment of any amount eventually founddue through a bond or other appropriate means.

2

(D) The contractor is not currently debarred under Section 1777.1 or under any other federal orstate law providing for the debarment of contractors from public works.

(E) The contractor has not bid on a public works contract, been listed in a bid proposal, orengaged in the performance of a contract for public works without being lawfully registered inaccordance with this section, within the preceding 12 months or since the effective date of therequirements set forth in subdivision (e), whichever is earlier. If a contractor is found to be inviolation of the requirements of this paragraph, the period of disqualification shall be waived ifboth of the following are true:

(i) The contractor has not previously been found to be in violation of the requirements of thisparagraph within the preceding 12 months.

(ii) The contractor pays an additional nonrefundable penalty registration fee of two thousanddollars ($2,000).

(b) Fees received pursuant to this section shall be deposited in the State Public WorksEnforcement Fund established by Section 1771.3 and shall be used only for the purposesspecified in that section.

(c) A contractor who fails to pay the renewal fee required under paragraph (1) of subdivision (a)on or before the expiration of any prior period of registration shall be prohibited from bidding onor engaging in the performance of any contract for public work until once again registeredpursuant to this section. If the failure to pay the renewal fee was inadvertent, the contractor mayrenew its registration retroactively by paying an additional nonrefundable penalty renewal feeequal to the amount of the renewal fee within 90 days of the due date of the renewal fee.

(d) If, after a body awarding a contract accepts the contractor’s bid or awards the contract, thework covered by the bid or contract is determined to be a public work to which Section 1771applies, either as the result of a determination by the director pursuant to Section 1773.5 or acourt decision, the requirements of this section shall not apply, subject to the followingrequirements:

(1) The body that awarded the contract failed, in the bid specification or in the contractdocuments, to identify as a public work that portion of the work that the determination ordecision subsequently classifies as a public work.

(2) Within 20 days following service of notice on the awarding body of a determination by theDirector of Industrial Relations pursuant to Section 1773.5 or a decision by a court that thecontract was for public work as defined in this chapter, the contractor and any subcontractorsare registered under this section or are replaced by a contractor or subcontractors who areregistered under this section.

(3) The requirements of this section shall apply prospectively only to any subsequent bid, bidproposal, contract, or work performed after the awarding body is served with notice of thedetermination or decision referred to in paragraph (2).

(e) The requirements of this section shall apply to any bid proposal submitted on or after March1, 2015, to any contract for public work, as defined in this chapter, executed on or after April 1,2015, and to any work performed under a contract for public work on or after January 1, 2018,regardless of when the contract for public work was executed.

3

(f) This section does not apply to work performed on a public works project of twenty-five thousand dollars ($25,000) or less when the project is for construction, alteration, demolition, installation, or repair work or to work performed on a public works project of fifteen thousand dollars ($15,000) or less when the project is for maintenance work. (Amended by Stats. 2017, Ch. 28, Sec. 15. (SB 96) Effective June 27, 2017.)

1771. Except for public works projects of one thousand dollars ($1,000) or less, not less than

the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for work of a similar character in the locality in

which the public work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem

wages for holiday and overtime work fixed as provided in this chapter, shall be paid to all

workers employed on public works.

This section is applicable only to work performed under contract, and is not applicable to work carried out by a public agency with its own forces. This section is applicable to contracts let for maintenance work.

(Amended by Stats. 1981, Ch. 449, Sec. 1.)

1771.1. (a) A contractor or subcontractor shall not be qualified to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, subject to the requirements of Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code, or engage in the performance of any contract for public work, as defined in this chapter, unless currently registered and qualified to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5. It is not a violation of this section for an unregistered contractor to submit a bid that is authorized by Section 7029.1 of the Business and Professions Code or by Section 10164 or 20103.5 of the Public Contract Code, provided the contractor is registered to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 at the time the contract is awarded. (b) Notice of the requirement described in subdivision (a) shall be included in all bid invitations and public works contracts, and a bid shall not be accepted nor any contract or subcontract entered into without proof of the contractor or subcontractor’s current registration to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5. (c) An inadvertent error in listing a subcontractor who is not registered pursuant to Section 1725.5 in a bid proposal shall not be grounds for filing a bid protest or grounds for considering the bid nonresponsive, provided that any of the following apply: (1) The subcontractor is registered prior to the bid opening. (2) Within 24 hours after the bid opening, the subcontractor is registered and has paid the penalty registration fee specified in subparagraph (E) of paragraph (2) of subdivision (a) of Section 1725.5. (3) The subcontractor is replaced by another registered subcontractor pursuant to Section 4107 of the Public Contract Code. (d) Failure by a subcontractor to be registered to perform public work as required by subdivision (a) shall be grounds under Section 4107 of the Public Contract Code for the contractor, with the consent of the awarding authority, to substitute a subcontractor who is registered to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 in place of the unregistered subcontractor.

4

(e) The department shall maintain on its Internet Web site a list of contractors who are currentlyregistered to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5.

(f) A contract entered into with any contractor or subcontractor in violation of subdivision (a)shall be subject to cancellation, provided that a contract for public work shall not be unlawful,void, or voidable solely due to the failure of the awarding body, contractor, or any subcontractorto comply with the requirements of Section 1725.5 or this section.

(g) If the Labor Commissioner or his or her designee determines that a contractor orsubcontractor engaged in the performance of any public work contract without having beenregistered in accordance with this section, the contractor or subcontractor shall forfeit, as a civilpenalty to the state, one hundred dollars ($100) for each day of work performed in violation ofthe registration requirement, not to exceed an aggregate penalty of eight thousand dollars($8,000) in addition to any penalty registration fee assessed pursuant to clause (ii) ofsubparagraph (E) of paragraph (2) of subdivision (a) of Section 1725.5.

(h) (1) In addition to, or in lieu of, any other penalty or sanction authorized pursuant to thischapter, a higher tiered public works contractor or subcontractor who is found to have enteredinto a subcontract with an unregistered lower tier subcontractor to perform any public work inviolation of the requirements of Section 1725.5 or this section shall be subject to forfeiture, as acivil penalty to the state, of one hundred dollars ($100) for each day the unregistered lower tiersubcontractor performs work in violation of the registration requirement, not to exceed anaggregate penalty of ten thousand dollars ($10,000).

(2) The Labor Commissioner shall use the same standards specified in subparagraph (A) ofparagraph (2) of subdivision (a) of Section 1775 when determining the severity of the violationand what penalty to assess, and may waive the penalty for a first time violation that wasunintentional and did not hinder the Labor Commissioner’s ability to monitor and enforcecompliance with the requirements of this chapter.

(3) A higher tiered public works contractor or subcontractor shall not be liable for penaltiesassessed pursuant to paragraph (1) if the lower tier subcontractor’s performance is in violationof the requirements of Section 1725.5 due to the revocation of a previously approvedregistration.

(4) A subcontractor shall not be liable for any penalties assessed against a higher tiered publicworks contractor or subcontractor pursuant to paragraph (1). A higher tiered public workscontractor or subcontractor may not require a lower tiered subcontractor to indemnify orotherwise be liable for any penalties pursuant to paragraph (1).

(i) The Labor Commissioner or his or her designee shall issue a civil wage and penaltyassessment, in accordance with the provisions of Section 1741, upon determination of penaltiespursuant to subdivision (g) and subparagraph (B) of paragraph (1) of subdivision (h). Review ofa civil wage and penalty assessment issued under this subdivision may be requested inaccordance with the provisions of Section 1742. The regulations of the Director of IndustrialRelations, which govern proceedings for review of civil wage and penalty assessments and thewithholding of contract payments under Article 1 (commencing with Section 1720) and Article 2(commencing with Section 1770), shall apply.

5

(j) (1) Where a contractor or subcontractor engages in the performance of any public workcontract without having been registered in violation of the requirements of Section 1725.5 or thissection, the Labor Commissioner shall issue and serve a stop order prohibiting the use of theunregistered contractor or the unregistered subcontractor on all public works until theunregistered contractor or unregistered subcontractor is registered. The stop order shall notapply to work by registered contractors or subcontractors on the public work.

(2) A stop order may be personally served upon the contractor or subcontractor by either of thefollowing methods:

(A) Manual delivery of the order to the contractor or subcontractor personally.

(B) Leaving signed copies of the order with the person who is apparently in charge at the site ofthe public work and by thereafter mailing copies of the order by first class mail, postage prepaidto the contractor or subcontractor at the address on file with either of the following:

(i) The Contractors’ State License Board.

(ii) The Secretary of State.

(3) The stop order shall be effective immediately upon service and shall be subject to appeal bythe party contracting with the unregistered contractor or subcontractor, by the unregisteredcontractor or subcontractor, or both. The appeal, hearing, and any further review of the hearingdecision shall be governed by the procedures, time limits, and other requirements specified insubdivision (a) of Section 238.1.

(k) Failure of a contractor or subcontractor, owner, director, officer, or managing agent of thecontractor or subcontractor to observe a stop order issued and served upon him or her pursuantto subdivision (j) is guilty of a misdemeanor punishable by imprisonment in county jail notexceeding 60 days or by a fine not exceeding ten thousand dollars ($10,000), or both.

(l) This section shall apply to any bid proposal submitted on or after March 1, 2015, and anycontract for public work entered into on or after April 1, 2015. This section shall also apply to theperformance of any public work, as defined in this chapter, on or after January 1, 2018,regardless of when the contract for public work was entered.

(m) Penalties received pursuant to this section shall be deposited in the State Public WorksEnforcement Fund established by Section 1771.3 and shall be used only for the purposesspecified in that section.

(n) This section shall not apply to work performed on a public works project of twenty-fivethousand dollars ($25,000) or less when the project is for construction, alteration, demolition,installation, or repair work or to work performed on a public works project of fifteen thousanddollars ($15,000) or less when the project is for maintenance work.(Amended by Stats. 2018, Ch. 455, Sec. 2. (SB 877) Effective September 17, 2018.)

6

1775. (a) (1) The contractor and any subcontractor under the contractor shall, as a penalty to the state or political subdivision on whose behalf the contract is made or awarded, forfeit not more than two hundred dollars ($200) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rates as determined by the director for the work or craft in which the worker is employed for any public work done under the contract by the contractor or, except as provided in subdivision (b), by any subcontractor under the contractor.

(2) (A) The amount of the penalty shall be determined by the Labor Commissioner based onconsideration of both of the following:

(i) Whether the failure of the contractor or subcontractor to pay the correct rate of per diemwages was a good faith mistake and, if so, the error was promptly and voluntarily correctedwhen brought to the attention of the contractor or subcontractor.

(ii) Whether the contractor or subcontractor has a prior record of failing to meet its prevailingwage obligations.

(B) (i) The penalty may not be less than forty dollars ($40) for each calendar day, or portionthereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rate, unless the failure of thecontractor or subcontractor to pay the correct rate of per diem wages was a good faith mistakeand, if so, the error was promptly and voluntarily corrected when brought to the attention of thecontractor or subcontractor.

(ii) The penalty may not be less than eighty dollars ($80) for each calendar day, or portionthereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rate, if the contractor orsubcontractor has been assessed penalties within the previous three years for failing to meet itsprevailing wage obligations on a separate contract, unless those penalties were subsequentlywithdrawn or overturned.

(iii) The penalty may not be less than one hundred twenty dollars ($120) for each calendar day,or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rate, if the LaborCommissioner determines that the violation was willful, as defined in subdivision (c) of Section1777.1.

(C) If the amount due under this section is collected from the contractor or subcontractor, anyoutstanding wage claim under Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 1720) of Part 7 of Division 2against that contractor or subcontractor shall be satisfied before applying that amount to thepenalty imposed on that contractor or subcontractor pursuant to this section.

(D) The determination of the Labor Commissioner as to the amount of the penalty shall bereviewable only for abuse of discretion.

(E) The difference between the prevailing wage rates and the amount paid to each worker foreach calendar day or portion thereof for which each worker was paid less than the prevailingwage rate shall be paid to each worker by the contractor or subcontractor, and the bodyawarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the contract a stipulation that this section willbe complied with.

7

(b) If a worker employed by a subcontractor on a public works project is not paid the general prevailing rate of per diem wages by the subcontractor, the prime contractor of the project is not liable for any penalties under subdivision (a) unless the prime contractor had knowledge of that failure of the subcontractor to pay the specified prevailing rate of wages to those workers or unless the prime contractor fails to comply with all of the following requirements: (1) The contract executed between the contractor and the subcontractor for the performance of work on the public works project shall include a copy of the provisions of this section and Sections 1771, 1776, 1777.5, 1813, and 1815. (2) The contractor shall monitor the payment of the specified general prevailing rate of per diem wages by the subcontractor to the employees, by periodic review of the certified payroll records of the subcontractor. (3) Upon becoming aware of the failure of the subcontractor to pay his or her workers the specified prevailing rate of wages, the contractor shall diligently take corrective action to halt or rectify the failure, including, but not limited to, retaining sufficient funds due the subcontractor for work performed on the public works project. (4) Prior to making final payment to the subcontractor for work performed on the public works project, the contractor shall obtain an affidavit signed under penalty of perjury from the subcontractor that the subcontractor has paid the specified general prevailing rate of per diem wages to his or her employees on the public works project and any amounts due pursuant to Section 1813. (c) The Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall notify the contractor on a public works project within 15 days of the receipt by the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement of a complaint of the failure of a subcontractor on that public works project to pay workers the general prevailing rate of per diem wages. (Amended by Stats. 2011, Ch. 677, Sec. 1. (AB 551) Effective January 1, 2012.)

1776 (a) Each contractor and subcontractor shall keep accurate payroll records, showing the

name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours

worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman,

apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by him or her in connection with the public

work. Each payroll record shall contain or be verified by a written declaration that it is made

under penalty of perjury, stating both of the following:

(1) The information contained in the payroll record is true and correct.

(2) The employer has complied with the requirements of Sections 1771, 1811, and 1815 for any work performed by his or her employees on the public works project.

(b) The payroll records enumerated under subdivision (a) shall be certified and shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal office of the contractor on the following basis:

(1) A certified copy of an employee’s payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to the employee or his or her authorized representative on request.

(2) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to a representative of the body awarding the contract and the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement of the Department of Industrial Relations.

8

(3) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made availableupon request by the public for inspection or for copies thereof. However, a request by the publicshall be made through either the body awarding the contract or the Division of Labor StandardsEnforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided pursuant to paragraph(2), the requesting party shall, prior to being provided the records, reimburse the costs ofpreparation by the contractor, subcontractors, and the entity through which the request wasmade. The public may not be given access to the records at the principal office of thecontractor.

(C) Unless required to be furnished directly to the Labor Commissioner in accordance withparagraph (3) of subdivision (a) of Section 1771.4, the certified payroll records shall be on formsprovided by the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement or shall contain the same informationas the forms provided by the division. The payroll records may consist of printouts of payrolldata that are maintained as computer records, if the printouts contain the same information asthe forms provided by the division and the printouts are verified in the manner specified insubdivision (a).

(d) A contractor or subcontractor shall file a certified copy of the records enumerated insubdivision (a) with the entity that requested the records within 10 days after receipt of a writtenrequest.

(e) Except as provided in subdivision (f), any copy of records made available for inspection ascopies and furnished upon request to the public or any public agency by the awarding body orthe Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated to preventdisclosure of an individual’s name, address, and social security number. The name and addressof the contractor awarded the contract or the subcontractor performing the contract shall not bemarked or obliterated. Any copy of records made available for inspection by, or furnished to, amultiemployer Taft-Hartley trust fund (29 U.S.C. Sec. 186(c)(5)) that requests the records for thepurposes of allocating contributions to participants shall be marked or obliterated only to preventdisclosure of an individual’s full social security number, but shall provide the last four digits ofthe social security number. Any copy of records made available for inspection by, or furnishedto, a joint labor-management committee established pursuant to the federal Labor ManagementCooperation Act of 1978 (29 U.S.C. Sec. 175a) shall be marked or obliterated only to preventdisclosure of an individual’s social security number.

(f) (1) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, agencies that are included in the JointEnforcement Strike Force on the Underground Economy established pursuant to Section 329 ofthe Unemployment Insurance Code and other law enforcement agencies investigating violationsof law shall, upon request, be provided nonredacted copies of certified payroll records. Anycopies of records or certified payroll made available for inspection and furnished upon requestto the public by an agency included in the Joint Enforcement Strike Force on the UndergroundEconomy or to a law enforcement agency investigating a violation of law shall be marked orredacted to prevent disclosure of an individual’s name, address, and social security number.

(2) An employer shall not be liable for damages in a civil action for any reasonable act oromission taken in good faith in compliance with this subdivision.

(g) The contractor shall inform the body awarding the contract of the location of the recordsenumerated under subdivision (a), including the street address, city, and county, and shall,within five working days, provide a notice of a change of location and address.

9

(h) The contractor or subcontractor has 10 days in which to comply, subsequent to receipt of awritten notice requesting the records enumerated in subdivision (a). In the event that thecontractor or subcontractor fails to comply within the 10-day period, he or she shall, as a penaltyto the state or political subdivision on whose behalf the contract is made or awarded, forfeit onehundred dollars ($100) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker, until strictcompliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement,these penalties shall be withheld from progress payments then due. A contractor is not subjectto a penalty assessment pursuant to this section due to the failure of a subcontractor to complywith this section.

(i) The body awarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the contract stipulations toeffectuate this section.

(j) The director shall adopt rules consistent with the California Public Records Act (Chapter 3.5(commencing with Section 6250) of Division 7 of Title 1 of the Government Code) and theInformation Practices Act of 1977 (Title 1.8 (commencing with Section 1798) of Part 4 ofDivision 3 of the Civil Code) governing the release of these records, including the establishmentof reasonable fees to be charged for reproducing copies of records required by this section.(Amended by Stats. 2014, Ch. 28, Sec. 71. (SB 854) Effective June 20, 2014.)

1777.5. (a) (1) This chapter does not prevent the employment upon public works of properly

registered apprentices who are active participants in an approved apprenticeship program.

(2) For purposes of this chapter, “apprenticeship program” means a program under thejurisdiction of the California Apprenticeship Council established pursuant to Section 3070.

(b) (1) Every apprentice employed upon public works shall be paid the prevailing rate of perdiem wages for apprentices in the trade to which he or she is registered and shall be employedonly at the work of the craft or trade to which he or she is registered.

(2) Unless otherwise provided by a collective bargaining agreement, when a contractor requeststhe dispatch of an apprentice pursuant to this section to perform work on a public works projectand requires the apprentice to fill out an application or undergo testing, training, an examination,or other preemployment process as a condition of employment, the apprentice shall be paid forthe time spent on the required preemployment activity, including travel time to and from therequired activity, if any, at the prevailing rate of per diem wages for apprentices in the trade towhich he or she is registered. Unless otherwise provided by a collective bargaining agreement,a contractor is not required to compensate an apprentice for the time spent on preemploymentactivities if the apprentice is required to take a preemployment drug or alcohol test and he orshe fails to pass that test.

(c) Only apprentices, as defined in Section 3077, who are in training under apprenticeshipstandards that have been approved by the Chief of the Division of Apprenticeship Standardsand who are parties to written apprentice agreements under Chapter 4 (commencing withSection 3070) of Division 3 are eligible to be employed at the apprentice wage rate on publicworks. The employment and training of each apprentice shall be in accordance with either of thefollowing:

(1) The apprenticeship standards and apprentice agreements under which he or she is training.

(2) The rules and regulations of the California Apprenticeship Council.

10

(d) If the contractor to whom the contract is awarded by the state or any political subdivision, inperforming any of the work under the contract, employs workers in any apprenticeable craft ortrade, the contractor shall employ apprentices in at least the ratio set forth in this section andmay apply to any apprenticeship program in the craft or trade that can provide apprentices tothe site of the public work for a certificate approving the contractor under the apprenticeshipstandards for the employment and training of apprentices in the area or industry affected.However, the decision of the apprenticeship program to approve or deny a certificate shall besubject to review by the Administrator of Apprenticeship. The apprenticeship program orprograms, upon approving the contractor, shall arrange for the dispatch of apprentices to thecontractor. A contractor covered by an apprenticeship program’s standards shall not be requiredto submit any additional application in order to include additional public works contracts underthat program. “Apprenticeable craft or trade,” as used in this section, means a craft or tradedetermined as an apprenticeable occupation in accordance with rules and regulationsprescribed by the California Apprenticeship Council. As used in this section, “contractor”includes any subcontractor under a contractor who performs any public works not excluded bysubdivision (o).

(e) Before commencing work on a contract for public works, every contractor shall submitcontract award information to an applicable apprenticeship program that can supply apprenticesto the site of the public work. The information submitted shall include an estimate of journeymanhours to be performed under the contract, the number of apprentices proposed to be employed,and the approximate dates the apprentices would be employed. A copy of this information shallalso be submitted to the awarding body, if requested by the awarding body. Within 60 days afterconcluding work on the contract, each contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the awardingbody, if requested, and to the apprenticeship program a verified statement of the journeymanand apprentice hours performed on the contract. The information under this subdivision shall be

public. The apprenticeship programs shall retain this information for 12 months.

(f) The apprenticeship program supplying apprentices to the area of the site of the public workshall ensure equal employment and affirmative action in apprenticeship for women andminorities.

(g) The ratio of work performed by apprentices to journeymen employed in a particular craft ortrade on the public work may be no higher than the ratio stipulated in the apprenticeshipstandards under which the apprenticeship program operates if the contractor agrees to bebound by those stndards. However, except as otherwise provided in this section, in no caseshall the ratio be less than one hour of apprentice work for every five hours of journeyman work.

(h) This ratio of apprentice work to journeyman work shall apply during any day or portion of aday when any journeyman is employed at the jobsite and shall be computed on the basis of thehours worked during the day by journeymen so employed. Any work performed by ajourneyman in excess of eight hours per day or 40 hours per week shall not be used to calculatethe ratio. The contractor shall employ apprentices for the number of hours computed as abovebefore the end of the contract or, in the case of a subcontractor, before the end of thesubcontract. However, the contractor shall endeavor, to the greatest extent possible, to employapprentices during the same time period that the journeymen in the same craft or trade areemployed at the jobsite. When an hourly apprenticeship ratio is not feasible for a particular craftor trade, the Administrator of Apprenticeship, upon application of an apprenticeship program,may order a minimum ratio of not less than one apprentice for each five journeymen in a craft ortrade classification.

11

(i) A contractor covered by this section who has agreed to be covered by an apprenticeshipprogram’s standards upon the issuance of the approval certificate, or who has been previouslyapproved for an apprenticeship program in the craft or trade, shall employ the number ofapprentices or the ratio of apprentices to journeymen stipulated in the applicable apprenticeshipstandards, but in no event less than the 1-to-5 ratio required by subdivision (g).

(j) Upon proper showing by a contractor that he or she employs apprentices in a particular craftor trade in the state on all of his or her contracts on an annual average of not less than one hourof apprentice work for every five hours of labor performed by journeymen, the Administrator ofApprenticeship may grant a certificate exempting the contractor from the 1-to-5 hourly ratio, asset forth in this section for that craft or trade.

(k) An apprenticeship program has the discretion to grant to a participating contractor orcontractor association a certificate, which shall be subject to the approval of the Administrator ofApprenticeship, exempting the contractor from the 1-to-5 ratio set forth in this section when itfinds that any one of the following conditions is met:

(1) Unemployment for the previous three-month period in the area exceeds an average of 15percent.

(2) The number of apprentices in training in the area exceeds a ratio of 1 to 5.

(3) There is a showing that the apprenticeable craft or trade is replacing at least one-thirtieth ofits journeymen annually through apprenticeship training, either on a statewide basis or on alocal basis.

(4) Assignment of an apprentice to any work performed under a public works contract wouldcreate a condition that would jeopardize his or her life or the life, safety, or property of fellowemployees or the public at large, or the specific task to which the apprentice is to be assigned isof a nature that training cannot be provided by a journeyman.

(l) If an exemption is granted pursuant to subdivision (k) to an organization that representscontractors in a specific trade from the 1-to-5 ratio on a local or statewide basis, the membercontractors shall not be required to submit individual applications for approval to local jointapprenticeship committees, if they are already covered by the local apprenticeship standards.

(m) (1) A contractor to whom a contract is awarded, who, in performing any of the work underthe contract, employs journeymen or apprentices in any apprenticeable craft or trade shallcontribute to the California Apprenticeship Council the same amount that the directordetermines is the prevailing amount of apprenticeship training contributions in the area of thepublic works site. A contractor may take as a credit for payments to the council any amountspaid by the contractor to an approved apprenticeship program that can supply apprentices tothe site of the public works project. The contractor may add the amount of the contributions incomputing his or her bid for the contract.

(2) (A) At the conclusion of the 2002–03 fiscal year, and each fiscal year thereafter, theCalifornia Apprenticeship Council shall distribute training contributions received by the councilunder this subdivision, less the expenses of the Department of Industrial Relations foradministering this subdivision, by making grants to approved apprenticeship programs for thepurpose of training apprentices. The grant funds shall be distributed as follows:

12

(i) If there is an approved multiemployer apprenticeship program serving the same craft or trade and geographic area for which the training contributions were made to the council, a grant to that program shall be made. (ii) If there are two or more approved multiemployer apprenticeship programs serving the same craft or trade and county for which the training contributions were made to the council, the grant shall be divided among those programs based on the number of apprentices from that county registered in each program. (iii) All training contributions not distributed under clauses (i) and (ii) shall be used to defray the future expenses of the Department of Industrial Relations for the administration and enforcement of apprenticeship standards and requirements under this code. (B) An apprenticeship program shall only be eligible to receive grant funds pursuant to this subdivision if the apprenticeship program agrees, prior to the receipt of any grant funds, to keep adequate records that document the expenditure of grant funds and to make all records available to the Department of Industrial Relations so that the Department of Industrial Relations is able to verify that grant funds were used solely for training apprentices. For purposes of this subparagraph, adequate records include, but are not limited to, invoices, receipts, and canceled checks that account for the expenditure of grant funds. This subparagraph shall not be deemed to require an apprenticeship program to provide the Department of Industrial Relations with more documentation than is necessary to verify the appropriate expenditure of grant funds made pursuant to this subdivision. (C) The Department of Industrial Relations shall verify that grants made pursuant to this subdivision are used solely to fund training apprentices. If an apprenticeship program is unable to demonstrate how grant funds are expended or if an apprenticeship program is found to be using grant funds for purposes other than training apprentices, then the apprenticeship program shall not be eligible to receive any future grant pursuant to this subdivision and the Department of Industrial Relations may initiate the process to rescind the registration of the apprenticeship program. (3) All training contributions received pursuant to this subdivision shall be deposited in the Apprenticeship Training Contribution Fund, which is hereby created in the State Treasury. Upon appropriation by the Legislature, all moneys in the Apprenticeship Training Contribution Fund shall be used for the purpose of carrying out this subdivision and to pay the expenses of the Department of Industrial Relations. (n) The body awarding the contract shall cause to be inserted in the contract stipulations to effectuate this section. The stipulations shall fix the responsibility of compliance with this section for all apprenticeable occupations with the prime contractor. (o) This section does not apply to contracts of general contractors or to contracts of specialty contractors not bidding for work through a general or prime contractor when the contracts of general contractors or those specialty contractors involve less than thirty thousand dollars ($30,000). (p) An awarding body that implements an approved labor compliance program in accordance with subdivision (b) of Section 1771.5 may, with the approval of the director, assist in the enforcement of this section under the terms and conditions prescribed by the director. (Amended by Stats. 2018, Ch. 704, Sec. 17. (AB 235) Effective September 22, 2018.)

13

1813. The contractor or subcontractor shall, as a penalty to the state or political subdivision on whose behalf the contract is made or awarded, forfeit twenty-five dollars ($25) for each worker employed in the execution of the contract by the respective contractor or subcontractor for each calendar day during which the worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of this article. In awarding any contract for public work, the awarding body shall cause to be inserted in the contract a stipulation to this effect. The awarding body shall take cognizance of all violations of this article committed in the course of the execution of the contract, and shall report them to the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. (Amended (as added by Stats. 1997, Ch. 757, Sec. 6) by Stats. 2002, Ch. 28, Sec. 3. Effective January 1, 2003.)

1815. Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 1810 to 1814, inclusive, of this code, and notwithstanding any stipulation inserted in any contract pursuant to the requirements of said sections, work performed by employees of contractors in excess of 8 hours per day, and 40 hours during any one week, shall be permitted upon public work upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of 8 hours per day at not less than 11/2 times the basic rate of pay. (Amended by Stats. 1963, Ch. 964.)

(Rev. 01/29/2020)S:\PWA Forms\Plans&SpecsPkg

EXCERPTS

FROM PUBLIC

CONTRACT

CODE 9204

1

EXCERPTS FROM PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE 9204

EFFECTIVE DATE JANUARY 1, 2017

Please note section 9204 of the Public Contract Code, set forth in full below. Contractor must follow the contractual dispute resolution process specified in the Ventura County Standard Specifications, which is consistent with section 9204.

* * *

(a) The Legislature finds and declares that it is in the best interests of the state and its citizens to ensurethat all construction business performed on a public works project in the state that is complete and notin dispute is paid in full and in a timely manner.

(b) Notwithstanding any other law, including, but not limited to, Article 7.1 (commencing with Section10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2, Chapter 10 (commencing with Section 19100) of Part 2, and Article 1.5(commencing with Section 20104) of Chapter 1 of Part 3, this section shall apply to any claim by acontractor in connection with a public works project.

(c) For purposes of this section:

(1) “Claim” means a separate demand by a contractor sent by registered mail or certified mail withreturn receipt requested, for one or more of the following:

(A) A time extension, including, without limitation, for relief from damages or penalties for delayassessed by a public entity under a contract for a public works project.

(B) Payment by the public entity of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, thecontractor pursuant to the contract for a public works project and payment for which is not otherwiseexpressly provided or to which the claimant is not otherwise entitled.

(C) Payment of an amount that is disputed by the public entity.

(2) “Contractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9 (commencing withSection 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code who has entered into a direct contractwith a public entity for a public works project.

(3)(A) “Public entity” means, without limitation, except as provided in subparagraph (B), a state agency, department, office, division, bureau, board, or commission, the California State University, the University of California, a city, including a charter city, county, including a charter county, city and county, including a charter city and county, district, special district, public authority, political subdivision, public corporation, or nonprofit transit corporation wholly owned by a public agency and formed to carry out the purposes of the public agency.

(B) “Public entity” shall not include the following:

(i) The Department of Water Resources as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.

(ii) The Department of Transportation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.

2

(iii) The Department of Parks and Recreation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.

(iv) The Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation with respect to any project under its jurisdictionpursuant to Chapter 11 (commencing with Section 7000) of Title 7 of Part 3 of the Penal Code.

(v) The Military Department as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.

(vi) The Department of General Services as to all other projects.

(vii) The High–Speed Rail Authority.

(4) “Public works project” means the erection, construction, alteration, repair, or improvement of anypublic structure, building, road, or other public improvement of any kind.

(5) “Subcontractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9 (commencing withSection 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code who either is in direct contract with acontractor or is a lower tier subcontractor.

(d)(1)(A) Upon receipt of a claim pursuant to this section, the public entity to which the claim applies shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days, shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Upon receipt of a claim, a public entity and a contractor may, by mutual agreement, extend the time period provided in this subdivision.

(B) The claimant shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim.

(C) If the public entity needs approval from its governing body to provide the claimant a writtenstatement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion of the claim, and the governingbody does not meet within the 45 days or within the mutually agreed to extension of time followingreceipt of a claim sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entityshall have up to three days following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the governing body afterthe 45–day period, or extension, expires to provide the claimant a written statement identifying thedisputed portion and the undisputed portion.

(D) Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 daysafter the public entity issues its written statement. If the public entity fails to issue a written statement,paragraph (3) shall apply.

(2)(A) If the claimant disputes the public entity's written response, or if the public entity fails to respond to a claim issued pursuant to this section within the time prescribed, the claimant may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.

(B) Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim orany portion of the claim remains in dispute, the public entity shall provide the claimant a writtenstatement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that isundisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and madewithin 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, asidentified by the contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public

3

entity and the claimant sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and claimant shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures outside this section.

(C) For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including, but not limitedto, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assiststhe parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediationutilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section.

(D) Unless otherwise agreed to by the public entity and the contractor in writing, the mediationconducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under Section 20104.4 to mediateafter litigation has been commenced.

(E) This section does not preclude a public entity from requiring arbitration of disputes under privatearbitration or the Public Works Contract Arbitration Program, if mediation under this section does notresolve the parties' dispute.

(3) Failure by the public entity to respond to a claim from a contractor within the time periods describedin this subdivision or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section shall result in the claimbeing deemed rejected in its entirety. A claim that is denied by reason of the public entity's failure tohave responded to a claim, or its failure to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section, shallnot constitute an adverse finding with regard to the merits of the claim or the responsibility orqualifications of the claimant.

(4) Amounts not paid in a timely manner as required by this section shall bear interest at 7 percent perannum.

(5) If a subcontractor or a lower tier subcontractor lacks legal standing to assert a claim against a publicentity because privity of contract does not exist, the contractor may present to the public entity a claimon behalf of a subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor. A subcontractor may request in writing, eitheron his or her own behalf or on behalf of a lower tier subcontractor, that the contractor present a claimfor work which was performed by the subcontractor or by a lower tier subcontractor on behalf of thesubcontractor. The subcontractor requesting that the claim be presented to the public entity shallfurnish reasonable documentation to support the claim. Within 45 days of receipt of this writtenrequest, the contractor shall notify the subcontractor in writing as to whether the contractor presentedthe claim to the public entity and, if the original contractor did not present the claim, provide thesubcontractor with a statement of the reasons for not having done so.

(e) The text of this section or a summary of it shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for anypublic works project that may give rise to a claim under this section.

(f) A waiver of the rights granted by this section is void and contrary to public policy, provided, however,that (1) upon receipt of a claim, the parties may mutually agree to waive, in writing, mediation andproceed directly to the commencement of a civil action or binding arbitration, as applicable; and (2) a

4

public entity may prescribe reasonable change order, claim, and dispute resolution procedures and requirements in addition to the provisions of this section, so long as the contractual provisions do not conflict with or otherwise impair the timeframes and procedures set forth in this section.

(g) This section applies to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 2017.

(h) Nothing in this section shall impose liability upon a public entity that makes loans or grants availablethrough a competitive application process, for the failure of an awardee to meet its contractualobligations.

(i) This section shall remain in effect only until January 1, 2027, and as of that date is repealed, unless alater enacted statute that is enacted before January 1, 2027, deletes or extends that date.

(Rev. 01/29/2020)

S:\PWA Forms\Plans&SpecsPkg

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISION

SECTION 0 - SSPWC ADOPTION AND MODIFICATION

0-1 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 1

0-2 DELETIONS .................................................................................................................................................... 1

0-3 NUMBERING OF SECTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 1

0-4 ADDITIONS ..................................................................................................................................................... 1

SECTION 1 - TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE AND SYMBOL

1-1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 2

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................... 2

1-3 ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 4 1-3.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................... 4 1-3.2 Common Usage ....................................................................................................................................... 4 1-3.3 Institutions. ............................................................................................................................................... 7 1-3.4 Building Codes. ........................................................................................................................................ 7 1-3.5 Reference Documents. ............................................................................................................................ 7

1-4 UNITS OF MEASURE ..................................................................................................................................... 8 1-4.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................... 8

1-4.1.1 Units for Work....................................................................................................................................... 8 1-4.2 Units of Measure and Their Abbreviations ............................................................................................... 8

1-5 SYMBOLS ......................................................................................................................................................... 8

SECTION 2 - SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORK

2-1 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................. 9 2-1.1 Award of Contract .................................................................................................................................... 9 2-1.2 Notice of Award. ....................................................................................................................................... 9 2-1.3 Execution of Contract Documents. .......................................................................................................... 9 2-1.4 Failure to Execute Documents. ................................................................................................................ 9 2-1.5 Return of Proposal Guarantees. .............................................................................................................. 9

2-2 ASSIGNMENT................................................................................................................................................. 9

2-3 SUBCONTRACTS. ...................................................................................................................................... 10 2-3.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 10

2-3.1.1 Use of Debarred Subcontractors Prohibited. ...................................................................................... 10 2-3.2 Additional Responsibilities. .......................................................................................................................... 10 2-3.3 Status of Subcontractors. ....................................................................................................................... 10

2-3.3.1 Subcontracts. ...................................................................................................................................... 10 2-3.3.2 Contractor Responsible. ..................................................................................................................... 10 2-3.3.3 Specialty Contractors.......................................................................................................................... 11

2-4 CONTRACT BONDS. ................................................................................................................................... 11 2-4.1 Bond Forms. ........................................................................................................................................... 11

2-5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 11 2-5.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 11

2-5.1.1 Specifications Captions. ..................................................................................................................... 11 2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. ..................................................................................................... 12 2-5.3 Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Submittals. ............................................................................. 12

2-5.3.1 General. .............................................................................................................................................. 12 2-5.3.2 Working Drawings. ............................................................................................................................. 12 2-5.3.3 Shop Drawings. .................................................................................................................................. 13 2-5.3.4 Supporting Information ....................................................................................................................... 13

2-5.4 Record Drawings. ................................................................................................................................... 13

2-6 WORK TO BE DONE. .................................................................................................................................. 13 2-6.1 Manufacturer's Recommendations. ....................................................................................................... 13 2-6.2 Testing of Installed Components ............................................................................................................ 13 2-6.3 Training of Agency Personnel ................................................................................................................ 13

2-7 SUBSURFACE DATA. ................................................................................................................................. 14

2-8 RIGHTS-OF-WAY. ....................................................................................................................................... 14

VCSS TC-1 08/25/17

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS 2-9 SURVEYING ................................................................................................................................................ 14

2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers. .................................................................................................................. 14 2-9.2 Survey Service. ...................................................................................................................................... 14

2-9.2.1 Open Areas. ....................................................................................................................................... 14 2-9.2.2 Utilities. ............................................................................................................................................... 14

2-9.3 Contractor's Surveys. ............................................................................................................................. 14 2-9.3.1 Errors in Surveys. ............................................................................................................................... 14

2-9.4 Line and Grade....................................................................................................................................... 14 2-9.5 Quantity Surveys. ................................................................................................................................... 14 2-9.6 Payment for Surveys. ............................................................................................................................. 15

2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER. ................................................................................................ 15 2-10.1 Decisions in Writing................................................................................................................................ 15

2-11 INSPECTION................................................................................................................................................. 15 2-11.1 Permit Inspections. ................................................................................................................................. 15 2-11.2 Structural Observation. ........................................................................................................................... 15

2-12 SPECIAL NOTICES ............................................................................................................................... 15

2-13 AGENCY PERSONNEL AND AUTHORITY ................................................................................................. 15 2-13.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 15 2-13.2 Engineer. ................................................................................................................................................ 16 2-13.3 Department Directors (Public Works Agency). ...................................................................................... 16 2-13.4 Project manager. .................................................................................................................................... 17 2-13.5 Inspector. ............................................................................................................................................... 17 2-13.6 Other Agency Personnel and Consultants. ............................................................................................ 17

2-13.6.1 Materials Engineer. ............................................................................................................................. 17 2-13.6.2 Surveyors & Technicians. ................................................................................................................... 17 2-13.6.3 Other Persons..................................................................................................................................... 17 2-13.6.4 Consultants. ........................................................................................................................................ 17

SECTION 3 - CHANGES IN WORK

3-1 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR ................................................................................... 18 3-1.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 18 3-1.2 Payment for Changes Requested by the Contractor. ............................................................................ 18

3-2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY .................................................................................................. 18 3-2.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 18 3-2.2 Payment for Changes Initiated by the Agency. ...................................................................................... 18

3-2.2.1 Contract Unit Prices. ........................................................................................................................... 18 3-2.2.2 Stipulated Unit Prices. ........................................................................................................................ 18 3-2.2.3 Pricing. ................................................................................................................................................ 18 3-2.2.4 Non-Agreed Prices ............................................................................................................................. 18

3-3 EXTRA WORK .............................................................................................................................................. 18 3-3.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 18 3-3.2 Payment. ................................................................................................................................................ 18

3-3.2.1 General. .............................................................................................................................................. 18 3-3.2.2 Basis for Establishing Costs ............................................................................................................... 19 3-3.2.3 Markup ................................................................................................................................................ 20

3-3.3 Daily Extra Work Reports by Contractor. ............................................................................................... 20

3-4 CHANGED CONDITIONS. ............................................................................................................................ 21

3-5 DISPUTED WORK ....................................................................................................................................... 21

VCSS TC-2 08/25/17

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS

4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................................... 22 4-1.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 22

4-1.1.1 Materials Furnished by Agency. ......................................................................................................... 22 4-1.2 Protection of Work and Materials. .......................................................................................................... 22 4-1.3 Inspection Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 22

4-1.3.1 General. .............................................................................................................................................. 22 4-1.3.2 Inspection of Materials Not Locally Produced. ................................................................................... 22 4-1.3.3 Inspection by the Agency. ................................................................................................................... 23 4-1.3.4 Certificates of Compliance. ................................................................................................................ 23

4-1.4 Tests of Materials. .................................................................................................................................. 23 4-1.5 Certification. ........................................................................................................................................... 23 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals ......................................................................................................................... 23

4-1.6.1 Compatibility with Design. ................................................................................................................... 23 4-1.6.2 Trade Names Listed. .......................................................................................................................... 24

4-1.7 Weighing Equipment. ............................................................................................................................. 24 4-1.8 Calibration of Testing Equipment. .......................................................................................................... 24

SECTION 5 - UTILITIES

5-1 LOCATION. ................................................................................................................................................... 25

5-2 PROTECTION. .............................................................................................................................................. 25

5-3 REMOVAL. .................................................................................................................................................... 25

5-4 RELOCATION. .............................................................................................................................................. 26

5-5 DELAYS. ....................................................................................................................................................... 26 5-5.1 Cooperation During Utility Relocation. ................................................................................................... 26

5-6 COOPERATION. ........................................................................................................................................... 26

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. ....................................................... 27 6-1.1 Beginning of Work. ................................................................................................................................. 28 6-1.2 Starting Work. ........................................................................................................................................ 28 6-1.3 Work Sequence. .................................................................................................................................... 28 6-1.4 Resources Required. ............................................................................................................................. 28

6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK.......................................................................................................................... 28

6-3 SUSPENSION OF WORK ............................................................................................................................ 28 6-3.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 28 6-3.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries. ................................................................................... 29 6-3.3 Temporary Suspension of Work. ........................................................................................................... 29

6-4 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR DEFAULT ........................................................................................ 29

6.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................ 29

6-4.2 Notice to Cure .............................................................................................................................................. 29 6-4.3 Notice of Termination for Default ................................................................................................................. 29 6-4.4 Responsibilities of the Surety ...................................................................................................................... 29 6-4.5 Payment ....................................................................................................................................................... 30

6-5 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT. ................................................................................................................. 30

6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME ....................................................................................................... 30 6-6.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 30 6-6.2 Extensions of Time. ............................................................................................................................... 30 6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor. ......................................................................................................... 30 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. ..................................................................................................................... 31

6-6.4.1 Documentation of Delays. .................................................................................................................. 31

6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION ............................................................................................................................... 31 6-7.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 31 6-7.2 Working Day........................................................................................................................................... 31

6-7.2.1 Holidays. ............................................................................................................................................. 31 6-7.2.2 Landscape Maintenance Period. ........................................................................................................ 32

6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting. ..................................................................................................................... 32 6-7.4 Starting Date for Contract Time and Notice to Proceed. ........................................................................ 32

VCSS TC-3 08/25/17

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS 6-8 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE AND WARRANTY. ................................................................................... 32

6-8.1 Completion and Acceptance. ................................................................................................................. 32 6-8.2 Warranty and Correction......................................................................................................................... 32 6-8.3 No Waiver of Legal Rights. .................................................................................................................... 33 6-8.4 Landscape Maintenance Period. ............................................................................................................ 33 6-8.5 Non-complying Work. ............................................................................................................................. 33 6-8.6 Written Warranties. ................................................................................................................................ 33

6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. ............................................................................................................................ 33

6-10 USE OF IMPROVEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION. ............................................................................... 33 6-10.1 Use of Improvements - Exceptions. ....................................................................................................... 33

6-11 NOTICE OF POTENTIAL CLAIM FOR ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION. .................................................. 34

6-12 DISPUTES AND CLAIMS; PROCEDURE. ................................................................................................... 34 6-12.1 GENERAL. ............................................................................................................................................. 34 6-12.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW. ................................................................................................................. 35 6-12.3 MEDIATION............................................................................................................................................ 35

6-13 CONTRACTOR'S WORK HOURS ............................................................................................................... 36

6-13.1 Working Hours Limitations. .................................................................................................................... 36 6-13.2 Regular Work Schedule. ........................................................................................................................ 36 6-13.3 Exceptions. ............................................................................................................................................. 36

SECTION 7 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

7-1 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES. ..................................................................................... 37 7-1.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 37 7-1.2 Temporary Utility Services ......................................................................................................................... 37 7-1.3 Crushing and Screening Operations ......................................................................................................... 37

7-2 LABOR .......................................................................................................................................................... 37 7-2.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 37

7-2.1.1 Special Qualifications. ........................................................................................................................ 37 7-2.2 Laws. ...................................................................................................................................................... 37

7-2.2.1 Apprentices. ........................................................................................................................................ 37 7-2.2.2 Contractors' Duties Concerning Labor Code Compliance. ................................................................. 37

7-2.3 Payroll Records….……………………………………………………………………………………………….38 7-2.4 Hours of Labor….………………………………………………………………………………………………..38

7-3 INDEPENDENCE OF CONTRACTOR, INDEMNIFICATION AND POLLUTION ........................................ 39 7-3.1 Independence of Contractor. .................................................................................................................. 39 7-3.2 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Clause. .......................................................................................... 39 7-3.3 Contamination and Pollution. ................................................................................................................. 39

7-4 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... 39 7-4.1 Workers' Compensation Insurance. ....................................................................................................... 39

7-4.1.1 Coverage. ........................................................................................................................................... 39 7-4.1.2 Certification. ........................................................................................................................................ 39

7-4.2 Commercial General Liability Insurance ................................................................................................ 40 7-4.2.1 Insurance Classes. ............................................................................................................................. 40 7-4.2.2 Coverage Exceptions. ........................................................................................................................ 40 7-4.2.3 Excess Liability Policies. ..................................................................................................................... 40

7-4.3 Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance ........................................................................................... 40 7-4.4 Property Insurance ................................................................................................................................. 40 7-4.5 Other Insurance Provisions. ................................................................................................................... 40

7-4.5.1 Insurance Company Qualifications. .................................................................................................... 40 7-4.5.2 Primary Coverage…………………………………………………………………………………………….40 7-4.5.3 Aggregate Limits Exceeded…………………………………………………………………………………40

7-4.5.4 Liability in Excess of Limits. ................................................................................................................ 40 7-4.5.5 Additional Insured Endorsements. ...................................................................................................... 40 7-4.5.6 Waiver of Subrogation Rights. ............................................................................................................ 40 7-4.5.7 Cancellation Notice Required. ............................................................................................................ 41 7-4.5.8 Documentation Required. ................................................................................................................... 41

VCSS TC-4 08/25/17

6-12.4 ARBITRATION...................................................................................................................................... 36

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS 7-5 PERMITS. ..................................................................................................................................................... 41

7-5.1 Highway and Railroad Permits. .............................................................................................................. 41 7-5.2 Grading Ordinance ................................................................................................................................. 41

7-5.2.1 General. ........................................................................................................................................... 41 7-5.2.2 Permits Required. ............................................................................................................................... 41 7-5.2.3 Imported and Exported Material. ........................................................................................................ 41 7-5.2.4 Exemptions from Permit. .................................................................................................................... 41

7-5.3 Building Permit. ...................................................................................................................................... 42 7-5.3.1 Agency Furnished Permits. ............................................................................................................... 42 7-5.3.2 Contractor Furnished Permits ........................................................................................................... 42

7-5.4 Coastal Zone Permits ............................................................................................................................. 42 7-5.4.1 Agency Furnished Permits. ................................................................................................................ 42 7-5.4.2 Contractor Furnished Permits. ........................................................................................................... 42

7-6 THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE. ............................................................................................... 42

7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK. ............................................................................................ 42

7-8 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................................... 42 7-8.1 General. ................................................................................................................................................. 42 7-8.2 Air Pollution Control. ............................................................................................................................... 42 7-8.3 Noise Control. ........................................................................................................................................ 42 7-8.4 Storage of Equipment and Materials. ..................................................................................................... 42

7-8.4.1 General. .............................................................................................................................................. 42 7-8.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. ................................................................................................................... 42

7-8.5 Sanitary Sewers. .................................................................................................................................... 43 7-8.5.1 General. .............................................................................................................................................. 43 7-8.5.2 Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan. ................................................................................................... 43 7-8.5.3 Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan. .............................................................................. 43

7-8.6 Water Pollution Control .......................................................................................................................... 43 7-8.6.1 Compliance with NPDES General Construction Permit ..................................................................... 44 7-8.6.2 Compliance with NPDES MS4 Permit. ............................................................................................... 44 7-8.6.3 Plan..................................................................................................................................................... 45 7-8.6.4 Measures. ........................................................................................................................................... 45 7-8.6.5 Monitoring and Reporting ................................................................................................................... 45 7-8.6.6 Dewatering Activities .......................................................................................................................... 45 7-8.6.7 Payment.............................................................................................................................................. 46

7-8.7 Drainage Control. ................................................................................................................................... 46 7-8.8 Final Cleaning. ....................................................................................................................................... 46

7-9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS. ................................................... 47

7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY ...................................................................................................... 47 7-10.1 Access. ...................................................................................................................................................... 47 7-10.2 Traffic Control......................................................................................................................................... 47 7-10.3 Haul Roads. ........................................................................................................................................... 48 7-10.4 Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 48

7-10.4.1 Work Site Safety. ................................................................................................................................ 48 7-10.4.2 Safety Orders ...................................................................................................................................... 48 7-10.4.3 Use of Explosives. .............................................................................................................................. 48 7-10.4.4 Hazardous Substances....................................................................................................................... 49

7-10.4.5 Confined Spaces .................................................................................................................................... 49 7-10.4.5.1 Confined Space Entry Program (CSEP). ........................................................................................ 49 7-10.4.5.2 Permit-Required Confined Spaces ................................................................................................. 49

7-10.5 Security and Protective Devices. ............................................................................................................... 49 7-10.5.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 49 7-10.5.2 Security Fencing ................................................................................................................................ 49 7-10.5.3 Steel Plate Covers. ............................................................................................................................ 50

7-11 PATENT FEES OR ROYALTIES. ................................................................................................................. 50

7-12 ADVERTISING. ............................................................................................................................................. 50

7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. .......................................................................................................................... 50 7-13.1 Mined Material ........................................................................................................................................ 50

7-14 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. .................................................................................................................................. 50

7-15 RECYCLABLE CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTES. ................................................................... 50

7-16 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY. ................................................................................................... 50

7-17 LOSS OR DAMAGE TO THE WORK. .......................................................................................................... 50

7-18 ACTS OF GOD.............................................................................................................................................. 50

VCSS TC-5 08/25/17

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 8 - FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL

8-1 GENERAL. .................................................................................................................................................... 51

8-2 EQUIPMENT FOR FIELD OFFICES. ........................................................................................................... 51

SECTION 9 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

9-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK ................................................................... 52 9-1.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 53 9-1.2 Methods of Measurement. ..................................................................................................................... 53 9-1.3 Certified Weights. ................................................................................................................................... 53 9-1.4 Units of Measurement. ........................................................................................................................... 53

9-2 LUMP SUM BID ITEMS. ............................................................................................................................... 53

9-3 PAYMENT ..................................................................................................................................................... 53 9-3.1 General................................................................................................................................................... 53 9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. ..................................................................................................................... 53

9-3.2.1 Release of Withheld Contract Funds. ................................................................................................. 53 9-3.2.2 Timely Progress Payments. ................................................................................................................ 54

9-3.3 Delivered Materials. ................................................................................................................................ 55 9-3.4 Mobilization ............................................................................................................................................ 55

9-3.4.1 Scope.................................................................................................................................................. 55 9-3.4.2 Payment. ............................................................................................................................................. 56

9-4 TERMINATION OF AGENCY LIABILITY. .................................................................................................... 56

SECTION 10 - DIVERSION, CONTROL AND REMOVAL OF WATER

10-1 DESCRIPTION. ............................................................................................................................................. 57

10-2 REQUIREMENTS. ........................................................................................................................................ 57

10-3 DIVERSION AND CONTROL WORKS. ....................................................................................................... 57

10-4 PAYMENT. .................................................................................................................................................... 57

PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

SECTION 200 - ROCK MATERIALS

200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................... 58 200-1.6 Stone for Riprap ..................................................................................................................................... 58

200-1.6.1A Alternate Stone for Riprap. ........................................................................................................... 58 200-1.6.2 Riprap Size ...................................................................................................................................... 58

SECTION 206 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS

206-3 GRAY IRON AND DUCTILE CASTINGS .................................................................................................. 59 206-3.3.2A Manhole Frame and Cover Sets ......................................................................................................... 59

206-5 METAL RAILINGS. ................................................................................................................................... 59 206-5.2 Flexible Metal Guard Rail Materials. ...................................................................................................... 59

206-5.2A Flexible Metal Guard Rail Materials; Modification............................................................................ 59

SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

210-6 STORM DRAIN HARDWARE. .................................................................................................................. 59

SECTION 211 - SOIL AND AGGREGATE TESTS

211-6 SIEVE ANALYSIS. .................................................................................................................................... 60

211-7 Sand Equivalent Test. ............................................................................................................................. 60

211-8 R-VALUE. .................................................................................................................................................. 60

211-9 SPECIFIC GRAVITY AND ABSORPTION. ............................................................................................... 60

211-10 LOS ANGELES RATTLER TEST. ............................................................................................................ 60

211-11 SOUNDNESS. ........................................................................................................................................... 60

211-12 WET AND DRY LOSS. .............................................................................................................................. 60

211-13 SOLUBILITY. ............................................................................................................................................ 60

211-14 Permeability Test. .................................................................................................................................... 60

VCSS TC-6 08/25/17

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

SECTION 301 - TREATED SOILS, SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS

301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ................................................................................................................... 61 301-1.3 Relative Compaction .............................................................................................................................. 61

301-1.3.1 Firm, Hard and Unyielding. .............................................................................................................. 61 301-1.4 Subgrade Tolerances. ........................................................................................................................ 61

301-2 UNTREATED BASE .................................................................................................................................. 61 301-2.3 Compacting ............................................................................................................................................ 61

301-2.3.1 Tolerances. ...................................................................................................................................... 61

SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING

302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ........................................................................................................ 61 302-5.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 61

302-5.1.1 Asphalt Concrete Berms. ................................................................................................................ 61 302-5.4 Tack Coat ............................................................................................................................................... 61

302-5.4.1 Fog Seal. ......................................................................................................................................... 61 302-5.9 Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................................... 61

302-5.9.1 Measurement and Payment for Asphalt Berm. ............................................................................... 61 302-5.9.2 Measurement and Payment for Fog Seal, Tack Coat, and Prime Coat. ......................................... 61

SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GUTTERS, CROSS GUTTERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS, ................ 62 303-5.1 Requirements ......................................................................................................................................... 62

303-5.1.4 Concrete Substitution. ..................................................................................................................... 62

SECTION 306 - UNDERGROUND CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION

306-1 OPEN TRENCH OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................ 62 306-1.2 Installation of Pipe .................................................................................................................................. 62

306-1.2.1 Bedding ........................................................................................................................................... 62

306-1.2.1.1 Bedding Material. .................................................................................................................. 62

306-1.2.1.2 Sewer Pipe Bedding. ............................................................................................................ 62

306-1.2.1.3 Flexible Pipe Bedding. .......................................................................................................... 62

306-9 DISINFECTION. ........................................................................................................................................ 63

306-10 WATERWORKS APPURTENANCES ....................................................................................................... 63 306-10.1 Valves..................................................................................................................................................... 63 306-10.2 Valve Boxes. .......................................................................................................................................... 63 306-10.3 Thrust Devices. ...................................................................................................................................... 63 306-10.4 Fire Hydrants. ......................................................................................................................................... 63 306-10.5 Fire Hydrant Barricades. ........................................................................................................................ 63

SECTION 310 - PAINTING

310-5 Painting Various Surfaces ...................................................................................................................... 64 310-5.6 Painting Traffic Striping, Pavement Markings, and Curb Markings........................................................ 64

310-5.6.8A Application of Paint - Two Coats ................................................................................................... 64

VCSS TC-7 08/25/17

VENTURA COUNTY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 4

SECTION 400 - ALTERNATE ROCK PRODUCTS,

ASPHALT CONCRETE, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE AND UNTREATED BASE MATERIAL

400-1. Rock Products………...…………………………….………………………………………………………….65 400-1.1 Requirements...….………….…………………………………………………………………………….65 400-1.1.1 General………...…….…….…………………………………………………………………………….65

400-3 Portland Cement Concrete…………………………………………………………………………………….65

400-4 Asphalt Concrete……………………………………………………………………………………………..…65

APPENDICES

APPENDIX A ACCORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE ...................................... 66

APPENDIX B-1 CONSTRUCTION ELEMENT VS. TIME CHART FORM .................................... 67

APPENDIX B-2 WORK COMPLETE VS. TIME CHART FORM ................................................... 68

APPENDIX C-1 CONSTRUCTION ELEMENT VS. TIME CHART SAMPLE ............................... 69

APPENDIX C-2 WORK COMPLETE VS. TIME CHART SAMPLE ............................................... 70

APPENDIX D ESCROW AGREEMENT FORM SAMPLE ......................................................... 71

APPENDIX E BLANK ................................................................................................................. 75

APPENDIX F RELEASE ON CONTRACT FORM ..................................................................... 76

APPENDIX G PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND - SAMPLE SHOWING WORDING .. 77

VCSS TC-8 08/25/17

COUNTY OF VENTURA

PUBLIC WORKS AGENCY

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 0 - SSPWC ADOPTION AND MODIFICATIONS

0-1 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Except as hereinafter provided or as modified by the Special Provisions, the provisions of Parts 2 through 5 of the 2015 edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (referred to as SSPWC), published by BNi Building News, Los Angeles, are part of these Standard Specifications.

0-2 DELETIONS

The following portions of SSPWC are hereby deleted: Part 1 and Sections 200-1.6.2, and 301-1.4.

0-3 NUMBERING OF SECTIONS

The numbering in these modifications is compatible with the numbering in SSPWC. References to whole sections of SSPWC and these modifications are preceded by the word "Section", references to parts of sections show numbers only, such as "211-5", except at the beginning of a sentence, the word "Section" precedes the number. Standard Special Provisions, if included, are numbered as Sections 901 through 999. The Special Provisions are numbered starting with Section 1000 or higher.

Cross-references contained in SSPWC to sections deleted by 0-2 hereof shall be references to the sections of like number contained herein.

0-4 ADDITIONS

The sections that follow, either, replace sections of like number in SSPWC which were deleted in 0-2 above, modify sections of SSPWC, or add material not in SSPWC.

VCSS 1 08/25/17

SECTION 1 - TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE AND SYMBOLS

1-1 GENERAL Unless otherwise stated, the words directed, required, permitted, ordered, instructed, designated, considered necessary, prescribed, approved, acceptable, satisfactory, or words of like meaning, refer to actions, expressions, and prerogatives of the Engineer.

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

Acceptance--The formal written acceptance by the Agency of the Work which has been completed in all respects in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and any Modifications thereof.

Addendum--Written or graphic instrument issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarifies, corrects or changes the bidding or Contract Documents. The term "Addendum" shall include bulletins and all other types of written notices issued to potential bidders prior to opening of Bids.

Agency--The legal entity for which the Work is being performed.

Agreement--See Contract.

Base--A layer of specified material of planned thickness placed immediately below the pavement or surfacing.

Bid--The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work.

Bidder--Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination thereof, submitting a Bid for the Work, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.

Board--The officer or body constituting the awarding authority of the Agency.

Bond--Bid, performance and payment bond or other instrument of security.

Cash Contract--A contract financed by means other than special assessments.

Certificate of Compliance—A written document signed and submitted by a supplier or manufacturer that certifies that the material or assembled material supplied to the Work site conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Change Order--A written order to the Contractor signed by the Agency directing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract time issued after the effective date of the Contract. A Change Order may or may not also be signed by the Contractor.

Code--The terms Government Code, Labor Code, etc. refer to codes of the State of California.

Consultant--A professional engineer, architect, landscape architect or other professional who designed the project or performed other services for the Agency on the project.

Contract--The written agreement between the Agency and the Contractor covering the Work.

Contract Documents--The Contract, Addenda, notice inviting bids, instruction to bidders; Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Contract, the Bonds, permits from jurisdictional regulatory agencies, Special Provisions, Plans, Standard Plans, Standard Specifications, Reference Specifications, Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements.

Contractor--The individual, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other legal entity having a Contract with the Agency to perform the Work. In the case of work being done under permit issued by the Agency, the Permittee shall be construed to be the Contractor. The term "prime contractor" shall mean Contractor.

Contract Price--The total amount of money for which the Contract is awarded.

Contract Unit Price--The amount shown in the Bid for a single unit of an item of work.

County Sealer--The Sealer of Weights and Measures of the county in which the Contract is let.

Days--Days shall mean consecutive calendar days unless otherwise specified.

Daily Extra Work Reports--Reports on Agency furnished forms as required by 3-3.

Disputed Work--Work in which Agency and Contractor are in disagreement.

Due Notice--A written notification, given in due time, of a proposed action where such notification is required by the Contract to be given a specified interval of time (usually 48 hours or two Working Days) prior to the commencement of the contemplated action. Notification may be from Engineer to Contractor or from Contractor to Engineer.

Electrolier--Street light assembly complete, including foundation, standard, luminaire arm, luminaire, etc.

VCSS 2 08/25/17

1-2 DEFINITIONS (Continued)

Engineer--The Director of Public Works Agency acting either directly or through properly authorized agents, such agents acting within the scope of the particular duties delegated to them.

Field Directive--A written communication from the Engineer to the Contractor that does not make any Modification to the Contract Documents. It is used only to answer Contractor's questions and to provide decisions as specified in the Contract Documents.

Geotextile--Synthetic fiber used in civil engineering applications, serving the primary function of separation and filtration.

House Connection Sewer--A sewer, within a public street or right of way, proposed to connect any parcel, lot, or part of a lot with a main line sewer.

House Sewer--A sewer, wholly within private property, proposed to connect any building to a house connection sewer.

Luminaire--The lamp housing including the optical and socket assemblies (and ballast if so specified).

Major Bid Item--A single Contract item constituting 10% or more of the original Contract Price.

Mast Arm--The structural member or bracket, which, when mounted on a Standard, supports the luminaire.

Modification--Includes Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements. A Modification may only be issued after the effective date of the Contract.

Notice of Award--The written notice by the Agency to the successful Bidder stating that upon compliance by it with the required conditions, the Agency will execute the Contract.

Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by the Agency to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract time will start.

Owner--Same meaning as Agency.

Person--Any individual, firm, association, partnership, corporation, trust, joint venture, or other legal entity.

Plans--The drawings, profiles, cross sections, Standard Plans, working drawings, shop drawings, and supplemental drawings, or reproductions thereof, approved by the Engineer, which show the location, character, dimensions, or details of the Work.

Private Contract--Work subject to Agency inspection, control, and approval, involving private funds, not administered by the Agency.

Prompt--The briefest interval of time required for a considered reply, including time required for approval by a governing body.

Proposal--See Bid.

Reference Specifications--Those bulletins, standards, rules, methods of analysis or testing, codes, and specifications of other agencies, engineering societies, or industrial associations referred to in the Contract Documents. These refer to the latest edition, including amendments in effect and published at the time of advertising the project or issuing the permit, unless specifically referred to by edition, volume, or date.

Roadway--The portion of a street reserved for vehicular use.

Service Connection-All or any portion of the conduit cable or duct including meter, between a utility distribution line and an individual consumer

Service Lateral Connection-The interface of the House Connection Sewer with the host pipe.

Sewer--Any conduit intended for the reception and transfer of sewage and fluid industrial waste.

Shop Drawings—Drawings showing details of manufactured or assembled products proposed to be incorporated in the Work.

Special Provisions--Any provisions which supplement or modify the Standard Specifications.

Specifications--Standard Specifications, Reference Specifications, Standard Special Provisions, Special Provisions, and specifications in Change Orders or Supplemental Agreements between the Contractor and the Board.

Standard—The shaft or pole used to support street lighting luminaire, traffic signal heads, mast arms, etc.

Standard Plans--Details of standard structures, devices, or instructions referred to on the Plans or in the Specifications by title or number.

Standard Special Provisions-- Special Provisions prepared in standardized form numbered in the series 401 through 499.

VCSS 3 08/25/17

1-2 DEFINITIONS (Continued)

Standard Specifications--Parts 1 through 6 of this document. See Section 0. References to whole sections will be preceded by the word "Section", references to parts of sections will show numbers only, such as "3-2", except at the beginning of a sentence, the word "Section" precedes the number.

State--The State of California.

State Standard Plans--Standard Plans prepared by State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation.

Stipulated Unit Price--Unit prices established by Agency in the Contract Documents.

Storm Drain--Any conduit and appurtenances intended for the reception and transfer of storm water.

Street--Any road, highway, parkway, freeway, alley, walk or way.

Subbase--A layer of specified material of planned thickness between a base and the subgrade.

Subcontractor--An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.

Subgrade--For roadways, that portion of the roadbed on which pavement, surfacing, base, subbase, or a layer of other material is placed. For structures, the soil prepared to support a structure.

Supervision--Supervision, where used to indicate supervision by the Engineer, shall mean the performance of obligations, and the exercise of rights, specifically imposed upon and granted to the Agency in becoming a party to the Contract. Except as specifically stated herein, supervision by the Agency shall not mean active and direct superintendence of details of the Work.

Supplemental Agreement--A written amendment of the Contract Documents signed by both parties.

Surety--See 2-4.

Utility--Tracks, overhead or underground wires, pipelines, conduits, ducts, or structures, sewers or storm drains owned, operated or maintained in or across a public right of way or private easement.

Work--That which is proposed to be constructed or done under the Contract or permit, including the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services.

Working Day--See 6-7.2 and 6.7.2.1.

Working Drawings—Drawings showing details not shown on the Plans which are required to designed by the Contractor

1-3 ABBREVIATIONS

1-3.1 General. The abbreviations herein, together with others in general use, are applicable to these Standard Specifications and to all other Contract Documents.

All abbreviations and symbols used on Plans for structural steel construction shall conform to those given by the "Manual of Steel Construction" published by the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.

1-3.2 Common Usage Abbreviation Word or Words Abbreviation Word or Words Aban Abandon l Liters Aband Abandoned Lab Laboratory ABS Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene Lat Lateral AC Asphalt Concrete LD Local depression ACP Asbestos cement pipe LED Light Emitting Diode ADA Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990

(Public Law 101-336, 104 Sat. 1990,42 USC 12101-12213 (as amended))

LH Lamp hole

Alt Alternate LL Live load AmerStd American Standard LOL Layout line APC Air Placed Concrete Long Longitudinal ARAM Asphalt Rubber Aggregate Membrane LP Lamp post ARHM Asphalt Rubber Hot Mix LPS Low pressure sodium (Light) AWG American Wire Gage (non-ferrous wire) LS Lump sum B/W Back of wall LTS Lime treated soil BC Beginning of curve m Meters BCR Beginning of curb return Maint Maintenance Bdry Boundary Max Maximum BF Bottom of footing MC Medium curing BM Bench mark MCR Middle of curb return BMPs Best Management Practices Meas Measure BVC Beginning of vertical curve MH Manhole, maintenance hole C&G Curb & Gutter Mil Spec Military specification C&G Curb and gutter Min Minimum CAB Crushed aggregate base Misc Miscellaneous

VCSS 4 08/25/17

Abbreviation Word or Words Abbreviation Word or Words CALOSHA California Occupational Safety and

Health Administration Mon Monument

CALTRANS California Department of Transportation MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet CAP Corrugated aluminum pipe Mult Multiple CB Catch Basin MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices Cb Curb MVL Mercury vapor light CBP Catch Basin Connection Pipe N/A No applicable CBR California Bearing Ratio NRCP Nonreinforced concrete pipe C-C Center to center Obs Obsolete CCFRPM Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass Reinforced

Plastic Mortar oc On center

CCR California Code of Regulations OD Outside diameter CCTV Closed Circuit TV OE Outer edge CF Cubic foot Opp Opposite CF Curb face Orig Original CFR Code of Federal Regulations PAV Pressure Aging Vessel CFS Cubic feet per second PB Pull box CHDPE Corrugated High Density Polyethylene PC Point of curvature CIP Cast iron pipe PCC Point of compound curvature CIPP Cast-in-place pipe PCC Portland cement concrete CIPPC Cast-in-place Concrete Pipe PCVC Point of compound vertical curve CL Clearance, center line PE Polyethylene CLF Chain link fence PG Performance Graded CLSM Controlled Low Strength Material PI Point of intersection CMB Crushed miscellaneous base PL Property line CMC Cement mortar-coated PLI Pounds per linear inch CML Cement mortar-lined PMB Processed miscellaneous base cms Cubic meters per second POC Point on curve CO Cleanout (Sewer) POT Point on tangent Col Column PP Power pole Conc Concrete PRC Point of reverse curve Conn Connection PRCB Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Const Construct, Construction PRVC Point of reverse vertical curve Coord Coordinate PSI Pounds per square inch CQS Cationic Quick-Setting PT Point of tangency CRM Crumb Rubber Modifier PVC Polyvinyl chloride CRS Cationic Rapid-Setting Pvmt Pavement CSEP Confined Space Entry Plan Pvt R/W Private right of way CSP Corrugated steel pipe Q Rate of flow in cms (CFS) CSPA Corrugated steel pipe arch Quad Quadrangle, Quadrant CSS Cationic Slow-Setting R Radius or Resistance value CT California Test R&O Rock and Oil CTB Cement treated base R/W Right of way CV Check valve RA Reclaimed Asphalt or Recycling agent CY Cubic yard RAC Recycled asphalt concrete D Depth, Load of pipe RAP Reclaimed asphalt pavement db Decibels RBAC Rubberized asphalt concrete Dbl Double RC Reinforced concrete or Rapid Curing DF Douglas Fir RCB Reinforced concrete box Dia Diameter RCE Registered civil engineer DIP Ductile iron pipe RCP Reinforced concrete pipe DL Dead load RCV Remote control valve DT Drain tile Ref Reference Dwg Drawing Reinf Reinforced or reinforcement Dwy Appr Driveway approach Res Reservoir Dwy Driveway RGE Registered geotechnical engineer Ea Each RPPCC Reclaimed Plastic Portland Cement Concrete EC End of curve RR Railroad ECR End of curb return RSE Registered structural engineer EF Each face RTE Registered traffic engineer EG Edge of gutter RTFO Rolling Thin Film Oven EGL Energy grade line RW Reclaimed Water El Elevation S Slope ELC Electrolier lighting conduit S/W Sidewalk ELT Extra long ton of slurry SC Slow curing Eng Engineer, Engineering SCCP Steel cylinder concrete pipe EP Edge of pavement SCNs Supplementary Cementitious Materials Esmt Easement SD Storm drain ETB Emulsion treated base SDR Standard dimension ratio

VCSS 5 08/25/17

Abbreviation Word or Words Abbreviation Word or Words EVC End of vertical curve SE Sand Equivalent Exc Excavation Sec Section Exist or Ex Existing SF Square foot Exp Jt Expansion joint SG Specific gravity F & C Frame and cover SI International System of Units (Metric) F & I Furnish and install SLC Service Lateral Connection F/W Face of wall Spec Specifications Fab Fabricate SR Standard ratio FAS Flashing arrow sign SS Sanitary sewer FD Floor drain SSB Select sub-base Fdn Foundation SSP Structural steel plate pipe Fed Spec Federal Specification SSPA Structural steel plate pipe arch FG Finished grade St Hwy State highway FL Flow line Sta Station FS Finished surface Std Standard ft - lb foot – pound Str Gr Straight grade Ftg footing Str Straight FW Face of wall Struc Structural/Structure Ga Gauge SW Sidewalk Galv Galvanized SWD Sidewalk drain GG Gap graded SWPPP Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan GIP Galvanized iron pipe SY Square Yard GL Ground line or grade line T/W Top of wall GM Gas meter Tan Tangent GP Guy pole TC Top of curb Gr Grade TCP Traffic control plan Grtg Grating Tel Telephone GSP Galvanized steel pipe TF Top of footing H High or height Topo Topography HB Hose bib Tr Tract HC House connection Trans Transition HDPE High density Polyethylene TRMAC Tire rubber modified asphalt concrete HDWL Headwall TS Traffic signal or transition structure HGL Hydraulic grade line TSC Traffic signal conduit Hor, Horiz Horizontal TSS Traffic signal standard Hp Horsepower TTC Temporary traffic control HPG High pressure gas TW Top of wall HPS High pressure sodium (Light) Typ Typical HRWRA High Range Water Reducing Admixture U.S. United States Hyd, Hydr Hydraulic U.S.C. United States Code ID Inside diameter USA Underground Service Alert Incl Include, Including Var Varies, Variable Insp Inspection VB Valve box Inv Invert VC Vertical curve IP Iron pipe VCP Vitrified clay pipe J Joules Vert Vertical JC Junction chamber Vol Volume Jct Junction VTCSH Vehicle Traffic Controls Signal Heads JS Junction structure W Width or Wider Jt Joint WATCH Work Area Traffic Control Handbook kg Kilograms WI Wrought iron kPa KiloPascals WM Water meter L Length WPJ Weakened plane joint

WTAT Wet Track Abrasion Test X Conn Cross connection x (as in 2x4) by X-Sec Cross section

VCSS 6 08/25/17

1-3.3 Institutions. Abbreviation Word or Words AAN ...................... American Association of Nurserymen AASHTO ............... American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI ........................ American Concrete Institute AGC ...................... Associated General Contractors of America AISC ..................... American Institute of Steel Construction ANSI ..................... American National Standards Institute API ........................ American Petroleum Institute APWA ................... American Public Works Association AREA .................... American Railway Engineering Association ASHRAE ............... American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME .................... American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM .................... American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA ................... American Wood Preserver's Association AWS ..................... American Welding Society AWWA .................. American Water Works Association CBSC .................... California Building Standards Commission CRSI ..................... Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute EIA ........................ Electronic Industries Association EPA ....................... Environmental Protection Agency ETL ....................... Electrical Testing Laboratories FCC ...................... Federal Communications Commission IAPMO .................. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICC ........................ International Code Council IEEE ...................... Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IMSA ..................... International Municipal Signal Association ITE ........................ Institute of Traffic Engineers NEMA .................... National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA .................... National Fire Protection Association NOAA .................... National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (Department of Commerce) RUS ...................... Rural Utility Service UL ......................... Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USGS .................... United State Geological Survey WFCA ................... Western Fire Chiefs Association

1-3.4 Building Codes. The Ventura County Building Code (VCBC) and Ventura County Fire Code (VCFC) are applicable to the Work. VCBC and VCFC adopt by reference a number of uniform and national codes. Where such codes are referenced directly in the Specifications, such references shall be to the VCBC or VCFC which adopt and modify certain provisions in the referenced codes.

Abbreviation Code Publisher CBC .................. California Building Code ................................................................................... CBSC DBC .................. Uniform Code for Abatement of Dangerous Building ........................................ ICC UBC .................. Uniform Building Code ...................................................................................... ICC UFC .................. Uniform Fire Code ............................................................................................. ICC and WFCA UHC .................. Uniform Housing Code ...................................................................................... ICC UMC .................. Uniform Mechanical Code ................................................................................. IAPMO UPC .................. Uniform Plumbing Code .................................................................................... IAPMO NEC .................. National Electrical Code .................................................................................... NFPA

1-3.5 Reference Documents. Abbreviation DocumentHDM Highway Design Manual, State of California, Department of Transportation, Latest Edition MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices SSP Standard Plans, State of California, Department of Transportation, latest edition SPPWC Standard Plans for Public Works Construction, Latest edition, published by BNi Building News, Los

Angeles, SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (See Section 0-1) SSS Standard Specifications, State of California, Department of Transportation, latest edition VCSS Ventura County Standard Specifications (Division 1, Sections 0 through 10, of which this section is a

part)

VCSS 7 08/25/17

1-4 UNITS OF MEASURE

1-4.1 General. The International System of Units, also referred to as SI or the metric system, is the principal measurement system in these Specifications and shall be used for construction, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. U. S. Standard Measure, also called U. S. Customary System, are included in parenthesis. SI units and U. S. Standard Measure in parenthesis may or may not be exactly equivalent. If U. S. Standard Measures are specified for use in the Contract Documents, then all values used for construction shall be U. S. Standard Measures shown in parentheses. However, certain material Specifications and test requirements contained herein use SI units specifically and conversions to U. S. Measures have not been included in these circumstances. When U. S. Standard Measures are not included in parentheses, the SI units shall control.

Reference is also made to ASTM E 380 for definitions of various units of the SI system and a more extensive set of conversion factors.

1-4.1.1 Units for Work. Where U. S. Standard Measure units are shown on the Plans or are specified,

U. S. Standard Measure shall be used for the Work.

1-4.2 Units of Measure, Equivalents and Abbreviations One U.S. Customary Unit (abbreviation)

Is Equal To # SI Unit

mil (=0.001 in) 25.4 micrometers (µm)

inch (in) 25.4 millimeter (mm)

inch (in) 2.54 centimeter (cm)

foot (ft) 0.3048 meter (m)

yard (yd) 0.9144 meter (m)

mile 1.6093 kilometer (km)

square foot (ft2) 0.0929 square meter (m2)

square yard (yd2) 0.8361 square meter (m2)

cubic foot (ft3) 0.0283 cubic meter (m3)

cubic yard (yd3) 0.7646 cubic meter (m3)

acre (=43,560 ft2) 0.4047 hectare (1ha=10,000m2) (ha)

gallon (gal) 3.7854 Liter (L)

fluid ounce (fl. oz.) 29.5735 milliliter (mL)

pound mass (avoirdupois) (lbs) 0.4536 kilogram (kg)

ounce mass (oz) 0.02835 kilogram (kg)

ounce mass (oz) 28.35 grams (g)

Ton (=2000 lb avoirdupois) 0.9072 Tonne (1 Tonne = 1000 kg)

Poise 0.10 Pascal-second (Pa-s)

centistoke (cs) 1.00 square millimeter/sec. (mm2/s)

pound force (lbf) 4.4482 Newton (N)

pound per square inch (psi) 6.8948 Kilopascal (kPa)

pound force per foot (lbf/ft) 14.594 Newton per meter (N/M)

foot-pound force (ft-lbf) 1.3558 Joules (J)

foot-pound force per second ([ft-lbf]/s) 1.3558 Watt (W) part per million (ppm) 1.00 milligram/liter (mg/L)

Degree Fahrenheit (°F) 0.5555 Degree Celsius (°C)

Temperature: Celsius to Fahrenheit Temperature: Fahrenheit to Celsius

Temperature °F = (1.8 x °C) + 32 Temperature °C = (°F - 32) / 1.8

SI Units Used in Both Systems

Ampere (A) second (s) Candela (cd)

Volt (V) decibel (db) Lumen (lm)

Common Metric Prefixes

kilo (k) 103 milli (m) 10-3 nano (n) 10-9

centi (c) 10-2 micro (µ) 10-6 pico (p) 10-12

1-5 SYMBOLS

º Degree PL Property line % Percent

' Feet or minutes SL Survey line or station line # Number

" Inches or seconds CL Center line / per or of (between words)

∆ Delta, the central angle or angle between tangents ∠ Angle

VCSS 8 08/25/17

SECTION 2 - SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORK

2-1 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

2-1.1 Award of Contract. The right is reserved to waive minor irregularities in the proposals and to reject any or all proposals. The award of the Contract, if it be awarded, will be to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder, determined as provided on the Proposal Form, whose Proposal complies with all the requirements prescribed. Such award, if made, will be made within the number of Days stated in the Proposal form. If the lowest responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract, the Agency may, within 45 additional Days, consider the next lowest Bidder to be the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. The periods of time specified above within which the award of Contract may be made shall be subject to extension for such further period as may be agreed upon in writing by the Bidder concerned. If the Bidder's bid guarantee was in the form of a bid bond, the Bidder shall also submit a statement from the Surety that the bond has been extended for the same period.

Proposals not accompanied by a properly executed Noncollusion Affidavit required by Public Contract Code Section 7106 will be considered nonresponsive and will not be considered for award.

All bids will be compared on the basis of the quantities, amounts and unit prices, or lump sums, as shown on the Bid Proposal.

Before award, the Bidder may be required to furnish acceptable evidence of adequate capability, equipment and financial resources to adequately perform the Work. Bidders found not to be so qualified may have their bids rejected. If reasonable cause exists to believe collusion exists among Bidders, or that prices Bid are unbalanced between Bid items, any or all proposals may be rejected.

Award will not be made to a Bidder who is listed by the State Labor Commissioner as ineligible to bid, work on, or be awarded public works projects.

2-1.2 Notice of Award. Within one Day after award of Contract by the Board, the Bidder to whom Contract is awarded will be notified of award by email and telephone, or if no contact is made by telephone, then by mail. Within three business days after award of Contract, a Notice of Award will be sent, transmitting the Contract Documents to such Bidder for execution. If telephone contact is made, the Bidder may request that the Contract Documents be held in Agency's office to be picked up.

2-1.3 Execution of Contract Documents. On receipt of the Contract Documents, the Bidder shall promptly obtain the required insurance coverage, certificates of insurance, power-of-attorney and Contract bonds, execute the Contract, and transmit all required documents to the Agency.

2-1.4 Failure to Execute Documents. Should the Bidder fail to furnish Agency all required documents, properly executed, prior to the starting day of the Contract time computed as provided in 6-7.4 and stated in the Notice of Award, Agency may thereafter declare the Bidder to be in default and its Proposal guarantee forfeited.

2-1.5 Return of Proposal Guarantees. Within 10 Days after the award of the Contract, Agency will return the Proposal guarantees, other than Bidder's bonds, accompanying such of the proposals as are not to be further considered in making the award. The low and second Bidder's Proposal guarantee will be held until the Contract has been executed, after which all Proposal guarantees, except Bidders' bonds and any guarantees which have been forfeited, will be returned to the respective Bidders whose proposals they accompany.

2-2 ASSIGNMENT. No Contract or portion thereof may be assigned without consent of the Board except that the Contractor may assign money due or which will accrue to it under the Contract. If given written notice, such assignment will be recognized by the Board to the extent permitted by law, but any assignment of money shall be subject to all proper withholdings in favor of the Agency and to all deductions provided for in the Contract. All money withheld, whether assigned or not, shall be subject to being used by the Agency for completion of the Work, should the Contractor be in default.

VCSS 9 08/25/17

2-3 SUBCONTRACTS.

2-3.1 General. Each Bidder shall comply with the Chapter of the Public Contract Code including Sections 4100 through 4113. The following excerpts or summaries of some of the requirements of that Chapter are included below for information.

The Bidder shall set forth in the Bid, as provided in 4104:

"(a) (1) The name, the location of the place of business, and the California contractor license number of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor’s total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor’s total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater.

(2) An inadvertent error in listing the California contractor license number provided pursuant to paragraph (1) shall not be grounds for filing a bid protest or grounds for considering the bid nonresponsive if the corrected contractor’s license number is submitted to the public entity by the prime contractor within 24 hours after the bid opening and provided the corrected contractor’s license number corresponds to the submitted name and location for that subcontractor.”

If the Contractor fails to specify a Subcontractor, or specifies more than one Subcontractor for the same portion of the Work to be performed under the Contract (in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the Contractor's total bid), the Contractor shall be qualified to perform that portion itself, and shall perform that portion itself except as otherwise provided in the Code.

Except as provided in Section 4107, no prime contractor, whose Bid is accepted, shall substitute any person or Subcontractor in place of the Subcontractor listed in the original bid other than for causes and by procedures established in Section 4107.5 which provides procedures to correct a clerical error in the listing of a Subcontractor.

Section 4110 provides that a Contractor violating any of the provisions of the Chapter violates the Contract and the Board may exercise the option either to cancel the Contract or assess the Contractor a penalty in an amount of not more than 10 percent of the subcontract involved, after a public hearing.

2-3.1.1 Use of Debarred Subcontractors Prohibited. The Contractor is prohibited from performing

work using a Subcontractor who is listed by the State Labor Commissioner as ineligible to work on public works

projects.

2-3.2 Additional Responsibilities. The Contractor shall give personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract and shall keep the Work under its control.

Except where the required Contractor's License Class is "B", the Contractor shall perform, with its own organization, Contract work amounting to at least 50 percent of the Contract Price except that any designated “Specialty Items” may be performed by subcontract and the amount of any such “Specialty Items” so performed may be deducted from the Contract Price before computing the amount required to be performed by the Contractor with its own organization. “Specialty Items” will be identified by the Agency in the Bid or Proposal with an "[S]". Where an entire item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the Contract Unit Price. This will be determined from information submitted by the Contractor, and subject to approval by the Engineer.

Before the work of any Subcontractor is started, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a written statement showing the work to be subcontracted giving the name, contractor license number, registration with the Department of Industrial Relations, and business of each Subcontractor and description and value of each portion of work to be subcontracted.

2-3.3 Status of Subcontractors. Subcontractors shall be considered employees of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their work.

2-3.3.1 Subcontracts. The Contractor shall incorporate into all subcontracts, and the Subcontractor shall incorporate into all lower tier subcontracts, all of the Plans and Specifications which are part of the Contract between the Contractor and the Agency.

2-3.3.2 Contractor Responsible. The Contractor is responsible for properly performing and completing all Work required by the Contract whether or not it employs subcontractors for certain portions of the Work. It shall coordinate the sequence and timing of its efforts and that of its subcontractors to insure the proper and timely completion of the Work.

VCSS 10 08/25/17

2-3.3.3 Specialty Contractors. Where a specialty Contractor's license is required by law or by the Specifications in order to perform certain portions of the Work, the Contractor may perform such portion with its own forces if it holds the proper license. Otherwise, it shall employ a properly licensed subcontractor to perform that portion of the Work. Such requirement to employ a subcontractor does not modify the other requirements of 2-3.

2-4 CONTRACT BONDS. Before execution of the Contract by the Agency, the Bidder shall file surety bonds with the Agency to be approved by the Board in the amounts and for the purposes noted below. Bonds issued by a Surety who is listed in the latest version of U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570, who is authorized to issue bonds in California, and whose bonding limitation shown in said circular is sufficient to provide bonds in the amount required by the Contract shall be deemed to be approved unless specifically rejected by the Agency. Bonds from all other sureties shall be accompanied by all of the documents enumerated in Code of Civil Procedure 995.660(a). The Bidder shall pay all bond premiums, costs, and incidentals.

Each bond shall incorporate, by reference, the Contract and be signed by both the Bidder and Surety and the signature of the authorized agent of the Surety shall be notarized.

The Bidder shall provide two good and sufficient surety bonds. The "Payment Bond" (Material and Labor Bond) shall be for not less than 100 percent of the Contract Price, to satisfy claims of material suppliers and mechanics and laborers employed by it on the Work. The bond shall be maintained by the Contractor in full force and effect until the Work is accepted by the Agency, and until all claims for materials and labor are paid, and shall otherwise comply with the Civil Code.

The "Performance Bond" shall be for 100 percent of the Contract Price to guaranty faithful performance of all Work, within the time prescribed, in a manner satisfactory to the Agency, and that all materials and workmanship will be free from original or developed defects. The bond must remain in effect until the end of the warranty period set forth in 6.8-2.

Should any bond become insufficient, the Contractor shall renew the bond within 10 Days after receiving notice from the Agency.

Should any Surety at any time be unsatisfactory to the Board, notice will be given the Contractor to that effect. No further payments shall be deemed due or will be made under the Contract until a new Surety shall qualify and be accepted by the Board.

Changes in the Work, or extensions of time, made pursuant to the Contract, shall in no way release the Contractor or Surety from its obligations. Notice of such changes or extensions shall be waived by the Surety.

2-4.1 Bond Forms. Bonds shall be on forms furnished by Agency.

2-5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

2-5.1 General. The Contractor shall keep at the work site a copy of the Plans and Specifications, to which the Engineer shall have access at all times.

The Plans, Specifications, and other Contract Documents shall govern the Work. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary and cooperative. Anything specified in the Specifications and not shown on the Plans, or shown on the Plans and not specified in the Specifications, shall be as though shown or specified in both.

The Plans shall be supplemented by such working drawings and shop drawings as are necessary to adequately control the Work.

The Contractor shall ascertain the existence of any conditions affecting the cost of the Work through reasonable examination of the work site prior to submitting the Bid..

Existing improvements visible at the work site, for which no specific disposition is made on the Plans, but which interfere with the completion of the Work, shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall, upon discovering any error or omission in the Plans or Specifications, immediately call it to the attention of the Engineer.

2-5.1.1 Specifications Captions. Captions accompanying specification parts, sections and paragraphs are for convenience of reference only and do not limit the content of such part, section or paragraph.

The division of the Plans into parts and the division of the Specifications into divisions and sections are for the ease of reference only and does not imply the division of work between trades or subcontractors.

VCSS 11 08/25/17

2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. If there is a conflict between any of the Contract Documents, the document highest in precedence shall control. The precedence shall be as follows:

1) Permits issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies.2) Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements; whichever occurs last.3) Contract/Agreement.4) Addenda.5) Bid/Proposal.6) Special Provisions.7) Plans.8) Standard Plans.9) Standard Specifications.10) Reference Specifications.

Detail drawings shall take precedence over general drawings.

2-5.3 Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Submittals.

2-5.3.1 General. Submittals shall be provided, at the Contractor’s expense, as required in 2-5.3.2, 2-5.3.3 and 2-5.3.4, when required by the Plans or Special Provisions, or when requested by the Engineer.

Materials shall neither be furnished nor fabricated, nor shall any work for which submittals are required be performed, before the required submittals have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. Neither review nor acceptance of submittals by the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviations were specifically called to the attention of the Engineer in the letter of transmittal. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of the submittals.

The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 20 working days for review of submittals unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal.

2-5.3.2 Working Drawings. Working drawings shall be of a size and scale to clearly show all necessary details.

Six copies and one reproducible shall be submitted. If no revisions are required, 3 of the copies will be returned to the Contractor. If revisions are required, the Engineer will return one copy along with the reproducible for resubmission. Upon acceptance, the Engineer will return 2 of the copies to the Contractor and retain the remaining copies and the reproducible.

Working drawings are required in the following subsections:

TABLE 2-5.3.2 (A)

Item Section Number Title Subject

1 7-8.5.2 Sanitary Sewers Sewage Bypass and Pumping2 7.8.6.3 Water Pollution Control Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 3 7-8.6.6 Water Pollution Control Dewatering Plan 4 7-10.2.2 Work Area Traffic Control Traffic Control Plan 5 7-10.4..2.2 Safety Trench Shoring 6 207-8.4 Joints Vitrified Clay Pipe

7 207-10.2.1 General Fabricated Steel Pipe

8 300-3.2 Cofferdams Structure Excavation & Backfill

9 303-1.6.1 General Falsework

10 303-1.7.1 General Placing Reinforcement

11 303-3.1 General Prestressed Concrete Construction

12 304-1.1.1 Shop Drawings Structural Steel

13 304-1.1.2 Falsework Plans Structural Steel

14 304-2.1 General Metal Hand Railings

15 306-2.1 General Jacking Operations

16 306-3.1 General Tunneling Operations

17 306-3.4 Tunnel Supports Tunneling Operations

18 306-6 Remodeling Existing Sewer Facilities Polyethylene Liner Installation

19 306-8 Microtunneling Microtunneling Operations

Working drawings listed above as Items 4, 5, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 18 shall be prepared by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered by the State of California.

VCSS 12 08/25/17

2-5.3.3 Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are drawings showing details of manufactured or assembled products proposed to be incorporated into the Work. Shop drawings required shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.

2-5.3.4 Supporting Information. Supporting information is information required by the Specifications for the purposes of administration of the Contract, analysis for verification of conformance with the Specifications, the operation and maintenance of a manufactured product or system to be constructed as part of the Work, and other information as may be required by the Engineer. Six copies of the supporting information shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start of the Work unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or directed by the Engineer. Supporting information for systems shall be bound together and include all manufactured items for the system. If resubmittal is not required, three copies will be returned to the Contractor. Supporting information shall consist of the following and is required unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions:

1) List of Subcontractors per 2-3.2.

2) List of Materials per 4-1.4.

3) Certificates of Compliance per 4-1.5.

4) Construction Schedule per 6-1.

5) Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan per 7-8.5.3

6) Confined Space Entry Program per 7-10.4.5.1

7) Lean concrete base mix designs per 200-4

8) Concrete mix designs per 201-1.1.

9) Asphalt concrete mix designs per 203-6.1.

10) Pipeline layout diagrams per 207-2.1

11) Equipment and materials list per 307-1

12) Controller cabinet wiring diagrams per 307-17.2.2

13) Data, including, but not limited to, catalog sheets, manufacturer’s brochures, technical bulletins,specifications, diagrams, product samples, and other information necessary to describe a system, product or item. This information is required for irrigation systems, street lighting systems, and traffic signals, and may also be required for any product, manufactured item, or system.

2-5.4 Record Drawings. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a set of prints in the Engineer's Field Office on which the locations and description of all plumbing, mechanical, and electrical facilities, which were not detailed fully on the Plans, are marked in colored pencil. Such prints shall also indicate any authorized changes from the original Plans. Such prints shall be furnished to the Engineer before final Acceptance of the Work.

2-6 WORK TO BE DONE. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to complete the Contract in a satisfactory manner. Unless otherwise provided, it shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the Work.

All work under the Contract shall be performed in accordance with the highest standards prevailing in the trades unless otherwise specified on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Unless otherwise specified, it is the intent that the Contractor will construct a complete facility ready for use.

2-6.1 Manufacturer's Recommendations. Where the manufacturer of any materials or equipment provides written recommendations or instructions for its use or method of installation (including labels, tags, manuals, or trade literature), such recommendations or instructions shall be complied with except where the Contract Documents specifically require deviations.

2-6.2 Testing of Installed Components. Where the specifications provide that any component of the Work is to be tested, calibrated or adjusted during or after installation, such testing shall be performed by a qualified firm, approved by the Engineer. The firm performing the testing or calibration shall be employed by and paid for by the Contractor.

2-6.3 Training of Agency Personnel. Where the specifications provide for training of Agency personnel in the use or maintenance of any component of the Work, the Contractor shall arrange for and pay for competent personnel to perform the training. Contractor shall schedule the training with the Engineer.

VCSS 13 08/25/17

2-7 SUBSURFACE DATA. All soil and test hole data, groundwater elevations, and soil analyses shown on the Plans or included in the Specifications apply only at the location of the test holes and to the depths shown. Soil test reports for test holes which have been drilled are available for inspection at the office of the Engineer. Additional subsurface exploration may be performed by Bidders or the Contractor at their own expense.

The indicated groundwater elevation is that existing at the date specified in the data. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine and allow for the groundwater elevation on the date the Work is performed. A difference in groundwater elevation between what is shown in soil boring logs and what is actually encountered during construction will not be considered as a basis for Extra Work per 3-3.

Opinions, recommendations or conclusions contained in any soils report, soil boring logs, subsurface materials investigation, geological report or other similar studies, tests or reports, prepared for the Agency, are not a part of the Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for forming its own opinions and conclusions from the facts set forth in such reports.

2-8 RIGHTS-OF-WAY. Rights-of-way, easements or rights-of-entry for the Work will be provided by the Agency. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements, pay for, and assume all responsibility for acquiring, using, and disposing of additional work areas and facilities temporarily required. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Agency harmless from all claims for damages caused by such actions.

2-9 SURVEYING

2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 7 Days before starting work to allow for the preservation of survey monuments, lot stakes (tagged), and bench marks. The Engineer, or the owner at its cost, shall file a Corner Record Form referencing survey monuments subject to disturbance in the Office of the County Surveyor prior to the start of construction and also prior to the completion of construction for the replacement of survey monuments. The Contractor shall not disturb survey monuments, lot stakes (tagged), or bench marks without the consent of the Engineer or the owner on Private Contracts. The Contractor shall bear the expense of replacing any that may be disturbed without permission. Replacement shall be done only under the direction of the Engineer by a Licensed Land Surveyor or a Registered Civil Engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the state.

When a change is made in the finished elevation of the pavement of any roadway in which a permanent survey monument is located, the Contractor shall adjust the monument cover to the new grade within 7 Days of finished paving unless otherwise specified.

2-9.2 Survey Service.The Engineer will set only the horizontal and vertical control survey points shown on the Plans. These will be set prior to the commencement of construction. The Contractor shall preserve these points as well as any other surveys established by the Engineer for use by the Contractor for the duration of their usefulness. If any survey points established by Engineer are lost or disturbed and need to be replaced, such replacement shall be by the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall employ engineers or surveyors to perform adequate surveys and staking necessary to construct the Work to the lines, elevations and grades shown on the Plans and for the Engineer's use in checking such work. Copies of the field notes or diagrams used in setting stakes shall be promptly furnished to the Engineer.

2-9.2.1 Open Areas. Where dimensions are not given on the Plans for parking lots, landscaped areas or graded areas, distances shall be scaled. Unless otherwise indicated, straight grades and smooth vertical curves shall be set between indicated elevations. Finished surfaces shall be sloped to drain in order to eliminate ponding of water.

2-9.2.2 Utilities. Section 5-5.1 requires the Contractor's cooperation during the relocation of utilities, which may require the setting of lines and grades when needed by utility owners performing relocations.

2-9.3 Contractor's Surveys. Surveying by private engineers and surveyors on the Work shall conform to the quality and practice required by the Engineer.

2-9.3.1 Errors in Surveys. The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of all surveys except those performed by the Engineer. To assure that a survey point set by the Engineer has not been disturbed since it was set and that it was accurately set, all surveys by the Contractor shall be based on at least two survey points set by the Engineer or by other governmental surveys, in accordance with good survey practice. Should discrepancies be found between such points, the Engineer shall be notified and construction shall not proceed until the discrepancy has been resolved.

2-9.4 Line and Grade. All Work upon completion shall conform to the lines, elevations, and grades shown on the Plans.

2-9.5 Quantity Surveys. The Engineer will perform all quantity surveys for payment purposes, however, in performing such quantity surveys, it may make use of surveys performed by the Contractor.

VCSS 14 08/25/17

2-9.6 Payment for Surveys. Payment for performing all of the surveying and staking as required by the Specifications and such additional surveying and staking as required by the Contractor will be made at the lump sum price set forth in the Proposal and shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, instruments and materials necessary to perform the Work. If no bid item for surveying is included in the Proposal, the cost of surveying shall be included in the prices bid for other applicable items of work.

2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER. The Board has the final authority in all matters affecting the Work. Within the scope of the Contract, the Engineer has the authority to enforce compliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall promptly comply with instructions from the Engineer or its authorized representative.

On all questions relating to quantities, the acceptability of material, equipment, or work, the execution, progress or sequence of work, and the interpretation of Specifications or drawings, the decision of the Engineer is final and binding, and shall be precedent to any payment under the Contract, unless otherwise ordered by the Board.

2-10.1 Decisions in Writing. Any and all decisions of the Engineer interpreting Specifications or drawings shall be in writing. Any purported "interpretation" which is not in writing shall not be binding upon the Agency and should not be relied upon by the Contractor.

2-11 INSPECTION The Work is subject to inspection and approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer

before noon of the working day before inspection is required. Work shall be done only in the presence of the Engineer, unless otherwise authorized. Any work done without proper inspection will be subject to rejection. The Engineer and any authorized representatives shall at all times have access to the Work during its construction at shops and yards as well as the Work site. The Contractor shall provide every reasonable facility for ascertaining that the materials and workmanship are in accordance with these specifications. Inspection of the Work shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to fulfill all conditions of the Contract.

2-11.1 Permit Inspections. The Contractor shall arrange for code compliance inspections by all agencies issuing permits for the Work. The Work shall not continue beyond mandatory inspection points without clearance from the controlling agency. Each agency involved shall be notified in accordance with the code they enforce or in accordance with their standard operating procedures. No extensions of time will be granted for delays occasioned by such inspections except where, through no fault of the Contractor, the inspection is delayed more than one Day beyond normal response time after proper notification has been given. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that any required inspection record card is signed off before proceeding with the next phase of the Work and completely signed off on completion of the Work.

2-11.2 Structural Observation. When the plans indicate that "Structural Observation" of specific work is required prior to Permit Inspection, Contractor shall notify Engineer, in writing, at least five working days prior to the date Contractor plans to have the work ready for structural observation. If the work is not ready for structural observation on the date indicated, Contractor shall reimburse Agency the cost of structural observer's visit to the Work site. If the work to be observed is substantially complete but is found to need correction before approval by the structural observer, Contractor shall give notice of a new date, as required above.

2-12 SPECIAL NOTICES. When specified in the Specifications or as directed by the Engineer, any notice required to be given in accordance with this subsection shall be in writing, dated, and signed by the Contractor or the Engineer. Such notices shall be served by any of the following methods:

a) Personal delivery with proof of delivery which may be made by declaration under penalty of perjury by anyperson over the age of 18 years. The proof of delivery shall show that delivery was performed in accordance with these provisions. Service shall be effective on the date of delivery. Notices given to the Contractor by personal delivery may be made to the Contractor's authorized representative at the Work site; or

b) Certified mail addressed to the mailing address of the recipient postage prepaid; return receipt requested.Service shall be effective on the date of the receipt of the mailing.

Simultaneously, the Agency may send the same notice by regular mail. If a notice that is sent by certified mail is returned unsigned, then delivery shall be effective pursuant to regular mail, provided the notice that was sent by regular mail is not returned.

2-13 AGENCY PERSONNEL AND AUTHORITY

2-13.1 General. The Board has complete authority for the project within the limits prescribed by law. Pursuant to resolutions duly adopted by the Board, the authority to perform certain functions has been delegated to the Director of Public Works. Agency staff personnel and Consultants delegated thereto by the Director are authorized to perform functions limited as set forth in the following list of personnel and designated duties.

VCSS 15 08/25/17

2-13.2 Engineer. The Director of the Public Works Agency of the County of Ventura is the Engineer and has general authority to administer the Contract. The Engineer has the following specific authority:

(a) To issue Contract Change Orders (CCO) and to settle claims subsequent to Acceptance as follows: Original Contract Amount Maximum Amount of any Change Order or Claim Settlement $50,000 or less ..................................................... $5,000 greater than $50,000 and not over $250,000 ......................................... 10% of the original

Contract amount greater than $250,000 and not over $3,950,000 ...................................... $25,000 plus 5% of the

original Contract cost in excess of $250,000. greater than $3,950,000 ....................................... $210,000

CCOs and claim settlements exceeding the amounts set forth above require Board approval.

(b) To make final adjustments of quantities (FAQ) on unit price items.

(c) To accept the Work when the Contractor has completed all obligations of the Contract, in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents. The Engineer also has authority to make and record the Notice of Completion.

(d) To approve progress and final payments under the Contract, including the provisions for withholding funds.

(e) To determine whether performance on the Work is satisfactory. Satisfactory performance includes compliance with all contract requirements.

(f) To approve the substitution of a Subcontractor, where allowed by law, if the listed Subcontractor does not object when notified.

(g) To suspend the Work for the benefit of the Agency.

(h) In the absence of the Agency Director, a Public Works Agency Department Director, as Deputy Director of Public Works, may exercise the Engineer's authority. Such action will be indicated by "Acting" with the Department Director's signature.

2-13.3 Department Director (Public Works Agency). The Department Director responsible for the project is designated in the Notice to Proceed. The Department Director has the following authority:

(a) To issue Contract Change Orders (CCO) as follows: Original Contract Amount Maximum Amount of any Change Order Less than $500,000 .............................................. $5,000 $500,000 to $1,000,000 ....................................... 1% of Bid Price Greater than $1,000,000 ...................................... $10,000

(b) To issue extensions of Contract time in accordance with the Contract Documents.

(c) To make final adjustment of quantities where the total does not exceed the amounts listed in (a) above.

(d) To approve the substitution of subcontractors, where allowed by law, if the listed Subcontractor does not object when notified.

(e) To determine when the Work has been completed and acknowledge in writing the completion of the Work.

VCSS 16 08/25/17

2-13.4 Project manager. The Project manager responsible for the project is designated in the Notice to Proceed. This person may also be referred to as Project Engineer. The Project manager has the following authority:

(a) To interpret the Plans and Specifications.

(b) To make minor changes in the location or features of the Work where no change in cost is involved. Such changes in cost may not be the net of multiple changes.

(c) To approve substitutes for material and equipment specified by proprietary names when such material and equipment meet the Contract requirements.

(d) To approve shop drawings and submittals.

(e) To issue stop work orders when necessary to enforce the provisions of the Contract.

(f) To make determinations of each Working Day to be charged against the Contract time in accordance with 6-7.3.

(g) To take over a portion of the Work for Agency's use in accordance with 6-10.

(h) To receive all correspondence and other documents from the Contractor.

(i) To inspect the Work and perform Final Inspection subject to review by the Department Director and the Engineer.

2-13.5 Inspector. One or more inspectors will be assigned to the project by the Project manager. Substitutes may be used during absence of the assigned inspector. The Inspector has the following authority subject to review by the Project manager, Department Director and the Engineer:

(a) To view and inspect the Work, sample and test components (at the Work site and at offsite manufacturing locations), and to discuss the Work with the Contractor's field representative.

(b) To determine compliance with the Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents and to issue warnings of noncompliance.

(c) To issue stop work notices in the following two instances only:

1) Where a safety hazard exists that has an immediate potential for serious injury ordeath.

2) Where the operation in progress, if continued for even a short period of time,could be adverse to the Agency's interests.

2-13.6 Other Agency Personnel and Consultants.

2-13.6.1 Materials Engineer. The Materials Engineer is designated in the Notice to Proceed. The Materials Engineer may assign one or more Materials Inspectors to the project.

Materials Inspectors have authority to sample and test material at the Work site and at offsite manufacturing or storage locations. They may furnish available written test results to the Contractor's field representative. At batch plants, they may issue warnings of noncompliance, but stop notices require the signature of the Materials Engineer or Project manager.

2-13.6.2 Surveyors & Technicians. Surveyors and technicians shall have free access to the site to perform their duties but have no authority related to Contract administration.

2-13.6.3 Other Persons. Other Agency personnel who are not involved in construction administration and the general public may be present at the site because it is their present place of work, as client/customers, as visitors, as future users of the facility, or as persons who will maintain the completed facility. Where the facility is to continue in use during construction, work access for Agency workers and client/customers shall be maintained as provided in the Special Provisions. Where the facility (or portion where construction is being performed) is not in use during construction, admittance to the Work site by Agency personnel not involved in construction administration and visitors may be allowed by the Contractor or by the inspector, subject to compliance with safety regulations. Such persons have no authority under the Contract and the Agency is not responsible for their comments, suggestions or directions.

2-13.6.4 Consultants. Consultants hired by the Agency shall have free access to the site to perform their duties but have no authority related to Contract administration, unless such duties are specifically identified in writing to the Contractor. When so identified, Consultant may perform the duties of certain Agency personnel described above.

VCSS 17 08/25/17

SECTION 3 - CHANGES IN WORK

3-1 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR

3-1.1 General. Changes in specified methods of construction may be made at the Contractor's request when approved in writing by the Engineer. Changes in the Plans and Specifications, requested in writing by the Contractor, which do not materially affect the Work and which are not detrimental to the Work or to the interests of the Agency, may be granted by the Board to facilitate the Work, when approved in writing by the Engineer. Nothing herein shall be construed as granting a right to the Contractor to demand acceptance of such changes.

3-1.2 Payment for Changes Requested by the Contractor. If such changes are granted, they shall be made at a reduction in cost or at no additional cost to the Agency. All costs to the Agency in reviewing the proposed change, or testing materials involved therein, shall be paid for by the Contractor, whether or not the change is approved.

3-2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY

3-2.1 General. The Agency may change the Plans, Specifications, character of the Work, or quantity of work, provided the total arithmetic dollar value of all such changes, both additive and deductive, does not exceed 25 percent of the Contract Price. Should it become necessary to exceed this limitation, the change shall be by written Supplemental Agreement between the Contractor and Agency, unless both parties agree to proceed with the change by Change Order.

Change orders shall be in writing and state the dollar value of the change or establish method of payment, any adjustment in Contract time, and, when negotiated prices are involved, shall provide for the Contractor's signature indicating its acceptance.

3-2.2 Payment for Changes Initiated by the Agency.

3-2.2.1 Contract Unit Prices. If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract unit price, and such change does not involve a substantial change in the character of the Work from that shown on the Plans or included in the Specifications, an adjustment in payment will be made based upon the increase or decrease in quantity and the Contract unit price. In the case of such an increase or decrease in a Major Bid Item, the use of this basis for the adjustment of payment will be limited to that portion of the change which, together with all previous changes to that item, is not in excess of 25% of the total cost of such item based on the original quantity and Contract unit price.

If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract unit price, and such change does involve a substantial change in the character of the Work from that shown on the Plans or included in the Specifications, an adjustment in payment will be made in accordance with 3-2.2.3.

Should any Contract item be deleted in its entirety, payment will be made only for actual costs incurred prior to notification of such deletion.

3-2.2.2 Stipulated Unit Prices. Stipulated unit prices are those established by the Agency in the Contract Documents, as distinguished from Contract unit prices submitted by the Contractor. Stipulated unit prices may be used for the adjustment of Contract changes.

3-2.2.3 Pricing. Adjustments in payments for changes other than those set forth in 3-2.2.1 and 3-2.2.2 will be determined by agreement between Contractor and Agency. If unable to reach agreement, the Agency may direct the Contractor to proceed on the basis of Extra Work in accordance with 3-3 or as set forth in 3-2.2.4.

3-2.2.4 Non-Agreed Prices. Agency may issue a change order directing the Contractor to proceed at a price set by the Agency or on the basis of Extra Work. If the Agency sets a price for the work covered by the change order, Contractor is entitled to payment for such work in accordance with 3-3 to the extent payment in accordance with 3-3 exceeds the price set by the Agency.

3-3 EXTRA WORK

3-3.1 General. New or unforeseen work will be classed as "Extra Work" when the Engineer determines that it is not covered by Contract Unit Prices or Stipulated Unit Prices.

3-3.2 Payment.

3-3.2.1 General. When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Agency will pay for the Extra Work based on the accumulation of costs as provided herein.

VCSS 18 08/25/17

3-3.2.2 Basis for Establishing Costs

(a) Labor. The cost of labor will be the current cost for wages prevailing for each craft or type of workers performing the Extra Work at the time the Extra Work is done, plus payment of health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs included in the prevailing rates applicable to the project, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. To the total of these labor costs, the labor surcharge set forth in the current CALTRANS Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates publication shall be applied. The use of a labor classification which would increase the Extra Work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice for the equipment rental. The labor cost for foremen shall be proportioned to all of their assigned work and only that applicable to Extra Work shall be paid. A foreman is defined as a lead working journeyman. Nondirect labor costs including superintendence, payroll taxes, all types of insurance, and all other labor costs, not specifically provided for, shall be considered to be paid for as part of the markup of 3-3.2.3(a)(1).

(b) Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the Work site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight and delivery. The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency.

(c) Tool and Equipment Rental. No payment will be made for the use of tools which have a replacement value of $200 or less. Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used for determining equipment rental costs shall not exceed the following:

(1) For equipment that is listed in the current CALTRANS Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates publication, the rates shown therein. The right of way delay and overtime/multiple shift factors contained therein shall be used as applicable.

(2) For equipment not listed in said CALTRANS publication, the listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies, or distributors, at the time the work is performed.

(3) For equipment rental that includes operators and helpers, the applicable cost from (1) or (2) above, plus the applicable labor costs as determined in accordance with (a) above.

The rental rates paid shall include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals. Necessary loading and transportation costs for equipment used on the Extra Work shall be added to the other costs. If equipment is used intermittently and, when not in use, could be returned to its rental source at less expense to the Agency than holding it at the work site, it shall be returned, unless the Contractor elects to keep it at the work site at no expense to the Agency. All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition, and suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used. Manufacturer's ratings and manufacturer's approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment and it shall be powered by a unit of at least the minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer. The reported rental rates for equipment already at the work site shall be for the duration of its use on the Extra Work, commencing at the time it is first put into actual operation on the Extra Work, plus the time required to move it from its previous site, and move it back to its previous site or to a closer site of next use.

VCSS 19 08/25/17

3-3.2.2 Basis for Establishing Costs (Continued)

(d) Other Items. The Agency may authorize other items which may be required on the Extra Work. Such items include labor, service, material and equipment which are different in their nature from those required for the Work specified in the Contract and which are of a type not ordinarily available from the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Invoices covering all such items in detail shall be submitted with the request for payment.

(e) Invoices. Vendors' invoices for material, equipment rental, and other expenditures, shall be submitted with the request for payment. If the request for payment is not substantiated by invoices or other documentation, the Agency may establish the cost of the item involved at the lowest price which was current at the time of the report.

3-3.2.3 Markup

(a) Work by Contractor. The following percentage shall be added to the Contractor's costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits, and all other cost not specifically provided for: (1) Labor .......................................... 33% (2) Materials ..................................... 15% (3) Equipment Rental ...................... 15% (4) Other Items and Expenditures ... 15%

To the sum of the cost and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding.

(b) Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the Extra Work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost of such work. A markup of 10% on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work and a markup of 5% on work in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work may be added by the Contractor.

3-3.3 Daily Extra Work Reports by Contractor. When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Contractor shall submit a Daily Extra Work Report to the Engineer on forms furnished by the Agency, together with applicable delivery tickets, listing all labor, materials, and equipment involved for that day, and for other services and expenditures when authorized. Failure to submit the Daily Extra Work Report, showing the labor and equipment hours and the quantity of materials used, by the close of the next Working Day may waive any rights for that day. Failure to submit fully completed Daily Extra Work Reports, with the required supporting documentation, within ten calendar days after the Engineer makes a written request for the such reports shall waive all rights for the work covered by the requested reports. An attempt shall be made to reconcile the Daily Extra Work Report daily, and it shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement, pertinent notes shall be entered by each party to explain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed copy of the Daily Extra Work Report. Daily Extra Work Reports by Subcontractors or others shall be submitted through the Contractor.

The Daily Extra Work Report shall: 1) Show names of workers, classifications, and hours worked.2) Describe and list quantities of materials used.3) Show type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including loading and

transportation, if applicable.4) Describe other services and expenditures in such detail as the Agency may require.

In addition to the Daily Extra Work Reports, the Contractor shall furnish Certified Payroll Records for the labor included in the reports before payment will be made.

VCSS 20 08/25/17

3-4 CHANGED CONDITIONS.The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of the following work site conditions, hereinafter called changed conditions, promptly upon their discovery and before they are disturbed:

1) Subsurface or latent physical conditions differing materially from those represented in theContract;

2) Unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarilyencountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the character being performed; and

3) Material differing from that represented in the Contract which the Contractor believes may behazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code that is required tobe removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions ofexisting law.

The Engineer will promptly investigate conditions which appear to be changed conditions. If the Engineer determines that the conditions are changed conditions and that they will materially increase or decrease the costs of any portion of the Work, a Change Order will be issued adjusting the compensation for such portion of the Work in accordance with 3-2.2. If the Engineer determines that conditions are changed conditions and that they will materially affect the performance time, the Contractor, upon submitting a written request, will be granted an extension of time subject to the provisions of 6-6.

If the Engineer determines that the conditions of which it has been notified by the Contractor do not justify an adjustment in compensation, the Contractor will be so notified in writing. This notice will also advise the Contractor of its obligation to notify the Engineer, in writing, if the Contractor disagrees.

Should the Contractor disagree with such determination, it may submit a written notice of potential claim to the Engineer before commencing the disputed work. In the event of such a disagreement, the Contractor shall not be excused on account of that disagreement from any scheduled completion date provided for by the Contract, but shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract. However, the Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by Contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties. The Contractor shall proceed as provided in 3-5.

The Contractor's failure to give notice of changed conditions promptly upon their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith.

3-5 DISPUTED WORK. If the Contractor and the Agency are unable to reach agreement on disputed work, the Agency may direct the Contractor to proceed with the Work. Payment shall be as later determined by mediation or arbitration, if the Agency and the Contractor agree thereto, or as fixed in a court of law.

Although not to be construed as proceeding under Extra Work provisions, the Contractor shall keep and furnish records of disputed work in accordance with 3-3.

VCSS 21 08/25/17

SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS

4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

4-1.1 General. All materials, parts, and equipment furnished by the Contractor in the Work shall be new, high grade, and free from defects. Quality of work shall be in accordance with the generally accepted standards. Material and work quality shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.

Materials and work quality not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications shall be considered defective and will be subject to rejection. Defective work or material, whether in place or not, shall be removed immediately from the site by the Contractor, at its expense, when so directed by the Engineer.

If the Contractor fails to replace any defective or damaged work or material after reasonable notice, the Engineer may cause such work or materials to be replaced. The replacement expense will be deducted from the amount to be paid to the Contractor.

Used or secondhand materials, parts, and equipment may be used only if permitted by the Specifications. 4-1.1.1 Materials Furnished by Agency. Materials furnished by the Agency will be available at

locations designated in the Special Provisions or if not designated in the Special Provisions, they will be delivered to a single location of Agency's choice within the project area. They shall be hauled to the site of installation by the Contractor at its expense, including any necessary loading and unloading that may be involved. The cost of handling and placing materials furnished by the Agency shall be considered as included in the price paid for the Contract item involving such furnished materials.

The Contractor will be held responsible for all materials furnished to it, and it shall pay all demurrage and storage charges. Furnished materials, after delivery to Contractor, lost or damaged from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor will be liable to the Agency for the cost of replacing lost or damaged furnished material and such costs may be deducted from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.

4-1.2 Protection of Work and Materials. The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage facilities and employ such measures as will preserve the specified quality and fitness of materials to be used in the Work. Stored materials shall be reasonably accessible for inspection. The Contractor shall also adequately protect new and existing work and all items of equipment for the duration of the Contract.

The Contractor shall not, without the Agency's consent, assign, sell, mortgage, hypothecate, or remove equipment or materials which have been installed or delivered and which may be necessary for the completion of the Contract.

4-1.3 Inspection Requirements

4-1.3.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, inspection is required at the source for asphalt concrete pavement mixtures, structural concrete, metal fabrication, metal casting, welding, concrete pipe manufacture, protective coating application, and similar shop or plant operations. Steel pipe in sizes less than 450 mm (18 inches), vitrified clay and cast iron pipe in all sizes are acceptable upon certification as to compliance with the Specifications, subject to sampling and testing by the Agency. Standard items of equipment such as electric motors, conveyors, elevators, plumbing fixtures, etc., are subject to inspection at the Work site only. Special items of equipment such as designed electrical panel boards, large pumps, sewage plant equipment, etc., are subject to inspection at the source, normally only for performance testing. The Specifications may require inspection at the source for other items not typical of those listed in this section.

4-1.3.2 Inspection of Materials Not Locally Produced. When the Contractor intends to purchase materials, fabricated products, or equipment from sources located more than 80 km (50 miles) outside the geographical limits of the Agency, an inspector or accredited testing laboratory (approved by the Engineer), shall be engaged by the Contractor at its expense, to inspect the materials, equipment or process. This approval shall be obtained before producing any material or equipment. The inspector or representative of the testing laboratory shall evaluate the materials for conformance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall forward reports required by the Engineer. No materials or equipment shall be shipped nor shall any processing, fabrication or treatment of such materials be done without proper inspection by the approved agent. Approval by said agent shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the Contract requirements.

VCSS 22 08/25/17

4-1.3.3 Inspection by the Agency. The Agency will provide all inspection and testing laboratory services within 80 km (50 miles) of the geographical limits of the Agency.

4-1.3.4 Certificates of Compliance. The Engineer may require certificates of compliance with the Specifications for materials or manufactured items produced outside of the Work site. Such certificates will not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of providing material and manufactured items complying with the Specifications even though they have been incorporated into the Work.

4-1.4 Tests of Materials. Before incorporation in the Work, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials, as the Engineer may require, at no cost to the Agency. The Contractor, at its own expense, shall deliver the materials for testing to the place and at the time designated by the Engineer. Unless otherwise provided, all initial testing and a reasonable amount of retesting shall be performed under the direction of the Engineer, and at no expense to the Contractor. If the Contractor is to provide and pay for testing, the Specifications will so state.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, at least 15 Days in advance, of its intention to use materials for which tests are specified, to allow sufficient time to perform the tests. The notice shall name the proposed supplier and source of material.

If the notice of intent to use is sent before the materials are available for testing or inspection, or is sent so far in advance that the materials on hand at the time will not last but will be replaced by a new lot prior to use on the Work, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to re-notify the Engineer when samples which are representative may be obtained.

4-1.5 Certification. The Engineer may waive materials testing requirements of the Specifications and accept the manufacturer's written certification that the materials to be supplied meet those requirements. Materials test data may be required as part of the certification.

4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. The Contractor may supply any of the materials specified or offer an equivalent. The Engineer shall determine whether the material offered is equivalent to that specified. Adequate time shall be allowed for the Engineer to make this determination.

Whenever any particular material, process, or equipment is indicated by patent, proprietary or brand name, or by name of manufacturer, such wording is used for the purpose of facilitating its description and shall be deemed

to be followed by the words or equal. A listing of materials is not intended to be comprehensive, or in order of preference. The Contractor may offer any material, process, or equipment considered to be equivalent to that indicated. The substantiation of offers shall be submitted as provided in the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish data concerning items offered by it as equivalent to those specified. The Contractor shall have the material tested as required by the Engineer to determine that the quality, strength, physical, chemical, or other characteristics, including durability, finish, efficiency, dimensions, service, and suitability are such that the item will fulfill its intended function.

Test methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Test results shall be reported promptly to the Engineer, who will evaluate the results and determine if the substitute item is equivalent. The Engineer’s findings shall be final. Installation and use of a substitute item shall not be made until approved by the Engineer.

If a substitute offered by the Contractor is not found to be equal to the specified material, the Contractor shall furnish and install the specified material.

The specified Contract completion time shall not be affected by any circumstance developing from the provisions of this section.

4-1.6.1 Compatibility with Design. Where the size, configuration, weight, fastening locations, fastening strength, utility rough-in locations, and utility capacities of equipment or devices offered by the Contractor as equivalents do not conform to those provided for in the Contract Documents or those which are necessary for equipment or devices indicated by brand names, the Contractor shall bear all costs of redesign and changes in construction necessary to adapt the offered equipment or device to the Work.

Equipment or devices will not be considered "equal" where the life cycle cost of operation, utilities and maintenance of the offered alternate is greater than those listed by brand names. Life cycle costs shall mean utility charges (demand and usage charges), maintenance, operating personnel and replacement (equipment, installation and down time expenses) all reduced to an average annual rate using the current interest rate earned on funds invested by the County Treasurer.

VCSS 23 08/25/17

4-1.6.2 Trade Names Listed. Where the Agency has listed products by brand or trade name on the Plans or in the Specifications, or both, this shall not be construed as meaning every product may be used without furnishing shop drawings, without redesign of the facility or without a change in utility rough-in requirements.

Where use of products listed on the Plans or in the Specifications, or both, or where use of a substitute proposed as an "equal" product requires shop drawings, redesign of the facility, or revisions in the size and location of rough-in utility connections, or in connecting work, the Contractor shall provide any necessary shop drawings, or shall cause the preparation of any necessary redesign or revisions to the Plans at its own expense and shall bear the full cost of any necessary additional construction or reconstruction work. No work described in shop drawings, a redesign, or a revision to the Plans shall be undertaken until such shop drawings, redesign, or revisions have been approved by the Engineer. Any proposed redesign or revision to the Plans shall be accompanied by complete computations and details prepared by an appropriate licensed design professional.

4-1.7 Weighing Equipment. All scales used for proportioning materials shall be inspected for accuracy and certified within the past 12 months by the State of California Bureau of Weights and Measures, by the County Director or Sealer of Weights and Measures, or by a scale mechanic registered with or licensed by the County.

The accuracy of the work of a scale service agency, except as stated herein, shall meet the standards of the California Business and Professions Code and the California Code of Regulations pertaining to weighing devices. A certificate of compliance shall be presented, prior to operation, to the Engineer for approval and shall be renewed whenever required by the Engineer at no cost to the Agency.

All scales shall be arranged so they may be read easily from the operator's platform or area. They shall indicate the true net weight without the application of any factor. The figures of the scales shall be clearly legible. Scales shall be accurate to within 1 percent when tested with the plant shut down. Weighing equipment shall be so insulated against vibration or moving of other operating equipment in the plant area that the error in weighing with the entire plant running will not exceed 2 percent for any setting nor 1.5 percent for any batch.

4-1.8 Calibration of Testing Equipment. Testing equipment, such as, but not limited to, pressure gages, metering devices, hydraulic systems, force (load) measuring instruments, and strain-measuring devices shall be calibrated by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer at intervals not to exceed 12 months and following repairs, modification, or relocation of the equipment. Calibration certificates shall be provided when requested by the Engineer.

VCSS 24 08/25/17

SECTION 5 - UTILITIES

5-1 LOCATION. The Permittee (in the case of Private Contracts) and the Agency (in the case of Cash or Assessment Act Contracts), will search known substructure records and furnish the Contractor with copies of documents which describe the location of utility substructures, or will indicate on the Plans for the project those substructures (except for service connections) which may affect the Work. Information regarding removal, relocation, abandonment, or installation of new utilities will be furnished to prospective bidders.

Where underground main distribution conduits such as water, gas, sewer, electric power, telephone, or cable television are shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall assume that every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility.

As provided in Section 4216 of the California Government Code, at least 2 working days prior to commencing any excavation, the Contractor shall contact the regional notification center (Underground Service Alert of Southern California) and obtain an inquiry identification number.

The California Department of Transportation is not required by Section 4216 to become a member of the regional notification center. The Contractor shall contact it for location of its subsurface installations.

The Contractor shall determine the location and depth of all utilities, including service connections, which have been marked by the respective owners and which may affect or be affected by its operations. If no pay item is provided in the Contract for this work, full compensation for such work shall be considered as included in the prices bid for other items of work.

5-2 PROTECTION. The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support of any utility without authority from the owner or order from the Agency. All valves, switches, vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff.

Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in accordance with 5-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided, furnish and place the necessary protection at its expense.

Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from or shown incorrectly on the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the Engineer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for as provided in 3-2.2.3 or 3-3.

The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the utility owner if any utility is disturbed or damaged. The Contractor shall bear the costs of repair or replacement of any utility damaged if located as noted in 5-1.

When placing concrete around or contiguous to any non-metallic utility installation, the Contractor shall at its expense:

1. Furnish and install a 50 mm (2 inch) cushion of expansion joint material or other similar resilientmaterial; or

2. Provide a sleeve or other opening which will result in a 50 mm (2 inch) minimum-clear annular spacebetween the concrete and the utility; or

3. Provide other acceptable means to prevent embedment in or bonding to the concrete.

Where concrete is used for backfill or for structures which would result in embedment, or partial embedment, of a metallic utility installation; or where the coating, bedding or other cathodic protection system is exposed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and arrange to secure the advice of the affected utility owner regarding the procedures required to maintain or restore the integrity of the system.

5-3 REMOVAL. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall remove all interfering portions of utilities shown on the Plans or indicated in the Bid documents as “abandoned” or “to be abandoned in place”. Before starting removal operations, the Contractor shall ascertain from the Agency whether the abandonment is complete, and the costs involved in the removal and disposal shall be included in the Bid for the items of work necessitating such removals.

VCSS 25 08/25/17

5-4 RELOCATION. When feasible, the owners responsible for utilities within the area affected by the Work will complete their necessary installations, relocations, repairs, or replacements before commencement of work by the Contractor. When the Plans or Specifications indicate that a utility installation is to be relocated, altered, or constructed by others, the Agency will conduct all negotiations with the owners and work will be done at no cost to the Contractor, except as provided in 301-1.6. Utilities which are relocated in order to avoid interference shall be protected in their position and the cost of such protection shall be included in the Bid for the items of work necessitating such relocation.

After award of the Contract, portions of utilities which are found to interfere with the Work will be relocated, altered or reconstructed by the owners, or the Engineer may order changes in the Work to avoid interference. Such changes will be paid for in accordance with 3-2.

When the Plans or Specifications provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a utility, all costs for such work shall be included in the Bid for the items of work necessitating such work. Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its convenience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs.

The utility owner will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or within temporary construction or slope easements. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for the relocation of service connections as necessary between the meter and property line, or between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. The relocation of such service connections will be paid for in accordance with provisions of 3-3. Payment will include the restoration of all existing improvements which may be affected thereby. The Contractor may agree with the owner of any utility to disconnect and reconnect interfering service connections. The Agency will not be involved in any such agreement.

5-5 DELAYS. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its construction schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. Said notification shall be included as a part of the construction schedule required in 6-1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the construction schedule which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities.

The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed in accordance with 5-1.

The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably protracted interference by utilities in performing work correctly shown on the Plans.

The Agency will assume responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by failure of Agency to provide for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities.

If the Contractor sustains loss due to delays attributable to interferences, relocations, or alterations not covered by 5-1, which could not have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant, there shall be paid to the Contractor such amount as the Engineer may find to be fair and reasonable compensation for such part of the Contractor’s actual loss as was unavoidable and the Contractor may be granted an extension of time.

5-5.1 Cooperation During Utility Relocation. When utilities are to be relocated during construction, the Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the respective utility owners so they may relocate their facilities to clear the Work. Delays in relocation of utilities which result from failure to cooperate and coordinate will not be a cause for an extension of time or Non-Working Days.

5-6 COOPERATION. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work site and provide time for utility work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work.

VCSS 26 08/25/17

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. The requirements of this section concerning submission of construction schedules shall not apply to projects where the time allowed to complete the Work is less than 25 Working Days or the total Contract Price bid is less than $75,000 unless required by the special provisions.

The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule concurrently with the submittal of signed Contract, Contract bonds, and certificate of insurance. The Notice to Proceed will be delayed until the schedule is received. See 6-7.4, Starting of Contract Time.

When required by the Special Provisions, a revised schedule shall be submitted monthly prior to each progress payment closure date. Processing of the progress payment will be delayed until such revised schedule complying with this section is received.

The construction schedule shall be in the form of a Construction Element vs. Time Chart as shown in Appendix B-1and a Work Complete vs. Time Chart as shown in Appendix B-2.

The B-1 Chart shall be in sufficient detail to show the chronological relationship of all activities of the project including, but not limited to, estimated starting and completion dates of various activities, submittal of shop drawings to the Engineer for approval, procurement of materials, and scheduling of equipment. The B-1 Chart shall recognize the requirements of 5-5. The B-1 Chart shall reflect obtaining all materials and completing all Work under the Contract within the specified time and in accordance with these Specifications. If the Contractor intends to complete the Work prior to the time for completion, the intended date of completion shall be set forth in the B-1 Chart and the Contractor shall execute a Contract Change Order that changes the number of Working Days allowed for completion to conform with such intended completion date. The Change Order shall not change the Contract Price.

The Contractor may submit a computer generated schedule in lieu of the form in Appendix B-1 and B-2, provided all of the elements shown on that form or specified herein are included.

An updated construction schedule shall be submitted prior to the next progress payment closure date whenever the actual percent Work complete versus percent time elapsed curve falls below and to the right of the dotted line shown on Appendix B-2.

If the Contractor desires to make a major change in its method of operations after commencing construction, or if its schedule fails to reflect the actual progress, it shall submit to the Agency a revised construction schedule in advance of beginning revised operations.

Revised and updated schedules shall show actual completion to the date of the revision in the lower segmented bar for each item.

The construction schedule shall be prepared as follows (see examples in Appendices C-1 and C-2): 1. On theB-1 Chart:

a Enter the project name and Specification No. as shown on the notice inviting bids and the Contractorsname.

b. List the items of Work either individually or combined where items are part of the same element of theWork.

c. Assign a value for each horizontal space plotting interval in Working Days as follows: 1 working day fortotal Contract time of less than 100 working days, 2 for 100 to 200 working days and 5 for longer projects.Enter the value used in the space provided in the lower part of the form.

d. At the end of performance time and draw a vertical line and label it "End Performance Time".Enter numbers at 10 times the plotting interval at the top of intermediate vertical lines.

e. Shade in a bar in the upper segmented section for each work item to indicate the period during whichWork will be performed. Move-in time and delivery time for materials shall be shown if significant to theschedule.

VCSS 27 08/25/17

6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. (Continued) 2. On the B-2 Chart:

a. Enter the project name and Specification No. as shown on the notice inviting bids.b. At time intervals of 10 or 20 working days:

(1) Compute the cumulative dollar value of Work which is expected to be completed for each item ofWork, including the value of the completed portion of lump-sum items.

(2) Divide the values computed in "b(1)" by the Total Contract Price to determine the percentage of the entire Contract planned for completion at the end of each time interval.

(3) Divide the days of performance time at the end of each time interval by the total Contract performance time to obtain the percentage of elapsed performance time.

c. Plot each percentage of completion value figure computed in "b(2)" against the corresponding percentageof completion time computed in "b(3)" using scales on the bottom and left side of chart.

d. Connect points plotted in "c" with a line which will show the planned progress for the entire job.

If the proposed percent Work complete versus percent time elapsed line falls below and to the right of the dotted line drawn on the B-2 Chart, the Contractor shall provide sufficient information and backup to show that the Work can be completed on time.

6-1.1 Beginning of Work. The issuance of Notice to Proceed by Agency shall constitute the Contractor's authority to enter upon the site of the Work and to begin operations provided it has also notified Engineer at least 24 hours in advance. Entry upon the site without authority will be treated as trespassing.

6-1.2 Starting Work. The Contractor may start work at any time after the Notice to Proceed is issued but work shall begin within 15 Days after the starting date for the Contract, or at such other time as may be indicated in the Special Provisions. The actual date on which the Contractor starts work will not affect the required time for completion as provided for in 6-7 and 6-7.1.

6-1.3 Work Sequence. If required by the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall start construction operations on that part of the Work designated by the Engineer.

6-1.4 Resources Required. The Work shall be conducted in such a manner and with sufficient materials, equipment, and labor to insure its completion in accordance with the Plans and Specifications within the time set forth in the Contract.

6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK.To minimize public inconvenience and possible hazard and to restore streets and other Work areas to their original condition and former state of usefulness as soon as practicable, the Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work to completion. If, in the Engineer's opinion, the Contractor fails to prosecute the Work to the extent that the above purposes are not being accomplished, the Contractor shall, upon orders from the Engineer, immediately take the steps necessary to fully accomplish said purposes. All costs of prosecuting the Work as described herein shall be absorbed in the Contractor's bid. Should the Contractor fail to take the necessary steps to fully accomplish said purposes, after orders of the Engineer to do so, the Engineer may suspend the Work in whole or in part, until the Contractor takes said steps.

As soon as possible under the provisions of these Specifications, the Contractor shall backfill all excavations and restore to usefulness all improvements existing prior to the start of the Work.

If Work is suspended through no fault of the Agency, all expenses and losses incurred by the Contractor during such suspensions shall be borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to properly provide for public safety, traffic, and protection of the Work during periods of suspension, the Agency may elect to do so, and deduct the cost thereof from monies due the Contractor. Such action will not relieve the Contractor from liability.

6-3 SUSPENSION OF WORK

6-3.1 General. The Work may be suspended in whole or in part when determined by the Engineer that the suspension is necessary in the interest of the Agency. The Contractor shall comply immediately with any written order of the Engineer. Such suspension shall be without liability to the Contractor on the part of the Agency except as otherwise specified in 6-6.3.

VCSS 28 08/25/17

6-3.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries. If discovery is made of items of archaeological or paleontological interest, the Contractor shall immediately cease excavation in the area of discovery and shall not continue until ordered by the Engineer. When resumed, excavation operations within the area of discovery shall be as directed by the Engineer.

Discoveries which may be encountered may include, but not be limited to, dwelling sites, stone implements or other artifacts, animal bones, human bones and fossils.

The Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time and compensation in accordance with the provisions of 6-6.

6-3.3 Temporary Suspension of Work. Should suspension of Work be ordered by reason of the failure of the Contractor to carry out orders or to perform any provisions of the Contract; or by reason of weather conditions being unsuitable for performing any item or items of Work; the Contractor, at its expense, shall do all the work necessary to provide a safe, smooth, and unobstructed passageway through construction for use by public traffic during the period of such suspension. In the event that the Contractor fails to perform the work above specified, the Agency may perform such work and the cost thereof will be deducted from monies due or to become due the Contractor.

If the Engineer orders a suspension of all of the Work, or a portion of the Work which is the current controlling operation or operations, due to unsuitable weather or to such other conditions as are considered unfavorable to the suitable prosecution of the Work, the days on which the suspension is in effect shall not be considered Working Days.

If a portion of Work at the time of such suspension is not a current controlling operation or operations, but subsequently does become the current controlling operation or operations, the determination of Working Days will be made on the basis of the then current controlling operation or operations.

If a suspension of Work is ordered by the Engineer due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any provision of the Contract, the Days on which the suspension order is in effect shall be considered Working Days if such days are Working Days as defined.

6-4 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR DEFAULT..

6.4.1 General. If, prior to the acceptance of the Work, the Contractor: a) becomes insolvent, assigns its assets for the benefit of its creditors, is unable to pay its debts as they

become due, or is otherwise financially unable to complete the Work, b) abandons the Work by failing to report to the Work site and diligently prosecute the Work to completion,c) disregards written instructions from the Agency or materially violates provisions of the Contract

Documents, d) fails to prosecute the Work according to the schedule approved by the Engineer,e) disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction, orf) commits continuous or repeated violations of regulatory or statutory safety requirements, then the Agency

will consider the Contractor in default of the Contract. Notices, and other written communications regarding default between the Contractor, the Agency, and the Surety shall be transmitted in accordance with 2-12.

6-4.2 Notice to Cure. The Agency will issue a written notice to cure the default to the Contractor and its Surety. The Contractor shall commence satisfactory corrective actions within 5 Working Days after receipt.

6-4.3 Notice of Termination for Default. If the Contractor fails to commence satisfactory corrective action within 5 Working Days after receipt of the notice to cure, or to diligently continue satisfactory and timely correction of the default thereafter, then the Agency will consider the Contractor in default of the Contract and:

a) will terminate the Contractor's right to perform under the Contract by issuing a written notice of terminationfor default to the Contractor and its Surety,

b) may use any materials, equipment, tools or other facilities furnished by the Contractor to secure andmaintain the Work site, and

c) may furnish labor, equipment, and materials the Agency deems necessary to secure and maintain the Worksite. The provisions of this subsection shall be in addition to all other legal rights and remedies available to the Agency.

6-4.4 Responsibilities of the Surety. Upon receipt of the written notice of termination for default, the Surety shall immediately assume all rights, obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the Contract. If the Surety fails to protect and maintain the Work site, the Agency may do so, and may recover all costs incurred. The Surety shall notify the Agency that it is assuming all rights, obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the Contract and all money that is due, or would become due, to the Contractor shall be payable to the Surety as the Work progresses, subject to the terms of the Contract.

VCSS 29 08/25/17

Within 15 Working Days of receipt of the written notice of termination for default, the Surety shall submit to the Agency a written plan detailing the course of action it intends to take to remedy the default. The Agency will review the plan and notify the Surety if the plan is satisfactory. If the Surety fails to submit a satisfactory plan, or if the Surety fails to maintain progress according to the plan accepted by the Agency, the Agency may, upon 48 hours written notice, exclude the Surety from the premises, take possession of all material and equipment, and complete the Work in any way the Agency deems to be expedient. The cost of completing the Work by the Agency shall be charged against the Surety and may be deducted from any monies due, or which would become due, the Surety. If the amounts due under the Contract are insufficient for completion, the Surety shall pay to the Agency, within 30 days after the Agency submits an invoice, all costs in excess of the remaining Contract Price.

6-4.5 Payment. The Surety will be paid for completion of the Work in accordance with 9-3 less the value of damages caused to the Agency by acts of the Contractor.

6-5 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT. The Board may terminate the Contract at its own discretion or when conditions encountered during the Work make it impossible or impracticable to proceed, or when the Agency is prevented from proceeding with the Contract by act of God, by law, or by official action of a public authority.

The Agency will issue a written notice of termination for convenience in accordance with 2-12. Upon receipt, the Contractor shall immediately cease work, except work the Contractor is directed to complete by the Engineer or required to complete for public safety and convenience. The Contractor shall immediately notify Subcontractors and suppliers to immediately cease their work. The Contractor will be paid without duplication for:

a) work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination forconvenience;

b) reasonable costs incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, suppliers and others;and

c) reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.The Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Agency no later than 90 days from

the effective date of termination, unless extended, in writing, by the Agency upon written request by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to submit a proposal, the Agency may determine the amount, if any, due the Contractor

as a result of the termination. The Agency will pay the Contractor the amount it determines to be reasonable. If the Contractor disagrees with the amount determined by the Agency as being reasonable, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Agency within 30 days of receipt of payment. Any amount due shall be as later determined by arbitration, if the Agency and the Contractor agree thereto, or as fixed in a court of law.

6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

6-6.1 General. If delays are caused by unforeseen events beyond the control of the Contractor, such delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time as provided herein, but the Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as provided in 6-6.3. Such unforeseen events may include war, government regulations, labor disputes, strikes, fires, floods, adverse weather necessitating cessation of work, other similar action of the elements, inability to obtain materials, equipment or labor, required Extra Work, or other specific events as may be further described in the Specifications.

No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by the Contractor's inability to obtain materials unless the Contractor furnishes to the Engineer documentary proof of the inability to obtain such materials in a timely manner in accordance with the sequence of the Contractor's operations and the approved construction schedule.

If delays beyond the Contractor's control are caused by events other than those mentioned above, but substantially equal in gravity to those enumerated, and an extension of time is deemed by the Engineer to be in the best interests of the Agency, an extension of time may be granted, but the Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as provided in 6-6.3.

If delays beyond the Contractor's control are caused solely by action or inaction by the Agency, such delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time as provided in 6-6.2.

6-6.2 Extensions of Time. Extensions of time, when granted, will be based upon the effect of delays to the Work as a whole and will not be granted for noncontrolling delays to minor included portions of Work unless it can be shown that such delays did, in fact, delay the progress of the Work as a whole.

6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor. The Contractor will be compensated for damages incurred due to delays for which the Agency is responsible if such delays are unreasonable in the circumstances involved and were not within the contemplation of the parties when the Contract was awarded to the Contractor and delay the Work as a whole. Such actual costs will be determined by the Engineer. The Agency will not be liable for, and in making this determination the Engineer will exclude, all damages which the Engineer determines the Contractor could have avoided by any reasonable means including, without limitation, the judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant.

VCSS 30 08/25/17

6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. If the Contractor desires payment for a delay as specified in 6-6.3 or an extension of time, it shall, within 30 Days after the beginning of the delay, file with the Agency a written request and report as to the cause and extent of the delay. The request for payment or extension must be made at least 15 Days before the specified completion date. Failure by the Contractor to file these items within the time specified will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request.

6-6.4.1 Documentation of Delays. When the Contractor requests an extension of time for delay due to inability to obtain materials or equipment, the documentary proof required by 6-6.1 shall include the following:

1. Date Engineer was notified of delay.2. Date the delay began.3. Exact description of material or equipment causing delay.4. Documentation showing when and from whom ordered.5. Documentation of promise to deliver.6. Documentation of actual delivery date.7. Description of how late delivery caused delay (include construction schedule).8. Documentation of measures taken to get prompt delivery.9. Documentation of attempts to get delivery from other sources.10. Description of steps taken in project scheduling to minimize effects of late delivery.11. Description of steps taken to get project back on schedule after actual delivery.12. Statement of actual time lost as a result of late delivery.

6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION

6-7.1 General. The Contractor shall complete the Work within the time set forth in the Contract. The Contractor shall complete each portion of the Work within such time as set forth in the Contract for such portion. Unless otherwise specified, the time of completion of the Contract shall be expressed in Working Day

6-7.2 Working Day. A Working Day is any day within the period between the start of the Contract time as defined in 6-1 and the date provided in the Contract for completion or upon field acceptance by the Engineer of all Work provided for in the Contract, whichever occurs first, other than:

(1) Saturday, (2) Sunday, (3) any day designated as a holiday by the Agency, (4) any other day designated as a holiday in a Master Labor Agreement entered into by the Contractor or

on behalf of the Contractor as an eligible member of a Contractor Association, (5) any day the Contractor is prevented from working at the beginning of the workday for cause as

defined in 6-6.1, (6) any day the Contractor is prevented from working during the first 5 hours of the workday with at least

60 percent of the normal work force for cause as defined in 6-6.1.

6-7.2.1 Holidays. Solely for the purposes of paragraph (3) of 6-7.2, the following days are designated as holidays by the Agency.

A B MONTH AGENCY EMPLOYEE HOLIDAYS OTHER DESIGNATED HOLIDAYS January ................... 1st day; 3rd Monday ................................ None February .................. 3rd Monday ............................................. 12th day

March ...................... None ........................................................ 31st day March-April ............. None ........................................................ One Friday between March 21 and April 23

designated as Good Friday May ......................... Last Monday ............................................ None June ........................ None ........................................................ None July .......................... 4th day ..................................................... None August ..................... None ........................................................ None September .............. 1st Monday .............................................. 9th day October ................... None ........................................................ 2nd Monday November ............... 11th day; 4th Thursday ............................. the Friday following the 4th Thursday December ............... 25th ......................................................... 23rd day, only if Thursday or Friday;

24th day; 31st day

If any day listed above falls on Saturday, the preceding Friday is the holiday. If any day listed above falls on Sunday, the succeeding Monday is the holiday.

No extra holiday shall result when such Friday or Monday is already designated as a holiday. A copy of a Working Day calendar incorporating the above-listed holidays and used by the Agency for Contract time accounting purpose will be furnished to the Contractor upon request.

The term "holiday" as used in this section shall not be construed as being the same as "holiday" within the meaning of 7-2.2.

VCSS 31 08/25/17

The Contractor may perform work on the holidays designated in Column A above provided it has obtained prior written approval of the Engineer at least two Days in advance of performing the work. The Contractor may perform work on the holidays designated in Column B above provided the Contractor notifies the Engineer two Days in advance of the holiday.

6-7.2.2 Landscape Maintenance Period. Where a landscape maintenance period is specified, the portion of the time in such period that follows the completion of all other Work required by the Contract shall not be Working Days for Contract time accounting.

6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting. The Engineer will make a daily determination of each Working Day to be charged against the Contract time. These determinations will be discussed and the Contractor will be furnished a periodic statement showing the allowable number of Working Days of Contract time, as adjusted, at the beginning of the reporting period. The statement will also indicate the number of Working Days charged during the reporting period and the number of Working Days of Contract time remaining. If the Contractor does not agree with the statement, the Contractor must file a written protest within 15 Days after receipt, setting forth the facts of the protest. Otherwise, the statement will be deemed to have been accepted.

6-7.4 Starting Date for Contract Time and Notice to Proceed. The starting date for Contract time accounting will be determined by adding the number of Days indicated on the Proposal form to the date the Contract is awarded, however the Agency may, at its option, delay the starting date by not more than 60 calendar Days if necessary to obtain permits, rights-of-way, or approval of federal or State authorities, or when prevented from starting the project due to causes beyond its control. Notice to Proceed will be issued within 7 calendar Days after the Contract, bonds, certificates of insurance and other documents have been returned, properly completed by the Contractor, unless the starting date is delayed as herein provided. If the Agency delays the Contract starting date, Notice to Proceed will be issued at least 7 calendar Days prior to the new starting date. Any delay caused by failure of the Contractor to properly complete or timely return the Contract Documents shall not change the Contract starting date and shall not be a cause for extending the Contract time. The Notice of Award will indicate a probable Contract starting date. The Notice to Proceed will indicate the actual Contract starting date, computed as herein described.

6-8 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE AND WARRANTY.

6-8.1 Completion and Acceptance. Acknowledgment of completion of the Work will occur prior to Acceptance by the Agency. Acceptance will only occur after all Contract requirements have been fulfilled, such as training, submission of warranties, maintenance manuals, record drawings, Release on Contract and the like. Acceptance by the Agency will occur when the Engineer signs the Notice of Completion. The Work will be inspected by the Engineer promptly upon receipt of the Contractor's written assertion that the Work has been completed. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the Engineer will acknowledge completion of the Work. Completion of the Work, as used above, shall include the Contractor showing evidence of having received an occupancy clearance from Building and Safety, or other permit issuing agency, when a building, plumbing electrical, grading, or other permit is required for the Work. The Engineer will, in acknowledging completion of the Work, set forth in writing the date when the Work was completed. This will be the date when the Contractor is relieved from responsibility to protect the Work. This will also be the date to which liquidated damages will be computed.

6-8.2 Warranty and Correction

VCSS 32 08/25/17

6-8.2.1 Warranty The Contractor warrants to the Agency that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be new, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and of good quality, that the Work will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective by the Agency. This warranty excludes damage or defect caused by abuse (other than by the Contractor or those under the control of the Contractor), modifications not executed by the Contractor, or improper or insufficient maintenance. This warranty excludes normal wear and tear. Nothing in this warranty is intended to limit any manufacturer’s warranty which provides the Agency with greater warranty rights. 6-8.2.2 Correction Period For a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Agency, the Contractor shall repair or replace any defective workmanship or materials or Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents after notice to do so from the Engineer, and within the time specified in the notice. If the Contractor fails to make such repair or replacement within the time specified in the notice, the Agency may perform the repair or replacement and the Contractor and the Contractor’s sureties shall be liable for the cost thereof. The one (1) year period referenced in this section 6-8.2.2 applies only to the Contractor’s obligation to repair or

replace defective workmanship or materials or Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents

and is not intended to constitute a period of limitations for any other rights or remedies the Agency may have regarding the Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents.

6-8.4 Landscape Maintenance Period. Final Acceptance of the Contract shall follow the satisfactory completion of all Contract Work, including the landscape maintenance period if one is specified.

6-8.5 Non-complying Work. Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents, nor partial or entire occupancy of the premises by the Agency, shall constitute an Acceptance of Work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.

6-8.6 Written Warranties. The Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Engineer all written warranties required to be furnished by the Specifications. Each of such warranty shall be underwritten by the Contractor for the full period prescribed therein, and shall bear its endorsement to such effect.

6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time allowed will result in damages being sustained by the Agency. Such damages are, and will continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified, as adjusted in accordance with 6-6, for completion of the Work the Contractor shall pay to the Agency, or have withheld from monies due it, the sum of $250, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.

Execution of the Contract under these Specifications shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $250 per day is the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time, that such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and that such sum may be deducted from payments due the Contractor if such delay occurs.

6-10 USE OF IMPROVEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION. The Agency reserves the right to take over and utilize all or part of any completed facility or appurtenance. The Contractor will be notified in writing in advance of such action. Such action by the Agency will relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury or damage to said completed portions of the improvement resulting from use by public traffic or from the action of the elements or from any other cause, except injury or damage resulting from the Contractor's operations or negligence. The Contractor will not be required to reclean such portions of the improvement before field completion, except for cleanup made necessary by its operations. Nothing in this section shall be construed as relieving the Contractor from full responsibility for correcting defective work or materials.

In the event the Agency exercises its right to place into service and utilize all or part of any completed facility or appurtenance, the Agency shall assume the responsibility and liability for injury to persons or property arising out of or resulting from the utilization of the facility or appurtenance so placed into service, except for any willful or negligent act or omission by the Contractor, Subcontractor, their officers, employees or agents.

6-10.1 Use of Improvements - Exceptions. The provisions of 6-10 shall not apply to projects for the repair, modification, enlargement or improvement of existing facilities that are to remain in use during construction except where a portion of the project which is completely independent from the rest of the Work can be completed and put into use by the Agency.

On projects on public roads, after satisfactory completion of an isolated section of the Work involving roadway improvements or repairs, when all temporary signs and other temporary Contractor facilities have been removed, the section is not being used as a detour, the section is no longer under the Contractor's control, and the section is opened to public traffic through the end of the Contract period, that section of the Work shall be taken over by the Agency as provided in 6-10. The Contractor shall indicate to the Engineer in writing when the conditions of this paragraph have been complied with and shall specify the limits of the section involved. Any taking over of the Work by the Agency shall be effective only when formal written notification is issued by the Agency.

VCSS 33 08/25/17

A waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.

Neither the Acceptance by the Engineer or by its representative, nor any payment for or Acceptance of the whole or any part of the Work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the Engineer shall operate as a waiver of any portion of the Contract or of any power herein reserved, or of any right to damages.

The Agency shall not be precluded or estopped, notwithstanding any such measurement, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor or its sureties, or both, such damages as it may sustain by reason of the Contractor's failure to comply with the terms of the Contract.

6-8.3 No Waiver of Legal Rights. The Agency shall not be precluded or estopped by any measurement, estimate, or certificate made either before or after the completion and Acceptance of the Work and payment therefor from showing the true amount and character of the Work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, nor from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or is incorrectly made, nor that the Work or materials do not in fact conform to the Contract.

6-11 NOTICE OF POTENTIAL CLAIM FOR ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION. Procedures for notice of claims in specific situations and circumstances are provided in the following sections:

3-4 ....... ............ Changed Conditions 6-6.4 .... ............ Delay and Extensions of Time 6-7.3 .... ............ Contract Time Accounting

Compliance with this section is not prerequisite to assertion of a claim involving those sections or based on differences in measurements or errors of computation as to Contract quantities.

Compliance with the provisions of this section is required in all other situations and circumstances.

It is the intention of this section that differences arising between the parties under and by virtue of the Contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that such matters may be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action taken to resolve such differences.

The Contractor shall give the Engineer written notice of a potential claim, setting forth: (1) the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation will or may be due; (2) the nature of the costs involved; and (3) insofar as possible, the amount of the potential claim.

If the claim is based upon an act or failure to act by the Engineer, the said notice must be given to the Engineer prior to the date when the work giving rise to the potential claim is commenced; in all other cases the said notice must be given to the Engineer within 15 Days after the happening of the event, thing or occurrence giving rise to the potential claim.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation where the written notice of potential claim has not been given to the Engineer in the manner required by and within the time limitations of this section.

6-12 DISPUTES AND CLAIMS; PROCEDURE.

6-12.1 GENERAL. Any and all decisions made on appeal pursuant to this section shall be in writing. Any "decision" purportedly made pursuant to this section which is not in writing shall not be binding upon the Agency and should not be relied upon by the Contractor.

Filing or giving the notices required under 3-4, 6-6.4, 6-7.3 and 6-11 is prerequisite to recovery under a Contractor's claim for additional compensation; nothing in this section shall excuse the Contractor from its duty to file or give the required notices, or from performing other duties required by the Contract Documents.

VCSS 34 08/25/17

6-12.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW. Prior to proceeding under 6-12.3 or filing a Complaint in Arbitration, the Contractor shall exhaust its administrative remedies by submitting its claim for review and decision by the following Agency staff in the following sequence:

Project Manager, responsible for the project Department Director (Public Works Agency), responsible for the project. Director of the Public Works Agency (the Engineer)

If the Contractor disputes the Project Manager’s decision on its claim, the Contractor shall submit the claim to the Department Director. If the Contractor disputes the Department Director’s decision on its claim, the Contractor shall submit the claim to the Engineer. Agency staff decisions shall state the portion of the claim that is undisputed if any.

The Project Manager may elect to forward a claim submitted by the Contractor directly to the Department Director. The Project Manager must give the Contractor notice of that election and the Contractor may supplement its claim within 7 Days of such notice (unless the parties agree in writing to a different time) and its claim will be deemed submitted on the earlier of the day it supplements its claim, the day it states in writing that it will not supplement its claim or the day time to supplement expires. The Department Director may forward a claim timely submitted by the Contractor directly to the Engineer instead of making a decision on the claim, in which case no notice or opportunity to supplement the claim is required, and the claim shall be deemed timely submitted to the Engineer.

The Engineer's decision on the claim shall be the Agency's final decision.

Claims submitted to the Department Director and the Engineer shall be submitted in writing and shall include:

a. A copy of the disputed decision.b. A statement as to why the Contractor believes the decision is in error.

c. All information, argument, documents and evidence (collectively, materials) that the Contractorwishes to have considered in the review. Where the request for review is made to the Engineer,in lieu of resubmitting materials which have already been submitted to the Department Director,the Contractor may include with the request a list of the materials the Contractor wants theEngineer to consider. Any additional materials and evidence not previously submitted to theDepartment Director shall be included with the request to the Engineer, if the Contractor wishesthem to be considered. If relevant evidence is not available at the time the request is made tothe Department Director or the Engineer, the Contractor shall identify such evidence andinclude a statement as to when such evidence will be submitted.

The Project Manager shall issue a decision on a claim within 10 Days of receipt; if the Project Manager does not do so, then the Project manager will be deemed to have decided to reject the claim in its entirety as of the conclusion of the 10th Day after receipt. The Contractor shall submit a claim to the Department Director for review and decision within 7 Days of receipt of the Project Manager’s decision or of the time the Project Manager is deemed to have decided to reject the claim, whichever is applicable. The Department Director shall issue a decision on a claim within 10 Days of the timely submission of the claim; if the Department Director does not do so, then the Department Director will be deemed to have decided to reject the claim in its entirety as of the conclusion of the 10th Day after timely submission. The Contractor shall submit a claim to the Engineer for review and decision within 7 Days of receipt of the Department Director’s decision or of the time the Department Director is deemed to have decided to reject the claim, whichever is applicable. If a claim is timely submitted to the Engineer and the Engineer fails to issue a decision on that claim within the time limits prescribed for issuing a written statement under Public Contract Code, section 9204, subdivision (d)(1), the Engineer shall be deemed to have decided to reject the claim in its entirety. At any time after the Project Manager receives a claim, the Agency and Contractor may agree in writing to different time limits than those set forth in this paragraph.

VCSS 35 08/25/17

6-12.3 MEET AND CONFER; MEDIATION If the Contractor disputes the Agency’s final decision, the Contractor may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the Agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 Days for settlement of the dispute.

Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the Agency shall provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 Days after the Agency issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, as identified by the Contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the Agency and the Contractor sharing the associated costs equally. The Agency

6-13 CONTRACTOR'S WORK HOURS

6-13.1 Working Hours Limitations. Except as otherwise specified, no work shall be performed by the Contractor at the Work site between the hours of 7:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. the following day, nor shall work be performed on Saturdays, Sundays or holidays listed in 6-7.2.1.

6-13.2 Regular Work Schedule. The Contractor shall furnish a work schedule with the Construction Schedule required by 6-1 and inform the Engineer at least two Days in advance of changing the schedule. The schedule shall include the times for starting and ending work on each day. Such starting and ending times shall not be more than 10 1/2 hours apart.

6-13.3 Exceptions. The limitations on working hours and days shall not apply to emergency work made necessary by unusual conditions where such work is necessary to protect the Work, to protect the property of others, to protect life, or to ensure the orderly flow of traffic.

The limitations of this section shall not apply where work at times other than allowed by 6-13.1 and 6-13.2 is necessary in order to make utility connections or is required by other provisions contained in these Specifications in order to perform the work in the manner specified. In these cases, the Contractor shall obtain prior written approval of the Engineer at least two Days in advance of performing the work.

VCSS 36 08/25/17

6-12.4 ARBITRATION. Claims and disputes arising under or related to the performance of the Contract, for which mediation under 6-12.3 was waived or unsuccessful except for claims which have been released by execution of the "Release on Contract" as provided in 9-4, shall be resolved by arbitration unless the Agency and the Contractor agree in writing, after the claim or dispute has arisen, to waive arbitration and to have the claim or dispute litigated in a court of competent jurisdiction. Arbitration shall be pursuant to Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2 of the Public Contract Code and the regulations promulgated thereto, Chapter 4 (commencing with Section 1300) of Division 2 of Title 1 of the California Code of Regulations. The arbitration decision shall be decided under and in accordance with California law, supported by substantial evidence and, in writing, contain the basis for the decision, findings of fact, and conclusions of law.

Arbitration shall be initiated by a Complaint in Arbitration made in compliance with the requirements of said Chapter 4. A Complaint in Arbitration by the Contractor shall be filed not later than 90 calendar Days after receipt of the final written decision of the Agency on the claim or dispute or within 300 Days after Acceptance of the Work by the Agency if no written decision has been issued. For the purposes of this section, "Acceptance of the Work by the Agency" shall be defined as the date the Notice of Completion is filed.

Where an election is made by either party to use the Simplified Claims Procedure provided under Sections 1340-1346 of said Chapter 4, the parties may mutually agree to waive representation by counsel.

All contracts valued at more than $25,000 between the Contractor and its subcontractors and suppliers shall include a provision that the subcontractors and suppliers shall be bound to the Contractor to the same extent that the Contractor is bound to the Agency by all terms and provisions of the Contract, including this arbitration provision.

and Contractor shall agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the Agency and Contractor cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures outside this section.

For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including, but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assists the parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section.

Failure by the Agency to meet the time requirements of this section shall result in the portion of the claim that remains in dispute being deemed rejected in its entirety.

The parties may agree to waive, in writing, mediation under this section.

SECTION 7 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

7-1 THE CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES.

7-1.1 General. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain in good condition all equipment and facilities as required for the proper execution and inspection of the Work.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed toilets for the use of employees engaged in the Work. These accommodations shall be maintained in a neat and sanitary condition, and regularly pumped out.

7-1.2 Temporary Utility Services. The Contractor shall, at its own expense, make all arrangements necessary for the provision of temporary utility services necessary for its own use during performance of the Work.

The Contractor shall not draw water from any fire hydrant (except to extinguish a fire), without obtaining permission from the water utility owner.

7-1.3 Crushing and Screening Operations. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the establishment and operation of portable screens and crushers will not be allowed on or adjacent to the Work site.

7-2 LABOR

7-2.1 General. The Contractor, its agents, and employees shall be bound by and comply with applicable provisions of the Labor Code and Federal, State, and local laws related to labor. Any worker found by the Engineer to be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable, or who fails to perform the Work properly and acceptably, shall be immediately removed from the Work site by the Contractor and shall not be reemployed in the performance on the Work.

7-2.1.1 Special Qualifications. Where the Engineer determines certain portions of the Work require experience, training, certification or other special qualifications that may not be possessed by the average journeyperson, such portions of the Work will be specifically identified in the Special Provisions and the special qualifications identified.

When work requiring special qualifications is being performed, a person with such qualifications must be in immediate charge of the work. The person may be a lead journeyperson, foreperson or trade superintendent. The general superintendent or a foreperson who is not specifically assigned to the area where the identified work is being performed will not be considered to be in immediate charge of the work.

Written certification of the required qualifications shall be furnished to the Engineer at least one week prior to the time work is commenced on the work requiring such qualifications. Such certification is subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer. If, during performance of work requiring special qualifications, the qualified person becomes temporarily or permanently unavailable to the Contractor, work shall not proceed until a qualified replacement has been accepted by the Engineer. The Engineer will promptly consider the certification of the replacement.

If identified work is performed without a person having the special qualifications in charge, the Engineer may, at its sole discretion, order such work removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

If, after certification is accepted, the Engineer finds that the certification was inaccurate, or work on the project indicates a lack of the knowledge and experience to supervise the work, the Engineer may order the work stopped until an acceptable replacement has been certified, accepted and is in charge.

7-2.2 Prevailing Wages. Pursuant to Section 1773.2 of the Labor Code, the current prevailing rate of per diem wages at the time of the Bid as determined by the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) are on file at the office of the Engineer. The Contractor shall post a copy of these rates at the Work site. Pursuant to Section 1774 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and any Subcontractors shall pay not less than the specified prevailing rates of wages to workers employed on the Contract. If the Contract is Federally-funded, the Contractor and any Subcontractors shall not pay less than the higher of these rates or the rates determined by the United States Department of Labor. Pursuant to Section 1775 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and any Subcontractors, shall, as a penalty to the Agency, forfeit the prescribed amounts per calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rates. The project is subject to the compliance monitoring and enforcement by the California Department of Industrial Relations (DIR). The contractor is responsible for posting job site notices as prescribed by regulation pursuant to Labor Code section 1771.4, subdivision (a)(2). The Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, must be registered with the DIR pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 and section 1771.1. The Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, must submit certified payrolls to the Labor Commissioner pursuant to Labor Code 1771.4.

7-2.2.1 Apprentices. Apprentices shall be employed on the Work in accordance with Labor Code Section 1777.5. The Contractor is responsible for compliance with Labor Code Section 1777.5 for all apprenticeable occupations whether employed directly or through subcontractors.

7-2.2.2 Contractors' Duties Concerning Labor Code Compliance. As required by Labor Code 1775(b)(1), Labor Code Sections 1771, 1775, 1776, 1777.5, 1813 and 1815 are required to be included in the contract between the Contractor and subcontractors. The Contractor agrees to comply with these sections and all remaining provisions of the Labor Code.

7-2.3 Payroll Records. Pursuant to Section 1776 of the Labor Code the Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, shall keep, make available, and submit to the Engineer within ten (10) days of receipt of a written request,

VCSS 37 08/25/17

certified payroll records. Pursuant to Labor Code section 1776, subsection (h), the Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, shall, as a penalty to the Agency, forfeit the prescribed amount for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker, the Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, fails to comply with that subsection until strict compliance is effectuated. The Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, waives any right to any notice or hearing on the forfeiture of such penalties pursuant to Labor Code sections 1726 or 1771.6. The contractor shall include the in its subcontracts as required to make this paragraph effective as to each Subcontractor. Upon written request, the Contractor shall withhold penalties forfeited by a Subcontractor pursuant to Labor Code section 1776,l subsection (h), and this paragraph from payment due to such Subcontractor and remit such penalties withheld to the Agency.

7-2.4 Hours of Labor. Pursuant to Section 1810 of the Labor Code, 8 hours of labor shall constitute a legal day's work. Pursuant to Section 1813 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and any Subcontractors, shall, as a penalty to the Agency, forfeit the prescribed amount per calendar day for each worker required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any 1 calendar day and 40 hours in any 1 calendar week without being compensated in accordance with Section 1815.

Pursuant to Section 1810 of the Labor Code, 8 hours of labor shall constitute a legal day's work. Pursuant to Section 1813 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, shall, as a penalty to the Agency, forfeit the prescribed amount per calendar day for each worker required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any 1 calendar day and 40 hours in any 1 calendar week without being compensated in accordance with Section 1815. Contractor and each Subcontractor, if any, waives any right to any notice or hearing on the forfeiture of such penalties pursuant to Labor Code sections 1726 and 1771.6. Contractor shall include terms in its subcontracts as required to make this paragraph effective as to each Subcontractor. Upon written request, Contractor shall withhold penalties forfeited by a Subcontractor pursuant to Labor Code section 1813 and this paragraph from payments due to such Subcontractor and remit such penalties withheld to the Agency

VCSS 38 08/25/17

7-3 INDEPENDENCE OF CONTRACTOR, INDEMNIFICATION AND POLLUTION

7-3.1 Independence of Contractor. It is understood and agreed that Contractor is at all times an independent contractor and that no relationship of employer-employee exists between the parties hereto. Contractor will not be entitled to any benefits payable to employees of County, including but not limited to overtime, retirement benefits, workers' compensation benefits, injury leave or other leave benefits. County is not required to make any tax or benefit deductions from the compensation payable to Contractor under the provisions of this Agreement. As an independent contractor, Contractor hereby holds County harmless from any and all claims that may be made against County based upon any contention by any third party that an employer-employee relationship exists by reason of the Agreement.

If, in the performance of this Agreement, any third persons are employed by Contractor, such persons will be entirely and exclusively under the direction, supervision and control of Contractor. All terms of employment, including hours, wages, working conditions, discipline, hiring and discharging or any other terms of employment or requirements of law, will be determined by Contractor. County will have no right or authority over such persons or the terms of such employment, except as provided in this Agreement.

7-3.2 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Clause. All activities arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work covered by this Contract shall be at the risk of Contractor. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall defend (at Agency’s request), indemnify and hold harmless Agency, and the County of Ventura if the County of Ventura is not the entity defined as Agency under this Contract, including all of their boards, agencies, departments, officers, employees, agents and volunteers (collectively, “Indemnitee”), against any and all claims, suits, actions, legal or administrative proceedings, judgments, debts, demands, damages, including injury or death to any person or persons, and damage to any property including loss of use resulting therefrom, incidental and consequential damages, liabilities, interest, costs, attorneys' fees and expenses of whatsoever kind of nature, whether arising before, during or after commencement or completion of this Contract, whether against Contractor and Indemnitee or which are in any manner, directly, indirectly, in whole or in part, arising from any act, omission, fault or negligence, whether active or passive, of Contractor, a Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable in connection with or incident to the Contract, even though the same may have resulted from the joint, concurring or contributory negligence, or from the passive negligence, of Indemnitee or any other person or persons, unless the same be caused by the sole negligence of Indemnitee, or except to the extent caused by the active negligence or willful misconduct of Indemnitee.

The Agency will notify the Contractor of the receipt of any third party claims.

7-3.3 Contamination and Pollution. Contractor, solely at its own cost and expense, will provide clean up of any premises, property or natural resources contaminated or polluted due to Contractor activities. Any fines, penalties, punitive or exemplary damages assigned due to contaminating or polluting activities of the Contractor will be borne entirely by the Contractor.

7-4 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, shall obtain and maintain in full force during the term of this

Contract the following types of insurance:

7-4.1 Workers' Compensation Insurance.

7-4.1.1 Coverage. Workers' Compensation coverage, in full compliance with Labor Code 3700, for all employees of Contractor and Employer's Liability in the minimum amount of $1,000,000. The Agency, the County of Ventura, its officers, employees or Consultants, will not be responsible for any claims in law or equity occasioned by failure of Contractor to comply with this paragraph.

7-4.1.2 Certification. Before execution of the Contract by Agency, Contractor shall file with the Engineer the following signed certification:

"I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Work of this Contract."

VCSS 39 08/25/17

7-4.2 Commercial General Liability Insurance

7-4.2.1 Minimum Limits and Scope; Insurance Classes. "Occurrence" coverage in the minimum amount of:

L-A

L-B

L-C

$ 1,000,000 combined single limit (CSL) bodily injury and property damage each occurence and $1,000,000 aggregate

$ 5,000,000 CSL bodily injury and property damage each occurrence and $5,000,000 aggregateL-D $ 10,000,000 CSL bodily injury and property damage each occurrence and $10,000,000 aggregate

Coverages shall include premises/operations; products/completed operations; independent contractors; underground, explosion and collapse hazards; personal and advertising injury; broad form property damage; and broad form blanket contractual.

All Excess Liability policies, if used, shall be on an "umbrella" or 7-4.2.3 Excess Liability Policies. following form of the primary layer of coverage.

7-4.3 Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance

Coverage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 CSL bodily injury and property damage, including automobile liability, any auto.

7-4.4 Property Insurance

Contractor shall arrange for its own "Course of Construction" insurance on the project to protect its interests, as Agency does not have this coverage.

Contractor is responsible for delivering to Agency Work completed in accordance with the Contract except as provided in 7-18 (Acts of God). Should the Work being constructed be damaged by fire or other causes during construction, it shall be replaced by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications without additional expense to Agency.

7-4.5 Other Insurance Provisions.

7-4.5.1 Insurance Company Qualifications. All insurance required shall be issued by (a) an admitted company or admitted companies authorized to transact business in the State of California which have a BEST rating of B+ or higher and a Financial Size Category (FSC) of VII or larger or (b) a California approved Surplus Line carrier or carriers which have a BEST rating of A or higher and a Financial Size Category (FSC) of VII or larger.

Workers compensation insurance not meeting the above requirements but meeting all other requirements of the specifications, will be accepted.

7-4.5.2 Primary Coverage. All insurance required shall be primary coverage as respects Agency and any insurance or self-insurance maintained by Agency or the County of Ventura shall be in excess of Contractor's insurance coverage and shall not contribute to it.

7-4.5.3 Aggregate Limits Exceeded. Agency shall not be notified immediately if any aggregate insurance

limit is exceeded. Contractor shall purchase additional coverage to meet requirements.

7-4.5.4 Liability in Excess of Limits. Insurance coverage in the minimum amounts set forth herein shall not be construed to relieve Contractor for liability in excess of such coverage, nor shall it preclude Agency or the County of Ventura from taking such other actions as is available to it under any other provisions of this Contract or otherwise in law.

7-4.5.5 Additional Insured Endorsements. The Agency, the County of Ventura (if not defined as Agency) and all special Districts governed by the County of Ventura Board of Supervisors, and their officials, employees, and volunteers shall be named as Additional Insured as respects Work done by or on behalf of Contractor under the Contract on all policies required (except workers' compensation). With respect to Contractor's commercial general Liability insurance, Additional Insured coverage shall include both ongoing and completed operations.

7-4.5.6 Waiver of Subrogation Rights. Contractor agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against the

Agency, the County of Ventura, including its boards, and all special Districts governed by the Board of Supervisors,

for losses arising directly or indirectly from the activities or Work performed by Contractor under the Contract

(applies only to Workers’ Compensation and Commercial General Liability).

VCSS 40 08/25/17

If no coverage class is specified in "Proposal", coverage class L-B shall apply.If Contractor maintains higher limits than the minimums shown above, the Agency requires and shall be entitled to coverage for the higher limits maintained by the Contractor. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the Agency.

7-4.2.2 Coverage Exceptions. On projects where no explosives will be used and no demolition is involved, the coverage for explosion may be omitted. On projects where no excavation is involved, the coverage for underground hazard may be omitted. The omission of said coverages is at Agency's option, and shall not abrogate Contractor's responsibilities for indemnification as set forth in these Specifications.

Coverage Class Coverage

$ 1,000,000 CSL bodily injury and property damage each occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate

7-4.5.7 Cancellation Notice Required. In the case of policy cancellation, Agency shall be notified by the insurance company or companies as provided for in the policy. Contractor shall notify Agency of any and all policy cancellations within three working days of the cancellation.

7-4.5.8 Documentation Required. Prior to execution of the Contract by Agency, Contractor shall provide Agency with Certificates of Insurance for all required coverages (see Appendix A for example), all required endorsement(s) and a copy of its course of insurance policy.

It is the responsibility of Contractor to confirm that all terms and conditions of Section 7-4 Insurance Requirements are complied with by any and all subcontractors that Contractor may use in the completion of the Contract.

7-5 PERMITS.The Agency will obtain, at no cost to the Contractor, all encroachment and building permits necessary to perform Contract Work in streets, highways, railways or other rights of way, unless the necessity for such permit(s) is created by a method of operation chosen by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not limited to, those permits required for night Work, overload, blasting and demolition.

The Contractor shall pay all business taxes or license fees that are required for the Work.

7-5.1 Highway and Railroad Permits. The Engineer will obtain the basic State highway and railroad encroachment permits which will include checking of plans. However, the Contractor must also obtain permits from these agencies. Inspection fees charged by these agencies must be paid by the Contractor.

7-5.2 Grading Ordinance

7-5.2.1 General. All excavation, filling and grading operations in Ventura County are governed by the Ventura County Grading Ordinance or City Ordinances, except within the project right of way shown on the Plans.

7-5.2.2 Permits Required. Work outside the project right of way which involves excavation or filling of soils is subject to all requirements of the applicable grading ordinance. The requirements may include, but are not limited to, submitting of a grading plan prepared by a Civil Engineer, obtaining a grading permit, paying the permit fee, posting a grading bond, hiring professionals for engineering and testing services, compacting fills, constructing drainage facilities and providing erosion protection.

7-5.2.3 Imported and Exported Material. To insure that neither the Agency nor the Contractor is a party to aiding or abetting any property owner (who is ultimately responsible) to violate the applicable grading ordinance, no material shall be imported from or exported or wasted outside the project right of way until the Contractor has furnished the Engineer a copy of the grading permit covering such operation on land where material is to be deposited or excavated, unless exempt.

7-5.2.4 Exemptions from Permit. No grading permit is required of the Contractor for Work performed within the project right of way shown on the Plans or on borrow or disposal areas shown on the Plans or described in the Special Provisions and which are specifically designated as being exempt from such permit requirements.

7-5.3 Building Permit.

7-5.3.1 Agency Furnished Permits. Except as provided in 7-5.3.2, Agency will submit the plans for the Work to Department of Building and Safety, and other building related permit issuing agencies, for plan check and make the corrections necessary for the issuance of building and related permits. Agency will Pay plan check and permit fees for the Work. The Contractor may be required to furnish information to the permit issuing agencies, as required for the issuance of permits, and sign the permit.

7-5.3.2 Contractor Furnished Permits. Components or systems, required by the Contract, may require the preparation of plans and calculations to obtain approvals or permits from state or local building, fire prevention, public health, safety, environmental protection and other agencies in addition to the basic permits

arranged for by the Agency as provided in 7-5.3.1. Contractor shall take all actions in a timely manner to obtain

such approvals or permits so as not to delay completion of the Work beyond the time provided in 6-7. Contractor shall include all costs and consider the time required to obtain approvals or permits in the Contract price bid.

7-5.4 Coastal Zone Permits

7-5.4.1 Agency Furnished Permits. Permits required for Work on the project within rights of way furnished by the Agency within the Coastal Zone will be obtained by the Agency.

7-5.4.2 Contractor Furnished Permits. Permits required for the Contractor's operations outside of rights of way furnished by the Agency must be obtained by the Contractor. Such permits are required for brush removal, grading, dredging, disposal of material and many other operations within the Coastal Zone.

VCSS 41 08/25/17

7-6 THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE. Before starting work, the Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have complete authority to act for it. An alternative representative may be designated as well. The representative or alternate shall be present at the Work site whenever work is in progress or whenever actions of the elements necessitate its presence to take measures necessary to protect the Work, persons, or property. Any order or communication given to this representative shall be deemed delivered to the Contractor. A joint venture shall designate only one representative and alternate. In the absence of the Contractor or its representative, instructions or directions may be given by the Engineer to the superintendent or person in charge of the specific work to which the order applies. Such order shall be complied with promptly and referred to the Contractor or its representative.

In order to communicate with the Agency, the Contractor’s representative, superintendent, or person in charge of specific work shall be able to speak, read, and write the English language.

7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the nature and extent of any simultaneous, collateral, and essential work by others. The Agency, its workers and contractors and others, shall have the right to operate within or adjacent to the Work site during the performance of such work.

The Agency, the Contractor, and each of such workers, contractors and others, shall coordinate their operations and cooperate to minimize interference.

The Contractor shall include in its Bid all costs involved as a result of coordinating its work with others. The Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation from the Agency for damages resulting from such simultaneous, collateral, and essential work. If necessary to avoid or minimize such damage or delay, the Contractor shall redeploy its work force to other parts of the Work.

Should the Contractor be delayed by the Agency, and such delay could not have been reasonably foreseen or prevented by the Contractor, the Engineer will determine the extent of the delay, the effect on the Work, and any extension of time.

7-8 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE

7-8.1 General Throughout all phases of construction, including suspension of the Work, and until acceptance per 6-8, the Contractor shall keep the Work site clean and free from rubbish and debris. Rubbish and debris collected on the Work site shall only be stored in roll-off, enclosed containers prior to disposal. Stockpiles of such will not be allowed.

When required by the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall provide a self-loading motorized street sweeper equipped with a functional water spray system. The sweeper shall clean all paved areas within the Work site and all paved haul routes at least once each working day.

The Contractor shall ensure there is no spillage along haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately and the area cleaned.

Should the Contractor fail to keep the Work site free from rubbish and debris, the Engineer may suspend the Work per 6-3 until the condition is corrected.

7-8.2 Air Pollution Control The Contractor shall not discharge smoke, dust, equipment exhaust, or any other air contaminants into the atmosphere in such quantity as will violate any Federal, State, or local regulations.

The Contractor shall also abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping and spraying with water, or other means as necessary. The use of water shall conform to 7-8.6.

7-8.3 Noise Control. Noise generated from the Contractor's operations shall be controlled as specified in the Special Provisions.

7-8.4 Storage of Equipment and Materials.

7-8.4.1 General Materials and equipment shall be removed from the Work site as soon as they are no longer necessary. Before inspection by the Engineer for acceptance, the Work site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish so as to present a satisfactory clean and neat appearance.

Excess excavated material shall be removed from the Work site immediately unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

Forms and form lumber shall be removed from the Work site as soon as practicable after stripping.

7-8.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. Construction materials and equipment shall not be stored in streets, roads, or highways for more than 5 days after unloading unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer. All materials or equipment not installed or used in construction within 5 days after unloading shall be stored at a location approved by the Engineer.

Excavated material, except that which is to be used as backfill in the adjacent trench, shall not be stored in public streets unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer. Immediately after placing backfill, all excess material shall be removed from the Work site.

VCSS 42 08/25/17

7-8.5 Sanitary Sewers.

7-8.5.1 General. The flow of sewage shall not be interrupted. Should the Contractor disrupt the operation of existing sanitary sewer facilities, or should disruption be necessary for performance of the Work, the Contractor shall bypass the sewage flow around the Work. Sewage shall be conveyed in closed conduits and disposed of in a sanitary sewer system. Sewage shall not be permitted to flow in trenches nor be covered by backfill.

Whenever sewage bypass and pumping is required by the Plans or Specifications, or the Contractor so elects to perform, the Contractor shall submit per 2-5.3 a working drawing conforming to 7-8.5.2 detailing its proposed plan of sewage bypass and pumping.

7-8.5.2 Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan. The plan shall indicate the locations and capacities of all pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines. Equipment and piping shall be sized to handle the peak flow of the section of sewer line to be bypassed and pumped. Equipment and piping shall conform to 7-10, the Plans, and the Special Provisions. Bypass piping, when crossing areas subject to traffic loads, shall be constructed in trenches with adequate cover and otherwise protected from damage due to traffic. Lay-flat hose or aluminum piping with an adequate casing and/or traffic plates may be allowed if so approved by the Engineer. Bypass pump suction and

discharge lines that extend into manholes shall be rigid hose or hard pipe. Lay flat hose will not be allowed to extend into manholes. The Contractor shall provide a backup bypass pumping system in case of malfunction. The backup bypass system shall provide 100 percent standby capability, and be in place and ready for immediate use.

Each standby pump shall be a complete unit with its own suction and discharge piping. In addition to the backup system, the Contractor shall furnish and operate vacuum trucks when required by the Plans or Special Provisions.

7-8.5.3 Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan. The Contractor shall prepare and submit per 2-5.3 a spill prevention and emergency response plan. The plan shall address implementation of measures to prevent sewage spills, procedures for spill control and containment, notifications, emergency response, cleanup, and spill and damage reporting.

The plan shall account for all storm drain systems and water courses within the vicinity of the Work which could be affected by a sewage spill. Catch basins that could receive spilled sewage shall be identified Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, these catch basins shall be sealed prior to operating the bypass and pumping system. The Contractor shall remove all material used to seal the catch basins when the bypass and pumping system operations are complete.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for containing any sewage spillage, preventing any sewage from reaching a watercourse, recovery and legal disposal of any spilled sewage, any fines or penalties associated with the sewage spill imposed upon by the Agency and/or the Contractor by jurisdictional regulatory agencies, and any other expenses or liabilities related to the sewage spill.

7-8.6 Water Pollution Control The Contractor shall prevent, control, and abate discharges of pollutants from the construction site in order to protect the storm drain system, which includes pipes, channels, streams, waterways, and other bodies of water, by the construction, installation or performance of water pollution control measures as shown on the Stormwater Pollution Control Plan (SWPCP) or Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) depending on the land area affected by the construction activity. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with the current State NPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activity (General Construction Permit), NPDES No. CAS000002 and current Ventura County NPDES Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) Permit No. CAS004002.

VCSS 43 08/25/17

7-8.6.1 Compliance with NPDES General Construction Permit

7-8.6.1.1 Construction Sites

If the Work involves construction activity that results in soil disturbance of one acre or more of total land area, or results in soil disturbances of less than one acre but is a part of a work area larger than one acre, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the General Construction Permit NPDES No. CAS000002. Construction activity includes clearing, grading, excavation, stockpiling, and reconstruction of existing facilities involving removal and replacement. Construction activity does not include routine maintenance such as, maintenance of original line and grade, hydraulic capacity, or original purpose of the facility.

The Contractor shall comply with requirements of the General Construction Permit (NPDES No. CAS000002), obtained by the Agency, including a site-specific Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the Work to be developed by Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) and implemented by the Qualified SWPPP Practitioner (QSP). After July 1, 2010, the Agency will electronically file all required Permit Registration Documents (PRDs) through the State Water Board’s Stormwater Multi-Application and Report Tracking System (SMARTS) website, as required prior to the commencement of construction activity. PRDs consist of the Notice of Intent (NOI), Risk Assessment, Post-Construction Calculations, a Site Map, the SWPPP, a signed certification statement by the Legally

Responsible Party (LRP), and the first annual fee. For the Permit application, the Contractor shall submit to Project Manager the following:

• The completed site-specific Risk Assessment

• Post-construction calculations if applicable for the project, and

• Site-specific SWPPP developed in accordance with applicable Permits.

7-8.6.1.2 Linear Utility Projects; Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the General Construction Permit NPDES No. CAS000002 for Linear Underground/Overhead projects (LUPs) one acre or greater.

7-8.6.2 Compliance with NPDES MS4 Permit

7-8.6.2.1 Construction Sites Less Than One Acre The Contractor shall ensure implementation of

an effective combination of erosion and sediment control Best Management Practices (BMPs) listed in Table 6 of the Ventura County NPDES MS4 Permit. The Contractor shall develop and implement a Storm Water Pollution Control Plan (SWPCP).

7-8.6.2.2 Construction Sites One Acre but Less Than 5 Acres The Contractor shall ensure

implementation of an effective combination of appropriate erosion and sediment control BMPs from Table 7 (BMPs at Construction sites 1 acre or greater but less than 5 acres) of the Ventura County NPDES MS4 Permit in

addition to the ones identified in Table 6 (BMPs at Construction sites less than 1 acre) to prevent erosion and sediment loss, and the discharge of construction wastes. For all construction sites one acre or greater, the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP to the Agency for review and certification as the Local SWPPP.

7-8.6.2.3 Construction Sites 5 Acres and Greater The Contractor shall ensure implementation of

an effective combination of the following BMPs in Tables 8 (BMPs at Construction sites 5 acres or greater) in

addition to the ones identified in Table 6 (BMPs at Construction sites less than 1 acre) and Table 7 (BMPs at Construction sites 1 acre or greater but less than 5 acres) at all construction sites 5 acres and greater to prevent erosion and sediment loss, and the discharge of construction wastes. For all construction sites one acre or greater, the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP to the Agency for review and certification as the Local SWPPP.

7-8.6.2.4 Enhanced Construction BMP Implementation Construction sites located on hillsides, adjacent or directly discharging to CWA 303(d) listed waters for siltation or sediment, and directly adjacent to Environmentally Sensitive Areas are termed “high risk sites.” Contractor shall implement enhanced practices that preclude impacts to water quality posed by the high risk sites. Contractor shall ensure that high risk sites are inspected by the Qualified SWPPP Developer, Qualified SWPPP Practitioner, or Certified Professionals in Erosion and Sediment Control (CPESC) at the time of BMP installation, at least weekly during the wet season, and at least once each 24 hour period during a storm event that generates runoff from the site, to identify BMPs that need maintenance to operate effectively, that have failed or could fail to operate as intended.

During the wet season, the area of disturbance shall be limited to the area that can be controlled with an effective combination of erosion and sediment control BMPs. Enhanced sediment controls should be used in combination with erosion controls and should target portions of the site that cannot be effectively controlled by standard erosion controls described above. Effective sediment and erosion control BMPs proposed by the Contractor shall include the BMPs listed in Table 9 (Enhanced Construction BMP Implementation) of the NPDES MS4 Permit. The Contractor shall implement the BMPs listed in Table 9 unless shown unnecessary. Also, the Contractor shall retain records of the inspection and a determination and rationale of the BMPs selected to control runoff.

VCSS 44 08/25/17

7-8.6.3 Plan.

7-8.6.3.1 The SWPCP, required for construction projects less than one acre, shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of current Ventura County NPDES MS4 Permit No. CAS004002 and County Ordinance No. 4142.

7-8.6.3.2 The SWPPP, required for construction projects one acre or greater, shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of the state’s General Construction Permit NPDES Permit CAS000002, Ventura Countywide Stormwater Quality Management Program, NPDES MS4 Permit No. CAS004002, and County Ordinance No. 4142.

7-8.6.3.3 The SWPCP/SWPPP shall identify potential pollutant sources on the construction site that may affect the quality of discharges, whether non-stormwater or stormwater, from the site and design the use and placement of water pollution control measures, BMPs, to effectively prohibit the entry of pollutants from the site into the storm drain system during construction. At a minimum, and depending on the size of the project area, the SWPCP/SWPPP will include all appropriate minimum BMPs as required by the Ventura Countywide Stormwater Quality Management Program, NPDES MS4 Permit No. CAS004002 (Tables 6 through 9). The SWPCP/SWPPP must utilize the measures recommended in the California Stormwater Quality Association (CASQA) Stormwater BMPs Handbook for Construction (January 2003 version until July 1, 2010 and 2009 version after July 1, 2010). Starting July 1, 2010 SWPPP shall be prepared by QSD as defined in the NPDES Permit CAS000002. The Contractor shall complete, sign and submit the SWPCP/SWPPP for review and final approval by the Project Engineer, prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed as provided in 6-7.4.

7-8.6.3.4 For all construction projects one acre and greater, the Contractor shall submit the SWPPP to the Agency for review and certification as Local SWPPP in accordance with NPDES MS4 Permit No. CAS004002 prior to the Notice to Proceed as provided in 6-7.4.

7-8.6.4 Measures. All water pollution control measures shall conform to the requirements of the submitted SWPCP/SWPPP. If circumstances during the course of construction require changes to the original SWPCP/SWPPP, a revised SWPCP/SWPPP shall be promptly submitted to the Project Manager in each instance. The SWPPP shall be amended or revised by QSD. A copy of the current SWPCP/SWPPP including revisions and amendments shall be kept at the site to ensure that field personnel has access to the current document at all times. If measures being taken are inadequate to control water pollution effectively, the Project Manager may direct the Contractor to revise the operations and no further work shall be performed until adequate water pollution control measures are implemented. Effective September 2, 2011, implementation of the SWPPP shall be overseen by the Contractor’s QSP as defined in the General Construction Permit NPDES No. CAS000002. All work installed by the Contractor in connection with the SWPCP/SWPPP but not specified to become a permanent part of the Work shall be removed and the site restored in so far as practical to its original condition prior to completion of the Work.

7-8.6.4.1 Post-Construction Standards; Contractor shall ensure that applicable post-construction standards are implemented to meet applicable project requirements of the Ventura County NPDES MS4 Permit and General Construction Permit NPDES No. CAS000002 (effective September 2, 2012).

7-8.6.4.2 Active Treatment Systems; Contractor shall comply with requirements of the General Construction Permit NPDES No. CAS000002 for active treatment systems as applicable.

7-8.6.5 Monitoring and Reporting

7-8.6.5.1 Monitoring; In accordance with the General Construction Permit NPDES No. CAS000002, the Contractor shall develop and implement monitoring program for Risk Level 2 and 3 sites. In addition at Risk Level 3 sites, contractor shall perform receiving water monitoring to meet Permit requirements.

7-8.6.5.2 Reporting; the Contractor shall ensure that all submittals and reports are prepared and submitted to the RWQCB in accordance with the applicable Permits. At minimum the reports will include Annual Report (for applicable projects due September 1st), Rain Event Action Plan (due 48 hrs prior to the rain event for the applicable projects), Numeric Action Levels (NAL) Exceedance Report (as required), Numeric Effluent Limitations (NELs) Violation Report (within 24 hours after NEL exceedance is identified). Contractor shall submit required reports to the Project Manager for review and approval prior to submittal to the RWQCB.

7-8.6.6 Dewatering Activities.All dewatering activities shall be performed in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements issued by the Los Angeles Regional Water Quality Control Board, including specific requirements contained in the Waste Discharge Requirements (WDR) when issued for the Work.

VCSS 45 08/25/17

7-8.6.7 Payment. The Contract lump sum price for water pollution control shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, services and incidentals and for doing all work involved in water pollution control as specified herein. Payment for water pollution control will be made as the Work proceeds, and is in compliance with the approved Water Pollution Control Plan, on the following basis.

Partial payment estimate (excluding mobilization &

water pollution control payments) as a percentage of

the original Contract price (excluding the

mobilization & water pollution control Bid items).

Cumulative amount of water pollution control pay

item earned is the lesser of the amounts as

computed by these two columns.

Equal to or greater than Less than Percentage of water

pollution control pay item

Percentage of the

original Contract total.

5 10 10 1

10 20 20 2

20 50 50 3

50 Completion of Work 75 5

Completion of Work 100

Where no Bid item is provided for water pollution control, payment for water pollution control shall be considered to be included in the other Bid items.

7-8.7 Drainage Control. The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the Work areas. Earth dams will not be permitted in paved areas. Temporary dams of sandbags, asphaltic concrete or other acceptable material will be permitted when necessary to protect the Work, provided their use does not create a hazard or nuisance to the public. Such dams shall be removed from the site as soon as their use is no longer necessary.

7-8.8 Final Cleaning. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all waste materials and rubbish from and about the project, as well as all tools, construction equipment, temporary facilities, machinery, and surplus materials.

At completion of construction and just prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior and exterior of the buildings, including hardware, floors, roofs, sills, ledges, glass, or other surfaces where debris, plaster, paint, spots, and dirt or dust may have collected. All glass shall be washed clean and polished. Remove all grease, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes.

The Contractor shall use only experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. It shall use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned, and use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material manufacturer.

It shall broom-clean all paved surfaces and rake-clean other surfaces of grounds.

The Contractor shall replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction, and clean all ducts, blowers, and coils if air conditioning units were operated without filters during construction.

After cleaning, the Contractor shall maintain the building in a clean condition until it is accepted by the Agency.

VCSS 46 08/25/17

7-9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of public and private property adjacent to the Work and shall exercise due caution to avoid damage to such property.

The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing improvements within the right-of-way which are not designated for removal (e.g., curbs, sidewalks, driveways, fences, walls, signs, utility installations, pavement, structures, etc.) which are damaged or removed as a result of its operations. When a portion of a sprinkler system within the right-of-way must be removed, the remaining lines shall be capped. Repairs and replacements shall be at least equal to existing improvements and shall match them in finish and dimension.

Maintenance of street and traffic signal systems that are damaged, temporarily removed or relocated shall be done in conformance with 307-1.5.

Trees, lawns, and shrubbery that are not designated to be removed shall be protected from damage or injury. If damaged or removed because of the Contractor's operations, they shall be restored or replaced in as nearly the original condition and location as is reasonably possible. Lawns shall be reseeded and covered with suitable mulch.

The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to occupants or owners of adjacent property to permit them to salvage or relocate plants, trees, fences, sprinklers and other improvements which are designated for removal and would be destroyed because of the Work.

All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, and restoring existing improvements shall be absorbed in its bid.

In existing buildings, all surfaces, equipment, furniture and other property shall be protected from loss or damage by or as result of the Contractor's operations. The Contractor shall replace damaged property or shall repair and restore it to its previous condition. Patching, painting, replacement of wall, ceiling and floor covering and similar Work shall be done in such a manner that the repaired Work will not be readily noticeable.

7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY

7-10.1 Access.

7-10.1.1 General. The Contractor's operations shall cause no unnecessary inconvenience to the public or businesses in the vicinity of the Work. The Contractor shall have no greater length or quantity of Work under construction than can be properly prosecuted with a minimum of inconvenience to the public and other contractors engaged in adjacent or related work.

The Contractor shall provide continuous and unobstructed access to the adjacent properties unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by Engineer. Work requiring traffic lane closures shall only be performed between the hours specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP. Traffic shall be permitted to pass through the Work site, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP.

7-10.1.1.1 Vehicular Access. Vehicular access to residential driveways shall be maintained to the property line except when necessary construction precludes such access. If backfill has been completed to the extent that safe access may be provided and the street is opened to local traffic, the Contractor shall immediately clear the street and driveways and provide and maintain access.

7-10.1.1.2 Pedestrian Access. Safe, adequate, and ADA compliant pedestrian access shall be maintained unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 7-10.2 Work Area Traffic Control.

7-10.2 Traffic Control

7-10.2.1 General. Work area traffic control shall conform to the California MUTCD, WATCH, or as specified in the Special Provisions. The total length of the traffic control zone shall include a buffer space, advance signing, striping transitions in advance of the Work site, existing striping, signing, and raised medians.

7-10.2.2 Traffic Control Plan.

7-10.2.2.1 General. If so specified in the Special Provisions or on the permit, the Contractor shall submit a TCP in accordance with 2-5.3. The sheets of the TCP shall display the title, phase identification, name of the firm preparing the TCP, name and stamp of the Registered Traffic or Civil Engineer, approval block for each jurisdictional agency, north arrow, sheet number, and number of sheets comprising the TCP. General notes and symbol definitions shall be included when required. Adequate dimensioning shall be provided to allow for proper field installation. The TCP shall be drawn to a 1 inch = 40 feet scale on common size sheets, either 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches, 8-112 inches x 14 inches, 11 inches x 17 inches, or 2-foot x 3-foot plan sheets as dictated by the length of the Work.

The requirements in the Special Provisions shall govern the design of the proposed TCP.

VCSS 47 08/25/17

7-10.2.2.2 Payment. Payment for preparation of the TCP shall be included in the appropriate lump sum Bid items. If no Bid items have been provided, payment shall be included in the various Bid items unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

7-10.3 Haul Routes. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the haul route(s) shall be determined by the Contractor.

7-10.4 Safety.

7-10.4.1 Work Site Safety.

7-10.4.1.1 General. The Contractor shall provide safety measures as necessary to protect the public and workers within, or in the vicinity of, the Work site. The Contractor shall ensure that its operations will not create safety hazards. The Contractor shall provide safety equipment, material, and assistance to Agency personnel so that they may properly inspect all phases of the Work. When asbestos is being removed, the requirements of the CCR Title 8, Div. 1, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4 and Subchapter 7 shall be implemented.

7-10.4.1.2 Work Site Safety Official. The Contractor shall designate in writing a "Project Safety Official" who shall be at the Work site at all times, and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the Contractor's Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) and Code of Safe Practices (CSP). The Project Safety Official shall be available at all times to abate any potential safety hazards and shall have the authority and responsibility to shut down an unsafe operation, if necessary.

7-10.4.2 Safety Orders.

7-10.4.2.1 General. The Contractor shall have at the Work site, copies or suitable extracts of Construction Safety Orders, Tunnel Safety Orders, and General Industry Safety Orders issued by the State Division of Industrial Safety. Prior to beginning any excavation 5 feet in depth or greater, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, the name of the "Competent Person" as defined in CCR, Title 8, Section 1504, in accordance with 2-5.3. The "Competent Person" shall be present at the Work site as required by Cal-OSHA.

7-10.4.2.2 Shoring Plan. Before excavating any trench 5 feet (105m) or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit in accordance with 2-5.3 a detailed working drawing (shoring plan) showing the design of the shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions used for the workers' protection. If the shoring plan varies from the shoring system standards, the shoring plan shall be prepared by a registered Structural or Civil Engineer. The shoring plan shall accommodate existing underground utilities. No excavation shall start until the Engineer has accepted the shoring plan and the Contractor has obtained a permit from the State Division of Industrial Safety. A copy of the permit shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 2-5.3. If the Contractor fails to submit a shoring plan or fails to comply with an accepted shoring plan, the Contractor shall suspend work at the affected location(s) when directed to do so by the Engineer. Such a directive shall not be the basis of a claim for Extra Work and the Contractor shall not receive additional compensation or Contract time due to the suspension.

7-10.4.2.3 Payment. Payment for shoring shall be included in the Bid item provided therefor. Payment for compliance with the provisions of the safety orders and all other laws, ordinances, and regulations shall be included in the various Bid items.

7-10.4.3 Use of Explosives. Explosives may be used only when authorized in writing by the Engineer, or as otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

Explosives shall be handled, used, and stored in accordance with all applicable regulations.

Prior to blasting, the Contactor shall comply with the following requirements:

a) The jurisdictional law enforcement agency shall be notified 24 hours in advance of blasting.

b) The jurisdictional fire department shall be notified 24 hours in advance of blasting.

c) Blasting activities and schedule milestones shall be included in the Contractor's construction schedule per6-1.

For a Private Contract, specific permission shall be obtained from the Agency in writing, prior to any blasting operations in addition to the above requirements.

The Engineer's approval of the use of explosives shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for claims caused by blasting operations.

VCSS 48 08/25/17

7-10.4.4 Hazardous Substances. An MSDS as described in CCR, Title 8, Section 5194, shall be maintained at the Work site for all hazardous material used by the Contractor. Material usage shall be accomplished with strict adherence to California Division of Industrial Safety requirements and all manufacturer warnings and application instructions listed on the MSDS and on the product container label. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer if a specified product cannot be used under safe conditions. 7-10.4.5 Confined Spaces. 7-10.4.5.1 Confined Space Entry Program (CSEP). The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing, administering and maintaining a CSEP in accordance with CCR, Title 8, Sections 5156, 5157 and 5158.

Prior to the start of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a CSEP in accordance with 2-5.3. The CSEP shall address all potential physical and environmental hazards and contain procedures for safe entry into confined spaces such as the following:

a) Training of personnel

b) Purging and cleaning the space of materials and residue

c) Potential isolation and control of energy and material inflow

d) Controlled access to the space

e) Atmospheric testing of the space

f) Ventilation of the space

g) Special hazards consideration

h) Personal protective equipment

i) Rescue plan provisions

The submittal shall include the names of the Contractor's personnel, including each Subcontractor's personnel, assigned to the Work that will have CSEP responsibilities, their CSEP training, and their specific assignment and responsibility in carrying out the CSEP.

7-10.4.5 Confined Spaces.

7-10.4.5.1 Confined Space Entry Program (CSEP). The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing, administering and maintaining a CSEP in accordance with CCR, Title 8, Sections 5156, 5157 and 5158.

Prior to the start of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a CSEP in accordance with 2-5.3. The CSEP shall address all potential physical and environmental hazards and contain procedures for safe entry into confined spaces such as the following:

a) Training of personnel.b) Purging and cleaning the space of materials and residue.c) Potential isolation and control of energy and material inflow.d) Controlled access to the space.e) Atmospheric testing of the space.f) Ventilation of the space.g) Special hazards consideration.h) Personal protective equipment.i) Rescue plan provisions.The submittal shall include the names of the Contractor's personnel, including each Subcontractor's

personnel, assigned to the Work that will have CSEP responsibilities, their CSEP training, and their specific assignment and responsibility in carrying out the CSEP.

7-10.4.5.2 Permit-Required Confined Spaces. Entry into permit-required confined spaces as defined in CCR, Title 8, Section 5157 may be required as a part of the Work. Manholes, tanks, vaults, pipelines, excavations, or other enclosed or partially enclosed spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. The Contractor shall implement a permit-required CSEP prior to performing any work in a permit-required confined space. A copy of the permit shall be available at all times for review by the Contractor and the Engineer at the Work site.

7-10.4.5.3 Payment. Payment for the CSEP shall be included in the Bid items for which the CSEP is required.

7-10.5 Security and Protective Devices.

7-10.5.1 General. Security and protective devices shall consist of fencing, steel plates, or other devices as specified in the Special Provisions to protect open excavations

7-10.5.2 Security Fencing. The Contractor shall completely fence open excavations. Security fencing shall conform to 304-3.5. Security fencing shall remain in place unless workers are present and construction operations are in progress during which time the Contractor shall provide equivalent security..

VCSS 49 08/25/17

7-10.5.3 Steel Plate Covers. The Contractor shall provide steel plate covers as necessary to protect from accidental entry into openings, trenches, and excavations.

7-11 PATENT FEES OR ROYALTIES. The Contractor shall absorb in its Bid, the patent fees or royalties on any patented article or process which may be furnished or used in the Work. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Agency harmless from any legal action that may be brought for infringement of patents.

7-12 ADVERTISING. The names of contractors, subcontractors, architects, or engineers, with their addresses and the designation of their particular specialties, may be displayed on removable signs. The size and location of such signs shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

Commercial advertising matter shall not be attached or painted on the surfaces of buildings, fences, canopies, or barricades.

7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. The Contractor shall keep fully informed of State and National laws and County and Municipal ordinances and regulations which in any manner affect those employed in the Work or the materials used in the Work or in any way affect the conduct of the Work. It shall at all times observe and comply with all such laws, ordinances and regulations.

7-13.1 Mined Materials. Mined material from California surface mines, used on the Work, shall be from a mine identified in the list published by the California Department of Conservation (referred to as 3098 List), as required by Public Contract Code 20676. This list is available on the Internet at www.conservation.ca.gov/OMR/ab_3098_list/index.htm.

7-14 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code provides: "In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700] of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the public works contract or subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the contractor, without further acknowledgement by the parties."

7-15 RECYCLABLE CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTES. Ventura County Ordinance Code Section, 4421 et seq, requires that if any recyclable solid wastes or marketable reusable materials will be generated on the site of the Work within the unincorporated areas of Ventura County, the Contractor shall prepare a Construction & Demolition Debris Waste Diversion Plan and submit it to the Ventura County Public Works Agency, Water & Sanitation Department - Integrated Waste Management Division (IWMD). The Contractor shall prepare and file Construction & Demolition Debris Waste Diversion Reporting Forms as required by the IWMD.

For projects within the unincorporated areas of Ventura County, the Contractor shall submit an IWMD Form B-Recycling Plan approved by IWMD prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed as provided in 6-7.4.

For projects within the unincorporated areas of Ventura County, the Contractor shall submit an IWMD Form C-Reporting Form approved by IWMD prior to the Engineer preparing the final estimate as provided in 9-3.2.

If the site of the Work is within an incorporated city, the Contractor shall comply with all the recycling, solid waste diversion, and hauling requirements of that incorporated city.

7-16 BLANK

7-17 LOSS OR DAMAGE TO THE WORK. The Contractor is responsible for delivering to the Agency Work completed in accordance with the Contract except as provided in 7-18. Should the Work being constructed be damaged by fire or other causes before Acceptance by the Agency, it shall be replaced in accordance with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications without additional expense to the Agency. The Agency does not carry "Course of Construction" insurance on the Work. Contractor should arrange for its own insurance to protect its interests.

7-18 ACTS OF GOD. As provided in Section 7105 of the California Public Contract Code, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the cost of repairing or restoring damaged portions of the Work determined to have been proximately caused by an act of God in excess of 5 percent of the contracted amount, provided that the Work damaged was built in accordance with accepted and applicable building standards and the Specifications and Drawings. The Contractor shall obtain insurance to indemnify the Agency for any damage to the Work caused by an act of God if the premium of said insurance coverage is called for as a separate bid item in the bidding schedule for the Work. For purposes of this section, the term "acts of God" shall include only the following occurrences or conditions and effects: earthquakes in excess of a magnitude of 3.5 on the Richter Scale, and tidal waves.

VCSS 50 08/25/17

SECTION 8 - FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL

8-1 GENERAL. A field office shall be provided when required by the Plans or Special Provisions. The field office shall be at a suitable location approved by the Engineer.

A field office shall be a weather-tight building of suitable proportions with 16 m2 (120 sq. ft.) of floor area, at least one door, and a window area of 2 m2 (22 Sq. Ft.). A field office may be a building or a separate room in a building the Contractor may be required to provide or that it may desire to provide for its own use. In either case, the room shall have a separate exterior door. All doors shall be provided with hasps for padlocks.

The office shall be convenient to the Work. It shall be adequately heated, ventilated, electrically lighted, and provided with telephone service, all at the expense of the Contractor or plant owner. Offices are for the exclusive use of Agency personnel, unless otherwise provided herein.

Field offices at the worksite shall be removed upon completion of the Work.

All costs incurred in furnishing, maintaining, servicing, and removing a field office required at the Work site shall be included in the price bid for such item. If such item is required by the Plans or Specifications and no bid item is provided in the Proposal, the costs shall be absorbed in the other items for which bids are entered. Buildings and equipment furnished by the Contractor at the Work site under the provisions of this section are the property of the Contractor.

The first progress payment will not be approved until all facilities are in place and fully comply with the Specifications.

8-2 EQUIPMENT FOR FIELD OFFICES. Unless otherwise specified, a field office shall be equipped with:

Plan table, 0.75 m x 1.5 m (2 1/2 ft. x 5 ft.) or larger Plan rack, capacity to hold two sets of project Plans plus all shop drawings Desk and chair Two lockers with hasps for padlocks

VCSS 51 08/25/17

SECTION 9 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

9-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK

9-1.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, quantities of work shall be determined from measurements or dimensions in horizontal planes. However, linear quantities of pipe, piling, fencing, and timber shall be considered as being the true length measured along longitudinal axis.

Unless otherwise provided in Specifications, volumetric quantities shall be the product of the mean area of vertical or horizontal sections and the intervening horizontal or vertical dimension. The planimeter shall be considered an instrument of precision adapted to measurement of all areas.

9-1.2 Methods of Measurement. Materials and items of Work which are to be paid for on the basis of measurement shall be measured in accordance with the methods stipulated in the particular sections involved.

9-1.3 Certified Weights. When payment is to be made on the basis of weight, the weighing shall be done on certified platform scales or, when approved by the Engineer, on a completely automated weighing and recording system. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate licensed weighmaster's certificates showing actual net weights. The Agency will accept the certificate as evidence of weights delivered.

9-1.4 Units of Measurement. Measurements shall be in accordance with 1-4.1 and 1-4.2. A metric ton or “tonne” is equal to 1000 kilograms and the unit of liquid measure is a Liter (in U.S. Standard Measures, a pound is an avoirdupois pound; a ton is 2000 pounds avoirdupois; and the unit of liquid measure is a gallon).

9-2 LUMP SUM BID ITEMS. Items for which quantities are indicated as "Lump Sum", "L.S." or "Job" shall be paid for at the price indicated in the Proposal. Such payment shall be full compensation for the items of Work and all Work appurtenant thereto.

When required by the Specifications or requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer within 15 Days after award of Contract, a detailed schedule in triplicate, to be used only as a basis for determining progress payments on a lump sum contract or any designated lump sum bid item. This schedule should equal in total the lump sum bid and shall be in such form and sufficiently detailed as to satisfy the Engineer that it correctly represents a reasonable apportionment of the lump sum. If Mobilization or Water Pollution Control are included in the detailed schedule, those items will be paid for as provided in 9-3.4.2 and 7-8.6.4, receptively.

9-3 PAYMENT

9-3.1 General. The quantities listed in the Bid schedule will not govern final payment unless identified by Agency on the Proposal as [F]. The symbol "[F]" indicates that the quantities shown on the Proposal form are the final pay quantities. Payment to the Contractor (except those items identified as [F]) will be made only for the actual quantities of Contract items constructed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Upon completion of construction, if the actual quantities show either an increase or decrease from the quantities given in the Bid schedule, the Contract Unit Prices will prevail subject to the provisions of 3-2.2.1. Payment for those items identified as [F] will be based on the quantities shown on the Proposal unless changed as provided in 3-2.2.1.

The unit and lump sum prices to be paid shall be full compensation for the items of work and all appurtenant work, including furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals.

Payment for items shown on the Plans or required by the Specifications, for which no pay item is provided,

shall be considered included in the prices named for the other items shown on the Proposal.

Payment will not be made for materials wasted or disposed of in a manner not called for under the Contract. This includes rejected material not unloaded from vehicles, material rejected after it has been placed and material placed outside of the Plan lines. No compensation will be allowed for disposing of rejected or excess material.

Whenever any portion of the Work is performed by the Agency at the Contractor's request, the cost thereof shall be charged against the Contractor, and may be deducted from any amount due or becoming due from the Agency.

Whenever immediate action is required to prevent injury, death, or property damage, and precautions which are the Contractor's responsibility have not been taken and are not reasonably expected to be taken, the Agency may, after reasonable attempt to notify the Contractor, cause such precautions to be taken and shall charge the cost thereof against the Contractor, or may deduct such cost from any amount due or becoming due from the Agency. Agency action or inaction under such circumstances shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor or its Surety from liability.

VCSS 52 08/25/17

9-3.1 General. (Continued)

Payment shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract; nor shall such payment be construed to be Acceptance of any of the Work. Payment shall not be construed as the transfer of ownership of any equipment or materials to the Agency. Responsibility of ownership shall remain with the Contractor who shall be obligated to store, protect, repair, replace, rebuild, or otherwise restore any fully or partially completed work or structure for which payment has been made; or replace any materials or equipment required to be provided under the Contract which may be damaged, lost, stolen or otherwise degraded in any way prior to completion of the Work under the Contract, except as provided in 6-10.

Warranty periods shall not be affected by any payment but shall commence on the date equipment or material is placed into service at the written direction of the Engineer. In the event such items are not placed into service prior to partial or final completion of the Work, the warranty periods will commence on the date set forth as the date of field completion in the Engineer's acknowledgement of completion.

If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the Agency, due to the Contractor's failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment to the Contractor in accordance with applicable laws.

At the expiration of 35 Days from the date of recording of the Notice of Completion, or as prescribed by law, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the Agency will be paid to the Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be further retained.

9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. The Engineer will, after award of Contract, establish a closure date for the purpose of making monthly progress payments. The Contractor may request in writing that such monthly closure date be changed. The Engineer may approve such request when it is compatible with the Agency's payment procedure.

Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the Work performed to the closure date and, as a basis for making monthly payments, estimate its value based on the Contract Unit Prices or as provided for in 9-2. When the Work has been satisfactorily completed, the Engineer will determine the quantity of Work performed and prepare the final estimate.

Work not conforming to the Contract Documents shall not be measured for payment.

Conformance with the Contract Documents shall be, in addition to constructing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor's compliance with those portions of the Contract Documents not directly related to the completed Work, including but not limited to: construction and maintenance of detours; diversion and control of water; protection and repair of existing facilities of the Agency and adjacent owners; site maintenance; coordination with utilities and other contractors on the site; proper survey procedures and records; obtaining required permits and inspections; complying with working hour limitations; providing a Contractor's representative while Work is being performed; complying with environmental requirements; maintaining access and safety for users of facilities that are to remain in service during construction; and obeying all laws affecting the Work.

Payment for Extra Work will be made only on approved Daily Extra Work Reports with supporting documentation as required in 3-3.

From each progress estimate, 5 percent will be deducted and retained by the Agency, and the remainder less the amount of all previous payment will be paid to the Contractor.

No progress payment made to the Contractor or its sureties will constitute a waiver of the liquidated damages under 6-9.

VCSS 53 08/25/17

9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. (Continued)

As provided for in Sections 22300 of the California Public Contract Code, the Contractor may substitute securities for any monies withheld by the Agency to ensure performance under the Contract. In substituting securities, the Contractor may either:

a. Deposit qualifying securities already owned by the Contractor with the Escrow prior to the Contractpayment date, or

b. Direct the Agency to send retained funds to the Escrow to be invested by the Escrow in qualifyingsecurities as directed by the Contractor.

9-3.2.1 Release of Withheld Contract Funds. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, Contractor has the option to deposit securities with an Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by Agency pursuant to the construction Contract between the Agency and the Contractor. A form of Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits in Lieu of Retention has been adopted by the Agency as one of the Contract Documents; procedures for implementing the provisions of the Escrow Agreement are contained in Escrow Instructions which shall become effective upon exercise of the option by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall take the following steps if it desires to substitute securities: a. Execute the Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits in Lieu of Retention.b. Furnish to the Escrow Agent a power of attorney and other forms necessary to empower

the Escrow Agent to convert the securities to cash.c. Furnish to the Escrow Agent the securities described.d. Pay the Escrow Agent's fees and costs.

When the Contractor deposits with the Escrow Agent securities in lieu of money required to be withheld from progress payments, a sum of money equivalent to the current cash value of the securities as determined by the Escrow Agent shall be released to the Contractor by, or upon the direction of, the Agency.

If the total of the money plus the current cash conversion value of securities on deposit should fall below the aggregate amount of the sums required to be withheld from progress payments pursuant to 9-3.1 and 9-3.2, an amount equal to the difference shall be withheld from the next regular progress payment in addition to the amount which would ordinarily be withheld pursuant to 9-3.1 and 9-3.2. If the next regular progress payment is less than the total of the amounts to be withheld therefrom, the Contractor shall immediately either deposit with the Agency cash in the amount of the difference or deposit with the Escrow Agent additional securities having a current cash conversion value equal to or greater than the difference.

The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any such securities on deposit with the Escrow Agency and shall be entitled to any interest earned thereon prior to conversion. The Agency may direct the Escrow Agency to convert securities with the Escrow Agency into cash, and to deliver the cash to the Agency, in any case where the Contractor is in default, including the following:

a. where the Agency would be entitled to use funds withheld pursuant to 9-3.1 and 9-3.2 to satisfyclaims of workers, materials suppliers or subcontractors, or to complete or correct work which theContractor has failed or refused to complete or correct, or

b. where the Contractor has failed to comply with the requirements of this section respecting thedeposit of additional cash or securities to make up for a fall in the value of securities already ondeposit with the Escrow Agency.

The Agency may hold and use cash resulting from such a conversion of securities in the same manner as it would be entitled to hold and use funds withheld pursuant to 9-3.1 and 9-3.2.

9-3.2.2 Timely Progress Payments. As required by Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the Contractor is informed that should a progress payment not be made within 30 Days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted payment request from the Contractor, the Agency shall pay interest to the Contractor on the unpaid amount at the rate set forth in the Code of Civil Procedures, Section 685.010(a). Agency shall promptly review payment requests, and if not determined to be proper, document to the Contractor, within 7 Days, the reasons why the request is not proper.

Contractor should refer to the code sections cited for further information.

VCSS 54 08/25/17

9-3.3 Delivered Materials. Payment for the cost of materials and equipment delivered to the Work site but not incorporated in the Work will be included in the progress estimate if, prior to the closure date for the monthly progress payment, the material or equipment is listed by the Contractor on the Agency's form together with date of delivery, vendor's or Subcontractor's name and cost; is accompanied by a copy of an invoice showing the cost thereof; has an aggregate cost in excess of $5,000 for each progress payment; is currently on the Work site at an approved location and in good condition; and is one of the following:

1. Precast concrete units weighing more than 100 kilograms (200 pounds) each.

2. Structural steel members weighing more than 100 kilograms (200 pounds) each.

3. Individual pieces of electrical equipment costing over $1,000 each.

4. Individual pieces of mechanical equipment costing over $1,000 each.

5. Reinforced concrete pipe of any size.

6. Storm drainage pipe 900 mm (36") in diameter and larger.

7. Water and sewer pipe 300 mm (12") in diameter and larger.

8. Finish hardware for doors.

9. Other individual items of equipment costing over $1,000 each

10. Materials where the aggregate value of a single type of material exceeds $1,000 and is either:

a) Fabricated or cut to fit the Work before delivery, or

b) Of a size or type not available from any manufacturer without a special production run.

On unit price Bid items, the amount paid for materials or equipment delivered but not incorporated in the Work shall not exceed 75% of the amount of the Bid item which includes such material or equipment.

On lump sum Bid items, the amount paid for materials and equipment delivered and not incorporated in the Work shall not exceed 75% of the item in the approved schedule submitted in accordance with 9-2 of which such materials or equipment is a part.

Should materials or equipment previously paid for be damaged, destroyed, stolen or removed from the Work site, the payment previously made therefor will be deducted from the next progress payment, unless such materials or equipment are replaced prior thereto.

On the closure date for progress payments, as provided in 9-3.2, the Contractor shall certify that all materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work, for which payment has previously been made or is being requested, is still at the Work site and in good condition. Failure to provide such certification will be cause for deducting previous payments for materials not incorporated in the Work from the amount due the Contractor in the progress payment.

Payment for materials or equipment, as provided herein, shall not constitute approval or acceptance thereof nor shall such payment modify or abridge any of the rights the Agency has under the Specifications or at law nor relieve the Surety of any of its obligations under the bonds.

9-3.4 Mobilization

9-3.4.1 Scope. Mobilization includes preliminary services, work and operations, including but not limited

to, furnishing required bonds, obtaining necessary permits and work areas, providing a specified field office, the

movement of labor, supplies, equipment and incidentals to the Work site, and for all other work, services and

operations which must be performed or for which costs are incurred prior to performing work of the other Contract

items.

VCSS 55 08/25/17

9-3.4.2 Payment. The Contract lump sum price bid for mobilization shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, services and incidentals and for doing all work involved in mobilization as specified herein. Payment for mobilization will be made as the Work proceeds on the following basis except that where a field office is required by the Specifications, no payment for mobilization will be made until the specified field office has been provided:

Partial payment estimate (excluding mobilization &

water pollution control payments) as a percentage of

the original Contract price (excluding the

mobilization & water pollution control Bid items).

Cumulative amount of mobilization pay item earned

is the lesser of the amounts as computed by these

two columns.

Equal to or greater than Less than Percentage of

mobilization pay item

Percentage of the

original Contract total.

5 10 50 5

10 20 75 7.5

20 50 95 9.5

50 Completion of Work 100 10

Completion of Work 100

Where no Bid item is provided for mobilization, payment for mobilization shall be considered to be included in the other Bid items.

9-4 TERMINATION OF AGENCY LIABILITY. After completion of all work required by the contract, Agency will furnish Contractor a Release on Contract form stating the amount of total authorized payments for the project. Contractor shall execute and return said form within 21 days of receipt. Said form shall release and discharge the Agency from all claims of and liability to the Contractor for all manner of debts, demands, accounts, claims, and causes of action under or by virtue of said Contract except:

a. The claim against the Agency for the remainder, if any, of the amounts retained as provided in 9-3.2, andany amounts retained as required by Stop Notices or Labor Code provisions.

b. Any unsettled claims or disputes listed on the Release on Contract form which has been processed incompliance with the requirements for making claims under the Contract, including given timely noticepursuant to the applicable provisions of the Contract and following the procedure set forth in 6-12.

Acceptance of the Release on Contract by the Agency shall not be deemed a waiver or release of the Agency's right to contest either the substantive or procedural validity of any listed unsettled claims or disputes.

When executing the Release on Contract, the Contractor shall certify that each unsettled claim or dispute listed thereon has been processed in compliance with the requirements for making claims under the Contract, including giving timely notice pursuant to the applicable provisions of the Contract and following the procedures for resolution of disputes or claims set forth in 6-12 and that acceptance of the Release on Contract by the Agency shall not be deemed a waiver or release of the Agency's right to contest either the substantive or procedural validity of any listed unsettled claims or disputes.

If Contractor fails to execute and submit a Release on Contract within the 21 day time period set forth above, the Release on Contract shall be deemed to have been submitted with no unsettled claims or disputes listed on the Release on Contract. A payment of $1.00 will be made to the Contractor for such Release on Contract and waiver.

VCSS 56 08/25/17

SECTION 10 - DIVERSION, CONTROL AND REMOVAL OF WATER

10-1 DESCRIPTION. This section covers the diversion, control and removal of all water entering into the construction area or otherwise affecting construction activities.

10-2 REQUIREMENTS. All permanent construction shall be performed in a site free from water unless otherwise provided for in the Special Provisions. The Contractor shall construct, maintain, and operate all necessary cofferdams, pumps, channels, flumes, drains, well points and/or other temporary diversion, protective, and water removal works required for diversion, control and removal of all water, whether surface or groundwater, whatever its source, during construction.

Inundation of partially completed Work due to lack of control during non-working periods will not be permitted, and may be cause for requiring removal and replacement of Work already completed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the use of any property in addition to that provided for in the Plans and Specifications, which may be required for the diversion, protective, and water removal works so as not to create a hazard to persons or property or to interfere with the water rights of others.

It shall be understood and agreed that the Contractor shall hold the Agency and the Engineer harmless from legal action taken by any third party with respect to construction and operations of the diversion and protective works.

10-3 DIVERSION AND CONTROL WORKS. Prior to beginning of work involving diversion, control and removal of water, the Contractor shall submit a

water control plan to the Engineer. In the event circumstances during the course of construction require changes to the original water control plan, a revised water control plan shall be promptly submitted to the Engineer in each instance. No responsibility shall accrue to the Engineer or the Agency as a result of the plan or as a result of knowledge of the plan. Construction and operation of the diversion, control and removal works shall be in accordance with the water control plan submitted, except deviations therefrom may be specifically approved by the Engineer.

All works installed by the Contractor in connection with dewatering, control, and diversion of water but not specified to become a permanent part of the Work, shall be removed and the site restored, insofar as practical, to its original condition prior to completion of construction or when directed by the Engineer.

10-4 PAYMENT. No separate Bid item is included. Payment for this item of Work will be considered to be included in the payments made for other items of Contract Work to which water control is incidental.

VCSS 57 08/25/17

PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

SECTION 200 - ROCK MATERIALS

200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS

200-1.6 Stone for Riprap

200-1.6.1A Alternate Stone for Riprap. As an alternate to the requirements of Subsection 200-1.6, the sample may be subject to the following tests:

TESTS TEST METHOD NO. REQUIREMENTS

Apparent Specific Gravity ASTM C 127 2.40 Min.

Resistance to Abrasion ASTM C 535, Grading 1 35% Max.

Soundness Section 211-8 10% Max.

Wet and Dry Loss Section 211-9 5% Max.

Solubility Section 211-10 No Loss

All rock shall be angular or subangular in shape. Angular shall be defined as having sharp corners and straight planes on all faces, with no evidence of wear caused by wind, water or abrasion. Subangular shall be defined the same as angular except that evidence of wear by wind, water or abrasion may be allowed. Determination of angularity will be made by the Engineer.

200-1.6.2 Riprap Size

The individual classes of rock used for riprap shall conform to the following:

RIPRAP CLASSES

Rock Sizes

1-Tonne (1-Ton)

½-Tonne (½-Ton)

¼-Tonne (¼-Ton)

Light Facing Cobble

PERCENTAGE LARGER THAN

2-Tonne (2-Ton) 0-5

1-Tonne (1-Ton) 50-100 0-5

½-Tonne (½-Ton) 50-100 0-5

¼-Tonne (¼-Ton) 90-100 50-100 0-5

100-kg (200-lb) 90-100 50-100 0-5

35-kg (75-lb) 90-100 90-100 50-100 0-5

10-kg ( 25-lb) 90-100 95-100

0.5-kg (1-lb) 100 100 100 100 100 100

The amount of material smaller than the smallest size listed in the table for any class of riprap shall not exceed the percentage limit listed in the table determined on a weight basis.

Compliance with the percentage limit shown in the table for all other sizes of the individual pieces of any class of riprap shall be determined by the ratio of the number of individual pieces larger than the specified size compared to the total number of individual pieces larger than the smallest size listed in the table for that class.

Flat or needle shapes will not be accepted unless the thickness of individual pieces is greater than 1/3 the length.

Before placing in final location, depositing, or stockpiling within the project limits, each individual load of riprap must meet the size requirements of the class specified.

VCSS 58 08/25/17

SECTION 206 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS

206-3 GRAY IRON AND DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS

206-3.3.2A Manhole Frame and Cover Sets

Unless otherwise specified, manhole frames and covers shall be in accordance with the following Standard Plans contained in the SPPWC:

Clear Opening Diameter

mm (Inches) SPPWC Plan No.

Catalog Numbers

Alhambra Foundry Long Beach Iron Works

600 (24) 630-1 A-1495 X-162

675 (27) 631-1 A-1496 X-164

750 (30) 632-1 A-1497 X-163

900 (36) 633-1 A-1498 X-106A

206-5 METAL RAILINGS.

206-5.2 Flexible Metal Guard Rail Materials.

206-5.2A Flexible Metal Guard Rail Materials; Modification. The "Construction" grade Douglas Fir for "posts, including blocks" does not have to be "free of heart center".

SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

210-6 STORM DRAIN HARDWARE. All storm drain hardware, including manhole frames and covers, grates, protection bars, steps, etc., shall be protected from corrosion.

Storm drain hardware made of cast iron shall be protected by painting with, or dipping in, a commercial grade asphalt paint. Storm drain hardware made of steel shall be galvanized.

VCSS 59 08/25/17

SECTION 211 - MATERIAL TESTS

211-6 SIEVE ANALYSIS. Sieve analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C136.

211-7 Sand Equivalent Test. This test is intended to serve as a field test to indicate the presence or absence of plastic fine material. The test shall be run in accordance with Calif. test 217 or ASTM D2419. When testing material containing asphalt, this test method shall be modified by drying the sample at a temperature not exceeding 38°C (100°F).

211-8 R-VALUE. Resistance (R-value) shall be determined by California Test 301.

211-9 SPECIFIC GRAVITY AND ABSORPTION. Apparent specific gravity, bulk specific gravity and absorption shall be determined by California Test 206, 207, 208, 209, 224, 225, or 308, Method C where zinc stearate may be substituted for paraffin.

211-10 LOS ANGELES RATTLER TEST. Loss in Los Angeles Rattler shall be determined by California Test 211.

211-11 SOUNDNESS. For riprap, the soundness shall be determined in accordance with Calif. Test 214, excluding sections D, E, G.2.b, and H, and adding the following:

a. The test sample shall be prepared by breaking or sawing a representative sampling of riprap into particlespassing the 75 mm (three inch) and retained on the 50 mm (two inch) sieve. If there are a variety of rocktypes or degrees of weathering within a rock type, each unique type or condition must meet the lossrequirement.

b. The test sample size shall be 25,000 grams (55 lbs.) ± 1 percent.

c. All particles of test sample which break into three or more pieces during testing shall be discarded. Theremaining sample shall be washed on a 4.75 mm (#4) sieve and all particles retained shall be oven dried.

d. The loss in weight shall be determined by subtracting from the original weight of the test sample the finalweight of all particles retained on the 4.75 mm (#4) sieve. Divide the loss in weight by the original weight andmultiply by 100 to determine the percent loss.

e. Report the following:

(1) The percent loss.

(2) The number of pieces affected, classified as to number disintegrating, splitting, crumbling, cracking, flaking, etc.

211-12 WET AND DRY LOSS. Wet and dry loss shall be determined as follows:

A sample of rock shall be crushed, screened, oven dried, and 1,000 g (2.2 lbs.) to 1,500 g (3.3 lbs.) of the 19 mm (3/4 inch) to 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) fraction shall be taken for the test.

The crushed and graded sample shall be submerged in tap water for 8 hours at room temperature, after which the sample shall be drained and oven dried at 78°C (140°F). When dry, the sample shall be cooled to room temperature. This completes one cycle.

After 10 cycles, the percent loss shall be computed as follows:

% Loss = 100 x Weight of Material Passing 4.75 mm (No. 4) Sieve

Total Weight of Sample

211-13 SOLUBILITY. Approximately 0.5 kg (one pound), air dried samples shall be immersed in local tap water and in Pacific Ocean water (or a 3.5% sodium chloride solution) for 8 hours each at 78°C (140°F). After immersion, the samples shall be washed with tap water, air dried and reweighed.

211-14 Permeability Test. Permeability tests for granular soils shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D2434, using samples compacted to the specified field density.

VCSS 60 08/25/17

PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

SECTION 301 - TREATED SOILS, SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS

301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

301-1.3 Relative Compaction

301-1.3.1 Firm, Hard and Unyielding. The term "firm, hard and unyielding" as used in 301-1.3 shall mean that when the heaviest construction and hauling equipment used on the Work drives over the subgrade, no permanent deformation shall occur either before or during pavement construction.

301-1.4 Subgrade Tolerances. Subgrade for pavement, sidewalk, curb and gutter, driveways, or other roadway structures shall not vary more than 15 mm (0.05 feet) from the specified grade and cross section. Subgrade for subbase or base material shall not vary more than 15 mm ( 0.05 feet) from the specified grade and cross section.

Variations within the above specified tolerances shall be compensating so that the average grade and cross section specified are met.

301-2 UNTREATED BASE

301-2.3 Compacting

301-2.3.1 Tolerances. The tolerance requirement in 301-2.3 is modified from 6 mm (0.02 foot) to 15 mm (0.05 foot).

SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING

302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

302-5.1 General

302-5.1.1 Asphalt Concrete Berms. Asphalt concrete berms shall be constructed of Class III-D-PG70-10 asphalt concrete by mechanical means to conform to the details and location as shown on the Plans.

A tack coat, as provided in 302-5.4, shall be applied to the existing or new pavement preceding the placement of the asphalt concrete berms.

302-5.4 Tack Coat

302-5.4.1 Fog Seal. When specified, a fog seal consisting of material meeting the requirements of 203-3 shall be applied to the surfaces of all completed asphalt concrete at the rate of 0.36 liter per square meter (0.08 gallon per square yard) of the combined emulsion or such lesser rate ordered by the Engineer. Surface to be sealed shall be free from dust, dirt, and other foreign material. Surface shall be sealed within 7 Days after paving.

302-5.9 Measurement and Payment

302-5.9.1 Measurement and Payment for Asphalt Berm. Asphalt concrete berms will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per linear meter (feet) of berm in place. No separate measurement or payment will be made for asphalt, aggregate, or tack coat.

302-5.9.2 Measurement and Payment for Fog Seal, Tack Coat, and Prime Coat. Measurement and payment for the specified material shall be by the tonne (ton) in place. Emulsions shall be measured after the specified dilution has been made.

VCSS 61 08/25/17

SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GUTTERS, CROSS GUTTERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS,

ACCESS RAMPS AND DRIVEWAYS

303-5.1 Requirements

303-5.1.4 Concrete Substitution. Class 280-C-14 (470-C-2000) may be used in lieu of Class 310-C-17 (520-C-2500) and Class 280-D-14 (470-D-2000) in lieu of Class 310-D-17 (520-D-2500) as specified in 201-1.1.2 for street surface improvements, excluding concrete pavement, when no class is specified on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

SECTION 306 - UNDERGROUND CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION

306-1 OPEN TRENCH OPERATIONS

306-1.2 Installation of Pipe

306-1.2.1 Bedding

306-1.2.1.1 Bedding Material. When native material is allowed for backfill in the bedding zone, no rocks larger than 40 mm (1½") in maximum dimensions shall be included. Material containing ashes, cinders, and types of refuse or other deleterious material shall not be used as bedding.

306-1.2.1.2 Sewer Pipe Bedding. Bedding for sewer pipe from 100 mm (4") below the pipe to the spring line (horizontal diameter) of the pipe shall be free draining, granular material with a maximum size of 15 mm (1/2 inch), unless another bedding method is shown on the Plans.

Densification of the bedding material may be by the application of water or by mechanical means. Unless otherwise specified, all bedding material shall be densified to a relative density of 90%. Acceptability of densification in the bedding zone will be determined by visual inspection and probing to determine that no voids exist in the backfill material. In this paragraph, the word "voids" does not include intergranular voids in the soil structure.

306-1.2.1.3 Flexible Pipe Bedding. Bedding for flexible drainage and sewer pipe shall be granular material having a sand equivalent of at least 50. The bedding material shall be placed and compacted from 150 mm (six inches) below the pipe to the top of the bedding as defined in 306-1.2.1. A 1 m (three foot) long section of

low permeability material (50% passing 75 µm (200) sieve) shall be installed and mechanically compacted in lieu of the above specified bedding material at intervals of 60 m (200 feet) or as otherwise indicated on the Plans.

306-9 DISINFECTION. All water mains and appurtenances shall be disinfected before being placed in service in accordance with AWWA C651 except as specified herein:

a. The water mains shall be chlorinated so that a chlorine residual of not less than 20 ppm remains in thewater after standing in the pipe for 24 hours.

b. The Agency will perform sampling and testing of bacteriologic samples. Disinfection shall be repeateduntil two or more consecutive samples are negative for coliform organisms.

The pressure in the line being chlorinated shall be maintained at least 35 kPa (5 psi) lower than that existing in any Agency line to which it is connected.

VCSS 62 08/25/17

306-10 WATERWORKS APPURTENANCES

306-10.1 Valves. Valves shall be located as shown on the drawings.

Each valve shall be operated prior to its installation to assure proper functioning. Valves shall be installed plumb and in alignment with the water main. Valves shall be anchored by metal ties to a concrete base. Line valves may be moved to the closest joint upon approval of the Engineer.

306-10.2 Valve Boxes. Each underground valve shall be provided with a valve box. The valve boxes shall be installed plumb and centered over the operating nut of the valve. Valve boxes shall be installed with concrete collars.

Where valve boxes are to be placed in asphaltic type pavement, they shall not be set to grade until after paving has been completed.

Where valve boxes are to be placed in concrete pavement, they shall be set to grade prior to paving operations.

306-10.3 Thrust Devices. A reaction or thrust device shall be provided on all dead ends, tees, elbows, and bends with more than 5 degrees deflection on pressure pipe lines.

Thrust devices shall be cast-in-place concrete, poured against undisturbed or compacted earth. Thrust devices shall be sized and constructed in accordance with the Plans.

Thrust devices and anchor blocks shall be constructed of Class 280-C-14 (420-C-2000) concrete. Thrust devices and anchor blocks shall be cured at least 7 Days where Type IP or II cement is used or at least 48 hours where Type III cement is used.

Metal tie-rods or clamps shall be of adequate strength to prevent movement of pipe. All metal shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C110.

306-10.4 Fire Hydrants. Fire Hydrants shall be installed as shown on the Plans.

All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with or at right angles to the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb, except that hydrants having only two hose nozzles 90 degrees apart shall be set with each nozzle facing the curb at an angle of 45 degrees.

In uncurbed public road rights of way, fire hydrants shall be located as far as possible from the traveled way while providing a 1 m (3-foot) wide clear space between the fire hydrant and the right of way line. In curbed public road rights of way, fire hydrants shall be installed so that there is 300 mm (12 inches) clear between the face of curb and the fire hydrant.

306-10.5 Fire Hydrant Barricades. Fire hydrant barricades shall consist of 100 mm (4-inch) standard steel pipe, schedule 40, filled with concrete, and having a total length of 2 m (72 inches). They shall be embedded in concrete blocks 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter and 1000 mm (40 inches) deep below ground surface with the barricade pipe embedded to 100 mm (4 inches) above the bottom of the concrete so 1 m (36 inches) extends above ground surface. The steel pipe above ground shall be painted chrome yellow in accordance with AWWA C503.

Barricades shall be installed between the fire hydrant and vehicle traffic paths at locations indicated on the Plans or where required by the water purveyor or Fire Department. Barricades shall not be installed within public road rights of way.

Fire hydrant barricades shall not obstruct the hydrant outlets.

VCSS 63 08/25/17

SECTION 310 - PAINTING

310-5 Painting Various Surfaces

310-5.6 Painting Traffic Striping, Pavement Markings, and Curb Markings.

310-5.6.8A Application of Paint - Two Coats All painted traffic striping and markings shall be applied in two coats. The price named in any Bid item for painting traffic striping and markings shall include all costs for both applications, including any delays entailed for the required drying time between applications. If bleeding, curling or discoloration occurs following application of the second coat, unsatisfactory areas shall be given an additional coat, or coats, of paint. No additional payment will be made for work necessary to correct bleeding, curling or discoloration.

VCSS 64 08/25/17

PART 4

SECTION 400 - ALTERNATE ROCK PRODUCTS,

ASPHALT CONCRETE, PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE AND UNTREATED BASE MATERIAL

400-1 Rock Products

400-1.1 Requirements

400-1.1.1 General

Alternate rock material, Type S, as specified in Section 400 may be used on the Work.

400-3 Portland Cement Concrete

Suppliers of portland cement concrete shall file mix designs as required by 400-1.1.2

400-4 Asphalt Concrete

Suppliers of asphaltic cement concrete shall file mix designs as required by 400-1.1.2

VCSS 65 08/25/17

ACCORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE

VCSS 66 VCSS 66 08/25/17

APPENDEX A ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE-

APPENDIX B-1 CONSTRUCTION ELEMENT VS. TIME CHART FORM

VCSS 67 08/25/17

APPENDIX B-2 WORK COMPLETE VS. TIME CHART FORM

VCSS 68 08/25/17

APPENDIX C-1 CONSTRUCTION ELEMENT VS. TIME CHART SAMPLE

VCSS 69 08/25/17

APPENDIX C-2 WORK COMPLETE VS. TIME CHART SAMPLE

VCSS 70 08/25/17

APPENDIX D ESCROW AGREEMENT FORM SAMPLE

ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION

This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between ("Agency") whose address is and ("Contractor") whose address is and ("Escrow Agent") whose address is .

For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the Agency, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows:

(1) Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, Contractor has the option to deposit securities with Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by Agency pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into between the Agency and Contractor for

in the amount of dated , (hereinafter referred to as the "Contract") which Contract is identified by Spec. No. and Auditor Controller's Contract No. . Alternatively , on written request of the Contractor, the Agency shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the Agency within ten days of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be at least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the Contract between the Agency and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of , and shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial owner.

(2) The Agency shall make progress payments to the Contractor for those funds which otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.

(3) When the Agency makes payments of retentions earned directly to Escrow Agent, the Escrow Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until such time as the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the Agency pays the Escrow Agent directly.

(4) Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by Escrow Agent in administering the escrow account. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by the Agency, Contractor and Escrow Agent.

(5) The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the Agency.

(6) Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from Agency to the Escrow Agent that Agency consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.

(7) The Agency shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven days' written notice to the Escrow Agent from the Agency of the default, the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the Agency.

(8) Upon receipt of written notification from the Agency certifying that the Contract is final and complete, and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to the Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.

(9) Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the Agency and the Contractor pursuant to Sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this Agreement and the Agency and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from Escrow Agent's release and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above.

VCSS 71 08/25/17

(10) The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written notice on behalf of the Agency and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:

On behalf of Agency:

______________, Director, Public Works Agency

______________, Director Central Services Department

______________, Director Engineering Services Department

On behalf of Contractor:

Title

Name

Signature

Street Address

City & State Zip Code

Address for all of the above: Public Works Agency 800 South Victoria Avenue Ventura, CA 93009

On behalf of Escrow Agent:

Title

Name

Signature

Street Address

City & State Zip Code

At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the Agency and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the date first set forth above.

Agency: Contractor: (Agency name) (Contractor company name)

Title Title

Name Name

Signature Signature

SA

MP

LE

FO

RM

Fo

rm

used

fo

r escro

w

wil

l h

ave

nam

es

an

d

sig

natu

res o

f p

ers

on

s a

uth

ori

zed

in

acco

rdan

ce

wit

h p

ara

gra

ph

10.

VCSS 72 08/25/17

EXHIBIT "A" ESCROW INSTRUCTIONS

The parties to this escrow are ("Agency") and ("Contractor") and ("Escrow Agent"). Agency and Contractor have entered into a contract for the construction of which contract is identified by Spec. No.

and Auditor-Controller's Contract No. and was entered into by and between Agency and Contractor ("Construction Contract"). Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, Contractor may substitute certain securities for an equivalent amount of money required to be withheld from progress payments by Agency to Contractor pursuant to the Construction Contract.

The Escrow Agent is hereby instructed as follows:

1. Contractor may deliver to Escrow Agent:

(a) Securities of the types specified in Sections 22300 of the Public Contract Code and Section 16430 of the Government Code.

(b) Such other documents as are necessary to enable Escrow Agent to convert such securities into cash.

2. Upon receipt of such securities and other documents, Escrow Agent shall notify Agency within ten days of thedeposit, and shall examine them to determine whether they are in a form sufficient to effect conversion of thesecurities into cash. Escrow Agent shall thereupon send written notice of its determination to Agency.

3. Escrow Agent shall hold such securities as trustee for Agency. The right of Agency to such securities is superior toany other lien or claim of lien; provided, however, that Contractor shall be entitled to any interest earned by suchsecurities prior to their conversion to cash pursuant to section 5 hereof, and further provided that such interest maybe withdrawn by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to Agency.

Securities may be substituted by Contractor, but any securities substituted for securities previously deposited shallnot reduce the current cash value of securities held below that last reported to Agency by Escrow Agent.

4. Escrow Agent shall determine the current cash value of such securities held by it as of the close of business on thefirst business day following the day of each month and, in addition, on any other days which the Agency may from time to time specify in a written notice to Escrow Agent. Current cash value shall be determined as follows:

(a) For securities traded over-the-counter or on a stock exchange:

(1) Determine either the current bid price for the securities as of the close of business or the face value of the securities, whichever is less.

(2) Subtract the cost of sale (broker commission).

(3) Subtract all unpaid escrow fees and costs associated therewith.

(b) For certificates of deposit:

(1) Determine the face amount.

(2) Subtract the potential interest penalty for immediate conversion.

(3) Subtract all unpaid escrow fees and costs associated therewith.

(c) Determine the value of other securities by procedures calculated to determine net realizable value. Promptly upon making each such determination, Escrow Agent shall notify Agency of the securities held and current cash value of such securities.

VCSS 73 08/25/17

5. At any time or times that Agency believes it has a right to do so under the provisions of the Construction Contract,Agency may, without the consent of Contractor, deliver to Escrow Agent a written demand that Escrow Agent convertto cash all or any part of such securities. Upon seven days' written notice from Agency of such demand, EscrowAgent shall convert to cash all or part of such securities as demanded and shall distribute the cash as instructed bythe Agency.

6. When the Construction Contract has been satisfactorily completed on the part of Contractor and any stop noticesfiled against the Construction Contract have been released, Agency shall give written notice to Escrow Agent thatsuch securities may be returned to Contractor. Upon receipt of such written notice and payment of all escrow feesand costs, the Escrow Agent shall deliver to Contractor all money, interest, securities and other documentsremaining in escrow and the escrow shall terminate.

7. Contractor, and not Agency, shall be liable to Escrow Agent for all of Escrow Agent's fees and costs associated withthis escrow.

8. The Director of the Ventura County Public Works Agency, a Department Director of said Agency, or other personauthorized in writing by such Director or Department Director is authorized to give written notice and to make writtendemands on behalf of Agency pursuant to sections 4, 5 and 6 hereof.

9. All written notices and demands pursuant to the escrow agreement and these Instructions shall be addressed asfollows:(a) To Agency:

Director, Ventura County Public Works Agency 800 South Victoria Avenue Ventura, California 93009

(b) To Contractor:

(c) To Escrow Agent:

DATED:

By By By

Title Title Title

AGENCY CONTRACTOR ESCROW AGENT Bank Charter: State [ ]

Federal [ ] Escrow Agent's Address:

VCSS 74 08/25/17

APPENDIX E BLANK

VCSS 75 08/25/17

APPENDIX F RELEASE ON CONTRACT FORM

RELEASE ON CONTRACT

CONTRACT NAME: ________________________________________________

SPEC. NO. __________, PROJECT NO. _________

WHEREAS, by the terms of the contract dated ____ _, 20___ entered into by________________________________

_________________________________and the undersigned CONTRACTOR,

__________________________________

__________________________________

__________________________________

undersigned CONTRACTOR agreed to perform certain work for the compensation specified in said contract; and

WHEREAS, the CONTRACTOR represents that said work is fully completed and that final payment is due to theCONTRACTOR under terms of said contract,

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises and the payment by [AGENCY NAME] to the CONTRACTORof the amount due under the contract, to wit, the sum of $_____________ and the additional consideration of $1.00,receipt of which is hereby acknowledged by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR hereby releases and foreverdischarges __________________ of and from all manner of debts, dues, demands, sum or sums of money,accounts, claims and causes of action, in law and in equity, under or by virtue of said contract except the claimagainst the Agency for the remainder, if any, of the amounts retained as provided in 9-3.2, any amounts retained asrequired by Stop Notices or Labor Code Provisions, and any unsettled claims or disputes as follows: (If none, leaveblank)

Date of NoticeDescription of Claim Date of of Potential

or Dispute Amount Claim Claim

The CONTRACTOR certifies that each unsettled claim or dispute listed hereon has been processed in compliancewith the requirements for making claims under the contract, including giving notice pursuant to the applicableprovisions of the contract, and following the procedures for resolution of disputes or claims set forth in subsection 6-12 of the contract. Acceptance of this Release on Contract by the [Agency Name] shall not be deemed as a waiver orrelease of its right to contest either the substantive or procedural validity of any listed unsettled claims or disputes.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the hand and seal of the CONTRACTOR have beenhereunto set this day of , 20___.

THIS FORM MUST BE ACCOMPANIEDby a proper acknowledgement form Contractor(See Civil Code Section 1189)

By

Title

VCSS 76 08/25/17

APPENDIX G SAMPLE PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORMBond No.

SURETY BONDS

PERFORMANCE BONDWhereas, the «Agency», hereinafter called "Agency", and «Contr», hereinafter called "principal", have entered into a contract dated

«ContrDate» whereby principal agrees to complete certain designated work identified as project «ProjName» (Spec. No.«SpecNo»), and toperform other duties and obligations as described in said contract, which is incorporated herein by this reference and made a part hereof; and

Whereas, principal is required under the terms of said contract to furnish a bond to guarantee principal’s faithful performance of thework and all terms and conditions of the contract;

Now, therefore, we the principal and the undersigned, as corporate surety, are held and firmly bound unto Agency in the penal sumof «CostText» ($«OrigCostFmtd») lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bindourselves, our heirs, successors, executors and administrators, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

The condition of this obligation is such that if the principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in allthings stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions, and provisions in the said contract and anyalteration thereof made as therein provided, on principal's part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, andin all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless Agency, its officers, agents and employees,as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect.

The above obligation shall continue after Agency’s acceptance of the work for the duration of the warranty period as specified in thecontract during which time if principal fails to make full, complete, and satisfactory repair or replacement to the work and/or fails to protectAgency from loss or damage resulting from or caused by defective materials or faulty workmanship, the obligation of surety hereunder shallcontinue so long as any obligation of principal remains.

PAYMENT BONDAnd, whereas, under the terms of said contract, principal is required before entering upon the performance of the work, to file a

good and sufficient payment bond with the Agency to secure the claims to which reference is made in Title 3 (commencing with Section 9000)of Part 6 of Division 4 of the Civil Code of the State of California.

Now, therefore, said principal and the undersigned, as corporate surety, are held firmly bound unto the Agency and all contractors,subcontractors, laborers, material suppliers and other persons employed in the performance of the aforesaid contractand referred to in the aforesaid Civil Code in the like sum of «CostText» dollars ($«OrigCostFmtd») for materials furnished or labor thereon ofany kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Act with respect to such work or labor, or for any amounts required to bededucted, withheld and paid over to the Franchise Tax Board from the wages of employees of the contractor and the contractor'ssubcontractors, that said surety will pay the same in an amount not exceeding the amount hereinabove set forth, and also in case suit isbrought upon this bond, will pay, in addition to the face amount thereof, costs and reasonable expenses and fees including reasonableattorney's fees incurred in successfully enforcing such obligation, to be awarded and fixed by the court, and to be taxed as costs and to beincluded in the judgment therein rendered.

It is hereby expressly stipulated and agreed that this bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies andcorporations entitled to file claims under Title 3 (commencing with Section 9000) of Part 6 of Division 4 of the Civil Code, so as to give a rightof action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond.

Should this condition of this bond be fully performed, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be andremain in full force and effect.

GENERAL TERMSThe surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of said contract or the

plans and specifications accompanying the same shall in any manner affect its obligations on these bonds, and it does hereby waive notice ofany such change, extension, alteration or addition.

Nothing herein shall limit the Agency’s rights or surety’s obligations under the contract or applicable law, including, withoutlimitation, California Code of Civil Procedure section 337.15.

In witness whereof, this instrument has been duly executed by the principal and surety above named

on , , 20 .

«Contr»Name of Principal

By

Title

Name of Surety

By Attorney-in-Fact

Address

City State Zip

INDICATE COMPLETE ADDRESS OF SURETY TO WHICHCORRESPONDENCE CONCERNING THIS BOND SHOULD BEDIRECTED.

Telephone No.

A-467/9-Tmpl

SAMPLE BOND FORMAgency will prepare the Bond in this format andtransmit it to the Contractor along with theContract and the Notice of Award letter.

Surety shall fill in the Bond No., date identification and

signature of surety in places provided.

Contractor shall sign and indicate title in placeprovided.

VCSS 77 08/25/17

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION – THOUSAND OAKS 34 CP21-01

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 0001 General Requirements 01 1000 Summary 01 2513 Substitutions 01 2610 Request for Information 01 3119 Project Meetings 01 3123 Web Based Construction Management 01 3216 Project Schedule 01 3301 Submittals 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 4213 Abbreviations 01 4216 Definitions 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5723 Storm Water Pollution Control 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 6501 Delivery and Storage 01 7135 Restoration of Improvements 01 7300 Execution 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7401 Cleaning 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7836 Warranties and Guarantees 01 7839 Project Record Documents 01 7843 Spare Parts 01 7900 Demonstration and Training 01 8001 Quality Assurance

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 0516 Underslab Vapor Barrier 03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 3511 Concrete Floor Finishes 03 4500 Precast Architectural Concrete

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 2000 Unit Masonry 04 2001 Masonry Veneer

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 3619 Composite Metal Sheathing 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 5000 Metal Fabrications


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 2 of 4

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 2000

Finish Carpentry

06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework 06 6100 Cast Polymer Fabrications 06 6420 Plastic Paneling 06 8316 Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 1300 Sheet Waterproofing 07 2100 Board and Batt Insulation 07 2500 Weather Barriers 07 4114 Metal Roof Panels 07 4210 Composite Framing Support Clip System (CFS) 07 4243 Composite Wall Panels 07 5400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 7123 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 07 7200 Roof Accessories 07 9200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels 08 3513 Four-Fold Doors 08 3613 Sectional Doors 08 4313 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 5113 Aluminum Windows 08 7100 Door Hardware 08 8000 Glazing 08 8300 Mirrors 08 9100 Louvers

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2236.23 Metal Lath 09 2400 Cement Plastering 09 3000 Tiling 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings 09 6500 Resilient Flooring 09 6566 Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 9113 Exterior Painting 09 9123 Interior Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 1100 Visual Display Units 10 1124 Tackable Wall Systems 10 1400 Signage 10 1410 Architectural Dimensional Lettering 10 2601 Wall and Corner Guards 10 2813 Toilet, Bath, & Laundry Accessories


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 3 of 4

10 2819 Tub and Shower Enclosures 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties 10 5100 Lockers 10 7500 Flagpoles

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 3013 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 2116 Vertical Louver Blinds 12 2400 Window Shades 12 3600 Countertops 12 9313 Bicycle Racks

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 1313 Wet-Pipe Fire Sprinkler System DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

21 0000 Plumbing DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 0000 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning 23 0013 General Mechanical Requirements

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 0500 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0534 Cabinets 26 0536 Cable Trays 26 0546.13 Electric Utility Systems 26 0546.16 Telephone Utility Systems 26 0546.19 Cable Television (CATV) Utility Systems 26 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 26 0553 Identification of Electrical Systems 26 0573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination 26 0900 Controls and Instrumentation 26 0943 Network Lighting Controls 26 2413 Service and Distribution Switchboard 26 2416 Panelboards 26 2726 Wiring Devices 26 4300 Surge Protection Devices (SPD) 26 5100 Building Lighting, Interior 26 5600 Exterior Lighting 26 5670 Lighting Acceptance Testing


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 4 of 4

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 1300 Intercommunication Systems DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

27 3100 Fire Sprinkler Monitoring and Alarm System DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 1000 Site Clearing 31 2200 Grading 31 2300 Temporary BMPs and Erosion Control 31 2316 Excavation 31 2316.13 Trenching 31 2323 Fill

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 0505 Selective Demolition for Exterior Improvements 32 1123 Aggregate Base Courses 32 1216 Asphalt Paving 32 1313 Concrete Paving 32 1600 Stabilized Decomposed Granite Paving 32 1723.13 Painted Pavement Markings 32 1726 Tactile Warning Surfacing 32 1816.13 Playground Protective Surfacing 32 3113 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 3119 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 3300 Site Furnishings 32 4000 Landscape Boulders and Stone 32 8423 Irrigation System 32 9300 Plants

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 0110.58 Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems 33 1416 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 3113 Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping 33 4211 Stormwater Gravity Piping 33 5613 Above Ground Fuel-Storage Tanks


01 0001 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 0001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. The following items, reference, supplement, modify, change, delete from, or add to theVentura County Standard Specifications (VCSS), Part 1 - General Provisions, Sections 1through 10. Where any portion of the General Provisions is modified, or any paragraph,subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted, unaltered provisions remain in effect.

1. Reference VCSS 1-2 Definitions. Comply with additional requirements of Section 01 4216.

2. Abbreviations to paragraph VCSS 1-3.1. Refer to Section 01 4213 for additionalabbreviations.

3. Reference VCSS 2-5.3 Submittals. Comply with additional requirements of Section 013301.

4. Reference VCSS 2-5.4 Record Drawings. Comply with the additional requirements ofSection 01 7839.

5. Reference VCSS 3-3.2.3 Mark-up. Comply with the modifications in 01 0001-1.018Changes in Work.

6. Reference VCSS 4-1.2 Protection of Work and Materials. Comply with additionalrequirements of Section 01 6501.

7. Reference VCSS 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. Comply with additional requirements ofSection 01 2513 for methods of requesting approval for "or equal" materials or methods.

a. Add the following paragraph to VCSS 4-1.6.1 “When one or more than onemanufacturer is listed as acceptable in a specification section, the first manufacturerand/or product listed is the basis for development of the Contract Documents, andestablishes the required minimum standard of quality. This is also the basis for theindicated size and dimensions of the product and/or equipment. If a manufacturerand/or product other than first listed is used, then the Contractor shall bear all costsof redesign and changes in construction necessary to adapt the presented equipmentor product to the Work."

8. Reference VCSS 6-8.6 Written Guarantee. Comply with additional requirements ofSection 01 7836.

9. Reference VCSS 6-13.1 Working Hour Limitations. Comply with additional requirementsof Section 01 1000.

10. Reference VCSS 7.5.3.2 Contractor Furnished Permits. Deferred approvals noted on thetitle sheet of the drawings require the Contractor's preparation of plans and calculationsto obtain approval of permits from all Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) in addition tothe basic permits arranged for by the Agency as provided in VCSS 7-5.3.1. Contractorshall take action in a timely manner to obtain such approvals or permits so as not to delaycompletion of the Work beyond the time provided in VCSS Sections 6-7. Contractor shall


01 0001 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 4

include all costs and consider the time required to obtain approvals or permits in the Contract price bid.

11. Reference VCSS 7-8.1 Cleanup and Dust Control. Comply with the additional provisionsof Section 01 7401.

12. Reference VCSS 7-8.4 Sanitation. Comply with additional requirements of Section 015000, Paragraph 1.04.

13. Reference VCSS 7-8.5 Temporary Light, Power and Water. Comply with additionalrequirements of Section 01 5000.

1.02 CONFERENCE

A. Pre-Bidding Conference. A non-mandatory pre-bidding conference will be held at the time and location indicated on page 1 of the Proposal. None of the information transmitted at this meeting will be construed in any way to modify the plans and specifications. Any modification will be forwarded to all plan holders as an addendum.

B. Pre-Construction Conference. The Engineer will schedule a pre-construction conference after Notice of Award.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship to produce Work of specified quality as indicated in Section 01 8001.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current as of date of Contract Documents.

1.05 BARRIERS AND FENCING

A. Construct and maintain barricades for the following: As required by local authorities andState safety ordinances; as required to protect the Agency's property from injury or loss; asrequired for the protection of the public; and as required as indicated on the drawings.

1.06 (NOT USED)

1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Project meetings shall be held as stipulated in Section 01 3119.

1.08 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Tests and inspections shall be performed per the provisions of Section 01 4000.

1.09 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Comply with the provisions of Section 01 6501.

1.010 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS AND INSTRUCTION

A. Comply with the provisions of Section 01 7900.


01 0001 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Page 3 of 4

A. The project shall be cleaned per the provisions of Section 01 7401, in addition to that which is

mentioned in VCSS Section 7-8.1 of the General Provisions.

1.012 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish operation and maintenance data per Section 01 7823.

1.013 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide spare parts and maintenance materials per the provisions of Section 01 7843.

1.014 SUMMARY OF PROJECT

A. The Project Work and other provisions will be as indicated in Section 01 1000.

1.015 (NOT USED)

1.016 (NOT USED)

1.017 LABOR COMPLIANCE SOFTWARE

A. The County of Ventura has implemented, and maintains, a labor compliance software service program called “LCP Tracker”.

B. Contractors and subcontractors shall keep accurate payroll records in accordance with Labor Code Section 1776 and shall furnish weekly certified payrolls for their workers and shall input their certified payroll records electronically using LCP Tracker within 7 days following the end of the preceding week.

C. NOTE: This requirement is in addition to the State of California requirement to upload payrolls into the State DIR electronic system. However, LCP Tracker has the functionality to upload the submitted payrolls directly to the State DIR electronic system.

D. In bidding on the project, it shall be bidder’s responsibility to evaluate the cost of complying with the above-referenced LCP Tracker requirements.

E. Agency will provide materials and information to assist the Contractor with using LCP Tracker.

1.018 CHANGES IN WORK

A. Refer to VCSS Section 3 and add the following sub-section:

3-6 CHANGE ORDERS 3-6.1 Signed Change Orders. By signing the Contract Change Order (CCO), the Contractor agrees to the total cost and time, if applicable, of the contract modification, and will accept as full payment for all costs related in any way to the signed Change Order. This shall also constitute full compensation for any extended Overhead or General Condition costs attributed as a result of this change.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)


01 0001 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Page 4 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


01 1000 – SUMMARY Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.2. Type of Contract.3. Owner-furnished products.4. Use of premises.5. Agency’s occupancy requirements.6. Work restrictions.7. Off-Site Improvements.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Ventura County StandardSpecifications (VCSS), General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Ventura County Fire Station – Thousand Oaks 34

B. Project Location:2977 Mountclef Blvd Thousand Oaks, CA 91360

C. Owner: Ventura County Fire Department

1. Owner's Representative: County of Ventura Public Works Agency “Engineer” and/or"Agency."

D. Architect of Record (AOR):RRM Design Group 3765 S. Higuera St., Suite 102 San Luis Obispo, CA 93401

E. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes site work, offsite work in the public right of way, concrete, masonry,steel framing, casework, thermal and moisture protection, doors and windows, finishes,specialties, fire sprinklers, plumbing and mechanical, electrical and communications, firealarm, and fire station alerting systems to construct the Ventura County Fire Station #34.

2. Fire Sprinkler System, Fire Alarm System, Flagpole and Footing, Fuel DispensingSystem, Photovoltaic system at roof, and site light pole footings are design/build systems.Systems require deferred approvals from the local authority having jurisdiction. TheContractor is responsible for submitting and obtaining approval from the authoritieshaving jurisdiction prior to installing systems. See specification sections for theaforementioned systems for additional requirements.

1.03 TYPE OF CONTRACT



A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract with a lump sum bid.

1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner Furnished Owner Installed Equipment (OFOI): The Contractor is required to install support infrastructure and systems, as shown in the Contract Documents, prior to calling for OFOI equipment installation. Contractor shall comply with the coordination requirements of the Ventura County Standard Specification (VCSS) Section 7-7.

1. OFOI Products provided by the Agency:a. Radio Tower Outfitting (Antennas, mounts, communication equipment and their

installation by others)b. DI Water (Contractor to provide all piping. Final connections by others)c. Dorm Bedsd. Drying Cabinete. Exercise Equipment (For Accessibility reference only)f. Gas BBQ (Contractor to provide all gas piping)g. Ice Machineh. Microwave (Countertop model)i. Office furniture (Herman Mill or Steelcase)j. RO Water (Contractor to provide all piping. Final connections by others)k. Rolling Dry Rackl. Safe (Outlet and data by contractor)m. Site Security (AiPhone at door, 4 cameras, 2 monitors. Conduit by contractor)n. Station Alerting System (All conduit, boxes and speakers by contractor. Cabling and

equipment by others)o. Water Softener (Contractor to provide all piping. Final connections by others)p. Wire Rack

B. Owner Furnished Contractor Installed Equipment (OFCI): The Contractor is required to install equipment noted as OFCI in the contract documents. The Contractor shall comply with the coordination requirements of the Ventura County Standard Specification (VCSS) Section 7-7.

1. OFCI Products provided by the Agency:a. AiPhone (Video intercom set)b. Bike Parkingc. Radio Tower (Magnum 60-ft tower. Foundation, erection, conduit & cabling by

contractor)d. Dishwashere. Dryer (Residential grade)f. Extractor (UniMac UC Series 40lb washer)g. Fire Alarm Monitoring System (All infrastructure, conduit, boxes, etc. by Contractor)h. Generator (Cat)i. Map Cases (48” x 72” apprx.)j. Range (Residential grade)k. Refrigerators (Contractor to provide connection to RO water)l. Shop Cabinets (Moduline)m. Turnout Lockers (Gear Grid. Contractor to provide backing)n. Washer (Residential grade)

C. All other equipment shown in the Contract Documents, except where specifically noted as OFOI or OFCI, shall be Contractor Furnished Contractor Installed (CFCI).

1.05 USE OF PREMISES



A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including useof Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only byAgency's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturbportions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to within the property line boundary indicated onthe drawings, unless noted otherwise. Adjacent vacant site shall not be used.

2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances servingpremises clear and available to Agency, Agency's employees, and emergency vehicles atall times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials

and equipment on-site.

1.06 AGENCY’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Agency Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Agency reserves the right to occupyand to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before SubstantialCompletion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Suchplacement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the totalWork.

1. Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion ofthe Work to be occupied before Agency occupancy.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Agencyoccupancy.

3. Before partial Agency occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fullyoperational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. Onoccupancy, Agency will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems servingoccupied portions of building.

4. On occupancy, Agency will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial servicefor occupied portions of building.

1.07 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during normal business workinghours of 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: As permitted by AGENCY and/or local governing jurisdiction.

2. Early Morning Hours: Comply with regulations by authorities having jurisdiction forrestrictions on noisy work.

3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Comply with regulations established by each utility agencygoverning utility scheduled for shutdown.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Agency orothers unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging toprovide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:



1. Obtain written permission to shutdown a utility from the governing agency for each utilityrequiring a shutdown.

2. Notify AGENCY Project Manager not less than 7 days in advance of proposed utilityinterruptions.

1.08 OFF-SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for off-site work within public right-of-way and within anyand all utility easements in order to bring project utilities to the Utility Providers’ Points ofConnection (POC). The Contractor shall have all licenses and qualifications mandated by theCity of Thousand Oaks, the County of Ventura and by the Utility Providers serving this jobsiteprior to commencing work.



END OF SECTION


01 2513 – SUBSTITUTIONS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 2513 SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 PRODUCT SELECTION - GENERAL

A. Where the Contractor proposes substitutions per the provisions of Ventura County StandardSpecifications Part 1- General Provisions Section 4-1.6 the following conditions shall apply.

B. Listing of a manufacturer implies acceptance of them only as supplier of a product whichcomplies with specified item.

C. Engineer reserves right to require Contractor proposed substitutions to comply with color,pattern, and other characteristics of products of manufacturers listed in specifications.

1.02 REQUESTS FOR "OR EQUAL" SUBSTITUTION

A. Only written requests with complete substantiating data for evaluation will be considered.

1. Request must be received by Engineer not later than 30 calendar days after Notice toProceed or 30 days prior to when item was scheduled for submission under Section 0133 01, paragraph 1.08-A.

2. Requests received late will not be considered.

B. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, Supplier andContractor:

1. Shall have investigated proposed product or method and have determined that it is equalor superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform intended function.

2. Shall provide same warranty for substitute item as for product or method specified.

3. Where substitute manufacturers are provided with different control panels, starters, andelectrical characteristics from scheduled equipment, Contractor shall make installationcomplete and pay all additional costs.

4. Shall waive all claims for additional costs or time related to substitution whichsubsequently become apparent.

5. Shall pay all redesign and other costs resulting from substitution.

6. Shall acknowledge acceptance of these provisions in request.

1.03 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL

A. Submit complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with ContractDocuments.

B. For products:

1. Product identification, including manufacturer's name.

2. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to beconsidered:


01 2513 – SUBSTITUTIONS Page 2 of 2

a. Product description.b. Performance and test data.c. Reference standards.d. Difference in power demand, air quantities, etc.e. Dimensional differences from specified unit.

3. Full size samples if requested by Engineer.

4. Engineer reserves right to retain sample until physical units are installed on project forcomparison purposes. Sample will then be returned to Contractor.

5. Contractor to pay all costs of furnishing and return of samples.

6. Engineer is not responsible for loss of, or damage to, samples.

7. Name and address of at least 5 similar projects and name of representative Engineer cancontact; to discuss product, installation, and field performance data.

C. For construction methods:

1. Detailed description of proposed method.

2. Illustrate with drawings.

D. Itemized comparison of proposed substitute to specified item.

E. Accepted substitutions will not allow any contract time extensions.

F. Cost of proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified.

1.04 REVIEW/APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions will not be approved by Agency if (in Agency's sole judgment):

1. They are not submitted in accordance with this section.

2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents and/or buildingspaces.

3. Request for substitution does not indicate specific item for which request is submitted.

4. They propose acceptance of manufacturer without presenting manufacturer'sproduct/model name or number.



END OF SECTION


01 2610 – REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 2610REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Request for Information/Interpretation (RFI)

1. Form completed in Procore by and submitted by the Contractor requesting clarification ofa portion of the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as RFI.

2. A properly prepared request for information. Interpretation shall include a detailed writtenstatement that indicated the specific Drawings or Specification in need of clarification andthe nature of the clarification requested.

a. Drawings shall be identified by Drawing number and location on the Drawing sheet.b. Specification shall be identified by Section number, page and paragraph.

3. Request for Information: Request made by Contractor concerning items not indicated onDrawing or contained in Specifications that is required to properly perform the Work.

B. Improper and Frivolous RFIs:

1. RFIs that are not properly prepared, or

2. RFIs that request information that is clearly shown on the Contract Documents.

3. Improper or Frivolous RFIs shall be processed by the Consultant at the Consultant’sstandard hourly rate and the Consultant will charge the AGENCY, and such costs will bededucted from monies still due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be notified by theAGENCY prior to the processing of improper RFIs.

1.02 CONTRACTOR’S REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

A. RFI shall be submitted through Procore

1. Forms shall be completely filled-in as indicated by the AGENCY.

2. RFIs numbering will be assigned by Procore.

3. Each page of attachments to RFIs shall bear RFI number and shall be consecutivelynumber in chronological order.

4. If approved by the AGENCY, RFI will be closed in Procore.

B. When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents, the materialprocess or system to be installed, the AGENCY shall be requested to make a clarification ofthe indeterminate item.

C. Contractor shall endeavor to keep the number of RFIs to a minimum. In the event that theprocess becomes unwieldy, in the opinion of the AGENCY, because of the number andfrequency of the RFIs submitted, the AGENCY may require the Contractor to send an emailapproval of draft RFI prior to submitting through Procore.

D. RFIs shall be originated by the Contractor.


01 2610 – REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION Page 2 of 2

1. RFIs from Subcontractors or suppliers shall be submitted through, reviewed by, andsigned by the Contractor prior to submittal to the AGENCY. Otherwise, RFI’s sentdirectly from Subcontractor to AGENCY shall be immediately rejected.

2. RFIs from subcontractors or material suppliers sent directly to the AGENCY shall not beaccepted and will be returned unanswered.

E. Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the requested information is not available therein. RFIs which request information available in the Contract Documents will be deemed “improper” or “frivolous” as noted above.

F. In cases where RFIs are issued to request clarification of coordination issues, the Contractor shall propose the suggested solution using drawings or sketches drawn to scale and attach them to the RFI. RFIs which fail to include a suggested solution may be returned unanswered with a requirement that the Contractor submit a complete request.

G. RFIs shall not be used for the following purposes:

1. To request approval of submittals2. To request approval of substitutions3. To request changes which are known to entail additional cost or credit4. To request different methods of performing Work than those drawn and specified

H. In the event the Contractor believes that a clarification by the AGENCY results in additional cost or time, Contractor shall not proceed with the Work indicated by the RFI until a Contract Change Orders is executed. RFIs shall not justify a cost increase or a change in the Project schedule.

1. Answered RFIs shall not be construed as approval to perform extra Work.

2. Unanswered RFIs will be returned with notation: Not Reviewed or Rejected

I. Contractor shall allow a reasonable time for review and response time for RFIs

1. The AGENCY has a minimum of 10 working Days to respond to RFIs.2. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.



END OF SECTION


01 3119 – PROJECT MEETINGS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 3119 PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. GENERAL

1. Requirements Include:

a. On a periodic basis, during construction, during normal business hours, Contractor'sProject Manager, Superintendent and Subcontractor representatives shall attendmeetings upon request of Engineer or as required in other sections of theSpecifications. Engineer may invite Agency representatives and other parties asEngineer deems appropriate. Engineer will chair the meetings. Engineer will prepareminutes of the meetings, at their sole discretion. Meeting minutes are processed andstored in Procore. Contractor has 10 days from meeting to request revisions orcorrections from the meeting minutes distributed at the weekly meeting. Themeetings shall include:

b. Progress Review Meetings: Held on a periodic basis, usually weekly, to review workin progress, schedule status, issues that are current as of meeting and other mattersraised by Engineer or Contractor. Contractor shall be prepared, at such meetings, topropose and commit Contractor to corrective actions and associated timetables forremediation of Contractor-accountability deviations from Contract requirements, ifapplicable.

c. Miscellaneous Meetings: Held on an as needed basis, as deemed necessary byEngineer or as proposed by Contractor and accepted by Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


01 3119 – PROJECT MEETINGS Page 2 of 2

This Page Left Blank Intentionally


01 3123 – WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 3123 WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The Agency and Contractor shall utilize Procore, a Web-based building project managementsoftware, for electronic submittal of all data and throughout the duration of the Contract.When required by the Agency’s Representative, paper documents will also be provided (e.g.,the signature of Contract Modifications and submission of Contract Claims). In the event ofdiscrepancy between the electronic version and paper documents, the paper documents willgovern.

B. Contractor shall include all costs associated with using this software, including user training,in the Contract bid price. The Agency will provide user profiles to the Contractor.

C. Procore is a registered trademark of Procore Technologies, Inc. Microsoft, Internet Explorer,Outlook, Word, and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

1.02 USER ACCESS LIMITATIONS

A. The Agency’s Representative will control the Contractor's access to Procore by allowingaccess and assigning user profiles only to accepted personnel. User profiles will definelevels of access into the system; determine assigned function-based authorizations(determines what can be seen) and user privileges (determines what they can do).Subcontractors and suppliers may not have direct access to Procore.

1.03 AUTOMATED SYSTEM NOTIFICATION AND AUDIT LOG TRACKING

A. Review comments made (or lack thereof) by the Agency on Contractor submitteddocumentation shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of theContract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for managing, tracking, anddocumenting the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Agencyacceptance via automated system notifications or audit logs extends only to the face value ofthe submitted documentation and does not constitute validation of the Contractor's submittedinformation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Agency Representative’s approval is required for most submittals except submittals forinformation only.

1.05 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall use computer hardware and software that meets the requirements of theProcore system.

B. System Requirements:

1. Operating System: Windows Windows 7 or later and Mac X or later

2. Internet Browser: Google Chrome recommended.



3. Screen Resolution: Minimum 1024 x 768 (Recommended horizontal resolution: 1280 orhigher

4. Minimum Recommended Connection Speed: 30Mbps or above

5. Processor Speed: 1 G and above

6. RAM: 1G and above

7. Recommendation of 32GB of free storage when using Procore app on mobile devices

1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the validity of the information it places in Procore andfor the abilities of their personnel. Accepted users shall be knowledgeable in the use ofcomputers, including Internet Explorer, e-mail programs such as Outlook, word processingprograms such as Word, spreadsheet programs such as Excel, and Adobe PortableDocument Format (PDF) document distribution program. The Contractor shall utilize theexisting forms in Procore to the maximum extent possible. If a form does not exist in Procoreand the Contractor must include as an attachment or by uploading the data file, PDFdocuments will be created through electronic conversion rather than optically scanned.

B. The Contractor is responsible for the training of their personnel in the use of Procore asneeded. All costs associated with the use of this system, will be evenly distributed in theproject overheads and spread across the duration of the contract; a separate cost line itemwill not be allowed. Procore training is available at education.Procore.com Contractor shallprovide completed training certificates for each assigned profile requested.

1.07 CONNECTIVITY PROBLEMS

A. Procore is a web-based environment and therefore subject to the inherent speed andconnectivity problems of the Internet. The Contractor is responsible for its own connectivityto the Internet. Procore response time is dependent on the Contractor's equipment, includingprocessor speed, modem speed, Internet access speed, etc. and current traffic on theInternet. The Agency will not be liable for any delays associated with the use of Procoreincluding, but not limited to: slow response time, down time periods, connectivity problems, orloss of information. Under no circumstances shall the use of the Procore be grounds for atime extension or cost adjustment to the contract.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 UTILIZATION

A. Procore shall be utilized in connection with submittal preparation and informationmanagement required by Section 01 33 01 Submittals, and other Division 01 sections.Requirements of this section are in addition to requirements of all other sections of thespecifications.

1. Design Document Submittals

a. Provide all design drawings and specifications in file formats specified in othersections of the contract documents.



2. Shop Drawingsa. Shop drawing and design data documents shall be submitted as PDF attachments to

the Procore submittal workflow process and form. All PDF shop drawing submittaldocuments shall have the Contractor's review and submittal stamp (includingsignatures) as specified in Section 01 33 01.

i. Standard manufacturer installation drawings.ii. Drawings prepared to illustrate portions of the work designed or developed by the

Contractor.iii. Coordination and Clash Detection Drawingsiv. Steel fabrication, piece, and erection drawings.

3. Product Data

a. Product catalog data and manufacturer's instructions shall be submitted as PDFattachments to the Procore submittal workflow process and form. All PDF productdata submittal documents shall have the Contractor's review and submittal stamp(including signatures) as specified in Section 01 33 01. Examples of product datainclude, but are not limited to:

i. Manufacturer's printed literature.ii. Preprinted product specification data and installation instructions.

4. Samples

a. Sample submittals shall be physically submitted as specified in Section 01 33 01.Contractor shall enter submittal data information into Procore with a copy of thetransmittal form(s) attached to the submittal. Examples of samples include, but arenot limited to:

i. Product finishes and color selection samples.ii. Product finishes and color verification samples.iii. Finish/color boards.iv. Physical samples of materials.

5. Administrative Submittals

a. All correspondence and Preconstruction submittals shall be submitted on Procore.Examples of administrative submittals include, but are not limited to:

i. List of contact personnel.ii. Requests for Information (RFI).iii. Construction Schedules and associated reports and updates.iv. Submittal Register:v. Plans for safety, infection control, demolition, environmental protection, and

similar activities.vi. Quality Control Plan(s), Testing Plan and Log, Quality Control Reports,

Production Reports, Quality Control Specialist Reports, Preparatory PhaseChecklist, Initial Phase Checklist, Field Test reports, Summary reports, ReworkItems List, etc.

vii. Meeting minutes.viii. Any general correspondence submitted.

6. Compliance Submittals



a. Test report, certificate, and manufacture field report submittals shall be submitted onProcore as PDF attachments. Examples of compliance submittals include, but arenot limited to:

i. Field test reports.ii. Quality Control certifications.iii. Manufacturer’s documentation and certifications for quality of products and

materials provided.

7. Record and Closeout Submittals

a. Operation and maintenance data and closeout submittals shall be submitted onProcore as PDF documents during the approval and review stage as specified, withactual set of documents submitted for final. Examples of record submittals include,but are not limited to:

i. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Final documents shall be submitted asspecified.

ii. As-built Drawings: Final documents shall be submitted as specified.iii. Extra Materials, Spare Stock, etc.: Submittal forms shall indicate when actual

materials are submitted.

8. Exceptions

a. Documents with legal consequences, contract modifications, contract claims, securityimplications, and those required by other agencies may require an additionalsubmittal as original hard copy with original signatures and seals. Hard copies ofthese documents shall be submitted as specified or as directed by the Agency’sRepresentative.

END OF SECTION


01 3216 – PROJECT SCHEDULE Page 1 of 11

SECTION 01 3216 PROJECT SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. CONTRACT TIME (or TIME OF COMPLETION): In accordance with Ventura CountyStandard Specifications (VCSS) Part 1 - General Provisions, Sections 6-7, the duration forthe Contractor to complete each portion of the Work as set forth in the Contract.

B. INITIAL SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL: The Schedule shall be submitted concurrently with thesubmittal of the signed Contract, Contract Bonds, and Certificate of Insurance. Oncereceived, reviewed and accepted by the Agency, it will become the Contract Schedule.

C. CONTRACT SCHEDULE: The schedule submitted by Contractor representing the sole workplan for accomplishing the Work. Once the submitted Initial Schedule Submittal is reviewedand accepted, it shall be the base line schedule document that forms the basis of allmeasurements of Contract Time in the Contract Documents. The Contract Schedule may notbe modified other than as called for in this Document.

D. UPDATED PROGRESS SCHEDULE: A schedule submitted periodically reflecting currentwork status of all Work Activities measured against the latest accepted Contract Schedule.An updated progress schedule shall be submitted monthly, at a minimum, prior to eachprogress payment closure date. Processing of the progress payment will be delayed untilsuch revised schedule complying with this section is received.

E. CONTRACTOR’S REQUESTED REVISIONS REPORT: A written statement of anyproposed revisions to the Contract Schedule that modify the Contractor's plan of construction,activity durations, logic or other non-progress related schedule data. The report shall list allsuch changes to the Contract Schedule including a description of the specific change, thereason for the change and the effect the change will have on the scheduled completion date.

F. RECOVERY SCHEDULE: As called for by this section, a schedule produced by theContractor once the Updated Progress Schedule forecasts that the Contractor will not finishthe Work within the tolerances of the Contract Time. Once the Recovery Schedule isreviewed and accepted by the Agency, it will be considered the Contract Schedule.

G. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE: A separate schedule or portion of the Contract Schedulemaintained by the Contractor that reflects the schedule for submission and approval ofSubmittals for materials and equipment as required in the specifications.

H. FLOAT:

1. Float or Total Float shall be defined as the difference between the early finish and latefinish dates for an activity.

2. Project Float shall be defined as the difference, if any, between the Contractor’s plannedFinal Completion date and the Contract Completion date.

3. Negative Float is any such calculated float which results in a “negative” number.



I. WORK ACTIVITY: Any individual task of work shown on a submitted schedule that requirestime and resources (manpower, equipment, materials, etc.) to be completed in a continuousoperation.

J. MILESTONE: An element of the schedule that indicates the beginning or end of a majorevent or phase, or any other important point in the project.

K. LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE: A schedule based on the Updated Progress Schedule thatshows a limited portion of the schedule. The limited portion of the schedule shall show WorkActivities that were performed at least two (2) weeks before and Work Activities planned to beperformed three (3) weeks beyond the date the schedule is presented, or as reasonablyrequested by the Agency. Include submittal number corresponding with the work takingplace.

L. CHANGE ORDER FRAGNET SCHEDULE: A schedule submitted anytime the Contractorrequests an adjustment in the Contract Time. A Change Order Fragnet Schedule shall bebased on the applicable portion of the Contract Schedule that is claimed to be impacted,necessitating and demonstrating an extension of the Contract Time. All modifications to theContract Schedule’s Work Activities and their associated information (including float,duration, logic, manpower, etc.) shall be clearly identified. The Change Order FragnetSchedule submittal shall show and clearly identify the unchanged (“unimpacted”) WorkActivities or Milestones from the Contract Schedule that have logical ties to and from theimpacted activity or chain of impacted activities. The Contract Schedule shall be leftunchanged and a similar portion (i.e., the same Work Activities from the Contract Schedule)shall also be submitted for comparative purposes.

M. CRITICAL WORK ACTIVITY: A Work Activity that, if delayed, will delay the scheduledcompletion of the Work (i.e., Work Activities that comprise the path of least total float). Allother Work Activities are defined as non-critical and considered to have float.

N. BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY: The stage of work in the progress of the Construction Work, asdetermined by Agency’s Representative, when the Construction is complete and inaccordance with the Contract Documents except only for completion of minor items which donot impair Agency’s ability to occupy and fully utilize the Construction Work for its intendedpurpose and a Certificate of Occupancy has been issued by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall use the Critical Path Method (CPM) of scheduling.

B. The Contractor’s personnel who prepare the schedules called for by this section shall bequalified and experienced in Critical Path Method (CPM) scheduling with the specifiedproducts of this section; and capable of fulfilling the requirements of this section. TheContractor shall hire a qualified consultant to prepare and maintain the Contract Schedule, orif qualified, the Contractor may perform these services within their own organization.

C. The Contract Schedule shall be used by the Agency in review of requests by the Contractorfor modification of the Contract Time in accordance with the Contract Documents.Responsibility for developing the Contract Schedule and monitoring of actual progress inrelation to the Contract Time rest solely with the Contractor. Failure of the Contractor toschedule any element of the Work, or any inaccuracy in the Contract Schedule, regardless ifthe Agency has reviewed and accepted such schedule, will not relieve the Contractor from itsobligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time, and that the Contractor assumesfull responsibility for execution of the Work. The Agency’s review of and response to the



schedule submissions shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of its complete and exclusive control over the means, methods, sequences and techniques for execution of the Work.

D. All cost for preparing, printing, mailing of any schedules called for by this section, or theContract Documents shall be part of the Contract Sum.

E. AGENCY acceptance of the monthly Updated Progress Schedule will be a conditionprecedent to making monthly progress payments for Work performed.

F. All Requirements of the Contract Schedule shall also apply to the Initial Schedule Submittal,Recovery Schedule, Updated Progress Schedule, Change Order Fragnet Schedule, and As-Built Schedule.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the work sequences are logical and thenetwork shows a coordinated plan for complete performance of the work. If the Contractor orAgency Representative discovers an undefined element of work activity or logic, it shall becorrected by the Contractor in a schedule revision, as described in this Section. If a plannedactivity requires greater-than normal daily resources to accomplish, schedule submittals shallinclude a narrative describing the activity, and the amount and use of extraordinaryresources.

H. It is expressly understood and agreed that the time of beginning, the rate of progress, and thetime of completion of the work are of the essence to this Contract. Therefore, the primaryobjectives of the scheduling program are to ensure the adequate planning, scheduling, andexecution of the construction activities (including but not limited to all activities of theContractor, subcontractors, suppliers, utilities, etc.) so they may be performed in an orderlyand expeditious manner within the Contract Time stipulated by the Contract. The scope ofwork for this section is to develop a Schedule demonstrating complete fulfillment of allcontract requirements and to keep that Schedule up-to-date in accordance with therequirements of this section. The Schedule will be in precedence format and will becomputer generated and updated and will be the controlling Schedule document utilized formanaging construction.

I. All Work Activities shall be of sufficient detail to provide identification of all componentsutilized in executing, monitoring and evaluating progress of the Work. Each work activity shallbe assigned a unique Activity Number. Each Activity Number shall be assigned an ActivityDescription that briefly covers the scope of work indicated. Activity Descriptions may not bealtered unless a description of the revision is identified in the Contractor’s RequestedRevision Report and accepted by the Agency’s representative. Work Activities shall bediscrete items of Work that must be accomplished under the Contract and constitutedefinable, recognizable entities within the Project. All Work Activities shall have a definedduration. All durations shall be in multiples of working days.

J. All Work Activities shall have appropriate durations allowing measurement of their progress,but no Work Activity shall exceed ten working days unless accepted by Agency’sRepresentative. In general, if a reasonable estimate of progress against a proposed WorkActivity can not be reasonably measured, a Work Activity shall be broken into multiple WorkActivities such that monitoring of actual progress versus planned progress can beascertained. All Work Activities shall be of sufficient detail to provide identification of allcomponents used in executing, monitoring and evaluating progress of the Work.

K. The Contract duration and any adjustments for approved Change Orders shall be delineatedon the schedule. Work Activities shall include all Design Work as applicable, Demolition and



Construction Work deliverables, including all submittals called for in the Scope of Work; and shall include the submittal and approval of permit applications (as necessary), samples of materials, shop drawings, working drawings, testing and inspections, safety and security plans, worksite control plans, utility company point-of connection installations and applications. In addition, Work Activities shall be included for procurement of materials and equipment potentially impacting the critical path, fabrication of special materials and equipment, and their installation and testing, and delivery of Agency-furnished items. Work Activities of the Agency, that may become Critical Work Activities shall be reflected, as well as Work Activities by utilities and other similarly involved third parties associated with the Work. The Contract Schedule shall include Work Activities or Milestones representing: all design and preconstruction activities; specific Milestones for the start and completion of each stage of the Design Work, specific Milestones for when state and local agency information and reviews are required; submittal dates; production Milestones; early purchasing; key deliverables in Scope of Work; Milestones for each Contract Phase; mobilization of personnel and equipment when required; sequence of operations; commissioning Work Activities; procurement of materials and equipment; and all contract closeout Work Activities such as Punch Lists, inspections, training, and operation manuals. The planned Completion date(s) shall be shown as milestones.

L. Physical or logical constraints, restraints, and sequences of work shall be shown. MandatoryConstraints are prohibited within the Schedule. At no time shall the Progress Override featureof the scheduling software be used in any schedule submittals.

M. Float in any activity, milestone completion date or Contract completion date (i.e., ProjectFloat) shall be considered a resource available to both the Agency and the Contractor. Floatis not time for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Agency or the Contractor, but must beused in the best interest of completing the project on time. The Contractor shall proceedaccording to the early dates and shall continue the work on that activity as scheduled until itis completed unless circumstances prevent him or her from so doing.

N. Any submitted schedule showing negative float will be rejected by the Agency.

O. The Critical Work Activities shall be identified, including critical paths for Contract interim andFinal Completion Milestone dates. Not more than 35% of the schedule’s Work Activities shallbe critical or near critical (i.e., less than ten days of float), unless accepted by the Agency.

P. All Work Activities shall be coded at a minimum to reflect which Contract Phase andarea/location they are associated with. Any Work Activity that may be involved in multiplePhases or areas/locations shall be broken into separate Work Activities to reflect each phasesuch work occurs in, allowing Work Activities to be grouped by Contract Phase andareas/locations.

Q. Contractor shall not sequester float through strategies including extending Work Activityduration estimates to consume available float, using preferential logic, using extensive orinsufficient crew/resource loading, use of float suppression techniques, special lead/lag logicconstraints (unless specifically requested in writing to Agency’s Representative andaccepted). Use of float time disclosed or implied by the use of alternate float suppressiontechniques shall not be for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Agency or Contractor. Itis acknowledged that Agency-caused or Contractor-caused time savings to Work Activities onor near the critical path will increase float, such increase in float shall not be for the exclusiveuse or benefit of either the Agency or Contractor.

R. The Project shall be phased to allow other adjacent occupancies, along with their supportspaces, in use throughout the full duration of the project.



S. When the Contractor gives notice to the Agency’s Representative that the Construction Workis ready for Beneficial Occupancy, unless Agency’s Representative determines that theConstruction Work is not sufficiently complete to warrant an inspection to determinereadiness for Beneficial Occupancy, Agency’s Representative will inspect the ConstructionWork. If the Agency’s Representative determines the work is not ready for BeneficialOccupancy the Agency’s Representative will prepare and give to Contractor acomprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected before establishing BeneficialOccupancy. Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list.Failure to include item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor tocomplete all Construction Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Uponnotification that the items on the list are completed or corrected, as applicable, the Agency’sRepresentative will make an inspection to determine whether the Construction Work iscomplete.

T. When the Agency’s Representative determines that the Construction Work is ready forBeneficial Occupancy the Agency’s Representative will notify the Contractor.

U. The Guarantee to Repair Period for the Work covered within the area of BeneficialOccupancy, shall commence on the date that the Agency took possession. The Guarantee toRepair Period shall not commence for any equipment or systems that:

1. Are not operational (equipment or systems shall not be considered operational if theycannot be used in the intended service); or

2. Are not accepted by the Agency.

1.03 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. Acceptance by the Agency of a Schedule that indicates completion of the Work prior toContract Completion date, or completion of an interim Milestone prior to the ContractMilestone date shall be for the convenience of the Contractor and shall not change any of theContract requirements including but not limited to Contract Completion Date; nor shall suchan early completion schedule serve as a waiver of the Contractor's nor the Owner's right toutilize the full amount of time specified in the Contract, unless so modified in a ContractChange Order.

B. The Agency shall not be responsible or liable to Contractor for any constructive accelerationdue to failure of the Agency to grant time extensions under the Contract Documents;including Contractor time extension requests that fail to substantially comply with thesubmission requirements and the justification requirements of this Contract for time extensionrequests.

1.04 CONTRACTOR COVENANTS AND GUARANTEES

A. Contractor covenants and guarantees that Contractor will not:

1. Misrepresent to Agency its Schedule and all of its components or Contractor's actualexecution of the work.

2. Use schedules materially different from those submitted by Contractor to the Agency forthe direction, execution or coordination of the Work.



3. Prepare schedules, updates, revisions or reports for the work which are not feasible orrealistic; or which do not accurately reflect the actual intent or reasonable and actualexpectations of Contractor and its Subcontractors.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

1.01 SUBMITTALS A. INITIAL SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL: Per VCSS 6-1, The Contractor shall submit the Initial

Schedule Submittal concurrently with the submittal of signed Contract, Contract bonds, andcertificate of insurance. The Notice to Proceed will be delayed until the schedule is receivedand approved by AGENCY. See VCSS 6-7.4, Starting of Contract Time.

B. FORM: Schedule submittals shall be provided as described below.

1. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of the Schedule. The electronic copy ofthe schedule will be provided in the scheduling software’s native file format so that it maybe restored, opened and analyzed by the Agency, as well as a PDF electronic printout.The PDF printout shall indicate the Activity Number, Activity Description, Total Float,Percent Complete, Early Start date and Early Finish date, as well as display the barsrepresenting activity durations.

2. The Contractor shall submit a PDF electronic printout of the schedule’s critical path. ThePDF printout shall indicate the Activity Number, Activity Description, Total Float, PercentComplete, Early Start date and Early Finish date, as well as display the bars representingactivity durations.

3. The contractor shall submit the following Schedule reports on 8-1/2" x 11" media or asrequested by the Agency:

a. Monthly Progress Report: The Monthly Progress Report shall be organized asfollows:

i. Contractor Transmittal Letter;ii. A description of Work completed during the period;iii. Identification of unusual resources: manpower, material, or equipment

restrictions or use, including multiple shifts, 6-day work weeks, specifiedovertime, or work at times other than regular days or hours;

iv. Description of the current critical path;v. Changes to the critical path since the last schedule submittal;vi. Description of problem areas;vii. Current and anticipated delays, including:

1. cause of delay,2. impact on other activities milestone and completion dates,3. corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay;

viii. Pending items and status of:

1. Permits,2. Change Orders,



3. Time Adjustments,4. Non-Compliance Notices;

ix. Contract Completion Date status:

1. Ahead of schedule and number of days,2. Bend schedule and number of days,3. Causes for any changes;

b. Activity Report: The Activity Report shall include all of the activities sorted by activitynumber and present the following information: Activity Number; Activity Description;Original Duration; Remaining Duration; Percentage Complete; Responsibility Code;Area Code; Early/Actual Start; Early/Actual Finish; Late Start; Late Finish; Total Float(except as specifically indicated otherwise).

c. Early Start Report: The Early Start Report shall be per the above Activity Reportrequirements with the exception that is shall be sorted by early start. (Note: Thisreport shall be required with the Initial and Updated Progress Schedule submittals).

1.02 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETING

A. Once each week, on a day established by the Agency, a meeting will be held to assess theprogress achieved by the Contractor during the previous work week. The Contractor shallsubmit the Look Ahead Schedule (if requested) and a manpower/construction report for theprevious week (the Weekly Report). The Weekly Report shall indicate for each day of thepreceding week the actual manpower for each activity which was in progress. This reportshall include the actual number of tradesmen which were working for the Contractor and eachsubcontractor each day. The Weekly Report shall also indicate for each day the weatherconditions, potential delays and inspections occurring on that day. The Weekly Report shallbe a report derived from the Schedule which may be completed by hand providing that thehandwriting is legible to the Agency.

B. See also Section 01 3119 Project Meetings.

1.03 PROGRESS REPORTING AND SCHEDULE REVISIONS

A. Once each month on the date specified by the Agency, the Contractor shall prepare andsubmit to the Agency an Updated Progress Schedule and reports stipulated within thisSection. The Updated Progress Schedule shall:

1. have a data date and be statused as of the first calendar day of the month, or other dateas established by the Agency;

2. show all progress, including but not limited to as-built dates, percent complete, andresources expended;

3. show accepted changes, including but not limited to changes as the result of changeorders and any changes in contract completion dates which have been accepted withinthis section since the last revision of the Schedule;

4. only include changes to the schedule that follow the procedure outlined in paragraph Bbelow.



B. Should the Contractor after Agency's acceptance of the Initial Schedule Submittal desire tochange Contractor's plan of construction, activity durations, logic or other non-progressrelated schedule data, Contractor shall submit a Contractor's Requested Revisions Report,as defined in Part 1 of this Section, to the Agency at least one week prior to the submittal of aschedule incorporating any such changes. Attached to the Report shall be a scheduleanalysis report (generated from the software indicated in Part 2) comparing the previouslyaccepted schedule to the proposed schedule. At a minimum, this schedule analysis reportshall show the added activities, deleted activities, added relationships, deleted relationships,changed original durations, changed remaining durations, and changed driving relationships.Requested changes that are acceptable to the Agency will be incorporated into the nextUpdated Progress Schedule.

C. The Contractor shall revise the Schedule as reasonable to mitigate the impact of changesand delays to the project with no change in Contract price. However, when the Agencyorders changes which have the potential to impact the specific dates stipulated, a ChangeOrder Fragnet will be prepared by the Contractor and provided with the Contractor'sproposed price or extra work tabulation as required to the Agency for concurrence or revisionas Agency deems necessary. After the Change Order Fragnet has been accepted by theAgency, it will be incorporated into the next Updated Progress Schedule submitted by theContractor. Change Order logic will affect only those activities and performance datesdirectly concerned. Adjustments in scheduled intermediate completion dates or for theContract as a whole will be considered only to the extent that there is insufficient remainingfloat to absorb these changes.

D. Neither the updating or revision of the Contractor's Schedule, nor the submission, updating,change or revision of any report or Schedule submitted to Agency by Contractor under thisSection, nor Agency's review of any report or Schedule, or the nonexistence of any suchreport or Schedule shall have the effect of amending or modifying in any way the ContractTime, or the Contact Completion Date, nor shall it modify or limit in any way Contractor'sobligations under this Contract.

1.04 REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The Agency will review the Contractor's schedule submittals for constructability, costallocation, and adherence to plans and specifications. The Contractor shall revise theSchedule as required by the Agency and shall submit revised Schedule to the Agency within7 calendar days. Within 10 calendar days following submission of an acceptable schedule,the Contractor will provide electronic and/or hardcopy versions of the Contractor's ScheduleSubmittal as outlined above. Acceptance by the Agency of the Contractor's Schedule isadvisory only and shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for accomplishing thework in accordance with the Contract. Omissions and errors in the accepted Schedule shallnot excuse performance which is not in compliance with the Contract. Acceptance by theAgency in no way makes the Agency an insurer of the Schedule's success or liable for timeor cost overruns flowing from its shortcomings. The Agency hereby disclaims any obligationor liability by reason of Agency's acceptance of or acquiescence to the Schedule.

B. If, in the opinion of the Agency, the Contractor falls behind the progress schedule, theContractor shall take any and all steps necessary to improve Contractor's progress at noadditional cost to the Agency; including cost impacts to other contractors, utilities, or Agencydirectly caused by Contractor's delay. Such steps include but are not limited to the following:

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantiallyeliminate the lag in schedule progress.



2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days perweek (as allowed by the Agency), or the amount of construction equipment, or anycombination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate lag in scheduledprogress.

3.05 RECOVERY SCHEDULE

A. If requested by the Agency, the Contractor shall prepare and submit within 14 days fromnotification from the Agency a Recovery Schedule in accordance with the definition includedin Part 1 of this Section. The Recovery Schedule shall address a new work plan toaccomplish the remaining Work within the Contract Time and shall include and identifyadditional concurrent operations, logic and sequence changes, additional manpower,additional shifts, or overtime work. Once reviewed and accepted by the Agency, theRecovery Schedule shall be used as the Contractor’s Updated Progress Schedule.

3.06 CHANGE ORDER FRAGNET SCHEDULE A. In accordance with the definition included within Part 1 of this Section, a Change Order

Fragnet Schedule shall be submitted any time the Contractor requests an extension of theContract Time or an extension to other Contract requirements. A condition precedent toobtaining a time extension under the Contract shall be the timely submission of a ChangeOrder Fragnet schedule pursuant to the requirements of this paragraph.

B. A Change Order Fragnet shall be submitted within fifteen (15) days after a delay occurs orwith the Contractor’s cost proposal in response to a notice of change from the Agency. Incases where the Contractor does not submit a Change Order Fragnet for a specific changeorder, delay, or other Contractor requested time extension within the specified period of time,then it is mutually agreed that the particular change order, delay or Contractor request has notime impact on the Contract completion date and no time extension is required.

C. Actual delays in activities which do not affect the critical path work or which do not move theContractor’s planned completion date beyond the Contract completion date will not be thebasis for an adjustment of the Contract Time.

D. All other requirements of the Contract Schedule shall apply to a Change Order FragnetSchedule.

E. Approval or rejection of the Change Order Fragnet will be made within fifteen (15) days afterreceipt of the Change Order Fragnet unless additional information, subsequent meetings andnegotiations are necessary. Upon mutual agreement of both parties, schedule revisionsillustrating the influence of the change orders, delays, and/or Contractor requests will beincorporated into the next Updated Progress Schedule.

3.07 LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULES

A. In accordance with the definition included within Part 1 of this Document, a Look AheadSchedule shall be submitted at each progress meeting of the Work or as reasonablyrequested by the Agency.

B. The schedule shall display the activity ID, activity description, planned start/finish dates, totalfloat, and the percentage complete.

3.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE



A. In accordance with the definition included within Part 1 of this Document and Section 01 3301 (SUBMITTALS), the Submittal Schedule shall be submitted and maintained by theContractor. The Submittal Schedule shall be a comprehensive and complete representationof task activities and dates related to the procurement of materials, equipment or other itemsrequiring Agency or designer approval (e.g., shop drawings, product data, etc.). Provide allsuch dates and activity durations for submittal review and approval activities in accordancewith the specification sections regarding submittals. Resubmittals shall have the same reviewtime as the Contractor’s initial submittals. For additional information on requirements forSubmittals, see Section 01 33 01.

B. Include any required or necessary items furnished by the Agency or a third party.

C. Consider the nature and complexity of each submittal item and allow ample time for review,revision, correction, resubmittal, and approval sufficiently in advance of the constructionrequirements. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of theWork so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Coordinate and sequencedifferent categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that onewill not be delayed by lack of coordination with another.

D. Make the Submittal Schedule consistent with the Contract Schedule required under thisSection.

E. Consider time required for preparation and review of mock-ups and the relationship betweenmockups and the Work.

F. Schedule submittals in sequence with the schedule for Work except as required for productsknown to require long lead-times. For submittal of items requiring long lead-times, submitwritten verification of the required lead-time from the supplier, if requested.

G. Identify on the schedule all items required by the Contract Documents, indicating:

1. The Submittal Number and Submittal Sequence Number;

2. The Specification Section Number;

3. The Submittal description and manufacturer

4. The Submittal Designation character

5. Whether the Submittal is required for review or for the record;

6. Schedule date for first submittal;

7. Schedule date for resubmittal;

8. Schedule date when Agency or Designer’s final release or approval is required to bereturned to the Contractor;

9. Scheduled date by which the material or equipment must be on the site so as not to delaythe progress of the work.

H. To the greatest extent possible, make single submissions covering the entire work ofindividual technical Specification Sections. Partial or “phased” submittals for work of the sameSection will not be reviewed.



I. Receipt of the Submittal Schedule by Agency will be a precondition of the receipt of the firstprogress payment. Agency and Designer will review the Submittal Schedule in accordancewith the procedures for the Updated Progress Schedule included in this Section.

J. Submittal Schedule shall be updated and presented at progress meetings, or as requested byAgency.

END OF SECTION


01 3301 – SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 3301 SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes:

1. Furnish all submittals for work as indicated in accordance with provisions of ContractDocuments.

2. Submittals include the following items:a. Shop drawings.b. Product data.c. Samples.d. Project information.e. Schedule of Submittals: Prior to first application for payment.f. Completely coordinate with all Contract work.g. See VCSS 2-5.3 for additional requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Shop Drawing submittals are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data speciallyprepared for Work by Contractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate someportion of Work.

B. Product Data submittals are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,instructions, brochures, diagrams, test data and other information furnished by Contractor toillustrate material, product or system for some portion of Work.

C. Sample submittals are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment orworkmanship and propose standards by which Work will be judged.

1. Samples also include job site mockups.

D. Project Information submittals are items pertaining to quality control and Agency informationwhich may not require review or response by Engineer and are to be retained for project fileonly.1. Examples:

a. Test reports.b. Certifications.c. Design calculations.d. Installation instructions.

E. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are for those portions of Workfor which submittals are required and shall indicate the way the Contractor proposes toconform to information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

1.03 TRANSMITTAL - GENERAL

A. Submit all items to Engineer, or person or entity to whom Engineer has delegated thisfunction in writing. All submittals shall be delivered per the requirements of Section 2-5.3 ofthe VCSS and Section 01 3123 of these Special Provisions.

B. Contractor is responsible for making submissions.1. Submit to address indicated by Agency.



2. Each transmittal to include items from one specification section only.

C. Make submittals sufficiently in advance of date required to allow Engineer reasonable time forreview, and resubmission if necessary.1. Schedule submittals requiring Engineer color selection within 30 days following award of

contract.2. Items not submitted in accordance with provisions of this section will be returned, without

action, for resubmission by Contractor.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

A. Shop drawing and product data submittals are required as called for by specification sectionsubmittal paragraph, or by additional requirements of the respective sections.

B. Identify drawings with manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, specification sectionor drawing detail reference.

C. Submit each shop drawing per the provisions of Section 01 3123.1. Create drawings not smaller than 24 inches x 36 inches or not larger than 30 inches x 42

inches.2. Allow a clear space, approximately 6 x 6 inches, for notations on right hand side of each

sheet.

D. Submit product data items such as equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, or standard catalogitems per the provisions of Section 01 3123.1. Indicate exact item or model and proposed options.2. Include scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, wiring

diagrams, controls and other pertinent data.

1.05 SAMPLES

A. Sample submittals are required as called for by specification section submittal paragraph.

B. Identify samples with manufacturer's name, item, use, type, project designation, specificationsection or drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent data.

C. Engineer may, at his option, retain samples for comparison purposes.

D. Field Mockups: Fabricate on site in accordance with specification section requiring them.

1.06 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Submit project information as called for by specification section submittal paragraph.

B. Submit project information items per the provisions of Section 01 3123.1. Include pertinent data.

C. Project information:1. Engineer may review at its sole discretion project information for compliance with

Contract Documents only.2. Review will not constitute a detailed check of submitted design calculations.3. Appropriateness and accuracy of calculations is responsibility of Contractor (and

Contractor's professional engineer when such calculations are required to beprofessionally sealed).



4. When professional or other certification of performance criteria of materials, systems orequipment is required by Contract Documents, Engineer shall be entitled to rely uponaccuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications.

1.07 CONTRACTOR ACTION

A. Review, approve, stamp, and sign items prior to submission to Engineer.

B. Stamp indicates Contractor has:1. Verified field dimensions and quantities.2. Verified field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data.3. Reviewed and coordinated submittal data with requirements of Work and Contract

Documents.4. Certified that submittals comply with Contract Documents.

C. Reproduce and distribute submittals to Contractor's organization, includingSubcontractors/vendors and to Agency in specified number of copies or additional copies asnecessary to support execution of the Work.

D. Resubmit items stamped "revise and resubmit" or "rejected" until approval is received.1. Contractor shall, if applicable, add letter suffix to previous transmittal number, to indicate

resubmission, for example 03450A-1A.2. Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on resubmitted Shop Drawings,

Product Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by Engineer onprevious submittals.

E. Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on Shop Drawings, Product Data orSamples, to deviations from Contract Documents.1. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviation from requirements of

Contract Documents by Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data andSamples unless Contractor has specifically informed Engineer in writing of such deviationat time of submission and Engineer has given written approval to each specific deviation.Such deviations shall require Agency's agreement unless it is considered a minor changein Work and does not involve adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

F. Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data or Samples by Engineer's approval thereof.

G. Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation of dimensions at job site; forinformation that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction; andfor coordination of work of all trades.

H. Completed work shall strictly conform to approved samples.

I. Do not start work which requires submittals, prior to return of submittals with Engineer'sstamp indicating approval.

1.08 SCHEDULE

A. Within 30 days following Notice to Proceed, submit to Engineer a complete schedule ofrequired submittals indicating proposed submittal dates for items in format acceptable toEngineer.

B. Include submittal number as described in 1.10 below.



C. Furnish all submittals to Engineer, for entire Contract, per the schedule indicated inParagraph A above.

1.09 ENGINEER REVIEW: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

A. Review is only for conformance with design concept of project and compliance with intent ofinformation given in Contract Documents.

B. Engineer shall stamp submittals indicating action taken.

C. Engineer's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwisespecifically stated by Engineer, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequencesor procedures.

D. Engineer's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which theitem is a component.

1.010 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

A. Submittals shall be submitted on Procore as PDF attachments. See Section 01 3123.


PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


01 4000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 18

SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Ventura County StandardSpecifications (VCSS), General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance andquality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specifiedor indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with theContract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activitiesare specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sectionsmay also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Documentrequirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control servicesrequired by Engineer, or authorities having jurisdiction, are not limited by provisions ofthis Section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and duringexecution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate thatproposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and afterexecution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work andcompleted construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contractenforcement activities performed by Engineer.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used toverify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, whereindicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard bywhich the Work will be judged.

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility toverify performance characteristics.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Projectbefore products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance orcompliance with specified criteria.



F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or atesting agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installationof the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testinglaboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as anemployee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular constructionoperation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities mustbe performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusivelyto trades-people of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completeda minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiarwith special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1.04 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establishdifferent or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with themost stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, butapparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall bethe minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with theminimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, asappropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decisionbefore proceeding.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article todemonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of arecent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.2. Description of test and inspection.3. Identification of applicable standards.4. Identification of test and inspection methods.5. Number of tests and inspections required.6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.



8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.14. Test Reports shall be signed by a Registered Civil Engineer licensed in the state of

California.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Agency's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for feepayments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established forcompliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levelsrequired; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assemblingwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work hasresulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similarto those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, aswell as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicatedfor this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficientproduction capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified topractice in the state of California and who is experienced in providing engineering services ofthe kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations ofthe system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project inmaterial, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activitiesshall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialistsshall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activitiesindicated.



1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governingthe Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with theexperience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documentedaccording to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections;and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative ofmanufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation ofmanufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated forthis Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testingfor compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply withthe following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply withperformance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will performsame tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods ofconstruction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, andlaboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,and similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret testsand inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complieswith or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for eachform of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, usingmaterials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed byEngineer.

2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will beconstructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.



5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard forjudging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.07 PAYMENTS

A. Costs of initial testing and inspection, except as specifically modified herein, or specifiedotherwise in technical sections, will be paid for by the Agency. Initial tests and inspections aredefined as the first tests and inspections as herein specified.

B. In the event a test of inspection indicates failure of a material or procedure to meetrequirements of Contract Documents, costs for retesting and reinspection will be paid by theAgency and back-charged to the Contractor.

C. Additional tests and inspections not herein specified but requested by Engineer, will be paidfor by Agency, unless results of such tests and inspections are found to be not in compliancewith Contract Documents, in which case the Agency will pay all costs for initial testing as wellas retesting and reinspection, and back-charge the Contractor.

D. Costs for additional tests or inspections required because of change in materials beingprovided or change of source or supply will be paid for by Agency and back-charged to theContractor.

E. Costs for test or inspections which are required to correct deficiencies will be paid by theAgency and back-charged to the Contractor.

F. Cost of testing which is required solely for the convenience of Contractor in his schedulingand performance of work will be paid by the Agency and back-charged to the Contractor.

G. Overtime costs for testing and inspections performed outside the regular workday hours,including weekends and holidays, will be paid for by the Agency and back- charged to theContractor. Such costs include overtime costs for the Engineer’s Consultants.

H. Testing Laboratory will separate and identify on the invoices, the costs covering all testingand inspections which are to be back-charged to the Contractor as specified above.1. Testing Laboratory will furnish to Engineer a cost estimate breakdown covering initial

tests and inspections required by Contract Documents. Estimate will include number oftests, man-hours required for tests, field and plant inspections, travel time, and costs.

I. Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the Engineer at any time before finalacceptance of the entire work to make an examination of work already completed byremoving or tearing out the completed work, the Contractor shall, on request, promptlyfurnish necessary facilities, labor and materials. If such work is found to be defective in anyrespect due to fault of the Contractor or his subcontractor, he shall be responsible for allexpenses of such examinations and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work isfound to meet the requirements of the Contract, additional cost of labor and materialnecessarily involved in the examination and replacement shall be reimbursed to theContractor.

1.08 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engineer Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Engineer'sresponsibility, Engineer will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.



1. Engineer will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers oftesting agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they areengaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by workthat failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and theContract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to the Engineer or Agency are Contractor'sresponsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified andthose required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required ofContractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testingagency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Agency or Engineer, unlessagreed to in writing by Engineer.

2. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall notify Testing Laboratory a minimum of 10working days in advance of all required tests, and a minimum of 2 working days inadvance of all required inspections. Extra laboratory expenses resulting from a failure tonotify the Laboratory will be paid by the Agency and back- charged to the Contractor.

3. Contractor shall give sufficient advance notice to Testing Laboratory in the event ofcancellation or time extension of a scheduled test or inspection. Charges due toinsufficient advance notice cancellations or time extension will be paid for by the Agencyand back-charged to the Contractor.

4. Contractor shall notify the Testing Agency a minimum of 3 working days in advance ofthe manufacture or material to be supplied by him under the Contract Documents, whichmust by terms of the Contract be tested, in order that the Agency may arrange for thetesting of such material at the source of supply.a. Material shipped by the Contractor from the source of supply before having

satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or before the receipt of notice fromthe Engineer that such testing and inspection will not be required, shall not beincorporated in the Project.

5. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit acertified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

6. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the ContractDocuments are Contractor's responsibility.

7. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized servicerepresentative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, includingservice connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "SubmittalProcedures."

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections wereContractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re- inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the ContractDocuments.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance ofduties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in theWork during performance of its services.



2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ testsare conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested andinspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- controlservice to Engineer, with copy to Contractor and to authority having jurisdiction.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements orapprove or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

7. Reporting test failures: Immediately upon Testing Laboratory determination of a testfailure, the Laboratory will telephone the results of test to Engineer. On the same day,Laboratory will send written test results to those named on the above distribution list.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, andsimilar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing andinspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testingagency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Projectsite.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assuranceand -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing andreplacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similarquality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 daysof date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Engineer, testing agencies, and each party involved inperformance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.09 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS



A. Special Tests and Inspections: Agency or Engineer will engage a qualified testing agencyand special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities havingjurisdiction as the responsibility of Agency, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control proceduresand reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed inthe Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- controlservice to Engineer with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, whichinclude a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspectedwork complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspection of the corrected work.

1.010 ENGINEER’S INSPECTION

A. An Inspector employed by the Agency will be assigned to the work.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Inspector a minimum of two working days in advance ofexecution of all work that requires inspection.

C. The work of construction in all stages of progress shall be subject to the personal continuousobservation of the Inspector. Inspector shall have free access to any or all parts of the workat any time. The Contractor shall furnish the Inspector reasonable facilities for obtaining suchinformation as may be necessary to be fully informed respecting the progress and manner ofthe work and the character of the materials. Inspection of the work shall not relieve theContractor from any obligation to comply with the Contract requirements.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide accessto test and inspection log for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

3.02 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repairdamaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.



1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in otherSpecification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoiningareas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting andPatching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment ofresponsibility for quality-control services.

3.03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Perform tests and inspections for the following in conformance with the California BuildingCode, Title 24, Part 2, of the California Code of Regulations.

B. Excavations and Foundations (Chapter 18 and Table 1705.6)1. Earth fill compaction – Section 1803.52. Excavation and fill for foundations – Section 1803.53. Placement, compaction and inspection of backfill per Sections 1803.5 and 1804 for fills

supporting foundation.

C. Concrete (Chapter 19, Chapter 17)1. Materials

a. Portland Cement Tests - Section1903b. Concrete Aggregates – Section 1903.6c. Reinforcing Bars – Section 1913.2 and ASTM A370d. Waiver of Testing Rebar - Section 1913.2e. Batch Plant Inspection – Section 1705.3.2f. Waiver of Batch Plant Inspection and Tests - Section 1705.3

2. Concrete Qualitya. Proportions of Concrete – Sections 1904, and 1905b. Strength Tests of Concrete – Section 1905.1

3. Concrete Inspectiona. Job Site Inspection – Section 1705.3 and Table 1705.3b. Batch Plant or Weighmaster Inspection - Section 1705.3.2c. Reinforcing Bar Welding Inspection - Table 1705.3

4. Anchors in Concretea. Drilled-In-Expansion Bolts or Epoxy-Type Anchors in Concrete - Table 1705.3.

D. Masonry (Chapter 21)1. Materials

a. Mortar & Grout Aggregates - Sections 2103.9 and 2103.13

2. Masonry Qualitya. Mortar & Grout Tests – Section 2105.2.2.1.4b. Masonry Prism Tests – Sections 2105.2.2.2, and 2105.3c. Masonry Core Tests – Section 2105.5d. Reinforcing Bar Tests (Chapter 19) – Section 1913.2

3. Masonry Inspectiona. Reinforcing Bar Welding Inspection - Table 1705.3



E. Structural Steel and Cold Formed Steel (Chapter 22)1. Materials

a. Structural Steel and Cold Formed Steel – Sections 2202.1, 2205, 2210, 2211, and2213.1

b. Material Identification – Section 1705.2, Table 1705.2.1, and Section 1705.12

2. Inspection and Tests of Structural Steela. Tests of Structural & Cold Formed Steel – Section 2213.1b. Tests of High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers – Section 2213.1 and Table

1705.2.1c. Tests of End Welded Stud – Section 2213.2d. Shop Fabrication Inspection – Table 1705.2.1e. Welding Inspection - Table 1705.2.1, AISC 360, and AISC 341f. Nelson Stud Welding –Section 2213.2, AISC 360, and AISC 341g. High Strength Bolt Inspection - Table 1705.2.1, and AISC 360h. Non-Destructive Weld Testing – Section 1705.2.1, AISC 341 Appendix Q and W, as

applicablei. Test Unidentified Materials – ASTM A370-06j. Verification of Reinforcing Steel Weldability – Table 1705.2.1k. Inspect Welding of Reinforcing Steel – Table 1705.2.1l. Roof Deck and Floor Deck Welding – AISC 360, SIAC 341, and CBC Table 1705.2.1.

F. Wood (Chapter 23)1. Materials

a. Lumber and Plywood Grading - 2303

G. Concrete Floors: Conduct calcium chloride moisture vapor testing of all interior concrete floorslabs which will receive a finish material or coating. Cost shall be paid for by the Contractor.Comply with the following:

1. Verify that new concrete floors comply with ASTM F710; determine adhesion anddryness characteristics by conducting bond and moisture tests recommended by the floorcovering manufacturer and ASTM F1869.

2. Verify that new concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, anddusting. Concrete floor surfaces shall be tested for moisture emissions and alkalinity withthe building acclimated to the working environment of the Agency.a. Perform tests after HVAC system has been in continuous use for 36 hours to

maintain a minimum ambient temperature of 72 degrees F.b. Perform tests in accordance with ASTM F1869 as follows:

i. 3 tests for areas up to 1,000 square feet; add one additional test for each 1,000square feet thereafter.

c. Timing of Tests:i. New concrete: As late in process as practical to allow maximum drying of

concrete, but not less than 2 weeks prior to scheduled installation of floorcovering.

d. If moisture emission rates exceed the minimum levels indicated by the flooringspecifications, notify the Engineer. The Contractor may be directed to install “VaporReduction System” as specified in Division 07 prior to installing floor covering,utilizing the vapor reduction allowance.

e. Calcium chloride and moisture vapor testing shall be performed as an installationprerequisite in all Division 09 floor finish Sections.

3. Where the vapor reduction system is required to be applied, repeat moisture testing asspecified above to determine if vapor transmission has been reduced to acceptablelevels.



3.04 EARTHWORK

A. The Geotechnical Engineer of record or a Geotechnical Engineer selected by the Engineerwill provide continuous inspection of fill and will field test fill and earth backfill as placed andcompacted, and inspect excavations and subgrade before concrete is placed and provideperiodic inspection of open excavations, embankments, and other cuts or vertical surfaces ofearth. The Geotechnical Engineer will submit a report indicating that he has observed andtested fills and that in his opinion the fills were placed in accordance with the projectspecifications. Deliver report to Engineer and Authority having jurisdiction.

B. Contractor shall remove unsatisfactory material, reroll, adjust moisture, place new material,or in the case of excavations, provide proper protective measures, perform other operationsnecessary, as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer whose decisions and directions will beconsidered final.

C. Geotechnical Engineer may require deepening of footings and so order such deepening inaccordance with Division 31 Sections.

D. Soils Test and Inspection Procedure:1. Allow sufficient time for testing, and evaluation of results before material to be

incorporated into the project is needed. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be sole and finaljudge of suitability of all materials to be imported to the project.

2. Laboratory compaction tests to be used will be in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

3. Field density tests will be made in accordance with ASTM D 1556.

4. Number of tests will be determined by Geotechnical Engineer. Materials in question maynot be used pending test results.

5. Excavation and embankment inspection procedure. Geotechnical Engineer will visually orotherwise examine such areas for bearing values, cleanliness and suitability.

6. Earthwork Test Reports: In order to avoid misinterpretations by the reviewing agencies,all retest results shall be reported on the same sheet, immediately following the previousfailure test to which it is related. Retests shall be clearly noted as such.

3.05 TESTING OF CONCRETE

A. Concrete Mix Design:1. The Agency will pay for the sampling of aggregate and preparation or review and

approval of mix design one time for each strength and aggregate size specified. Testingcost for approval of additional mix designs will be paid by the Agency and back-chargedto the Contractor. Continuous plant inspection and all tests of materials will be paid by theAgency, but the Contractor will be back-charged for all tests performed on material thatdo not meet specification requirements. Two copies of the mix designs shall be filed withthe Engineer for record purposes only, not for review or approval.

2. Test concrete aggregates for mix design only.

3. Deliver samples of approved aggregate to Project for comparison with material delivered,if job mixed concrete is used.

4. Test suitability of aggregates in accordance with ASTM C88 if material is under suspicionand if so directed by Engineer or authority having jurisdiction.



B. If compressive result of test specimens fail to show compressive strength specified, removeand replace concrete or adequately strengthen in a manner acceptable to Engineer andauthority having jurisdiction.

C. Certification shall be made that tests, whose results shall be shown, were made inaccordance with provisions of Rules and Regulations of authority having jurisdiction.

D. Make all tests, take samples, and prepare samples in accordance with the latest standardsadopted by American Society for Testing and Materials, referred to as ASTM.

E. Structural concrete mixed at certified approved concrete batch plants shall have qualitycontrol as follows:

1. Laboratory designed mixes using adequate cement factors.

2. Continuous batch plant inspection by qualified test technician.

3. Inspection shall comply with CBC requirements.

F. Structural concrete mixed at non-approved batch plants shall have quality control as follows:

1. Laboratory designed mixes using adequate cement factors.

2. Continuous batch plant inspection by qualified test technician.

3. Measure all water, including wash water, so total on truck does not exceed 95 percentmaximum allowed in mix design.

4. Legible, certified weighmaster’s certificates shall be provided the inspector for allstructural and non-structural concrete.

5. At end of job, Contractor shall furnish affidavit to authority having jurisdiction, Engineer,certifying that all concrete furnished conforms to requirements of CCR Title 24 Part 2.

G. Waiver of Batch Plan Inspection: Batch plant inspection may be waived if the concrete plantcomplies fully with the requirements of UBC Standard 19-3, and has been certified to complywith the requirements of the National Ready Mixed concrete Association. The plant must beequipped with an automatic batcher in which the total batching cycle, except for themeasuring and introduction of an admixture, is completed by activating a single starterdevice.

H. Agency’s Inspector or Special Inspector will do the following:1. Inspect placing of reinforcing steel and concrete at Project.2. Obtain load ticket and identify mix before accepting each load. Keep daily record of

concrete placement, identifying each truckload, time of receipt, and location of concretein structure. Keep record until completion of Project and make available for inspection byauthority having jurisdiction.

3. During progress of work, take code required number of test cylinders, but at least one setof cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or fractional part thereof for each class of concreteand at least one set from each day’s pour. Test cylinders need not be made for concreteused in non-structural elements of the work.

4. One set of cylinders shall consist of 4 samples all taken from same batch, one to betested at age of 7 days and two at 28 days.

5. Make and store cylinders according to ASTM C31.



6. Deliver cylinders to laboratory or store cylinders in a suitable protected environment forpick up by laboratory personnel.

7. Make slump test of wet concrete according to test for slump of Portland cement concrete,ASTM C 143, at least at the same frequency that the cylinders are taken.

3.06 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Tests:1. Tests shall be performed before the delivery of steel to Project site. Steel not meeting

specifications shall be rejected and shall not be shipped to the Project.

2. Testing procedure shall conform to ASTM A 615.

3. Sample at the place of distribution, before shipment: Make one tensile test and onebending test from samples out of 10 tons, or fraction thereof, of each size and kind ofreinforcing steel, where taken from bundles as delivered from the mill and properlyidentified as to heat number. Mill analysis shall accompany report. Where identificationnumber cannot be ascertained, or where random samples are taken, make one series oftests from each 2-1/2 tons, or fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel.Tests on unidentified reinforcing steel will be paid by the Agency and back-charged to theContractor. Samples shall include not fewer than 2 pieces, each 18 inches long, or eachsize and kind of reinforcing steel. Inspection of welding of reinforcing steel shall be doneby a specially qualified laboratory inspector and tested in accordance with AWS D1.4.

4. All steel shall have testing laboratory tags of approval attached to the steel bundle whenshipped to the job site.

B. Inspector will inspect all reinforcement for concrete work for size, dimensions, locations andproper placement. Inspector shall be present during welding of all reinforcing steel.

3.07 MASONRY

A. Inspector/Special Inspector:

1. Masonry work shall be continuously inspected during laying and grouting by an Inspectorspecially approved for that purpose by the Authority having jurisdiction. The Inspectorshall make test samples and perform such tests as are required.

2. The Inspector shall check the materials, details of construction and constructionprocedure. The Inspector shall furnish a verified report that of his own personalknowledge the work covered by the report has been performed and materials used andinstalled are in accordance with and in conformance to, the duly approved drawings andspecifications.

3. No masonry shall be installed without the presence of the Special Inspector.

B. Masonry Tests:

1. Concrete Masonry Units: Test each type of unit for strength in accordance with CBC1705.4; for absorption in accordance with ASTM C 140; for drying shrinkage inaccordance with ASTM C 426.

2. Mortar and Grout Tests: At the beginning of all masonry work, at least one test sample ofthe mortar and grout shall be taken on 3 successive working days and at least at one



week intervals thereafter. The samples shall be continuously stored in moist air until tested. They shall meet the minimum strength requirement given in CCR Title 24 Part 2, Sec. 2105.2.2.1.4. Additional samples shall be taken whenever any change in materials or Project conditions occur or whenever in the judgment of the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, such tests are necessary to determine the quality of the material. Test specimens for mortar and grout shall be made as set forth in UBC Standard Nos. 21-16 and 21-18. In making the mortar test specimens the mortar shall be taken from the unit soon after spreading. After molding, the molds shall be carefully protected by a covering which shall be kept damp for at lest 24 hours, after which the specimens shall be stored and tested as required for concrete cylinders. In making grout test specimens, an absorbent paper liner shall be used and the mold left in place until the specimen has hardened. The prisms shall be stored as required for concrete cylinders. They shall be tested in the vertical position.

3. Masonry Core Tests: Not less than 2 cores having a diameter 6” shall be taken from theProject. At least two cores shall be taken for each 5000 square feet of the greater of themasonry wall area or of floor area or fraction thereof. The Engineer in responsible chargeof the project or the Inspector shall select the areas for sampling. Core samples shall notbe soaked before testing. Materials and workmanship shall be such that, for all masonrywhen tested in compressions, cores shall show a strength of at lest 1500 psi. Whentested in shear the unit shear on the cross section of the core shall not be less than 100pounds per square inch. Shear testing apparatus shall be of a design approved by theauthority having jurisdiction. Visual examination of all cores shall be made to ascertain ifthe joints are filled. The Agency’s Inspectors or testing agency shall inspect the coring ofthe masonry walls and shall prepare a report of coring operations for general distribution.Such report shall include the total number of cores cut, the location, and the condition ofall cores cut on the Project regardless of whether or not the core specimens failed duringcutting operation. All cores shall be submitted to the laboratory for examination.

4. The Contractor, at his expense, shall patch all core holes with the specified grout. Usematching masonry face shells, when exposed to view.

3.08 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Mill certificates or affidavits and manufacturers’ certification shall be supplied to the TestingLaboratory and Inspector for verification of steel materials. Each piece shall have the heatnumber clearly marked. Testing Laboratory shall be notified at least 3 weeks in advance offabrication and supplied with the reports so that is can make a shop inspection of the steel.

B. Tests of Steel Materials: If structural steel cannot be identified by heat or melt numbers, or ifits source is questionable, not less than one tension test and one bend test will be made foreach 5 tons or factional part thereof. Such testing shall be paid for by the Agency and back-charged to the Contractor. Structural steel identified by heat or melt numbers marked at themill need not be tested, except testing is required of steel with Fy greater than 36 ksi.

C. General Inspection:

1. Testing Laboratory will visit the fabricator’s plant to verify that materials used check withthe mill tests, affidavits of test reports, and that fabrication and welding procedures meetspecifications.

2. Testing Laboratory will visually check fabricated steel against the contract drawings andreviewed shop drawings for compliance, and will make physical tests and measurementsas required to meet the specifications. Single pass fillet welds may be visually checked.



3. Inspection of Shop Fabrication: Inspection of shop fabrication may be required forstructural work if so designated on the Structural Tests and Inspections list or asindicated in Contract Documents. This inspection shall be made by a qualified inspectorapproved by the Authority having jurisdiction. He shall furnish the Engineer and theauthority having jurisdiction a report duly verified by him that the materials andworkmanship conform to the approved plans and specifications.

4. Approved Fabricators: In addition to welding inspection, fabrication inspection will berequired for all work done on the premises of a steel fabricator who does not hold acurrently valid certificate CCR Title 24 Part 2, Sec. 1701.5, Approved Fabricators. Thecost of the fabrication inspection will be paid by the Agency and back-charged to theContractor.

5. Inspection of welding (regardless of whether fabricator has “Approved Fabricator Status”)shall be in accordance with the requirements of CCR title 24 Part 2, Table 1705.2.1. Weldinspection shall be continuous.

6. Erection Inspection: If so designated on the Structural Tests and Inspections list, TestingLaboratory will visually inspect field welded connections, perform such additional test andinspections of field work as are required by the Engineer and prepare test reports for theEngineer’s review.

7. Shop Fabrication Inspection Outside of Area: The added cost of shop fabricationinspection, and material testing outside the State of California or 150 mile radius of theProject site will be paid by the Agency and back-charged to the Contractor.

8. Ultrasonic Testing: All full penetration multi-pass groove welds shall be subject toultrasonic testing.

a. Defective welds shall be repaired and retested with ultrasonic equipment.

b. Initially, all multi-pass groove field welds shall be tested at the rate of 100 percent ofeach individual welder. If rejectable defects occur in less than 5 percent of the weldstested, the frequency of testing may be reduced to 25 percent. If the rate of rejectabledefects increases to 5 percent or more, 100 percent testing shall be reestablisheduntil the rate is reduced to less than 5 percent. The percentage of rejects shall becalculated for each welder independently.

c. When ultrasonic indications arising from the weld root can be interpreted as either aweld defect or the backing strip itself, the backing strip shall be removed at theexpense of the Contractor, and if no root defect is visible, the weld shall be retested.If no defect is indicated on this retest, and no significant amount of the base and weldmetal have been removed, no further repair or welding is necessary. If a defect isindicated, it shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

d. No steel shall be shipped without Testing Laboratory’s mark or tags of acceptance oneach and every piece of steel.

9. The ultrasonic instrumentation shall be calibrated by the technician to evaluate the qualityof the welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.

10. Should defects appear in welds tested, repairs shall be similarly inspected at theContractor’s expense and at the direction of the Engineer until satisfactory performanceis assured.



11. Other methods of inspection, for example, X-ray, gamma ray, magnetic particle, or dyepenetrant, may be used on welds if felt necessary by the Engineer/Inspector/InspectionLaboratory.

D. Inspection and Tests for End Welded Studs:

1. Inspection of all the shop and field welding operations for the automatic end welded studsshall be made in accordance with CCR title 24 Part 2, Sec. 2204.1 and AISC 360 by aqualified welding inspector approved by the Authority having jurisdiction. The type andcapacity of the welding equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations and shall be checked and approved by the welding inspector.

2. At the beginning of each day’s work, a minimum of 2 test stud welds shall be made withthe equipment to be used on metal which is the same as the actual work piece. The teststuds shall be subjected to a 90 degree bend test by striking them with a heavy hammer.After the above test, the weld section shall not exhibit any tearing out or cracking.

E. Corrections:

1. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work, which inspections and test report indicate tobe not in compliance with the specified requirements.

2. Perform additional test required to reconfirm noncompliance of the original work and toshow compliance of corrected work. Costs for all additional tests will be paid for by theAgency and back-charged to the Contractor.

3.09 METAL DECKING

A. Mill certificates or affidavits and manufacturers’ certification shall be supplied to the Inspectorfor verification of steel materials. Agency’s Inspector shall be notified at least 2 working daysin advance of fabrication and supplied with the reports so that he can make a shop inspectionof the metal deck.

B. Tests of Steel Materials:

1. Metal decking identified by heat or melt numbers and accompanied by mill analysis andtest reports do not require additional testing.

2. If metal decking cannot be identified or its source is questionable, not less than onetension and elongation test and one bend test will be made for each 5 tons, or fractionalpart thereof, or each gage. Such testing shall be paid for by the Agency and back-charged to the Contractor.

C. General Inspection:

1. Project Inspector will visually check metal decking delivered to the Project against theworking and reviewed shop drawings for compliance and he will make physical tests andmeasurements, as required to meet the specifications.

2. Inspection of welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of CCR Title 24 Part2, Sec. 2204.

D. Metal Deck Welding:

1. Continuous inspection of all deck welding will be made. The Contractor shall supplysamples and test pieces and provide facilities for inspection without extra charges.



2. Inspection of welding shall be made to ensure that seam welds and puddle welds aremade in accordance with the Contract Documents. Inspection shall insure that properelectrodes, current, travel and speed are used and that no cracks, serious undercutting,overlap, surface holes or slag inclusions occur.

3.010 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

A. Asphaltic concrete mix design proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineerfor review. Proposed mix may be tested for conformance with the specifications, includinggrading, asphalt content and stability.

B. At the Engineer’s option, one sample of the mix shall be taken during each day’s pavingoperation and tested for asphalt content and gradation.

C. At the engineer’s option, continuous inspection of the paving operation shall be provided.Testing Laboratory shall check for proper thickness, proper mix temperatures, proper rollingprocedures and general workmanship.

3.011 WATERPROOFING

A. The Agency’s Inspector will check wall surfaces and approve before application of membranematerials and verify that substrate surfaces are in satisfactory condition to receive membranematerials and furnish continuous inspection during application of membrane.

B. Check minimum specified thickness of membrane waterproofing. For fluid-applied membranecheck thickness every 100 square feet during application with a mil- thickness gageespecially manufactured for the purpose.

3.012 ROOFING

A. The Testing Laboratory may inspect deck surfaces before application of roofing materials andverify that substrate is in satisfactory condition to receive roofing. The Testing Laboratory willinspect sheet metal flashing, counterflashings and reglets for satisfactory and waterproofinstallation.

B. Field Testing: Roofing may be tested by the Testing Laboratory before application of floodcoat and gravel surfacing, by cutting a section of roofing 36” inches wide by 36” long at rightangles to the direction that the felts are laid. Inspection patches may be taken for each 20squares of roofing area. If any layer or lapping of roofing felt or any mopping of asphalt isfound to have been omitted, or if the weight is less than that specified, the Contractor shalllay an additional layer of roofing felt and an additional mopping of asphalt over the entiresurface for each layer of roofing or each mopping that has been omitted. Repair the cut-outsections by applying the same quantity, quality and thickness of roofing materials as in theroofing, and extending each layer of such repair felt and roofing 6 inches, 9 inches, 12inches, and 18 inches beyond the respective underlying layers on all sides.

3.013 Perform additional test that may be required by individual Specification Sections.

3.014 Perform structural tests and inspections in accordance with CBC Chapter 17.

END OF SECTION

VENTURA COUNTY FIRE STATION - THOUSAND OAKS 34 CP21-01

01 4213 - AbbreviationsPage 1 of 2

Section 01 4213Abbreviations

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 Abbreviations

A. The following abbreviations may be used in the contract documents:AAMAArchitectural Aluminum Manufacturers' AssociationAASHTOAmerican Association of State Highway and Transportation OfficialsACIAmerican Concrete InstituteAIAAmerican Institute of ArchitectsAIMAAcoustical and Insulation Materials AssociationAISCAmerican Institute of Steel ConstructionANSIAmerican National Standards InstituteAPAAmerican Plywood AssociationASHRAEAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and air-conditioning EngineersASMEAmerican Society of Mechanical EngineersASTMAmerican Society for Testing and MaterialsAWIArchitectural Woodwork InstituteAWPIAmerican Wood Preservers' AssociationAWSAmerican Welding SocietyBHMABuilders Hardware Manufacturers' AssociationBTUBritish Thermal UnitCACCalifornia Administrative CodeCBCCalifornia Building CodeCECCalifornia Electric CodeCAL/OSHAState of California Construction Safety OrdersCLFMIChain Link Fence Manufacturers' InstituteCMCCalifornia Mechanical CodeCPCCalifornia Plumbing CodeCRSIConcrete Reinforcing Steel InstituteCALTRANSState of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department ofTransportation, "Standard Specifications"ESOElectrical Safety OrdersFAAFederal Aviation AdministrationFGMAFlat Glass Marketing AssociationFMFactory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering CorporationFSFederal SpecificationsIBCInternational Building CodeMMState of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department ofTransportation, "Materials Manual"NECNational Electrical CodeNEMANational Electric Manufacturers' AssociationNFPANational Fire Protection AssociationPSUnited States Department of Commerce Product StandardRISRedwood Inspection ServiceSFMState of California, Office of State Fire MarshalSMACNASheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.TCATile Council of AmericaUBCUniform Building CodeULUnderwriters Laboratories, Inc.USSUnited States StandardWCLIBWest Coast Lumber Inspection BureauWIWoodwork Institute

B. Additional abbreviations used only on the drawings are listed and defined thereon.


01 4213 - AbbreviationsPage 2 of 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED.

End of Section


01 42 16 – DEFINITIONS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION previous

A. General:

1. Basic definitions are included here to define terminology used throughoutspecifications.

2. Definitions given are in addition to terms defined in the General Provisions.

1.02 COMPLETION

A. Completion: The meaning of terms such as "substantial completion", "beneficialoccupancy", "field completion", or any such terminology through which the opinion isexpressed that contract Work is complete, shall be defined in Ventura County StandardSpecification (VCSS) Part 1- General Provisions Sections 6-8, Completion, Acceptanceand Warranty. No item warranty period covered under this contract shall commence untilsuch completion.

1.03 THE CONTRACT

A. The Contract is defined in the General Provisions.

B. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship ofany kind 1) between the Consultant and Contractor, 2) between the Agency and aSubcontractor or Sub-subcontractor or 3) between any persons or entities other than theAgency and Contractor.

1.04 FURNISH

A. Unless specifically limited in context, means furnishing to project site items specified, toinclude packaging, shipping, unloading, storing, protecting, unpacking, relocating andassembling if necessary.

1.05 INSTALL

A. Means incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor, materials, equipment andconnections to perform work indicated and protection thereof after installation untilAcceptance.

1.06 PROVIDE

A. Means furnish and install.

1.07 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL

A. In the interest of conciseness and an imperative writing style, any sentences, statements,and clauses used in the Specifications may exclude any form of the verb "shall" which isnormally expressed in verb phrase with verbs such as "furnish", "install", "provide","perform", "construct", "erect", "comply", "apply", and "submit". Any such sentences,statements, and clauses are to be interpreted to include an applicable form of the phrase


01 42 16 – DEFINITIONS Page 2 of 2

"the Contractor shall" and requirements described therein interpreted as mandatory elements of the Contract.

1.08 OBSERVATION

A. "Observe" or "Observation" means, "to become generally familiar with the process andquality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding in general accordance withthe Contract Documents based on what is plainly visible at the construction site, withoutthe removal of materials or other construction that is in place."

1.09 ACCEPTABLE PERFORMANCE

A. A component or system being able to meet specified design parameters under actualload.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls,including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Water service and distribution.2. Temporary electric power and light.3. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water and washing facilities.4. Storm and sanitary sewer.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Field Office(s).2. Temporary enclosures.3. Waste disposal services.4. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Temporary fire protection.2. Enclosure fence for the site.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:1. Building code requirements.2. Health and safety regulations.3. Utility company regulations.4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporaryutility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Installer: Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specifically trained inthe techniques of installing prefinished interior panels. Installer to be currently approved byManufacturer of prefinished panels.

1.03 STANDARDS - COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING LISTED STANDARDS

A. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations

B. ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition

C. NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities

D. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations fortemporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National ElectricCode."

E. NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers"



F. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as theWork progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Takenecessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitaryconditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may useundamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable foruse intended.

B. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm) chain linkfabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steelpipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for cornerposts.

2.02 TEMPORARY FACLITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meeting specified in other Division 01 sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.4. Coffee machine and supplies.5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature

of 68 to 72 deg F.6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

C. Agency Inspector Office: Provide private field office for Agency's use in accordance with Section 8 of the VCSS. Private office may be a separate room within the Common-Use Field Office and shall be equipped with a plan table, mini-fridge, desk and chair.

D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.03 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use

undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitablefor use intended.



B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the waterdistribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.

C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped withground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools andequipment.

D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords whereexposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengthsof electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are inprogress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use ofconstruction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

F. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers fortemporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size

required by location and class of fire exposure.

G. Heating Equipment: Unless Engineer authorizes use of permanent heating system, providevented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual spacethermostatic control.1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they willserve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of theWork. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify asrequired. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorizeduse of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connectto existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainderwith matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with companyrecommendations.1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if

necessary, to make connections for temporary services.



2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utilityavailability, provide trucked-in services.

3. Obtain temporary easements as necessary to bring temporary utilities to the site wherethe existing easements cannot be used for that purpose.

4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to theAgency or Architect. Neither the Agency nor Architect will accept cost or use charges asa basis of claims for Change Orders.

B. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service anddistribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during constructionperiod. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-faultinterrupters, and main distribution switchgear.1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used.2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least

exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overheadand exposed for surveillance.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities andoperations not directly associated with construction activities included under individualSections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Wherefeasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free ofwater.

B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, inprogress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, andsimilar activities.

C. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily.Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material anddebris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normalweather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste bycontainerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over fromuse of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until SubstantialCompletion, or longer, as requested by the Architect.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements forerection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, andwarning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against.Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

C. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrancegates. Locate where indicated or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient toaccommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, andother animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates.

D. Provide open-mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel andearth or portable fencing, if appropriate, with sufficient hold down weight to preventoverturning.



E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completedareas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

F. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive fortheft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation andrelease of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conductconstruction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, andminimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted orthat other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produceharmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimizecomplaints from persons or firms near the site.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability oftemporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect fromdamage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicatedresults and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Agency requests that it be maintained longer, removeeach temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of apermanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restorepermanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with thetemporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace constructionthat cannot be satisfactorily repaired.1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property.

The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs.2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent

paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil andaggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Removematerials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, andother substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replacestreet paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by thegoverning authority.

3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during theconstruction period including, but not limited to, the following:

END OF SECTION


01 5723 – STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 5723 STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for compliance with the Storm Water Pollution PreventionPlan (SWPPP) developed specifically for this project.

B. Related Sections: All sections of this Specification shall comply with the requirements of thisSection.

C. The SWPPP requires compliance of all trades on the Project which use or manipulatematerials of any nature that can potentially enter the natural storm-water drainage system.

D. Representative materials controlled by the SWPPP include the erosion of native soils and fillmaterials, leakage or spills from construction vehicles and machinery, stored fuels, concretetruck washout, chemical treatments, curing compounds, paints, plasters, paving materials,adhesives and sealants, trash and general construction debris, pesticides, fertilizers, and anyother material which can be carried by running water or percolate into the earth.

1.02 REGULATORY BACKGROUND

A. After October 1, 1992, as required by the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (Clean WaterAct) and regulations of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and of the State ofCalifornia Water Resources Control Board, any construction activity of one acre or more mustbe regulated as an industrial activity in terms of storm water discharge from the site andmust be covered by a National Pollutant Discharge Emission System (NPDES) permit. TheAct further decrees fines of as much as $25,000 per day per violation.

B. The Water Resources Control Board has developed one NPDES permit for all regulatedconstruction within California, in order to avoid each construction project having to obtain anindividual Federal permit. For each construction project, property owners are required to file aNotice of Intent (NOI) with the State. This NOI notifies the State of the construction project,certifies that the Owner agrees to the provisions of the NPDES permit, and further certifiesthat that Owner has a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and program in place. TheNPDES permit, as implemented and enforced by the subsidiary Regional Water QualityControl Boards, requires all owners of land where construction activity occurs to:

C. Eliminate or reduce non-storm water discharges to storm sewer systems and other water ofthe nation.

D. Develop and implement a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for eachconstruction site.

E. Perform inspections of storm water pollution prevention measures.

F. The Agency is responsible for filing the Notice of Intent (NOI) for this project, developing theSWPPP, and monitoring its effectiveness. The Contractor is required to become familiar withand comply with all provisions of the SWPPP during construction of this project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



A. Product Data: Provide product catalog cut sheets of all temporary and permanent equipmentand specialty items that must be provided to the jobsite in order to comply with SWPPP,including items necessary for storage, disposal, and recycling.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide four copies of the site plan(s) indicating construction staging,storage, portable restrooms, concrete washout, refuse areas, and vehicular routing andparking areas. Submittal may be colored pencil or marker on a print of the Erosion ControlPlan(s). One copy of each will be distributed to Inspector, Engineer, and Con- tractor.

C. No construction activities or mobilization may commence until the perimeter site controlshave been installed.

D. Provide plan(s) for approval one week minimum prior to start of site mobilization.

E. Update and submit revised plan(s) as required during construction as SWPPP facilitieschange due to construction phasing.


A. Pre-Construction Conference: Contractor, all subcontractors, and all heavy equipmentoperators shall attend the pre-construction conference, at which time the contractor and hissubcontractors shall ask any questions relating to the SWPPP and Erosion Control Plan(s).Attendance is mandatory.

B. Contractor’s Project Manager, Project Engineer, and Construction Superintendent shallbecome familiar with all aspects of the SWPPP and shall be responsible for ensuringcompliance with the SWPPP for the project. Contractor shall enforce compliance withrequirements of the SWPPP by all subcontractors.

C. Engineer will monitor effectiveness of Contractor’s personnel in ensuring compliance.Engineer will be responsible for maintaining a photographic record of all aspects of theexecution of the SWPPP.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor and all subcontractors shall abide by the minimum requirements of the StormWater Pollution Prevention Plan in all respects. The contractor shall install any additionaltemporary Best Management Practices as needed based upon site conditions in order tomaintain compliance with the State NPDES Permit and SWPPP.

B. Contractor and all subcontractor shall read and be thoroughly familiar with all requirements ofthe SWPPP as it pertains to the site and work to be done. Copies of the SWPPP aredistributed as part of the Bid and Contract Documents, and are also available from theEngineer. Entering into this Contract signified Contractor has read the Storm Water PollutionPrevention Plan, fully understands all of its conditions and requirements, and consents to bebound by it. Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the subcontractors.

C. Penalties: Contractor shall pay any fines and be liable for any other penalties that may beimposed by the regulatory agency for violations of the SWPPP during the course of the work.In cases of violations, Contractor shall be responsible to complete any and all correctivemeasures, at his own expenses, as may be directed by the regulatory agency.

D. If Engineer becomes aware of violations of the SWPPP, they will immediately inform theContractor in writing. Contractor shall immediately cease the violation and shall restore the



site, at his own expense, to the same condition it was in before the violation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. Should Contractor continue to violate requirements of the SWPPP, or refuse to comply, orrefuse to repair results of a violation to the Engineer’s satisfaction, for purposes of thisContract it shall be considered as any other violation of the Contract. Engineer will takenecessary measures as set forth in the General Provisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide all temporary and permanent storm water pollution prevention equipment, materials,and facilities as required by or as necessary to comply with the SWPPP.

B. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Prepared by: RRM Design Group

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 IMPLEMENTATION

A. All measures required in the SWPPP shall be executed as dictated by the SWPPP itself.

B. During construction, make changes as necessary for proper functioning of SWPPPmeasures.

C. At completion of work, Contractor shall remove all temporary SWPPP measure and disposeof any pollutants in a legal manner off-site, or as otherwise required by the SWPPP.

END OF SECTION


01 6000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products foruse in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warrantieson products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project ortaken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,""equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make ormodel number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published productliterature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project orfacility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unlessexplicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are notconsidered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittalprocess to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-serviceperformance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal orexceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer'sproduct is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including makeor model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and othercharacteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturersnamed in the specification.

C. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction fromthose required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparableproduct. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. IncludeSpecification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "ComparableProducts" Article.

2. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information ordocumentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product



request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

C. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify productor fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number andtitle and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Agency and separate contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of theWork specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance,weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirementsindicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication andinstallation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses

and names and addresses of Architects and Owners.g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overallContract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be providedwithin the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer'sletterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicatedresults.

3. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information ordocumentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.Engineer will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejectionof proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt ofadditional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.b. Use product specified if Engineer cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.




A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or moreproducts for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previouslyselected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to preventovercrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items thatare flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and otherlosses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's originalsealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions forhandling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and toensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Agency's construction forces. Coordinate location with Engineer.

1.07 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, otherwarranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitationson product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of theContract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individualmanufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer toAgency.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the ContractDocuments, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to providemore rights for Agency.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms andidentification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.



1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information andproperly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare awritten document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particularrequirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other itemsneeded for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options arespecified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and usedsuccessfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Engineer reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflictwith requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will makeselection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched isEngineer's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specificationsestablish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "orequal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

2. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products andmanufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Theproduct with “basis of design” designation in the list is the product upon which the designis based. If the Contractor selects a subsequent product in the list, Contractor must bearthe cost of re-design and construction pursuant to VCSS Section 4-1.6.

3. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide aproduct by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample",provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample.Engineer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with otherspecified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "SubstitutionProcedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected byEngineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with



requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after theNotice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected atdiscretion of Engineer.

B. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the followingconditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will returnrequests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Agency a substantial advantage in cost, time, energyconservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Agencymust assume. Agency's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Engineerfor redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Agency, andsimilar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor' Construction Schedule.6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.10. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of Architect’s and Owner’s if needed.11. Samples, if requested.


END OF SECTION


01 6501 – DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE MATERALS AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 65 01 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes:

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for delivery,handling, and storage of materials and equipment as indicated inaccordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

2. Completely coordinate with all other Contract work.

B. Comply with applicable codes.

C. Provide fire protection.

D. Contractor will arrange for delivery, unload, handle, and properly store all Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed items (OFCI).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY

A. By manufacturer's normal means unless otherwise required by ContractDocuments.

B. In original labeled containers.

C. Where applicable, with UL labeling on packages.

D. Contractor responsible for acceptance at site.

E. Inspect items for damage upon delivery.

3.02 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Use methods to avoid damage to item or structure.

B. Protect weather fragile items from weather damage.

C. Handle and store bulk aggregates to avoid contamination.

D. Store to allow air circulation.

E. Store only in authorized areas on site.

F. Replace damaged items. Repair only with Engineer's prior written acceptance.


01 6501 – DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE MATERALS AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 2

G. Protect installed items as required until acceptance of Work.

H. Uncrate, assemble, if required, and remove debris.

I. When off-site storage is authorized, perform re-handling to move items to site atno added cost.

3.03 CLEANUP

A. Remove excess materials from site.

END OF SECTION


01 7135 - Restoration of ImprovementsPage 1 of 2

Section 01 7135Restoration of Improvements

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 Structures

A. The Contractor shall carefully cut and or remove such existing structures, utilities, andimprovements as required to complete the work, including but not limited to: curbs, gutters,pipelines, sidewalks and utility poles, as may be necessary for the performance of the work andshall rebuild the structures thus removed in as good a condition as found. The Contractor shallalso repair existing structures or improvements, which may be damaged as a result of the workunder this contract.

1.02 Roads and StreetsA. Unless otherwise specified, roads and streets in which the surface is removed, broken, or

damaged, or in which the ground has caved or settled during the work under this contract, shallbe resurfaced and brought to the original grade and section by the Contractor. Roadways usedby the Contractor shall be cleaned and repaired to local County and State Standards. Beforeresurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be trimmed back far enough to provideclean solid, saw-cut vertical faces, and shall be free of loose material.

1.03 Cultivated Areas and Other Surface ImprovementsA. Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of

the Contractor shall be restored to their original condition or better.B. Existing guard posts, barricades, and fences shall be protected and replaced if damaged.C. Special attention shall be given to avoid trees, bushes and shrubs not indicated for removal.

1.04 Protection of Existing InstallationsA. The Contractor shall immediately correct or replace existing equipment, controls or systems that

are damaged as a result of his operations.


PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USEDEnd of Section


01 7135 - Restoration of ImprovementsPage 2 of 2



01 7300 – EXECUTION Page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 7300 EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governingexecution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.2. Field engineering and surveying.3. General installation of products.4. Coordination of Agency-installed products.5. Progress cleaning.6. Starting and adjusting.7. Protection of installed construction.8. Correction of the Work.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor.

B. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record surveydata.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practicein jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveyingservices of the kind indicated.



3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and otherconstruction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate andverify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other constructionaffecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities andconstruction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigateand verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affectingthe Work.



1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection ofsanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electricalservices.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilitiesserving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer orApplicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installationtolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of theWork is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existingfinishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations ofconnections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems areto be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utilityappurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities havingjurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheckmeasurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fitto other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements beforefabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying theWork.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items showndiagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the needfor clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Engineer.Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations forchanging the Contract Documents.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown onDrawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies arediscovered, notify Engineer promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.



1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story ofconstruction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.5. Notify Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, filland topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, buildingfoundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical andelectrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines andlevels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, nameand duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make thelog available for reference by Engineer.

3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Engineer will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similarreference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarksand control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior writtenapproval of Engineer. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control pointspromptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points toEngineer before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Basereplacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Projectsite, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities havingjurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project RecordDocuments.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, providetemporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore markedconstruction to its original condition.

D. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (realproperty) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, thatprincipal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown onthe survey.



1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existingimprovements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or withauthorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment andelevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing productsin applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operationsor loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement ofconstruction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to befactory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm thatadequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicatedrequirements.

H. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor eachcomponent securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components atheights directed by Engineer.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items withintegral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items toProject site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairlinejoints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are notconsidered hazardous.

3.06 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS



A. Owner Furnished Owner Installed (OFOI)1. Site Access – Provide access and support pursuant to VCSS Section 4-1.1.1 (not

including installation, which shall be performed by Agency).2. Coordination – Provide cooperation and coordination in accordance with VCSS Section

7-7.

B. Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (OFCI)1. Site Access – Provide access and support pursuant to VCSS Section 4-1.1.1.2. Coordination – Provide cooperation and coordination in accordance with VCSS Section

7-7.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinateprogress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforcerequirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials anddebris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if thetemperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. Dispose of waste to a legaldisposal facility.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary forproper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to writteninstructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materialsspecifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaningmaterials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposedsurfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary toensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washingwaste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. Comply with wastedisposal requirements in Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management andDisposal”.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoiningmaterials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protectionfrom damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.



I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessarythrough the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable componentsto ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of theconstruction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, orotherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.08 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Removemalfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment forproper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls andsafeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required toinspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualificationrequirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damageor deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.010 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates andfinishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching upwith matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot berepaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating componentsthat cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

F. The following items…

END OF SECTION


01 7329 – CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 7329 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching of pavement for utilitytie-ins through existing street improvements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance ofother Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions afterinstallation of other Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, usematerials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, submit to Engineer for reviewmaterials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching areto be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might beexposed during cutting and patching operations.


01 7329 – CUTTING AND PATCHING Page 2 of 2

B. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passageto adjoining areas.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting andpatching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performanceof other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to theiroriginal condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similaroperations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained oradjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; complywith original Installer's written recommendations.1. Concrete and Asphalt Pavement: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw

where cutting passes through concrete sidewalk paving, remove concrete from joint tojoint.

2. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sectionswhere required by cutting and patching operations.

3. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similaroperations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are asinvisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified inother Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion todemonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finishrestoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence ofpatching and refinishing.

3. Where patches at asphalt occur, overlay asphalt a minimum of one foot past the trenchopening. Slurry coat the trench area to match existing adjacent pavement.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completelyremove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

END OF SECTION


01 7401 – CLEANING Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 74 01 CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes:

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all cleaningas indicated in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.


1.02 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers.

B. Remove from premises daily.

1.03 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Conduct cleanup and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances andanti-pollution laws.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Use materials recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned.

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning materialmanufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Clean all items installed under this Contract.

1. Leave free of stains, damage, or defects prior to final acceptance.

2. Include washing, sweeping, polishing of all finished wall surfaces, floors,windows, hardware, mirrors, lighting fixtures and items of equipment.

3. Replace damaged or defaced items not acceptable to Engineer, to hissatisfaction at no additional expense to Agency.


01 7401 – CLEANING Page 2 of 2

3.02 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Clean up all waste materials, rubbish, and debris from site and access anddispose of off site.

B. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishesdamaged by his own operations.

C. Schedule cleaning operations so that contaminants resulting from cleaning donot fall on wet painted surfaces.

D. Leave the Work "broom clean".

3.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

B. At completion of construction, just prior to acceptance or occupancy, performfinal cleaning.

C. Remove dirt, stains, labels, protective films and foreign materials.

D. Repair and touch-up marred areas.

E. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materialsfrom interior and exterior surfaces of fixtures, hardware, and equipment.

END OF SECTION


01 7419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall utilize Green Halo, an online web-based waste management program, inorder to meet the City of Thousand Oaks Construction and Demolition Debris RecyclingOrdinance No. 1639-NS. When required by the Agency’s Representative, paper documentsshall also be provided. In the event of discrepancy between the electronic version and paperdocuments, the paper documents will govern.

B. Contractor shall include all costs associated with using this software, including user training,in the Contract bid price.

1.02 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the validity of the information it places in Green Haloand for the abilities of their personnel.

B. The Contractor is responsible for the training of their personnel in the use of Green Halo asneeded. All costs associated with the use of this system, will be evenly distributed in theproject overheads and spread across the duration of the contract; a separate cost line itemwill not be allowed.


PART 3 EXECUTION

1.03 UTILIZATION

A. Green Halo requires a permit number for waste management plan submission. Therefore,Contractor shall contact [email protected] or 805-449-7283, option 3, so that the City mayprovide one.

B. Additional information and requirements can be found at the following website:

https://www.toaks.org/departments/public-works/sustainability/trash-recycling/trash-recycling-businesses/c-d-recycling-permits

END OF SECTION




01 7419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 2 of 2



01 7700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal itemsspecified in other Sections.

1.06 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed andcorrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasonswhy the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 daysprior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items belowthat are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdictionpermitting Agency unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.



2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including projectrecord documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections,including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, finalcertifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, anddeliver to location designated by Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and modelnumber where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule ofmaintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item andname and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer's signature forreceipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Agency's occupancy, use, operation, andmaintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 daysprior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items belowthat are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Engineer of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Engineer. Advise Agency'spersonnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.

5. Instruct Agency's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,equipment, and systems.

6. Advise Engineer of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,construction tools, and similar elements.

8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visualdefects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion aminimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspectionand tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notifyContractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of SubstantialCompletion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or



additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections asincomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.07 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining finalcompletion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Paragraph 1.9

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's SubstantialCompletion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsedand dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has beencompleted or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coveragecomplying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimumof 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests.On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor ofunfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspectionor will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificatewill be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections asincomplete is completed or corrected.

1.08 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected byconstruction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, ifnecessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSIForm 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Engineer.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following formats:



a. MS Excel electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.b. PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.c. Three paper copies. Engineer will return two copies.

1.09 FINAL PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Submittals prior to final payment: Provide the following prior to final payment.

1. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including projectrecord documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys,waste disposal receipts, and similar final record information.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similardocuments.

3. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated byEngineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule ofmaintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item andname and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer's signature forreceipt of submittals.

4. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

1.010 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portionsof the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion isindicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Agency's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion ofdesignated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Agency duringconstruction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents ofProject Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inchpaper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Marktab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product orinstallation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephonenumber of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warrantyand bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enablingnavigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.



D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer orfabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentiallyhazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to complywith local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollutionregulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Cleaneach surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning andmaintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certificationof Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and otherforeign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and otherforeign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- texturedsurface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Projectsite.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing naturalweathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; cleanaccording to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Polishmirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent.



k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreignsubstances.

l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stainsresulting from water exposure.

m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfacesof diffusers, registers, and grills.

n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters duringconstruction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

i. Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Providewritten report on completion of cleaning.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01,Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.02 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requestinginspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defectiveparts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properlyadjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired orrestored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot berepaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction tospecified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and otherdamaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, includingmechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels andidentification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impedeoperation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective andnoisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements fornew fixtures.

END OF SECTION


01 7823 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 1 of 8

SECTION 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation andmaintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes,systems and equipment.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regularinteraction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requestinginspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenancedirectory. Engineer will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope andcontent of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before finalinspection. Engineer will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit 3 copies ofeach corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations bymore than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinateinformation furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY



A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.2. List of systems.3. List of equipment.4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operationand maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. Forpieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, andmaintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in theContract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAEGuideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for BuildingSystems."

2.02 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section foreach system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part ofa system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Agency.4. Date of submittal.5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.6. Name and address of Engineer.7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexedto the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in ProjectManual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume toaccommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in eachvolume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically bysystem, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary toaccommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on



spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organizedata in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for properoperation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tabto indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipmentincluded in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Sectionnumber and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnosticsoftware diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and useas foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeledenvelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, anddrawing locations.

2.03 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, includeinstructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, andcomponent:

1. Fire2. Flood.3. Gas leak.4. Water leak.5. Power failure.6. Water outage.7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Agency's operating personnel fornotification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.



D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.04 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required inindividual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controlsas installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required foridentification.

2.05 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL



A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materialsand sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name andarranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, andtelephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or scheduledesignation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials andrelated services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstancesand conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.06 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, includesource information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenanceservice contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included inmanual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. Foreach product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier andmaintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title inProject Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenancedocumentation including the following information for each component part or piece ofequipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassemblyand component removal, replacement, and assembly.



3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essentialmaintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list ofrequired lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routinemaintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recordingmaintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, withparts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and localsources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name andtelephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstancesand conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual thatprovides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicatingprocedures for use by emergency personnel and by Agency's operating personnel for typesof emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating careand maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation andmaintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, andpiece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare informationfor each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.



2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of aninstructional manual for use by Agency's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, includeonly sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify eachproduct or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in atabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available andwhere the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipmentor systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate therelationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequenceand flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in RecordDrawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenancemanuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section"Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operationand maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION


01 7836 – WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes:

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for allwarranties and guarantees as indicated in accordance with provisions ofContract Documents.


B. In addition to one year General Guarantee, provide specified extended writtenwarranties/guarantees for products and installations which exceed basic oneyear General Guarantee required by General Provisions.

C. Provide manufacturer's warranties/guarantees for products.

1. Where manufacturer's or other sub-tier entity's standardwarranties/guarantees expire before expiration date required by ContractDocuments, obtain and pay for extensions, as part of Contract Price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WARRANTIES/GUARANTEES

A. Assemble warranties/guarantees forms in 3-ring white binders, each with 3 inchspine, and clear sleeve on cover and spine. Completely index each binder withcard stock indexing system identified by appropriate Construction SpecificationsInstitute "MasterFormat" specification section numbering system, with eachwarranty/guarantee clearly labeled.

B. Identify each warranty/guarantee in manner consistent with names andidentification numbers used in Contract Documents.

C. Neatly type or draft all warranties/guarantees not furnished in printed form.

D. Furnish warranty documents, signed by indicated individuals and entities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY

A. Deliver all items to Agency for review within 30 calendar days after completion ofthe Work.

B. Deliver all final and corrected items to Agency prior to acceptance of the Work.

END OF SECTION


01 7836 – WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES Page 2 of 2



01 7839 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project RecordDocuments, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of corrected Record Transparencies and oneset(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Engineer will initial and date each plot and markwhether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality ofdrafting are acceptable. Engineer will return plots and prints for organizing into sets,printing, binding, and final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints, one set(s) of RecordTransparencies, and three copies printed from Record Transparencies. Print eachDrawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda andcontract modifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up blue- or black-line white prints of the ContractDrawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications areissued.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation variesfrom that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whetherindividual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-upRecord Prints.



a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficultto identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markupbefore enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showingactual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguishbetween changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omittedfrom original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Ordernumbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of SubstantialCompletion, review marked-up Record Prints with Engineer. When authorized, prepare a fullset of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for resolution.

3. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies.Engineer will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing RecordDrawings where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor ShopDrawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of acceptingan alternate, substitution, or other modification.



2. Consult Engineer for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to recordthe actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newlyprepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures forformatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECTRECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings intomanageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identificationon cover sheets.

2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Placetransparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap ofeach container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identifyDrawings included.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Engineer.e. Name of Contractor.

2.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installationvaries from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations thatcannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, andequipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary toprovide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted inoperation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record specifications as paper copy.

2.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installationvaries substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations thatcannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes inmanufacturer's written instructions for installation.



3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings whereapplicable.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneousrecord keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or filemiscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for ProjectRecord Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documentsas they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples inthe field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use ProjectRecord Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order andin a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access toProject Record Documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION


01 7843 – SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes:

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all spareparts and maintenance materials as indicated in accordance withprovisions of Contract Documents.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Requirements for submittal:

1. Provide transmittal letter to Engineer containing: Date, project title,Contractor's name and address, Title, description and quantity submitted.

2. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials inquantities specified in the individual specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. Contractor shall package in clearly identified boxes all spare parts and toolsrequired in the individual specifications sections.

1. Indicate manufacturer's name, part name and stock number, the piece ofequipment by equipment number that each part or tool is for, and thename, address and phone number of closest supplier of the spare part ortool.

2.02 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall package in clearly identified boxes in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations, all maintenance materials required in theindividual specifications sections.

1. Indicate material trade name and stock number, which item material is tobe used with, and the name, address and phone number of closestsupplier.

2.03 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall package in clearly identified containers, or install whereindicated. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, all extramaterials required to be provided in the individual specification sections.

1. Indicate trade name, stock number, size, and color, where product is tobe used, and the name, address and phone number of closest supplier.


01 7843 – SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY

A. Deliver spare parts and materials at least 30 calendar days prior to finalAcceptance.

B. Deliver to a location at the project site and place in a location as directed byEngineer.

END OF SECTION


01 7900 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Agency'spersonnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstrationand training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, andinstructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for eachtraining module.

1. At completion of training, submit two complete training manuals for Agency's use.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length ofinstruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results anddocumentation of performance-based test.


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying withrequirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation andmaintenance procedures and training.

B. Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply withrequirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Reviewmethods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to,the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.3. Review required content of instruction.4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.05 COORDINATION



A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Agency's operations. Adjust schedule as required tominimize disrupting Agency's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instructiontime, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenancedata has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modulesfor each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual SpecificationSections, and as follows:

1. Motorized doors and gates, including overhead sectional doors.2. Equipment, including residential appliances.3. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.4. Intrusion detection systems.5. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems, and terminal

equipment and devices.6. HVAC instrumentation and controls.7. Electrical service and distribution, including generator

transformers, switchboards, panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies, and motor controls.

8. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches.9. Lighting equipment and controls.10. Communication systems, including intercommunication, voice and data, and television

equipment.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Includea description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For eachmodule, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria:Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.c. Operating standards.d. Regulatory requirements.e. Equipment function.f. Operating characteristics.g. Limiting conditions.h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.b. Operations manuals.c. Maintenance manuals.d. Project Record Documents.



e. Identification systems.f. Warranties and bonds.g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.b. Instructions on stopping.c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.c. Routine and normal operating instructions.d. Regulation and control procedures.e. Control sequences.f. Safety procedures.g. Instructions on stopping.h. Normal shutdown instructions.i. Operating procedures for emergencies.j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.b. Checking adjustments.c. Noise and vibration adjustments.d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.d. Procedures for routine cleaninge. Procedures for preventive maintenance.f. Procedures for routine maintenance.g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.b. Repair instructions.



c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassemblyinstructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation andtraining module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.02 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number ofparticipants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintainsystems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Engineer will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operationalrequirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requiresseasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advancenotice.

D. Training Location and Reference manual: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fullyoperational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operationand maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant'smastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site.Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing beforeinitial training use.

END OF SECTION


01 8001 – QUALITY ASSURANCE Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 80 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes:

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary tomeet requirements delineated.

2. Completely coordinate with other Contract work.

3. Perform additional work specified under respective Specificationsections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualifications of Designers, Manufacturers, Fabricators, and Installers:

1. Where individual specification sections require specific qualifications formanufacturer, fabricators, applicators or installer; submit documentationsubstantiating the required qualifications of the organization or personnelproposed for the Work.

2. Submit qualification documentation at least 30 calendar days prior tostart of Work for the specification section which requires the qualification.

B. Demonstration and Training

1. Furnish preliminary instruction forms and instruction itinerary.

2. Submit outline of instruction materials and proposed itinerary at least 30calendar days prior to start of demonstration and training.Demonstration and training must be complete prior to release of withheldcontract funds (see General Provisions).

C. Commissioning

1. Provide acceptance certification from manufacturer representative,suppliers and subcontractors for applicable specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DEFINITIONS AND PROCEDURES

A. Manufacturer, Fabricator, and Installer Qualifications:

1. "Years" refers to the number of years of experience in the type of workspecified in the individual Specification sections listed in the attachedreport. If the installer, fabricator, or manufacturer is a corporation, thecorporation must have been in force under its current name for at least



the number of years listed. If elements of Contractor's installation is subcontracted, such subcontracted work shall be by Subcontractors with the necessary specialty contractor license(s). The experience requirements apply to the individuals in Contractor's organization performing the installation and those who are responsible for the design, fabrication and manufacturing processes.

B. Warranties:

1. No warranty documents or alternate warranty submittals prepared by themanufacturer or supplier or sub-contractor to the Contractor will beaccepted by the Agency. Only the requirements of the Contract'sGeneral Guarantee, set out in the Ventura County Standard SpecificationPart 1 -General Provisions Sections 6-8, are acceptable, as amended(where applicable) by Section 01 7823.

2. The warranty documents are to be signed by all individuals in theContractor's procurement structure, including all levels frommanufacturer through supplier through sub-contractor and Contractor.

C. Demonstrations and Training:

1. Demonstration, training, and commissioning may be performed byContractor contemporaneously, subject to Engineer's express pre-approval.

D. Extended Service:

1. "Extended service" refers to the Contractor providing all labor, material,and equipment necessary to maintain, service and repair the equipmentand materials under Specifications sections concerned for thedesignated period commencing from the date of Acceptance of the Work.

2. Contractor shall perform all scheduled maintenance and service work,including changing all filters and following all lubrication schedules andperforming any necessary repairs to keep the equipment and/ormaterials in proper working order for the duration of the period noted.

E. Commissioning:

1. Specifications sections that are designated as requiring commissioningobligate Contractor to cause an individual from the manufacturer's orfabricator's organization to come to the project site and start up theequipment concerned to verify that it has been installed correctly andthat it is running properly.

2. Contractor shall cause subject manufacturer's representative to accept,in writing, (as well as all other levels of the Contractor's procurementorganization from manufacturer through supplier through sub-contractorand contractor) that the equipment, materials, and systems have beenproperly installed and are functioning properly, and that a qualifiedmanufacturer's representative has commissioned the equipment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except whenmore stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higherstandards or more precise workmanship.

B. Satisfy additional requirements as described in individual specification sections.

END OF SECTION


03 0516 - Underslab Vapor BarrierPage 1 of 2

Section 03 0516Underslab Vapor Barrier

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Preparation of subgrade, granular fill, placement of

concrete.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of WaterVapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

B. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact withSoil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required

with adjacent construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Barrier:1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms, maximum.2. Thickness: 15 mils.3. Basis of Design:

a. Stego Industries LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil):www.stegoindustries.com/#sle.

B. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc.,for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready beforeproceeding with installation of vapor barrier.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation

walls.C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches.D. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and

follow manufacturer's written instructions.E. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.F. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials.

End of Section


03 0516 - Underslab Vapor BarrierPage 2 of 2


03 1000 - Concrete Forming and AccessoriesPage 1 of 4

Section 03 1000Concrete Forming and Accessories


A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.B. Installation of items to be embedded in concrete, such as anchor bolts, inserts, embeds, and

sleeves.C. Openings for other work.D. Form accessories.E. Form stripping.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary

Conditions Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this SectionB. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.D. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates

in cast-in-place concrete.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;2010.

B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedure.B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints

and ties. Review and approval will not include form strength and adequacy.D. Keep an accurate record of the dates of removal of forms, form shores and reshores, and

furnish copies to the SEOR.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the pertinent provisions of 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."B. Construct forms according to ACI 347, "Guide to Formwork for Concrete," and conforming to

tolerances of ACI 117, "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials"

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements,"

delivering materials in a timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress.B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration

from moisture.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL

A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplishcast-in-place concrete work.



B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, anddimensions.

C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, andremoval of formwork.

D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS

A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B Medium or High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I, grademarked, not mill oiled.

B. Lumber: DF species; WCLIB Construction grade or better, WWPA No. 1 grade or better; withgrade stamp clearly visible.

2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIESA. Form ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, or equal,

not leaving metal within 1-1/2" of concrete surface.B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or

discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concreteand form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.1. Composition: Colorless, reactive, water-based or solvent-based compound.2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.3. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations.

C. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 1200.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agreewith drawings.

3.02 EARTH FORMSA. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. Sides

of all footings and grade beams shall be formed, unless the member detail provides at least 3"clear cover to reinforcement and indicates the member is cast against earth. Remove formworkprior to backfilling operations.

3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORKA. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with

requirements of ACI 301.B. Rigidly construct forms to prevent mortar leakage, sagging, displacement or bulging between

studs. Use clean, sound, approved form material, coated with specified materials only, not oil.Provide backing on all plywood joints.

C. Coat forms with the specified resin coating, not form oil. Construct forms to exact shapes, sizes,lines and dimensions required to obtain level, plumb, and straight surfaces. Provide openings,offsets, keys, reglets, anchorages, recesses, moldings, chamfers, blocking, screeds, drips,bulkheads, and all other required features. Make forms easily removable without hammering orprying against concrete. Space forms apart with metal spreaders. Construct forms to accuratealignment, locations and grades, and provide against sagging, leakage of concrete mortar, ordisplacement occuring during and after placing of concrete. Coordinate installation of insertsand anchors in forms according to shop drawings and requirements for work of other sections.

D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject tooverstressing by construction loads.

E. Corners and angles: Provide 3/4" x 3/4" beveled chamfer strips for all exposed concrete cornersand angles square unless indicated otherwise.



F. Reglets and Rebates: Form required reglets and rebates to receive frames, flashing and otherequipment. Obtain required dimensions, details, and precise positions for work to be installedunder other sections and form concrete accordingly.

G. Form Joints: Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. Fill joints toproduce smooth surfaces, intersections, and arises. Use polymer foam or equivalent fillers atjoints and where forms abut or overlap existing concrete to prevent leakage of mortar.

H. Recesses, Drips, and Profiles: Provide smooth milled wood or pre-formed rubber or plasticshapes of types shown and required.

I. Cleanouts and Cleaning: Provide Temporary openings in all wall forms and other vertical formsfor cleaning and inspection. Clean forms and surfaces to receive concrete prior to placing.

J. Re-Use: Clean and Recondition form material before re-use.3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied

coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGSA. All necessary pipe sleeves, anchors, or other required inserts shall be accurately installed as

part of the work of other sections, according to Specification Section 03 30 00, Section 1.3.B forsubmittal requirements related to this scope.

B. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated ondrawings.

C. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concretework.

D. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.E. Conduits or pipes:

1. Locate so as not to reduce strength of the concrete2. Do not place pipes, other than conduits, in a slab 4-1/2" thick or less in any case. Conduit

buried in a concrete slab shall not have an outside dimension greater than 1/3 the slabthickness nor be placed below the bottom reinforcing or over the top reinforcement.

3. Sleeves: Pipe sleeves may pass through the slab or walls if not exposed to rusting or otherdeterioration and are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel. Provide sleeves of diameterlarge enough to pass any hub or coupling on pipe, including any insulation.

4. Conduits may be embedded in walls only if the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3 thewall thickness, are spaced no closer than 3 diameters on centers and not impair thestrength of the structure.

F. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

G. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level,and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

H. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuouswithout displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.

I. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning andinspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.

J. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatlyfitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.



3.06 FORM CLEANINGA. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCESA. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.B. Deflection: Limit Deflection of forming surfaces from concrete pressure to L/240.C. Finish Lines: Position formwork to maintain hardened concrete finish lines within following

permissible deviations.1. Variation from Plumb:

In 10'-0" 1/4 inchIn any story or 20'-0" 3/8 inchIn 40'-0" or more 3/4 inch

2. Variation from Level or Grades IndicatedIn 10'-0" 1/4 inchIn any story or 20'-0" 3/8 inchIn 40'-0" or more 3/4 inch

3. Cross-Sectional Dimensionsa. Minus 1/4 inchb. Plus 1/2 inch

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01

4000 - Quality Requirements.B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with

formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.3.09 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its ownweight and all superimposed loads as determined by testing field cured cylinders, but not soonerthan specified in ACI 347 Section 3.6.2.3. Load supporting forms may be removed whenconcrete has attained 75 percent of required 28 day compressive strength, but no sooner than 3days, provided construction is reshored. Vertical formwork for cast in place concrete walls maybe removed no sooner than 1 day following concrete placement, provided that the contractorcan demonstrate that no sloughing or sagging of concrete will occur.1. Reshore structural members as specified per ACI 347.2. Remove formwork progressively so unbalanced loads are not imposed on the structure.3. Avoid damage to concrete surfaces during removal.4. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete

surface coloration.End of Section


03 2000 - Concrete ReinforcingPage 1 of 6

Section 03 2000Concrete Reinforcing


A. Reinforcing Steel for Concrete FoundationsB. Reinforcing Steel for Concrete Slabs on GradeC. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.


Conditions Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.B. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).B. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures; 2011.C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.D. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.F. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2014.G. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011.H. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; 2009.I. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal proceduresB. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include the following:

1. complete bar layout2. representative sections3. details for congested conditions4. proposed layout where vertical and horizontal bars intersect5. bar schedules6. typical bending diagrams and offsets7. shapes of bent bars8. spacing of bars9. splice lengths and locations

C. Where welding is proposed:1. Detail welding to conform to AWS D1.42. Submit Copies of welding operator's certificate3. Where reinforcement complying with ASTM A615 is to be welded, chemical tests shall be

performed to determine the weldability in accordance with Section ACI 318-14 26.6.4.1.4. Weld Procedure Specifications:

a. All WPS's shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR) for review and approval prior to use.

b. For WPS's that have been qualified by test, the supporting Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) shall be submitted to the SEOR for review and approval.

c. Included shall be WPS for repair welds



D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the pertinent provisions of 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."B. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS

qualification within the previous 12 months.1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements,"delivering materials in a timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress.

B. Bundle bars, tag with identification, and transport and store so as not to damage any material.Use metal tags indicating size, length and other marking shown on placement drawings.Maintain tags after bundles are broken

C. Avoid exposure to dirt, moisture or conditions harmful to reinforcement.1.07 EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Provide an allowance of an additional 10% of the total reinforcing steel tonnage in addition tothe quantities shown on the drawings. This additional steel shall be installed in sizes andlocations as directed by the structural engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi).1. Deformed billet-steel bars.2. Unfinished.3. Only to be used for conditions where bars will not be welded.4. Sustainability:

a. Reinforcing Steel shall meet the following two conditions in order to receive creditsper the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED for new Constructioncertification:1) MR4 (Recycled Content): The reinforcing steel shall have a recycled material

content of 80 percent or greater.2) MR5 (Regional Materials): Both the harvest (steel billet producer) and

manufacturing (fabricator) sites must be within 500 miles of the project site.B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) deformed low-alloy steel bars.

1. Unfinished.2. Used in all cases where welding of bars is required.3. Sustainability: Refer to sustainability requirements for A615 steel.

C. Reinforcement Accessories:1. Tie Wire: ASTM A82, Annealed copper bearing steel, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement. Standard manufactured products shall conformto the Concrete Reinforcing Institute, "Manual of Stand Practice," latest edition.

3. Use dense precast concrete supports with embedded wire ties for reinforcement placed ongrade. Elsewhere, use wire bar supports.

D. Welding electrodes: AWS D1.4, Table 5.1 and 5.3, low hydrogen electrodes, E8018 for Grade60 Steel.

2.02 Re-bar Splicing:A. Coupler Systems: Mechanical devices for splicing reinforcing bars conforming to the

requirements of ACI 318-14 Section 25.5.7.1; capable of developing 1.25fy of the steelreinforcing yield strength in tension and compression.



All mechanical splices in Special Structural Walls, Special Moment Frames and ConcreteDiaphragms shall be Type 2 conforming to the requirements of ACI 318-11 Section18.2.7.1-18.2.7.2 & 25.5.7.1; capable of developing 1.25fy of the steel reinforcing yield strengthin tension and compression and develop the specified tensile strength of the spliced bars.1. Products:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation; Bar Lock Coupler System: www.daytonsuperior.com(ICC-ESR 2481.

b. Lenton Lock Couplers (IAPMO-ES 129).B. Dowel Bar Splicer with Dowel-Ins: Mechanical devices for connecting dowels; capable of

developing full steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression.1. Products:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation; _______: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle.b. Lenton Form Savers (IAPMO-ES 129).

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.B. Bending and Forming

1. Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths bymethods not injurious to materials

2. Do not heat reinforcement for bending3. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only.4. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are subject to rejection.5. Use only tested and approved bar materials

C. Welding:1. Use only ASTM A706 steel where welding is proposed.

a. Perform welding where shown or approved, by the direct electric arc process inaccordance with AWS D1.4 using specified low hydrogen electrodes.

b. Preheat 6" each side of joint.c. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is prohibited.d. Do not tack weld bars.e. Welding shall not be done on or within two bar diameters of any bent portion of a bar

that has been bent cold.f. Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for assembly reinforcement unless

authorized by the SEOR.g. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of all loose scale and foreign material.h. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing

weldsi. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth

welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity andclinkers, and good fusion and penetration to the base metal.

j. Cut out welds or parts of welds found defective with chisel and replace with properwelding

k. Fillet welds may be considered prequalified per AWS D1.4, section 6.1.2.l. Other welds are to be qualified per AWS D1.4 Section 6.1.2.

2. Where ASTM A615 steel is to be used or occurs in existing elements and is to be weldeda. Complete chemical analyses shall be performed to determine chemical composition

and, for a new bar, provided in the mill certifications to determine weldability inaccordance with ACI 318 Section 26.6.4.1 with modifications per AWS D1.4.

b. The carbon equivalency (CE) shall be clearly defined and bars with a CE above 0.75shall not be welded.

c. Welding Procedure Specifications and supporting Procedure Qualification Recordswith required testing per AWS D1.4, shall be provided for review and approval prior towelding.



d. These WPS's and PQR's shall be specific to the CE as determined above, and shall,in addition to the other AWS requirement, include minimum and maximum preheatand interpass temperatures that are specified to the CE. This preheat and interpasstemperature shall be strictly enforced in the field.

e. If separate shipments of bars vary the weldability, the process listed in the aboverequirements shall be repeated for these new bars.

D. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. Reviewlocations of splices with SEOR.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Before placing bars, and again before concrete is placed, clean bars of loose rust and/or millscale, dirt, oil, or any other coating that may be deleterious or could reduce bond with theconcrete.

B. Securing in place:1. Accurately place bars and wire tie in precise position where bars cross.2. Bend ends of wire ties away from the forms.3. Wire tie bars to the corners of ties and stirrups.4. Support bars according to the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Placing

Reinforcing Bars," using approved accessories and chairs.5. Place precast concrete cubes with embedded wire ties to supporting reinforcing steel bars

in concrete placed on grade and in footings.6. Take adequate precautions to ensure that reinforcing bar position and spacing is

maintained during concrete placement.C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:

1. Refer to Drawings for cover requirementsE. Splices:

1. Do not splice reinforcing bars at the points of maximum stress except where indicated.2. Lap splices as shown or required to develop the full strength or stress of the bars.3. Stagger splices in horizontal wall bars at least 48" longitudinally in alternate bars and

opposite faces.F. Field Welding: As specified for fabrication.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Comply with all pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements".B. Supervision: Perform Work to this Section under supervision of a capable superintendent.C. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, shall inspect installed

reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.D. Where welding is done in the shop or at the site, perform welding of reinforcing bars under

inspection of the Testing Laboratory Welding Inspector in accordance with Chapter 17 of theCBC. The welding inspector shall make a systematic record of all welds:1. Identification marks of welders;2. List of defective welds;3. Manner of correction of defects.4. The welding inspector shall check the material, equipment details of construction and

procedures as well as the welds.5. The inspector shall check the ability of the welder.6. The welding inspector shall furnish the structural engineer and the enforcement agency

with a verified report that the welding which is required to be inspected is proper and hasbeen done in conformity with the approved plans and specifications.

7. The welding inspector shall use all means necessary to determine the quality of the weld.



8. The inspector may use gamma ray, magnaflux, trepanning, sonics or any other aid tovisual inspection, which the inspector may deem necessary to assure the adequacy of thewelding.

End of Section


03 3000 - Cast-in-Place ConcretePage 1 of 16

Section 03 3000Cast-in-Place Concrete

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section Includes cast-in-place concrete, concrete materials, mixture design, placementprocedures and finishes for the following:

B. Floors and slabs on grade.C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, equipment pits, light pole bases,

flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes.E. Concrete curing.F. Concrete Foundations


Conditions Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this SectionB. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.C. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.D. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and

polishing.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;2010.

B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and MassConcrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007).E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000.F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010.H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).I. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of ConcreteJ. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.K. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.L. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars

for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.M. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.N. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2015a.O. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.



P. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic CementMortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013.

Q. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.R. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.S. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete;

2010a.T. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.U. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use in Concrete; 2015.V. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and

Continuous Mixing; 2014.W. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of

Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012X. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal proceduresB. Product Data: Comply with the pertinent provisions of Section 01 6000 " Product

Requirements." Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions.1. Material Certificates: For Each of the following, signed by the manufacturer(s)

a. Cementitious materialsb. Admixturesc. Curing compoundsd. Non-shrink grout

2. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with the requirements:a. Aggregates

C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design(s). For each concrete mixture:1. Indicate Intended Locations for use2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 -

Concrete Mixtures.a. Mixes shall be based on existing approved compressive strength test data for concrete

mixes in accordance with ACI 301-10 Section 4.2.3 and requirements below:1) Strength Requirements: Design mixes for structural concrete for minimum 28-

day compressive strengths required by Drawings and Specifications. The average trial batch strength for each mix shall exceed indicated or specified strength by the the standard deviations of strength test records according to ACI 301.

2) Normal Weight Concrete Mix Design: Design all mixes for workability and durability of concrete. Control the mixes in accordance with the CBC and ACI301. Make adjustments in cement content required for concrete strengths at Contractor's expense and do not exceed 0.50 (or as indicated on concrete general notes of approved plans) absolute water-cement or cement plus fly ash



ratio by weight. Do not use calcium chloride or any admix containing suchmaterial. Admixtures containing a material releasing nitrates in solution arelimited to 0.06 percent by weight for the chloride ion.

3) Maximum Aggregate Sizes: Not exceeding 3/4 of minimum clear space betweenbars and between bars and forms, nor larger than 1/5 of least dimensionsbetween the forms. Design the mixes with 1" maximum size, except maximum1-1/2" size for foundations as submitted by the contractor and approved by theArchitect and Structural Engineer of Record.

4) Pumped Concrete: Design Concrete mixes specifically for pump placing withdry loose volume of fine aggregates not more than 47 percent of totalaggregates.

5) ACI 301 Section 4.2.3.2a with test records. Where a testing laboratoryacceptable to the enforcement agency has records of compressive strength tests,a standard deviation shall be established. Test records from which a standarddeviation is calculated shall:(a) Represent materials, quality control procedures and conditions similar to

those expected, and changes in materials and proportions within the testrecords shall not have been more restricted than those for proposed work.

(b) Represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or strengths f’ cwithin 1,000 psi of that specified for proposed work.

(c) Must consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two groups of consecutivetests totaling at least 30 tests as defined in ACI 318 Section 5.3.1.1, exceptas provided in ACI 318 Section 5.3.1.2.

3. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

D. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation

procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.F. Delivery Tickets: With each transit truck provide delivery ticket, signed by an authorized

representative from the batch plan, containing all information required by ASTM C94, as wellas time batched, type of brand of cement, cement content, maximum size of aggregate and totalwater content.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with the pertinent provisions of 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."B. Qualifications

1. Installer Qualifications: And experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Adequate numbers of trained and experienced personnel shall be used.

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: The production facility supplying hydraulic cement concrete shall have a current Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities from the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association, or equivalent.

3. Concrete Testing and Inspection Services: The owner shall engage a qualified Independent Testing Agency to perform evaluation test and special inspections per Structural Notes on Drawings and as required per the code. Personnel conducting test shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1 according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent program.



C. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

D. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.E. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.F. Source Quality Control: Refer to the following paragraphs for specific procedures. Concrete

materials which, by previous tests or actual service, have shown conformance may be usedwithout testing when so approved by SEOR. Testing laboratory shall perform the followingconformance testing1. Cementitious Material Test: The concrete supplier shall furnish to the enforcement

agency certification from the cement manufacturer that the cement proposed for use onthe project has been manufactured and tested in compliance with the requirements of ACI301-10 Section 4.2.1.1 and the ASTM standards listed in the materials section of thisSpecification.

2. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete: Test the aggregate before and after concretemix is designed and whenever character of aggregate varies or source of material ischanged in accordance with ASTM C33 and CBC. Include a sieve analysis. Obtainsamples of aggregates at the dry batching or ready-mix concrete plant in accordance withASTM D75 and perform tests for the properties listed in the following table:

Physical PropertiesPhysical Properties, units Test Method Minimum ValuesSieve analysis ASTM C136 Loss after 5 cycles not more than 8

percent of coarse aggregate, nor more than10 percent of fine aggregate

Organic impurities ASTM C40 Fine aggregate not darker than referencestandard color

Soundness ASTM C88Abrasion ASTM C131 Weight loss not more than 10.5 percent

after 100 revolutions, 42 percent after 500revolutions

Deleterious materials ASTM C33,C330

Materials finer than No. 200sieve

ASTM C117 Not over 1 percent for gravel, 1.5 percentfor crushed aggregate

Reactivity potential ASTM C227,C289, C342

Ratio of silica released to reduction inalkalinity not to exceed 1.0.

Sand equivalent ASTM D2419 California sand equivalent valuesoperating range not below 71 percent

G. Compliance with Regulations: All materials shall comply with the current rules and regulationsof the local air quality management district, with the rules regarding volatile organiccompounds, and with FDA rules and regulations for dangerous substances in constructionproducts.

H. Allowable Tolerances: Construct concrete conforming to the tolerances specified in ACI 117"Recommended Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials", as applicable, unlessexceeded by the requirements of regulatory agencies or otherwise indicated or specified.



1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 60 00, "Product Requirements."B. Ready-mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C 94. Each batch

of concrete delivered to the Project site shall be accompanied by a time slip bearing departuretime and signature of batch plant supervisor. Concrete shall be placed within 90 minutes afterstart of mixing. Concrete which has developed initial set shall not be used. Concrete which haspartially hardened shall not be used. Deliver all materials in timely manner to ensureuninterrupted progress of the work.

C. Deliver, store and handle all cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deteriorationor intrusion by foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished.

1.07 JOB CONDITIONSA. Cold Weather Requirements:

1. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.2. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting

concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Surfaces, in which concrete is to comein contact with, shall be free from frost or ice. No frozen materials or materials containingice shall be furnished.

3. When placing concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather the mix shall have atemperature of at least 50 degrees F., but not more than 90 degrees F. when cement isadded. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. for at least72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hydrated. When necessary, concretematerials shall be heated before mixing. Special precautions shall be provided forprotection of transit-mixed concrete.

B. Hot Weather Requirements:1. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.2. During hot weather, proper attention shall be provided for ingredients, production

methods, handling, placing, protection and curing, to prevent excessive concretetemperatures or water evaporation which could impair required strength or durability.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 1000.2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000.2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Sustainability:1. Concrete Materials shall meet the following condition in order to receive credit per the

U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED for new Construction certification:a. MR5 (Regional Materials): Both the extraction of materials and manufacturing

(batch plant) sites must be within 500 miles of the project site.B. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II - Moderate Portland type, low alkali. Provide Type V

where concrete is in contact with soil corrosive to concrete. Use Type III from one batch by asingle source for all architecturally exposed concrete.

C. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, C330, and C 227, from approved pits, free fromvegetable matter and of opaline, feldspar, or siliceous magnesium substances; all washed,



clean, hard, fine-grained sound crushed rock or gravel; not over 5 percent by weight of flat,thin, elongated, friable, or laminated pieces (pieces having major dimension over 5 timesaverage dimension) or more than 2 percent by weight of shale or cherty material. Any suitableindividual grading of coarse aggregate may be furnished, provided Grading of CombinedAggregate indicated in following table is obtained.

GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATESieve Number or Sizein Inches

1-1/2" Maximum(Percent)

1" Maximum(Percent)

3/4" Maximum(Percent)

Passing a 2" - - -Passing a 1-1/2" 95-100 - -Passing a 1" 70-90 90-100 -Passing a 3/4" 50-80 70-95 90-100Passing a 3/8" 40-60 45-70 55-75Passing a No. 4 35-55 35-55 40-60Passing a No. 8 25-40 27-45 30-46Passing a No. 16 16-34 20-38 23-40Passing a No. 30 12-25 12-27 13-28Passing a No. 50 2-12 5-15 5-15Passing a No. 100 0-3 0-5 0-5

D. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class F or N Fly Ash (Class C Not permitted) subject to the conditionsof the CBC, containing two percent or less carbon.1. Sustainability:

a. Fly ash and/or granulated blast furnace slag shall meet the following condition inorder to receive credit per the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED fornew Construction certification:1) MR4 (Recycled Content): A minimum of 25% by weight of all cementitious

materials in the concrete mix shall be substituted by fly ash and/or granulatedblast furnace slag. Substitutions that combine fly ash and ground granulatedblast-furnace slag are limited to a combined total of 30% of the totalcementitious material by weight with fly ash no more than 15% of the total.

2. Where fly ash replacement is 25% or higher, maximum water-cement ratio shall be 0.45.3. Fly ash need not be included in lightweight concrete mix designs.

E. Water: Clean, potable and not detrimental to concrete, complying with ASTM C94 and ASTMC1602

F. Concrete Mix RequirementsConcrete shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength, cement content, and maximumwater/cement ratio per the table below:

Location in Structure MinimumStrength(PSI)

Density(PCF)

Max Slump(IN +/-1)

Water/CementRatio

Fly Ash byWeight(MAX)

Foundations, Grade Beams,Tie beams

4,000 150 4 0.5 0.15

Concrete Slab on Grade(Typical)

4,000 150 4 0.45 0.15



Concrete Slab on Grade(Apparatus Bay)

5,000 150 4 0.45 0.15

Stairs on Grade, curbs andOther Non-StructuralConcrete

3,000 150 4 0.5 0.15

2.04 ADMIXTURESA. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the Structural Engineer.

Where more than one admixture is used, they shall be compatible. Use of admixtures shall beconsistent throughout Work.

B. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weightof cement.

C. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.

1. Super-Plasticizers (High Range Water Reducers): ASTM C494, Type F. Capable ofproducing concrete which can be placed at 8 11 inch slump without segregation, capableof maintaining slump within 2" of that initially mixed for 2 hours, and of maintainingconcrete temperature within 2 degrees F. from time of batching for 2 hours minimum.

E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D.1. Only one brand. When used, are subject to approval of Structural Engineer of Record, and

must reduce the mixing water at least 10 percent without entraining air in excess of 2percent by volume. If the water reducing agent entrains more than 2 percent air, the waterreduction shall be at least 12 percent, but in no case shall the water reducing agent entrainair in excess of 4 percent.

F. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.1. Only one brand. When used, are subject to approval of Structural Engineer of Record, and

must reduce the mixing water at least 10 percent without entraining air in excess of 2percent by volume. If the water reducing agent entrains more than 2 percent air, the waterreduction shall be at least 12 percent, but in no case shall the water reducing agent entrainair in excess of 4 percent.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch.2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 7,000 pounds per

square inch.3. non-gas-forming and free of oxidizing catalysts and inorganic accelerators, used as dry or

damp pack, or mixed to a 20-second flow (CRC-C 611), without segregation or bleedingat any temperature between 45 degrees F and 100 degrees F.

4. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products:a. Drypack: Field mixture of I part Portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate mixed to a

damp consistency such that a ball molded in the hands will stick together and hold itsshape. In lieu of field mixing, Contractor may use factory mixed drypack material,such as Master Builders "Set Grout." f'c shall be equal to 5,000 psi.



B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin,non-metallic aggregate, and activator.

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTSA. Bonding Agent: "Weld-Crete," manufactured by Larsen Products Co., P.O. Box 2127,

Rockville, MD 20852, Master Builders "Concresive," or equal.B. Construction Joint Materials: "Key-Kold" or "Kwik-Joint," of profiles indicated.C. Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of

thickness indicated, conforming to ASTM D 1751 and ASTM D1752.2.07 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-formingcompound; complying with ASTM C309.

B. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171.1. Curing paper, regular.2. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 3.8 ounces per square yard.

2.08 CONCRETE MIXINGA. Furnish ready-mixed concrete from an approved commercial off-site plant. Conform to ASTM

C 94, except materials, testing, and mix designs as specified herein. Use transit mixer trucksequipped with automatic devices for recording number of revolutions of drum. Comply withCBC Section, 1905.

B. Admixtures: All approved admixtures shall be introduced into the concrete at the batch plant.Field additions are not acceptable.

C. Slump: Adjust quantity of water so concrete at point and time of placing does not exceed theslumps per plans when tested according to ASTM C143. Use the minimum water necessaryfor workability required by part of structure being cast.

D. For compressive strength, density, fly ash content, slump, and water-cement ratio, refer to thegeneral notes in the plans.


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.3.02 GENERAL

A. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors,hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place. Contactthe inspector at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until inspected bythe inspector.

B. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concretein each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the Project site untilSubstantial Completion and shall be available for examination by the SEOR.

C. Floor Finishing Coordination and Concrete Requirements: Concrete installer is to installconcrete in conformance with the requirements of the concrete finishing manufacturer’sspecifications. Concrete installer to coordinate with the concrete finishing manufacturer perSpecification Section 03-3511.

D. Floor Finishing Site Meeting: Contractor to run a site meeting that includes the concreteinstaller, the concrete floor finishing installer, owner and the architect. Meeting to be



scheduled in coordination with owners bi-weekly site meeting. Meeting shall occur prior toinstallation of concrete to verify concrete placement, location, cold joints and finish will meetall requirements of floor finish system.

3.03 PREPARATIONA. Earth Subgrade: Dampen 24 hours before placing concrete, but do not muddy. Re-roll where

necessary for smoothness and remove loose material.B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.C. Reglets and Rebates:

1. Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment asdetailed and required. Coordinate dimensions and locations required with other relatedWork.

2. If concrete slabs on grade adjoin a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form areglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete Work. Reglet shall be full thicknessof the slab and shall be 3/4 inch wide, unless otherwise indicated. Requirement does notapply to exterior walks, unless specifically indicated.

D. Screeds: Install screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steelreinforcement has been installed , but before starting to place concrete. Install screeds adjacentto walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8 feet on centers.

E. Screeds Over Vapor Barrier: Use weighted pad or cradle type screeds and do not drive stakesthrough the vapor barrier. Check with an instrument level, transit, or laser.

F. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement ofform accessories.

G. Remove all free water from forms before concrete is deposited. Remove hardened concrete,debris, and foreign materials from interior surfaces of forms, exposed reinforcing, and fromsurfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.

H. Wetting: Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cracks. Wet other materials sufficiently toreduce absorption and to help maintain concrete workability.

I. Gravel Fill: Recompact disturbed gravel and bring to correct elevation.J. Sand Beds or Subslab Drainage Fill: Recompact disturbed material and bring to correct

elevation.K. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement and shall be

thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms.L. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Comply with

ASTM E1643. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertightwith manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions.Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETEA. Sheet Vapor Retarders:

1. Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 andmanufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Lap joints 6 inches or as required by the manufacturer and seal with manufacturer’srecommended adhesive or tape.

B. Conveying and Placing:1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E1643













2. Do not place concrete until reinforcing steel and forms or decks have been approved bythe Inspector and other authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete shall be placed onlyunder direct observation of the inspector. Do not place concrete outside of regularworking hours, unless the inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance.

3. Comply with CBC Sections 1905.9 and 1905.10.4. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods, which

will prevent separation or loss of materials. Place concrete in horizontal layers not morethan 18" thick within 90 minutes after water is first added to the batch.

5. In placing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections, provide openings in forms,elephant trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation andaccumulation of partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above levelof concrete being placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be droppedvertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to finalplacement surface shall not exceed 5-feet for concealed concrete or over 3-feet forexposed concrete.

6. Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section iscompleted. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level.

7. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during placement, and shall be worked aroundreinforcement and embedded fixtures with mechanical vibrators.

8. Where new concrete is placed against or on old or existing concrete, apply bonding agentto surface of old concrete prior to placement of new concrete.

C. Compaction and Screeding:1. Compacting: Compact each layer of the concrete as placed with mechanical vibrators or

equivalent equipment. Transmit vibration directly to concrete and in no case through theforms unless approved. Accomplish thorough compaction. Supplement by rodding orspading by hand adjacent to forms. Compact concrete into corners and angles of formsand around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Recompact deep sections withcongestion due to reinforcing steel as required.

2. Operation of Vibrators: Do not horizontally transport concrete in forms with vibratorsnor allow vibrators to contact forms or reinforcing. Push vibrators vertically into thepreceding layers that are still plastic and slowly withdraw, producing maximumobtainable density in concrete without creating voids or segregation. In no case disturbconcrete that has partially set. Vibrate at intervals not exceeding two-thirds the effectivevisible vibration diameter of the submerged vibrator. Avoid excessive vibration thatcauses segregation.

3. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar isbrought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with aheavy straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is trueto finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris.

4. Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continuedtamping to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be removed bybrushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarseaggregate.

D. Floating and Troweling:1. When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth

surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency beforetroweling. Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand





















































trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with anatomizing type fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.

E. Joints: Comply with CBC Section 1906.4. Locate joints in concrete only where shown orapproved and obtain prior approval for points of stoppage of any pour. Clean and roughensurface of construction joints by removing entire surface and exposing 1/4" of clean coarseaggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix by chipping, use of an approved retarder agent, orequal. Water and keep hardened concrete wet for not less than 24 hours before placing the nextlift or abutting concrete. Cover the horizontal surfaces of existing or previously placed andhardened concrete with a 2" thick layer of fresh concrete of required mix less 50 percent ofcoarse aggregate just before balance of concrete is placed.

F. Vertical Elements: Stop placement of concrete in walls and columns 1 1/2" below bottom ofbeams or supported slabs. Stop placement at sills and heads of wall openings in the samemanner. Allow concrete in vertical elements to be in place at least 2 hours and until verticalsettlement has ceased before placing concrete for floor framing.

G. Correction of Segregation: Before placing next layer of concrete, and at the top of eachplacement for vertical elements, remove all concrete containing excess water or fine aggregate,or showing deficiency of coarse aggregate, and fill the space with compacted concrete ofcorrect proportions. Comply with CBC Section, 1906.4.

H. Filling, Leveling and Patching:1. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor

covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, orground with power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled withlatex underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's writtenrecommendations.

2. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exteriorwalls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposedsurfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.

I. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed. Base shall bereinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall beone part Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cementbase shall include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix.

J. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.K. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

3.05 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTSA. EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

1. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be asindicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordancewith the following:a. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5

days after initial placement.b. A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a

maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least oneinch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neatcement grout immediately before placing of new concrete.

c. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material ofany kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.




















































2. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs.Space approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extendentirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab.

3. Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated withmarkings made with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs orobstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated,shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a centermarking where more than 5 feet wide.

3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCESA. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas

requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint or other finish, and whichhave been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds ofcaustic soda to one gallon of water. Surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have beenfurnished shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20 percent muriatic acid. Wash with clean waterafter scrubbing.

B. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, and other similar surfaces shall be sacked by an applicationof Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patchingand filling of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shallbe started and completed within the same day.1. Mix one part portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a

grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to preventabsorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, thenimmediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.

2. While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excessgrout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completelyremove dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.

C. Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood orother smooth forms have been furnished, shall be uniformly sand-blasted with sharp quartzsand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, androughen surface to provide a proper bond. Such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with cleanwater after sandblasting.

D. Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps and steps on exterior of buildings. Abrasivegrains in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet shall be evenly installed by dust-on methodand embedded into surface during first troweling operation. Additional abrasive grains, inamount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet, shall then be evenly installed and embedded intosurface during final troweling operation.

E. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site andshall be composed of one volume of portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate.Materials shall be mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its ownweight. When grout is used as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiffmixture, which can be molded into a sphere.

F. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R;

thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo withfull bed setting system.





















































2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R;thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinousmatrix terrazzo, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.

3. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R; take measuresnecessary to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative exposed surfaces include surfaces tobe stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to receive liquid hardeners, surfaces toreceive dry-shake hardeners, surfaces to be polished, and all other exposed slab surfaces.

3.08 CURING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.C. All curing shall be per CBC Section 1905.11. Keep forms containing concrete in a wet

condition until removed. Keep concrete continuously moist for not less than 7 days afterplacement. Keep concrete above 50ºF and moist with a fine fog water spray until protected bycuring media.

D. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces afterremoval of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutivedays after placing. Use the water curing method, curing sheet material, or a clear liquidmembrane-forming curing compound except as otherwise specified.

E. During times of dry or excessive winds, high ambient temperature, low humidity, or otherambient conditions causing rapid drying, use specified evaporation retardant and finishing aidmaterial according to the manufacturers instructions and cure concrete with a fine fog spray ofwater, or equal, applied both during and after finishing and continued until final curingoperations are started.

F. Within 24 hours after finishing, exterior slabs and paving, and interior slabs to receive cementtopping or mortar setting beds, shall be covered with sand to a depth of 2 inches and keptthoroughly wet for 7 days.1. Instead of sand covering, exterior walks and paving where no other surface treatment is

specified, may be cured with clear liquid curing compound immediately installed inaccordance with manufacturer's directions.

G. Where fly ash replacement is 20% or higher, floor slabs shall receive a 3 day moist cure andthen 1 coat of approved curing compound. All other surfaces, with the exception offoundations, shall receive a coat of approved curing compound immediately after removal offormwork.

H. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other

surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesivemanufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooringand adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing toflooring manufacturer's satisfaction.

2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturatedsand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.

3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.



















































3.09 GROUTING AND DRYPACKINGA. Install as indicated or required. Where grouting and drypacking is part of the work of other

sections, it shall conform to the following requirements, as applicable.B. Drypacking: Mix materials thoroughly with minimum amount of water. Install drypack by

forcing and rodding to fill voids and provide complete bearing under plates. Finish exposedsurfaces smooth and cure with damp burlap or liquid curing compound.

C. Non-Shrink Grouting:1. Mixing: Mix the approved non-shrink grout material with sufficient water per

manufacturers recommendations.2. Application: Surfaces to receive the non-shrink grout shall be clean, and shall be

moistened thoroughly immediately before placing the mortar. Before grouting, surfacesto be in contact shall be roughened and cleaned thoroughly, all loose particles shall beremoved and the surface flushed thoroughly with neat cement grout immediately beforethe grouting mortar is placed. Place fluid grout from one side only and puddle, chain, orpump for complete filling of voids; do not remove the dams or forms until grout attainsinitial set. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, and cure as recommended by groutmanufacturer.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 014000: Quality Requirements.B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.C. Testing/Evaluation of Concrete: Conform to CBC and ACI. Testing Laboratory shall perform

following tests. Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172, andshall be taken from as close to point of placement as possible.1. Compressive Strength Tests: Cast one set of three or more cylinders from each days

placing and each 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, or not less than once for each 2,000square feet of surface area for slabs and walls, of each strength of structural concrete.Date cylinders, assign record number, and tag showing the location from which samplewas taken. Also record slump test result of sample. Do not make more than two series oftests from any one location or batch of concrete.

2. Test Cylinders: Samples will be made in accordance with ASTM C172. Cast cylindersaccording to ASTM C31; 24 hours later, store cylinders under moist curing conditions atabout 70 F. Test according to ASTM C39 at 7 and 28 day ages. The remaining cylindershall be kept in reserve in case tests are unsatisfactory.

D. Core Tests: Comply with CBC and ACI. If tests show that compressive strength of anyconcrete falls below required minimum at 28 day age, additional curing and testing of concretewhich unsatisfactory test reports represent may be directed. Testing Laboratory shall take andtest drilled cores as directed in accordance with ASTM C42. Contractor shall refill core holeswith drypack concrete of the same compressive strength required for cored concrete. If coretests results are unsatisfactory, Contractor shall furnish required labor, equipment, and weights,and the Testing Laboratory shall conduct load testing on involved parts of building or structureas directed. Contractor shall bear additional curing and test costs, including TestingLaboratory costs, for concrete not meeting required compressive strength at 28 day age even iftesting demonstrates that concrete has eventually attained required minimum compressivestrength, and all costs for required corrections or removals and replacements as directed andrequired for approved construction.



















































E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under sameconditions as concrete it represents.

F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTMC143/C143M.

G. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reducing admixture(MVRA) to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warrantyrequirements.

3.11 CLEAN UPA. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.

End of Section







http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C143/C143M










03 3511 - Concrete Floor FinishesPage 1 of 2

Section 03 3511Concrete Floor Finishes


A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.B. Liquid densifiers and hardeners.C. Clear coatings.D. Clear penetrating sealers.E. Polished concrete.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,

troweling, and similar operations; curing.1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information

on compatibility of different products and limitations.C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.

1.05 MOCK-UPA. For coatings, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during

application, with coatings applied.B. Mock-Up Size: 4 feet square.C. Locate where directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener.B. Liquid Densifier and Hardener:

1. Use at all locationsC. Penetrating Clear Sealer:

1. Use at following locations: All Locations not recieving polished concrete..D. Clear Coating:E. Polished Finish:

1. Use at following locations: As shown on Finish Plan.2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS

A. Liquid Densifier and Hardener: Penetrating chemical compound that reacts with concrete, fillingthe pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete after set.1. Products:

a. Advanced Floor Products, Inc; Retro-Plate 99: www.retroplatesystem.com.2.03 COATINGS

A. Low Gloss Clear Coating: Transparent, nonyellowing, water- or solvent-based coating.1. Products:

a. Advanced Floor Products, Inc; Retro-Plate 99: www.retroplatesystem.com at polishedflooring areas.

B. Penetrating Sealer: Transparent, nonyellowing, water- or solvent-based coating.


03 3511 - Concrete Floor FinishesPage 2 of 2

1. Products:a. Ashford Formula, https://ashfordformula.com 1203 Spring Creek Place, Springville,

UT 84663 USA | 801.489.5663 .2.04 POLISHED CONCRETE SYSTEM

A. Polished Concrete System: Materials, equipment, and procedures designed and furnished by asingle manufacturer to produce dense polished concrete of the specified sheen.1. Acceptable Systems:

a. Advanced Floor Products, Inc; Retro-Plate 99: www.retroplatesystem.com.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials

suitable for further finishes.3.02 GENERAL

A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.03 COATING APPLICATION

A. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, andother impediments to adhesion.

B. Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately removeexcess material.

C. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, matching approved mock-ups forcolor, special effects, sealing and workmanship.

3.04 CONCRETE POLISHINGA. Execute using materials, equipment, and procedures specified by manufacturer, using

manufacturer approved installer.1. Final Polished Sheen: Semigloss finish; other sheens are included as comparison to

illustrate required sheen; final sheen is before addition of any sealer or coating, regardlessof whether that is also specified or not.

2. Semi-Gloss Finish: Reflecting overhead and side images from 35 to 45 feet away.B. Protect finished surface until fully cured as required and as recommended by manufacturer of

polishing system.C. Grind Level: All locations to be a medium grind showing fine aggregate.

End of Section


03 4500 - Precast Architectural Concrete Page 1 of 2

Section 03 4500Precast Architectural Concrete


A. Architectural precast concrete Site Wall Cap, Site Column Cap and Building Wall Base.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Admixtures.B. Section 04 2000- Unit MasonryC. Section 04 2001 - Masonry VeneerD. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Integral insulation.E. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers: Sealing perimeter and intermediate joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011.B. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings; 2009 (Reapproved 2015).C. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.D. PCI MNL-117 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast

Concrete Products; 2007.E. PCI MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete; 2010, Seventh

Edition.F. PCI MNL-122 - Architectural Precast Concrete; 2007, Third Edition.G. PCI MNL-123 - Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed

Concrete; 1988, Second Edition.H. PCI MNL-135 - Tolerance Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction; 2000.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's information on accessory products, including pigments,

admixtures, inserts, plates, etc.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, unit locations, configuration, connection details, support items,

dimensions, openings, and relationship to adjacent materials.D. Samples: Submit Three Samples, 3 inch in size, illustrating surface finish, color and texture.E. Fabricator Qualification Statement: __________.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricator Qualifications:

1. Firm having at least 2 years of documented experience in production of precast concreteof the type required.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. Provide one mock-up, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, with lifting device, and attachment points, and

finish in accordance with approved sample.B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


03 4500 - Precast Architectural Concrete Page 2 of 2

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handling: Lift and support precast units only from support points.B. Blocking and Lateral Support During Transport and Storage: Use materials that are clean,

non-staining, and non-harmful to exposed surfaces. Provide temporary lateral support toprevent bowing and warping.

C. Protect units to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS2.02 PRECAST UNITS, GENERAL

A. Precast Architectural Concrete Units: Comply with PCI MNL-120, PCI MNL-122, PCI MNL-123,PCI MNL-135, and ACI 318.1. Design Loads: Static loads, anticipated dynamic loading, including positive and negative

wind loads, thermal movement loads, and erection forces as defined by applicable code.2. Calculate structural properties of units in accordance with ACI 318.3. Accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and

clearances of intended openings.4. Provide connections that accommodate building movement and thermal movement and

adjust to misalignment of structure without unit distortion or damage.2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type.2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in compliance with PCI MNL-117 and PCI MNL-135.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of thissection.

3.02 ERECTIONA. Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged panels.B. Erect units level and plumb within allowable tolerances.C. Install thin prestressed panels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Field Modifications: Refer to manufacturer's instructions for drilling, cutting, and edging.2. Brackets and Embeds: Obtain manufacturer's written approval of any field modification of

supporting devices or embedded anchors. Coat field-modified supports and anchors withgalvanizing repair paint complying with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Comply with PCI MNL-135, except

as specifically amended below.1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 3/8 in.2. Exposed Joint Dimension: Plus or minus 3/16 inch.3. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces or Edges: Plus or minus 3/16 inch.4. Differential Bowing or Camber as Erected Between Similar Adjacent Members: Plus or

minus 3/16 inch.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean all installed units.3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed Concrete Units from subsequent construction operations.End of Section

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=PCI%20MNL-135






































04 2000 - Unit MasonryPage 1 of 12

Section 04 2000Unit Masonry


A. Concrete block at builidingB. Concrete block at site wall and enclosures - faced with brick veneerC. Concrete block at site wall not faced with brick - to be special color per plans or selected from

full lineD. Concrete block wall cap at site wall not faced with brick - color to match wall.E. Mortar and grout.F. Installation of ReinforcementG. Placement of anchor bolts, assemblies and embedsH. Grouting of plates and embedsI. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures

and Related Commentaries; 2011.B. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2014.C. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

and Related Units; 2014.D. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.E. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.F. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006

(Reapproved 2011).G. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.H. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.I. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.J. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;

2010.K. ASTN C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout, 2016L. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Mix Designs and test results:

1. One of the following for each mortar mixa. Mix designs indicating type and proportions of ingredients in compliance with the

proportion specification of ASTM C270, orb. Mix designs and mortar tests performed in accordance with the property specification

of ASTM C2702. One of the following for each grout mix



a. Mix designs indicating type and proportions of ingredients in compliance with theproportion specification of ASTM C476, or

b. Mix designs and grout strength tests performed in accordance with the propertyspecification of ASTM C476, or

c. Compressive strength tests performed in accordance with ASTM C1019, and slumpflow and Visual Stability Index (VSI) as determined by ASTM C1611/C1611M.

C. Material Certificates- Material certificates for the following, certifying that each material is incompliance.1. Reinforcement

a. Refer to Section 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcement2. Anchors, ties, fasteners, and metal accessories3. Masonry Units4. Mortar and grout materials5. Self-Consolidating grout

D. Construction Procedures1. Cold weather construction procedures2. Hot weather construction procedures

E. Samples: Submit two samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, andextremes of color range.

F. Samples of cured dry mortar showing finish color.G. Cured sealant colors for control joints.H. Control Joint Filler, 12" pieces of each size and type.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with the pertinent provisions of 01 4000 "Quality Requirements."B. Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards except where exceeded by

requirements of the contract documents.1. California Building Code (CBC), 20162. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, 2013

C. Inspections:1. General: Structural verifications inspections and test shall be performed in accordance

with the following codes and standards:a. California Building Code (CBC), 2016b. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, 2013

2. Owner Requirements:a. The owner or owner's agent shall employ one or more approved agencies to perform

inspections during construction as required by code and shown in the contractdocuments and specifications

3. Special Inspectiona. Qualifications: The special inspector(s) shall provide written documentation to the

building official demonstrating his or her competence and relevant experience ortraining. The experience or training shall be considered relevant when thedocumented experience or training is related in complexity to the same type of specialinspection activities for projects of similar complexity and material quantities.

b. Special Inspection Report Requirements1) The special inspector shall keep record of inspections2) The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the building official and

to the Architect and Engineer of Record.3) Reports shall indicate that work inspected was or was not completed in

conformance to approved construction documents.4) Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for

correction



5) If not corrected discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the buildingofficial, and the Architect and Engineer of Record prior to completion of thatphase of work.

6) A final report documenting the special inspections and correction of anydiscrepancies noted shall be submitted to the building official.

4. Contractor Requirementsa. Special inspection is in addition to the contractor's quality control inspections and

testing. The contractor's quality control inspections and testing shall occur prior tospecial inspection and reports shall be available to the special inspector.

b. The contractor will notify, in writing, the owner or owner's agent at least 48 hours inadvance of special inspection required.

c. The contractor shall ensure that the work for which special inspection is requiredremains accessible and exposed for special inspection purposes until completion ofthe required special inspection.

d. Any contractor responsible for the construction of the main wind and/or seismic forceresisting system shall submit a written statement of responsibility to the buildingofficial and owner prior to commencement of work on the system or component. Thestatement of responsibility shall contain acknowledgement and awareness of thespecial inspection requirements.

5. Inspections Required per TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6-13:

Level C Quality AssuranceMINIMUM TESTS

Verification of f', and f'AAC in accordance with Article 1.4B prior to construction and for every5,000 sq. ft. during construction. (see Section a below)Verification of proportions of materials in premixed or preblended mortar and grout otherthan self-consolidating grout as delivered to the project site.Verification of slump flow and visual stability Index (VSI) as delivered to the project site inaccordance with Article 1.5 B.1.b.3 for self-consolidating grout

MINIMUM SPECIAL INSPECTIONInspection Task Frequency Reference for Criteria

Cont. Periodic TMS402/ ACI 530/ASCE 5

TMS402/ ACI 530.1/ASCE 6

1. Verify Compliance with theapproved submittals

X Art. 1.5

2. Verify that the following are incompliance:a. Proportions of site-mixedmortar, grout

X Art. 2.1, 2.6A,2.6B, 2.6C,

2.4G.1.bb. Grade, type and size ofreinforcement and anchor bolts

X Sec. 6.1 Art. 2.4, 3.4

c. Placement of masonry unitsand construction of mortar joints

X Art. 3.3B

d. Placement of reinforcement,connectors

X Sec. 6.1,6.2.1, 6.2.6, 6.2.7

Art. 3.2E, 3.4,3.6A

e. Grout space prior to grouting X Art. 3.2D,3.2F

f. Placement of grout X Art. 3.5, 3.6C



g. Size and location of structuralelements

X Art. 3.3F

h. Type, size, and location ofanchors including other details ofanchorage of masonry tostructural members, frames andother construction

X Sec. 1.2.1(e),6.1.4.3, 6.2.1

i. Welding of reinforcement X Sec. 8.1.6.7.2,9.3.3.4(c),11.3.3.4(b)

j. Preparation, construction, andprotection of masonry during coldweather (temperature below 40degrees F) or hot weather(temperature above 90 degreesF)

X Art. 1.8C,1.8D

3. Observe Preparation of groutspecimens, and/or prisms

X Art. 1.4,B.2.a.3, 1.4B.2.b.3, 1.4B.2.c.3, 1.4B.3, 1.4 B.4

a. Masonry compressive strength shall be determined for each wythe by the unitstrength method or by the prism method (Reference the Specification for MasonryStructures (TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13 Art. 1.4)1) Unit Strength Method (Reference the Specification for Masonry Structures (TMS

602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13 Art. 1.4B.2)(a) Units are to be sampled and tested to very conformance with ASTM C90.(b) Thickness of the bed joint shall not exceed 5/8".(c) For grouted masonry the grout shall conform to TMS 602-13/ACI

530.1-13/ASCE 6-13 Art. 2.2.2) Prism Test Method: Determine the compressive strength of concrete masonry by

the prism test method in accordance with ASTM C1314.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Sample panels1. Construct sample panels of masonry walls.

a. Use materials and procedures accepted for the workb. The minimum sample panel dimensions are 4 feet by 4 feet.c. The acceptable standard for the work is established by the accepted paneld. Retain sample panels at the project site until work has been accepted.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.B. Do not use damaged masonry units, damaged components of structure, damaged packaged

materials,C. Protect cementitious materials for mortar and grout from precipitation and groundwaterD. Do not use masonry materials that are contaminatedE. Store different aggregates separatelyF. Protect reinforcement, ties and metal accessories from permanent distortions and store them

off the ground.



1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Construction Loads - Do not apply construction loads that exceed the safe superimposed load

capacity of the masonry and shores, if used.B. Masonry Protection - Cover top of unfinished masonry work to protect it from moisture intrusionC. Hot Weather Construction - Implement approved hot weather procedures and comply with the

following:1. Preparation When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or exceeds 90

degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph:a. Preparation When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or exceeds

90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph:1) Maintain sand piles in a damp, loose condition2) Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a

temperature below 120°F2. Construction — While masonry work is in progress

a. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100°F, or exceeds 90°F with a windvelocity greater than 8 mph:1) Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 120°F.2) Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water

before they come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar.3) Maintain mortar consistency by retempering with cool water.4) Use mortar within 2 hr of initial mixing.

3. Protection — When the mean daily temperature exceeds 100°F or exceeds 90°F with awind velocity greater than 8 mph, fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, atleast three times a day until the masonry is three days old.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depths

as indicated on drawings for specific locations.2. Finish: Sealed Burnished Block for exposed CMU in Building/Apparatus Bay, and

Precision Block with anti-grafity coating where CMU is exposed on site walls.3. Color: Greystone as manufactured by Angelus Block Co. or equal4. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, medium weight.

a. Hollow block.b. Refer to block strength requirements on the plans

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALSA. Mortar

1. Provide mortar conforming to the following parametersa. Conform to ASTM C270b. Comply with Section 2103.2 of the 2016 CBCc. Type S Mortar

B. Grout1. Provide grout conforming to the following parameters

a. Conform to ASTM C476b. Comply with Section 2103.3 of the 2016 CBCc. 2,000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength for 2,000 psi masonry, 2,500 psi

monimum 28 day compressive strength for 2,500 psi masonry. Determinecompressive strength of grout in accordance with ASTM C1019.

d. Do not use admixtures unless accepted by the Engineer of Record. Field addition ofadmixtures is not permitted in self-consolidating grout.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved colorsample.



1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.2. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

D. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended formixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGEA. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 2000; size as indicated on drawings; uncoated

finish.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fusedjoints.

B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; inmaximum lengths available.

C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING

A. Mortar1. Mix cementitious materials and aggregates between 3 and 5 minutes in a mechanical

batch mixer with a sufficient amount of water to produce a workable consistency. Do nothand mix mortar. Maintain workability of mortar by remixing or retempering. Discard mortarwhich has begun to stiffen or is not used within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing.

2. Limit the weight of mineral oxide or carbon black pigments added to project-site preparedmortar to the following maximum percentages by weight of cement:a. Pigmented portland cement-lime mortar

1) Mineral oxide pigment = 10 percent2) Carbon black pigment = 2 percent

b. Pigmented mortar cement mortar1) Mineral oxide pigment = 5 percent2) Carbon black pigment = 1 percent

c. Pigmented masonry cement mortar1) Mineral oxide pigment = 5 percent2) Carbon black pigment = 1 percentDo not add mineral oxide or carbon black pigment to preblended colored mortar orcolored cement.

3. Do not use admixtures containing more than 0.2 percent chloride ionsB. Grout

1. Except for self-consolidating grout, mix grout in accordance with the requirements ofASTM C476.

2. Unless otherwise required, mix grout other than self-consolidating grout to a consistencythat has a slump between 8 and 11 inches.

3. Proportioning of self-consolidating grout at the project site is not permitted. Do not addwater at the project site except in accordance with the self-consolidating groutmanufacturer's recommendations.

C. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; finegrout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaceswith smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.1. Include verification that foundations are constructed within a level alignment tolerance of

+/- 1/2 inch.B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.



1. Include verification that reinforcing dowels are positioned in accordance with the projectdrawings.

C. If stated conditions are not met notify the Architect and Engineer of Record.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean reinforcement and shanks of anchor bolts by removing mud, oil, or other materials thatwill adversely affect or reduce bond at the time mortar or grout is placed. Reinforcement withrust, mill scale, or both are acceptable without cleaning or brushing provided that thedimensions, of a cleaned sample are not less than required by the ASTM specificationgoverning the reinforcement.

B. Prior to placing masonry, remove laitance, loose aggregate, and anything else that wouldprevent mortar from bonding to the foundation.

C. Wetting Masonry units1. Concrete Masonry - Unless otherwise required, do not wet concrete masonry before

laying. Wet cutting is permitted.D. Debris - Construct grout spaces free of mortar dropping, debris, loose aggregates, and any

material deleterious to masonry grout.E. Reinforcement - Place reinforcement and ties in grout spaces prior to groutingF. Cleanouts - Provide cleanouts in the bottom course of masonry for each grout pour when grout

pour exceeds 5 ft 4 in.1. Construct cleanouts so that the space to be grouted can be cleaned and inspected. In solid

grouted masonry, space cleanout horizontally a maximum of 32 inches on center.2. Construct cleanouts with an opening of sufficient size to permit removal of debris. The

minimum opening dimension shall be 3 in.3. After cleaning, close cleanouts with closures braced to resist grout pressure.

3.03 COURSINGA. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running. Unless Otherwise required on the drawings2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

3.04 PLACING AND BONDINGA. Placing mortar units

1. Mortar joints at foundations - In the starting course on the foundations and othersupporting members, construct bed joints so that the bed joint thickness is a least /1/4 inchand not more than:a. 1-1/4" when the first course of masonry is solid grouted and supported by a concrete

foundation.2. Bed and head joints - Unless otherwise required construct 3/8 in thick bed and head joints

except at foundation. Construct joints that also conform to the followinga. Fill holes not specified in exposed and below grade masonry with mortar.b. Unless otherwise required, tool joint with a round jointer when the mortar is thumbprint

hard.c. Remove masonry protrusions extending 1/2 inch or more into cells or cavities to be

grouted.3. Hollow units - Place hollow units so:

a. Face shells of bed joints are fully mortaredb. Webs are fully mortared in:

1) all courses of piers, columns and pilasters;2) when necessary to confine grout or insulation.



c. Head joints are mortared, a minimum distance from each face equal to the face shellthickness of the unit.

d. Vertical cells to be grouted are aligned and unobstructed openings for grout areprovided in accordance with the project drawings.

4. Open units with beveled ends - Fully grout open-end units with beveled ends. Head jointsof open-end units with beveled ends need not be mortared. At the beveled ends, form agrout key that permits grout within 5/8 inch of the face of the unit to prevent leakage ofgrout.

5. All Unitsa. Place clean units while the mortar is soft and plastic. Remove and re-lay in fresh

mortar any unit disturbed to the extent that the initial bond is broken after initialpositioning.

b. Cut exposed edges or faces of masonry units smooth, or position so that exposedfaces or edges are unaltered manufactured surfaces.

c. When the bearing of a masonry wythe on its support is less than two-thirds of thewythe thickness, notify the Architect and Engineer of Record.

B. Embedded items an accessories - Install embedded items and accessories as follows:1. Construct chases as masonry units are laid2. Install pipes and conduits passing horizontally through masonry partitions.3. Place pipes and conduits passing horizontally through piers, pilasters, or columns4. Place horizontal pipes and conduits in and parallel to plane of walls5. Install secure connectors, flashing, weep holes, weep vents, nailing blocks, and other

accessories.6. Install movement joints.7. Aluminum - Do not embed aluminum conduits pipes and accessories in masonry, grout or

mortar unless they are effectively coated or isolated to prevent chemical reaction betweenaluminum and cement or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.

C. Bracing of masonry - Design, provide and install bracing that will assure stability of masonryduring construction.

D. Site tolerances - Erect masonry within the following tolerances from the specified dimensions.1. Dimension of elements

a. In cross section or elevation (-1/4 in., +1/2 in.)b. Mortar joint thickness

bed joints between masonry courses (+ 1/8 in)bed joint between flashing and masonry (-1/2 in., +1/8 in.)head (-1/4 in., +3/8 in.)

c. Grout space or cavity width, except for masonry walls passing framed construction(-1/4 in., +3/8 in.)

2. Elementsa. Variation from level

bed joints (+/- 1/4 in. in 10 ft, +/- 1/2 in. maximum)top surface of load bearing walls (+/- 1/4 in. in 10 ft, +/- 1/2 in. maximum)

b. Variation from plumb (+/- 1/4 in. in 10 ft, +/- 3/8 in. in 20 ft,+/- 1/2 in. maximum)c. True to a line (+/- 1/4 in. in 10 ft, +/- 3/8 in. in 20 ft,+/- 1/2 in. maximum)d. Alignment of columns and walls (bottom versus top) (+/- 1/2 in. for load bearing walls

and columns., +/- 3/4 in. for non-load bearing walls)3. Location of elements

a. Indicated in plan (+/- 1/2 in. in 20 ft, +/- 3/4 in. maximum)b. Indicated in elevation (+/- 1/4 in. in story height +/- 3/4 in. maximum)c. If the above conditions cannot be met due to previous construction, notify the

Architect and Engineer of Record.d. Reinforcement, tie, and anchor installation



3.05 REINFORCEMENT, TIE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATIONA. Basic requirements - Place reinforcement, wall ties and anchors in accordance with the sizes,

types, and locations indicated on the Project Drawings and as specified. Do not place dissimilarmetals in contact with each other.

B. Reinforcement1. Support reinforcement to prevent displacement caused by construction loads or by

placement of grout or mortar, beyond the allowable tolerances.2. Completely embed reinforcing bars in grout in accordance with the Section entititled grout

placement.3. Maintain clear distance between reinforcing bards and the interior of masonry unity or

formed surface of at least 1/4 inch for fine grout and 1/2 inch for coarse grout, exceptwhere cross webs of hollow units are used as supports for horizontal reinforcement.

4. Place reinforcing bars maintining the following minimum cover:a. Masonry face exposed to earth or weather 2 in for bars larger than No. 5, 1-12/ in. for

No. 5 bars or smaller.b. Masonry not exposed to earth or weather 1-1/2 in.

5. Maintain minimum clear distance between parallel bars of the nominal bar size or 1 in.,whichever is greater.

6. In columns and pilasters, maintain minimum clear distance between vertical bars of oneand one-half times the nominal bar size or 1-1/2 in., whichever is greater.

7. Splice only where indicated on the Project Drawings, unless otherwise acceptable. Whensplicing by welding, provide welds in conformance with the provisions of AWS D1.4.

8. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in grout or mortar without approval fromthe Engineer of Record.

9. Noncontact lap splices - Postion bars spliced by noncontact lap splices no farther aparttransversely than one-fift the specified length of lap nor more than 8 in.

10. Joint reinforcementa. Place joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are embedded in mortar with a

minimum cover of 1/2 in. when not exposed to weather or earth; or 5/8 in. whenexposed to weather or earth.

b. Provide minimum 6 in. lap splice for joint reinforcement.c. Ensure that all ends of longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement at laps are embedded

in mortar or grout.11. Placement tolerances

a. Place reinforcing bars in walls and flexural elements within a tolerance of +/- 1/2 in.when the distance from the centerline of reinforcing bars to the opposite face ofmasonry, d, is equal to 8 in. or less, +/- 1in. for d equal to 24 in. or less but greaterthan 8 in., and 1-1/4 in. for d greater than 24 in.

b. Place vertical bars within:1) 2 in. of the required location along the length of the wall when the wall segment

length exceeds 24 in.2) 1 in. of the required location along the length of the wall when the wall segment

length does not exceed 24 in3) If it is necessary to move bars more than one bar diameter or a distance

exceeding the tolerance stated above to avoid interference with other reinforcingsteel, conduits, or embedded items notify the Engineer of Record.

4) Foundation dowels that interfere with unit webs are permitted to be be bent to amaximum of 1 in. horizontally for every 6 in. of vertical height.

C. Anchor bolts1. Embed headed and bent-bar anchor bolts larger than 1/4 in. diameter in grout that is

placed in accordance with Section 3.06A and Section 3.06B. Anchor bolts of 1/4in.diameter or less are permitted to be placed in grout or mortar bed joints that have aspecified thickness of at least 1/2 in. thickness.



2. For anchor bolts placed in the top of grouted cells and bond beams, maintain a cleardistance between the bolt and the face of masonry unit of at least 1/4 in. when using finegrout and 1/2 in. when using coarse grout.

3. For anchor bolts placed throught the face shell of a hollow masonry unit, drill a hole that istight-fitting to the bolt or provide minimum clear distance that conforms to Section 3.05D.2around the bolt and through the face of the shell. For the portion of the bolt that is withinthe grouted cell, maintain a clear distance between the bolt and the face of masonry unitand between the head or bent leg of the bolt and the formed surface of grout of at least 1/4in. when using fine grout and at least 1/2 in when using coarse grout.

4. Place anchor bolt with a clear distance between parallel anchor bolts not less than thenominal diameter of the anchor bolt, nor less than 1 in.

3.06 GROUT PLACEMENTA. Placing time - Place grout wihin 1-1/2 hr from introducing water in the mixture and prior to initial

set.1. Discard site-mixed grout that does not meet the specified slump without adding water after

initial mixing.2. For ready-mixed grout:

a. Addition of water is permitted at the time of discharge to adjust slump.b. Discard ready mixed grout that does not meet the specified slump without adding

water, other than the water that was added at the time of discharge.The time limit is waived as long as the ready mixed grout meets the specified slump.

B. Confinement - Confine grout to the areas indicated on the project drawings. Use material toconfine grout that permits bond between masonry units and mortar.

C. Grout pour height - Do not exceed the maximum grout pour height given in the Table below

GroutType (1)

Maximumgrout pourheight, ft

Minimum clear width ofgrout space, in (2,3)

Minimum clear grout spacedimensions for grouting cells ofhollow units, in x in (3,4,5)

Fine 1 3/4 1-1/2x2Fine 5.33 2 2x3Fine 12.67 2-1/2 2-1/2x3Fine 24 3 3x3Coarse 1 3/4 1-1/2x3Coarse 5.33 2 2-1/2x3Coarse 12.67 2-1/2 3x3Coarse 24 3 3x4

1. Fine and course grouts are defined by ASTM C476.2. For grouting between masonry wythes.3. Minimum clear width of grout space and minimum clear grout space dimension are the net

dimension of the space determined by subtracting masonry protrusions and the diametersof horizontal bars from the as-built cross section of the grout space. Select grout type andmaximum grout pour height based on minimum clear space.

4. Area of vertical reinforcement shall not exceed 6 percent of the area of the grout space.D. Grout lift height

1. For grout conforming to Section 2.02Ba. Where the following conditions are met, place grout in lifts not exceeding 12 ft 8 in.

1) The masonry has cured at least 4 hours2) The grout slump is maintained between 10 and 11 in.3) No intermediate reinforced bond beams are placed between the top and the

bottom of the pour heightb. When conditions 1 and 2 are met but there are intermediate bond beams within the

grout pour, limit the grout lift height to the bottom of the lowest bond beam that is



more than 5 ft. 4 in. above the bottom of the lift, but do not exceed a grout lift height of12 ft. 8 in.

c. When the conditions of 1 or 2 are not met, place grout in lifts not excedding 5 ft. 4 in.2. For self-consolidating grout conforming to Section 2.02B:

a. When placed in masonry that has cured for at least 4 hours, place in lifts notexceeding the grout pour height.

b. When placed in masonry that has not cured for at least 4 hours, place in lifts notexceeding 5 ft. 4 in. or the grout pour height, whichever is less.

E. Consolidation1. Consolidate grout at the time of placement.

a. Consolidate grout pours 12 in. or less in height by mechanical vibration or by puddling.b. Consolidate pours exceeding 12 in in height by mechanical vibration, and

reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement hasoccurred.

2. Consolidation or reconsolidation is note required for self-consolidating grout.F. Grout key - When grouting, form grout keys between grout pours. Form grout keys between

grout lifts when the first lift is permitted to set prior to placement of the subsequent lift.1. Form a grout key by terminating the grout a minimum of 1-1/2 in. below a mortar joint.2. Do not form grout keys within beams.3. At beams or lintels laid with closed bottom units, terminate the grout pour at the bottom of

the beam or lintel without forming a grout key.4. Alternate grout placement - Place masonry units and grout using construction procedures

emploiyed in the accepted grout demonstration panel.G. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.H. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of

dimensioned position.I. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

3.07 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTSA. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014000 - Quality Requirements.

B. Verify f'm and f'AAC in accordance with Section 1.05C. Sample and test grout as required in Section 1.04 and 1.05.

3.09 CLEANINGA. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.E. Remove debrisF. Do not damage the masonry

3.10 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent construction and in place masonry against damage.B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that

are subject to damage by construction activities.End of Section


04 2001 - Masonry VeneerPage 1 of 4

Section 04 2001Masonry Veneer


A. Clay facing brick.1. Full brick veneer with anchorage attachment.2. Thin brick veneer - over mechanically attached metal lath

B. Mortar and grout.C. Reinforcement and anchorage.D. Flashings.E. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 4500 - Precast Architectural ConcreteB. Section 04 4200 - Unit MasonryC. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel stud backup for masonry veneer.D. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Through-wall masonry flashings.E. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.B. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.C. ASTM C1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made From Clay or Shale;

2014.D. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.E. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.F. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.G. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or

Shale); 2014.H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.I. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.J. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance – Design and Detailing; 2005.K. BIA Technical Notes No. 28B - Brick Veneer/Steel Stud Walls; 2005.L. BIA Technical Notes No. 46 - Maintenance of Brick Masonry; 2005.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar.C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of

color range.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for County's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.



2. Extra Pre-Faced Units: 50 of each type, size, and color combination.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements ofContract Documents.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withat least three years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar

and accessories and structural backup in mock-up.B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up to include precast concrete to match wall section.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA orapplicable building code, whichever is more stringent.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BRICK UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. H.C. Muddox: www.hcmuddox.com .2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS Smooth, Grade MW complying with ASTM C10881. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.2. Nominal Size: As indicated on drawings.3. Special Shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units

can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M Type N.1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved colorsample.

C. Water: Clean and potable.2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi) yield strength, deformed billetbars; galvanized.

B. Joint Reinforcement Type: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement isinvolved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonryveneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup

through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing andinsulation to provide positive anchorage.

2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick.3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches.



4. Provide metal lath at brick veneer.a. Use masonry anchors at metal lath at cmu walls.

2.04 FLASHINGSA. Metal Flashing Materials: Galvanized Steel, as specified in Section 07 6200.

2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXINGA. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification.B. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency as required to fill volumes completely for grouting; fine grout

for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces withsmallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 COURSINGA. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.C. Brick Units:

1. Bond: As shown on plans..2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.3. Mortar Joints: Raked.

3.03 PLACING AND BONDINGA. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other

work.B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.E. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must

be made, remove mortar and replace.G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped

edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.H. Isolate top joint of masonry veneer from horizontal structural framing members or support

angles with compressible joint filler.3.04 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS

A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally on top of through-wall flashingabove shelf angles and lintels and at bottom of walls.

B. Install cavity vents in veneer walls at 32 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles andlintels and at top of walls.

3.05 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROLA. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories.C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended

by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.



3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEERA. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.E. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center.

3.07 MASONRY FLASHINGSA. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all

locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 6 inches, minimum, into

adjacent masonry or turn up at least 1 inch, minimum, to form watertight pan atnon-masonry construction.

2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.

B. Lap end joints of flashings at least 6 inches, minimum, and seal watertight with flashingsealant/adhesive.

3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTSA. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow

contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unitfaces for placement of backer rod and sealant.

C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 3/4 inch wide and deep.3.09 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or

more.D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.E. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch.

3.10 CUTTING AND FITTINGA. Cut and fit for pipes and conduit. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size,

shape, and location.B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or

strength of masonry work may be impaired.3.11 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that

are subject to damage by construction activities.End of Section


05 1200 - Structural Steel FramingPage 1 of 10

Section 05 1200Structural Steel Framing


A. Structural steel framing members, support members.B. Base plates, embed plates.C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2011.B. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016.C. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2010.D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.E. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.F. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved

2014).G. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.H. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium

Structural Steel; 2015.I. ASTM A673 - Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural

Steel; 2012J. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved

2015).K. ASTM E23 - Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials;

2016bL. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and

Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum TensileStrength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

M. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and MetricDimensions; 2016.

N. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi YieldStrength; 2007a.

O. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel andAlloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum TensileStrength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.R. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2011.S. RCSC (HSBOLT) - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts; Research

Council on Structural Connections; 2009.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures



B. Shop Drawings:1. Submit Structural Steel Shop Drawings,:

a. Include complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly ofmembers,

b. Include details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence oferection

c. Include a fully detailed, well controlled sequence and technique plan for shop and fieldwelding that minimizes locked in stresses and distortion

d. Submit sequence and technique plan for review by the SEOR.e. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, and holes in accordance with Figure 4.5

of AWS D1.1 or AISC 360 Section J1.8, weld position plan and other pertinent data.Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length and type of eachweld.

f. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts andother anchorages to be installed for Work specified in other sections.

g. Submit a list of steel items to be galvanized.C. Product Data:

1. Submit copies of fabricator’s specifications and installation instructions for the followingproducts. Include laboratory test reports and other data required demonstratingcompliance with these Specifications:a. Structural Steel Including Chemical and Physical properties.b. Welding electrodesc. Welding Gasd. Structural Steel Primer Paint

D. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural tensile and yield strength, destructive test analysis and

non-destructive test analysis.F. Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test: Submit certified copies of Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact

Test by the manufacturer for applicable steel members and components.1. Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test for Base Metal: Structural steel which is to be

complete joint penetration welded and subjected to Charpy-V-Notch impact test inaccordance with ASTM E 23 and ASTM A 673.a. Girdersb. Other Structural Steel

2. Exception: Rolled shapes with flange thickness exceeding 2 inches that are spliced viacomplete joint penetration (CJP) welds shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M,Supplementary Requirement S30, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural Shapes –Alternate Core Location. The impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lbsat 70° F.

3. Charpy-V-Notch test shall be performed by the manufacturer employing Test Frequency(P) in accordance with ASTM A 673 and utilizing standard specimen sizes shown in Figure6 of ASTM E 23. The absorbed energy in a CVN impact test shall not be less than thatspecified in Material Part 2 of this section.

G. Welders Certificates: Field welders shall be Project certified in accordance with AWS D1. 1-02.Shop welders shall be Project certified for FCAWS in accordance with AWS D1. 1-02.

H. Weld Procedures: Submit weld procedures for all connections. Weld procedures shall beprequalified or qualified as described in AWS D1.5, Section 5.12 or 5.13 for self shieldedFCAW, Weld procedures shall indicate joints details and tolerances, preheat and interpasstemperature, post-heat treatment, single or multiple stringer passes, peening of stringer passesfor groove welds except for the first and the last pass, electrode type and size, welding current,polarity and amperes and root treatment. The welding variables for each stringer pass shall berecorded and averaged, from these averages the weld heat input shall be calculated. Weldingshall not proceed until WPS have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer of Record.



1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with the following Codes and Provisions as a

Minimum Requirement:1. California Building Code, 2016 Edition, Chapter 22, & Chapter 17.2. AISC Standards:

a. AISC 303-10 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges3. AWS Standards:

a. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - SteelB. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by one of the following:

1. the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for StructuralSteel (AC172).

2. AISC Certification in accordance with the AISC Certification Program for Structural SteelFabricators - Standard for Steel Building Structures (AISC 201-06)

C. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this sectionD. Testing Laboratory shall perform conformance testing in accordance with the CBC:

1. Identified Structural Steel: Tests are waived for steel identified by heat number,accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with anIdentification Certificate so as to be readily identified for conformance with applicableASTM. Comply with the CBC.

2. Unidentified Structural Steel: Steel not identified and certified as specified above shall betested according to following requirements. Structural steel fabricator shall cut samplesunder direction of the Special Inspector and Testing Laboratory shall machine or otherwiseprepare the specimens and perform testing of each 5 tons or fraction thereof for each sizeof unidentified steel except, in the case of random pieces or of steel having Fy greater than36 Ksi, testing of each piece is required. Tests required are:a. For pipe, one tension and elongation test and one flattening test for each size.b. For all other steel, one tension and elongation test and one bend test for each size.c. Contractor shall reimburse to Owner all costs paid by Owner for testing unidentified

steel.d. Testing of High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: According to CBC and AISC.

E. Testing & Inspection shall comply with the following:1. All steel used for structural purposes shall be identified.. Manufacturer’s mill analyses and

test reports are acceptable for properly identified steel, but the enforcement agency mayrequire additional testing to determine the quality of the steel if there is any doubt as to itsacceptability. Any steel not properly identified shall be tested to meet the minimumchemical and mechanical requirements of the ASTM standard appropriate for the steelspecified for the structure.

2. AISC 360-10 Chapter N - Tests of High-strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers. High-strengthbolts, nuts and washers shall be sampled and tested by an approved independent testinglaboratory for conformance with the requirements of Division III.

3. AISC 360-10 Chapter N - Tests of End-welded Studs. End-welded studs shall besampled, tested and inspected per the requirements of the Structural Welding Code –Steel, published by the American Welding Society.

4. Inspection of shop fabrication shall be required for significant structural detailed connectionand fabrication work as directed by the enforcement agency. This inspection shall be madeby a qualified inspector approved by the enforcement agency. The inspector shall furnishthe architect, structural engineer and the enforcement agency with a report that thematerials and workmanship conform to the approved plans and specifications.

5. Inspection of Welding. Inspection of all shop and field welding operations, including theinstallation of automatic end-welded stud shear connectors shall be made by a qualifiedwelding inspector approved by the enforcement agency. Such inspector shall be a persontrained and thoroughly experienced in inspecting welding operations. The inspector’s abilityto distinguish between sound and unsound welding shall be reliably established. The



minimum requirements for a qualified welding inspector shall be as those for an AWScertified welding inspector (CWI), as defined in the provisions of the ANSI/AWS QCI-1-96,Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors published by the American WeldingSociety. All welding inspectors shall be approved by the enforcement agency.The ability of each welder to produce sound welds of all types required by the work shall beestablished by welder qualification satisfactory to the enforcement agency.

6. Welding inspection of structural welding shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1Structural Welding Code – Steel, published by the American Welding Society, except asmodified by this section.

7. The welding inspector shall make a systematic record of all welds. This record shallinclude in addition to other required records:a. Identification marks of welders.b. List of defective welds.c. Manner of correction of defects.

8. The welding inspector shall check the material, equipment, details of construction andprocedure, as well as the welds. The inspector shall also check the ability of the welder.The inspector shall verify that the installation procedure for automatic end-welded studshear connectors is in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1, Structural WeldingCode – Steel, published by the American Weld Society and the approved plans andspecifications. The inspector shall furnish the architect, structural engineer and theenforcement agency with a verified report that the welding is proper and has been done inconformity with AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel, published by the AmericanWelding Society and the approved plans and specifications. The inspector shall use allmeans necessary to determine the quality of the weld. The inspector may use gamma ray,magnaflux, trepanning, sonics or any other aid to visual inspection, which the inspectormay deem necessary to be assured of the adequacy of the welding.

9. Inspection of High Strength Bolt Installations. Inspection of high-strength bolt installationsshall be made by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by the enforcementagency. The inspector shall check the materials, equipment, details of construction andinstallation procedure. The inspector shall furnish the architect, structural engineer and theenforcement agency with a report that the work has been completed in every materialrespect in compliance with the approved plans and specifications.

1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Store structural steel above grade on platforms, skids or other supports.B. Protect steel from corrosion.C. Storage and Care of Electrodes: Coatings of low-hydrogen type electrodes shall be thoroughly

dry as used. Conform to AWS D1.1; use electrodes as taken from hermetically sealedpackages within time limit specified therein after package is opened. Electrodes not used withinallowable time period and electrodes that have been exposed more than one hour to air havinga relative humidity of 75% or greater, or as required by the manufacturer, shall be driedaccording to AWS D1.1 before they are used, or shall be reconditioned according to electrodemanufacturer's recommendations. Electrodes so dried or reconditioned not used withinallowable time period after drying is completed shall be redried before use. Electrodes of anyclass that have been wet shall not be used under any conditions.

D. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until installed into the Work.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36MB. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992MC. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength for non-weathered

steelD. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B for non-weathered steel



E. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, withmatching compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M washers.

F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Gr 36, 55 or 105 as inidcated on the drawings, plain,with matching ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436 Type 1 washers.

G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.1. Electrodes: AWS D5.1, E70XX Series Low Hydrogen Electrodes as required for intended

use. All electrodes shall have a minimum Notch -Toughness of 20 FT-Lb at -20 degree F.H. Grout: Refer to 03 3000.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.B. Cleaning and Straightening: Thoroughly wire brush material, clean of loose mill scale and rust,

and straighten by methods that will not injure the steel prior to fabrication. Remove twists orbends after punching or working component parts of a member before the parts are assembled.Produce finished members free from twists, bends, and open joints when erected.

C. Contact: Pin components parts of built-up members and maintain in close contact using clampsor temporary bolting during welding operations. Accurately mill compression bearing surfacesof joints depending on contact bearings or saw cut square to axis, or as detailed. Cut otherjoints straight and true.

D. Joining: Provide members of the sizes, weights, shapes, and arrangements indicated, closelyfitted and finished true to line and in precise position as necessary to allow proper joining ofparts in the field. Drifting to enlarge unfair holes is not allowed without prior approval.

E. Drilling, Punching, and Reaming: Hole burning to make or enlarge previous holes is allowedonly with prior approval. Prepare required holes in structural steel members for attachment orpassage of Work of other trades. Precisely locate finished holes to ensure passage of all boltsthrough steel assemblies without drifting. Enlarge holes only by reaming. Poor matching ofholes is cause for rejection.

F. Holes For Anchor Bolts: Punch and drill or ream holes in base and bearing plates. Do notmake or enlarge the holes by burning except for grouting holes in column bases without priorapproval by the Architect.

G. Gas Cutting: Use of a cutting torch is allowed where the metal being cut is not stressed duringthe operation, and provided stresses are not transmitted through a flame-cut surface. Make allgas cuts with a smooth regular contour. Deduct 1/8" from width of gas cut edges to determineeffective width of members that are gas cut. Make radius of re-entrant gas cuts as large aspossible, but 1" minimum.

H. Galvanizing: After fabrication, items indicated or specified to be galvanized shall be galvanizedin largest practical sizes. Fabrication includes operations of shearing, punching, bending,forming, assembling or welding. Galvanized items shall be free from projections, barbs, oricicles resulting from the galvanizing process.

I. Welding:1. Type of steel furnished in welded structures shall provide chemical properties suitable for

welding as determined by chemical analysis. Welds shall conform to the requirements ofCBC Chapter 17.

2. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements specified herein and to CBCrequirements, modified as follows:a. No welded splices shall be permitted except those indicated on Drawings unless

specifically reviewed by the Engineer of Record.b. Drawings will designate joints in which it is important that welding sequence and

technique be controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and distortion.3. Welding shall be performed in accordance with requirements of the AWS Structural

Welding Code.J. Shop Finish:



1. Notify the Inspector when Work is ready to receive shop prime coat. Work shall beinspected by the Inspector before installation of primer.

2. Structural steel and fittings, except galvanized items, which will be exposed when buildingis completed, shall receive a coat of primer.

3. The primer specified shall be spray applied, filling joints and corners and covering surfaceswith a smooth unbroken film. The minimum dry film thickness of the primer shall be 2.0mils.

2.03 CONNECTIONSA. Make connections with bolts as noted on the Structural Drawings.B. High-Strength Steel Bolting: For joints connected by high strength steel bolts, hardened

washers, and nuts tightened to high tension, conform materials, method of installation andtension control, and wrenches to Reference Standards. Install all high-strength bolts underinspection.1. Connections shall be the “bearing bolt type” (A325-N) unless noted to be “slip-critical”

(A325-SC and A490-SC). Refer to drawings.2. Bolt lengths shall be the grip plus 1-1/4".3. Tightening of nuts shall be done with properly calibrated wrenches or by the turn-of-the-nut

method for A325-SC and A490-SC bolts. Tightening of the nuts for A325-N bolts to snugtightness shall be to Ref. Spec.

4. Check calibrated wrenches individually for accuracy not less than once daily for actualconditions of application.

5. Clean all contact surfaces of bolted parts and threads free of scale, slag, burrs, pits, dirt,paint, and other foreign material or defects which would prevent solid seating of connectedparts.

6. Install hardened washers per AISC Standards7. Tighten bolts systematically from most rigid part of connection to the free edges.8. Retighten first installed bolts that may have loosened by tightening of subsequent bolts so

all bolts are tightened to correct tension.9. Mark fully tightened bolts with identifying symbol.10. The contractor shall torque test 25% of the bolts in connections designated with A325-SC

or A490-SC Bolts.C. Load Indicator Washers: As manufactured and licensed by Cooper and Turner, Bethlehem

Steel, or approved equal, may be used for the field installation of the high-strength bolts. Loadindicator washers may not be substituted for any required washer, but may be used inconjunction with the required washers. After sufficient bolts in a joint are snugged to bring themembers into close contact, tightening shall progress from the most rigid part to the free edgesuntil the load indicators on all bolts are closed to the required gap of 0.015" under bolt heads or0.010" under the nuts. Do not completely close the gap to prevent over-tightening and damageto the bolts. Conform to ASTM F959, A325 and A490.

D. Tension Set or Load Indicator Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As manufactured by Cold FormSpecialties, Bethlehem Steel, or approved equal, may be used for field installation of thehigh-strength bolts. In multi-bolt joints, the nuts shall be tightened in stages (a little at a time)without breaking the spline in any of them until the final stage, to minimize slackening of theinstalled bolts.

2.04 WELDING:A. Conform to CBC Section 1704, AWS D1.1 as modified by referenced AISC Standards, and as

indicated or noted on Drawings. Employ welding operators qualified in accordance with AWSD1.1, as applicable, who are thoroughly trained and experienced in arc welding and thatproduce uniformly reliable groove and fillet welds in flat, vertical, and overhead positions, andmake neat and consistent welds. Weld all structural steel joints by shielded electric-arc methodunless otherwise shown, specified, or approved. Conform welding in both shop and field,including the prequalification of welds and welder qualifications, to AWS D1.1.



B. Preparation: Clean steel surfaces to be welded of all paint, grease, oil, mill scale, and foreignmatter. Clean weld each time the electrode is changed. Chip full surface of hand guided andcontrolled flame cut edges before welding. Surfaces prepared with automatic or mechanicallyguided and controlled equipment need not be ground or chipped before welding.

C. Weld Finishing: Grind exposed welds subject to contact to smooth surfaces free of holes, slag,or other defects, flush with the adjoining surfaces. No finish treatment is required forpermanently concealed welds and other exposed welds.

D. Procedures: During assembling and welding, hold components of a built-up member withadequate clamps or other means to keep parts straight and in close contact. Do no welding inwind until adequate protective screening is set up. Cut out defective welds or parts of welds witha chisel or air arc and replace.

E. Weld Characteristics: Conform to AWS D1.1. Clean and wire brush all welds. Visualinspection of finished welds must show uniform section, smoothness of welded metal, featheredges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and inclusions, and good fusion andpenetration into base metal at edges and ends of fillet welds.

2.05 FINISHA. Clean surfaces according to AISC Specifications. Apply one shop coat of specified metal

primer to minimum 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Work primer into joints. Do not prime thefollowing:

B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, fieldwelded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. A qualified special inspector shall inspect high-strength bolted connections. The Owner will

provide an independent testing laboratory to perform tests and prepare test reports inaccordance with the CBC. The Inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of thespecial inspector and testing laboratories to ensure that the testing program is satisfactorilycompleted.

B. An AWS CWI certified special inspector shall inspect welded connections. The Owner willprovide an independent testing laboratory to perform tests and prepare test reports inaccordance with the CBC. The Inspector shall be responsible for monitoring the work of thespecial inspector and testing laboratories to ensure that the testing program is satisfactorilycompleted.

C. The independent testing laboratory shall conduct and interpret test and state in each reportwhether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviationstherefrom.

D. Provide access to all places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or produced sorequired inspection and testing can be performed.

E. The independent testing laboratory may inspect and/or test structural steel at plant beforeshipment; however, the Engineer of Record reserves the right at any time before FinalCompletion to deem materials not in compliance with the specified requirements as defectiveWork.

F. Correct defects in structural Work when inspections and laboratory test reports indicatenoncompliance with specified requirements. Perform additional tests as may be required toreconfirm noncompliance of original Work, and as may be required to show demonstratecompliance of corrected Work.

G. Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication and erection of structural steel assemblies asfollows:1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations

of defects found in the Work. Record Work required and performed to correctdeficiencies.



2. Inspect welds. Welds shall be visually inspected before performing any non-destructivetesting. Groove weld shall be inspected by ultrasonic or other approved non-destructivetest methods.

3. Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by a specially trained and qualified technician whoshall operate the equipment, examine welds, and maintain a record of welds examined,defects found, and disposition of each defect. Repair and test defective welds.

4. Rate of Testing: Complete joint penetration welds contained in joints and splices shall betested 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by radiography.

5. Base metal thicker than 1-1/2 inches, when subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkagestrains, shall be ultrasonically inspected by shear wave methods for discontinuities directlybehind such welds. Tests shall be performed at least 48 hours after completed joint hascooled down to ambient air temperature.

6. Any material discontinuities shall be reviewed based on the defect rating in accordancewith the criteria of AWS D1.1 table 6.3 by the SEOR.

7. Other method of non-destructive testing and inspection, for example, liquid dye penetratetesting, magnetic particle inspection or radiographic inspection may be performed on weldif required.

8. Lamellar Tearing: Lamellar-tearing resulting from welding is a crack (with zero tolerance)and shall be repaired in accordance with AWS D1.1.

9. Lamination: The rejection criteria shall be based on ASTM A 435.10. Where testing reveals lamination or conditions of lamellar tearing in base metal, the steel

fabricator shall submit a proposed method of repair for review by the Architect. Testrepaired areas as required.

11. Magnetic Particle Testing: Magnetic particle testing when required shall be provided inaccordance with AWS D1.1 for procedure and technique. The standards of acceptanceshall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 - Qualification.

H. Welded studs shall be tested and inspected by the special inspector in accordance withrequirements of AWS D1.1 – Stud Welding.


A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work mayproperly proceed.

B. Verify governing dimensions and conditions of the Work before commencing erection Work.Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor rods,bearing plates and other Embedments.

C. Provide temporary shoring and bracing, and other support during performance of the Work.Remove after steel is in place and connected, and after cast-in-place concrete has reached itsdesign strength.

3.02 ERECTIONA. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303.B. Employ qualified riggers and plan erection to require minimum cutting. Erect members plumb,

true to line and level, and in precise positions. Provide temporary bracing and guying to resistloads and stresses to which the structure may be subjected, including those due to erectionequipment and its operation.

C. Anchor Bolts: Furnish and deliver anchor bolts with setting drawings and templates. Verifyposition of bolts prior to delivery of steel; report errors or deviation for correction.

D. Clean surfaces of base plates and bearing plates.1. Install base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts

as required.2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims; cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packingwith grout.



E. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC Code of Standard Practice for SteelBuildings and Bridges.

F. Align and adjust steel members. Adjust for variations in elevation or alignment. Level andplumb structural members.

G. Do not permit thermal cutting during erection of structural steel.H. Connections: Hold steel in correct position during welding and bolting, and provide for dead

loads, wind, and all erection stresses. Do no welding or final bolting until members have beenaligned and plumbed.1. Field Welding: Conform to requirements for shop fabrication.2. Common Bolts: Tighten and upset bolt threads to preclude loosening, or use approved

self-locking nuts.3. High-Strength Bolting: Tighten by turn of the nut method or with calibrated torque

wrenches as specified for the shop high-strength bolting and according to Code, AISCStandards and the Reference Standard.

I. Where indicated for field connections, provide standard bolts complying with ASTM A325.J. Install high strength steel bolts at locations indicated. Assembly and installation shall be in

accordance with CBC requirements.K. Erect structural steel plumb and level and to proper tolerances as set forth in the AISC Manual.

Provide temporary bracing, supports or connections required for complete safety of structureuntil final permanent connections are installed.

L. Damaged Members: During erection, straighten or replace members which are bent, twisted, ordamaged as directed. If heating is required, perform heating by methods that ensure a uniformtemperature throughout the entire member. When directed, remove members damaged to anextent impairing appearance, strength, or serviceability and replace with new members at noextra cost to the Owner.

M. Grout solidly between column or other bearing plates and concrete/masonry bearing surfaces,complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfacessmooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3.03 FINISHINGA. After erection, spots or surfaces where paint has been removed, damaged, or burned off and

field rivets, bolts, and other field connections not concealed in the Work, shall be cleaned of dirt,oil, grease, and burned paint and furnished with a spot coat of the same primer installed duringshop priming.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, andabraded areas of shop paint. Install paint to exposed areas with the same material installedduring shop painting. Install by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5mils.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. All welders shall be qualified for each process and position per AWS D1.1 Chapter 4, Part C -

Performance Qualifications.B. Testing Agency The owner will engage An independent testing agency will perform field quality

control tests for all field welds and bolted connections as detailed in Section 1.5 above.1. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in

accordance with RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections. For all CJP welds test

100 percent of welds using the following:a. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164. An AWS Certified

Welding Inspector shall operate ultrasonic testing equipment, examine welds, andmaintain a record of welds examined, defects found, and disposition of each defect.Defective welds shall be repaired in accordance with AWS D1.1, latest revision, and



costs for retesting defective welds shall be responsibility of the Contractor. Testsshall be complete tests according to AWS D1.1, latest revision.

b. Backing Strips: Remove backing strips whenever ultrasonic indications arising fromweld roots can be interpreted as either a weld defect or a backing strip, and retestweld if no root defect is visible. If no defect is disclosed by retest and no significantamount of the base and weld metal is removed, joint needs no further repair orwelding. Repair all defects disclosed. Contractor shall bear the cost of removals andrepairs.

c. Ultrasonic Instrumentation: Calibrated by technician to evaluate the quality of welds inaccordance with AWS D1.1-06, Sections 5 and 6.

d. Acceptance Criteria: In accordance with larger reflector criteria of AWS D1.1, latestrevision.


3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

End of Section


05 3619 - Composite Metal SheathingPage 1 of 4

Section 05 3619Composite Metal Sheathing


A. Composite metal sheathing as shown on the drawings, including basic layout, non-combustibleor combustible sheathing, fasteners, and any accessory or trim pieces for a complete systemper

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. 05 1200 - Structural Steel FramingB. 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal FramingC. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100-12 -North American Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members, 2007 Edition.B. ICC-ES ER 0126 - International Code Council Evaluation Service Evaluation Report 0126, North

American Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 2007 Edition.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Sheet Steel,

Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.E. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as

Sheathing; 2013.F. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).G. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2007a

(Reapproved 2011).H. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior

Substrate Sheets; 2014.I. ASTM C1325 - Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer

Units; 2014.J. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

K. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on composite metal sheathing panelsC. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing layout and noting fastening as required to

comply with testing approvals. Include details as applicable.D. Evaluation Service Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section, with at least three years of documented experience.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Construct mock up of assembly utilizing composte metal sheathing for review and approval.Mock up to be a minum of three panels and shall include all typical details.

B. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.



1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. All composite sheathing panels shall be packaged and handled to prevent damage during

shipping and unloading.B. Cover composite sheathing panels with waterproof material and ventilate to avoid condensation

before installation.C. Store composite sheathing panels off ground with one end elevated for moisture drainage.D. Do not bend sheet steel or break/mar gypsum board sheet while handling. If damage to panel

should occur, repair of panel may be approved by manufacturer.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Marino /Ware, Ware Industries: sureboard.com (Baisis of Design)B. California Expanded Metal Products (Cemco): cemcosteel.com

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Shear wall shear capacity:

1. The gage for framing and attachment of the composite sheathing panel is designed by theEOR (engineer of record) to provide a panel shear capacity in accordance with IAPMO_ESevaluation report number ER-0126.

2. Contractor will bear the cost for structural evaluation and approval of proposed similarmaterials, stated load capacities or methods of attachment to framing studs/track/platesother than those stated on listed approvals for composite shear panels.

B. Fire Rated Use:1. UL Listed composite shear panels have been fire tested/reported and certified to be used

on 1, 1 1/2, and 2 hour fire rated, load bearing and non-load bearing CFS/Wood Framedassemblies for interior and exterior use.

2.03 MATERIALS, FASTENERS, ADHESIVE AND FINISHED PANELSA. Galvanized Steel:

1. No.20 or 22 gage base-metal thickness minimum per ASTM A653/A653M based on panellisted with CS Grade 33/hot dipped galvanized G40 minimum per ASTM A924/A924M.

2. Recycled Content: Total 36 percent minimuma. Post Consumer: 19 percent minimumb. Pre-Consumer: 14 percent minimum

B. Wallboard Compliance:1. Wallboard shall comply with ASTM C1325, ASTM C1177/C1177M, ASTM

C1278/C1278M, ASTM C1288, and ASTM C1186C. Fasteners:

1. Fasteners shall comply with Evalution Reports2. Series 200/200S panels

a. Steel: Self-drilling/self-tapping pilot point bugle head screws, #8 minimum diameter0.138-inch (3.5 mm), with a minimum 0.3145-inch (8.0 mm) head diameter, 1.5-inch(31.7 mm) long, and a 3/8-inch minimum drill tip, complying with SAE J78 and ASTMC954. ER 5280 by John Grabber & Assoc. or equal.

b. Wood: #8 X 2 inch minimum wood screws3. Series 200S panels

a. Steel: #8 X 1-5/8 inch lg. Winged Driller Grabber Super Drive LOX drive screws orequal. See ICC-ES Report ESR-1271

4. Series 200Wa. Steel: #10 X 3/4 inch minimum self- drilling/self-tapping pan-head screws.b. Wood: 10d X 1 1/4 inch minimum smooth plywood nails

D. Adhesives:


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C954











1. The non-structural adhesive used to attach the steel to the gypsum wallboard or othernon-structural sheathing shall be a water soluble, non-combustible type adhesive.

E. Finished Composite Metal Sheathing Panels:1. Provide composite metal sheathing panels as listed on structural drawings.

a. Sure-Board 200 Structural Panelsb. Sure-Board 200S Structural Panelsc. Sure-Board 200W Structural Panelsd. Sure-Board 200S-F Structural Panels; 3/4 inch thick


A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work mayproperly proceed.

B. Verify governing dimensions and conditions of the Work before commencing erection Work.Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor rods,bearing plates and other Embedments.

C. Provide temporary shoring and bracing, and other support during performance of the Work.Remove after steel is in place and connected, and after cast-in-place concrete has reached itsdesign strength.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install composite sheating in conformance with plans, evaluation reports, and manufacturer's

recommendations.B. Maintain tolerances between panels as per evaluation reports.C. Damaged areas of panels up to 12 inches by 12 inches may be repaired following

manufacturer's recommended proceedure. Consult structural engineer before attempting torepair any area larger than 12 inches by 12 inches.

3.03 FINISHINGA. Joint Tape: After installation tape all joints with nominal 1 7/8" wide fiberglass tape embedded

in the first layer of setting compound over joints.B. Setting Compound: Dry setting compound mixed with water and applied in two coats to joints

and screw-heads. Upon completion of finishing board joints and screw heads, a skim coat ofsetting compound shall be applied to the entire surface of ceiling board.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Flat or Level: 1/4 inch in 10 feet


3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

End of Section











































05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal FramingPage 1 of 4

Section 05 4000Cold-Formed Metal Framing


A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.B. Exterior wall sheathing.C. Formed steel joist framing and bridging.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; 2016.B. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.E. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Productsand Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.

F. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2011a.

G. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008.H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.

2004).1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,

product criteria, limitations and ________.C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.D. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading,

welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.1. Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout.2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention, and ________.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEPART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Framing:1. CEMCO; _______: www.cemcosteel.com/#sle.2. ClarkDietrich; _______: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.3. SCAFCO Corporation; _______: www.scafco.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Framing Connectors and Accessories:1. Same manufacturer as metal framing.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.



2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMA. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,

fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, C- or Sigma-shaped with punchedweb; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.1. Gauge and Depth: As indicated on drawings.2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90/Z275 coating.

B. Jamb Studs: Engineered, C-shaped with wide flanges, designed to replace conventionaldouble-stud framing at openings.1. Products:

a. SCAFCO Corporation; Kwik-Jamb Studs: www.scafco.com/#sle.b. Dietrich HDS.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Header: Engineered one-member or two-member assembly, with wide flanges, designed toreplace conventional box or nested header framing at openings.1. Jamb Mounting Clips: Manufacturer's standard.2. Products:

a. SCAFCO Corporation; HD Header: www.scafco.com/#sle.b. CEMCO; ProX Header: www.cemcosteel.com/#sle..c. Dietrich HDS.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dippedgalvanized coating.1. Gauge and Depth: As indicated on drawings.2. Products:

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Non-Bearing Top of Wall connections

1. Provide nested track assembly with long leg tack on top (2" minimum leg length) andstandard track below minimum overlap of 1" and 3/4" of deflection gap

2. Altenatively provide deflection/slip Track Product Gage to match typical track in drawings:a. Clark Dietrich MaxTrak 2Db. CEMCO CST Slotted Drack with Drift Slots

F. Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet.1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dipped

galvanized coating for base metal thickness less than 10 gauge, 0.1345 inch, and factorypunched holes and slots.

2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicablecode, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100.

3. Fixed Connections: Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation,floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.a. Products (as specified on drawings):

1) Simpson Strong Tie; ____: www.strongtie.com/#sle.2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Factory Fabricated Shear Wall Panels:1. Products:

a. CEMCO; Sure-Board Series 200: www.cemcosteel.com/#sle.2.04 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTMA153/A153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated and Drilled expansion bolts. As specified on drawings

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A153/A153M




2.05 WALL SHEATHING2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditionsencountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying withVOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.07 FASTENERSA. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM

A153/A153M.B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDSA. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007

requirements.B. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door

and window jambs.C. Install load-bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.D. Install load-bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design

requirements.E. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.F. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load

bearing framing.G. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent

stud rotation.3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS

A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.C. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF WALL SHEATHINGA. Install wall sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm

bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.End of Section








































05 5000 - Metal FabricationsPage 1 of 4

Section 05 5000Metal Fabrications


A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.B. Prefabricated ladders and ship ladders.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel column anchor bolts.C. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Brackets for countertopsD. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2015.E. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.H. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.I. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004).J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.

2004).K. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Design trellis assemblies under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer

experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing.C. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.



E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying withVOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUMA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMSA. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.B. All support and opening steel components required for Bi-Folding Apparatus Bay Doors, finish

to match bi folding apparatus bay doors.C. All support and opening steel components required for Sectional Overhead doors, finish to

match adjacent wall surface.D. Steel countertop support bracket: 1/4" thick minimum steel angle as detailed on drawings, prime

paint finish.E. Steel Bracket for Wood Benches: 1/4" thick minimum steel angle as detailed on drawings, prime

paint finish.2.05 PREFABRICATED LADDERS

A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated togreatest degree practical and in the largest components possible.1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms

and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of thissection.

2. Manufacturers:a. Industrial Ladder & Scaffolding, Inc.: www.anyladder.com/sle.b. O'Keeffe's Inc: www.okeeffes.com/sle.

B. Miscellaneous embedments and attachments.2.06 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prime paint steel items.1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry.2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is

required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.D. Prime Painting: One coat.E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M

requirements.



2.07 FINISHES - ALUMINUMA. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic

coating not less than 0.7 mils thick; dark bronze.2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.F. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop

paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply or brush orspray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 0.051 mm (2.0 mils).

G. At all galvanized products, clean all damaged areas and re-coat using specified galvanizingcoating per manufacturer's criteria.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

End of Section


06 2000 - Finish Carpentry Page 1 of 2

Section 06 2000Finish Carpentry


A. Finish carpentry items.B. Wood casings and moldings.C. Wood Shower Bench Slats

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal FramingB. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.C. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Painting of finish carpentry items.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2012.B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.D. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; 2011.E. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.

C. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Grade materials in accordance with the following:1. Softwood Lumber: In accordance with rules certified by ALSC; www.alsc.org.2. Plywood: Certified by the American Plywood Association.3. Hardwood Lumber: In accordance with NHLA Grading Rules; www.natlhardwood.org.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in thissection with minimum five years of documented experience.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect from moisture damage.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural WoodworkQuality Standards Illustrated for Premium grade.

B. Interior Woodwork Items:


06 2000 - Finish Carpentry Page 2 of 2

1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paintfinish.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 LUMBER MATERIALSA. Softwood Lumber: pine species, smooth sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with

vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.B. Hardwood Lumber: Birch species, smooth sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with

vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.1. Grading: In accordance with NHLA G-101 Grading Rules; www.nhla.org.

2.04 WOOD TREATMENTA. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum ____ percent moisture content.

2.05 FABRICATIONA. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.2.06 SHOP FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.C. Finish work in accordance with Woodwork Institute Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #7a -

synthetic enamel.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION


06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework Page 1 of 4

Section 06 4100Architectural Wood Casework


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal FramingB. Section 05 5000 - Metal FabricationsC. Section 07 9200 - Joint SealantsD. Section 12 3600 - CountertopsE. Division 22 and 23 Plumbing and MechanicalF. Division 26 Electrical

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0;

2016.D. ASTM D 1037 - 99 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and

Particle Panel MaterialsE. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; 2003.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint

details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. Shop Drawings shall have WI, Certified Compliance Label affixed to first page of drawing set.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. Provide MSDS Sheets for all composite wood and agrifiber products, adhesives, and sealants used.

D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, locksets, and plastic laminates, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, Custom quality, unless other quality is

indicated for specific items. The millwork supplier shall issue a W.I. Certificate ComplianceCertificate indicating the grade of millwork products to be furnished for this job and certifyingthat they will fully meet all the requirements of the grade specified. Each unit of casework shallbear the W.I. Certificate Compliance label. Each plastic laminate countertop shall bear the W.I.Certified Compliance label. Upon the completion of the installation, a W.I. Certified Complianceshall be issued for the installation. The type of construction used must meet the seismic forcerequirements of Title 24.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect units from moisture damage.B. Delivery shall only be made when the area of operation is enclosed, all wet work is dry, all

overhead work is complete, and the area broom clean.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditionsin building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.



B. The HVAC system shall be on and functioning, and the architectural millwork shall beacclimated to these conditions for 72 hours prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

2.02 LUMBER MATERIALSA. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, Grade

II/Custom; average moisture content of 5-10 percent; species as recommended bymanufacturer.

2.03 PANEL MATERIALSA. Interior - Trespa TopLab - Base (www.trespa.com) - All Exposed Cabinet Doors, exposed

Face Panels of cabinetry and full cabinet construction in all areas.1. Cabinet Doors - Thickness: 5/8" (16 mm)2. Cabinet Side Panels - Thickness 5/8"3. Cabinet Construction - Thickness: 5/8"4. Exposed Shelving - Thickness 5/8"5. Semi Exposed Shelving - Thickness 5/8"

B. Particleboard shall not be usedC. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in WI Manual of Millwork;

composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant formaldehyde free adhesiveto suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required.1. Medex, as manufactured by Sierra Pine or approved equal2. Located as substrate to solid polymner countertop.

2.04 COUNTERTOPSA. Countertops are specified in Section 12 3600.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized

or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish inexposed locations.

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.E. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

2.06 HARDWAREA. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf

standards and coordinated self-rests, satin finish, for nominal 9/16 inch spacing adjustments.1. Standards, SP-1820, manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal.2. Supports; SP-15, manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal.

B. Drawer and Door Pulls: matte chrome zinc alloy pull handle.1. Product: EG-36160 MC manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal

C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish.1. Pin tumbler cylinder cam lock, National Lock 8102 Series or approved equal.2. Keying as selected. All locks shall be installed in a hole shaped the same shape as the

cylinder of the lock to eliminate rotation. Round lock cylinders installed in round holes willnot be allowed.

3. Cabinet locks are to be installed at the following cabinet doors with the followingrequirements:



a. All locks will be keyed with one master key and one unique key.b. Provide 4 copies of each unique key and a total of eight copies of the master key.c. Bunkroom Lockers: Unique keys for each locker door.d. Kitchen Pantry Cabinets: Unique keys for each separate full height "pantry" cabinet

door.D. Catches: Magnetic.

1. Product: MC0099 manufactured by Sugatsune2. Product: 323A92 manufactured by Ives3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

E. Drawer Slides:1. Type: Full extension.2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.3. Mounting: Side mounted.4. Stops: Integral type.5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.6. Manufacturers:

a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.b. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.c. Hettich:d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Hinges: Five knuckle overlay hinge type, steel with polished finish.1. Manufacturers:

a. Rockford Process: www.rockfordprocesshingesandhardware.com1) The "Rockford Hinge" - Five knuckle Overlay Hinge

(a) Size to match cabinetry constructionb. Hettich America, LP: www.hettich.com/#sle.c. Blum, Inc: www.blum.com.d. Or approved equal,e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Countertop Support Brackets:1. Product: BTK -480 manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal

a. Color: Blackb. Capacity: 181 lbs

H. Silencers: Clear vinyl silencers to be installed at each cabinet doorI. Countertop Cable Grommets:

1. Color: Black2. Diameter: 3"3. Features: Grommet to include cap

J. Wardrobe Hook1. # 582 Double, Aluminum, Manufactured by Ives or approved equal.

2.07 FABRICATIONA. Cabinets shall be fabricated to Woodwork Institute standards

1. Grade: PremiumB. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.C. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.D. Exceptions to WI standards

1. Wall Hung Cabinets : Depth 14 inches2. Storage, Janitor, Closet and Utility Room Cabinets shall be of the same construction as

typical cabinets.3. Shelves shall be designed as per schools and libraries, for a 50lb per square foot live load

as per table 15-1.



4. Exterior Edges: Include doors, drawer fronts, and front edge of vertical end panels and legpanels. Exterior edges are to be edged with heavy-duty 3mm PVC edge banding, color tomatch door or drawer front.

5. Locate grommets as directed by Owner. Assume one per workstationPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATIONA. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim for this purpose.E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species

to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.G. Secure upper cabinets, counter bases, full height cabinets, and counter partitions to floor and

wall using appropriate angles and anchorages to obtain seismic restraint per Title 24 Section2336

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Defective work shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Owner or his representative

upon completion of installation.B. Shop finished surfaces shall be cleaned, touched-up as required and damaged or unrepairable

areas shall be refinished or replaced as directed.C. Clean cabinetry free of debris. Installer shall be responsible for the immediate removal of all

trash, crating, etc., associated with the cabinet installation.3.05 SCHEDULES

A. Finishes to be selected by architect from full line of colors and patterns. (Colors and Patternsare based on Nevamar as a standard of quality unless otherwise noted.)

END OF SECTION


06 6100 - Cast Polymer FabricationsPage 1 of 4

Section 06 6100Cast Polymer Fabrications


A. Cast plastic Shower Surrounds.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 12 3600 - Countertops: Solid surfacing countertops.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2015a.

B. ANSI Z 124.3 - Plastic Lavatories.C. ANSI Z 124.6 - Plastic Sinks.D. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of

Notched Specimens of Plastics.E. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water AbsorptionF. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile PropertiesG. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics

Between -30 degrees C. And 30 degrees C.H. ASTM D 785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating

Materials.I. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced

Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.J. ASTM D 785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating

Materials.K. ASTM G 22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials,

colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, methods of support, integration of plumbing components, and anchorages.

C. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's complete line for color selection by Architect1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Work to be performed by workers who are thoroughly familar with themethods of fabrication and installation of cast plastic and have a minimum experience of havinginstalled at least 5 previous installations of similar

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Verify that field measurements.B. Sequence Work to permit installation of adjacent affected construction, plumbing rough-in.

Coordinate the installation of restroom / shower walls with shower pan installation and plumbingwork.



1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide manufacturer's warranty as follows for material replacement:

1. 25-Year Limited Warranty on wall panels and trim kits2. 5-Year Limited Warranty against warping, blistering, loss of color, or fading on shower

floorsC. Contractor to provide one year warranty for installation

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Synthetic Stone Architectural Columns, Balustrade Systems, Balusters, and Facade Elements:1. Swanstone : The Swan Corporation: www.swanstone.com2. Corian : DuPont Corian: www.DuPont.com/Surfaces3. Or pre-approved equal4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Shower Floor: Single pan element in size per drawings and as specified in the plumbing

documents.B. Shower Wall Panels: Corian wall finish panels to fit shower including corner molding and soap

trays.1. Product Description: Homogenous compression molded material composed of acrylic

resins or polyester/acrylic resin blend, fire-retardant filler materials, fiber reinforcement,and coloring agents meeting the following requirements:a. Nominal sheet thickness: 0.250 inch (6.35 mm)b. Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84:

1) Flame spread 15, Smoke Developed Index 255.c. Liquid Absorption, ASTM D 570, for 1/4 inch material thickness: 0.033 percent.d. Izod Impact, ASTM D 256, Method A: 6.6 foot pounds per inch.e. Tensile Modulus, ASTM D 638 Nominal: 1.48 X 106 pounds per square inch.f. Thermal Expansion, ASTM D 696: 1.64 X 10-5 inch per inch per degree F,

maximum.g. Hardness, ASTM D 785, Barcol Impressor: 42.h. Flexural Modulus, ASTM D 638: 1.22 X 106 pounds per square inch.i. Gloss Level 25% at 60o, NEMA LD 3.; +/- 5%.j. Stain Resistance, ANSI-Z 124.3, Passes.k. Boiling Water Resistance, NEMA LD 3, Method 3.5: No effect.l. High Temperature Resistance, NEMA LD 3, Method 3.6:

1) No effect (sustain temperature up to 375o F).m. Ball Impact Resistance, NEMA LD 3, Method 3.8, one pound ball, unsupported:

1) Over 150”, no damage.n. Specific Gravity: 1.6 grams per cubic centimeter.o. Approximate weight: 2 pounds per square foot in 1/4" sheet products.p. NSF Food Zone and Splash Zone Compliant.q. Bacterial Resistance, ASTM G 22: Pass.r. Abrasion Resistance, ANSI-Z124.3, Passes.

C. Shower Soap / Shampoo shelves:1. Similar finish and color as wall panels.2. Minimum two shelves per shower.

a. Minimum thickness: 1/2 inch.D. Provide finished products having flame spread index of 15 and smoke developed index of 255,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 in thickness of 0.25 inch.



E. Trim: To match finish and color of wall elements.1. Minimum thickness: 1/4 inch.

F. Accessories: As required for a complete installation and as recommened by manufacturer.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components in shop to the greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, inaccordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Form joints between components using manufactures standard joint adhesive. Joints shall beinconspicuous in appearance and without voids.

C. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings.D. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish.E. All surfaces shall have a uniform finishF. Radius corners and edges.

2.04 FINISHA. Color: color as selected by architect from manufacturer's full line.


A. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable.B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and

ready to receive this work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Align work plumb and level.C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.D. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains upon completion of installation per manufactures

written instructions.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch.3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.End of Section


06 6420 - Plastic PanelingPage 1 of 4

Section 06 6420Plastic Paneling


A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting.B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants.

1.02 REFERENCESA. ANSI A135.5 - American National Standard for Prefinished Hardboard Paneling; 2004.B. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of

Plastics; 2005.C. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 1989 (Reapproved 1999).D. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998.E. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2003.F. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics

Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; 2003.G. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced

Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 2003.H. ASTM D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of

Plastics by Displacement; 2000.I. ASTM D 968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling

Abrasive; 1993 (Reapproved 2001).J. ASTM D 1037 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and

Particle Panel Materials; 1999.K. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and

Pigmented Organic Finishes; 2002.L. ASTM D 2197 - Standard Test Methods for Adhesion of Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion;

1998 (Reapproved 2004).M. ASTM D 2486 - Standard Test Methods for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints; 2000.N. ASTM D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a

Barcol Impressor; 1995 (Reapproved 2001).O. ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by

Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact).P. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2005.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

1. Store panels indoors.2. Lay panels flat. Do not stand panels on edge.



3. Protect panels from moisture.4. Do not store panels in contact with the floor or against an outside wall.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar

size and complexity.B. Mock-Ups: Provide mockup of sufficient size to demonstrate all typical conditions in the work.

1. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finish work.2. If mockup is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mockup.


A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kemlite Company, Inc.: www.frpdesignsolutions.com.B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PANEL SYSTEMA. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories.B. Panels: frpSelect.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 200 or less, smoke developedindex of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class C/III).

2. Surface Pattern: Cardboard Solidz (7813)3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard selection.4. Thickness: 3/32 inch (2.3 mm), nominal5. Width: 48 inches.6. Height: 96 inches.7. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi (69Mpa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.8. Flexural Modulus: 500,000 psi (3445 MPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.9. Tensile Strength: 8,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.10. Tensile Modulus: 600,000 psi (4134 MPa)., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.11. Barcol Hardness: 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2583.12. Impact Resistance: 6.8 ft-lb/in2 (0.19 J/mm)., when tested in accordance with ASTM D

256, Izod method.13. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 0.0000157 in/in/degree F, measured in accordance

with ASTM D 696.14. Water Absorption: 0.22 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 570.15. Taber Abrasion Test: 0.008% weight loss when subjected to 25 cycles with 1000g CS17

wheel.C. Panel Trim: Extruded PVC, in manufacturer's standard colors.

1. Outside corners, inside corners, edge trim, and division molding color matched to panelsD. Sealant: Acrylic latex [color matched to panels]


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.



3.02 PREPARATIONA. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior

to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local

regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives.C. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and

adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space.D. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary

and replace if not possible to repair to original condition.E. Protect installed products until completion of project.F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.G. Install panels with minimum number of joints on each wall.

END OF SECTION


06 8316 - Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling Page 1 of 2

Section 06 8316Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling


A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels.B. Trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 9 CFR 416.2 - Regulatory Requirements Under the Federal Meat Inspection Act and the Poultry

Products Inspection Act, Part 416-Sanitation; current edition.B. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of

Plastics; 2010.C. ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of

Barcol Impressor; 2013a.D. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.E. ASTM D5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling

Panels; 2012.F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.G. ISO 846 - Plastics - Evaluation of the Action of Microorganisms; 1997.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Samples: Submit two samples ____by____ inch in size illustrating material and surface design

of panels.D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for County's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store panels flat, indoors, on a clean, dry surface. Remove packaging and allow panels toacclimate to room temperature for 48 hours prior to installation.


A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels:1. Kemlite Company, Inc: www.frpdesignsolutions.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PANEL SYSTEMSA. Wall Panels:

1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet.2. Panel Thickness: 0.10 inch.3. Surface Design: Embossed.4. Color: White.5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, sealant joints, no trim.


06 8316 - Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling Page 2 of 2

2.03 MATERIALSA. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), complying with ASTM D5319.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Scratch Resistance: Barcol hardness score greater than 35, when tested in accordance

with ASTM D2583.4. Impact Strength: Greater than 6 ft lb force per inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D256.5. Sanitation and Cleanability: Comply with 9 CFR 416.2.6. Chemical Cleanability: Excellent chemical resistance to common cleaners and detergents

when tested in accordance with ISO 2812-1.7. Biological Resistance: Rating of 0, when tested in accordance with ISO 846.

B. Trim: Vinyl; color coordinating with panel.C. Fasteners: Nylon rivets.D. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer.E. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white.


A. Verify existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work.B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION - WALLSA. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades, drill bits, or snips.C. Pre-drill fastener holes in panels, 1/8 inch greater in diameter than fastener, spaced as

indicated by panel manufacturer.D. Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel as recommended by adhesive

manufacturer.E. Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.F. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.G. Drive fasteners to provide snug fit, and do not over-tighten.H. Place trim on panel before fastening edges, as required.I. Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel.J. Install trim with adhesive and screws or nails, as required.K. Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with applicable sealant to prevent moisture

intrusion.L. Remove excess sealant after paneling is installed and prior to curing.

END OF SECTION

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D256






























07 1300 - Sheet WaterproofingPage 1 of 4

Section 07 1300Sheet Waterproofing


A. Sheet Waterproofing:1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 3619 - Composite Metal SheathingB. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Insulation used for protective cover.C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counterflashing.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONSA. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).B. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved

2010).C. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012).D. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by

Impact; 2014.E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.F. NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual; 2005.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in County's

name and registered with manufacturer.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing productsspecified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withat least three years of documented experience.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial

Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to County.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water,

except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking ofconcrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.


A. www.wrmeadows.com.; Product Mel-Rol.www.wrmeadows.com.B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com.



2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. Parapet Walls, Windows, Doors and Skylight Conditions1. Membrane: Mel Rol2. Accessories:

a. Mel-Prime water based primerb. Sealtight pointing masticc. Sealtight detail stripd. Additional sealants as required by the manufacturer.

B. Membrane: Mel Rol.- Polymeric membrane over cross laminated polyethylene carrier film.Adhesive bonded.1. Thickness:

a. Carrier Film: 4milsb. Polymeric Membrane: 56 mils

2. Tensile Strength:a. Carrier Film: 5,900 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412.b. Polymeric membrane: 590 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412.

3. Ultimate Elongation: Polymeric membrane 455% percent, measured in accordance withASTM D 412.

4. Peel Adhesion - Wet and Dry - 7lb./in.5. Lap Adhesion - Dry - 5lb./in.6. Water Absorbtion: .1%, 72 hrs. maz. per ASTM D 19707. Puncture Resistance: 67 lb. per ASTM E1548. Water Vapor Permeability:.019 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E 96/E

96M.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of

waterproofing system.C. Verify items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage not designated to receive waterproofing.B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions; vacuum substrate clean.C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.D. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by

manufacturer, and protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE

A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA(WM) applicable requirements.

B. Roll out membrane, and minimize wrinkles and bubbles.C. Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer, and roll out onto substrate with a

mechanical roller to provide full contact bond.D. Overlap edges and ends, minimum 3 inches, seal permanently waterproof by method

recommended by manufacturer, and apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints

are static or dynamic.



F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage, and seal joints and seams.G. Flexible Flashings: Seal items watertight that penetrate through waterproofing membrane with

flexible flashings.H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

END OF SECTION


07 2100 - Board and Batt InsulationPage 1 of 4

Section 07 2100Board and Batt Insulation


A. Thermal batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction - R21.B. Rigid foam board insulation at all exterior framed walls to provide a thermal break. Refer to

specification section 07 4210 – Composite Framing Support Clip System for insulationspecification at this condition.

C. Rigid foam board insulation at low slope (Flat) roof areas - R30D. Roof Protection Board - To cover all locations of insulation at roof conditions.E. Batt insluation at the underside of roof sheathing for increased roof insulation. R30 or as

required to fill enclosed cavity spaceF. Rigid foam board insulation - tapered for roof drainage.G. Sound insulation at all interior demising walls not otherwise thermally insulated - size to fill void

5-1/2" min.H. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall

and roof.I. Batt insulation as required to fill enclosed cavity spaces not protected by fire sprinkler heads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 3619 - Composite Metal SheathingB. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers:C. Section 07 4210 – Composite Framing Support Clip System.D. Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board AssembliesE. Section 09 5100 Acoustical CeilingF. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Installation requirements for board

insulation over low slope roof deck specified in this section.G. Section 21 1313 - Wet-Pipe Fire Sprinkler System: Coordination for filling cavities not covered

by sprinkler heads.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer - Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specially trained in thetechniques of insulation, and who are completely familiar with the published recommendationsof the manufacturer of the material being used. Installer to take care that facing material of battinsulation is not torn or punctured.

B. Materials of this section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosureelements.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients

by the Reverberation Room Method; 2009a.B. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.C. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a.D. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2014.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.



G. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750Degrees C; 2012.

H. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics ofExterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions

required for installation and installation techniques.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental tosuccessful installation.

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLINGA. Protection

1. Insulating materials to be stored at the job site in a safe, dry place with all labels intact andlegible at time of installation.

2. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection duringinstallation. Use all means to protect insulating materials before, during, and afterinstallation. Do not allow products to become wet, damp, or punctured.

B. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairsand replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to theOwner.

1.08 SEQUENCINGA. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work

of this section.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Polyisocyanurate board.B. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.C. Insulation Over Roof Deck: Polyisocyanurate board.D. Insulation Under Roof Deck: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder

2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALSA. Wall - Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM

C1289.1. Classifications:

a. Type I: Faced with aluminum foil on both major surfaces of the core foam.1) Class 1 - Non-reinforced core foam.2) Compressive Strength: 16 psi, minimum.3) Thermal Resistance, R-value: At 1-1/2 inch thick; 9.0, minimum, at 75 degrees

F.2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. Board Size: 48 inch by 96 inch.5. Board Thickness: 1.5 inch.6. Board Edges: Square.7. Products:

a. Hunter Panels, LLC; _____: www.hunterxci.com/#sle.

















b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.B. Roof - Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam,

complying with ASTM C1289.1. Classifications:

a. Type II: Faced with either organic felt facers or glass fiber mat facers on both majorsurfaces of the core foam.1) Class 1 - Faced with glass fiber reinforced cellulosic felt facers on both major

surfaces of core foam.2) Compressive Strength: Classes 1-2-3, Grade 2 - 20 psi (138 kPa), minimum.3) Thermal Resistance, R-value: At 1-1/2 inch thick; Class 1, Grades 1-2-3 - 8.4

(1.48), minimum, at 75 degrees F.2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.5. Roof Insulation to conform to HH-I-19726. Board Size: 48 inch by 96 inch.7. Board Thickness: As required to achieve R value specified.8. Board Edges: Square.9. Products:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.b. GAF: www.gaf.com/#sle.c. Hunter Panels, LLC: www.hunterxci.com/#sle.

10. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to the following:1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed

index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for

facing, if any.3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.4. Thermal Resistance: (Unless otherwise noted on plans with an increase value)

a. At Exterior Walls: Kraft Face Batts. (Also located at interior walls of Apparatus Baysand Fitness Room.)

b. Interior Wall Sound Insulation: fiberglass sound control batts minimum 3-5/8" thick oras required to fill stud space.

5. Manufacturer shall certify that a minimum of 25% of content of insulation is of recycledmaterials.

6. Facing: Asphalt treated Kraft paper, one side.7. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.b. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.c. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.

8. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide all other materials and products necessary for the proper completion of the work.B. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers'

instructions.C. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer.D. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.E. Protection Board: Dens Deck Roof Board By Georgia Pacific.

1. Thickness: 1/4"2. Acttachment: Use fasteners as required length to attach to the structural substrate.



























































A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates areready to receive insulation.

B. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verifythat all such work is complete to the point where installation can properly begin.

C. Verify that specified products may be installed in accordance with the original design and themanufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLSA. Install boards horizontally on walls.B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.C. Seal gaps, voids or penetrations completely with approved expandable foam sealant on exterior

and interior (if visible) before enclosing wall.3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK

A. Board Installation Over Roof Deck, General:At Crickets for slope1. See applicable roofing specification section for specific board installation requirements.2. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions

and applicable Factory Mutual requirements.3. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing on the same day.

3.04 BATT INSTALLATIONA. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.E. Wire all ceiling insulation (that is not supported by gypsum board by running 16 gage wire

diagonally or perpendicular to the insulation every 18 inches.F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

End of Section




































07 2500 - Weather BarriersPage 1 of 4

Section 07 2500Weather Barriers


A. Water-resistive barriers.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction withweather barriers.

B. Section 09 2236.23 - Metal Lath: Second layer weather barrier installed as part of lath1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Weather Barriers: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vaporretarders.

B. Water-Resistive Barrier: A material behind an exterior wall covering that is intended to resistliquid water that has penetrated behind the exterior covering from further intruding into theexterior wall assembly.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D779 - Standard Test Method for Water Resistance of Paper, Paperboard, and Other

Sheet Materials by the Dry Indicator Method; 2003.B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.E. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.F. ASTM E2273 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior

Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies; 2003 (reapproved 2011).G. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc;


A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation, installation methods, and storage

and handling criteria.1.06 MOCK-UPS

A. Construct weather barrier mock-up, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, indicating instalation atpenetrations, top of wall, and base of wall..

B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of work.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufacturers before, during,

and after installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS

A. Drainable Barrier Sheet: Multi-layer nonwoven and nonperforated polpropylene with rain screenmatrix bonded on back side.



1. Width: 4.4 feet, minimum.2. Water Vapor Permeance: 19 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M using Procedure A - Desiccant Method, at 73.4 degrees F.3. Ultraviolet (UV) and Weathering Resistance: Approved by manufacturer for up to 180

days of weather exposure.4. Drainage gap: 3 mm minumum passing ASTM E22735. Products:

a. VaproShield: WrapShield RS: vaproshield.comb. Tamlyn; TamlynWrap Rain Screen 6.3: www.tamlyn.com

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories Used for Sealing Water-Resistive Barrier and Adjacent

Substrates: As indicated or complying with water-resistive barrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M, exceptslip resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.1. Width: 4 inches.

C. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by water-resistive barrier manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions comply with requirements of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere withproper installation.

B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives and sealants in accordance withmanufacturer's installation instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous water-resistive barrier over surfaces indicated, with

sheets lapped to shed water but with seams not sealed.C. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and

with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.1. Seal joint between slab or curb and wall above.

D. Mechanically Fastened Exterior Sheets:1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams aligned horizontal.2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer, 6 inches, minimum.3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer, 12 inches,

minimum.4. Attach to framed construction with fasteners extending through sheathing into framing, and

space fasteners at 12 to 18 inches on center along each framing member supportingsheathing.

5. For applications indicated to be airtight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cutswith self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners as recommended bymanufacturer.

6. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings.7. Install head flashings under water-resistive barrier.8. At framed openings with frames having nailing flanges, extend sheet into opening and over

flanges; at head of opening, seal sheet over flange and flashing.E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Water-Resistive Barriers:

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E96/E96M






1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill framing member, and extend at least 5 inchesonto water-resistive barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretchededges.

2. At openings filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using acontinuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with sealing tape atleast 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange.

3. At openings filled with nonflanged frames, seal water-resistive barrier to each side offraming at opening using flashing at least 9 inches wide, and covering entire depth offraming.

4. At head of openings, install flashing under water-resistive barrier extending at least 2inches beyond face of jambs; seal water-resistive barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gaps between window and door frames and roughframing using appropriate joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating items and seal tosurface of water-resistive barrier.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.B. County’s Inspection and Testing: Cooperate with County’s testing agency.

1. Allow access to work areas and staging.2. Notify County’s testing agency in writing of schedule for work of this section to allow

sufficient time for testing and inspection.3. Do not cover work of this section until testing and inspection is accepted.

C. Do not cover installed water-resistive barriers until required inspections have been completed.D. Take digital photographs of each portion of installation prior to covering up weather barriers.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

End of Section


07 4114 - Metal Roof PanelsPage 1 of 4

Section 07 4114Metal Roof Panels


A. Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 3619 - Composite Metal Sheathing: Roof sheathingB. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Rigid roof insulation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.E. ASTM E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and

Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2005 (Reapproved 2012).F. ASTM E1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel

Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2011).G. ASTM E1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof

Panel Systems; 2011.H. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.I. UL 790 - Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:1. Summary of test results, indicating compliance with specified requirements.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Specimen warranty.

B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

C. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representingmanufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of metal roofing system to specified requirements.E. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in County's name and are registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures for additional warranty requirements.



B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-appliedexterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidenceof finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specifiedwarranty period of five years from Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofingsystem, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water withinspecified warranty period of 30 years from Date of Substantial Completion.


A. Basis of Design:1. Architectural Metal Roof Panels: R-Mer Span manufactured by Garland.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers; Architectural Metal Roof Panels:(Provided other criteria including warranty meet)

1. ATAS International, Inc; Field-Lok 2 3/8 inch: www.atas.com/#sle.2. Berridge Manufacturing Company; Tee-Lock Panel: www.berridge.com

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Metal Roof Panels: Provide complete roofing assemblies, including roof panels, clips,

fasteners, connectors, and miscellaneous accessories, tested for compliance with the followingminimum standards:1. Structural Design Criteria: Provide panel assemblies designed to safely support design

loads at support spacing indicated, with deflection not to exceed L/180 of span length(L)when tested in accordance with ASTM E1592.

2. Overall: Complete weathertight system tested and approved in accordance with ASTME1592.

3. Wind Uplift: Class 90 wind uplift resistance of UL 580.4. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sq ft at air pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq ft, when

tested according to ASTM E1680.5. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to procedures and

recommended test pressures of ASTM E1646. Perform test immediately following airinfiltration test.

6. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipatedthermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F.

7. Class A fire rating in accordance with UL 7902.03 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Architectural Metal Roof Panels: Provide complete engineered system complying with specifiedrequirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movementof substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.

B. Architectural Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.1. Steel Panels:

a. Zinc-coated steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M; minimum G90 galvanizing.b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 22 gauge, 0.0336 inch.

2. Texture: Smooth.3. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints. Where lapped joints are

unavoidable, space laps so that each sheet spans over three or more supports.4. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 18 inches.

2.04 ATTACHMENT SYSTEMA. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard 16 gauge concealed anchor clips

designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements,including anticipated thermal movement.













2.05 FINISHESA. Fluoropolymer Coil Coating System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat superior

performing organic coatings system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percentPVDF resin, and at least 80 percent of coil coated aluminum surfaces having minimum total dryfilm thickness (DFT) of 0.9 mil, 0.0009 inch; color and gloss as selected by Architect frommanufacturer’s standard line.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings,

closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness,and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation mayoptionally be made of stainless steel.

B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosionresistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam.

C. Sealants:1. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated

polyether/polyurethane.2. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant.

D. Underlayment: Self-adhering rubber-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTMD1970/D1970M; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable release film and polyethylene top surface.1. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M using Desiccant Method (Method A).3. Products:

a. GCP Technologies; Grace Ice and Water Sheild: gcpat.comb. Henry Company; Blueskin RF200: www.henry.comc. Polyglass USA, Inc; Polystick MTS Self-Adhered High Temperature Roof

Underlayment: www.polyglass.usPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properlyprepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other

adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt

sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal

joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panelmanufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal andstructural movement.1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise

recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances.2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods

that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D1970/D1970M

































B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, includingflashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps,equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items.

C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizingtransverse joints except at junction with penetrations.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,

excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean andunmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary

walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing untilcompletion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before Date of SubstantialCompletion.

End of Section





















07 4210 - Composite Framing Support Clip System (CFS)Page 1 of 8

Section 07 4210Composite Framing Support Clip System (CFS)


A. Composite framing support (CFS) system with in-fill insulation integrated with:1. brick veneer over metal lath2. phenolic panels3. cement plaster over metal lath

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 3301 - Submittals: Submittal proceduresB. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures: Project record documents, operation and

maintenance (O&M) data, warranties and bonds.C. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete wall substrateD. Section 04 2000 – Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry unit (CMU) wall substrateE. Section 05 3619 - Composite Metal SheathingF. Section 05 4000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Metal stud substrate support framingG. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt InsulationH. Section 07 2500 – Weather Barriers: Air, water, vapor barrier at exterior wallI. Section 07 4200 – Wall Panels: Wall cladding systemJ. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealantK. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Exterior sheathing

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2015a.

B. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials; www.astm.org)1. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron2. Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 20153. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties

by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 20154. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications; 20135. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation; 20146. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 20157. ASTM C1177/C1177M – Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use

as Sheathing; 20138. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and

Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 20119. ASTM C1396/C1396M – Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014a10. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact

Resistance of Plastics; 2010e111. ASTM D570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 2010e112. ASTM D635 – Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of

Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 201413. ASTM D638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2014



14. ASTM D696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion ofPlastics Between minus 30 degrees C and 30 degrees C with a Vitreous SilicaDilatometer; 2008e1

15. ASTM D695 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 201516. ASTM D790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 201017. ASTM D792 – Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density)

of Plastics by Displacement; 201318. ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means

of a Barcol Impressor; 2013a19. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 201220. ASTM D4385 - Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Thermosetting

Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products; 201321. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials; 2015a22. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;

201523. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 04(2012)

24. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013C. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (www.asce.org)

1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010 withSupplements and Errata

2. ASCE – Structural Plastics Design ManualD. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers

(www.ashrae.org)1. ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings;

20132. ASHRAE 189.1 – Standard for the Design of High-Performance Green Buildings Except

Low-Rise Residential Buildings; 20141.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction of wall cladding support system over substrate indicatedfor proper drainage, flashing, trim, back-up support, soffits, and other related Work.1. Review and finalize construction schedule.2. Verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to

maintain schedule.3. Review means and methods related to installation, including manufacturer's written

instructions.4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment and

attachment to structural support system.5. Review flashings, wall cladding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other

construction that affects this Work.6. Review temporary protection requirements for during and after installation of this Work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated; include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and accessories as necessary for complete fully functioning and assembled system.

C. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit test and inspection reports on each type of wall cladding/veneer system based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by nationally recognized testing agency.



D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.


section, with at least three years of documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years of documented experience.1.07 MOCK-UP

A. Provide one mock-up, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, illustrating connection of sheating, clip system,isulatoin and finish system..

B. Locate where directed.1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original unopened containers and packaging withlabels clearly

B. identifying product name and manufacturer.C. Deliver components and other manufactured items or accessories without damage or

deformation.D. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry, and level interior areas or outdoor areas for limited

duration in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.E. Protect components and auxiliary accessories during transportation, handling, and installation

from moisture, excessive temperatures and other construction operations in accordance withmanufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Handle components in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions andrecommendations, and in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface, edge orcorner damage.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit assembly of this Work in accordance with manufacturer's written installationinstructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for defects in manufacturing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Attach CFS clip system components1. Through exterior sheathing into metal stud framing

B. Install CFS clip system components vertically through exterior sheathing into stud supportsystem as indicatedon drawings in compliance with specified requirements.

C. Attach metal hat channel, mount horizontally to vertical CFS clips, connecting adjacent clips inseries to each other.

2.02 COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT SYSTEMA. Advanced Architectural Products (A2P): SMARTci GreenGirt Clips Composite Framing Support

(CFS) System1. Address: 959 Industrial Drive, Allegan, Michigan 49010.2. Phone: (269) 355-1818; Fax: (866) 858-5568; Website: www.smartcisystems.com



3. Other products shall be pre-submitted and approved products that meet materials andperformance requirements with specified and validated third party testing.

2.03 Performance:A. System Thermal Design: Ensure installed insulation and CFS clip system, sub-framing, clips

and cladding attachment does not have thermal bridging of fasteners or framing that creates acontinuous metal path from exterior surface of insulation to interior face of insulation.1. System thermal design shall meet or exceed thermal design requirements in compliance

with ASHRAE90.1 and ASHRAE 189.1.2. Thermal Performance Test: Provide thermal resistance (R-value) indicated, in compliance

with ASTM C1363, corrected to 15 mph outside and still air inside, with installed conditionincluding fastening and joints.a. Provide efficiency of no less than 97 percent, with a maximum temperature differential

of 18 degrees F from interior wall surface to interior wall cavity and node locationswith a 70 degrees F exterior to interior wall temperature delta.

3. Provide test unit with at least one insulation panel horizontal and vertical joint length andheight of test chamber area.

4. Provide finite element analysis of three dimensional simulation of described wall assemblysealed by professional engineer in compliance with performance requirements andexceeding it by at least 3 percent.

B. Temperature: Comply with structural loading requirements within temperature range of minus55 degrees F to 180 degrees F.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide composite framing support system with fire-testresults indicated as determined by test standard indicated and applied by UL or other testingand inspection agency acceptable to as determined by test standard indicated and applied byUL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Surface Burning Characteristics: In compliance with ASTM E84, for foam insulation, fiber

reinforced polymer (FRP) and interior surfaces as follows:a. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less.b. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less.

2. Intermediate Scale Multistory Fire Test: Comply with NFPA 285 and/or IBC acceptancecriteria for wall height above grade and fire separation distances, when wall type and othernoted conditions require such height above grade and fire separation distances, when walltype and other noted conditions require such testing or compliance with requirements asindicated.

2.04 COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT (CFS) CLIPA. CFS Clip: Provide CFS Clip consisting of polyester and vinyl ester bioresin matrix (FRP) with

recycled materials, fire retardant additives and integral continuous metal inserts the length ofclip profile. Reinforce CFS clip with glass strand rovings used internally for longitudinal(lengthwise) strength and continuous strand glass mats or stitched reinforcements usedinternally for transverse (crosswise) strength.1. Length of Clip; GreenGirt: 6 inch long.2. Depth of Clip; GreenGirt: 1 1/2 inch deep. Verify with insulation thickness and drawings.3. Grid Spacing of CFS Clips; Horizontally & Vertically: 16 by 32 inches, with maximum area

of 4 sq. ft. (576 sq. inches.)4. Provide continuous non-corrosive steel insert for engagement of fasteners, at least 16

gage, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) thick with G90 galvanized coating designation in compliancewith ASTM A653/A653M.a. Anchor sub-girts and other wall cladding support accessories to steel insert set into

and part of CFS.b. Provide screw pullout testing that meets or exceeds

5. Provide integral compression seal in CFS sections to ensure insulation will not dislodge.6. Provide integral anti-siphon grooves on exterior and interior flanges of CFS.7. Provide force distribution zones integrally designed into profile of CFS.



8. Surface Burning Characteristics:a. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.b. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E84.9. Flammability: Comply with ASTM E84.10. Self-Extinguishing: Comply with ASTM D635.11. Profile Visual Requirements: Comply with ASTM D4385.12. Tensile Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise tensile stress in compliance

with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTMD638.

13. Compressive Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise compressive stress incompliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordancewith ASTM D695.

14. Flexural Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise flexural stress incompliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordancewith ASTM D790.

15. 15. Modulus of Elasticity: Engineered to meet performance loading criteria and specifiedsafety factors.

16. Barcol Hardness: 45, in accordance with ASTM D2583.17. Water Absorption: Less than 0.46 percent by weight, within 24 hours, tested in

accordance with ASTM D57018. Density: Within range of 0.062 to 0.070 lbs/cubic inch, in accordance with ASTM D792.19. Lengthwise Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 7.0 x 10 -6 inch/inch/degrees F, in

accordance with ASTM D696.20. Notched Izod Impact, Lengthwise: 24 ft lbs/inch, in accordance with ASTM D256 within

temperature range indicated.21. Notched Izod Impact, Crosswise: 4 ft lbs/inch, in accordance with ASTM D256 within

temperature range indicated.2.05 INSULATION

A. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam (SPF) Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open orclosed cell

B. polyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas.1. Conform to applicable code requirements for flame and smoke, concealment and overcoat

limitations.2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch3. Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 5, minimum, when tested at 1 inch thickness in

accordance with ASTM C518.4. Water Vapor Permeance: Maximum of 2 perms, tested at intended thickness in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method.5. Air Permeance: Maximum of 0.004 cfm/sq ft, tested at intended thickness in accordance

with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283 at 1.5 psf.6. Water Absorption: Maximum of 2 percent by volume, tested in accordance with ASTM

D2842.7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index/smoke developed index of

25/450, tested in accordance with ASTM E84.8. Acceptable Products:

a. BASF Corporation; Product WALLTITE US (www.spf.basf.com)b. Demilec LLC; Product HEATLOK SOY 200 (www.demilec.com)c. Icynene Inc; Product ProSeal Eco (www.icynene.com)d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements

2.06 ASSEMBLYA. Assemble CFS clip system using manufacturer’s standard procedures and processes identical

to tested units and as necessary to comply with performance requirements indicated.



1. Comply with CFS clip system and dimensional and structural requirements as indicated ondrawings.

2. Erect CFS clip system in established sequence in accordance with manufacturer’sstandard installation procedures.

3. Provide spray foam sealant on backside of cantilevered fasteners that completely punctureinsulation layer.

2.07 ACCESSORIESA. Provide accessories necessary for complete CFS clip system including metal closure trim and

transition angles, strapping, tie-in brackets and similar items.B. Horizontal Hat Channels: 16 gauge minimum thickness, hot dipped galvanized with standard

G90 coating designation in compliance with ASTM A653/A653M.C. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, self-tapping and self-drilling screws, bolts, nuts, and other

fasteners as recommended by CFS clip system manufacturer for project application.1. Cladding to CFS Clip System: Use standard self-tapping metal screws.2. CFS System to Metal Stud Wall Framing: Use standard self-tapping metal screws.3. CFS System to Concrete/CMU: Use standard masonry or concrete screw anchors in

predrilled hole.4. CFS System to Wood Framing: Use standard wood screw anchors.5. DO NOT USE powder, air, or gas actuated fasteners or actuated fastener tools. DO NOT

USE impact wrenches when fastening to or from the CFS.D. Weather Resistant Barrier (WRB): Refer to Section 07 2500 for requirements.E. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 9200 for sealant information.


A. Examine substrates, areas of this work, and project conditions with installer present forcompliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrates, CFS system conditions,and other conditions affecting performance of this Work.

B. Examine structural wall framing to ensure that angles, channels, studs, and other structuralsupport members have been installed within alignment tolerances required by CFS systemmanufacturer.

C. Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating CFS system to coordinate actuallocations of penetrations relative to CFS systems joint locations prior to installation.

D. Verify that mechanical and electrical services for exterior walls have been installed and testedand, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials and finishes are dry and ready to receiveinsulation.

E. Proceed with installation only after wall substrate surfaces have been properly prepared andunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by CFS manufacturer for achieving best result

for substrate under project conditions.C. Prepare sub-framing, base angles, sills, furring, and other CFS system members and provide

anchorage in accordance with ASTM C754 for substrate type and wall cladding type inaccordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install CFS clip system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Install system to fill-in exterior spaces without gaps or voids, and do not compress insulation

panels.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces, and insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.



D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of Mechanical/Electrical services withinplane of insulation.

E. Exposed insulation must be protected from open flame.F. Exterior wall insulation is not intended to be left exposed for extended periods of time without

adequate protection.G. Install CFS clip system in compliance with system orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated

on drawings.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Shim and align CFS system within installed tolerances of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-cumulative,level, plumb, and on location lines as indicated.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Ensure that insulation panels are not exposed to moisture.

1. Remove wet insulation panels or allow them to completely dry prior to installation of CFSsystem.

C. Replace damaged insulation prior to Date of Substantial Completion.End of Section


07 4243 - Composite Wall PanelsPage 1 of 6

Section 07 4243Composite Wall Panels


A. Solid Phenolic wall panel system and accessories with drainable and back ventilated rainscreenassembly.1. Assembly sub-frame that allows for adjsutable attachment to structure around a rigid

insulation system of thickness identified on plans and specifications.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing.B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between wall panels and adjacent construction.E. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 509 - Voluntary Test and Classification Method for Drained and Back Ventilated Rain

Screen Wall Cladding Systems; 2014.B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013

Supplements and Errata.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.G. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;

2015.H. ASTM D2244 Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from

Instrumentally Measured Color CoordinatesI. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of

Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used including, but

not limited to, materials, dimensions, accessories, and fasteners.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, panel locations, and configuration.

1. Indicate size, spacing, and location of support and attachment components, connections, types and locations of fasteners.

2. Indicate necessary provisions for structural and thermal movement between wall panel system and adjacent materials.

3. Indicate locations and sizes of penetrations through wall panel system for Architect's approval.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of each style and color panel, 12 by 12 inches in size and showing finish color, sheen, and texture.1. Submit 6 inch to 24 inch long samples of support framing, trim, and corners.



2. Submit 6 by 6 inches, mounted sample of each four-way joint having equal sized panels oneach corner.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, preparation, andinstallation of product.

F. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.G. Installer's Qualification Statement.H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in County's name and registered with manufacturer.I. Warranty Documentation for Installation of Building Rainscreen Assembly: Submit installer

warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in County's name and registered withinstaller.


section, with at least ten years of documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this

section with minimum three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.B. Construct mock-up of each panel type, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide. Include panel materials,

flashings, weep drainage system, attachments, anchors, trim and termination accessories, andperimeter sealant.

C. Locate where directed.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Solid Phenolic Panels:1. Manufactured by Trespa North America.2. Contact: Trespa North America, 62 Greene Street, New York, NY 10012; Telephone: (800)

487-3772; E-mail: [email protected]; Web site:www.TrespaNorthAmerica.com.

3. Product: Trespa Meteon® by Trespa International as represented by Trespa NorthAmerica, Ltd.a. Solid panel manufactured using a combination of high pressure and temperature to

create a flat panel created from thermosetting resins, homogenously reinforced withwood-based fibers and an integrated decorative surface or printed décor.

b. Solid phenolic impregnated kraft paper wall panels with no voids, air spacers orfoamed insulation in the core material.

c. Panel Core: Type FR fire retardant black core.d. Panel Standard Sizes: [11' 11" × 6' 1" (3650 × 1860 mm)] [10 feet × 5 feet (3050 ×

1530 mm)] [8' 4" × 6' 1" (2550 × 1860 mm)] [14’ x 7’ (4,270 x 2130mm)].e. Panel Thickness: minimum 3/8 inch (10 mm)f. Physical Characteristics

1) Modulus of Elasticity: 1,300,000 psi (8000 N/mm2) minimum, ISO 1782) Tensile Strength: 10,100 psi (70 N/mm2) minimum, ISO 527-23) Flexural Strength: 14,500 psi (110 N/mm2) minimum per ISO 1784) Thermal Conductivity: 2.1 BTU/inch/ft2.hr.oF, EN12524



5) Panel Bow: 2mm/m (0.079 inch/39.38 inches)4. Color/Finish: As Identified on the Drawings5. Finish Performance: Electron Beam Cure in conformance with the following general

requirements:a. Humidity Resistance: No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing water

fog at 100% relative humidity and 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) for 3,000 hours,ASTM D-2247.

b. Salt Spray Resistance: Corrosion creepage from scribe line (1/16 inches (1.6mm)max.) and minimum blister rating of 8 within tested specimen field, ASTM B-117.

c. Weather Exposure: Accelerated- 3,000 hours in Atlas Type Weatherometer usingcycle of 30 minutes diminished light and demineralized water with a maximum colorchange of 5 Delta E units from the original color according to ASTM D-2244, with theexception Uni-Colors A12.3.7/ A18.3.5/ A04.1.7 which will not deviate more than 10Delta E Units from the original color according to ASTM D-2244.

d. Color Stability: The decorative surface complies with, classification, 4-5 measuredwith the grey scale according to ISO 105 A02-93 according to test method EN438-2:29.

e. Microbial Characteristics: Will not support micro-organic growth (ISO 846).6. Source Quality

a. Obtain composite panel products from a single manufacturer.b. No substitutions are permitted.

7. Facade Systema. Fabricator:

1) Universe Corporation; Bridgeton, MO; Edison, NJ; Las Vegas, NV; Phone: (314)439-2800; E-mail: [email protected]; Web:www.universefacadesolutions.com. (provide additional extension to accomodateattachment through rigid insulation.

2) TS200 Invisible (Concealed) Fixing with Brackets on Rails by Trespa.3) Substitutions for Equal Systems of Attachment

b. Attachment System: Universe® 9000 with Trespa Meteon (The Universe 9000-285will be provided as applicable to the code requirements.)1) Horizontal system: comprised of horizontally-oriented 2-panel rail extrusions at

horizontal joints (shop-attached to the lower panel); mid-panel horizontalextrusions attached to the wall (spaced based on panel thickness and windload); and fixed brackets (shop-attached) to the backside of the Trespa panels,with those brackets engaging in the horizontal 2-panel rail and mid-panelhorizontal extrusion to support panels. Horizontal extrusions will have apreformed splice to bridge between studs as necessary. Extrusions will be blackin color.

2) 1 1/2” nominal depth (from sheathing to backside of panel) - Attach withextension as required at rigid insulation.

3) Concealed Fastener System: Fasteners shall be non-corrosive and asrecommended by the Fabricator.

4) Perforated Vent Screen: Manufacturer's standard, furnished by fabricator at baseof panels where exposed. To be black in color.

5) Jamb/Systems Closures: Black colored aluminum furnished by fabricator.6) Vertical joints will be open. An (optional) black-colored aluminum joint closure

affixed to the back side of the panel is available for vertical joints. Horizontaljoints have the black extrusion recessed. (For the vertical joint closure, if‘optional’ is not edited out, it is assumed to be excluded.)

7) System is designed for wind load as indicated on architectural or structuraldrawings. If wind load is not indicated in the specification or on the drawings,assumed to be 90 mph. (Change to appropriate wind load.)

8. Fabricate wall panels and accessory items in accordance with manufacturer’s toleranceand performance recommendations.



a. Fabricate wall panels to the size, configuration and layout as shown on approved shopdrawing submittals.1) Form panel lines, breaks and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces that are

free from warp or buckle.2) If field measurements are required, they will be supplied to the panel Fabricator

by others at no expense to the panel fabricator. All schedules will be based onthe later occurrence, shop drawing approval or approval of field measurements.

3) Where final dimensions cannot be established by field measurements, provideallowance for field adjustment as recommended by the fabricator. Fieldfabrication shall be allowed where necessary but kept to an absolute minimum.All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when possible.

4) Panels shall be marked to coordinate with the approved shop drawings.5) Panels using materials with a grain or directionality shall be fabricated to run in

the same direction when installed unless otherwise specified or illustrated onapproved shop drawings.

6) Fasteners in profile shall accommodate thermal expansion/contraction of metaland not interfere with panel application.

7) Panel faces shall have shop-chamfered/eased edge front edge treatment withsquare cut. Square cut panels without front side edge treatment not acceptable.

9. Performance Requirementsa. Structural Performance (ASTM E-330).

1) Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based upon thelocal building code, but in no case less than 15 pounds per square foot (psf).Wind load testing shall be done in accordance with this standard to obtain thefollowing results.(a) Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not

exceed L/175.(b) Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of framing

members shall not exceed L/175 or ¾” whichever is less: At 1-1/2" timesdesign pressure, permanent deflection of framing members shall notexceed L/100 of span length and components shall not experience failure orgross distortion.

b. Fire Performance:1) Maximum flamespread index of 5 per ASTM E84 [(Type I, Class A)].2) Smoke Development: Less than 450, ASTM E84.3) Ignition Temperature: Greater than 650 degrees F (350 degrees C) above

ambient, ASTM D1929.4) Burning Classification: CC1 or CC2, ASTM D635.5) When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding

assembly shall show no degradation of the rating of Fire Resistant Assemblies,ASTM E119.

6) When required for compliance with the local building codes, the wall claddingassembly including cladding and non-cladding elements such as, but not limitedto, specific weather resistive barriers and/or exterior insulation materials, shallmeet the performance requirements of NFPA-285. Performance shall bedetermined by actual testing in accordance with NFPA-285.

7) When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall claddingassembly shall not ignite when exposed to a radiant heat energy source,NFPA-268.


A. Examine substrate, clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would bedetrimental to proper installation.



B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements prior torelease for fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fieldmeasurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays

C. Verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed.D. Inspect products thoroughly prior to installation. Do not install any product which may have been

damaged in shipment or appears to have a damaged or irregular finish.E. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.F. Visually check that air and moisture barrier behind panel system appears to be installed

correctly before proceeding or notify the General Contractor if there are deficiencies that mustbe addressed before commencing the panel installation.

G. Confirm exterior sheathing is plumb and level, with no deflection greater than 1/4" inch (6mm) in20 feet (6096mm).

H. If substrate preparation is responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Touch-up field cut edges before installing.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Sheet Metal Flashing: Install in accordance with wall panel manufacturer's instructions and as

indicated on drawings.B. Wall Panels:

1. Install panel system plumb and level and accurately spaced in accordance withmanufacturer’s recommendations and approved submittals and shop drawings.

2. Do not install panels or component parts which are observed to be defective or damagedincluding, but not limited to: warped, bowed, abraded, scratched, and broken members.

3. Do not cut or trim component parts during installation in a manner that would damage thefinish, decrease the strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance.Return component parts which require alteration to the shop for re-fabrication orreplacement.

4. Panels with grain or directionality are to be installed in same direction, unless otherwisenoted on the approved shop drawings.

5. Adjust final panel installation so that all joints are true and even throughout the installation.Panels out of plane shall be adjusted with the surrounding panels to minimize anyimperfection.

6. Accessory Items: Install accessory items with fastening method appropriate for use withadjoining construction as indicated on drawings and as recommended by the Fabricator orManufacturer.

7. Anchor panels and sub-framing securely per engineering recommendations and inaccordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary movement and structuralsupport.

8. Repair panels with minor damage. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repairas a direct result of the panel installation. After installation, panel repair and replacementshall become the responsibility of the General Contractor.

9. Fasten wall panel system with fasteners approved for use with supporting substrate.10. Provide for necessary structural movement as indicated on the approved shop drawings.11. For exterior applications, comply with local codes and structural engineer's fastening

calculations along with manufacturer's recommendations for fastener spacing.12. Do not block vertical airflow at windows, doors, eaves, or at the base of the building.

Airflow shall be continuous from bottom to top providing air movement behind each panelconsistent with standard system depth. Air flow behind the panels is critical to theperformance of rain screen constructions.



3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Clean installed products in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove constructiondebris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

B. After the installation cleaning, cleaning during construction shall become the responsibility of theGeneral Contractor.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

End of Section


07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane RoofingPage 1 of 10

Section 07 5400Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing


A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane.B. Flashings.C. Roofing cant strips, stack boots, roofing expansion joints, and walkway pads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal InsulationC. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets and coping.D. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drains, sumps, hoppers, and _____.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM D4434/D4434M - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing; 2012.B. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.C. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and

Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011.D. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; 2007.E. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling requiredwith related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, vapor retarder,

surfacing, and fasteners.C. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating insulation,

colored coating, and deck board.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity,

wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given.F. Manufacturer's qualification statement.G. Installer's qualification statement.H. Warranty Documentation:

1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in County's name and registered with manufacturer.

2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with warranty conditions for waterproof membrane.


section with minimum three years of documented experience.



B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with at leastthree years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and

labels intact.B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.C. Ensure storage and staging of materials does not exceed static and dynamic load-bearing

capacities of roof decking.D. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.B. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be

weatherproofed the same day.C. Schedule applications so that no partially completed sections of roof are left exposed at end of

workday.1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures for additional warranty requirements.B. Contractor Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material

that shows manufacturing defects within 2 years after installation.C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing

that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes.1. Warranty Term: 30 years.2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.3. Exceptions are not Permitted:

a. Damage due to roof traffic.b. Damage due to wind speed greater than 56 miles per hour but less than 90 miles per

hour.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Thermoplastic Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Membrane Roofing Materials:1. Sika Corporation Roofing; Sarnafil PVC: usa.sika.com/sarnafil/#sle.2. Garland Industries,; 3800 E. 91st St., Cleveland, OH 44105. Phone: 216-641-7500.

www.garlandind.com - Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) Sheet Membrane System.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONSA. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation.B. Roofing Assembly Requirements:

1. Roof Covering External Fire Resistance Classification: UL (FRD) Class A.2. Factory Mutual Classification: Class 1 and windstorm resistance of 1-90, in accordance

with FM DS 1-28.2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS

A. Manufacturer: Sarnafil G410 polyester reinforced membrane with a lacquer coating as astandard of quality

B. Location: All low slope roofsC. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434-96 (or latest revisions), “Standard for Polyvinyl

Chloride Sheet Roofing,” Classification: Type III.1. Sarnafil G410, 80 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic membrane with polyester reinforcement.



Or:2. Garland Thermoplastic Membrane: 80-mil ethylene interpolymer (EIP) membrane,

reinforced with a 7.5 oz knitted polyester fabric as manufactured by Garland Industries,fleece-backed, exceeding all requirements outlined in ASTM D 4434 – StandardSpecification for Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) Sheet Membranes.

D. Color Membrane:1. EnergySmart (TAN), initial reflectivity of 0.72, initial emissivity 0.90, solar reflective index

(SRI) of >104. All other flashings and membranes to be of a matching color.E. Typical Physical Properties:PropertiesASTM Test

1. Reinforcing Material: Polyester-2. Overall Thickness, min., inches (mm): As listed Above. D7513. Breaking Strength, min., lbf/in. (KN/m):230 (40.0)D7514. Elongation at Break, min.20%D7515. Seam strength*, min. (% of breaking strength):85D7516. Retention of Properties After Heat Aging:-D3045

a. Breaking Strength, min., (% of original):95D751b. Elongation, min., (% of original):90D751

7. Tearing Strength, min., lbf (N):50 (220)D10048. Low Temperature Bend, -40°F (-40°C):PassD21369. Accelerated Weathering Test (UV exposure):10,000 HoursG154

a. Cracking (7x magnification):None-b. Discoloration (by observation):Negligible-c. Crazing (7 x magnification):None-

10. Linear Dimensional Change:0.1%D120411. Weight Change After Immersion in Water:2.5%D57012. Static Puncture Resistance, 33 lbf (15 kg):PassD560213. Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 14.7 ft-lbf (20 J):PassD563514. Fleece backed membrane

2.04 FLASHING MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIESA. Flashing Material - Note: All Flashing touching thermoplastic roof system is to be provided as

part of this specification by the roofing contractor for a complete system.1. Wall/Curb Flashing

a. Sarnafil G410 Membrane1) A fiberglass reinforced membrane adhered to approved substrate using

Sarnacol adhesive. Consult manufacturer for adhesive options and additionalinformation.

b. Sarnaclad1) A PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety

of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 25-gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheetwith a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side.The dimensions of Sarnaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 m x3.0m). Consult manufacturer for additional information.

2. Perimeter Edge Flashinga. Sarnaclad

1) A PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a varietyof shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 25 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheetwith a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side.The dimensions of Sarnaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 m x3.0m). Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information.

3. Miscellaneous Flashinga. Reglets : (Sarnareglet -Locate where roofing edge is not covered by counterflashing)

1) A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls andlarge curbs. Sarnareglet is produced from 6063-T5, 0.10 inch - 0.12-inch (2.5



mm - 3.0 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Sarnareglet has a 2¼-inch (57 mm)deep profile, and is provided in 10-foot (3 m) lengths. Use prefabricatedSarnareglet mitered inside and outside corners where walls intersect. ConsultProduct Data Sheet for additional information.

b. Sarnastack1) Provide fabricated flashing to match roof color to match sarnastack requirements2) A prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.048-inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick

Sarnafil G410 membrane. Available in five (4) different sizes. Consult ProductData Sheet for sizes and additional information.

c. Sarnacorner1) Prefabricated outside and inside flashing corners made of 0.060-inch (60 mil/1.5

mm) thick membrane that is heat-welded to membrane or Sarnaclad baseflashings. Sarnacorner is available in 2 outside sizes (5-inch and 8½-inchdiameter/127 mm and 215 mm) and 1 inside size. Consult Product Data Sheetfor additional information.

d. Multi-Purpose Sealant1) A proprietary sealant used at flashing terminations. Consult Product Data Sheet

for additional information.B. INSULATION AND COVER BOARD

1. Insulationa. Refer to Specification Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation

2. Dens-Deck Prime®a. A siliconized gypsum, fire-tested hardboard with glass-mat facers. ¼ Dens-Deck is

provided in a 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) board size.C. MEMBRANE ADHESIVE

1. Water-based 2121 Adhesive: A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to thehorizontal or near-horizontal substrate.a. Appliecation Rate for Dens-Deck Prime are as follows:

1) Substrate Rate - gallons/100 ft : 1.502) Membrane Rate - gallons/100ft: 03) Total Rate - gallons/100ft: 1.50

b. There is a significant increase in drying time due to an increase in humidity and/or adecrease in temperature. Do not install when outdoor or substrate temperaturesduring drying period are expected to fall below 40°F.

c. Do not allow 2121 adhesive to skin-over or surface-dry prior to installation ofmembrane.

d. Use a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press themembrane into the adhesive layer.

D. INSULATION AND COVERBOARD FASTENERS1. Fastener #12

a. #12 corrosion-resistant fastener used with Sarnaplates to attach insulation boards tosteel or wood roof decks. Sarnafastener #12 has a modified buttress thread, a shankdiameter of approximately 0.168 inch and a thread diameter of approximately 0.214inch. The driving head has a diameter of approximately 0.435 inch with a #3 Phillipsrecess for positive engagement. Consult Product Data Sheet for additionalinformation.

E. Coverboard Plate1. Used with various Sarnafasteners to attach insulation boards to roof deck. Sarnaplate is a

3 inch square or round, 26 gauge stamping of SAE 1010 steel with an AZ 55 Galvalumecoating. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information.

F. WALKWAY PROTECTION1. Crossgrip Walkway

a. Rolled-out walkway protection mat used to protect Sarnafil roofing membrane frommechanical abuse. Crossgrip Walkway is 9/16 inch (14 mm) thick flexible PVC with a



heavily textured surface. Crossgrip Walkway is loose laid on top of completedSarnafil roof assemblies. Where design wind speeds exceed 94 mph (150 km/h) thewalkway must be secured with loops of Sarnafil membrane welded to the field sheet. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information.

G. MISCELLANEOUS RELATED MATERIALS1. Aluminum Tape

a. A 2-inch (50 mm) wide pressure-sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layerbetween small areas of asphalt contamination and the membrane and as abond-breaker under the coverstrip at Sarnaclad joints.

2. Sealing Tape Stripa. Compressible foam with pressure-sensitive adhesive on one side. Used with metal

flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry.3. Multi-Purpose Tape

a. A high performance sealant tape with used with metal flashings as a preventivemeasure against air and wind blown moisture entry.

4. Sarnasolva. A high quality solvent cleaner used for the general cleaning of residual asphalt, scuff

marks, etc., from the membrane surface. Sarnasolv is also used daily to clean seamareas prior to hot-air welding in tear off or dirty conditions or if the membrane is notwelded the same day it is unrolled. Consult Product Data Sheet for additionalinformation.

H. SEALANTS1. Sarnafil Multi-Purpose Sealant (for termination details).2. Sika 1A

I. MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS1. All fasteners, anchors, nails, straps, bars, etc. shall be post-galvanized steel, aluminum or

stainless steel. Mixing metal types and methods of contact shall be assembled in such amanner as to avoid galvanic corrosion. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonryshall be expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins. All concrete fasteners andanchors shall have a minimum embedment of 1¼ inch (32 mm) and shall be approved forsuch use by the fastener manufacturer. All miscellaneous wood fasteners and anchorsused for flashings shall have a minimum embedment of 1 inch (25 mm) and shall beapproved for such use by the fastener manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect the roof areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correctconditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Inspect roof drain andoutlets to insure proper elevation to permit free flow of water into such drain and prevent waterdams at rim. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATIONA. The Roofing Subcontractor shall comply with all reasonably applicable requirements of the

Owner's safety and security requirements and with all applicable Federal, State, Local and Cityregulations, laws, and ordinances.

B. The Roofing Subcontractor shall provide coverings to protect building and ground surfaces in allareas in which work is being performed and the surfaces to be protected in that location.Protection requirements shall include those surfaces over or past which materials, includingpumped adhesives, are being transported.

C. The surface of the deck must be broom clean, dry, properly secured and free of defects.D. Other Conditions: Contractor shall verify that the concrete roof substrata are smooth, dry, clean

and free from sharp projections, properly graded to roof outlets and that all metal fittings are inplace prior to start of installation of insulation and roofing.



3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA. Application of roofing materials shall not be performed when weather conditions interfere with

good application practices. Materials shall not be stored or applied on damp surfaces or in thepresence of rain or snow.

B. Installed materials shall be protected from repetitive traffic with plywood or other rigid materials.Unfinished perimeters of the roof system shall be sealed with temporary water cutoffs.Materials used in constructing temporary cutoffs shall be removed before the application offinished assemblies.

C. Roofing may be installed under certain adverse weather conditions such as extremes of highand low temperatures or high humidity conditions, but only after consulting the Manufacturersince special precautions may have to be applied.

D. Only as much new roofing as can be made watertight each day shall be installed each day. Thisincludes all flashing work.

E. Precautions shall be taken to prevent wind blow-off or wind damage during the course of theroofing application. This may necessitate additional attachment of temporary construction.

F. Temporary water stops shall be installed at the end of each workday. These temporary waterstops shall be removed at the start of the next workday and disposed of properly.

G. Do not install the roofing membrane in direct contact with any products containing asphalt, coaltar pitch, creosote, or other harmful materials.

H. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing interior building areas to the effectsof inclement weather. The building and its contents shall be protected against all reasonablerisks. Arrange work sequences to avoid use of newly roofing for storage, walking surfaces andequipment movement. Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and barriers tosegregate the work areas and prevent damage to adjacent areas. If excessive foot traffic overnewly installed membrane is necessary, contractor shall provide plywood or felt protection toprevent damage.

3.04 INSULATION AND DENSDECK INSTALLATIONA. Install the insulation, tapered insulation and protection board according to manufacturer's

instructions. Stagger all joints 12 inches minimum in each direction. Adhere the new insulationand protection board over the existing deck.

B. Neatly cut the insulation and protection board to fit around penetrations and projections.C. Do not install more insulation and protection board than can be covered with single-ply

membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather.3.05 INSTALLATION MEMBRANE

A. Inspect the surface of the protection board prior to installation of the new roof membrane. Thesubstrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no surface roughness orcontamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged boards shall be removed and replaced.

B. Water-based 2121 Adhesive:1. Pour over the properly installed and prepared absorbent substrate, 2121 adhesive out of

the pail and spread using notched squeegees. Apply the adhesive at a rate according toManufacturer's requirements (no adhesive is placed on back of the membrane). Do notallow the formation of a film on the surface of the adhesive. Carefully unrolled into the wetadhesive while the edges are overlapped by 3 inches. Press the membrane firmly into theadhesive layer with a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in twodirections.

2. Do not use 2121 adhesive if temperatures below 40° F are expected during application orsubsequent drying time.

3. No adhesive in seam areas. Apply to all of the membrane in the same manner.3.06 HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS

A. General



1. All seams shall be hot air welded. Seam overlaps should be 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) widefor Sarnadisc and Sarnadisc-XPN, and 7 inches (177.8 mm) wide for Sarnadisc-MAXLoadwhen automatic machine-welding and 4 inches (100 mm) wide when hand-welding, exceptfor certain details.

2. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Sarnafil. All mechanics intendingto use the equipment shall have successfully completed a training course provided by aSarnafil Technical Representative prior to welding.

3. All membrane to be welded shall be clean and dry.B. Hand-Welding

1. Hand-welded seams shall be completed in two stages. Hot-air welding equipment shall beallowed to warm up for at least one minute prior to welding.

2. The back edge of the seam shall be welded with a narrow but continuous weld to preventloss of hot air during the final welding.

3. The nozzle shall be inserted into the seam at a 45-degree angle to the edge of themembrane. Once the proper welding temperature has been reached and the membranebegins to "flow," the hand roller is positioned perpendicular to the nozzle and pressedlightly. For straight seams, the 1½ inch (40 mm) wide nozzle is recommended for use.For corners and compound connections, the ¾ inch (20 mm) wide nozzle shall be used.

C. Machine Welding1. Machine welded seams are achieved by the use of Sarnafil's automatic welding

equipment. When using this equipment, Sarnafil's instructions shall be followed and localcodes for electric supply, grounding and over current protection observed. Dedicatedcircuit house power or a dedicated portable generator is recommended. No otherequipment shall be operated off the generator.

2. Metal tracks may be used over the deck membrane and under the machine welder tominimize or eliminate wrinkles.

D. Quality Control of Welded Seams1. The Applicator shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver.

Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the weldingoperation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark gray material fromthe underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be madedaily by the Applicator to locations as directed by the Owner's Representative or Sarnafil'srepresentative. One-inch (25 mm) wide cross-section samples of welded seams shall betaken at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of themembrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicatorat no extra cost to the Owner.

3.07 MEMBRANE FLASHINGSA. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No

temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner'sRepresentative and Sarnafil. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. Ifany water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall beremoved and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible,dry, smooth, and solvent-resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are notdrawn into the building.

B. Sarnacol Adhesive for Membrane Flashings1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, Sarnacol adhesive shall be

applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The Sarnacol adhesiveshall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Onlyan area, which can be completely covered in the same day's operations, shall be flashed.The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller.

2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels ofmembrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels asrequired by welding techniques.



C. Install Sarnabar/Sarnacord according to the Detail Drawings with approved fasteners into thestructural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Sarnabars may be required by Sarnafilat the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and valleys according toSarnafil's details. Sarnafil's requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall befollowed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by Sarnafil prior to installation.

D. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches (0.2 m) above roofing level unless otherwiseaccepted in writing by the Owner's Representative and Sarnafil Technical Department.

E. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exteriorcorners and miters shall be cut and hot air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contactwith the Sarnafil membrane.

F. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter-flashed top edge withSarnastop at 6-8 inches (0.15-0.20 m) on center.

G. Sarnafil flashings shall be terminated according to Sarnafil recommended details.H. All adhered flashings that exceed 30 inches (0.75 m) in height or that of the perimeter Sarnabar

spacings shall receive additional securement. Consult Sarnafil Technical Department forsecurement methods.

I. All mechanically attached flashings that exceed 18 inches (0.46 m) in height shall receiveadditional securement. Consult Sarnafil Technical Department for securement methods.

3.08 METAL FLASHINGSA. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable

requirements of the following:1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 (latest issue).2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - latest

issue.B. Metal, other than that provided by Sarnafil, is not covered under the Sarnafil warranty.C. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition

exists daily.D. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal thermal

expansion and contraction.E. Metal joints shall be watertight.F. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate the

nailer/blocking a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm).G. Airtight and continuous metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips are to

be fastened 12 inches (0.3 m) on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall.H. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches (100 mm).I. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by 1½-inch (38 mm) minimum and

shall be securely sealed from air entry.3.09 SARNACLAD METAL BASE FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL

A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. Notemporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner'sRepresentative and Sarnafil. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific dates.If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings,the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense.

B. Sarnaclad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Detail Drawings.1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post

galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches (100 mm) on center staggered. Fastenersshall penetrate the nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normalthermal expansion and contraction.



C. Adjacent sheets of Sarnaclad shall be spaced ¼ inch (6 mm) apart. The joint shall be coveredwith 2-inch (50 mm) wide aluminum tape. A 4-inch minimum (100 mm) wide strip of Sarnafilflashing membrane shall be hot air welded over the joint.

3.10 TEMPORARY CUT-OFFA. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a

watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed toprovide a 100% watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even byinstalling partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop.The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed totravel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in acontinuous heavy application of sealant as described in Section 2.10. When work resumes, thecontaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulationfillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of thesematerials shall be used in the new work.

B. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Applicator shall providethe labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition.

C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall beremoved and replaced at the Applicator's expense.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.B. County will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.

Contractor to provide temporary construction and materials for testing.C. Provide daily on-site attendance of roofing and insulation manufacturer's representative during

installation of this work.3.12 CLEANING

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures for additional requirements.B. See Section [] for additional requirements.C. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.D. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of

surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions.E. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.

3.13 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable

materials.End of Section


07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Page 1 of 2

Section 07 6200Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, sheetmetal roofing, exterior penetrations, _______, and other items indicated in Schedule.

B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 4114 - Preformed Metal Roof PanelsB. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and FramesD. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum Framed StorefrontsE. Section 23 0000 - Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning : Roof curbs for mechanical

equipment.F. Section 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical : Flashing sleeves and collars for

electrical items protruding through roofing membrane.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

B. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,

flashings, terminations, and installation details.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements andstandard details, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with five (5)

years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slopemetal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gauge,(0.0239 inch) thick base metal.

B. Note: Flashing directly contacting the thermoplastic roof membrane is to be flashed with cladmetal by the roofing manufacture.

2.02 FABRICATIONA. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.


07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Page 2 of 2

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with

sealant.F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form

drip.G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing . Return and brake edges.

2.03 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATIONA. Gutters: SMACNA (ASMM), Rectangular profile.B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10

years in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM).D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements.2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.

E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

F. Seal metal joints.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, regletsin place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.C. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only wherepermitted..

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.C. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with concealed fasteners.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.

END OF SECTION


07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and DownspoutsPage 1 of 2

Section 07 7123Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts


A. Galvanized steel gutters and downspouts.B. Precast concrete splash pads.C. Sheet metal splash pans.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 4114 - Metal Roof PanelsB. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.C. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting of metal surfaces.D. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a

storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods,

locations, and installation details.C. Samples: Submit 6 samples, 12 inch long, illustrating component design, finish, color, and

configuration.1. Samples are to be used by painting contractor to provide samples of special finishing

copper paint.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope todrain.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inchthick base metal.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Gutters: Profile as indicated.

1. To match existingB. Downspouts: Profile as indicated and to match existing.C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. To match existing2. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.3. Gutter Supports: Brackets.


07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and DownspoutsPage 2 of 2

4. Downspout Supports: Brackets.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Splash Pans: Same metal type as downspouts, formed to 18x30 inches size; rolled sides 1 inchhigh for inverted pan placement.

B. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days,with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

C. Strainer Guard: Install "beehive"-type strainer-guard at downspouts, removable for cleaning.2.04 FABRICATION

A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of

distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.D. Hem exposed edges of metal.E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective

backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Sheet Metal: Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to

downspouts and accessories.C. Slope gutters 1/16 inch per foot, ___ percent minimum.D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with

neutralizing solution and rinse with water.End of Section


07 7200 - Roof AccessoriesPage 1 of 2

Section 07 7200Roof Accessories


A. Roof hatches.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Roof access laddersB. Section 07212 - Board and Batt InsulationC. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic MembraneD. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet

metal.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Maintenance requirements.

C. Warranty Documentation:1. Submit manufacturer warranty.2. Ensure that forms have been completed in County's name and registered with

manufacturer.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS

A. Roof Hatch Manufacturers:1. Bilco Company; Type TB (various types and special size): www.bilco.com/#sle.2. O'Keeffe's3. Milcor, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.

B. Roof Hatches and Smoke Vents: Factory-assembled aluminum frame and cover, complete withoperating and release hardware.1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions as indicated on

drawings.3. Thermally Broken Hatches: Added insulation to frame and cover; available in each

manufacturer's standard, single leaf sizes; special sizes available upon request4. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 36 inches.

C. Frames and Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roofflashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting.


07 7200 - Roof AccessoriesPage 2 of 2

1. Material: Mill finished aluminum, 11 gauge, 0.0907 inch thick.2. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard; 3 inch rigid polyisocyanurate, located on inside hollow

curb.D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.

1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load.2. Material: Mill finished aluminum; outer cover 11 gauge, 0.0907 inch thick, liner 0.04 inch

thick.3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard 3 inch rigid polyisocyanurate.4. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.

E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required bymanufacturer.1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that

automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.



preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving acceptable

results for applicable substrate under project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing systemweather-tight integrity.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Clean installed work to like-new condition.B. Protect installed products until completion of project.C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

End of Section


07 9200 - Joint SealantsPage 1 of 6

Section 07 9200Joint Sealants


A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants.C. Joint backings and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with water-resistive

barriers.B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant.C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.D. Section 23 0000 - Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning: Duct sealants

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by

Means of a Durometer; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).B. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.C. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete; 2014.D. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.F. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.G. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008

(Reapproved 2012).H. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants; 2014.I. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005

(Reapproved 2010).J. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;

2015.K. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition,


A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be

used, that includes the following.1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time,

and color availability.2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.4. Substrates the product should not be used on.5. Substrates for which use of primer is required.6. Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended backing

materials and tools.C. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color

cards showing standard colors available for selection.



D. Samples for Verification: Where custom sealant color is specified, obtain directions fromArchitect and submit at least two physical samples for verification of color of each requiredsealant.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at

least three years of documented experience.C. Work to be performed by workers thoroughly trained and familiar with the requirements of joint

sealer1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section 014000.

B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.C. Locate where directed.D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve

watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging orslumping.1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com2. Dow: www.dow.com3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com4. Master Builders Solutions: www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us/#sle.5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com6. QUIKRETE Companies: www.quikrete.com7. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com8. Sika Corporation: www.usa.sika.com/#sle.9. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com10. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com

B. Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form asmooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint.1. Dow: www.dow.com2. Master Builders Solutions: www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com4. QUIKRETE Companies: www.quikrete.com5. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com6. Sika Corporation: www.usa.sika.com7. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com8. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com



2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONSA. Scope:

1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unlessspecifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are notlimited to, the following items.a. Wall expansion and control joints.b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.c. Joints between different exposed materials.d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry.e. Other joints indicated below.

2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interiorjoints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.b. In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices,

piping, and other openings; between wall/ceiling and other construction; and otherflanking sound paths.

c. Other joints indicated below.3. Do not seal the following types of joints.

a. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some othertype of sealing device.

b. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to besealed.

c. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.d. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.

B. Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.1. Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, non-curing.2. Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels: Butyl rubber, non-curing.3. Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling polyurethane

"traffic-grade" sealant.4. Wiring Slots in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling epoxy sealant.

C. Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated.1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant.2. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane sealant for continuous liquid

immersion.3. Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Non-sag polyurethane "non-traffic-grade" sealant suitable for

continuous liquid immersion.4. Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant

silicone sealant; white.5. In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant.6. Narrow Control Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs: Self-leveling epoxy sealant.

D. Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms, restrooms, kitchens, food service areas, food processingareas, and _______; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, food service equipment,countertops, cabinets, other similar items, and ______.

E. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or"acoustical".

2.03 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERALA. Colors: As indicated on drawings or as selected by Architect from manufactuerer's full color

line.2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS

A. Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected towithstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum.



2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested inaccordance with ASTM C1248.

3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

B. Type ___ - Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; singlecomponent, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Color: White.

C. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; notexpected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

D. Polyurethane Sealant for Continuous Water Immersion: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M andA; single or multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous waterimmersion; suitable for traffic exposure when recessed below traffic surface.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 35 percent, minimum.

E. Non-Sag "Traffic-Grade" Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; singleor multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous water immersion andtraffic without the necessity to recess sealant below traffic surface.1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.2. Hardness Range: 40 to 50, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.

F. Epoxy Sealant: ASTM C881/C881M, Type I and III, Grade 3, Class B and C; two-component.1. Hardness Range: 65 to 75, Shore D, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661.2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

G. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining,non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use.1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

H. Acrylic Latex Sealant, Water-Based: ASTM C834 Type OP - Opaque and Grade Minus 18degrees C (0 degrees F); ASTM C920 Class 100/50 for white and colors, and Class 25/25 forclear.1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

I. Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C834; for use as acoustical sealant and in firestopping systemsfor expansion joints and through penetrations.1. Fire Rated System: Complies with UL 263 and ASTM E119 with UL fire resistance

classifications.J. Non-Curing Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based, single component, non-sag, non-skinning,

non-hardening, non-bleeding; non-vapor-permeable; intended for fully concealed applications.2.05 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS

A. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single ormulti-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure; not expected towithstand continuous water immersion .1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.2. Color: Gray.

B. Flexible Polyurethane Foam: Single-component, gun grade, and low-expanding.C. Semi-Rigid Self-Leveling Epoxy Joint Filler: Epoxy or epoxy/polyurethane copolymer; intended

for filling cracks and control joints not subject to significant movement; rigid enough to supportconcrete edges under traffic.1. Composition: Multi-component, 100 percent solids by weight.2. Durometer Hardness: Minimum of 85 for Type A or 35 for Type D, after seven days when

tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.3. Joint Width, Minimum: 1/8 inch.




2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,

compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealantmanufacturers for specific application.

B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to andrecommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.

C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesiveresidue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.

D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealantmanufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant

work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation ofsurfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specificdimensions are indicated.

E. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without

getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.G. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended

temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unlessmanufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.

H. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tapeimmediately after tooling sealant surface.

I. Concrete Floor Joint Filler: After full cure, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab.3.04 POST-OCCUPANCY

A. Post-Occupancy Inspection: Perform visual inspection of entire length of project sealant jointsat a time that joints have opened to their greatest width; i.e. at low temperature in thermal cycle.Report failures immediately and repair.

End of Section


08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and FramesPage 1 of 4

Section 08 1113Hollow Metal Doors and Frames


A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.C. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.D. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood DoorsB. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.D. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.E. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMSA. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.B. ASTM - American Society for Teesting Materials.C. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.D. SDI: Steel Door Institute.E. UL: Underwriters Laboratories.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel

Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces

for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.

G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

H. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne SoundTransmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.

I. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.J. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014.K. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.L. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.



M. NAAMM HMMA 805 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Hollow Metal Doors andFrames; 2012.

N. NAAMM HMMA 810 - Hollow Metal DoorsO. NAAMM HMMA 820 - Hollow Metal FramesP. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.Q. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; 2007.R. NAAMM HMMA 850 - Fire-Protection and Smoke Control Rated Hollow Metal Door and Frame

Products; 2014.S. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;

2006.T. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.U. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.V. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2013.W. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.X. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,


A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening and each different wall opening condition, showing elevations, glazing, anchorage, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.F. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.G. Installer's Qualification Statement.


section, with not less than three years documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years of documented experience.C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products

specified.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specifiedrequirements.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion andadverse effects on factory applied painted finish.


A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company; .: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.2. De La Fontaine Inc: www.delafontaine.com/#sle.



3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand; .: www.allegion.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steelcomplying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTMA1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTMA1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned.4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush.

B. Hollow Metal Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.B. Type 1, Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal.C. Type 2, Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated:

1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines:a. Comply with guidelines of NAAMM HMMA 860 for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.b. Performance Level 1 - Light Duty, in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 805.c. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.032 inch, minimum.

2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal.D. Type 3, Fire-Rated Doors:

1. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA252 ("positive pressure fire tests").a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR).b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal.2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door inaccordance with applicable door frame requirements.

B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded. Steelcraft F and FN series1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance

with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.D. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.E. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and

as indicated on drawings.2.05 FINISHES

A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A1011/A1011M












































2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components;

factory-installed.B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100.

1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior

to installation.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and relatedrequirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100.E. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 8000.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame

standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

3.06 SCHEDULEA. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.

End of Section



































08 1416 - Flush Wood DoorsPage 1 of 4

Section 08 1416Flush Wood Doors


A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire-rated, non-rated, and acoustical.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0;

2016.C. NAAWS - North American Architecural Woodwork Standards, latest edition.D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,

blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 6 by 12 inch in size cut from top corner of door.

E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs.

F. Warranty, executed in County's name.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section, with not less than three years of documented experience.1. Company with at least one project within past five years with value of woodwork within at

least 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this project.B. Quality Certification:

1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that installed work will comply withAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or gradesspecified.

2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance

with specified requirements.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging, and inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic; do not store in damp or

wet areas or areas where sunlight might bleach veneer; seal top and bottom edges with tintedsealer if stored more than one week, and break seal on site to permit ventilation.



1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.C. Provide warranty for the following term:

1. Interior Doors: Life of installation.D. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:1. Western Oregon Door: www.oregondoor.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS A. Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance withAWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

2. Quality Level: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural WoodworkQuality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.1. Provide solid core doors at each location.

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORESA. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as

indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardwarewithout through-bolting.

B. Sound-Rated Doors: Equivalent to type, with particleboard core (PC) construction as requiredto achieve STC rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.

2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTIONA. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with

hardware requirements and dimensions.E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge

clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.05 FINISHES - WOOD VENEER DOORSA. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -

Finishing for grade specified and as follows:B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Hollow Metal Door Frames: See Section 08 1113.B. Door Hardware: See Section 08 7100.




A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.

B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.B. Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION


08 3100 - Access Doors and PanelsPage 1 of 2

Section 08 3100Access Doors and Panels


A. Wall and ceiling mounted access units.B. Access door and frame units, non-fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field paint finish.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of

adjoining work.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Access Doors:1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc; Product ____:

www.milcorinc.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSA. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground

flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to beinstalled in.

2.04 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED ACCESS UNITSA. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.

1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel.2. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet.3. Door/Panel Size: As indicated on the drawings.4. Hardware:

a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.b. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin.c. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch.

5. Galvanized, hot dipped finish.6. Prime coat with alkyd primer.7. Finish: One coat baked enamel, match adjacent surface color.


A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


08 3100 - Access Doors and PanelsPage 2 of 2

B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary.

End of Section


08 3513 - Four-Fold DoorsPage 1 of 4

Section 08 3513Four-Fold Doors


A. A complete assembly of powered four-fold doors with powered operator complete including doorsections, guides, hardware, operators, controls, and installation accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit MasonryB. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel FramingC. Section 08 8000 - GlazingD. Section 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2011.B. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2014.

C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.D. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2012).E. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.F. ASTM A513/A513M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy

Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2015.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on door operation, hardware and accessories, electric operating

components, colors and finishes available.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, details of supports, static and dynamic loads, adjacent

construction and finish trim, and stacking sizes. Include wiring diagrams for coordination with electrical trade.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of full manufacturer's color range for selection of colors.E. Maintenance Data: Describe cleaning materials detrimental to vinyl fabric surfaces and

hardware finish. Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods.


section with minimum 10 years documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with

at least three years of documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Folding Doors Manufacturers:1. Door Engineering and Manufacturing; Door Engineering.com (Basis of Design)2. Bator North America; www.bator.com3. Jewers Doors Ltd; www.jewersdoors.us4. Electric Power Door; www.electricpowerdoor.com5. International Door, Inc.; international-door.com



2.02 DESIGN CRITERIAA. Design doors to withstand horizontal wind loads in closed position as indicated on the structural

drawings or a minimum of 25 pounds per square foot positive and negative wind load.Maximum deflection under full design load shall be 1/120 of the span. Fiber stress in mainmembers shall be limited to 27,000PSI. Steel frames shall be designed in accordancewith”AISC Steel Construction Manual” AISC (MAN)

2.03 MATERIALSA. Steel Tubing, Electric Welded: ASTM A513/A513MB. Steel Tubing, Structural Welded: ASTM A500/A500M Grade BC. Structural Shapes and plates: ASTM A36/A36MD. Castings, Cast Iron: ASTM A48/A48ME. Face Sheets: Steel sheet metal, flat, hot rolled, 14 gauge minimum ASTM A1011/A1011MF. Glazing: Tempered. Refer to 08 8000 - Glazing for additional requirements

2.04 DOOR MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTIONA. Door frame shall be a minimum of 11-gauge structural steel tube.B. Door leaves shall be faced on the exterior side with 14-gauge sheet steel welded to stiles, rails

and bracing members from the inside. There shall be no exposed welds on exterior panels. Allexterior doors shall be fully insulated with thermal insulation, full thickness of panel: door shallbe covered on the inside with 14-gauge sheet steel welded to stiles, rails and bracing members.All interior welds are to be ground smooth

C. Surface Mounted Tube Frame: Manufacturer shall supply pre-hung tube frame system,designed to anchor to structural support OR masonry as provided per project documents. Allhinges, track supports and operator supports shall be weld attached at the factory.

D. Hardware: Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides, not lessthan three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc.necessary for complete installation and operation.1. All hardware, including hinges and trolleys, shall be bolted to the panel for easy removal for

service or panel replacement.2. Doors up to 16’ wide and under 30psf windload shall require no floor mounted supports,

guides or tracks.3. Top tracks shall be adjustable on the end track hangers to allow for adjustment of the door

panels in the open position and easily replaceable without removal of the door framing oroperators.

E. Hinges: Jamb hinges shall be dual shear and have two thrust bearings and two needlebearings. Fold hinges shall be stainless steel and be dual shear with two thrust bearings. Allbearings shall be completely concealed within the hinge barrel and include grease zerks. Allhinge pins shall be minimum ¾” diameter hardened steel.

F. Hinge Guards: Provide plastic guards at jamb hinges to prevent access through hinge space.G. Vision Panels: Provide 1” insulated, tempered, vision panels of the size, shape and location as

noted on the drawings.H. Weather stripping shall be provided and installed along the bottom of each leaf and at vertical

joints of leaves at centerline, to provide a substantially weather tight installation. Weather stripmaterial shall be cloth inserted neoprene adjustable and readily replaceable.

I. Vision panels: provided vision panels 1” thick insulated, laminated high performance glasssize, shape, and location as indicated on the drawings.

J. Finish:1. Door Panels and Tube Frames shall be factory finished with manufacturer’s standard

epoxy primer and polyurethane top coat. Color as selected by architect using "RAL"standard.



2. Operator and operating hardware shall be powder-coated manufacturer’s standard neutralcolor.

2.05 OPERATORA. Four fold door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit,

designed for heavy duty high cycle operation. Operator consists of a single electric gearedbrake motor, and rotating drive arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attachedto the rotating drive arm on the operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door sectionsand to the door lintel. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firmcontrol at all times. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control armsshall be fitted with permanently lubricated ball bearings1. Operator shall open and close door with smooth acceleration and deceleration, easily and

quietly without jarring under all conditions of wind pressure.2. Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to clear the opening.3. Operator shall automatically lock the door in the closed position.4. Operator shall be equipped with disconnect mechanism to convert to freewheeling mode

for manual operation.5. Motor, brake, and open and close limit switches are to be factory mounted and pre-wired

to a terminal block in a NEMA 12 enclosure mounted on door operator. All materialsnecessary for the pre-wired assembly shall conform to J.I.C. electrical standards forequipment and connections. The door contractor shall furnish and install the electric dooroperator including the motor, with “open-close” limit switches, hand chain disconnectswitched, solenoid, brake, all pre-wired to a terminal box mounted adjacent to the motor.

B. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions atno more than 75 percent of rated capacity. The motor shall be wound for three phase208/230/480 VAC, 60 Hertz operation. Motor shall be totally enclosed, ball bearing, andcontinuous duty and of capacity sufficient to operate the door at specified speed withoutexceeding a temperature rise of 55 degrees Celsius. Braking device to be operatedautomatically by a solenoid and be adjustable to suit the requirements of the door.

C. Electric Controls: Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be completefor each door, and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Incoming electrical shallbe as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.1. Controls shall include a programmable logic controller with digital message display or LED

indicators. Controller shall include programmable close timers and programmableinputs/outputs.

2. Motor starters shall be magnetic reversing, factory wired with overload and under voltageprotection, and equipped with mechanical interlocks. All control components shall beenclosed in one enclosure with a wiring diagram placed on the inside of the cover.

3. If incoming voltage is single phase, control panel shall include a variable frequency drive toconvert voltage to 3-phase for the motor

4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 with disconnect switch.5. Pushbuttons (interior) for each door shall have one (1) momentary pressure three-button

push-button station marked “OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP”. Push button enclosure shallbe NEMA 4.

6. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully closedposition.

7. Safety edges: Provide electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse doorupon contact with obstruction.

8. Photo eyes: Provide (1) exterior, jamb mounted, thru-beam type photo eyes, NEMA 4rated.

9. Radio Controls: Provide one (1) radio receiver and (2) single button remotes per door.Remotes to open and close doors with single button.

10. Safety Loop Detectors: Provide “safety” loop detector to reverse or hold the door openwhen activated.



11. Timer Activation Loop Detectors: Provide “pulse on exit type” loop detector to activateauto close timer once loop has been activated and cleared, include hand/auto switch todeactivate timer.

12. Wiring: Door manufacturer shall supply controls and components only. Electricalcontractor shall install controls and furnish and install conduits and wiring for jobsite powerand control wiring.

13. Doors shall cycle open and closed in minimum acceptable time as specified by County. Inevent of operator failure, the operator should have means of disconnection for manualoperation of the door.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit and align door assembly level and plumb.C. Lubricate moving components.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Adjust door to provide smooth operation from closed to full open position.B. Visually inspect door in fully closed position for light leaks to identify a potential acoustical leak,

and adjust to achieve light tight seal.C. Clean surfaces and repaint abraded or damaged finished surfaces to match factory applied

finish.3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate operation of door and identify potential operational problems.End of Section


08 3613 - Sectional DoorsPage 1 of 4

Section 08 3613Sectional Doors


A. Overhead sectional doors, manually and electrically operated.B. Electronically-powered automatic overhead door operator and mounting kitC. All low voltage control wiring to be provided and installed by this section. Installation is to be

under the construction quality and techniques outlined in Division 26.D. All accessories, attachments, and control safety devices necessary to provide a complete

installation.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04220 - Concrete Unit MasonryB. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Framing and blocking for door operatorC. Division 26 Electrical: Electrical service to disconnect located near door operator.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.B. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.C. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors;

2011.D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.G. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details,

anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details.C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware.

1. Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare parts resources.

D. Samples: Submit two panel finish samples, 12" by 12" inch in size, illustrating color and finish.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions.

F. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting.G. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication

frequency, spare part sources.H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years ofexperience and authorized by the manufacturer.



C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), ortesting firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, as suitable for purpose specified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in compliance

with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from weather,excessive temperatures, and construction operations

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures for warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for finish, doors, tracks, and electric operating

equipment.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Overhead Door; Product Thermacore 591 Series: www.overheaddoor.comB. Raynor Door: www.raynor.comC. Approved Equal

2.02 STEEL DOORSA. Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware;

complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application.1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind

loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using 10 second duration of maximum load.

2. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick.3. End Styles: 16 gauge4. Exterior Surface: Ribbed, Textured5. Exterior Steel: .016" Hot dipped galvanized6. Springs: High Cycle - 100,00 cycles7. Insulation CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated.8. Thermal Value: R-Value: 14.86, U-Value: .0679. Air Infiltration: .08 cfm at 15 mph: .13 cfm at 25 mph10. High Usage Package: Required11. Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber tube seals fitted inside joints between sections. EPDM

rubber bulb-type strip at bottom. (Header seal and jamb weatherstripping).12. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel

races.13. Track: Provide 3-inch track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and

clearances available.14. Exterior Finish: Factory finished with acrylic baked enamel; color as selected by Architect.15. Interior Finish: Factory finished with acrylic baked enamel; color as selected from

manufacturers standard line.16. Glazed Lights: Full panel width, Two row; set in place with security glazing stops. Refer to

Exterior Elevations and Door Schedule.17. Electric Operation: Electric control station.

2.03 DOOR OPERATORA. Reference Product: RSX by Overhead door

1. Electrical: ½ HP, 115-volt, single phase, fully enclosed, instant reversing.2. Reduction:

a. Primary: Super Belt - auto tension poly-V flex belt with no adjustment requirementsb. Secondary: Chain and sprocket

3. Duty Cycle: 60 cycles per hour during peak usage periods



4. Clutch: Friction disk type, adjustable5. Brakes: DC disk type with selectable progressive braking for smooth stopping6. Limit System: The Limit Lock - adjustable magnetic type7. Door to be manually operable in case of power failure.8. Mounting: Wall mounting

B. Door Control Characteristics1. Recessed momentary contact OPEN-CLOSE with spring return, mounted in apparatus bay

per plans. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor. All low voltage wiring to be installedunder this section. Locate on driver’s side.

2. Remote Controls: Digital radio controls for door operation – provide four (4)remote-control units for each opener.

3. Entrapment Protection – Provide photoelectric sensors.2.04 REMOTE DOOR OPERATOR

A. Manufacturer: Linear Radio Receiver Corporation, Multi-Code #109930 9952 300, Carlsbad,CA, .1. Product: Universal programmable door timer.2. Performance: Automatically close overhead doors within an adjustable time duration

(three to eight minutes) of opening. Provide a bypass function so that doors may be leftopen upon command. The reversing edge function of the operator is to be retained.Remote transmitter - receiver control door operation to be operational from a distance of250 feet from face of door.

B. Programmable remote operator for all roll up apparatus bay doors.C. Door Control: Provide a control wire conduit from motor operator to Z-tron printer to allow ring

down to automatically open front Apparatus Bay doors .2.05 TRAFFIC SAFETY LIGHT - Provide at each roll up apparatus bay door

A. Manufacturer: Alkco 207V/FR207 with (2) 69 w long life lampsB. Provide 110 VAC to unit-duplex. Low voltage wiring to magnetic switches at floor (Armored

floor switch) on track at full open.C. Locate on driver’s side at +7’-0” AFF.

1. When door is moving, red light on.2. When door is open, green light on.3. When door closed, lights are off.4. Kit should include switches.


A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances arewithin specified limits.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal.B. Apply primer to wood frame.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members

only.D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware.



E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnectto unit components.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch.B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch.C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge.D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Clean doors and frames and glazing.B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Clean doors, frames and glazing.C. Remove temporary labels and visible markings.D. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and

cleaning.End of Section


08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed StorefrontsPage 1 of 6

Section 08 4313Aluminum-Framed Storefronts


A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.B. Aluminum doors and frames.C. Weatherstripping.D. Door hardware.E. All required attachments, trim, and accessories to provide a complete installation.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Rough opening framingB. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Operable sash within glazing system.C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.E. Section 12 2113 - Horizontal Louver Blinds: Attachments to framing members.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.;

2003.B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.D. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013

Supplements and Errata.F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.I. ASTM E283/E283M - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure DifferencesAcross the Specimen; 2019.

J. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through ExteriorWindows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

K. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or

permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the designwind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.



1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of California Building code.a. 70 mph wind speed, exposure C

2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, withfull recovery of glazing materials.

B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflectionof lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured inaccordance with ASTM E 283.

D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressuredifference of 6.00 lbf/sq ft.

E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causingdetrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

D. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.

E. Samples: Submit two samples 6 inches long illustrating finished aluminum surface .F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in County's


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified andwith at least three years of documented experience.

B. Installer - The storefront installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer, and haveexperience of at least five (5) years installing the selected system.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.C. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs

and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to theUniversity.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS1.10 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.



D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.


A. All storefront and entrances system components shall be the product of a single manufacturerand represent an integrated system.

B. The aluminum storefront system was designed based on the product of Kawneer 45ITThermally Broken as a standard of quality.

C. Aluminum-Framed Storefront and Doors:1. EFCO Corporation: www.efcocorp.com/#sle.2. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTA. Glazing: Refer to Section 08 8000.B. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members

with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.1. Glazing Position: Front-set.2. Condensation Resistance Factor: 40 minimum3. Finish: Superior performing organic coatings.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in

completed assemblies, including joint edges.4. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and

secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealedfrom view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

6. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

8. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period withoutcausing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other buildingelements.

9. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, withoutdamage to components or deterioration of seals.

10. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

C. Performance Requirements1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements

without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M,using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full

recovery of glazing materials.2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on

interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf.3. Air Leakage: 0.06 cfm/sq ft maximum leakage of storefront wall area when tested in

accordance with ASTM E283/E283M at 1.57 psf pressure difference.



2.03 COMPONENTSA. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section

insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.2. Fabrication Method – Shearblock or equal. Use of exposed fasteners and stacking system

with receptor sill not acceptable.3. Glazing Stops: Flush.

B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. Series 500 wide Stile1. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches.2. Top Rail: 6 inches wide.3. Vertical Stiles: 6 inches wide.4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide.5. Glazing Stops: Square.6. Finish: Same as storefront.7. Pull Handles: See Section 08 71008. Hinges: Kawneer 4 1/2 x4 ball bearing butt hinge with non-removable pin or equal

electrified hinge where required.9. Exit Device: See Section 08 7100

2.04 MATERIALSA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.C. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements.2.05 FINISHES

A. Comply with AA DAF-45 for aluminum finishes required.B. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating not

less than 0.7 mils thick.C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2.06 HARDWAREA. General: Refer to Section 08 7100 “Door Hardware” for requirements for hardware items other

than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.1. Coordinate with hardware provider regarding electronic access control - provide

components required for a complete system.B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each

door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturerfor service required; finish to match door.1. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.2. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.

C. Other Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application.1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished chrome.2. For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, pivots, narrow stile

handle latch, and closer.3. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.4. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.

2.07 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of

assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.



C. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilarmetals with bituminous paint.

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.E. Reinforce components internally for door hardware .F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible incompleted assemblies, including joint edges.

H. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads

to sill flashing.H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier.I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure.J. Install hardware using templates provided.K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required

to achieve performance criteria.L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet,whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.B. Opening force for doors not to exceed 5 lbs of force

3.05 CLEANINGA. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean

wiping cloths, and take care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean.



3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

End of Section


08 5113 - Aluminum WindowsPage 1 of 6

Section 08 5113Aluminum Windows


A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and infill panels.B. Factory glazing and site glazing.C. Operating hardware.D. Insect screens.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Rough opening framingB. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealing frame to weather barrier installed on adjacent

construction.C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between window frames and adjacent

construction.D. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Operable sash within framing system.E. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.;

2003.B. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for

windows, doors, and skylights; 2011.C. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.D. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance

of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009.E. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix);2015.

F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron andSteel Products; 2015.

G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.

I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through ExteriorWindows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

J. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Design and size windows to withstand the following load requirements, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 330 using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads with 10second duration of maximum load:1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of CBC code.2. Positive Design Wind Load: 70 lbf/sq ft.3. Negative Design Wind Load: 70 lbf/sq ft.4. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of

glazing materials.



B. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection oflintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

C. Thermal Resistance: Not more than .59 BTU/hr/sf/deg F when tested in accordance with AAMA1503.1

D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.1 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measuredat a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordancewith ASTM E 283.

E. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 53 when measured in accordance with AAMA1503.1.

F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressuredifference of 12 lbf/sq ft.

G. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurringwithin system.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, internal

drainage details, and descriptions of hardware and accessories.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening

tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations, and installation requirements.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating typical corner construction, accessories, and finishes.

E. Submit two samples of operating hardware.F. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of

the following showing compliance with specified grade:1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.3. Evidence of CSA Certification.4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning

requirements.H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

County's name and registered with manufacturer.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. The architectural aluminum supplier shall have a quality system registered to one of the ISO9000 series of standards. The quality system shall be certified by a Registrar approved by theAccreditation Board (RAB) or another, international approval authority.1. The certificate shall be current and in good standing with the Registrar which issued it.2. The supplier shall furnish, upon request, a copy or copies of the current certificate.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not

use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight orweather.



1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Aluminum Windows:1. Kawneer; www.kawneer.com - 8225TL Thermal Windows2. EFCO, a Pella Company; Thermal Windows: www.efcocorp.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01310 - Substitutions2.02 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Aluminum Windows: Extruded aluminum frame and sash, factory fabricated, factory finished,with operating hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices.1. Frame Depth: 2-1/2 inches.2. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and

secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view;reinforced as required for operating hardware and imposed loads.

3. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

4. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing anddeflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

6. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to.30 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,measured at a specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTME283.

7. Water Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 15 pounds per square foot.8. Condensation Resistance Factor: 58 minimum.9. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.60, maximum.10. Life Cycle Requirements: No damage to fasteners, hardware parts or other components

that would render operable windows in operable and not reduction in air and waterinfiltration resistance when tested according to AAMA 910.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following:1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type:

a. Performance Class (PC): R.C. Fixed, Non-Operable Type:

1. Construction: Thermally broken.2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.3. Exterior Finish: Class I color anodized.4. Interior Finish: Class I color anodized.

D. Outswinging Casement Type:1. Construction: Thermally broken.2. Provide screens.3. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.4. Exterior Finish: Class I color anodized.



5. Interior Finish: Class I color anodized.6. Butt hinges7. Roto operator

a. RotoE. Awning Type:

1. Construction: Thermally broken.2. Provide screens.3. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.4. Exterior Finish: Class I color anodized.5. Interior Finish: Class I color anodized.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Frames: 2 1/2" inch wide, of 0.090 inch thick section; thermally broken with interior portion of

frame insulated from exterior portion; flush glass stops of snap-on type.B. Glazing: See Section 08 8000.C. Thermal Barrier. The thermal barrier shall be a minimum 3.8" (9.5) separation consisting of a

two-part, chemically curing high density polyurethane which is mechanically and adhesivelybonded to the aluminum.

D. Sills: Provide a Kawneer "Full Depth Sill" at all sillsE. Sill Extension: Provide a Kawneer "Sub Sill" as shown on drawings. Size per drawings.F. Insect Screens: 14/18 mesh, steel strands.G. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Nylon pile; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve effective

weather seal.H. Glazing Materials: See Section 08 8000.I. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.

2.04 MATERIALSA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

2.05 HARDWAREA. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.B. Operator: Geared rotary handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.

1. All Roto Operators shall have an arm that is capable to be folded to avoid windowcoverings. If the company providing windows does note have a folding arm, Provide inaddition to the company product a replacement folding are of the same material and finishby a third pardty company approved during the submittal process.

C. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings,removable pivot clips for cleaning.

D. Pulls: Manufacturer's standard type.E. Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable.F. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.

2.06 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of

assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.F. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.



2.07 FINISHESA. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic

coating not less than 0.7 mils thick; dark bronze.B. Apply one coat of bituminous coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with

dissimilar materials.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receivealuminum windows.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances

and other irregularities.C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and

alignment with adjacent work.D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack

fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermalbarrier.

E. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.F. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08 8000.G. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces

from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points by complying with AAMA 101,Appendix, titled “Dissimilar Materials.”

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches

per 10 ft, whichever is less.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.3.05 CLEANING

A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.B. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.C. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable

to sealant and window manufacturer.End of Section


08 7100 - Door HardwarePage 1 of 6

Section 08 7100Door Hardware


A. Hardware for wood, aluminum, hollow metal, and _____ doors.B. Hardware for fire-rated doors.C. Lock cylinders for doors that hardware is specified in other sections.D. Thresholds.E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.F. Gate locks.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.C. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders;

installation of cylinders.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2013.B. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;

2011.C. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014.D. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013.E. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2010.F. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; 2012.G. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; 2014.H. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and

Steel Frames; 2014.I. BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006.J. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames; 2004.K. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;

1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.L. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.M. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.N. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Submit six copies of hardware schedule at earliest possible date prior to delivery of hardware.

Organize schedule into "Hardware Sets" with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

C. Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:1. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.2. Name and manufacturer of each item.3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.



4. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floorplans and in door and frame schedule.

5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.6. Mounting locations for hardware.7. Door and frame sizes and materials.8. Keying information.

D. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, andinspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

E. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to County by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

County's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code tomatch hardware schedule.

1.06 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of

internal reinforcement for door hardware.B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.C. Coordinate County's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year warranty for door closers and _____.C. Provide seven year warranty for locks and cylinders.D. Provide two year warranty for all other hardware.

1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTSA. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Schlage.2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide door hardware specified, or as required to make doors fully functional, compliant withapplicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.

B. Provide items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.3. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.4. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors, Except Hinges: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.5. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide

hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of theapplicable code.

2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHESA. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.

1. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim.



3. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated tohave no locking or no outside trim.

B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.

C. Keying: Grand master keyed.D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated

"push/pull" or "not required to latch".2.04 HINGES

A. Hinges - Basis of Design: ______.B. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.

1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

2.05 MORTISE LOCKSETSA. Cylinders: Schlage Primus, with 6 pin with F keyway interchangable core

1. Schlage: www.schlage.com.2.06 CLOSERS

A. Manufacturers - Surface Mounted Closers:1. C. R. Laurence Company, Inc; _____: www.crl-arch.com/sle.2. LCN, an Allegion brand; _____: www.allegion.com/us.

2.07 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOXA. Door Stops:

1. Ives: www.iveshardware.comB. Door Bottom:

1. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com.C. Threshold:

1. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com.2. Width of threshold to match frame opening

D. Silencer:1. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com.

E. Push Button Mechanical Combination Locks1. Kaba - Simplex 5000, non-powered

F. Lockbox1. Knox Company

2.08 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTSA. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section.B. Proprietary Products: References to specific proprietary products are used to establish

minimum standards of utility and quality. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, provideonly the specific products. Design is based on the materials specified. Other materials may beconsidered by the Architect in accordance with the provisions of Section 01030.

C. Fasteners:1. Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable

size and type to anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use.2. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts, sex bolts, and

other anchors approved by the Architect, according to the material to which the hardwareis to be applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.



3. All fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish.D. Finishes: All hardware shall match the finish of the locksets, unless specified otherwise. Take

special care to coordinate all of the various manufactured items furnished under this Section, toensure acceptably uniform finish.

2.09 MATERIALSA. Locksets: Locksets and latchsets shall be Schlage - . Strikes shall be 16 gage curved steel,

bronze or brass with 1" deep box construction, and have lips of sufficient length to clear trim andprotect clothing.1. Locks shall have minimum ¾-inch throw.2. Comply with requirements of local security ordinances.3. Provide approved fusible links at levers for labeled doors.

B. Cylinders - Furnish interchangable core cylinders with all nexessary blocking rings, cams , andother attachments. Coordinate with specified entrance locking mechanisms and other keyedlocks.

C. Hinges: Outswinging exterior doors shall have non-removable (NRP) pin. Hinge open widthsshall be minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees. Furnish hingeswith steel pins and flush bearings of sufficient throw to clear trim.1. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 feet 0 inches height. Add one for each additional hinge for

each 12 inches in height or fraction thereof.2. Provide 5-inch heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 feet 0 inches in width.3. Provide concealed cicuit hinges where required for powered locks.

D. Panic Hardware and Exit Devices: Furnish sets at wood doors with sex bolts unless otherwisespecified. Lever handle trim shall match locksets. Device push bar must release with 15 lbs.maximum pressure is applied in the direction of travel. Products shall comply with UBCStandard 10-4 and shall be mounted between 30" and 44" above the finished floor. Hardwareshall also comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9.

E. Surface Door Closers: Full rack and pinion type with removable non-ferrous case. Provide sexbolts and grommets at all wood doors. Place closers inside building, stairs, and rooms. Closersshall be non-sized, non-handed and adjustable. Provide hold open feature and or spring stopwhere indicated in schedule.1. Provide drop brackets, shoe supports, and blade stop spacers as required at narrow top

rails.2. Doors to have 5 lbs. maximum pressure to open.

F. Kick Plates: Provide with four beveled edges, .050" gauge, 12" high by width less 2". Furnishwith machine or wood screws of stainless steel to match other hardware.

G. Seals: Seals shall be finished to match adjacent frame color. U.L. label shall be applied on allrated doors.

H. Door Stops – Furnish floor mounted doorstops of height to engage the doors. Locate wallmounted door stops to engage door hardware and to protect wall and door. Coordinate locationof flat blocking in wall at locations to recieve wall stops.

I. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 6 for pairs ofdoors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-rated door assemblies.

J. Screws: Exposed screws shall be Phillips head.K. Miscellaneous – All other items, not specifically described but required for a complete and

proper installation of finish hardware, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to theapproval of the Architect.

2.10 KEYINGA. Master Keying – Key all cylinders and locks as directed by the Owner.B. Number of Keys – Furnish three keys for each level of keying, as directed by Owner.



C. Construction Keying – Furnish a construction master key system with 15 keys for locks andcylinders. Use only the construction keys during construction.

D. Identification and Delivery – Factory stamp permanent keys as directed by Owner. Identifypermanent keys with tags and delivery directly to the Owner.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames arepresent and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correctcharacteristics.

3.02 Hardware LocationsA. All hardware shall be mounted to comply with current ADA and CBC requirements.

1. Lock: 38 inches from finished floor to center of lever.2. Door Pull: 40 inches from finished floor to center of pull.3. Panic: 40 inches from finished floor to center of pad.4. Deadlock Strike: 44 inches from floor, centered.5. Floor Stop: Where occurs in path of travel, locate within 4 inches of adjacent wall.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set

units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrateas necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item. As indicated

in the following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Sets Schedule or on the drawings.3.04 FINISHES:

A. All finishes are: Satin Chrome Plated (626) or Anodized Aluminum (628)B. Unless otherwise noted

3.05 SCHEDULE.End of Section


08 8000 - GlazingPage 1 of 4

Section 08 8000Glazing


A. Glass.B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed lites in doors and borrowed lites.C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.D. Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors: Glazed lites in doors.E. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer.F. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows.G. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors.H. Section 10815 - Glass Tub and Shower Enclosures

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.C. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.D. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2010.E. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.F. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air

barrier:1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly

from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing

coloration and designof glass units, showing coloration.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazinginstallation methods.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum three years documented experience.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal

failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. AFG Industries, Inc: www.afgglass.com.2. Pilkington Building Products North America: www.pilkington.com.3. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com.4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Clear Float Glass (Type PPG ): Clear, annealed.1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing

select).2. 6 mm thick.3. Total Thickness: Single Pane4. Location: All interior Glazing

C. Safety Glass : Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering:1. Color and Thickness:

a. Interior: To match Clear Float Glassb. Exterior: To match Low E Glass

2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.3. 6 mm minimum thick.4. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code.

a. Glazed lites in doors .b. Shower and bathtub enclosures and doors.c. Glazed sidelights to doors.

D. Low E Glass (Type PPG Solarban 60 Solarbronze +Clear): Float type, annealed, in bronzecolor.1. Visible light transmittance of 42 percent, UV light transmittance of 8 percent, shading

coefficient of.31.2. U-Value: Winter Nighttime: .29, Summer Daytime:.273. Visible light reflectance of 7 percent.4. 6 mm minimum thick.5. Total thickness: Double Pane 1" thick6. Location: All Exterior Glazing (Including Apparatus Bay Doors)

2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITSA. Manufacturers:

1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.

2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIESA. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbetspace minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, selfadhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solidscompound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; hardness rangeof 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer; coiled on release paper; black color.



D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTMC864 Option II; ________ color.


A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.D. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners.B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to

attain full contact.C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous

contact.3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.B. Remove labels after Work is complete.C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION


08 8300 - MirrorsPage 1 of 2

Section 08 8300Mirrors


A. Glass mirrors.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood mirror frames.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.B. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.C. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors: Handle with Extreme Care (Tips for the Professional on the Care and

Handling of Mirrors); 2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating mirrors design, edging, and

coloration.D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

County's name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazingcompounds.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of

same.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Mirrors:1. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com.2. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Mirror Design Criteria: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirror

material deflection to 1/200, or to the flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials,whichever is less.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.


08 8300 - MirrorsPage 2 of 2


A. Verify that surfaces of mirror frames or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready forinstallation of mirrors.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.B. Set mirrors plumb and level, and free of optical distortion.C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or

backsplashes.D. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with clips, and anchor rigidly to wall construction.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove labels after work is complete.B. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.

End of Section


08 9100 - LouversPage 1 of 2

Section 08 9100Louvers


A. Louvers, frames, and accessories.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.D. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air

velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,

and tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blank-off areas required, and frames.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and connection

failures of louver components.1. Finish: Include twenty year coverage against degradation of exterior finish.


A. Louvers:1. Airolite Company, LLC: www.airolite.com.

2.02 LOUVERSA. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;

AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511.B. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, formed galvanized steel sheet construction, with

intermediate mullions matching frame.1. Blades: Straight.2. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and, with continuous

recessed caulking channel each side.3. Steel Thickness, Galvanized: Frame 16 gauge, 0.0598 inch minimum base metal; blades

16 gauge, 0.0598 inch minimum base metal.4. Steel Finish: Superior performing organic coating, finished after fabrication.


08 9100 - LouversPage 2 of 2

2.03 MATERIALSA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one

piece per location.B. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.


A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive this work and openingdimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install louvers level and plumb.C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion

of moisture to exterior.D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.E. Coordinate with installation of mechanical ductwork.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Strip protective finish coverings.B. Clean surfaces and components.

End of Section


09 2116 - Gypsum Board AssembliesPage 1 of 6

Section 09 2116Gypsum Board Assemblies


A. Metal stud wall framing.B. Metal channel ceiling framing.C. Acoustic insulation.D. Gypsum sheathing.E. Cementitious backing board.F. Gypsum wallboard.G. Joint treatment and accessories.H. Textured finish system.I. Acoustic (sound-dampening) wall and ceiling board.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural steel stud framing.B. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Acoustic insulation.C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum

board or plaster work.E. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile backing board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.B. ANSI A108.11-SystemDeleted - American National Standard for Interior Installation of

Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Revised).C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.D. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2015.E. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.F. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.G. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.H. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.I. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel


J. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

K. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

L. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant GypsumBacking Panel; 2013.

M. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board; 2013.



N. ASTM C1325 - Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious BackerUnits; 2014.

O. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.P. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.Q. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.R. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.S. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.T. GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association; 1996.U. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.V. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2015.W. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.C. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754,

provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and

finishing, with minimum 5 years of experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.B. Interior Partitions: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based ontests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

2.02 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com.2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.4. PABCO Gypsum: www.pabcogypsum.com.5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

a. Mold resistant board is required at areas exposed to moisture and at the ApparatusBay ceilings and walls in addition to areas identified on the plans..1) Other Areas adn Rooms include: Clean Up, Turnout Storage, Workshop,

Turnout Laundry, Response Alcove and Wash Area.2) Provide resilient furring channels at ceilings at 12" O.C. for attachment of

mold-resistant board.



3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicatedtested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.

4. Thickness:a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.

C. Impact Resistant Wallboard:1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Type: Fire-resistance-rated Type X, UL or WH listed.4. Thickness: 5/8 inch.5. Edges: Tapered.6. Glass Mat Faced Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant:www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.D. Backing Board For Wet Areas:

1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds andshower surrounds and tile wall wainscots.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as

defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M.a. Regular Type: Thickness 1/2 inch. or 5/8" to align with adjacent gypsum board finish.b. Products:

1) CertainTeed Corporation; Diamondback 5/8" Type X Tile Backer:www.certainteed.com/#sle.

2) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.3) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer:

www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.3. Edges: Tapered.

F. Acoustical Sound Dampening Wall and Ceiling Board: Two layers of heavy paper-faced,high-density gypsum board separated by a viscoelastic polymer layer and capable of achievingSTC rating of 50 or more in typical stud wall assemblies as calculated in accordance with ASTME413 and when tested in accordance with ASTM E90.1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.2. Long Edges: Tapered.3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.4. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; SilentFX Quick Cut Gypsum Board:www.certainteed.com/#sle.

b. CertainTeed Corporation; SilentFX Quick Cut Type X Gypsum Board:www.certainteed.com/#sle.

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond SoundBreak XP Gypsum Board:www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.e. Location: At full Day Room wall behinid television

G. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated.2. Edges: Square.



















3. Product: As Specified by Structural Engineer to match exterior sheathing over metal studs.2.03 Gypsum Wallboard ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness:5-1/2 inch.

B. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

project conditions.1. Fiberglass Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as

otherwise indicated.2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.3. Chemical hardening type compound.4. Joint Compound: Setting type, field-mixed.

E. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain.F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.B. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more

than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternatechannel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.1. Orientation: Horizontal.2. Spacing: At 16 inches on center.

C. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel channel blocking for support of:1. Wall-mounted cabinets.2. Plumbing fixtures.3. Toilet partitions.4. Toilet accessories.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATIONA. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end

joints, especially in highly visible locations.B. Single-Layer Nonrated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and

edges occurring over firm bearing.C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with

requirements of assembly listing.D. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted

tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.1. Paper-Faced Sheathing: Immediately after installation, protect from weather by application

of water-resistive barrier.




















































3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3.06 JOINT TREATMENTA. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint

tape, embed and finish with setting type joint compound.B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based

joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areasspecifically indicated.

2. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish.3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction.D. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and

as scheduled below.E. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

F. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surfaceafter joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

3.07 TEXTURE FINISHA. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and to match approved sample.3.08 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feetin any direction.

3.09 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULEA. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry.C. Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish.D. Level 5: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish.

END OF SECTION







































09 2236.23 - Metal LathPage 1 of 4

Section 09 2236.23Metal Lath


A. Metal lath for portland cement plaster.B. Metal lath for Precast Concrete

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 4500 - Precast Architectural ConcreteB. Section 05 3619 - Composite Metal SheathingC. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Exterior board insulation under plasterD. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier under exterior plaster and stucco.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2014a.B. ASTM C933 - Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath; 2014.C. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel


D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.

E. ASTM C1032 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base; 2014.F. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior

and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2015a.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics,

material limitations, and finish.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at leastthree years of documented experience.


A. Metal Lath and Accessories:1. Cemco: www.cemcosteel.com.2. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.3. Structa Wire Corporation; Structa Mega Lath: www.structawire.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING AND LATH ASSEMBLIESA. Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Maximum Deflection of Vertical Assemblies: 1:360 under lateral point load of 100 lbs.2. Maximum Deflection of Horizontal Assemblies: 1:240 deflection under dead loads and

wind uplift.2.03 LATH

A. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self-furring.1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified in ASTM C841

or ASTM C1063 for framing spacing.2. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq yd.



3. Backed with treated paper.B. Ribbed Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; 3/8 inch thick.

1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified in ASTM C841or ASTM C1063 for framing spacing.

2. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq yd.3. Backed with treated paper.4. Location: At all horizontal surfaces

C. Corner Mesh: ASTM C1063; Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch thick, perforated flangesshaped to permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch size; same finish as lath.

D. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 inch wide by 24 inch long; same finishas lath.

E. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness, andmaximum possible lengths.1. Material: Formed galvanized sheet steel, expanded metal flanges.2. Casing Beads with Weep Holes: Square edges.3. Corner Beads: Radiused corners.4. Base Screeds: Beveled edges.5. Control Joints: Accordion profile with factory-installed protective tape, 2 inch flanges.

F. Refer to Section 04 7200 for metal lath requirements at cast stone masonry.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; torigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.

B. Fasteners: Self-piercing tapping screws; ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954.C. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.C. For exterior plaster and stucco on stud walls, verify that water-resistive barrier has been

installed over sheathing substrate completely and correctly; see Section 07 2500.D. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL3.03 CONTROL JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings and comply with ASTM C1063.1. Area of plaster panel not to exceed 144 sq ft for vertical surfaces.2. Spacing between control joints not to exceed 18 ft in each direction.3. Area bounded by control joints not to exceed a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.

B. Install prefabricated joint accessories in accordance with ASTM C1063.3.04 ACCESS PANELS INSTALLATION

A. Install access panels and rigidly secure in place.B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.

3.05 LATH INSTALLATIONA. Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.



B. Lap or nest ends of metal lath in accordance with ASTM C841.C. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3

inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.D. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.E. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place.F. Place 4 inch wide strips of lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials, and

secure rigidly in place.G. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches above

ceiling line.H. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in

place.I. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.

3.06 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

End of Section


09 2400 - Cement PlasteringPage 1 of 4

Section 09 2400Cement Plastering


A. Cement plastering.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 4500 - Precast Architectural Concrete: Installed over plaster baseB. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Adhered to plaster baseC. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier.D. Section 09 2236.23 - Metal Lath: Lath, beads, screeds, and joint accessories for plaster base.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.B. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.C. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2014.D. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006

(Reapproved 2011).E. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based

Plasters; 2015.F. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2015b.G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals for submittals procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.C. Samples:

1. Submit two samples, 24 by 24 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum three years documented experience.

1.06 MOCK-UPA. Construct mock-up of exterior wall, ____ feet long by ____ feet wide, illustrating surface finish.

1. Locate where directed.2. Mock-up may remain as part of this work.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is 40

degrees F or lower, or when temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F within 48hours of application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATIONS

A. Lath Plaster Base: Metal lath.1. Plaster Type: Factory prepared plaster mix.2. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.3. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.4. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/32 to 1/16 inch.5. Finish: Acrylic.



2.02 FACTORY PREPARED CEMENT PLASTERA. Exterior Portland cement plaster system made of scratch and brown base coat, leveling coat

with reinforcing mesh, and acrylic finish coat; install in accordance with ASTM C926.1. Manufacturer - Basis of Design:

a. LaHabra; Perma-Finish EIFS & Stucco Acrylic Finish: www.lahabrastucco.com/#sle.2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Master Builders Solutions: www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us/#sle.b. Parex USA, Inc: www.parexusa.com/#sle.

B. Premixed One-Coat Base: Mixture of Type I Portland cement complying with ASTMC150/C150M, hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, fibers and other approved ingredients;install in accordance with ASTM C926.

C. Premixed Leveling Coat: Acrylic polymer-based blend approved for use with plastermanufacturer's base coat and finish materials.

D. Primer: Acrylic, as recommended by coating manufacturer and compatible with plaster basecoat.

E. Premixed Finish Coating: Integrally colored, acrylic coating.1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's custom colors.2. Texture: Smooth

2.03 JOBSITE MIXED CEMENT PLASTERA. Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I.2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type N.3. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.4. Sand: Clean, well graded, and complying with ASTM C897.5. Water: Clean, fresh, potable, and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely

affect plaster.B. Plaster Mixes: Proportioned in accordance with ASTM C926; parts by volume.

1. First Coat Over Lath:a. Plaster Mix "CM": One part Portland cement, and one part Type N masonry cement.b. Minimum 2-1/2 parts and maximum 4 parts sand, per total volume of cementitious

materials.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Lath: See Section 09 2236.23.B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.23.C. Reinforcing Mesh: 4.5 oz/sq yd alkali-resistant mesh.D. Water-Resistive Barrier: See Section 07 2500.


A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.B. Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are properly

in place.C. Verify mechanical and electrical equipment and services located within areas to receive this

work have been properly tested and approved.3.02 Mixing

A. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.B. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.C. Protect mixtures from frost or freezing temperatures, contamination, and excessive evaporation.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C150/C150M








































3.03 APPLICATIONA. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTM

C926.B. Base Coats:

1. Apply base coat(s) to fully embed lath and to specified thickness.2. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for

moist curing base coats and application of subsequent coats.C. Leveling Coat:

1. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.2. Fully embed reinforcing mesh in leveling coat.

D. Finish Coats:1. Primer and Acrylic Coatings:

a. Remove surface contaminants such as dust and dirt without damaging substrate.b. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.c. Apply finish coating in number of coats and to thickness recommended by

manufacturer.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.3.05 REPAIR

A. Patching: Remove loose, damaged or defective plaster and replace with plaster of samecomposition; finish to match surrounding area.

End of Section



























09 3000 - TilingPage 1 of 4

Section 09 3000Tiling


A. Tile for wall and base application.B. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate.C. Non-ceramic trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing.B. Section 07 1400 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.C. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2013.1.1. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

2. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tilewith Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

3. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout inTilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

4. ANSI A108.11-SystemDeleted - American National Standard for Interior Installation ofCementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Revised).

5. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set CementMortar; 2012 (Revised).

6. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts forTile Installation; 2010 (Revised).

7. ANSI A118.9-SystemDeleted - American National Standard Specifications for TestMethods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

B. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2014a.C. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum

Backing Panel; 2013.D. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions

with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

D. Samples:1. Submit to the Architect two (2) samples of all selected colors of tile and all available colors

of grout.2. Submit to the Architect two (2) 18"x 18' sample boards indicating all specified patterns,

colors and trims of tile and grout.E. Installer's Qualification Statement:

1. Submit documentation of National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA) or Tile Contractors' Association of America (TCAA) accreditation.



F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stainremoval methods.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products

specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of

five years of documented experience.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated by Architect, incorporating all components specified for

the location.1. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature above 50 degrees F and below 100 degrees F

during installation and curing of setting materials.1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 3 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com/#sle.2. Or pre-approved prior to bid equal.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.1. Moisture Absorption: 7.0 to 20.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Style: Refer to Plans3. Color(s): Refer to Plans.4. Pattern: Refer to Plans.5. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, base, and accent shapes in sizes coordinated with field

tile.2.02 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.2. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/sle.3. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc: www.merkrete.com/sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ADHESIVE MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:

1. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.3. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com.

B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type.



2.04 MORTAR MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials:1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4.

2.05 GROUTSA. Manufacturers:

1. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.B. Backer Board at Walls and Wainscots: Cementious backer board type complying with ANSI

A118.9-SystemDeleted; 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.C. Backer Board at Showers: Thermal plastic faced extruded polystyrene foam backer board type

complying with ANSI A118.10; 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints andcorners.

D. Backer Board: Coated glass mat type complying with ASTM C1178/C1178M; inorganicfiberglass mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder.

E. Mesh Tape: 2 inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommendedby tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.C. Install thermal plastic faced extruded polystyrene foam backer tapered floor board in

accordance with ANSI A108.11-SystemDeleted and board manufacturer's instructions. Tapejoints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.

D. Install thermal plastic faced extruded polystyrene foam backer board in accordance with ANSIA108 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat ofdry-set mortar to a feather edge.

E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer'sinstructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.B. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.C. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.D. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.E. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20A108/A118/A136



































F. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.G. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.H. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.I. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either

bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.3.04 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backer board on studs, install in accordance withTCNA (HB) Method W245.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

3.07 SCHEDULEA. Refer to Plans - Interior Finish Schedule

END OF SECTION











http://www.tileusa.com









09 5100 - Acoustical CeilingsPage 1 of 4

Section 09 5100Acoustical Ceilings


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Acoustical insulation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical

units.D. Samples: Submit two samples each, ____ inches long, of suspension system main runner,

cross runner, and perimeter molding.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing theproducts specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing theproducts specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent

prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.B. Provide 80 sq ft of each type of acoustical unit for County's use in maintenance of project.


A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. USG: www.usg.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Suspension Systems:



1. Same as for acoustical units.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.B. Acoustical Panels Type A:

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.2. Light Reflectance: 87 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.3. NRC Range: 0.70 to 0.80, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.4. Panel Edge: Square.5. Surface Pattern: Perforated.6. Surface Color: White.

C. Acoustical Panels Type B:1. Size: 24 inches by 48 inches.2. Light Reflectance: 87 percent, determined i accordance with ASTM E1264.3. NRC Range: 0.70 to 0.80, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.4. Panel Edge: Square.5. Surface Pattern: Perforated.6. Surface Color: White.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and

interlocking components, with perimeter moldings, hold down clips, stabilizer bars, clips, andsplices as required.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type A: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled;heavy-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.2. Construction: Double web.3. Finish: Painted, color as selected.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.B. Hanger Wire: 12 gauge, 0.08 inch galvanized steel wire.C. Perimeter Moldings: Same metal and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face ofgrid.

D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's

instructions and as supplemented in this section.B. Install suspension system in accordance with DSA IR 25-2C. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.D. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Use longest practical lengths.



E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with otherwork.

F. Suspension System, Non-Seismic: Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns,ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement offace plane of adjacent members.

G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearestaffected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead loadto exceed deflection capability.

I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, orsupport components independently.

J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Use longest practical lengths.2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION


09 6500 - Resilient FlooringPage 1 of 4

Section 09 6500Resilient Flooring


A. Resilient tile flooring.B. Resilient base.C. Installation accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM F150 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and StaticDissipative Resilient Flooring; 2006 (Reapproved 2013).

B. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004(Reapproved 2014).

C. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile; 2013a.D. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial

selection.D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.C. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALSA. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.08 WARRANTYA. Manufacturer's 10 year warranty on all products.B. Contractor to warranty installation for three (3) years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE FLOORING

A. Vinyl Tile - Type Plank: Surface-decorated, with wear layer.1. Manufacturers:

a. Karndean Design Flooring. www.karndean.com - Korlok Select Lineb. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to typespecified.

3. Color: As indicated on drawings.



4. Thickness: 6.5 mm5. Size: Per ASTM F2421 - Per selected pattern as indicated on drawings6. Wear Layer: 20 mil7. Locking System: 5G Fold Down Installation System8. Surface Treatment: K-Guard + PU coating9. Warranty 15 years10. Beveleled Edge Type: Micro11. Standards Per ASTM F3261 - Resilient Flooring with Rigid Polymeric Core12. Reaction to Fire Per ASTM E648-06 - Class 113. Flammability Per ASTM D2859 - Pass14. Slip Resistence Per ASTM D2047 - Dry > 0.815. Staining Resistance Per ASTM F925 - Pass (No Change)16. Electrostatic Propensity per AATCC 134 - 1.6 kV17. Abraision Resistance per ASTM D4060 - Pas 36000 cycles18. Acoustic impact noise reduction per ASTM E492-09: IIC = 68 dB (6" concrete slab w/drop

ceiling)19. Thickness swell per NALFA 3.2 - Pass Class 420. Chair resistance per NALFA 3.9 - Pass Class 421.22. Environmental - FloorScore® SCS-EC10.3-2014 v4.0: Indoor Air Quality Certified;

compliant low emitting VOC emisions.23. Adhesive - None required. Install according to manufacturers instructions.

2.02 RESILIENT BASEA. Resilient Base - Type Typical, UNO: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; style

as scheduled.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burke Flooring; Commercial Wall Base - TS: www.burkeflooring.com/#sle.b. Roppe Corp; Wall Base: www.roppe.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Height: 6 inch typical, 4 inch below casework.3. Thickness: 0.125 inch.4. Finish: Satin.5. Length: Roll.6. Color: As indicated on drawings.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.1. VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 6116.

B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate.B. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances

that cannot be removed.3.03 Installation - General

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.



C. Loose-Laid Installation: Set flooring in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce

tight joints.G. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern.H. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.

3.04 Installation - Tile FlooringA. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.

1. Verify direction with owner per roomB. Install square tile to linear pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area

perimeter.C. Install loose-laid tile, fit interlocking edges tightly.D. Install plank tile with a random offset of at least 6 inches from adjacent rows.E. Provide transition strips where required.

3.05 Installation - Resilient BaseA. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.C. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.D. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

End of Section


09 6566 - Resilient Athletic FlooringPage 1 of 4

Section 09 6566Resilient Athletic Flooring


A. Resilient athletic floor tile.B. Accessories required for installation, maintenance and repair.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete

slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied flooring.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and ThermoplasticElastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).

B. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005(Reapproved 2010).

C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

D. CA (State of California) Section 01350: Standard Method for Testing and Evaluation of VolatileOrganic Compound Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets for products specified, and printed installation

guidelines.C. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation details, and layout, colors, and equipment

locations.D. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's color charts for flooring materials specified, indicating full

range of colors and textures available.E. Verification Samples: Actual flooring material specified, not less than 6 inch square, mounted

on solid backing.F. Maintenance Guidelines: Provide manufacturer's printed maintenance guidelines for resilient

athletic flooring.G. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's printed standard warranty for resilient athletic flooring.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer must have a minimum of 15 years of experience in

the manufacturing of prefabricated resilient athletic flooring.B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with experience in installations for the last 3

years and certified in writing by the flooring manufacturer to be qualified for installation ofspecified flooring system.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials to project site in unopened containers clearly labeled with manufacturer's

name and identification of contents.B. Store materials in dry and clean location until needed for installation. During installation, handle

in a manner that will prevent marring and soiling of finished surfaces.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature in spaces to receive adhesively installed resilient flooring within range of70 to 95 degrees F for not less than 48 hours before the beginning of installation and for notless than 48 hours after installation has been completed. Subsequently, do not allowtemperature in installed spaces to drop below 50 degrees F or to go above 100 degrees F.



PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PREFORMED ATHLETIC FLOORING

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. Ecore Commercial Flooring: www.ecorecommercial.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Rubber Tile Flooring: Resilient rubber athletic flooring, calendered and vucanized with a base ofnatural and sythetic rubbers, stabilizing agents formed into square tiles.1. Thickness: Minimum 5/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength: Minimum 200 psi, per ASTM D412.3. Color: Chunky Monkey 646.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Leveling Compound: As recommended by flooring manufacturer for substrate conditions.B. Flooring Adhesive: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.


A. Examine substrates for conditions detrimental to installation of athletic flooring. Proceed withinstallation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate.

C. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring installationby testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH).1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.D. Gypsum drywall surfaces: Verify that substrate is free of dust and elements that might interfere

with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Concrete: Use leveling compound as necessary to achieve substrate flatness of plus or minus1/8 inch within 10 ft radius.

B. Remove coatings that are incompatible with flooring adhesives, using methods recommendedby flooring manufacturer.

C. Broom clean floor areas to receive athletic flooring immediately before beginning installation.D. Clean and prepare wall areas to receive athletic flooring as wainscot material before beginning

installation using methods and adhesives recommended by flooring manufacturer.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.C. Rubber Tile Flooring:

1. Lay out center lines in spaces to receive tile flooring, based on location of principal walls.Start tile installation from center, and adjust as necessary to avoid tiles less than one-halfwidth at perimeter.

2. Lay tiles square with room axis, matching for color and pattern by selecting from cartonsand mixing as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Rubber Tile Wall Wainscot:1. Horizontal Layout: Layout center line of wall to receive rubber tile as wainscot. Start tile

installation at center of wall working toward each end, adjust as necessary to avoid tilesless than one-half at terminous of wall surface.



2. Vertical Layout: Start layout of tile at top of wainscot height with full tile, with full tile down tofloor level, adjusting as necessary to avoid tiles less than one-half at terminous to floor.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean flooring using methods recommended by manufacturer.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished athletic flooring from construction traffic in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions to ensure that it is without damage upon Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


09 9113 - Exterior PaintingPage 1 of 6

Section 09 9113Exterior Painting


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints.C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless

otherwise indicated, including the following:D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products havingfactory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.

2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Floors, unless specifically indicated.6. Glass.7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2014.C. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources

Board; 2007.D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current

Edition, www.paintinfo.com.E. SCAQMD 1113 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1113; current edition.F. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.G. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).H. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for

each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating

range of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing

samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.3. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect.



D. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each

product/color/finish was used, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaninginstructions, touch-up procedures, and repair of painted and finished surfaces.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for County's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store

where directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,

with minimum three years documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; noexceptions.

B. Paints:1. Sherwin-Williams Company; _____: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

C. Transparent Finishes:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

D. Stains:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

E. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERALA. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.

1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily anduniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.



B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in

the following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.b. SCAQMD 1113 Rule.c. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selectedlater by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.

D. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.2. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting after the

color selection from samples submitted.3. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without

additional cost to County.2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint E-OP - Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete,concrete masonry units, brick, fiber cement siding, primed wood, and primed metal.1. Two top coats and one coat primer.2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Latex; MPI #10, 11, 15, 119, or 214.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially effect proper application.C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Exterior Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent.3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or repair existing paints or finishes that exhibit surface defects.D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphateand bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

G. Masonry:1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of

surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's writteninstructions. Allow to dry.

2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.3. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 600 to 1,500 psi at 6 to 12

inches. Allow to dry.H. Exterior Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with exterior patching

plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkalisurfaces.

I. Galvanized Surfaces:1. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.

J. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

K. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calkingcompound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces beforeinstallation.

L. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeksafter installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.

C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".

D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat isapplied.

E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional

coats until complete hide is achieved.G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.3.04 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finishes until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

3.06 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMSA. Concrete:

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



1. 1st Coat: Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer A24W83002. 2nd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series3. 3rd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series

B. CMU - painted:1. 1st Coat: Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler B42W462. 2nd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series3. 3rd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series

C. CMU - clear sealer:1. Prosoco

D. Wood - fascia, eaves and trim:1. 1st Coat: Pro-Block Int/Ext Acrylic Primer B51W620 Series2. 2nd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series3. 3rd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series

E. Wood- soffit1. 1st Coat: WoodScapes Exterior Polyurethane Semi-Transparent House Stain

F. Fibercement - fascia and trim:1. 1st Coat: Pro-Block Int/Ext Acrylic Primer B51W620 Series2. 2nd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series3. 3rd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series

G. Galvanized Metal - roof and parapet flashing only:1. Pretreatment: Jasco Metal Prep & Primer2. 1st Coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Metal Primer B66W310 Series3. 2nd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series4. 3rd Coat: Super-Paint Exterior Acrylic Satin Enamel A89W1151 Series

H. Ferrous Metal - doors & frames:1. 1st Coat: Shop applied primer2. 2nd Coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Metal Primer B66W310 Series3. 3rd Coat: Sher-Cryl HPA Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating B66W351 Series4. 4. 4th Coat: Sher-Cryl HPA Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating B66W351 Series

END OF SECTION

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov




http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov


09 9123 - Interior PaintingPage 1 of 6

Section 09 9123Interior Painting


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints.C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless

otherwise indicated.1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment.2. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, andelectrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets thatare visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visiblesurfaces.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and

operating parts of equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items.6. Floors, unless specifically indicated.7. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.8. Glass.9. Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated.10. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2014.C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials; 2007.D. CARB (SCM) - Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings; California Air Resources

Board; 2007.E. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current

Edition, www.paintinfo.com.F. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.G. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.



1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for

each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating

range of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available.

D. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each

product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,

with minimum three years documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer.1.07 MOCK-UP

A. Locate where directed by Architect.B. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required

otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.


A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; noexceptions.

B. Paints:



1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.2. Dunn Edwards Paints: www.dunnedwards.com..

C. Transparent Finishes:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

D. Stains:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in

the following:a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.b. CARB (SCM).

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIORA. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete

masonry units, brick, wood, plaster, and aluminum.1. Two top coats and one coat primer.2. Top Coat(s): Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex.

a. Products:1) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Flat.2) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Low Sheen. (MPI #144)3) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss.4) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, includingmetals and wood:1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails, guardrails, and

balustrades.2. Two top coats and one coat primer.3. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115 or 215.

a. Products:1) Sherwin-Williams Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss. (MPI #153)2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

4. Top Coat(s): Interior Light Industrial Coating, Water Based; MPI #151, 153 or 154.a. Products:

1) Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating, Semi-Gloss. (MPI #153)2) Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating, Gloss. (MPI #154)3) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Dry Fall: Metals; exposed structure and overhead-mounted services in utilitarian spaces,including shop primed steel deck, structural steel, metal fabrications, galvanized ducts,galvanized conduit, and galvanized piping.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



1. Shop primer by others.2. One top coat ______.3. Top Coat: Alkyd Dry Fall; MPI #55, 89, or 225.

a. Products:1) Sherwin-Williams Dryfall Flat. (MPI #55)2) Sherwin-Williams Super Save-Lite Dryfall, Semi-Gloss. (MPI #89)3) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

4. Top Coat Sheen:a. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.

5. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.2.04 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended bymanufacturer of top coats.1. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler; MPI #4.

a. Products:1) Sherwin-Williams ConFlex Block Filler. (MPI #4)2) Sherwin-Williams Loxon Block Surfacer. (MPI #4)3) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Interior Drywall Primer Sealer.a. Products:

1) Behr Premium Plus Interior Drywall Primer and Sealer [No. 73].2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

3. Interior Rust-Inhibitive Water Based Primer; MPI #107.a. Products:

1) Behr Premium Plus Interior/Exterior Multi-Surface Primer and Sealer [No. 436].(MPI #107)

4. Interior Water Based Primer for Galvanized Metal; MPI #134.a. Products:

1) Behr Premium Plus Interior/Exterior Multi-Surface Primer and Sealer [No. 436].(MPI #134)

2) Sherwin-Williams DTM Primer/Finish (MPI #134)3) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially effect proper application.D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent.4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov



3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.E. Concrete:F. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.G. Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make

smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.H. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to

SSPC-SP 1.I. Galvanized Surfaces:

1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.J. Ferrous Metal:

1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges

to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steelsurfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

K. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clearsealer.

L. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat isapplied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.3.04 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finishes until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

http://www.ecfr.gov

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&input_doc_number=SSPC-Paint%2033&item_s_key=00093635&item_key_date=990329&org_code=SSPC&doc_type=TSDC&origin=SMDO



































3.06 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMSA. Gypsum Board: Finish surfaces exposed to view, except ______.

1. Interior Walls: GI-OP-3A, semi-gloss.B. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish surfaces exposed to view; MI-OP-3A, gloss.C. Steel Fabrications: Finish surfaces exposed to view, except ____.

1. Interior: MI-OP-3L, gloss.D. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish surfaces exposed to view, except ____.

1. Finish the following items:a. Exposed surfaces of steel stairs and railings.

2. Interior: MI-OP-2A.End of Section
















10 1100 - Visual Display UnitsPage 1 of 2

Section 10 1100Visual Display Units


A. MarkerboardsB. TackboardsC. Markerboards and Tackboards, Board and Edge Trim for Map by Owner

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Backing

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.B. ASTM A424/A424M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, trim, and accessories.C. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inch in size illustrating materials and finish, color and

texture of chalkboard, markerboard, tackboard, tackboard surfacing, and trim.D. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to

cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Visual Display Boards:1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com.2. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com.

2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITSA. Markerboards: Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core.

1. Steel Face Sheet Thickness: 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch .2. Core: Particleboard, manufacturer's standard thickness, laminated to face sheet.3. Backing: Aluminum foil, laminated to core.4. Size: As indicated on drawings.

B. Map Frame and Backing: Map Provided by Owner1. Backing: Hardboard, 1/2 inch thick.2. Size: As indicated on drawings. (Verify with owner)3. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.4. Frame Profile: Manufacturer's standard5. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.

C. Tackboards: Fine-grained, homogeneous natural cork.1. Cork Thickness: 1/8 inch.


10 1100 - Visual Display UnitsPage 2 of 2

2.03 MATERIALSA. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424/A424M, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on

vitreous finish.B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.C. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet, 0.005 inch thick.D. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick.B. Mounting Brackets: Concealed.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as

indicated on shop drawings.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure units level and plumb.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame.C. Remove temporary protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion.

End of Section


10 1124 - Tackable Wall SystemsPage 1 of 4

Section 10 1124Tackable Wall Systems


A. Site fabricated, fabric-covered tackable wall system.B. Accessories as required for complete installation.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;

2009.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. ASTM E2573 - Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Site-Fabricated

Stretch Systems to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics; 2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Specimen warranty.

C. Selection Samples: Fabric swatches representing manufacturer's full range of available colors, textures, and patterns.

D. Verification Samples:1. For each fabric specified, minimum size 8 inches square, representing actual product in

color, texture, and pattern.2. Actual samples of all track profiles to be employed, including transitions between dissimilar

profiles.3. Tackable core backing material, minimum 12 inches square.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in County's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide components of tackable wall systems by single

manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants.B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in site-fabricated wall systems, with not less than five

years of documented experience in installing wall systems of the type specified, and approvedby the manufacturer.

C. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide system with flame spread index of 25, maximum, andsmoke developed index of 40, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of application workmanship.1. Finish areas designated by Architect.2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and overall appearance are

approved by Architect.3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable workmanship.4. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the completed Work.



1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect fabric, core, and track from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Do

not deliver materials to project until wet work such as concrete and plaster has been completed.B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not begin installation until interior conditions have reached temperature and humidity that willbe maintained during occupancy. Do not install products under environmental conditions outsidemanufacturer's absolute limits.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a 5-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.A. Provide replacement of damaged, soiled, or vandalized tackable wall panels for up to 3 years

from Date of Substantial Completion.1. Replacement of up to 10 percent of the originally installed panels shall be at no additional

cost to County.2. Replacement of damaged panels under this Article shall not include replacement of

defective panels covered under warranty provisions.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Tackable Wall Systems:1. Fabricmate Systems: www.fabricmate.com/#sle.2. Fabri-Trak Systems, Inc : www.fabritrak.com.3. Fabric Wall : www.actsusa.com.

2.02 TACKABLE WALL SYSTEMA. Tackable Wall System: Site-installed stretched fabric over tackable core and continuous

perimeter and intermediate mounting extrusions applied directly to wall surface; designed topermit removal and replacement of fabric in individual panels without affecting adjacent panels.1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index of 25, maximum; Smoke Developed

Index of 450, maximum; when whole system is tested in accordance with ASTM E84 usingmounting specified in ASTM E2573 for stretched systems.

2. Prefabricated framed panels are not acceptable.3. Fabric must be installed over tackable substrate without adhesives, tapes, or fasteners.

B. Verify that all adhesives and sealants employed in installation of tackable wall systems arelow-emission types, with low VOC ratings.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Frame: Extruded polymer track system with serrated jaws of sufficient strength to hold fabric in

place after repeated applications.1. Track Size: 3/8 inch protrusion from wall with minimum 1 inch base leg.2. Track Shape: Square at perimeter; square at intermediate abutting joints.3. Wall Thickness of Track: Minimum 0.062 inch.4. Profile: Beveled, 1/2 inch overall height. Beveled Freestanding at exposed edges of

panels5. Intermediate Joints: Butt joints square.6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards.

B. Core: Same thickness as track.C. Tackable Core: Fiberboard, 14-16 pcf density, flame retardant, 1/2 inch thickness.



D. Fabric: Heavy-duty fire-retardant commercial fabric, as provided by manufacturer of tackablewall system; color, pattern, and texture as selected from manufacturer's standards.

E. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer of tackable wall system for project conditions.F. Adhesives: Low VOC or water-based, approved by wall system manufacturer, and complying

with requirements of Section 01 6116.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that all casework, markerboards, door and window jambs, finished ceiling, and other

finished items abutting tackable wall systems have been installed.C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install tackable wall systems at locations indicated, complying with manufacturer's instructions.3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of tackable wall system, complying with manufacturer's instructions forcleaning and repair of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot besuccessfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION


10 1400 - SignagePage 1 of 4

Section 10 1400Signage


A. Room and door signs.B. Interior directional and informational signs.C. Interior Room Occupancy Signage at Community Room (Flat Sign)D. Building identification signs.E. Plaque.F. Traffic signs.G. Exterior Accessibility SignageH. Self Illuminating low level exit signs

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors.1. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from

County through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.

2. Submit for approval by County through Architect prior to fabrication.D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or

chips.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for County's use in maintenance of project.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.



1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.


A. Flat Signs:1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.3. Ark Ramos: www.arkramos.com4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Dimensional Letter Signs:1. Cosco Industries; Cast Aluminum: www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com/#sle.2. Ark Ramos.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Exterior Accessibility Signage1. Best Sign Systems: www.bestsigns.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Plaques:1. Ark Ramos: www.arkramos.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONSA. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1,

unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the mostcomprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, notincluding corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.3. Character Height: 1 inch.4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers

indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupantname.

6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, notthe numbers indicated on drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "InUse/Vacant" indicator.

7. Service Rooms: Identify with Room names as shown on the drawings, no numbers are toappear on signs.

8. Rest Rooms: Identify non accessible restrooms with pictograms, the names, and braille.Identify accessible restroom(s) adjacent to lobby with pictoram per American withDisabilities Act.

C. Exterior Accessibility Signage: To Comply with the American Disabilities Act and as shown ondrawings, included but not limited to:1. Van Accessible Parking Space Signage2. Accessible Building Entrance Signage at front door3. Parking Lot Entry "Tow Away" Signage - Obtain information from local jurisdiction.

D. Building Identification Signs:1. Use individual metal letters.2. Finish: As Selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full line.



3. Style: As Selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full line.4. Mount: PM-15. Size: as shown on Drawings.6. Mount on outside wall in location indicated on drawings.

E. Plaque:1. Model: A-002. Finish : As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line3. Letter Style: No 530 Optima4. Border Style: No 5165. Texture: Matte6. Mount: No 27. Size: To be determined by owner. (Assume 24"x30" for bid purposes.)8. Text: To be determined by owner. (Includes Text and Custom Graphics with Ark Ramos

"Perfect Impressions" or equal.)F. Traffic Signs: Locate where indicated on the drawings.G. Low Level Self Illuminating Exit Signs - Locate on wall within 8" of floor at strike side of all doors

that have powered exit signs.1. Color: To be selected by Architect

2.03 SIGN TYPESA. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.

1. Edges: Square.2. Corners: Square.3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: To Be Selected by Architect.4. Character Color: Contrasting color. To Be Selected By Architect.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding

metal.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.

End of Section


10 1410 - Architectural Dimensional LetteringPage 1 of 2

Section 10 1410Architectural Dimensional Lettering


A. Cast aluminum dimensional lettering for monument sign, including mounting hardware andaccessories for complete installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's illustrated product literature and specifications.C. Samples: Submit one sample of capital letter, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, finish, and method of attachment.D. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings indicating sign dimensions, letter font, size,

spacing, layout on wall, and mounting details.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment

devices.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Dimensional Letter Signs:1. Metallic Arts. www.metallicarts.com2. Approved equal.

2.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTERSA. Cast Metal Letters:

1. Metal: Aluminum casting.2. Finish: Dark Bronze Anodized.3. Font: Goudy Extra Bold4. Size and Qty: Per detail5. Mounting: Standard stud mounting .


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Landscape Architect to approve sign layout and letter placement on wall in field prior toinstallation.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.D. Install as indicated on the drawings.E. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.

End of Section


10 1410 - Architectural Dimensional LetteringPage 2 of 2



10 2601 - Wall and Corner GuardsPage 1 of 2

Section 10 2601Wall and Corner Guards


A. Corner guards.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Anchors for attachment of work of this section,concealed in wall.

B. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Backing1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in

measurements.C. Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, 12 inch long, illustrating component design,

configuration, color and finish.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special

attention.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall and Corner Guards:1. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com.

2.02 COMPONENTSA. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: Extruded one-piece unit without splices, installed with

screws.1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish.2. Gauge: 163. Size: 2 inches.4. Length: 48 inches.

B. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.B. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.


A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, securedrigidly in position to wall framing members only.

B. Position corner guard 6 inches above finished floor (flush with top of concrete curb, whereoccurs) to 84 inches high.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.


10 2601 - Wall and Corner GuardsPage 2 of 2

B. Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/4 inch.3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Corner Guard at all outside wall corners at the following locations:1. Apparatus Bay2. Decon/Laundry Room3. Hallway4. Kitchen

End of Section


10 2813 - Toilet, Bath, & Laundry AccessoriesPage 1 of 4

Section 10 2813Toilet, Bath, & Laundry Accessories


A. Toilet Room and Lavatory Accessories.B. Utility Room Accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing

1.03 REFERENCESA. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2005.B. ASTM A 554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2003.C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001.D. ASTM F 446 - Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed

in the Bathing Area; 1985 (Reapproved 2004).1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options

and accessories.C. Shop Drawings:

1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project.2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project.3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors

and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section.

D. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of products of this section, and countersigned by Contractor.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing

products of the types specified in this section.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing ofproducts; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging.

B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation.1.07 SEQUENCING

A. Supply locating and sizing templates, and other requirements, to fabricators and installers ofproducts referenced in RELATED SECTIONS Article for building in products of this section.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and

materials.C. Manufacturer's 10-year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors.D. Manufacturer's 10 year warranty, 3 years for motor brushes, for hand dryers.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERSA. Products Listed are manufactured by: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.



B. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment: Bobrick.com2. ASI-American Specialties, Inc; www.americanspecialties.com

C. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 FASTENINGS

A. All toilet and bath accessories shall be complete with all required fastenings, and all fasteningsshall harmonize with the item being fastened. All accessories requiring attachment shall bescrew-mounted, set in solid backing or reinforced concrete unit masonry, unless otherwisenoted.

2.03 TOILET ACCESSORIESA. Basic Construction Requirements:

1. Doors: Fabricated from minimum 0.0313 inch stainless steel sheet, formed hems atsight-exposed edges; welded corners, finished to match sheet finish.

2. Cabinets: Fabricated from minimum 0.0313 inch stainless steel sheet, formed hems atsight-exposed edges; all joints welded, sight-exposed welds finished to match sheet finish.

3. Hinges: Stainless steel piano hinge, 3/16 inch diameter barrel, full length of cabinet; hingeleaves spot-welded to door and cabinet body.

4. Locks: Tumbler locks, keyed alike other toilet accessory locks, with two keys for eachlock.

5. Stainless Steel Finish: No.4 satin unless otherwise specified.B. Paper Towel Dispenser/ Waste Receptacle: Classic series - recessed, Model B-369.C. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser : Classic series - surface mounted, Model B-221.D. Toilet Paper Holder: Double roll tissue dispenser with controlled delivery - surface mounted,

Model B-274.E. Baby Changing Station : Model KB110-SSRE.F. Robe Hook : Model B-677.G. Shower Curtain Rod : Classic Series - Extra Heavy Duty - Model B-6047.H. Shower Curtain : Model 204-3, with Model 204-1 hooks.I. Mop Holder : Model B223x36.J. Towel Bar: Extra heavy duty, Model B-530 24

2.04 MIRRORSA. Mirror : Model B-165 2436.

1. Finish: No.4 satin stainless steel.B. Channel Mirror Frames: Fabricated from 0.0375 inch stainless steel, formed to 1/2 by 1/2 by

1/2 inch channel; finished to match sheet finish; concealed mounting brackets with tamper-prooffasteners.

C. Tempered Glass Mirror: 1/4 inch thick polished tempered glass, two coats silver, hermeticallysealed with uniform electrolytically-deposited copper plating, backpainted with waterproofcoating.

2.05 GRAB BARSA. Grab Bars - Basic Requirements: Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a

900 pound force, from ASTM A 554 stainless steel tubing, 18 gauge (1.2mm), Type 304, 18-8alloy; formed 1-1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end; each end heliarc-welded to minimum1/8" thick stainless steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish. Flange covers shallbe 22 gauge and shall snap over mounting flanges to conceal mounting screws.

B. Grab Bars: Series B-5806.1. Sizes and configurations: As indicated on drawings.




A. Verification of Conditions:1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings.2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with

shop drawings.B. Installer's Examination:

1. Installer of this section shall examine conditions under which construction activities of thissection are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions areunacceptable.

2. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance ofconditions.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation

instructions.B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

3.03 CLEANINGA. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before

final inspection.B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTSA. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities.B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged

finishes caused by subsequent construction activities.

END OF SECTION


10/20/2021 3:58 PM 10 2813 - Toilet, Bath, & Laundry AccessoriesPage 4 of 4



10 2819 - Tub and Shower EnclosuresPage 1 of 4

Section 10 2819Tub and Shower Enclosures


A. Semi-frameless tub and shower doors; enclosures.B. Frameless shower doors; enclosures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: backing for enclosuresB. Section 06 6100 - Cast Polymer Fabrications: Shower wall finishC. Section 22 0000 - Plumbing: Shower fixtures

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2012.C. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix);2015.

D. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures forHigh Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.

E. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, SafetyPerformance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.

F. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2016.G. ASTM A480/A480M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless

and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2015.H. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.I. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.J. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.K. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.L. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.M. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;


A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, dimensions, identification of components, and interface with

adjacent construction.C. Selection Samples: Two sets, representing manufacturer's full range of available metal and

glass materials and finishes.D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in County's name and registered with manufacturer.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate complete preparation, installation, and

cleaning requirements.




section, with at least three years of documented experience.1. Provide certified glass products through ANSI accredited certifications that include plant

audits and independent laboratory performance testing.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Tub and Shower Enclosures:1. American Bath Group; Hinged Glass Door with fixed panel:

www.americanbathgroup.com/#sle.2. Coral Architectural Products, a division of Coral Industries, Inc; Gallant Swing Series:

www.coralap.com/#sle.3. HMI; Trufit Series, Frameless - Swing Door Enclosure: www.hmiglass.com/#sle.

2.02 TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES - GENERALA. Exposed Fittings and Hardware: Aluminum.B. Patch Fittings for Semi-Frameless or Frameless Enclosures: Hinges and Glass mounts.

1. Edge Profile: Beveled.C. Concealed Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel.D. Shower Door Height: 79 inches.E. Door Pull: Back-to-back; D-pull; mounted through the glass.F. Provide swinging doors with a continuous drip rail and wiper blade at bottom of panel. Attach

drip rail adhesively with transparent double-sided tape with no exposed screws.2.03 SEMI-FRAMELESS TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES

A. Description: Fixed glass panels individually framed in metal extrusions. Operable glass panelspartially framed in metal extrusions with one or more exposed glass edges. Enclosureinstallation may include separate metal sills, jambs and headers.

B. Head Condition: Header.C. Fixed Panels:

1. Fixed Panel Glass Thickness: 3/8 inch, tempered.2. Fixed Panel Framing: Extruded aluminum.

D. Semi-Frameless Glass Doors:1. Door Glass Thickness: 3/8 inch, tempered.2. Sill Condition: Vinyl sill.3. Swinging Doors:

a. Hinges: Full-height continuous hinge rail with door stop at 100 degrees; swing out.2.04 MATERIALS

A. Tempered Glass: Annealed clear flat glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I,Quality Q3, fully tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and as follows:1. Comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category 2 and ANSI Z97.1.2. Safety Glazing Labeling: Provide permanent certification label in accordance with Safety

Glazing Certification Council (SGCC).3. Glazing: Clear4. Thickness: As indicated in enclosure and door types above.5. Coating: Water and stain resistant with antimicrobial.



6. Exposed Edges: Ground and polished smooth with 45 degree chamfers.7. Prepare glazing panels for indicated fittings and hardware before tempering.8. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not

permitted.B. Aluminum Components: Complying with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), alloy 6063, temper as

indicated, with anodized finish complying with AAMA 611, and powder coating complying withAAMA 2603 or AAMA 2604 for select colors.1. Color: Brushed nickel.

C. Stainless Steel Components: Complying with ASTM A666, Type 304 alloy.1. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes and Moldings: ASTM A276/A276M, Type 304.2. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 6 Dull satin finish, in accordance with ASTM A480/A480M.

D. Glazing Seals: Provide manufacturer's standard clear polycarbonate seal at jambs and doorbottom for water-tight seal between glass and surrounding frame or construction.

E. Sealant: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, complying with ASTM C920, clear.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until supports and adjacent substrates are complete.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare substrates as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.B. Fit and align tub and shower enclosure level and plumb.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Verify enclosure does not leak while shower is running and door is fully closed and catch is

engaged.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tub and shower enclosure doors to operate smoothly.3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove protective film and temporary stickers from exposed metal and glass surfaces.B. Metal: Clean exposed metal finishes with potable water and mild detergent, in accordance with

manufacturer recommendations; do not use abrasive materials or chemicals, detergents orother substances that may damage the material or finish.

C. Glass and Glazing: Clean glazing surfaces; remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt,and other substances; do not use abrasive materials or chemicals, detergents or othersubstances that may damage the material or finish.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

End of Section

http://www.aamanet.org/general.asp?sect=2&id=45





































10 4400 - Fire Protection SpecialtiesPage 1 of 2

Section 10 4400Fire Protection Specialties


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Backing and framing recess

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to NFPA 10.B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose

specified and indicated.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination

requirements.1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisheringredients.


A. Fire Extinguishers:1. Ansul, a Tyco Business: www.ansul.com.2. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com.3. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/sle.4. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. Ansul, a Tyco Business: www.ansul.com.2. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com.3. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/sle.4. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com.5. Or pre-approved equal6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable

codes, whichever is more stringent.B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Class 2A10BC.2. Metal valves and siphon tubes

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Semi Recessed: Larsen # AL 2409-R7

1. Door Style: Full Glassa. Metal: Formed aluminum


10 4400 - Fire Protection SpecialtiesPage 2 of 2

b. Door Glazing: Float glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick, and set in resilient channel glazinggasket.

c. Lettering: Die cut, vertical, redB. Surface Mounted: Wall bracket Larsen, type 821


A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, with midpoint of door handle at 39" above

finished floor.C. Install bracket mounted extinguishers such that the bottom edge of the extinguisher is at 26 1/2"

above the finished floor.D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

End of Section


10 5100 - LockersPage 1 of 2

Section 10 5100Lockers


A. Wall Mounted Metal Turnout LockersB. Free Standing Metal Turnout Lockers

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: BackingB. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, Color and Finish.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.


A. Metal Lockers:1. Gear Grid: www.geargridcorp.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 Metal Turnout LockersA. Quantity: As shown on the drawings.B. Size: Standard - 30" W x 20" D x 72" HC. Shelves: Two (2) shelves (constructed of high-strength ¼" wire)D. Hooks: Three (3) apparel hooks per locker.E. Adjustability: Wire shelves adjustable in 3" incrementsF. Frame: Heavy-duty 1-1/4" tubingG. Side & Back Grids: High-strength ¼" wireH. Nameplate: 2" H x 16" W custom printed name plate (1 per each locker)I. Mounting Brackets: 11 gauge steelJ. Finish: Powder coatK. Color: RedL. Accessories: "Gearglove" glove and "Geardryer" turnout coat hanger for each unit.M. Top shelf: "Top Side Storage" continuous shelf above all lockers.N. At freestanding locker set, provide caster at each base leg.


A. Verify mounting surface is in correct configuration and ready for mounting prior to installation.B. In the event of a discrepancy, Notify the Architect immediately.C. Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all issues have been fully resolved.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


10 5100 - LockersPage 2 of 2

B. Install lockers plumb and square.C. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb.D. Install accessories.

End of Section


10 7500 - FlagpolesPage 1 of 2

Section 10 7500Flagpoles


A. Aluminum Flagpoles.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

B. NAAMM FP 1001 - Guide Specifications for Design Loads of Metal Flagpoles; 2007.1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flagpole With Flag Flying: Resistant without permanent deformation to 90 miles/hr windvelocity; non-resonant, safety design factor of 2.5.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on pole, accessories, and configurations.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and imposed

loads.D. Maintenance Data: Provide lubrication and periodic maintenance requirement and schedules.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Design flagpole foundation under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer

experienced in design of this Work and licensed in California.B. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single

manufacturer, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices.C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in protective shipping tubes or

containers.B. Protect flagpole and accessories from damage or moisture.


A. Flagpoles:1. American Flagpole: www.americanflagpole.com.2. Concord Industries, Inc: www.concordindustries.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FLAGPOLESA. Flagpoles: Designed in accordance with NAAMM FP 1001.

1. Material: Aluminum.2. Mounting: Ground mounted type.3. Nominal Height: 30 ft; measured from nominal ground elevation.4. Design: Cone tapered.5. Halyard: Interior type .

2.03 POLE MATERIALSA. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Finial Ball: Stainless steel, 6 inch diameter.


10 7500 - FlagpolesPage 2 of 2

B. Truck Assembly: Cast aluminum; revolving, stainless steel ball bearings, non-fouling.C. Cleats: 9 inch size, aluminum with galvanized steel fastenings, two per halyard.D. Cleat Box: Aluminum, with built-in hinge and hasp assembly, attached to pole with tamper proof

screws inside box.E. Halyard: 5/16 inch diameter polypropylene, braided, white. Provide bronze snap shackles for

two flags.2.05 MOUNTING COMPONENTS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard base system for the type of flagpole installation required.2.06 FINISHING

A. Metal Surfaces in Contact With Concrete: Asphaltic paint.B. Aluminum: Mill finish.C. Finial: Spun finish.


A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated onshop drawings.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with

asphaltic paint.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Electrically ground flagpole installation.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 inch.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag function smoothly.

End of Section


11 3013 - Residential AppliancesPage 1 of 4

Section 11 3013Residential Appliances


A. Kitchen appliances.B. Laundry appliances.C. Fire station appliances

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 22 0000 - Plumbing: Plumbing connections for appliances.B. Section 26 0500 - Common Work Results for Electrical: Electrical connections for appliances.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of

each piece of residential equipment specified.C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, rough-in dimensions, attachments to other

work. Include connections to utilities, clearance requirements for equipment access and maintenance.

D. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in County's name and registered with manufacturer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For laundry equipment, include emergency, operation and maintenance manuals, including a schedule with Manufacturer's name and model number, and list of factory-authorized service agencies including addresses and telephone numbers.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL (DIR) and complying with NEMA Standards

(National Electrical Manufacturers Association).B. Gas Appliances: Bearing design certification seal of American Gas Association (AGA).

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens.D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers.E. Provide three (3) year manufacturer warranty on washer extractor on any part of the equipment

assembly and five (5) year manufacturer warranty on main frame, bearing, cylinder or cylindershaft assembly from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES

A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.B. Refrigerator Free-standing, top-mounted freezer, and frost-free.

1. Frididaire Stainless Steel Refrigeratora. Model # FFTR1821T Sb. Size: 30” W x 66” H x 30” D

2. Provide all trim necessary for a complete installation of refrigerator and freezercombination.

3. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity.



4. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiencystandards set by U.S. Department of Energy (DOE).

5. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker, and light in freezer compartment.6. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.

C. Range: Natural gas, free-standing, with sealed burners.1. Thermador, 36" wide, natural gas, Model "Pro Harmony Standard Depth", PRG366WH2. Size: 36 inches wide by 24.75 inches deep by 36 inches high.3. Ovens: Convection with electronic ignition.

a. Oven burner 20,500 BTUb. Infrared broiler: 17,500 BTU

4. Burners:a. 18,000 BTU: 3b. 15,000 BTU: 3

5. Features: Include oven door window and oven light6. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.7.

D. Cooking Exhaust: Range hood.1. Thermador: Low profile model # HPCN36WS2. Size: 36 inches wide.3. Fan: six-speed, 1,000 cfm4. Exhaust: Round, vented to exterior.5. Features: Include LED cooktop light and removable grease filter.6. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.7. Options: Integrated blower, VTN1090R with remote switch

E. Microwave: Countertop.1. General Electric, Profile Model # PES 7227 SLSS

a. Size: 14 7/8 high by 24 1/8 wide by 19 7/8 inches deep2. Capacity: 1.2 cubic ft.3. Power: 950 watts.4. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.

F. Waste Disposer, Waste King, Legend Series, Model 8000: stainless steel grindingcomponents, corrosion proof glass filled polyester grinding chamber, overload protection, directwired, dishwasher connection, drain elbow, drain connector, sound reduction features, andremovable splash guard.1. Power: 1 HP.2. Capacity: Large.3. Height: 16-1/16 inch.4. Depth: 8-5/8 inch.5. Controls: Wall switch.6. Voltage: 115 volts, 60 Hz, 4 amps.7. Sink Flange Kit: Stainless steel.

G. Dishwasher: Undercounter.1. GE Profile Series, Model #PDT145SSL, stainless steel finish, hard food disposer and

self-cleaning filter.2. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature

boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack.3. Noise: 44 Dba4. Finish: Stainless steel.

2.02 LAUNDRY APPLIANCESA. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star RatingB. Clothes Washer, Type stainless steel washtub, 0.5 HP motor: Front-loading.

1. Size: 4.5 Cu Ft.



2. Controls: Mechanical Controls.3. Cycles: 10.4. Motor Speed: Two-speed.5. Features: Include optional second rinse, bleach dispenser, fabric softener dispenser,

self-cleaning lint filter, sound insulation, and end of cycle signal.6. Finish: Painted steel, color white.7. Manufacturers:

a. Speed Queen FF7 Model # ADG3SRGS115TW01.C. Clothes Dryer, Type stainless steel drum: Natural gas, stationary.

1. Size: 7.3 Cu Ft..2. Controls: mechanical controls, with electronic moisture-sensing dry control.3. Temperature Selections: Two.4. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, knit/delicate, and air only.5. Features: Include reversible door, stationary rack, sound insulation, end of cycle signal,

and door window.6. Finish: Painted steel, color white.7. Manufacturers:

a. Speed Queen DR3 Model #ADG3SRGS115TW01.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 FIRE STATION APPLIANCESA. Washer Extractor

1. Suspension: Rigid2. Capacity: 6.34 Cu Ft.3. Width: 30.5 inches4. Extraction G force: 100 Gs5. Drive Motor: 4 Hp6. Unimac, Model No. UW45 (9 Speed)

a. Provide all components necessary for Chemical Injection Supply System.B. Turnout/Hose Dryer

1. Unimac, Fireman's PPE System: Model UTGC6EDG44a. Size: 61-1/8"W c 80-3/8"H x 32-5/8"Db. Capacity: 6 sets Turnout Gearc. Electrical Connection: 208V


A. Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located.B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.C. Coordinate with specifications in Divisions 15 and 16 power and mechanical requirements and

hookup locations prior to rough-in.D. Washer Extractor System Startup and Commissioning: Arrange for a local manufacturer's

representative to inspect machines prior to startup and operation.3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust equipment to provide efficient operation.3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard.



B. Wash and clean equipment.End of Section


12 2116 - Vertical Louver BlindsPage 1 of 4

Section 12 2116Vertical Louver Blinds


A. Vertical louver blinds at at all storefront windows and doors unless otherwise noted.1. Storefront doors in hallway to receive shades, not vertical blinds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail

brackets.B. Section 12 2400 - Window Shades

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Light and Privacy Scale:

1. Level Four (4): Diffuses the light and reveals no shape or details to the outside. Providescomplete privacy and room-darkening options.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2015.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:


C. Certification: Provide certification that product complies with WCMA A100.1.D. Shop Drawings: Indicate headrail location and schematic wire diagram of electronic controls

and motors.E. Selection Samples: For vanes, color chips or material samples representing manufacturer's full

range of available colors and patterns.F. Verification Samples: For vanes, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual materials,

color and perforations.G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's data on repair and replacement of vanes,

chains, and other parts.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for County's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Vanes: 20 of each type and size.


section, with not less than three years of documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum 3

years ofdocumented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. If blinds are delivered early and stored at the project, deliver in unopened containers; handleand store in such a manner to protect them from damage.




A. Vertical Louver Blinds:1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com.2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com.3. Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTSA. Vertical Louver Blinds: Horizontal travel, vertical vane louver units complete with tracks, pivot

and traversing mechanisms, and accessories, as follows:1. Louvers: Fabric in-fill PVC louver blades of the specified size.2. Operation: Manual.3. Direction of Travel: As indicated on the drawings.4. Mounting: Outside (face of jambs).5. Cord and Chain Operation: Comply with WCMA A100.1.

B. Tracks: Channel tracks as required for type of operation, extruded aluminum with clearanodized finish, with end caps.1. Provide a single tracks to span all window of the same type in a row, including wall space

between.2. Vane Rotation: Chain driven direct rotation by activating tilt gear within end cap assembly

in turn actuating tilt rod and worm-and-spur gears in carrier trucks.3. Operating Components: Internally mounted heavy-duty extruded aluminum tilt rod, vane

carriers, and other components required for proper performance and designed for smooth,quiet, trouble free operation.

4. Pivot Mechanism: Geared for synchronous 180 degrees rotation of vanes and type ofoperation indicated.

5. Vane Carriers: Metal carriers with ball-bearing wheels or thermoplastic trucks, equippedwith linkages or other devices to ensure positive spacing of vanes.

6. Tilt Chain: Nickel plated brass beaded ball chain, minimum 1/8 inch diameter; locate atdrawback side of units as indicated.

C. Fabric Vanes: Integrally colored, extruded PVC vanes with fabric infill; flat, 3-1/2 inches (80mm)wide.1. Fabric: Manufacturer's standard flame resistant fabric.2. Flammability: Comply with NFPA 701.3. PVC Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.4. PVC Texture: Smooth.5. Fabric Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of

colors.D. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for the mounting

configuration and span indicated; provide manufacturer’s standard L- bracket with clip foroutside mounting and clip only for inside mounting.

E. Valances: To match vane design and color.1. Style: As selected by Architect from blind manufacturer’s full selection.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.B. Fabricate blinds to fit openings within specified tolerances.

1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom ofvanes and finish floor.

2. Horizontal Dimensions - Outside Mounting: Cover window frames, trim, and casingscompletely.

C. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate blinds to within plus/minus 1/8 inch of intended dimensions.




A. Do not start installation before openings are finished and all finishes have been completed; donot install until painting is completed.

B. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the bestresult for the substrate under the project conditions.

B. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to supportblinds.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using mounting style as indicated.B. Installation Tolerances:

1. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch.C. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.D. Replace blinds that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to County.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean installed work to like-new condition.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


12 2400 - Window ShadesPage 1 of 4

Section 12 2400Window Shades


A. Room darkening and sunscreen double roller window shades and accessories.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrailbrackets.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for window shade systems.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2015.B. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sequencing:1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken.2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3301 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including

preparation instructions and recommendations, materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories.

C. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns.D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,

preparation, and installation of product.E. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed

warranty completed in County's name and registered with manufacturer.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum five(5) years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each

opening.B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.09 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide manufacturer's warranty from Date of Substantial Completion, covering the following:

1. Shade Hardware: Twenty-five years.2. Fabric: Ten years.




A. Manually Operated Roller Shades:1. Draper, Inc; Clutch Operated FlexShade: www.draperinc.com/#sle.2. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com.3. MechoSystems: www.mechoshade.com.

B. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from asingle supplier.

2.02 WINDOW SHADE APPLICATIONSA. Shades at all windows and storefront not recieving vertical louvers, including shades on

storefront doors: Sheer shades.1. Exception: No shades or vertical louvers are required at windows or storefront in

Apparatus Bay.2. Type: Roller shades.3. Operation: Manual.

B. Blackout Shades at all dorm room and day room windows: Double solar and blackout shadecloth.1. Type: Double roller shades.2. Operation: Manual.

2.03 ROLLER SHADESA. Roller Shades: Fabric roller shades complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars,

hardware and accessories.1. Drop: Regular roll.

B. Fabric: Non-flammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shapeunder normal operation.1. Sheer Shades: Reduce glare yet still reveal considerable details to the outside; no privacy;

Openness Factor greater than 1 percent.2. Blackout Shades: Block virtually all the light; Openness Factor equal to zero (0).3. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large and small tests.

C. Roller Tubes: As required for type of operation.1. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric

edge.D. Hembars and Hembar Pockets: Exposed hembar with light seal for blackout shades. Wall

thickness designed for weight requirements and adaptation to uneven surfaces, to maintainbottom of shade straight and flat.

E. Manual Operation for Interior Shades: Clutch operated continuous loop; beaded ball chain.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Fascias: Size as required to conceal shade mounting.B. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting

configuration and span indicated.C. Fasteners: Non-corrosive, and as recommended by shade manufacturer.

2.05 FABRICATIONA. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.B. Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.

1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottombar and window stool.

2. Horizontal Dimensions - Outside Mounting: Cover window frames, trim, and casingscompletely.




A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.B. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for

substrate under the project conditions.B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using

mounting devices as indicated.B. Installation Tolerances:

1. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch.C. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to County.D. Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no

telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Proceedures, for closeout submittals.B. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation and maintenance of window shade system to County's

personnel.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.07 MAINTENANCE

END OF SECTION


12 3600 - Countertops Page 1 of 4

Section 12 3600Countertops


A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2015a.C. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Quality Standard Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and

Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0.D. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.F. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; 2003.G. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron-Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.H. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products.1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation, including joint details, joint locations, anchor and support details and edge and profile details; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, patterns, sealant and grout, where occurs.

F. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.G. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.H. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and

repair of countertop surfaces.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in thissection, with not less than five years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Skilled workers who custom-fabricate specified countertops similar tothe work of this project. Must have ten (10) years minimum continuous operating experiencefabricating and installing the specified countertop.



1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver no components to Project site until areas are ready for installation.B. Store products indoors in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces.D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuoussubstrate.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA

LD 3; acrylic polymer resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous andcapable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surfacecoating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Manufacturers:

1) Dupont: www.corian.com.b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke

developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.

3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; square edge.5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.6. Skirts: Locate Where it is open below and as indicated on drawings.

B. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A 666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inchnominal sheet thickness.1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.2. Exposed Edge Shape: Marine edge with return; edge raised 3/16 inch above counter with

45 degree transition, minimum 1 inch flat rim; 1-1/2 inch high turndown, 1/2 inch return toface of case; reinforced with hardwood or steel.

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch radius coved joint to countertop;square top edge with 1 inch wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch turndown.

4. Splash Dimensions: Backsplash to extend to bottom of upper cabinets, unless otherwisenoted.

5. Sinks: Same material, same thickness; integrally flush welded to counter; bottom slopedto outlet; radiused interior corners; drain outlet located in back corner.

6. Associated Window Sills: Same material, same thickness.7. Wall Panels at Range: Provide a stainless steel wall panel to match the countertop to fully

cover the wall surface behind the range from the floor to the bottom of the Vent Hood.8. Cabinet Panel at Range: Provide stainless steel panel to match the countertop mounted to

cover the entire side of each cabinet end at either side of the range opening.C. Galvanized Steel Countertops: ASTM A 653 steel galvanized sheet; 14 gage, 0.0785 inch

nominal sheet thickness.1. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch high by 1 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.2. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch radius coved joint to countertop;

square top edge with 1 inch wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch turndown;

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20LD%203





































3. Exposed Edge Shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch high face, 1/2 inch returnto face of case ; reinforced with hardwood or steel.

4. All fabrications, structural clips and other metal fabrication products shall be galvanized perASTM A123 and ASTM A153.

5. All bolts and fasteners shall be galvanized per ASTM A1532.02 MATERIALS

A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.

B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer ofmaterials being joined.

C. Cove Molding for Top of Splashes: Rubber with semi-gloss finish and T-spline to fit betweensplash and wall; 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch; color as selected.

D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops and wall panels up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieceswith adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

D. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosings and backand end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension arepermitted.1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, as

required.3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns.4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire

bottom surface.E. Galvanized Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosings and back

and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension arepermitted.1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.2. Provide galvanized steel hat channel stiffeners to underside as required.3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns.4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire

bottom surface.5. Repair paint: ZRC cold galvanizing compound or equal.

F. Cutouts and Holes:1. Under-Counter Fixtures: Make cutouts for under-counter fixtures in shop using template or

pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for

counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and dill holes at corners of cutoutlocations.

























































3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, such as counter-mounted soapdispensers and similar items.

G. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,finished to match.



preparation before proceeding.C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required.

B. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

1. Where indicated use rubber cove molding.2. Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.B. Protect installed products until completion of project.C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



































12 9313 - Bicycle RacksPage 1 of 2

Section 12 9313Bicycle Racks


A. Bike RackB. Bike Repair Station

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Mounting surface for bicycle racks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS



C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent walls, doors, and obstructions.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Handle racks and accessories with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the

finish.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 Bicycle Racks

A. Manufacturer: Dero (www.dero.com)B. Description: 1.5" OD 11 guage tube in the shape of a bike. Parks 2-4 bikes.C. Model: Bike Bike RackD. Finish: "Deep Red" powdercoatE. Mounting: Embed mount per manufacturer's instructions

2.02 Bike Repair StationA. Manufacturer: Dero (www.dero.com)B. Description: Bike repair station including tools on stainless steel cables with tamper-proof

fasteners, and air pump.C. Model: Fixit with Air Kit 2.D. Finish: "Deep Red" powdercoat.E. Mounting: Embed mount per manufacturer's instructions. Mount Air Kit 2 to Fixit.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Bicycle Racks: Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on

each bend and each end, securing one wheel and part of the frame.


12 9313 - Bicycle RacksPage 2 of 2


A. Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks and accessories..B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install bicycle racks and accessories level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on

drawings.C. In-Ground Anchor Installation:

1. Prepare holes in size according to manufacturer’s instructions.2. Place anchoring bolts through the holes in the pipe.3. Lower rack into holes, ensuring the bottom of lower bends are at least 1-1/2 inch from the

ground.4. Pour concrete and level rack.5. Support until dry.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could

damage finish.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

End of Section


21 1000 – WET-PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM Page 1 of 8

SECTION 21 1313

WET-PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:

1. Fabricate, install and secure necessary approvals for Automatic Wet Fire SprinklerSystems for the Fire Station No. 34 project located in Thousand Oaks, California. Thefire sprinkler system is to include fire sprinkler coverage throughout the new fire stationbuilding as shown on the Construction Documents including the FP Sheets. Installcomplete fire protection systems acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for theproposed systems.

2. Provide shop drawings, all materials and equipment, and perform all labor required todesign and install a complete new fire protection systems from the new fire sprinkler riserlocations indicated on construction document sheets, and continuing throughout thebuilding in accordance with this specification, the current adopted editions of NFPA 24 &NFPA 13, and County of Ventura standards.

3. Provide personnel and materials to perform all acceptance tests, and to assist ininspections. Tests to be witnessed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

4. Provide all fire stopping material and installation labor, using UL Listed fire blockingsystems, at all fire sprinkler system penetrations of fire rated assemblies.


A. Contractors and Manufacturers:

1. The performance of the work described in this Section is restricted to establishedContractors and Manufacturers specializing in automatic fire sprinkler systems that havesatisfactorily completed jobs of this size and type, who are acceptable to the AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction. The Contractor shall hold a valid California C-16 contractor’slicense. The Contractor shall demonstrate satisfactory installations of comparablesystems within the proceeding five years, and shall supply references.

B. Design Responsibility:

1. The Contractor is hereby advised that the responsibility for the installation of the firesprinkler system is totally that of the Contractor, and that all designs and resolutionsproposed in the Shop Drawings, calculations, and related documentation must bedemonstrated not only in the test procedure but also throughout the guarantee period.Shop drawings must be provided by the Contractor to incorporate the final structuralframing provided by the metal building manufacturer and to update and/or revise the firesprinkler system construction document plans as required for any changes to piperouting, hanging details and seismic bracing required due to final structural framingdesign.

2. The System specified herein is for defining design intent and minimum performancerequirements and may not be downgraded without written consent of the Architect,Owner and the State Fire Marshal.



3. See Construction Documents for location requirements of fire sprinkler system.

C. Testing Laboratories: All material and equipment used in the installation of the fire protectionsystems shall be listed as approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., List of FireProtection Equipment and Materials, or approved by other appropriate, nationally recognizedtesting laboratories for use in sprinkler systems, and shall be the latest design of themanufacturer.

D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Obtain necessary approvals from, have all materialsapproved by, and comply with requirements of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

E. Coordinate and secure installation of fire service line and connect to fire service lateral asrequired. Installation, flushing and testing to be in accordance with NFPA 24.

F. Comply with the all requirements of the currently adopted state editions of NFPA Standards 13and 24.

1.3 PRODUCTS AND SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Complete materials list of items with available finishes proposed to be providedunder this Section. The quality of materials required for this installation shall be that whichcomply with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the 2016 edition of NFPA13. All materials must be UL Listed for fire protection. All piping shall be free from rust.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Prior to submitting shop drawings and product submittals to the Architect, indicate anychanges to the following items on plans and submit to the Architect and Owner forreview:

a. Sprinkler heads in finished rooms:b. Grills and registers:c. Light fixtures, speakers and smoke detectors:d. All underground fire service piping, backflow assemblies, thrust blocks and related

appurtenances.

2. Required fire sprinkler locations:Per Construction documents, any proposed revisions are to comply with the following:

a. Corridors and halls: Align heads symmetrically so as not to conflict with otherceiling items.

b. Rooms: Center sprinkler heads in-line with other ceiling devices.c. Acoustical tile or panel ceilings: Locate heads in center of tile or panel.

3. Architect will review layout and may relocate or add sprinkler heads to achieve an orderlypattern of ceiling elements, at the Contractors sole expense.

4. If required by Architect, meetings will be held at their office to coordinate locations ofsprinklers with other ceiling elements.



5. After obtaining Architect approval of sprinkler head locations, prepare final shop drawingsand product submittals for review by the Architect. Indicate all elements indicated inparagraph 1.3, B, 1 above, and any other required information.

6. If required, the Contractor may be required to provide installation level drawings,calculations and submittals to the State Fire Marshal’s office; permits will be theresponsibility of the installing contractor.

7. Submit proposed changes or revisions of shop drawings to Architect for review andapproval prior to work. Include details and sections as required to clearly define andclarify the design

C. Project Record Documents:

1. Submit three (3) copies of Project Record Documents

2. Contractor to provide a completed and signed NFPA 13 Contractors Material and TestCertificate upon acceptance of the system by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

D. Operation/Maintenance Data And Warranty:

1. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliverto the Owner and the Architect (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.Include in each copy of the Manual of a copy of the Project Record Documents

2. The Contractor shall provide a minimum warranty of one year after final inspection andsign-off of the fire sprinkler system, including all parts, materials of construction and laborfor the installation.

E. General Piping Requirements

1. Underground Piping: Provide an installation which is complete in all regards including,but not necessarily limited to:

a. Provide fire service supply piping per Civil Engineers’ utility plans and site waterline specification.

b. Connections from main to base of riser shall be as shown on project drawings.c. When using approved PVC piping for underground supply piping, a transition shall

be made to ferrous pipe shall be accomplished at the following locations:1) A minimum distance of five feet from a 90-degree elbow designed to supply

a sprinkler riser.2) A minimum distance of five feet from the underground elbows on the supply

and service side of an above ground exterior check valve and other abovegrade exposed piping, fittings, connections or valves.

3) A minimum distance of five feet prior to entering a building.4) A minimum distance of five feet prior to passing under or through a footing

or retaining wall.

2. Above Grade Piping – All pipe shall be made in the USA domestically manufactured, andshall be UL Listed for Fire Protection System installation.

a. Flanged fittings shall be used at above grade exterior locations.



b. Connections and fittings shall be threaded, flanged, grooved, or welded.Grooveless clamp or saddle fittings are not acceptable. Fittings and couplings shallbe Class 125 (standard) weight minimum.

F. Fire Sprinklers:

1. In soffits and interior ceilings: Reliable Semi-Recessed, Upright or Concealed QuickResponse Pendents (finish selected by architect) or approved equal, per approved firesprinkler system construction document plans.

2. In hard ceilings: Reliable Semi-Recessed, Upright or Concealed Quick ResponsePendents (finish selected by architect) or approved equal, per approved fire sprinklersystem construction document plans.

3. Sidewall interior sprinklers to be Reliable Quick Response HSW (finish to be selected byArchitect) or approved equal, per approved fire sprinkler system construction documentplans.

4. Concealed and interior roof spaces: Reliable Quick Response upright or pendents, brassfinish, as approved for use, per approved fire sprinkler system construction documentplans.

5. Exterior Locations: Sprinklers installed in exterior exposed locations are to be of bronzefinish and as specified in the construction documents.

G. Fire Sprinkler System Piping:

1. Pipe sized 1” thru 2”: Use domestically manufactured Schedule 40 black steel pipe withthreaded, banded cast or malleable iron fittings, or equivalent, UL Listed for fireprotection.

2. Pipe sized 2-1/2” thru 8”: Use domestically manufactured Schedule 10 black steel pipewith welded and/or grooved cast iron fittings of required pressure rating, UL Listed for fireprotection.

3. Piping sized 8” and larger to be Schedule 10, UL Listed steel piping.

H. Fire Department Connection (FDC)

1. Provide appropriate sized (four inch or larger, depending on system design) freestandingpipe mount, cast brass FDC with 2-1/2-inch individually clappered fire department inletconnections with breakable cast iron domed caps, one-inch cast lettering. The FireDepartment Connection shall be Potter Roemer Standard No. 5500 series, UL listed witha finish as selected by the Architect.

2. Fire department connection shall be located where indicated on the constructiondocuments. Where conditions do not permit, the fire department connections shall beplaced where readily accessible in case of fire and not liable to injury or fire exposure. Allfire department connection locations shall be approved by the Authority HavingJurisdiction.

3. Where subject to mechanical injury, protection shall be provided. The means ofprotection shall be approved and shall be arranged in a manner, which will not interferewith the connection to inlets.



4. Maintain a 36-inch clear radius around the fire department connection. Grade variationwithin this radius shall not exceed 1:12. The fire department connection shall be arrangedso that hose lines can be readily and conveniently attached to inlets without interferencefrom any nearby objects including buildings, fences, posts, or other fire departmentconnections.

5. The fire department connection shall be clearly visible from the street and provided withidentification sign as approved by the State Fire Marshal’s office.

I. Supervisory switch: Designed so that it will operate between the first and second revolution ofthe valve control wheel or when the stem moves no more than one fifth of the distance from itsnormal position or if the unit is removed from its mounting.

J. Flow switch: All wetted parts of brass or stainless steel. Flow switch to be complete with retardsetting providing 30 second delay before actuating.

K. Valves: U.L. listed Kennedy, Nibco or Stockham or approved alternate. Valves shall be rated forminimum 175 psi working pressure zones.

L. Pressure gauge: Bourdon spring pressure type with non-corrodible movements. Cases andrings black enamel finish. Gauges shall have 4-1/2” dials with white background, black linesand figures, calibrated for 2 times working pressure. Installation: Each gauge connected to itsrespective pipe line located where shown and at inlet and outlet of each pump, by means ofsuitable brass pipe, pigtails and fittings containing a brass cock, Ashcroft, U.S. Gauge Companyor Crosby.

M. Piping Seismic Separation Joints, where required, shall be Metraloop-Fireloop UL ListedFlexible Expansion Loops, as manufactured by the Metraflex Company Chicago, Illinois.

N. Sprinkler Cabinet

1. Provide cabinet containing spare sprinkler heads and equipment of the following type andnumber installed at an interior location nearest the wall at the system riser, in anaccessible location as directed by Architect, and as approved by the State Fire Marshal’soffice. Provide 6 heads of each type used in the installation, with sprinkler wrenches.

2. The cabinet shall be distinctly labeled, designating the type and quantity of equipment itcontains.

1.4 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION

A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the reviewed Shop Drawings and therequirements of the State Fire Marshal’s office. Relocate any sprinklers not aligned with otherceiling fixtures or outlets at Contractors sole expense.

B. Coordinate routing of sprinkler piping with all other trades that will be affected by the installationof the fire sprinkler system so as to avoid interferences. The cost of any field to work in placedue to incomplete or inaccurate coordination revisions with other trades will be the responsibilityof the Contractor

C. Maintain maximum clearances above ceilings. All piping to be concealed unless specificallynoted otherwise on the plans.



D. Install drains on main risers and auxiliary drains in accordance with standard practices and localordinances. Install one Inspector’s Test drain on each system and discharge to an approvedexterior location where indicated on the project drawings and approved by the Architect.

E. Access: Do not locate any device requiring access in walls or above ceilings of public areaswithout Architect’s prior approval. Provide access doors complying with specifications andsigns for all concealed devices.

F. Piping, Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Sleeves: Install in complete accordance with NFPA 13requirements, using UL Listed components by Tolco/Cooper B-Line/Cooper B-Line.

G. Install all horizontal piping so as to run parallel to or perpendicular to the building walls, unlessotherwise shown on the Drawings or approved by the Architect. Do not install sprinkler pipingthat obstructs any door openings.

H. Guide and support all vertical risers or piping in accordance with standard practice. Fabricateand construct pipe joints so that they produce a true alignment of the pipe. Ream all pipe ends.Construct welded pipe joints in accordance with applicable codes.

I. Run all piping in such a manner as to provide appropriate flexibility with respect to expansionand contraction. In general, accomplish this with flexible couplings, expansion loops and/orleads from mains with proper lengths and appropriate fittings. Anchor piping is required.

J. Where exposed piping penetrates the floors, walls, or ceiling of finished areas, providechromium plated pipe escutcheons at the penetrations.

K. Provide pipe sleeves through partitions, walls, and slabs and outside walls for piping furnishedand installed under this Section. Extend all vertical pipe sleeves in floor 6” above the finish.Provide Drawings showing openings for proper installation of the work specified.

L. Provide all UL Listed hangers and supports required for the installation. Bracing the pipes tobottom flanges of steel beams is not permitted.

M. Use hot dipped galvanized materials in any exterior or open spaces such as canopies orcovered walkways. Paint all exposed exterior piping with red epoxy paint for added weatherprotection.

N. Clean pipe and fittings and keep interiors clean throughout installation. Provide caps on ends ofcleaned piping.

O. Use full pipe lengths; random lengths joined by couplings will not be accepted.

P. Provide for expansion and contraction of all pipes and for seismic movement. Provide reducingfittings for all changes in pipe size; provide fittings for all changes in pipe direction. Riser pipingshall be installed plumb with offset fittings used where alignment adjustment is necessary.

Q. Provide unions for pipe sizes below two-inch and flanged or grooved fittings for sizes two-inchand above to permit disconnection of equipment and fixtures.

R. Prepare all piping having welds for Authority Having Jurisdiction inspection prior to installation.

S. On-site fire code welding permits shall be obtained from the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

T. Piping arrangement shall avoid beams, columns, ducts, lighting fixtures, doors, windows, andsimilar obstructions for openings.



U. All piping that penetrates fire rated construction shall be fire stopped in accordance with thesespecifications and project drawings.

V. Underground Piping Installation

1. All bolts, nuts, washers and rodding used for the installation of underground piping,valves and fittings from the riser flange back to, and including all parts of the water maintap shall be stainless steel conforming ASTM A194 Grade 8M or ASTM A320 GradeB8M. All of the above materials shall be thoroughly coated with bituminous mastic. Aftercoating, all valves and ferrous fittings shall be wrapped in 8-mil polyethylene film andsecurely taped in place with underground tape. The above materials shall be left visiblefor inspection by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to backfilling.

2. Install in accordance with referenced standards, codes, and manufacturer’s instructions,and this specification.

3. Piping shall have a minimum cover of three feet under driveways, fire lanes, roads,streets, and two and one half feet of cover in open areas. Cover shall be measured fromfinished grade to top of pipe. Provide a six-inch bed of sand below pipe and twelve-inchcover of sand above piping with locator tape on top of the sand.

4. The depth of the bottom of all horizontal piping below grade shall not exceed the leveldistance measured from the pipe centerline to the nearest top edge of any adjacentbuilding footing, unless approved by the Architect, shall have not less than 3 foot earthcoverage.

5. Clearance shall be provided around all piping extending through floors, walls, platformsand foundations, including drains, fire department connections, and other auxiliary piping,in accordance with the provisions of NFPA 13.

6. After underground work is complete and has been tested in accordance with referencedstandards, the contractor shall complete a NFPA 24 Contractor’s Material and TestCertificate for Private Fire Service Mains and provide it to the Owner and to the State FireMarshal’s office.

7. Installation of underground water piping shall include concrete thrust blocks and anchorswhere vertical or horizontal deflection is 45 degrees or more, or at the intersection lines.Thrust block locations, design, and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 24.

W. Fire-Stopping: Fire stop all holes or voids created by penetrations of the Fire Sprinkler Systempiping through fire rated construction, with UL Listed Fire Stop / Block Systems appropriate forthe rated construction penetration.

1.5 TESTING

A. All tests described and referenced in these specifications shall be performed by the Contractorin the presence of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Tests and inspections shall apply to allwater-sourced fire protection systems, including fire hydrants, sprinklers, standpipes, and allunderground piping that is installed to supply these systems and devices.

B. Hydrostatic Test Preparation

1. Interior piping shall be filled with water for two (2) hours preceding hydrostatic testing.

2. Piping shall be purged of all air and other gasses prior to hydrostatic testing.



3. Underground piping shall be center loaded and all fittings, joints, strapping, and thrustblocking shall be exposed for hydrostatic pressure testing and inspection.

4. All above grade and interior piping, fittings, sprinkler heads and supports shall beexposed for inspections and hydrostatic testing.

5. A hydrostatic pre-test shall be conducted for both aboveground and underground pipingprior to calling for Authority Having Jurisdiction final acceptance test. Written confirmationof passed 100% pre-test shall be given to the inspector of record prior to calling for final.All cost associated with delays caused by failure to complete 100% operational pre-testshall be borne by the contractor. A Contractors Material and Test Certificate shall be filledout upon completion of testing.

C. Fire department connections and piping shall be included in hydrostatic testing and shall beback flushed until clear water is observed.

D. Underground mains and supply connections to sprinkler risers shall be flushed thoroughlybefore connections to sprinkler systems.

E. Tests of drainage facilities shall be conducted by opening each drain valve while the systemcontrol valves are open to the supply.

F. All water level sensors, alarm and supervisory signals, tanks and automatic valves shall beperformance tested.

G. Water remaining in normally dry piping shall be evacuated at completion of testing.

H. Contractor to provide to the Owner completed copies of the forms depicted in Figure 25.1“Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Above Ground Piping” of the 2016 Edition ofNFPA 13, upon completion of the system installation and approval by the County of Ventura.

END OF SECTION


22 0000 – PLUMBING Page 1 of 21

SECTION 22 0000

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section and apply to this Section

2. Division 1 - General Requirements, General Mechanical Section 23 0013 and Quality Assurance Section 01 8001 apply to the Work of this Section.

3. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other Contract Documents, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.

B. Codes and Regulations:

1. California Plumbing Code (CPC).

2. California Mechanical Code (CMC).

3. California Building Code (CBC).

4. California Green Building Standards Code(CGBSC).

5. California Electrical Code (CEC).

6. California Fire Code (CFC).

7. National Fire Code (NFC).

8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

9. Local Building Department.

10. Local Fire Marshal.

11. California Energy Commission.

12. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations, the more stringent requirements will govern when so directed by the Architect.

C. Scope of Work: (Plumbing Section Division 22)

1. Material and labor including rough-in for and connection to fixtures, appliances and equipment are:

a. WASTE AND VENT

1. Drain waste and vent piping (DWV)

2. Indirect waste piping

3. Auto wash drainage and clarifiers.

4. Trench drains.

5. Area drains.

6. Floor drains.

7. Traps.

8. Vent flashings.



9. Interceptors and separators.

10. Insulation of piping for condensation, heat, sound, and vibration.

b. STORM AND SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE

1. Roof and overflow drains, including flashing, rain water drainagepiping. Exterior rainwater leader downspouts (10 gauge andheavier).

c. WATER

1. Isolation, Zone and Control Valves.

2. Hot water systems including heaters and storage tanks.

3. Tempered water systems.

4. Hot water circulating pumps.

5. Water softening systems.

6. Piping for water service.

7. Distilled, de-mineralized reversed osmosis (RO) and deionizedwater systems.

8. Backflow preventers.

9. Disinfecting of water systems.

10. Insulation of piping and equipment for heat, sound, and vibration.

d. KITCHEN AND LAUNDRY

1. Ranges (natural gas fired)

2. Ovens (natural gas fired)

3. Bar-B-Q's (natural gas fired)

4. Sinks and dishwashers.

5. Ice makers

6. Garbage disposers.

7. Washing machines, clothes dryers.

8. Clothes dryer vents.

9. All other equipment with piping connections including kitchen unitcombinations.

e. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SUPPORTS

1. Including, but not limited to:

(a) Sinks, lavatories, water closets, urinals, service sinks, etc., -all materials

(b) Shower pans, shower receptors, and shower stalls

(c) Supports (backing) for all plumbing fixtures and accessories

(d) Installation of sinks in or part of drainboards - all materials

f. FUEL GAS PIPING

1. Natural gas distribution, meters, regulators and connections to allgas fired equipment.



g. FUEL OIL PIPING

1. All piping, valves and appurtenances for complete systems asshown on the drawings and as specified herein.

h. PIPE IDENTIFICATION – Refer to Section 23 0013

i. CONNECTIONS

1. Utilities-Sanitary sewer, storm drain, water, gas

2. Hot water tanks

3. Temporary water, waste and air lines

4. The joining of pipe by any mode or method including, but notlimited to, acetylene and arc welding, brazing, lead burning,plastics welding, soldering, wiped joints, caulked joints expandedor rolled joints, etc., used in connection with any of the work listedherein.

j. LAYOUT AND CUTTING

1. Holes, chases, channels, the setting and erection of bolts, inserts,stands, brackets, stanchions, supports, sleeves, escutcheonplates, thimbles, hangers, conduits, and boxes.

k. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

1. In connection with plumbing and piping work shown herein

l. TEMPORARY PIPING in connection with:

1. Building and construction work

2. Excavating and underground construction

3. Demolition work

m. PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, GUIDES, EXPANSIONJOINTS

1. Including:

(a) Supports for equipment to which pipe is connected, such astank supports

(b) Acoustical pipe isolation

(c) Isolators-dielectric and vibration

(d) Anchors and thrust blocks of concrete, metal, etc.

(e) Seismic bracing

(1) Anvil/Badger, Mason Industries, B-Line/TOLCO orapproved equal.

(2) Seismic hanger system design shall comply withcurrent CBC requirements and ASE 7-05 and 7-10.

n. SIGNS AND NOTICES

o. SHEET LEAD, FIBERGLASS AND/OR PLASTIC LINING FOR:

1. Shower stalls

2. Tanks, vats, sinks and troughs

3. Roof flashing for pipe



p. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT-GAS FIRED

q. ROOF FLASHINGS FOR PIPING PENETRATIONS

r. TESTS

1. Piping, for tightness

2. Equipment for performance

3. Operating instructions

4. Final operation

1.2 ACCESSIBLE PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all of the requirements of CBC Sections11B-213, 11B-305, & 11B-308, & 11B-Division 6.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced inthe necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements andthe methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as arerequired to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements ofgovernmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials andassociated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

C. Welder's Qualifications: Comply with ASME B31.8. The pipe welder shall have a copy ofa certified ASME B31.8 qualification test report. Contractor shall also conduct aqualification test. Submit each welder's identification symbols, assigned number, orletter, used to identify work of the welder. Affix symbols immediately upon completion ofwelds. Welders making defective welds after passing a qualification test shall be given arequalification test and, upon failing to pass this test, shall not be permitted to work thiscontract.

D. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a singlemanufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the groovedcomponents.

1. All castings used for couplings housings, fittings, or valve and specialty bodiesshall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.

E. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," forplastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" onpiping.

F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

G. Comply with NSF 372, “Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content” for potabledomestic water piping and components.

H. When using CPVC piping, installing contractor shall review all materials that may comeinto contact with the CPVC piping system whether thru the course ofconstruction/installation or at the final/completed installation with the Lubrizol FBCSystem Compatible Program to ensure ‘compatibility’. Contractor to review and/orregister for updates at www.systemcompatible.com or contact manufacturer'srepresentative for further information.



I. When Corzan® HP / Corzan® or FlowGuard Gold® CPVC pipe is installed, all installersshall be trained by manufacturer of the material (or as directed by Manufacturer) as to thecorrect installation/assembly procedures. Training shall be documented.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Division 1 Sections.

B. Product Data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Notice toProceed, submit 1 electronic PDF copy of the following to the Architect for approval priorto acquisition:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to provecompliance with the specified requirements. All pieces of equipment shall beclearly identified on corresponding manufacturer's literature being submitted.

3. Shop Drawings or other data as required to indicate method of installing andattaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.

4. Submittals for the entire project shall be submitted at the same time or may berejected until all are included in one submittal package.

5. Submittals shall be provided electronically in PDF format, bookmarked by designtags for equipment and specification sections for materials. Incomplete ornoncompliant submittals may be rejected.

1.5 DESIGN CHANGES CAUSED BY PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Contractor shall pay costs of design and installation for changes resulting fromsubstitution of alternate products.

B. Acceptance of alternate products by Architect does not change this requirement.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmfulenvironmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended bythe manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WASTE, VENT, SEWER AND STORM DRAINAGE

A. Above and Below Grade

1. All waste, vent, sewer and storm lines shall be of cast iron soil pipe and fittingsand shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888 orASTM A-74 for all pipe and fittings

a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. AB&I Foundry

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry

3. Tyler Pipe Company

b. Couplings

1. Standard Couplings: for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform tothe manufacturer's installation instructions and local code



requirements. Hubless coupling gaskets shall conform to ASTM Standard C-564.

2. Joints for hub and spigot pipe shall be installed with compressiongaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-564or shall be installed with lead and oakum.

c. Mandatory Referenced Standards

1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard Specifications - Latest Issue

(a) CISPI 301: Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings forSanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent PipingApplications.

(b) CISPI 310: Couplings for use in connection with HublessCast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.

2. ASTM Standard Specifications - Latest Issue

(a) A-888: Standard Specifications for Hubless Cast Iron SoilPipe and Fittings.

(b) A-74: Standard Specifications for Hub and Spigot Cast IronSoil Pipe and Fittings.

(c) C-564: Standard Specifications for Rubber Gaskets for CastIron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

B. Above and Below Grade option:

1. Schedule 40 Solid wall ABS plastic DWV pipe with solvent-cemented fittingscomplying with ASTM D-2661 - Latest Issue.

a. SCH. 40 Cellular Core ABS plastic DWV pipe with solvent-cementeddrainage pattern fittings complying with ASTM D 3965 may be used atContractor's option for vent piping. -Latest Issue.

C. Condensate (sized per CMC) and indirect waste drains

1. Type M Copper Water Tube ASTM B88 with wrought Copper solder fittings, ANSI-B16.22

2. PVC Schedule 40 Plastic Pipe and fittings, Solvent Cement Joints ASTM D 1785or D2241. ASTM D2464, D2466 or D2467. For condensing furnaces and heatingequipment only.

2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Below Grade (Water Service)

1. 3" NPS and smaller, Schedule 40 PVC Plastic Pipe and fittings. ASTM D1785,D2466, with Solvent Cement Joints ASTM D2564.

2. 2" NPS and smaller, Type K Soft Annealed Temper Copper Tube ASTM B88 withWrought Copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. SIL-FOS - High temperatureBrazing Metal Filler.

B. Above Grade (Distribution System)

1. Piping

a. For soldered, brazed and mechanical joints, 4" and smaller Copper WaterTube Type L Annealed Temper (Hard Drawn) ASTM B75 or ASTM B88.

2. Fittings



a. Wrought Copper Pressure Solder Fittings, ASME B16.22 or ASME B16-25, 95-5 Tin-Antimony Filler Metal.

b. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

c. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper alloy, hexagonal-stock body,with ball-and-socket, met-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint orthreaded ends.

d. Press Fitting: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material andsizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copperpress fittings shall be EPDM. Press fittings shall have an inboard beaddesign.

1. Copper Press Fittings: Viega/Rigid Tool Company, NIBCO,Elkhart/Apollo Xpress or approved equal.

2. 2"NPS and smaller: Wrought copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

3. 2-1/2" to 4"NPS: Cast-bronze or wrought copper fitting withEPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

e. All underground water piping within the building boundaries shall beASTM B88-93a Type "L" annealed (soft) copper tube made up withoutfittings below the floor level.

2.3 CPVC WATER PIPING

A. Above Grade (Distribution System)

1. 2" and smaller – FlowGuard Gold® CTS CPVC pipe and fittings per ASTM D2846,compound material shall meet cell class rating of 24448 as defined by ASTMD1784 and shall be certified by NSF International for use in potable watersystems.

a. Flow Guard Gold® CTS pipe/fittings may be used forunderground/underslab applications, follow manufacturers installationrecommendations and ASTM D2774 for Underground Installation ofThermoplastic Pressure Pipe.

b. Flow Guard Gold® material shall meet the flame spread / smokedeveloped rating of 25/50 as tested in accordance with ASTM E84, andshall be tested empty and have third party test/certification data availableconfirming material meets the 25/50 requirement.

2. 2-1/2" and larger to be schedule 80 IPS Corzan® HP (Corzan® for pipe 10” andlarger as may be necessary) pipe and fittings – The pipe compounds shall meetcell class rating of 24448 for piping up to 8” size and a cell class rating of 23447for piping larger than 8” and all fittings as defined by ASTM D1784. Piping shallbe NSF International certified for potable water use, CPVC pipe and fittings shallalso conform to the following:

a. Pipe shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F441 in schedule 80IPS.

b. Corzan® HP / Corzan® CPVC schedule 80 pipe/fittings shall carry apressure rating as listed by Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI). This Corzan®HP / Corzan® CPVC schedule 80 IPS compound shall be pressure ratedin accordance with ASTM D2837 and PPI – TR-3 and have a hydrostaticdesign bases of 4,000 psi at 72ºF and 1,000 psi at 180 ºF as listed in PPIpublication TR-4.



1. Schedule 80 – Socket type fittings shall meet or exceed therequirements of ASTM F439.

2. Schedule 80 – Threaded type fittings shall meet or exceed therequirements of ASTM F437.

B. Victaulic Company PGS-300 CPVC Piping system may be used on water services whereIPS size Schedule 80 CPVC pipe is approved for use. Pipe and fittings shall be cutgrooved to Victaulic’s PGS-300 groove specification. Schedule 80 CPVC pipe shall meetthe requirements of ASTM F441 and ASTM D1784 - minimum cell classification 23447Pipe.

2.4 GAS PIPING

A. Below Ground

1. Schedule 40, Seamless, Black Steel Pipe, 2 1/2" and under ASTM A-120 withMalleable-Iron Threaded fittings ANSI-B16.3, Class 150. Pipe and fittings shall becoated and wrapped per IAPMO IS 13-91 or provide factory applied plastic coatedpipe.

2. Schedule 40, Seamless Steel Pipe 3" and larger ASTM A-53 with Buttweld Steelfittings ASTM-A-234

3. Polyethylene (PE) Natural and Liquefied Petroleum Gas Yard Piping ASTMD2513 with Fusion Joints. Provide Steel Transition Risers and DetectableWarning Tape.

B. Above Ground

1. Schedule 40, Seamless Black Steel Pipe ASTM A 120 2 1/2" and smaller withMalleable Iron Threaded fittings ANSI B16.3 Class 150

a. Press fittings option (1/2-inch thru 2-inch)

1. Viega, MegaPress G Fittings: ½-inch through 2-inch shallconform to ANSI LC4-2012 /CSA 6.32-2012 2nd Edition.MegaPress G fittings with zinc/nickel coating for use with IPSschedule 10 thru schedule 40 carbon steel, or galvanized pipeconforming to ASTM A53. MegaPress G fittings shall have anHNBR sealing element, 420 stainless steel grip ring, 304stainless steel separator ring, and Smart Connect (SC) Feature.

2. Schedule 40, Seamless Steel Pipe 3" and larger. ASTM A53 with Buttweld Steelfittings ASTM A 234

2.5 FUEL OIL PIPING

A. Below Grade

1. Schedule 40, Seamless, Black Steel Pipe, 2 1/2" and under ASTM A-120 withMalleable-Iron Threaded fittings ANSI-B16.3, Class 150. Pipe and fittings shall becoated and wrapped per IAPMO IS 13-91 or provide factory applied plastic coatedpipe.

2. Schedule 40, Seamless Steel Pipe 3" and larger ASTM A-53 with Buttweld Steelfittings ASTM-A-234

B. Above Grade

1. Schedule 40, Seamless Black Steel Pipe ASTM A 120 2 1/2" and smaller withMalleable Iron Threaded fittings ANSI B16.3 Class 150



2. Schedule 40, Seamless Steel Pipe 3" and larger. ASTM A53 with Buttweld Steelfittings ASTM A 234

2.6 FLUE VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Vent pipe with UL label shall be used for all gas burning appliances. Install permanufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Flues or vents shall terminate above the roof with flashing and a listed vent cap installedin accordance with its listing and the manufacturer’s instructions. Flues or vents shallterminate as required per current CMC.

C. Vent cap shall be of the same manufacturer as the flue pipe.

D. For condensing equipment: DuraVentPolyPro venting system: Inner pipe a minimum of2.2 thick polypropylene pipe. Exterior pipe made of galvalume. ULC-S636 gas gent—BH.Class II venting system, installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.7 VALVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Victaulic Milwaukee, Hammond, Jomar, NIBCO, others asnoted.

Type Size Range Part NumberBall 2” and smaller

(2 or 3 piece) Milwaukee UPBA400 Hammond UP8301A NIBCO 585-80-LF Victaulic Series P569

Ball 2½” and larger (3 piece)

Milwaukee UPBA300 Hammond UP8604 NIBCO 595Y-LF

Note: Stem extensions of non-thermal-conductive material and protective sleeve that meets UL 2043 approved for inside air plenum and allows operation of value without breaking the vapor sleeve shall be used on insulated pipe. NIBCO NIB-Seal handle or acceptable equal. Gate 2” and larger Milwaukee UP115

Hammond UP645 NIBCO T-113-LF

Gate 2½” or larger NIBCO F-619-RWGate-Underground 3” and larger Mueller A-2362

NIBCO F-619-RW Check-Swing 2” and smaller Milwaukee UP509

Hammond IB940 NIBCO 413Y

Check-Spring 2” and smaller Milwaukee UP548T NIBCO 480Y-LF

Check-Swing 2½” and larger Apollo 61YLF NIBCO F-918-B-LF

Check-Spring 2½” and larger NIBCO F-938-33Gas Cock 2” and smaller Milwaukee BA475B

Hammond 8901 NIBCO FP600

Gas Cock 2½” and larger Homestead 611/612 Walworth 1796/1797 (with wrench) NIBCO T-580/585-70-UL



B. All valves in copper piping shall be soldered in or have screwed threads. Copper-tubedimensioned grooved joints are acceptable for 2-1/2” and larger sizes. Threaded valvesshall be installed with sweat to screwed adapters.

C. Valves used on potable water services shall be UL classified in accordance with NSF-61,and meets the low-lead requirements of NSF-372.

D. All compressed air valves shall be ball valves especially made for compressed airservice.

E. All below grade ball valves shall have stainless steel handles.

F. For CPVC water distribution system-Ball style shut-off valve, solvent welded socket ends,2” and smaller CPVC body and socket ends, full port (bore) design, EPDM seals (or other“compatible” seal material), low-torque type valve, NSF listed, Plasto-matic CPVC series,Ashai/American CPVC-TB series, Nibco CPVC series. (Note: Contractor may as anoption utilize traditional metallic valves for CPVC piping systems, however (1) additionalhanger shall be furnished and installed adjacent to either side of the metallic valve).

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. In general, all pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the following except wherespecial pipe hangers and supports are detailed on the Drawings. In all cases hanger andsupport details on the Drawings shall take precedent over the following:

Piping 6” Size and smaller:Items TOLCO Figure Anvil Pipe Hanger 1; 2; 200 260 Side Beam Clamp for Wood Joist 58 207 Beam Coupling for Steel Beams 65 92 Rod Coupling for Connection to “Hilti” 70 135 Inserts in Concrete Decks 107;109A;109AF N/A Trapeze Hangers Tolstruct A12 AS200 Pipe Clamp TOLCO Cush Clamp AS004OD-

AS098OD

B. Similar items by HOLDRITE, Anvil International, Erico-Caddy or TOLCO/B-Line will beacceptable.

C. Hanger Rods shall conform to the following table:

Tube/Pipe Size Rod Diameter ½” to 4” ⅜” 5” to 8” ½” 10” to 12” ⅝”

D. Trapeze hangers may be used where parallel runs of pipe occur. All rods on trapezehangers shall be 1/2" minimum size.

E. Hanger Support Spacing shall be as follows unless shown otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Horizontal:

a. Cast Iron: Every other joint unless over 4 feet, then at every joint.

b. Copper: Every 6 feet for 1-1/2 inch and smaller, and 10 feet for 2 inch andlarger.

c. Steel, Gas: Every 6 feet for 1/2 inch, 8 feet for 3/4 inch and 1 inch, and 10feet for 1-1/4 inch and larger.



d. Schedule 40 PVC or ABS DWV: Every 4 feet for all sizes. Provide forexpansions every 30 feet.

e. CPVC: Every 3 feet for 1” and smaller, and 4 feet for 1-1/4” and larger.

2. Vertical:

a. Cast Iron: Base and every floor not to exceed 15 feet.

b. Copper: Every floor not to exceed 10 feet.

c. Steel, Gas: Same as horizontal spacing except 1-1/4" and larger at everyfloor.

d. Schedule 40 PVC or ABS DWV: Base and every floor with mid-floorguides. Provide for expansion every 30 feet.

e. CPVC: Base and every floor with mid-floor guides. Contractor shall followthe manufacturer’s recommendations in their installation practices,including support types and spacing and compensation for thermalexpansion and contraction of the pipe.

F. Refer to the plumbing code for materials not listed above.

G. CPVC Cautionary Note: Any metallic hanger is approved for CPVC pipe system, howeverreview for sharp edges that might abrade the pipe, discard if sharp edges. Avoid overclamping CPVC pipe risers, review riser clamps with CPVC manufacturers installationinstructions.

H. At all points where insulated pipe contacts a hanger or support, the point of contact shallbe protected by a metal insulation pipe shield #B3153 as manufactured by B-Line.Equivalent pipe protectors will be considered provided the substitute item meets thesame standard of quality and performance as the specified item.

I. Abrasion-Protection Isolators: Use for prevention of damage to tubes and piping causedby abrasion when passing through or in contact with studs, joists, and similar framing.

1. Products:

a. HOLDRITE #200 Series Isolators and Clamps.

J. Dissimilar Metal Isolators: Use for prevention of damage to tubes and pipes caused bycontact between dissimilar metals.

1. Products:

a. HOLDRITE #200 Series Isolators and Clamps.

K. Acoustical Noise & Vibration Isolation System: Consisting of through-stud isolators, pipeclamps, riser clamp pads, neoprene and felt lining material and associated supportbrackets. For applications requiring acoustical isolation of tubing, piping, and equipmentfrom structure.

1. Products:

a. HOLDRITE Silencer System with HOLDRITE STOUT Bracket System.

L. Seismic Restraint Devices

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Anvil/Badgr

b. Mason Industries

c. B-Line Tolco Division of Eaton



2. Seismic hanger system design shall meet the requirements of IBC, CBC andASCE 7-05 and 7-10.

2.9 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS

A. Fire walls and floors:

1. Wall and floor penetrations shall be protected with a U.L. approved fire ratedsystem. The system shall be per the Drawing Details, or other manufacturer’sinstallation instructions.

2. Fire stopping materials by Hilti, Metacaulk, or 3M are considered equal. Thematerial shall be the same as called out for in the U.L. approved system.

B. Poured concrete walls and floors.

1. Pipes penetrating poured concrete walls and floors shall be protected by providingthe following:

a. A Schedule 40 PVC sleeve one (1) size larger than the pipe or onequarter (1/4) inch of foam material wrapped around and secured to thepipe or packed and caulked with mineral wool.

b. Protection shall end flush with the wall or floor surface.

C. All walls and floors:

1. Piping passing through walls and floors exposed to view shall be provided withchrome plated split-ring escutcheon plates in finished areas. Brass or galvanizedescutcheon plates may be used elsewhere.

2.10 FLASHING

A. All flashing shall be 4 lb. sheet lead and all vents penetrating the roof shall be flashedand counter-flashed. Stoneman Co. roof flashing assembly with 10" skirt or equal maybe used.

B. The flashing for vents penetrating a metal roof shall have a corrosion resistant aluminumbase compatible with the roofing system. A rubber type flashing by "Tech Specialties"shall be installed between the flashing and pipe.

C. Individual roof storm drain overflows shall be flashed with Stoneman lead overflow Series#700 assemblies or flashed per vent above.

D. For single ply roofing, provide flashing per roofing manufacturer recommendations orinstallation instructions.

2.11 VALVE BOXES

A. Brooks Products Inc., Christy Co., or equal with the word "Water" or "Gas" cast in coveras applicable.

2.12 CLEANOUTS

A. Provide cleanouts per Drawings and details on Drawings. Cleanouts as manufactured byJ.R. Smith, Mifab, Sioux Chief, or Zurn are acceptable substitutes provided they areequal if approved by Engineer.

B. Cleanout tops to be installed with tamper-proof screws.

2.13 FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS AND ROOF DRAINS

A. Provide floor drains as specified on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. Cast iron body floordrains as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Mifab, Sioux Chief, or Zurn are acceptablesubstitutes provided they are equal if approved by Engineer.



B. Provide floor sinks as specified on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. Enameled cast ironfloor sinks as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Mifab, Sioux Chief, Zurn, or CommercialEnameling are acceptable substitutes provided they are equal if approved by Engineer.

C. Provide roof drains as specified on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. Cast iron body roofdrains as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Mifab, Sioux Chief, or Zurn are acceptablesubstitutes provided they are equal if approved by Engineer.

2.14 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Provide Wilkins Piston Model #1250XL, Sioux Chief #65X-X, Precision PlumbingProducts, or equal, as sized on the Drawings or required by PDI. Install permanufacturer’s instructions.

2.15 AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMERS

A. Provide Precision Plumbing Products, J.R. Smith, Mifab, Sioux Chief, or Zurn asspecified on the Drawings. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

2.16 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Fixture locations, quantities, types, sizes and connections shall be as shown on both thePlumbing and Architectural Drawings. If a conflict in fixture location is noted between thePlumbing and Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall take precedence.

B. Fixtures shall be thoroughly protected against damage to the chrome plate or enamel, bychipping, scratching or other damage during the entire period of construction. Roofdrains, floor sinks and drains, toilet and sink drains, plumbing vents, and all other similarfixtures shall be covered to prevent trash from entering the pipes until final installation ofgrates, domes, fixtures or other protective devices.

C. Provide fixtures as specified in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

D. Stainless Steel lavatories or sinks: Just, Elkay, Advance Tabco, Haws, or Acorn areacceptable substitutes provided they are equal if approved by Engineer.

E. Vitreous China fixtures: American Standard, Kohler, Mansfield, Sloan, Toto, or Zurn areacceptable substitutes provided they are equal if approved by Engineer.

F. Fixture carrier numbers listed are as specified on the Plumbing Schedule; however,carriers as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Mifab, or Zurn are acceptable provided they areequal.

2.17 CONNECTORS

A. Provide Brass Craft "Speedway" or equal heavy pattern iron pipe size brass stops, rigidor flexible supplies and chrome plated brass "P" traps. Stops in "Public" areas to havescrewdriver slots and those in "Private" areas to have all cross handles.

B. Provide Brass Craft or equal flexible stainless steel braided water supplies to appliances.They may also be used to fixtures as an option to rigid supplies. Aquaflo is anacceptable substitute.

C. Provide Brass Craft flexible or equal, stainless steel gas appliance connectors. Dormontis an acceptable substitute.

2.18 ACCESS BOXES

A. See section 23 0013 for access panels.

2.19 PRESSURE GAGES AND THERMOMETERS

A. Provide Marsh Quality gages or equal with 3-1/2" dial, gage cock, in type required. Forpump suction, provide compound type.



B. Provide Trerice 7" BX or 3" Bimetal Dial series thermometers or equal, straight, angle, oroblique as required, equipped with separable sockets and well. Provide extension necksas required on insulated line.

C. Arrange gages and thermometers for easy reading.

2.20 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

A. Pressure backflow preventers by Febco, Hersey, or Wilkins are considered equal whentheir pressure fall-off/loss is equal to or less than the specified preventer’s loss for thegiven flow rate.

B. Provide all potable water outlets with hose attachments with non-removable hose bibbbackflow preventers per the C.P.C.

2.21 WATER HEATERS

A. Provide water heaters as specified in Plumbing Schedule or approved equal of size,capacity, recovery, and KW/BTUH input. American, A.O. Smith, Lochinvar, and State areconsidered equal. Heater shall be A.G.A. or U.L. listed.

1. Heater storage tank shall be provided with magnesium anodes, approvedstandard pressure/temperature relief valve and all standard factory trim.

2. Gas heaters shall be provided with an A.G.A. approved 100% safety shut-off.

3. Provide approved flexible copper supplies for the water heater water connections.

4. Instantaneous tankless water heaters shall be with water flow activated switch toenergize the electrical/gas power source, a safety high water temperature limit,and all standard factory trim.

2.22 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVE

A. Pressure-temperature relief valve shall be Wilkins TP220 or TP3000 series, or equal.

2.23 EXPANSION TANK

A. Expansion tank shall be Wilkins XT series as specified on the Drawings or approvedequal in size and capacity. Amtrol expansion tanks are considered equal.

2.24 PROTECTIVE INSULATION (ADA FIXTURES)

A. Provide approved manufactured, molded antimicrobial vinyl protective pipe and fittingcovering for exposed waste and drain assembly and for hot and cold water supplies andstops. Protective system shall consist of pre-formed pipe or tubing sleeve and pre-formed fitting patterns for trap and stops. Assembly shall have integral snap fasteners.

B. Provide protective covering for off-set drain assembly and disposer at kitchen sinks.

C. Foam pipe wrap, duct tape, baggy-type covers, tie-strap fasteners are not acceptable.

D. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Oatey/Dearborn Brass “ADA”

2. Truebro “Lav-Guard”

3. Plumberex “Pro-Xtreme”

4. Zurn #Z89XX-XX

2.25 INSULATION

A. All pipe insulation shall conform to Section 123 of the California Energy EfficiencyStandards except to the extent that this Specification supersedes the minimum standards



as established by the Code, in which case this Specification shall take precedent. Outside insulation shall be protected with a hard plastic or metal shell covering.

B. Insulation and lining material shall meet requirements of flame spread not to exceed 25and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by Procedure ASTM-E-84, NFPA 255or U.L. 723 and shall conform to NFPA 90A and 90B.

C. Condensate piping insulation in return air plenums shall be insulated with ArmacellAP/Armaflex tube insulation with reinforced lap seal or approved equal.

D. Domestic cold water piping shall be insulated with a minimum 1" insulation in unheatedareas of the building and where exposed outside of the building.

E. Domestic hot water piping shall be insulated with Owens-Corning Fiberglass heavydensity pipe insulation 25 ASJ/SSL-II (All Service Jacket/Double/ Self-Sealing Lap).Insulation shall be UL rated non-combustible pipe insulation with a k factor of 0.24-0.28@ 100 degrees F. mean temperature, an embossed vapor barrier laminated andpressure sealing lap adhesive. All lap and butt strips shall have integral pressure-sensitive strips and shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Closed cell polyethylene foam by IMCOA or equal may be used at Contractor'soption provided it meets the above requirements.

F. Insulation thickness’ shown below are based on insulation having a conductivity range of0.22 to 0.28 per BTU/inch per hour per square foot per F temperature of 100 degrees F.

1. Temperature Range: Above 105F-140F

Pipe Size Minimum Insulation Wall Thickness 1” and less 1.0” 1.25” 1.25”1.5” 1.5”2” or more 2.0”

G. Insulation materials not meeting the specified conductivity range shall be submitted forapproval and determination of the insulation thickness required.

2.26 CIRCULATION PUMP: (DOMESTIC)

A. Provide pump(s) per schedule. Bell and Gossett, Grundfos, Laing, Xylem, or Taco areconsidered equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.Conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work shall be brought tothe attention of the Architect before the installation of materials. Do not proceed untilunsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Incorrectly installed materials requiring changeswill be at Contractor's expense.

B. All plumbing fixtures, appliances, and appurtenances furnished with manufacturer'sinstallation instructions shall be installed per those instructions.

3.2 PLUMBING SYSTEM LAYOUT

A. Lay out the plumbing system in careful coordination with the Drawings. Determine properelevations for all components of the system and use only the minimum number of bendsto produce a satisfactorily functioning system.

B. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings in all cases except where other Workmay interfere.



C. Lay out pipes to fall within partitions, walls, or roof cavities, and to not require furringother than as shown on the Drawings.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Pipe sizes as shown on drawings are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) or Iron Pipe Size (IPS).Drawings and fixture schedule indicate pipe sizing per the CPC and StandardEngineering Practice. Pipe sizes shall be maintained to fixtures, appliances andequipment. Approved reducing fittings shall be installed at all points of connections.

B. Install piping generally square with building, free of traps or air pockets, and true to lineand grade. Keep all piping tight to the building structure, unless pipe slope is required.Do not install piping in any locations where, in the Architect's opinion, it will interfere withthe use of the building or create a safety hazard. Where space is inadequate, notify theArchitect in time to avoid unnecessary Work. Install all exposed piping as high aspossible without interfering with other trades.

C. Make changes in direction with manufactured fittings; use long radius elbows. Streetelbows, bushings, close nipples and bending of pipe or tubing will not be allowed.

D. Provide "P" traps at sanitary sewer drainage devices without integral traps.

E. All natural gas piping under structures or concrete slabs will be installed in a protectivevent sleeve. Sleeves under a building will be vented to outside the building per detail onPlans. Sleeves under concrete slabs will extend a minimum of 1 foot beyond the slab.All sleeves will be sloped 1/8" per foot up toward the vented end. The vent end ofsleeves under slabs will terminate under a landscaped or asphalted area.

F. Gas piping shall be tapped off the top or side of pipe and ends of mains shall be providedwith dirt legs.

G. Gas press fittings

1. Viega, Mega Press G Systems: Sealing elements shall be verified for theintended use. Pipe ends shall be cut on a right angle (square) to the pipe. Pipeends shall be reamed chamfered and all paint, lacquer, grease, oil or dirt shall beremoved from the pipe end with an abrasive cloth, or with the Ridgid MegaPresspipe end prep tool. Visually examine the fitting sealing element to ensure there isno damage. Utilizing a Viega MegaPress Insertion Depth Inspection Gauge markthe tube wall, with a felt tip pen, at the appropriate location, or insert the pipe fullyinto the fitting and mark the pipe wall at the face of the fitting. Always examine thepipe to ensure it is fully inserted into the fitting prior to pressing the joint.MegaPress G fittings shall be installed using Ridgid, MegaPress Tools.MegaPress G fittings shall be installed according to the most current edition of theViega installation guidelines. Installers shall attend a Viega MegaPressinstallation training class.

H. Underground plastic pipe will horizontally transition to metal pipe 5 feet before the aboveground riser. Install plastic pipe with a minimum of 36" of cover when located under areasof possible vehicle traffic. Approved metallic pipe must be used if the minimum depth isnot met. A tracer wire, terminating at each end at an exposed location, will be installedwith all underground plastic pipe. Gas piping will also have a continuous tape marked"Gas" laid 6" above it.

1. Piping may terminate a maximum of one foot above ground when encased in alisted metallic transition riser.

I. Use friction wrenches when installing brass, polished, or soft metal piping, and wheninstalling piping exposed in finished areas. Replace piping showing wrench marks.

J. Attach escutcheon plates to pipes with set screws or spring clamps with concealedhinges. Continue insulation through escutcheon plates.



K. General:

1. Proceed as rapidly as the building construction will permit.

2. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt untilfixtures are installed and final connections have been made.

3. Cut pipe accurately, and work into place without springing or forcing, properlyclearing windows, doors, and other openings. Excessive cutting or otherweakening of the building will not be permitted.

4. Show no tool marks or threads on exposed plated, polished, or enameledconnections from fixtures. Tape all finished surfaces to prevent damage duringconstruction.

5. Provide sufficient swing joints, ball joints, expansion loops, and devices necessaryfor a flexible piping system, whether or not shown on the Drawings.

6. Support piping independently at pumps, coils, tanks, and similar locations, so thatweight of pipe will not be supported by the equipment. Support the equipmentindependently from the pipe.

7. Pipe the drains from mechanical equipment, drip pans, relief valves, air vents andsimilar locations, to an open sight drain, floor drain, or other acceptable dischargepoint, and terminate with an air break or air gap per C.P.C.

8. Securely bolt all equipment, isolators, hangers, and similar items in place.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Use pipe material compatible pipe labels and markers.

3.5 HANGER AND PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Support pipes from structure with assemblies specified. Provide auxiliary members,anchors, guides, and sway braces necessary to maintain pipe alignment and preventexcessive movement or strain on piping system or components; allow for expansion andcontraction of piping. Provide at least one hanger for each branch. Do not use powderdriven fasteners, wire, perforated tape, nails, wood blocking, or other makeshift devicesto support pipe.

B. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of pipingsystems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

C. Isolate piping systems from building structure to minimize noise transfer by usingacoustical suspension isolator silencer and bracket system.

D. Protect tubing and piping from damage caused by abrasion when passing through studs,joists, and similar framing using abrasion protection isolators.

E. Penetration Protection: Provide allowance for thermal expansion and contraction ofcopper tubing passing through a wall, floor, ceiling or partition by wrapping with anapproved tape or pipe insulation, or by installing through an appropriately sized sleeve.Penetrations of fire resistance rated assemblies shall maintain the rating of the assembly.

F. In plenum-rated applications, use tested clamp and isolator support systems designedspecifically for this application.

G. Prevent damage to piping and tubing caused by contact between dissimilar metals usinginsert system designed specifically for this application.

H. Attach supports to structure with bolts, screws or concrete anchors, per supportmanufacturer’s requirements.



I. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

J. CPVC Piping Systems: Provide necessary allowance in piping systems to handle expansion and contraction. Install ample swings or offsets in branch connections to avoid undue strains on fittings or short pipe supplies. Provide expansion loops and pipe anchors as required and/or indicated on the drawings. Refer to manufacturers’ recommendations for proper loop sizing of CPVC piping systems.

3.6 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Cut pipe shall be reamed to full inside diameter of pipe. Cut threads straight and true. Insure all filings have been removed from inside of the pipe. Apply liquid Teflon to male pipe threads and not inside fittings. Use graphite on cleanout plug threads.

B. Couplings in cast iron "No-Hub" soil/waste pipe and fittings shall be made up with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bands conforming to CISPI 310, torque to the manufacturer's specification with an approved torque wrench. Joints in hub and spigot shall be made up with compression gaskets conforming to ASTM C-564.

C. Joints in copper tube shall be made with 95-5 tin-antimony or lead-free solder, applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions.

D. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published instructions. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling manufacturer. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically visit the jobsite to ensure best practices in grooved product installation are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

E. Dissimilar metals shall be isolated with dielectric couplings, "EPCO" or approved equal. Dielectric Waterway Fittings shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI / NSF-61 for potable water service, Victaulic Style 647. Provide access panels at all hidden couplings.

F. All plastic pipe shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for their pipe and IAPMO Installation Standard per the latest edition of the C.P.C.

G. Press Connections: Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

H. Pipe Protection: Provide protection against abrasion where copper tubing is in contact with other building members by wrapping with an approved tape, pipe insulation or otherwise suitable method of isolation.

I. Penetration Protection: Provide allowance for thermal expansion and contraction of copper tubing passing through a wall, floor, ceiling or partition by wrapping with an approved tape or pipe insulation, or by installing through an appropriately sized sleeve. Penetrations of fire resistance rated assemblies shall maintain the rating of the assembly.

J. FlowGuard Gold® CTS CPVC pipe/fittings shall be joined by employing One-Step solvent cements that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F493. The standard practice for safe handling of solvent cements shall be in accordance with ASTM F402. Solvent cement shall be listed by NSF International for use with potable water and shall be ‘Yellow’ in color and shall be approved for use by the pipe/fitting manufacturer.



K. Corzan® HP / Corzan® schedule 80 IPS CPVC pipe/fittings shall be joined by employinga Two-Step solvent cementing process. Solvent cements that meet or exceed therequirements of ASTM F493 and primers that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTMF656. The standard practice for safe handling of solvent cements shall be in accordancewith ASTM F402. Solvent cement and primer shall be listed by NSF International for usewith potable water, and shall be approved for use by the pipe/fittings manufacturer. Also,the solvent cement shall be ‘orange’ in color and the primer shall be ‘purple’ in color.

1. Flanges for Corzan® HP / Corzan® piping shall be installed on pipe ends withapproved CPVC Two-Step solvent cementing process (as indicated above) andthen bolted together per the manufacturer’s instructions and torque ratings.

2. Threading may be preformed on Corzan® CPVC schedule 80 IPS pipe 4” andsmaller, per the manufacturer’s instructions. Threads shall be in accordance withANSI B1.20.1 Taper Pipe Thread.

3.7 SANITARY SEWER, VENT AND INDIRECT WASTE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal drainage piping at a minimum 2%, condensate 1%, slope unlessotherwise noted. Where this is impractical notify the Architect before installing the pipes.

B. Install vent piping to drain back into the sewer system.

C. Provide cleanouts where shown on Drawings and where required by governmentalagencies having jurisdiction.

1. All cleanouts to grade shall be firmly secured by means of a concrete block 20"square by 5" thick, and shall be flush with finished grade, unless otherwise notedon the plans.

D. Provide automatic trap primers as specified at floor sinks and drains as indicated onDrawings or where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Provideaccess panels for all hidden mechanical trap primers.

3.8 FLUE VENT PIPE INSTALLATION

A. All flues or vents shall terminate above the roof with flashing and a listed vent capinstalled in accordance with its listing and the manufacturer's instructions. Vent cap shallbe of the same manufacturer as the flue pipe. Flues or vents shall terminate per thelatest Edition of the C.P.C.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Provide valves in the water, air, and gas systems. Locate and arrange so as to give acomplete regulation of apparatus, equipment, and fixtures.

B. Provide valves in at least the following locations:

1. In branches and/or headers of water piping serving a group of fixtures.

2. On both sides of apparatus and equipment.

3. For shutoff of risers and branch mains.

4. For flushing and sterilizing the system.

5. Where shown on the Drawings.

C. Locate valves for easy accessibility and maintenance. Provide access panels for allhidden valves.

D. Unions shall be installed downstream of all screwed valves.

E. All gas pressure regulating valves shall be vented to the atmosphere.



3.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR INSTALLATION

A. Provide water hammer arrestor on hot and cold water lines.

1. Install at all quick closing valves, solenoids, and supply headers at plumbingfixture groups.

2. Locate and size as shown on Drawings, and where not shown, locate inaccordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard WH-201.

3. Install water hammer arrestor behind access panels.

3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTION INSTALLATION

A. Protect plumbing fixtures, faucets, hose connections, and other equipment havingplumbing connection, against possible back-siphonage.

B. Arrange for testing of backflow devices as required by the governmental agencies havingjurisdiction.

3.12 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Connect plumbing services to fixtures as shown on Drawings and as specified.

B. Install compression stops and flexible supplies per fixture manufacturer’srecommendation or as high as possible on wall directly below fixtures.

C. Install fixtures at right angles to, and tightly against, building surfaces, and in properalignment. Fill gaps between fixtures and building surfaces with white grout. Mountingheights and locations shall be as shown on the Drawings, or, if not shown, as directed bythe Architect.

3.13 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces prior to application of insulation or adhesives.

B. Insulate piping, fittings, valves, and strainers. Leave unions exposed. Where insulationterminates, bevel ends of insulation and continue jacket over insulation and secure topipe. Do not interrupt insulation at hangers, supports, clamps, or penetrations throughstructure. Fittings shall be finished with "Zeston" or approved equal fitting closures. Iffitting closures not available, use 8 oz. canvas dipped in "Seal-Fas".

C. Attach longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips with factory applied pressure sensitiveadhesive. On concealed piping only, outward clinching coated staples at two inchspacing may be used. Cover elbows with one piece polyvinyl chloride covers. Securewith tack fasteners. Tape ends of covers with matching tape on exposed piping. Seal offall cut ends with canvas and Benjamin Foster 30-36.

D. Install closed cell polyethylene foam per manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Insulate traps and trap arms on floor sinks located above slab receiving discharge fromice machines and soda dispensers with ½” insulation.

F. Insulate primary condensate piping located within return air plenums with ½” wallthickness.

G. CPVC Piping Systems: Confirm compatibility with all insulation products that willencounter CPVC.

3.14 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Provide personnel and equipment, and arrange for and pay the costs of, all required testsand inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. See Section 230013 for test requirements.



B. Where tests show materials or workmanship to be deficient, replace or repair asnecessary, and repeat the tests until the specified standards are achieved.

C. CPVC Piping Systems: Test per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1. DO NOT TEST WITH AIR OR COMPRESSED GAS.

D. Gas press fittings: Test per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1. After MegaPress G fittings have been installed a “two step test” shall be followed.Utilizing air, or dry nitrogen, pressurize the system between .5 psi and 45 psi.Check the pressure gauge for pressure loss. If the system does not holdpressure, walk the system and check for un-pressed fittings. Should you identifyan un-pressed fitting/s ensure the pipe is fully inserted into the fitting and properlymarked prior to pressing the joint. After appropriate repairs have been made, testthe system per local code, or specification requirements, not to exceed 200 psig.

E. Adjust the system to optimum standards of operation.

3.15 CLEANING (For potable water systems.)

A. Disinfection: The copper hot and cold water distribution system shall be disinfected priorto being placed in service. The system shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWAC651 or the following requirements:

1. The piping system shall be flushed with potable water until discolored water doesnot appear at any of the outlets.

2. The system shall be filled with a water chlorine solution containing at least 50parts per million of chlorine. The system shall be valved off and allowed to standfor 24 hours. Or, the system shall be filled with a water chlorine solution containingat least 200 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall be valved off andallowed to stand for 3 hours.

3. Following the standing time, the system shall be flushed with water until thechlorine is purged from the system.

4. Provide bacteriological sampling and analysis results to the Engineer for review.

3.16 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warranty all of the systems for proper operation installed by thecontractor for not less than one calendar year from date of project completion. Thiscompletion date shall be set by the Architect or owner.

END OF SECTION 22 0000


23 0000 – HVAC Page 1 of 12

SECTION 23 0000

HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section andapply to this Section.

2. Division 1 - General Requirements and Section 23 0013 apply to the Work of thisSection.

3. Where requirements of the Section exceed those in other Contract Documents,Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.


1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinentregulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinentregulations, the more stringent requirements will govern when so directed by theArchitect.

C. Included: Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following.

1. The Work covered by this Specification shall include furnishing labor, material,equipment and services to construct, install and place in operation, the completeHeating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems to the extent as indicated, and asshown on the Drawings and specified herein. The Work covered under this Sectionshall hereinafter be referred to as the Mechanical System.

2. A system of temperature controls shall be furnished and installed complete ashereinafter described. Low voltage wiring and conduit, complete with electricalaccessories and materials as required for the installation of the temperature controlsystem shall be furnished and installed under this Section of the Contract, but shallconform to the Specification requirements as set forth under Division 26.

3. Roof Top Gas Heat/Mechanical Cooling A/C Units

4. VRF Fan Coil Units

5. Fan Coil Units

6. VRF Heat Pump Condensing Units

7. Branch Selector Boxes

8. Heat Pump Condensing Units

9. Ductless Split System Heat Pump Condensing Units

10. Energy Recovery Ventilators

11. Centrifugal Exhaust Fans and Roof Exhausters

12. Vehicle Exhaust Systems

13. Supply, return, and exhaust duct systems complete with grilles, registers anddiffusers.

14. Filter and Filter Boxes

15. Duct, Pipe and Equipment Insulation

16. Space Temperature Controls


23 0000 – HVAC Page 2 of 12

17. Refrigerant Piping

18. Fire Dampers

19. Vibration Isolators

D. Work Not Included In This Section:

1. Blocking, framing and wood supports required for the purpose of accommodating theMechanical System unless specifically called for under this Division. The contractoris responsible for the correct location of such items and shall bear the expensescovering their omission or improper location.

2. Electrical connections to motors, electric starters, disconnect and over-currentprotective devices, unless specifically called for by this Section, or unless theequipment is furnished as an integral part of the Mechanical System Equipment, ashereinafter specified or noted on the Drawings.

3. Line voltage electrical wiring and conduit, except where specifically called for on theDrawings or hereinafter in this Section.

4. Painting, except when supplied as factory finish, or specifically called for in thisSection or on Drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements andthe methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as arerequired to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements ofgovernmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials andassociated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. If the heating and/or air conditioning units are substituted with a different brand than that

specified on the Drawings the Title 24 Calculation may have to be re-run. This re-calculation will be billed hourly (6 hr minimum), payable to BMA, Inc., at the current ratedefined in Exhibit B for Senior Energy Analyst.

B. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Section.C. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of the following to the Architect for approval prior toacquisition:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section including, but notlimited to heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment and mountings, airdistribution equipment, ductwork and fittings, flexible ductwork, flue vent pipe, ductspecialties, flexible connections, insulation, lining and adhesive, duct joint sealer,temperature controls, piping and accessories.

2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to provecompliance with the specified requirements. All pieces of equipment shall be clearlyidentified on corresponding manufacturer's literature being submitted.

3. Shop Drawings or other data as required to indicate method of installing andattaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.

4. Submittals for entire Project shall be submitted at the same time or may be rejecteduntil all are included in one submittal package.

5. Submittals shall be provided electronically in PDF format, bookmarked by design tagsfor equipment and specification sections for materials. Alternativley, hard copies willbe accepted if 6 copies are provided, bookmarked as previously noted and boundtogether separately in thee-hole folders or three ring binders.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 3 of 12

1.4 DESIGN CHANGES CAUSED BY PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Contractor shall pay costs of design and installation for changes resulting from substitution

of alternate products.B. Acceptance of alternate products by Architect does not change this requirement.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLINGA. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT A. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: Equipment shall be as specified on

the Drawings. All other equipment shall be pre-approved by the Mechanical Engineer.B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that any substituted equipment

performs similarly to that which is specified and fits in the same area as specified. Cost ofany additional Work caused by the substitution of equipment shall be borne by theContractor.

2.2 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT A. Grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers and other accessory equipment shown on the

Drawings and "Grille, Register and Diffuser Schedule" shall be manufactured by Titusunless shown otherwise.

B. Any substitutions of the above equipment which may be proposed by the Contractor shallbe re-sized to suit his equipment by the proposed manufacturer and submitted in tabularform listing components proposed for each location in the System, identifying each as tolocation, design, air quantity passing through the devices, pressure drop, noise criteriadata, velocities of air leaving the device and "K" flow factors for each item. Manufacturer'sdata sheets showing dimensions and recommended method of installation for eachcomponent must also be included.

2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS A. In refrigerated areas damper shall be Greenheck Model ICD-44, class 1 @ 4”wg as

scheduled on plans. Damper frame shall be aluminum formed into a 5” X 1” structural hatchannel. Blades shall be heavy gauge extruded aluminum airfoil shape with metal to bladeoverlap. Blade seals shall be Silicone with 304SS jamb seal. The linkage shall beconcealed in the frame out of the air stream, plated steel material. The Axle shall bestainless steel. Finish shall be Hi-Pro polyester power coated.

B. In all other locations provide Greenheck model VCD-23, class 1 @ 4”wg as scheduled onplans. Damper frame shall be stainless steel, formed into a 5” X 1” structural hat channel.Blades shall be 16 gauge stainless steel strengthened by three longitudinal 1” deep Veegrooves running the entire lenth of each blade. Blade seals shall be Silicone. Jamb to beflexible stainless steel compression type. The linkage shall be concealed in the frame out ofthe air stream, stainless steel material. The Axle shall be stainless steel. Bearings to bestainless steel. Finish shall be Hi-Pro polyester power coated.

2.4 LOUVERS A. 4" deep louvers, Greenheck, Model ESJ-401, or approved equal. Deflection blades shall

be spaced on 4" centers having 1/2" high vertical baffle and an additional lateral center rainhood. The edges of louver blades shall be folded or beaded to exclude driving rain.Louvers blades shall be oriented to minimize the entrainment of rainwater. Louver blades,heads, sills, jambs, braces and mullions shall be made of aluminum. Louvers shall beprovided with flanges.

B. Provide 1/2" aluminum bird screen on outside air intake louvers and 1/4" aluminum insectscreen on combustion air louvers.

2.5 RECTANGULAR SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Rectangular supply, return, outside air and exhaust ducts, single leaf dampers and

plenums shall be fabricated from prime grade galvanized steel sheets of lock form qualityand shall be constructed in accordance with appropriate tables of the latest ASHRAE"Guide and Data Book" and SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" handbook andChapter 6 of the 2019 CMC.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 4 of 12

B. Transverse Duct Joints shall be made with The Ductmate System. When using TheDuctmate System, construction of the duct such as gage, reinforcing, etc. shall be asindicated in the latest addition of the applicable SMACNA standards. With proper data, anequal may be submitted, providing the corners have a downset and corner clips to insureairtight integrity. Testing must be done by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Thestandard Ductmate 35 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. TheDuctmate 25 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "F" connection. The installationof the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the latest manufacturer’s printedAssembly and Installation Instructions.

C. Each duct or plenum shall be diagonally cross-broken for rigidity.D. Duct bends, fittings, transitions, etc. shall be fabricated in accordance with Fabrication

Standards as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with latest SMACNA "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards" where not shown on Drawings.

E. Support ducts to joists or similar structural members. Except where indicated otherwise,ducts with a side of 24" or more shall be supported on Ductmate trapeze duct hangersconsisting of 2" high x 1-1/2" wide x 18" gauge channel and 3/8" diameter hanger rodshung from support brackets bolted to structural members. See also Special Fabrications asshown on the Drawings. Duct supports shall be eight (8) feet maximum on center.

F. At branch ducts, provide manually operated dampers of the type and arrangement shownon the Drawings, two gages heavier than the duct (if single leaf type) in which installed, andequipped with locking quadrants and closed end bearings.

G. Sizes shown on Drawings are net inside dimensions. Enlarge duct to accommodate lining.2.6 ROUND DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. 2-10" w.g. round duct through 61" in diameter shall be United Sheet Metal spiral lockseamunseal duct, or approved equal, manufactured from galvanized steel meeting the ASTM A-527-71 in the following gages:

Diameter Metal Thickness3-13” 26 ga. 14-23” 24 ga.

B. Round duct shall be new and exclusively obtained for this project. Each piece shall be in20’ lengths. Ducts shall be cut to length required with joints only at fitting locations, excepton duct runs longer than 20 feet.

C. Spiral duct and fitting connections, 15" diameter and larger shall be Ductmate Spiralmateround duct connectors. The connector system shall consist of two mating round ductconnector flanges roll-formed from hot dipped galvanized steel with an integral sealant andclosure ring roll-formed from hot dipped galvanized steel.

D. Fittings shall be United Sheet Metal galvanized fittings in the following gauges:Diameter Metal Thickness3-13” 24 ga. 14-23” 22 ga.

E. Spiral duct fittings must be manufactured as separated fittings and shall not be saddle taps,stubs or tap-in fittings tapped into spiral duct, nor may they be dove-tailed tap-ins into pipeor fittings.

F. Reducers shall occur after a branch tap occurs on the main portion of the fitting. Divided-flow fittings shall be used unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

G. Joints on ducts and fittings shall be covered and sealed with 4" wide, 6 oz. canvassaturated with Arabol lagging adhesive, or Hardcast DT tape in conjunction with HardcastFTA-20, non flammable, non-toxic adhesive, or GlenKote duct sealer or other approvedmastic type sealer. Duct tape will not be allowed. Where exposed to weather, paintlagging strips with two coats of silver enamel paint.

H. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with appropriate tables of the latestASHRAE “Guide and Data Book” and SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”handbook and Chapter 6 of the 2019 CMC. Duct gauges to be in accordance with parts Aand D of this section.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 5 of 12

I. At branch ducts, provide manually operated dampers of the type and arrangement shownon the Drawings, two gages heavier than the duct (if single leaf type) in which installed andequipped with locking quadrants and closed end bearings.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible air duct shall be JP Lamborn Co., AMR-25.Flexible duct shall be factory made with

a sound absorbing, spun-bonded, non-woven inner core. R-4.2 insulation to encompasscore and a metalized polyester reinforced vapor barrier surrounding entire duct. Ends shallbe secured to rigid duct per current SMACNA DCS with UL-181 FX tape. Length not toexceed 7 feet. Duct shall be Class 1, UL approved, and meet NFPA 90A, 90B and CMCminimum requirements.

B. Use only the minimum length required to make the connection. In no case shall any sectionof flexible duct exceed 7 feet in length.

C. Use two layers of UL listed 181 duct tape to connect flexible duct to the metal duct if flexibleduct does not have S.M. collars.

D. The number of bends shall not exceed a combined total of 90 degrees. 90 degree bendswill not be allowed at diffuser connections.

2.8 FLUE VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Type B double wall vent pipe with UL label shall be used for gas burning appliances, except

gas wall furnaces and gas appliances with power burners. Install per manufacturer'srecommendations.

B. Flues or vents shall terminate above the roof with flashing and a listed vent cap installed inaccordance with its listing and the manufacturer's instructions. Flues or vents shallterminate as required per current CMC.

C. Vent cap shall be of the same manufacturer as the flue pipe.2.9 DUCT SPECIALTIES

A. Damper Regulators and Bearings: Duro-Dyne "Specline" SR-Series or approved equal,lever type with matching end bearing. Regulator set shall include rubber gasket betweenregulator and duct, spring washer between core and housing, wedge pin, dial indicator andhandle. Matching end bearing shall be closed end with rubber gasket:Model Size148 10” and Under 388 20” and Under 128 21” and Above

B. Access Panels: Access panels shall be located at all points where adjustable mechanismsare installed internal to or on the surfaces of the ductwork. Where adjustable mechanismsare concealed by walls or ceilings, "Elmdor" or approved equal access doors shall beinstalled. Size shall be suitable for convenient servicing. Tile Walls: Doors and Frame:Stainless Steel. Other areas: recess type to receive ceiling or wall finish in order toprovide "Blind Finish".

C. Fire Dampers: Fire dampers shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and/orrequired, and shall be of a type approved by the U.L. Laboratories, Inc. and the State ofCalifornia Fire Marshal. Dampers shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions.Provide access door in duct at each fire damper such that damper is easily accessible.

D. Volume Dampers:

1. In rectangular ducts greater than 1.5 sq. ft., provide Pottorff Model CD42, or equal,factory fabricated opposed blade damper, 16 gauge blades, and brass bearings.Blade width shall not exceed six inches.

2. In rectangular ducts 1.5 sq. ft. and less, provide single leaf dampers as described inSection 15600, 2.3 (a. and g.).

3. In round ducts 15" in diameter and less, provide shop fabricated galvanized sheetmetal plate dampers. Plate shall be 18 gauge or shall be two even gauges heavierthan duct; minimum thickness 22 gauge. Provide stiffening beads at 1/3 points indampers lighter than 18 gauge.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 6 of 12

4. In round ducts 16" and greater, provide Pottorff opposed blade damper ModelCD22R or approved equal.

5. In round ducts 4” – 24” in diameter, above “hard” ceilings, provide DuroZone CableOperated Damper. Cable length to be between 3 and 15 FT long. Contractor todetermine proper length to be use.

E. Provide 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal escutcheon plates at duct penetrations offinished building surfaces. Install tight against surface and securely attached to duct.Continue insulation through openings.

F. Duct Mounted Access Doors:

1. In rectangular duct provide, DuroDyne Model IAD, Ductmate "Sandwich", or equal,insulated, duct mounted access doors with Cam-Lock operated latches where shownon drawings or required for access to duct mounted equipment. Doorframe shall be24-gauge with double wall door and 1/2" glass fiber insulation. Size doors to provideeasy access to equipment.

2. In round ducts, provide Ductmate - METU round duct access doors, fully insulated,with attached gasket and springs between inner and outer door. Access doors shallbe as large as practical as duct size will allow.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide fireproof, insulated, non-porous, flexible connections between fans and ducts or

casings and where ducts are of dissimilar metals. For round ducts, securely fasten flexibleconnections by zinc coated steel clinch-type drawbands. Flexible connections shall beDuroDyne "Insulfab" or "Insulflex" or approved equal.

B. Provide a duct support next to each flex connector to prevent any strain on connection.2.11 CONDENSATE DRAINS AND DRAIN PANS

A. Air conditioning cooling coils shall have a condensate drain pipe, type "M" copper, to drainthe condensate as shown on drawings.

B. Condensing furnaces drains shall be PVC, slope a min of ¼ ft/inch from furnace connectionto drain and installed per manufacture recommendations.

C. Fan coils or DX cooling coils located in an attic or furred space shall have a secondarydrain pan constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet metal. This pan shall have adrain line discharging to a conspicuous location. This pan and drain is in addition to thenormal condensate drain line from the coil.

2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. In general, pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the following except where special

pipe hangers and supports are detailed on the Drawings. In cases hanger and supportdetails on the Drawings shall take precedent over the following:

Pipe 6” Size and Smaller Items Superstrut NumberPipe Hanger 710Side Beam Clamp for Wood Joist 540 Beam Coupling for Steel Beams U563-U562 Rod Coupling for Connection to “Hilti” H-119Inserts in Concrete Decks Trapeze Hangers A1200-A1202 Pipe Clamp A716 or 701W/S-716

B. Similar items by Unistrut, Securstrut, Michigan, or B-Line will be acceptable.C. Hanger Rods shall conform to the following table:

Tube/Pipe Size Rod Diameter ½ to 4” ⅜”

D. Hanger Support Spacing shall be as follows unless shown otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Horizontal:


23 0000 – HVAC Page 7 of 12

a. Copper: Every 6 feet for 1-1/2 inch and smaller, and 10 feet for 2 inch and larger.

b. Steel, Gas: Every 6 feet for � inch, 8 feet for 3/4 inch and 1 inch, and 10 feet for 1-1/4 inch and larger.

2. Vertical:

a. Copper: Every floor not to exceed 10 feet.

b. Steel, Gas: Same as horizontal spacing except 1-1/4" and larger at every floor.

2.13 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS: A. HVAC systems rated at 2000 CFM or greater shall be equipped with a duct smoke detector

to automatically shut off the HVAC system if smoke is detected. B. The detectors shall be installed in the main supply duct downstream of any filters, before

any branch ducts or terminal connections. C. The detector shall be System Sensor Innovairflex D4120 4-wire Photoelectric Smoke

Detector. Provide with Factory NEMA 4 enclosure if mounted outside. 2.14 DAMPER ACTUATORS

Provide actuators as specified in the mechanical control drawings. If actuators are not specified in the mechanical control drawings or in the mechanical legend or detail drawings, then the following shall be used: A. Actuators shall be Belimo. Actuator shall be direct coupled over the shaft, spring return

type. 2.15 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for motor control specified. Mount starter adjacent to equipment. See electrical drawing. Maintain minimum of 3' clearance to front of device.

B. Motor Starters: Shall be NEMA I or III as appropriate, general purpose, weather-resistant, with watertight enclosure where required.

2.16 INSULATION A. General: Insulation and lining material shall meet requirements of flame spread not to

exceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by Procedure ASTM-E-84, NFPA 255 or U.L. 723 and shall conform to NFPA 90A and 90B.

B. Heating and cooling duct and related heating and cooling equipment insulation shall conform to 2019 Building Energy Efficiency Standards, Administrative Regulations, Title 24, Part I, Section 120.4, except to the extent that this Specification supersedes the minimum standards as established by the Code, in which case this Specification shall take precedent.

C. Unless noted otherwise, insulation shall be Fiberglass, or approved equal material. Application Work shall be performed in accordance with the best accepted practice of the trade and the manufacturer's recommendations. The performance of insulation Work shall be by experienced insulation applicators. Insulation shall be installed after the specified tests have been applied to the piping and duct systems, and the systems have been inspected and approved. Fiberglass trade names and/or numbers have been used to establish a standard of quality.

D. External Duct Insulation: Shall be applied to concealed heating and cooling, supply and return duct except duct that is internally lined. Insulation on duct shall be Manville Microlite FSK duct insulation, 2" thick, type 100, minimum installed R value of 4.2 or greater, FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass, scrim laminated to U.L. rated Kraft, or approved equal. Adhere to duct surfaces with Foster's 85-62 or approved equal, adhesive applied in strips of 6" wide on approximately 12" centers. Circumferential seams shall be butted together and sealed over joints with 3" wide pressure sensitive foil vapor barrier tape. Longitudinal edges shall be lapped 2" and secured with outward clinching staple 6" on center then sealed with pressure sensitive foil vapor barrier tape. Duct wrap shall be installed to allow maximum fullness at corners (avoid excessive compression) minimum thickness at corners shall be 1". Where ducts are over 24" in width, the duct wrap shall be


23 0000 – HVAC Page 8 of 12

additionally secured to the bottom of the rectangular ducts with mechanical fasteners spaced on 18" centers (Max.) to prevent sagging insulation

E. Internal Duct Insulation : Shall be applied to all heating and cooling supply and return ductand plenums where shown on Drawings. Manufacturer shall be Manville Microlite, orapproved equal. Duct Liner shall be Linacoustic R, 1 ½” thick, 1.5 pcf, with a "K" value of2.2 in. for a total "R" installed value of 4.2 or greater. Insulation shall withstand velocities ofup to 5000 FPM and temperatures up to 250 degrees F

F. Portions of duct receiving Duct Liner shall be completed with transverse joints neatly buttedwith no gaps or interruptions. The duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with 100%coverage of adhesive and exposed leading edges and transverse joints coated withadhesive. Adhesive shall be a water based product. In addition this shall be secured withmechanical fasteners which shall compress the liner sufficiently in place. The liner shall becut to assure overlapped and compressed longitudinal corner joints. Application proceduresshall comply with the recommendations of the Sheet Metal and Air ConditioningContractor's National Association's Duct Liner Application Standard, Second Edition.

G. Ducts: Ducts shall be constructed, installed, sealed and insulated in accordance with the2019 CMC. Insulation requirements are shown in 2019 California Energy Code T-24 Part 6Section 120.4. The above paragraph(s) shall supersede if more stringent.

2.17 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Temperature controls shall be furnished as indicated in schematic Drawing on Plans

including room thermostats, relays and other necessary combustion, operating and safetycontrols.

B. Wiring and Conduit

1. Control wiring and conduit shall be the responsibility of this section and be installedas follows:

a. In equipment rooms/attics – Conductors shall be run in conduit. Finalconnection to equipment shall be flexible conduit.

b. Concealed in building construction (wall/inaccessible ceilings) - Conductorsshall be run in conduit.

c. Roof mounted/exterior equipment yards – Conductors shall be in conduit. Allflexible conduit shall be seal-tite with weatherproof connections. Equipment ongrade and detached from the building a distance greater than 36” shall haveunderground control conduit routed to equipment.

d. Above accessible ceiling spaces – Control cable will be allowed to be installedwithout conduit in accessible areas above ceilings as follows:

1. Cable is an approved type for the application.

2. Cable is bundled/organized in management devices routed square withbuilding lines (no diagonals) and kept clear of electrical devices (i.e.,ballasts, transformers, etc.) that could cause interference.

3. Conduit sleeves are provided between accessible ceiling spaces (i.e.,across soffits, gypboard ceilings, etc.) as required to maintain futureaccess to cable.

e. Cable routed in accessible ceiling spaces shall comply with EIA/TIA standardsfor communications cabling. Communication bus wire shall be W183C-2058YConnect Air, yellow shielded cable.

C. Electric wiring, conduit and other electric devices required to complete the installation of thetemperature control systems shall comply with requirements as set forth in the ElectricalSection of this Specification.

D. After completion of the installation, the Contractor shall adjust thermostats, motors andother equipment provided under this Contract. He shall place them in complete operatingcondition subject to approval of the Architect.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 9 of 12

E. The Control System herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship andmaterial under normal use and service. If, within twelve (12) months from date ofacceptance by the Architect, any of the equipment herein described is proved to bedefective in workmanship or material, it will be adjusted, repaired or replaced free of chargeby the Contractor.

F. The final connections and supervision of control wiring and interlock wiring shall be theresponsibility of this Contractor.

G. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, the required number of shopdrawings of the entire control system before starting Work.

H. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor will provide diagrammatic layouts of theAutomatic Control Systems specified herein. Layouts shall show control equipment andthe function of each item shall be indicated.

I. The temperature control system shall be installed by persons in the direct employment ofthe temperature controls manufacturer(s) exclusive contracting representative. TheMechanical Contractor shall not install the temperature controls unless pre-approved by theMechanical Engineer.

2.18 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Refrigerant piping shall be flushed clean with nitrogen and the ends capped prior to

installation. Refrigerant piping shall be ASTM B280 ACR copper tube with wrought copperfittings. Use 5% minimum silver brazing alloy with melting point higher than 1100oF formaking the joints.

2.19 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION A. Cooling Only Systems:

1. Insulate refrigerant suction line with 3/4" thick Owens-Corning Fiberglass orArmstrong Armaflex foamed plastic flexible tubing insulation applied with No. 500adhesive. Use multiple layers and miter insulation to cover joints and all other itemsas required to prevent condensation.

B. VRF and Heat Pump Systems:

1. Material:

a. Low-density EPDM closed cell elastomeric foam, CFC and HCFC gas free withover-lap seal

b. Thermal Conductivity: 0.235 (BTU * in/h *ft2 * °F) at 75°F.

c. Water Vapor Permeability: <0.03 perm (4.38 x 10-11g/Pa*s*m) per ASTM E96.

d. Water Absorption: <0.2% by volume per ASTM C 209.

e. Working Temperature: -70 °F to 257 °F (-57 °C to 125 °C) continuous perASTM C 411.

f. Surface Burning Characteristics: Meets 25/50 Flame-Spread/ Smoke-Generated per UL 723 and ASTM E84. Additionally, meets UL-94 5 V-A, V-0and is self-extinguishing per ASTM D 635.

g. UV Resistant: EPDM provides UV Resistance in accordance with ASTMG7/G90.

h. Ozone Resistant: Meets ASTM D 1171

2. Title 24 Wall Thickness:

a. Hot gas pipes:

1. Above 200 °F (3 pipe heat recovery systems) use 2 ½” wall thickness(requires double layers to meet 25/50 fire/smoke codes)

2. Below 200 °F (2 pipe heat recovery systems) use 1 ½” wall thickness

b. Liquid pipes:

1. 1” wall thickness

c. Suction gas pipes:


23 0000 – HVAC Page 10 of 12

1. 1” wall thickness for less than 1” pipe

2. 1 1/2” wall thickness for greater than 1” pipeC. For insulation exposed to weather:

1. Provide protective PVC cover type “E-FLEX GUARD” (72 or 750 series) by AirexManufacturing, Inc.

2.20 REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Stop valves shall be Henry Type – rated for R410A, brass body, soldered, packless

diaphragm.B. Solenoid valves shall be Sporlan Type – rated for R410A, soldered with brass body.C. Filter dryer shall be Sporlan "Catch-All" with soldered connections.D. Flexible connectors rated for R410A shall be used at seismic joints. For linesets up to 5/8”,

flexible connectors shall be 36” Flex-Line Connectors manufactured by DiversiTechCorporation. Contractor to provide nitrogen purge and cleaning of complete assembly priorto installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceeduntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the

Work of those trades for interface with the Work of this Section.3.3 PREPARATION

A. Holes in concrete:

1. Provide sleeves, accurately dimensioned and shaped to permit passage of items ofthis Section.

2. Deliver such sleeves, with accurate setting drawings and setting information, to thetrades providing the surfaces through which such items must penetrate, and in atimely manner to assure inclusion in the Work.

B. Flashing:

1. Where items of this Section penetrate the roof, outer walls, or waterproofing of anykind, provide under this Section base flashing and counterflashing required at suchpenetration.

2. Provide on each pipe passing through the roof a 4 pound seamless lead flashing andcounterflashing assembly.

3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Conceal piping, ductwork, and equipment in spaces provided unless specifically shown

otherwise. If spaces are inadequate, notify Architect in time to avoid unnecessary Work.Do not cut or notch structural members without specific approval of the Architect.

B. Follow manufacturer's instructions on items not specifically covered in drawings andspecifications. Report discrepancies to Architect for clarification before starting Work.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INTERFACE A. Provide required shut off valves, unions, and final connections of piping to the Work of this

Section.B. For electrically operated equipment, verify the electrical characteristics actually available

for the Work of this Section and provide equipment meeting those characteristics.3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint inside of air outlets and connecting plenums with one coat of black paint, or provideall such items factory prepainted.

B. For roof-mounted equipment, provide factory pre-finish on exposed surfaces.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 11 of 12

C. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5feet.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Ductwork shall be delivered to the Project site with surfaces clean and free of loose dirt and

rust. Special care shall be exercised by the Contractor to store the duct in a clean area toprevent the accumulation of dirt prior to installation. Fabricated or partially fabricated ductsections shall not be stored in open fields or on dirt areas surrounding the construction site.Paved areas may be used, if available, provided adequate protection is provided to preventthe accumulation of dirt on duct surfaces. If possible, the Contractor should arrange todeliver duct to the project site and store on the floor of the area in which it is to be installed.

B. Before installation of ductwork, the Contractor shall inspect each section of duct and wipeinternal surfaces clean. At the end of each Work period, or when ends of duct are leftinstalled for future extension, the open ends shall be tightly closed off with a plastic sheetand taped securely to the open end of the duct.

C. Construct and install sheet metal in accordance with latest SMACNA recommendations.Provide variations in duct size and additional duct fittings as required and approved by theArchitect at no extra cost to the owner.

D. The throat radius of bends shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Provide turning vanesin any mitered turn greater than 45 degrees.

E. Transition slopes shall be no less than one to five where space permits.F. Abrupt offsets in the duct system greater than 30 degrees will not be allowed.

3.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROL INSTALLATIONA. Install wiring and tubing parallel to walls and floors and securely clipped to structure or

mechanical system components. Group parallel runs for neat appearance.B. Install room thermostats and other control devices at 48 inches above finished floor unless

a lower mounting height is required for access by handicapped.C. Install outside air sensor in a location where it is not directly effected by radiation from the

sun or any heat generating device or by a conditioned air stream or any other location thatwould produce a false reading.

D. Upon completion of the installation calibrate all equipment and adjust controls for properoperation.

3.9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGING PROCEDURE A. Pressurize the system with refrigerant and hold for 24 hours with no drop in pressure; test

joints and equipment for evidence of leaks after satisfactory pressure test.B. Provide 1/2" angle type charging and purging valves adjacent to high and low side of the

condensing unit to accomplish the procedure described hereinafter. Connect the vacuumpump to both the high and low side of the system. Do Work when ambient air temperatureis above 60 degrees F during the evacuation process.

C. Operate the vacuum pump until the system is evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute. Break thesystem vacuum with nitrogen or refrigerant.

D. After the system has been evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute, close the vacuum pumpsuction valve and stop the pump.

E. Charge system to required capacity with specified refrigerant.3.10 CONTROL DEVICE IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Thermostats and Exhaust fan switches shall have labels mounted on or just above thecontrol device labled with the equipment being controlled. As an example, for a exhaust fancontrolled by a switch the lable would read “EXHAUST FAN # 1” or if a thermostat thelabel would read “AC-1”.

1. Labels shall be 2" x 1" x 1/8" thick Formica/plastic engraving stock beveled on bothsides and with two 3/16" diameter holes near the top uppermost tag corners.

2. Labels shall be white with 3/8" high red engraved letters.

3. Labels shall be attached to the equipment with adhesive.


23 0000 – HVAC Page 12 of 12

3.11 WARRANTY A. The contractor shall warranty all of the systems for proper operation installed by the

contractor for not less than one calendar year from date of project completion. Thiscompletion date shall be set by the Architect or owner.

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings covering duct systems, equipment and

Mechanical Room piping systems. The drawings shall be prepared in 3/8" scale and shallbe submitted to the Architect for approval prior to any fabrication. In preparing the shopdrawings, the Contractor shall coordinate the location of duct, piping and equipment withthe Work of other trades.

3.13 MECHANICAL SYSTEM START-UP RESPONSIBILITY A. Start up Mechanical Systems, and perform any such Work as may be required to adjust the

systems to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Air distribution balancingshall be performed in accordance with Article "MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BALANCING".

B. Install new clean specified filters in equipment containing filters immediately prior to owneroccupancy. Contractor to bear all costs for this work.

3.14 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BALANCING A. Testing and air balancing shall be performed by an independent balancing company

certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental BalancingBureau (NEBB). Testing and balancing shall be performed by a company other than themechanical system installers/contractor. The name of the firm that the Contractor proposesto engage to perform this Work of balancing the system shall be submitted to the Engineerfor approval prior to commencing the Work.

B. After Systems have been tested as outlined, air and water flow rates shall be balanced, andcontrol devices adjusted. Balance and testing shall not begin until systems have beencompleted and are in full working order. Upon completion of the balancing operation andprior to final acceptance of the systems, the balancing firm shall submit a report, with six (6)copies, certifying to the proper performance of the system for approval by the MechanicalEngineer.

1. The following information shall be included in the Air Side Report:

a. Fan speeds.

b. Motor current readings and voltage readings.

c. Air quantities in CFM at supply, return, exhaust terminals, and outside airintakes, both at design value and actual measured value. Test and adjust eachterminal to within +10% of design requirements.

d. Air velocities in FPM at supply, return, and exhaust terminals at design valueand actual measured value.

e. Positive static pressure, negative and total pressures and total air quantities foreach fan system.

f. Equipment nameplate data.

END OF SECTION 23 00 00


23 0013 –GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 9

SECTION 23 00 13

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents:

1. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section.

2. Division 1 - General Requirements applies to the Work of this Section.

3. Where requirements of this Section exceed those in other Contract Documents,Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.


1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinentregulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Included: Work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and System Balancing

2. Plumbing

3. Carpentry and metal Work required for Work of this Section and not specificallyshown under another Section. Openings in concrete or masonry construction shall beeither core drilled or saw cut unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

4. Excavation and Backfill

5. Coordination Drawings

D. Related Work:

1. Painting (Division 09)

2. Cutting and Patching (Division 30)

3. Low voltage electrical control (Division 26)

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to job site in new condition.

B. Install: Receive and store at job site until required; place secure and connect; furnishrequired appurtenances.

C. Provide: Furnish and install as defined above.

D. Section: Refers to a Section of these Specifications.

E. Standards: The issue in effect as of the date of the contract documents.

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Architectural Sections (Division 01).

1.4 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS

A. When Work of this Section requires temporary shutdown of existing systems forconnections, the shutdown shall be made only during pre-arranged time agreeable to theOwner.

1.5 CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Mechanical Drawings are, in general, made to scale and the Contractor may obtainapproximate distances and dimensions by scaling the Plans. It is distinctly understood,



however, that it is done entirely at the Contractor's responsibility. Refer to Architect's Plans and Specifications for construction details, which will affect the Work and equipment. Examine the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Landscape, Irrigation, Data, Fire Protection and Plumbing Plans and Specifications to ensure that this work does not conflict with the above trades. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Plans are diagrammatic and, therefore, do not necessarily represent the exact installation. However, pipe sizing for utility services and ductwork are calculated per their respective codes and Standard Engineering Practice and shall be installed as sized from point of origin to terminal point. It shall remain the Contractor's responsibility to submit Shop Drawings if he/she has any questions about the final arrangement. Nothing on these Plans or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all applicable codes and regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS PANELS

A. If not called for under other Sections, furnish Milcor, Elmdor, or Jay R. Smith access panelswhere shown on the Drawings or required for maintenance access to completed Work ofthis Section. Submit size, type, and location of proposed access panels not specificallyshown, for review by Architect.

B. Access panels shall be constructed of 16 gauge prime coated steel or stainless steel withscrewdriver operated cam latch, concealed hinges, and fire rating equal to adjacentconstruction.

C. Provide flush type doors with:

1. Stainless steel finish for tiled surfaces.

2. Prime coated finish for other surfaces.

2.2 FLASHING

A. Provide watertight flashing at all openings through exterior walls and roof. Refer toArchitectural Drawings.

2.3 BELT DRIVES

A. All belts shall be "Vee" type, or approved equal. Sheaves shall be adjustable and shall besized to drive fan at scheduled RPM when set at midpoint of adjustment range. All beltdrive assemblies shall be rated at 150% of drive motor horsepower. OSHA approved beltguards shall be provided over all drive assemblies. The Contractor shall change any beltsand drives as required to produce the specified CFM.

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL

A. All fans, heating and ventilating units, air conditioning units, blowers and similar equipmentshall be securely mounted to and/or supported from the structure.

B. Isolate all bare water piping from structural members or hangers with "Trisolators" orsubmitted and approved equal insulating sleeves. Install hangers on outside of insulatedjacket on all insulated lines.

2.5 WEATHERPROOFING

A. All equipment exposed to weather shall be protected by means of a suitable finish (i.e.paint). All fan cabinets, roof-mounted equipment, and ductwork shall be fabricated in sucha manner to prevent leakage through seams and joints. Water rated, exterior hoods shallbe provided over motors, belts, and other devices to insure against damage by water. At alllocations where pipes and/or ducts penetrate exterior walls, or roofs, suitable rain tightflashing shall be provided.



2.6 PIPE WRAPPING

A. All pipe, metal components, and joints buried in ground shall be primed and protected with10-mil tape double wrapped or approved equal per IAPMO IS 13-2006. Before tapeapplication, all bare pipe and fittings to be wrapped must be coated with pipe wrap primer.Stretch first layer of tape to conform to the surface while spirally half-lapping, apply asecond layer, half-lapped and spiraled as the first layer with spirals perpendicular to firstwrapping. In lieu of tape wrap, heat shrinkable 10-mil minimum thick polyethylene sleevemay be used.

B. When applying tape, use only enough pull to cause the tape to properly conform to theirregular surfaces of the item. The proper amount of pull is reached when the tape surfaceis smooth without any wrinkles. Continue tape 4" above grade. End overlaps should pointdown. Tape shall be applied per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2.7 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A. All Electric motor current characteristics are as shown in equipment schedules on drawingsand as specified hereinafter in this Specification. The Contractor shall refer to the ElectricalPlans and shall confirm all motor voltage, amperage and phase characteristics beforeprocessing submittals or ordering equipment. If any equipment is installed different from thesupplied electrical power, it is the contractor’s responsibility to correct equipment to therequired electrical characteristics.

B. All electrical devices of a type normally listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall bearU.L. label of approval.

2.8 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Provide the coating specified below unless otherwise specifically called for under Painting,Division 09900. Exclude non-ferrous items, stainless steel, items to be insulated, andfactory-finished items. Conform to requirements of the Painting Section where requirementsare not specified in this Section.

B. All materials used, except as otherwise specified in carrying out the provisions of thecontract, are to be Fuller-O’Brien manufacturer or approved equal. Numbers given beloware Fuller-O’Brien Company designation unless noted otherwise.

1. Primer coat for all exterior and interior materials: 1 Coat - Primer #66850

2. Finish coats as listed below:

Exterior concrete and concrete block 2 Coats – Semi-Gloss #664XX

Interior concrete and concrete block 2 Coats – Semi-Gloss #214XX

Exterior metal 2 Coats – Semi-Gloss #664XX

Interior metal 2 Coats – Semi-Gloss #214XX

Exterior galvanized metal 2 Coats – Semi-Gloss #664XX

Exterior stucco 2 Coats – Flat #668XX

Interior of Grilles, Diffusers, and Registers 1 Coat – Flat (black) #31202

3. Furnish equipment with factory or field-applied prime coat and finish coat of enamel.Restore damaged finishes to match original.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide neat appearance, required manufacturer’s access, andrequired space to allow replacement or maintenance. Provide bases, supports, anchorbolts, and other items required to install equipment. Installation shall be level and bracedper CBC.

B. Equipment shall operate quietly and without objectionable vibration. Excessive vibration,other than from specified equipment operating at optimum conditions, shall be theContractor's responsibility and shall be eliminated as directed by Architect.

3.2 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections to avoid conflicts. If required,provide shop drawings and submit to Architect for approval.

B. Insure that Work of other Sections is suitable to accommodate Work of this Section.

3.3 ADEQUACY OF FURRING

A. Conceal piping and ductwork in spaces provided unless specifically shown otherwise. Ifspaces are inadequate, notify Architect prior to ordering materials and fabrication ofcomponents.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect equipment from dirt, moisture, and mechanical damage during construction.Restore or replace damaged equipment to original condition.

B. Keep interior of piping and ductwork free of foreign material during construction. Flushpiping systems with test medium specified under Piping Tests before installing equipmentand appurtenances or making final connections.

3.5 CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK

A. Do not conceal or cover Work before tests and observations are completed. Uncover Workprematurely closed in and repair resulting damage to all Work, if requested by Architect,Engineer, or Project Inspector.

3.6 DAMAGE

A. Repair or replace items damaged by leaks or overflow from Work provided under thisSection and for any damage to any part of the project site, for a period of 1 year after noticeof completion date. This is in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner mayhave against the contractor under the Contract Documents.

3.7 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. The contractor shall examine carefully all surfaces to be finished under the contract; andbefore beginning any of his work shall see that the work of other trades has been left orinstalled in a workmanlike condition to receive paint, or a particular finish.

B. The contractor shall take the necessary steps to protect his work and the work of othercontractors during the time his work is in process and the contractor shall be responsiblefor any and all damage to the work or property of other contractors caused by hisemployees or by himself.

C. Provide protective covers or drop cloths to protect floors, fixtures, and equipment. Exercisecare to prevent paint being spattered on to surfaces which is not to be painted. Surfaces,from which such paint cannot be satisfactorily removed, shall be painted or repainted, asrequired to produce a finish satisfactory to the Architect.

D. Cracks, holes, or imperfections in concrete or plaster are to be filled with patching plasterand smoothed off to match adjoining surfaces.



E. All surfaces shall be in a proper condition to receive finish. Clean surfaces as necessary to receive paint. Remove all grease from metal surfaces before painting.

F. Each coat of paint shall be applied at proper consistency and brushed evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and with no evidence of poor workmanship. Color between coats of paint shall differ; (Color variations between coats should be enough to impair hiding.) Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping of paint on glass or hardware. Paint to be sharply cut to lines. Finished paint surfaces to be free from defects or blemishes.

G. Exposed piping, ducts, and mechanical equipment (except for factory finished items) shall be painted. Exposed piping, except for identification banding, shall be painted to match surfaces adjacent. Each coat to be inspected when dry and subsequent coat not to be applied until approval received.

H. Paint all surfaces visible through grille, diffuser and register faces, flat black.

I. The contractor shall store all painting materials and equipment outside of the building. The receiving and moving of all paint materials and mixing shall be done outside of the building. Any other arrangements shall be made only with Architects approval.

J. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire. Rags, waste, etc., soiled with paint or cleaning material, shall be removed from the premises at the end of each day's work.

3.8 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTING

A. Furnish all test pumps, gauges, and equipment. Test all safety controls and devices.

B. For air tests, install a calibrated test pressure gauge in the piping system to observe any loss in pressure. Calibrate the test pressure gauge with a dead weight tester within 15 days before use and certify by initial and date on a sticker applied to the dial face. Maintain the required test pressure for the time indicated. Brush joints with a soapy water solution to check for leaks if the required pressure cannot be maintained.

C. After any test, repair all leaks found as directed and re-test as necessary until the system is proven tight.

D. Before applying test pressure to any piping systems the Contractor shall be responsible for isolating all equipment e.g. control valves, regulators, relief devices, tanks and any other line accessories, which would otherwise be damaged by the test pressure.

1. Soil, Waste, Vent, Roof, and Condensate Drainage:

a. Entire System: Tightly close all openings except the highest one. Fill to overflowing with water.

b. Sections of System: Tightly close all openings except the highest opening of the section under test. Fill section with water to test each section with a minimum 10-foot head of water except for the uppermost 10 feet of the system.

c. Allow to stand for (4) hours or longer, as required to complete the inspection.

2. Domestic Water: Fill with water and test at 150 psig. Retain for (4) hours.

3. Gas Piping: Air test to pressure equal to one and one-half times the design pressure, but in no case less than 50 psig. Retain for four hours.

4. Refrigerant: Pressurize the system with nitrogen to 150 psig and hold for 24 hours with no drop in pressure; test joints and equipment for evidence of leaks after satisfactory pressure test.

E. After all Systems have been tested as outlined, all flow rates shall be balanced, and all control devices adjusted. See Section 23 0000.

F. The equipment and installations shall be operated by the Contractor and he shall demonstrate that all Systems are performing according to the requirements of the Plans and Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Architect, Engineer and Owner.



G. Acceptance Testing Requirements: For applicable mechanical acceptance tests see the T-24 plan sheets. All forms, regulation and requirements are available online atwww.energy.ca.gov/title24.

3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Contractor shall do all cutting and patching which may be required for the installation ofthe Work under this Division of the Specifications. Patching shall be of the same quality,materials and finish as, and shall match accurately, all surrounding construction. No cuttingof the Structure shall be permitted without the approval of the Architect.

B. Wherever concrete or paved surfaces are cut to provide for the installation under thisSection, the Contractor shall restore the surfaces to their original condition. Subgradematerials, concrete, and paving materials, along with the placement of same, shall be inaccordance with the respective Sections of this Specification as they apply to theinstallation of such material.

3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: (Buried pipes within the building walls and to 5 feet from the building.)

A. Dig trenches straight and true to line and grade; bottom shall be left smoothed of rockpoints. Pipe shall be supported for the entire length on undisturbed, original earth. Theminimum trench width shall be 16" and all pipe shall be 2 feet below the finished grade,minimum, wherever conditions permit. Sewer pipes to be below grade a s necessary tomeet the slope and invert on the Drawing. Whenever substantial variations of pipe bury isindicated by field conditions, the proposed changes in depth of bury shall be submitted, inwriting, to the Architect for approval.

B. Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings: Trench width for thermoplastic sewer pipeshall be 1.25 times the outside diameter of the piping plus 12 inches or the outsidediameter of the piping plus 16 inches. Thermoplastic piping shall be bedded in not less than4 inches of granular fill supporting the piping. The backfill for thermoplastic piping shall becompacted along the sides of the piping in 6 inch layers and continue to not less than 12inches above the piping. Compaction shall be not less than a 85 percent standard proctordensity.

C. All piping shall be laid on a bed of clean dry sand not less than 6" thick. The space betweenthe pipe and the sides of the trench shall be backfilled with clean dry sand to a point 6"above the crown of the pipe. Both sides of the pipe shall be filled at the same time.

D. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled with native soil in lifts no greater than 12"and shall be mechanically compacted by tamping so to maintain a minimum relative drydensity of 95%, determined by California Impact Test Method No. 216.

E. All backfilling shall be brought flush with finished subgrade.

F. Excess material shall be removed from the site. Trenches shall be backfilled immediatelyafter approval.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT

A. The installation of piping, ductwork, and equipment shall be made in such a manner to clearbeams and obstructions. Do not cut into or reduce the size of plates or any load carryingmembers without approval of the Architect. Check Drawings and Work of others to preventinterference. Deviations of the Work determined by the Architect shall be installed by theContractor without additional cost.

B. Install piping and ductwork promptly, cap or plug open ends of pipe. No piping shall bepermanently covered by construction before inspection and approval. Piping and ductworkshall be installed in accordance with best practice and recommendations of themanufacturer.



C. Conceal piping and ductwork unless indicated otherwise. Inspect each piece of pipe,tubing, fittings, and equipment for defects and obstructions. Remove defective materialfrom site. Install piping generally level, free of traps and unnecessary bends to conformwith building requirements, and provide space for other work. Piping to be free of unusualnoises. Avoid any possible galvanic action by isolating dissimilar metals with suitableDielectric Insulating Fittings.

D. Unless called for otherwise, hereinafter in this Specification or by specific detail on theDrawings, all water pipes in contact with structure and/or hangers shall be suitably isolated.In the case of uninsulated pipe, "Trisolators" or equal shall be used.

E. Protect enameled or polished equipment from damage, tool marks, etc.

3.12 STERILIZATION OF PIPES

A. After preliminary purging of the Systems, the entire domestic potable water systempertaining to Work under this Contract shall be chlorinated in accordance with AmericanWater Works Association, State of California Health and Safety Code procedure fordisinfecting water mains. A thorough flushing operation shall be run upon completion ofsterilization. Contractor shall then arrange with local health authority for test on mains andwater systems and provide three (3) copies of test results to the Architect.

3.13 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Major pieces of equipment shall include, but are not limited to: water heaters, airconditioners, unit heaters, supply and exhaust fans, and shall be tagged.

1. Tags shall be 2" x 2" x 1/8" thick Formica/plastic engraving stock beveled on bothsides and with two 3/16" diameter holes near the top uppermost tag corners.

2. Tags shall be white with 3/8" high red engraved letters.

3. Tags shall be attached to the equipment with bolts, screws or chains as per valves.

4. Tags shall have the following information:

a. Equipment number and nomenclature corresponding to the information on themechanical contract drawings, and where multiple systems are installed in abuilding, equipment tagging shall include the space or area served.

b. Examples:

WATER HEATER EXHAUST FAN AIR CONDITIONER

WH-1 EF-2 AC-3

FIRST FLOOR KITCHEN 101 2ND FLOOR OFFICE - EAST

3.14 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Building Systems:

1. Piping systems installed anywhere within the scope of the Work shall be identified asto contents using a color banding and marking system as outlined and in compliancewith Federal OSHA requirements.

2. This Work includes furnishing and application of all snap-around and/or self-stickingpipe markers. Formica valve tags, chains, wires, and related materials proper for thecompletion of the Work.

3. Pipe markers shall be permanently shaped vinylite plastic snap-around pipe markersas manufactured by Seton Nameplate Corporation, Wilmington Plastic Company, orapproved equal.



4. A maximum of four basic background colors shall be used and they shall conform to the American Standards Association Standard A13.1, "Scheme For Identification of Piping Systems" The names of materials (pipe contents) shall be superimposed on these ANSI background colors. Work legends shall conform to ANSI A13.1 to avoid confusion and mistakes. Basic background colors and content classification are:

Yellow Dangerous Materials

Red Fire Protection

Bright Blue Protective Materials

Green Safe Materials

5. Pipe marking and installation shall be as follows:

a. Apply "Plastic Pipe Marker" at each valve to show proper identification of pipe contents.

b. Use an "Arrow Marker" with each "Pipe Content Marker". The Arrow shall always point away from the "Pipe Marker" and in the direction of the flow.

c. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-header "Arrow Marker".

d. Apply "Pipe Marker" and "Arrow Marker" at every point of pipe entry and exit where the line goes through the wall, floor or roof.

e. Apply "Pipe Marker" and "Arrow Marker" on each riser and "T" joint.

f. Apply "Pipe Marker" and "Arrow Marker" every 50 feet on long continuous lines.

g. Identifying long continuous lines with "Pipe Marker and "Arrow Marker at every bay or aisle within the building. All branch runs from mains on the roof shall be identified with "Pipe Marker" and "Arrow Marker" at the point of takeoff.

h. Apply "Markers" on the two lower quarters of the pipe where view is unobstructed. In this position "Markers" are read at a glance from ground floor level and dust will not obscure the "Marker". Roof-mounted piping "Markers" shall be so located that they can be read from a standing position on the roof.

i. All identification markers located out of doors and exposed to the sun and the elements shall receive one coat of clear lacquer after application to the pipe, to seal edges and to act as a protective coating.

j. Each "Arrow Marker" must have the same ANSI background color as its companion "Pipe Marker". Arrow must point away from "Pipe Marker" and indicate direction of flow.

k. "Pipe Markers" shall be guaranteed to stay on pipe systems for a period of not less than five years.

6. Following is a list of, but not necessarily limited to, the more commonly used piping systems that require identification "Pipe Markers" and "Arrow Markers".

Abbreviations on Drawings

Wording to Put on Pipe Marker ANSI Color Background

CW Domestic Cold Water Green

DHWS Domestic Hot Water Supply Yellow

DHWR Domestic Hot Water Return Yellow



S Gravity Sewer or Drain Green

V Vent Green

G Natural Gas Yellow

A Compressed Air Blue

FM Fire Protection Water Red

CD Condensate Drain Return Yellow

RL Refrigerant Liquid Yellow

RS Refrigerant Suction Yellow

All lettering shall be black on the yellow background and white on all other background.

3.15 SEISMIC BRACING

A. It shall be required that pipes, ducts and conduits be supported and braced per the mostcurrent edition of SMACNA "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for MechanicalSystems".

B. When the SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" doesnot specifically address the size of duct or pipe to be braced, the following shall apply:

1. All ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing to thesatisfaction of the Architect, Engineer, and State Inspector.

2. All pipes shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing to thesatisfaction of the Architect, Engineer, and State Inspector. Absolutely, no "Plumber'sTape" shall be used anywhere on this project.

C. The SMACNA Manual can be obtained through SMACNA (VA) at (703) 803-2989.Contractor shall obtain manual prior to the start of any work.

3.16 OPERATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish competent Technicians to supervise start-up operations ofequipment specified by the Architect or Engineer and to instruct Owner's operators. TheContractor shall furnish six complete sets of operating instructions and service manuals tothe Architect.

B. Instruction period shall be started after instruction books and service manuals have beensubmitted to and approved by the Architect and shall be at hours (regular and non-regular)arranged by the Architect.

C. Service manuals shall include oiling, cleaning, and servicing data, compiled in clearly andeasily understood form and in a durable binder. Data shall show all serial numbers of everypiece of equipment and complete list of replacement parts.

3.17 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warranty all of the systems for proper operation installed by thecontractor for not less than one calendar year from date of project completion. Thiscompletion date shall be set by the Architect or Owner.

END OF SECTION 23 00 13


26 0500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 1 of 8

SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Materials and equipment shall be furnished and installed in support of electrical

work described in these plans and specifications including but not limited to,raceways, boxes, enclosures, feeders, branch circuiting, supports, terminalcabinets, sleeves, gutters, panels, transformers, switchgear, lighting fixtures,controls, relays, contactors, in order to complete and make fully functional thesystems described.

2. Complete fire alarm and annunciation system as shown and/or required by the(local jurisdiction having authority, California State Fire Marshal) includingmonitoring equipment and wiring for central station connection. Provide firealarm system design and submit for approval by the AHJ.

3. Lighting systems, both interior and exterior as shown on the plans and asspecified herein, including controls, occupancy sensors, lumen sensors,photocell controls, lamps, dimmers, racks, dimming ballasts, supports, fasteners,straps, and miscellaneous mounting hardware and support structures for suchequipment.

4. Electrical, Telephone and CATV Utility company site work as required by theserving companies. All utility company conduits, raceways, trenching, backfilling,utility vaults, equipment pads and substructures shall meet both the respectiveutility companies requirements as well as those of the authority havingjurisdiction, whichever is more restrictive. In no case shall work be completedand covered without the written approval of the serving utility companies both onand off site.

5. Duct banks and raceways for all power and communications systems as shownand/or required. Duct banks shall include all trenching, racking, conduit,concrete, backfill, boxes, pads, substructures required for a fully developed anduseable pathway for cables, conductors, as shown on site, etc.

6. HVAC and plumbing electrical: Conduit, conductors and terminations for all linevoltage power, line voltage controls and fusible and/or non-fusible safetydisconnect switches for HVAC equipment, including but not limited to airconditioners, furnaces, fans, heat pumps, cooling towers, system pumps,condensing units. Provide protective equipment unless otherwise noted, etc.including protective devices.



7. Plumbing Electrical: Conduit, conductors and terminations for plumbingequipment with power requirements including necessary fusible and/or non-fusible safety disconnect devices. Provide motor starters where required unlessprovided by mechanical specification.

8. Power and Lighting Distribution: Furnish and install power and lightingdistribution systems including but not limited to panels, feeders, transformers,branch circuits, devices, fixtures, disconnect switches, contactors, controls, etc.for a complete working system.

9. Data systems infrastructure including all boxes, raceways, cable tray, wire baskettray, dedicated branch circuits, sleeves and penetrations, etc. as described andas shown in plans, risers, specifications, EIA/TIA standards and/or required for acomplete and operating system.

10. Voice amplification system in multi-purpose rooms, auditoria and gymnasiums,including amplifiers, racks, mixers, microphones, outlets, cable/connections,equipment racks, etc. as specified on the drawings and in written specifications.

11. Lighting acceptance testing, documentation and completion of required forms asspecified in Section 26 5670, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

12. Furnish emergency distribution system in accordance with all applicable codesand standards. This project shall include the (standby option/prime) generator,automatic transfer equipment and emergency distribution system. This shallinclude the furnishing of a system that is approved by the local Air PollutionControl District (APCD) and the furnishing of all required data to the Owner orOwner Representative for obtaining the necessary permits.

13. Allocation of time to adequately train the Owner on the use and operation of allsystems installed within the facility or on the property. Minimum two weekadvance notice shall be coordinated with the Owner and his representatives.Training shall be as outlined in individual system specifications identified tofollow.

B. Related Sections Under Other Divisions:1. Mechanical Wiring: Control circuit wiring, energy management controls and

interlocks for mechanical equipment shall be installed by Mechanical Contractor.2. Painting of electrical equipment where exposed and required by the Architect to

be painted as described elsewhere in the specification.3. Irrigation System: Provide all line voltage (50 volts or above) connections to

irrigation system equipment, time clocks and or powered satellite controls.Coordinate locations of this work with the Landscape Contractor.

4. Pole Bases: Contractor shall be responsible to furnish light standard concretepole bases, rebar, bolt templates and anchor bolt kits for a complete installation.Concrete, rebar, excavation shall be by Contractor in accordance with all parts ofthis specification.

5. HVAC Control Raceway: Raceways, boxes, and control wiring for thermostats,temperature sensors and control components specified within the mechanicalspecifications, shall be furnished and installed as required by Division 25 andinstalled in accordance with the minimum wiring methods allowed for branchcircuit wiring in Division 26 (the DDC systems/EMS systems and components areinstalled in accordance with Division 25).

6. Smoke Fire Dampers: Coordination with Mechanical plans for exact locationsand points of connection for power and fire alarm system connections (powerand fire alarm connection shall be by Electrical Contractor).



7. Duct mounted smoke detectors: Coordination with Mechanical plans for exactlocations and points of connection for power and fire alarm system connections(power and fire alarm connection shall be by Electrical Contractor).

8. Security System: Shall be installed by Owner’s vendor. Contractor shall provideconduits, boxes, stubs to accessible ceilings, dedicated circuit(s) for alarm panel,access control system (key pads, electric locks), etc. as shown and/or requiredby the Owner’s vendor.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The electrical plans indicate the general layout and arrangement; the architecturaldrawings and field conditions shall determine exact locations. Field verify all conditionsand modify as required to satisfy design requirements as well as code minimums.Maintain all required working clearances as described in CEC Article 110 as well asother applicable articles.

B. Discrepancies shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Architect forclarification. The Architect shall approve any changes. Prior to rough-in, refer toarchitectural plans that shall take precedence over electrical plans with respect tolocations.

C. Verify all power and communications utility company requirements prior tocommencement of utility work. Make proper adjustments to the construction to satisfythe serving utility requirements if they differ from the construction documents. It shallbe the Contractor’s responsibility to contact each utility company for obtaining finalizedutility design drawings and/or approval, and for scheduling inspection of utilityinfrastructure installations.

D. Charges imposed by the electric and communications utility companies shall be paidby Owner directly to utility companies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Before construction, submit in accordance with the General Conditions of thisSpecification: A complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installedunder this section.

B. Manufacturers' specifications, catalog cuts and shop drawings as required todemonstrate compliance with the specifications. Identify specific intended use for eachcomponent where submittal may be ambiguous. Submit entire bound submittal at onetime; partial submittals will not be accepted. At a minimum, submittals will be requiredfor the following:1. Utility service/site work equipment including ducts, conduits, fittings, concrete

manholes, concrete and fiberglass pull, manhole, boxes, vaults, trench racks,accessories, etc.

2. Distribution equipment including main switchboards, distribution switchgear,transformers, distribution panels and breakers, motor controls, distribution andbranch circuit panels, grounding, transient voltage surge suppressors, etc.



3. Electrical equipment including disconnects, fuses, raceways, straps and racks,fittings, conductors, boxes, gutters, devices, plates, etc.

4. Lighting equipment including fixtures, ballasts, lamps, mounting accessories,color charts (where required), etc.

5. Lighting control equipment including low voltage switching system, dimmerswitchbank / accessories, occupancy sensing equipment, time clocks,contactors, photocells, lumen sensors, etc.

6. Constructability review letter/comments for lighting acceptance testing asrequired by Section 26 5670, LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING.

7. Complete system component submittals and shop drawings for:a. Intercomb. Sound Systems with assisted listening devices as required to meet ADA.c. Generator and Transfer Switches.d. Communication Systems including but not limited to; cable, fiber,

terminations, cable management, cable tray, patch panels, equipmentracks, specified active electronics (where called for), cabinets, jacks,plates, cable labeling, testing procedure.

8. Conduit including all fittings, etc.9. Wiring and cable, terminations, etc.10. Fire rating penetration materials, details, etc.

C. The intent of these specifications is to establish a standard of quality for materials andequipment. Therefore, some items are identified by manufacturer or trade namedesignation. Substitutions shall be subject to the Architect's approval. Samples of theproposed and substitute materials may be required for inspection prior to approval.Costs, if any, for evaluation of substitutions shall be the Contractor's responsibility.The decision of the Architect shall be final. Where the substitution will affect othertrades, coordinate all changes with those trades concerned and pay any additionalcosts incurred by them as a result of this substitution. Approval of substitutions shallnot relieve the Contractor from providing an operational system in accordance with allapplicable codes and ordinances.

D. SUPPORTING DEVICES1. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.2. Where walls, floor, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic

restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduitand pipe must be included and approved before the submittals must includespacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points.

3. Provide seismic details of seismic restraints and anchors; including number, sizeand locations for each piece of equipment.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage of equipment for the job is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor andshall be scheduled for delivery to the site, as the equipment is required. Damage tothe equipment delivered to the site or in transport to the job shall be the responsibilityof the Electrical Contractor.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be new and bear the label of or be listed by a nationally recognizedtesting laboratory. The quality and suitability of all materials shall conform to thestandards and practices of this trade.

B. Supplied materials shall be of a current manufactured product line. Discontinuedproducts are not acceptable. Where products are identified on the contract documentsby part number, supply the current product model or series which meets thespecification and intended use of the specified component.

2.2 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Hangers: Kindorf B-905-2A Channel, H-119-D washer, C105 strap, 3/8” rod withceiling flange.

B. Concrete Inserts: Kindorf D-255, cast in concrete for support fasteners for loads up to800 lbs.

C. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron.

D. Luminaire Chain: Campbell Chain 75031, 90-lb. test with steel hooks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Professionalism and appearance of installations shall be in accordance with acceptedpractices of this trade. Installation methods shall conform to manufacturers'specifications and recommendations. The Contractor shall man the job with qualifiedjourneymen and helpers in this trade for the duration of the job. It is the Contractor'sresponsibility to communicate with and keep the job superintendent appraised ofchanges or clarifications, etc.

B. Employment of any person on any job in the capacity of an electrician is not permittedunless such person has qualified for and holds a valid Journeyman Electrician PocketCard or General Journeyman Electrician Certificate issued by the State of CaliforniaDivision of Apprenticeship Standards except, Contractor may employ electrical helpersor apprentices on any job of electrical construction, new or existing, when the work ofsuch helpers or apprentices is performed under the direct and constant personalsupervision of a journeyman electrician holding a valid Pocket Card accepted by theState of California Division of Apprenticeship Standards.1. Each Pocket Card carrying journeyman electrician will be permitted to be

responsible for the quality of workmanship for a maximum of one helper orapprentice during any same time period, provided the nature of work is such thatgood supervision can be maintained and the quality of workmanship is the best,



as expected by Owner and implied by the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.

2. Before each journeyman electrician commences work, deliver to Owner at theproject site, a photocopy of the journeyman’s valid Pocket Card.

C. Materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' specification andrecommendations. They must conform to the approval AHJ adopted codes andstandards, but not less than the 2013 CEC and all applicable codes and standards,including but not necessarily limited to California Code of Regulations Title 24, NFPA,National Electrical Manufacturers Association, ANSI, CBC, and any other adoptedordinances of applicable agencies having jurisdiction. Refer to general conditions ofspecifications.

D. Electrical Contractor shall lay work out in advance in order to avoid unnecessarycutting, chasing, and drilling of floors, walls, ceilings and other surfaces. Work of thisnature shall be carefully done so as not to damage work already performed by othertrades. Any damage which results must be properly repaired at no extra cost to theOwner. Such alterations shall not depreciate the integrity of the structure. Approval forcuts or penetrations in structural members shall be by the Architect.

E. Supporting Devices:1. Verify mounting height of all luminaires or items prior to installation when heights

are not detailed.2. Install vertical support members for equipment and luminaires, straight and

parallel to building walls. Provide independent supports to structural member forelectrical luminaires, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls or invoid spaces or over furred or suspended ceilings.

3. Do not use other trade’s fastening devices as supporting means for electricalequipment, materials or luminaires. Do not use supports or fastening devices tosupport other than one particular item.

4. Support conduits within 18” of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections.Maximum distance between supports not to exceed 8’ spacing.

5. Securely suspend all junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminatinghousings located above suspended ceiling from the floor above or roof structureto prevent sagging and swaying.

6. Provide seismic bracing per UBC requirements for this building location.

F. Coordinate work with other trades as required to eliminate any delays duringconstruction. Coordinate changes with other prime contractors to avoid constructionconflicts.

G. Engineer's Field Observation: Site visits during construction for field observations andreports will be conducted by electrical engineer when directed by the Architect. A list ofitems that need to be addressed will be submitted to the Architect for forwarding to theContractor. A written response to all items shall be submitted for Owner’s review oncecomplete. When Electrical Engineering representative performs a field observation,the Electrical Contractor shall be present and available to remove equipment covers asneeded.

H. Drawings of Record: Provide a full and accurate set of field record drawings marked upin a neat and understandable manner submitted to the Owner Representative,



Construction Manager, or Architect upon completion of the work and prior to issuance of a certificate of completion. The drawings shall dimension all electrical facilities including but not limited to underground conduit, vaults, boxes as well as conduit routing scaled to within 12" of actual field conditions and shall be kept up to date on a daily basis reflecting changes or deviations. Electrical facilities shall be accurately drawn on the plan to scale. Refer to the general conditions of these specifications for additional requirements. Record drawings shall be required to identify both horizontal and vertical dimensions to visible and fixed points such as concrete, asphalt, buildings, sidewalks, etc.

I. Identification: Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for all switchboards,panelboards, fire alarm terminal cabinets, telephone and cable television backboards,main devices, control panels, time clocks, contactors and safety disconnect switchesaccurately identifying each device. Labels shall be attached to the equipment bymeans of screws or rivets. Self-adhering labels will not be acceptable. Refer toSection 26 0553, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

J. Safety: The Electrical Contractor is responsible to maintain equipment in a safe andresponsible manner. Keep dead front equipment in place while equipment isenergized. Conduct construction operations in a safe manner for employees as well asother work persons or anyone visiting the job site. Provide barriers, trench plates,flags, tape, etc. The Contractor shall hold all parties harmless of negligent safetypractices that may cause injury to others on or near the job site.

K. Guarantees: Equipment and labor shall be guaranteed and warranted free of defects,unless otherwise stated to be more restrictive, for a period of one year from the date offinal acceptance by the Owner. A written warranty shall be presented to the Architectat the time of completion prior to final acceptance. Equipment deemed to be damaged,broken or failed should be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.Materials or system requiring longer than a one-year warranty as described hereinshall be separately warranted in separate letters of guarantee stating the duration ofwarranty.

L. Operating and Installation Manuals: Provide two copies each of manuals, operatingand installation instructions for equipment indicated in submittal packages. Instruct theOwner's representative as to the operation and location of equipment necessary toallow them to operate the facility upon final acceptance. This instruction period shallbe prearranged with the Owner's representative prior to occupancy of the facility andthe weeks prior to training scheduled.

M. Lighting Acceptance Testing: Provide two copies of lighting acceptance testing resultsand equipment operating manuals as specified in Section 26 5670, LIGHTINGACCEPTANCE TESTING. Instruct the Owner on operation of control systems.

END OF SECTION


26 0519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 1 of 6

SECTION 26 0519

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Wires and cables.2. Connectors.3. Lugs and pads.4. MC cable.5. SO cable.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide wires, cables, connectors, lugs, strain reliefs, racking insulators for a complete andoperational electrical system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data for the following equipment:1. Wires.2. Cables.3. Connectors.4. Lugs.5. Splice Kits.6. Strain Relief Fittings.7. Cable Racking and Insulators.

B. Provide the insulation cable testing report in the project closeout documentation, refer toCloseout Requirements in the General Conditions portion of this specification.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of the CEC, latest adopted version with amendments by localAuthority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wires and Cables: General Cable, Okonite, Southwire, or approved equal.

B. Connectors: Burndy, Ilsco, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal.

C. Wire connectors shall be minimum 75 degree centigrade rated and properly sized for thenumber of conductors being connected, terminated, spliced etc. All above grade connectorsshall be solderless lug or plastic wire nut type, screw on, pressure cable type (wire nut or springnut type), 600 volt, 105 degree C, with skirt to cover all portions of stripped wires. Connectorshall be U.L. rated for number and size of conductors being joined together as a splice.

D. Splices:1. Branch Circuit Splices: Ideal, Scotch-Lock, 3M, or approved.2. Feeder Splices: Compression barrel splice with two layers Scotch 23 and four layers of

Scotch 33+ as vapor barrier.3. Screw Terminal Lugs.4. Kearney Split Bolt.

E. MC Cable: Alflex, AFC, or approved and shall meet all CEC Article 334 provisions.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES FOR LINE VOLTAGE SYSTEM AND CONTROLS. WIRE AND CABLE SHALL BE:

A. Copper, 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 14AWG to 10AWG, solid or stranded.Conductors 8AWG and larger, stranded.

B. Phase color to be consistent at all feeder terminations; A-B-C, top to bottom, left to right, front toback. Phasing tape shall be permitted on sizes #6 and larger.

C. Color Code Conductors as Follows:PHASE 208 VOLT A Black B. RedC. BlueNeutral White Ground Green

D. All conductors shall be copper unless otherwise noted. Minimum size for individual conductorsshall be #12 AWG unless otherwise noted. Sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be strandedconductor. Individual conductors shall be insulated with type, XHHW, THW, THHN/THWN 600-volt insulation unless otherwise noted. Control, signal, communication conductors shall be asdictated by the vendor of that equipment or as specified here-in. Proper insulation type shall beused for the proper environmental application (i.e., waterproof, wet location, plenum,temperature rated). If a condition exists where the application is uncertain, contact the Engineerfor direction. Contractor is responsible to follow specific cabling requirements described in othersections of this specification relative to various communications and controls systems as well asthe respective riser diagrams shown on plans. If a discrepancy occurs, communicate suchdiscrepancy to the Architect and Engineer immediately for resolution.

E. Insulation types THWN, THHN or XHHW. Minimum insulation rating of 90C for branch circuits.



F. MC Cable: High strength galvanized steel or aluminum flexible armor. Full length minimumsize No. 12 copper ground wire, THHN 90C conductors, full length tape marker. Overall PVC ornylon cable tape. Short circuit throat insulators, mechanical compression termination.Manufacturers: Alflex, AFC

G. SO Cable: Annealed copper conductors, 600 volt rated. Minimum Size No. 12, with groundwire. Maximum of six conductors and ground per cable. 90C rated thermoset jacket.Manufacturers: Tiger Brand.

H. Refer to signal and communications specification sections for cable requirements.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Copper Pads: Drilled and tapped for multiple conductor terminals.

B. Lugs: Indent/compression type for use with stranded branch circuit or control conductors.

C. Solid Conductor Branch Circuits: Spring connectors, wire nuts, for conductors 18 through8AWG.

2.4 LUGS AND PADS

A. Ampacity: Cross-sectional area of pad for multiple conductor terminations to match ampererating of panelboard bus or equipment line terminals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Conductors shall not be installed until after conduit systems are permanently inplace. Use an approved non hardening type wire pulling lubricant if lubricant is to be used.Maintain all conduits and wire pulls free from foreign material. If due to field conditions, morethan a total of 300 degrees of bend are required; a pull box shall be furnished and installed forease of installation. Said pull boxes must be sized and rated for the appropriate application andmust remain easily accessible upon completion of the project (approval of the location shall beobtained from the Architect prior to installation). Show these pullboxes on the field recorddrawings. Conductors installed in underground raceways on site shall be duct sealed andtaped where they exit the raceway to prevent the entrance of foreign material and moisture afterthe conductors are installed. Proper drainage shall be provided for underground pull and spliceboxes.

B. Insulation: Use proper insulation types where temperature and environment are a factor.

C. Splices at or below grade level shall be made with wet location rated and approved mechanicalconnectors and shall be encapsulated in epoxy or plastic molded poured kits. The connectionsmust be assured to be watertight. Splices at or below grade shall always be avoided andminimized. Prior approval is required for feeder splices below grade. Submit proposedmaterials and exhibit showing location of intended splices for Engineer’s review and approvalprior to commencing with the work.



D. Labeling: All conductors in panels, switchboards, terminal cabinets, vaults, pull boxes, andjunction boxes shall be labeled with tape number markers indicating circuit number andidentifying system. All labeling shall be permanent. In manholes and vaults, provide embossedbrass tags identifying system serviced and function. See Section 26 0553 IDENTIFICATIONOF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

E. All conductors, wiring, cable where installed below floor, slab or underground shall beconsidered wet locations, and shall be rated accordingly. Non waterproof cabling is not allowedin any below grade or wet application.

F. Cables routed together in cable tray shall be stacked, organized and tie wrapped together in aneat and workman like manner. Random cable routing is not acceptable.

G. Cable and conductors routed through pull boxes and vaults shall be properly supported onporcelain or equal insulators mounted on steel rack inserts. Bend radius of cable or conductorshall not be less than six times the overall cable diameter.

H. Wires and Cables:1. Conductor Installation:

a. Install conductors in raceways having adequate, code size cross-sectional area forwires indicated.

b. Install conductors with care to avoid damage to insulation.c. Do not apply greater tension on conductors than recommended by manufacturer

during installation.d. Use of pulling compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed conductors

and raceway entrances after conductor installation.2. Conductor Size and Quantity:

a. Install no conductors smaller than 12AWG unless otherwise shown.b. Provide all required conductors for a fully operable system.

3. Provide dedicated neutrals (one neutral conductor for each phase conductor) in thefollowing single phase circuits:a. Dimmer controlled circuits.b. Isolated ground circuits.c. Ground fault and arc fault protected circuits where a GFI and arc fault breakers are

used in panelboards.d. Other electronic equipment which produces a high level of harmonic distortion

including but not limited to computers, printers, plotters, copy machines, faxmachines, where indicated.

4. MC Cable shall be allowed for lighting branch circuiting in non-exposed but accessibleceiling areas. Ceilings that are not accessible by definition shall not allow MC cable use.Power feeders, and electrical branch circuit wiring shall utilize raceways as specified andallowed by Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

5. Conductors in Cabinets:a. Cable and train all wires in panels and cabinets for power and control neatly and

uniformly. Use plastic ties in panels and cabinets.b. Tie and bundle feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards.c. Hold conductors away from sharp metal edges.d. Connectors: Retighten mechanical type lugs and connectors for conductors to

equipment prior to Notice of Completion.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests:



1. Test conductor insulation on feeders of 400 amp and greater for conformity with 1000 voltmegohmmeter. Use Insulated Cable Engineers Association testing procedures.Minimum insulation resistance acceptable is 1 megohm for systems 600 volts and below.

2. Test Report: Prepare a typed tabular report indicating the testing instrument, the feedertested, amperage rating of the feeder, insulation type, voltage, the approximate length ofthe feeder, conduit type, and the measured resistance of the megohmmeter test. Submitreport with operating and maintenance manual.

END OF SECTION


26 0526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 6

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Grounding and bonding requirements of electrical installations for personnel safety and to

provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents as described in CECArticle 250.

2. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by CEC, as well asincluding made, supplementary, lightning protection system and telecommunicationssystem grounding electrodes.

3. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and havethe same meaning.

B. Related Work:1. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.2. Section 26 0519, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizesNo. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for allequipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG and larger shall bepermitted to be identified per CEC.

B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWGand smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.

C. Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the drawings and not less thanrequired by the CEC, whichever is greater.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Copperclad steel, 5/8" diameter by 8’ long, conforming to UL 467 unless otherwise noted ondrawings and details.



B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance or additional rodsshall be driven to obtain specified resistance or less.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

A. Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalognumber, and permitted conductor size(s).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Ground in accordance with the CEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified.

B. System Grounding:1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting

means and at the related transformers.2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance):

Ground the secondary neutral.

C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures,fire sprinklers, plumbing piping, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machineframes, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded andgrounded.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (exceptconnections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.

3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the serviceequipment.

B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per CEC between the service equipment

ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building steel, and supplementalor made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections toelectrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.

2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system.

C. Service Disconnect: Provide a ground bar bolted to the enclosure with lugs for connecting thevarious grounding conductors.

D. Switchgear, Switchboards, Unit Substations, and Motor Control Centers:1. Connect the various feeder equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus in the

enclosure with suitable pressure connectors.2. For service entrance equipment, connect the grounding electrode conductor to the

ground bus.



3. Connect metallic conduits, which terminate without mechanical connection to thehousing, by grounding bushings and grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.

E. Transformers:1. Exterior: Exterior transformers supplying interior service equipment shall have the neutral

grounded at the transformer secondary. Provide a grounding electrode at thetransformer.

2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from service equipment): Groundthe secondary neutral at the transformer. Provide a grounding electrode conductor fromthe transformer to nearest component of the grounding electrode system and the groundbar at the service equipment.

F. Conduit Systems:1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an

equipment grounding conductor sized per CEC.2. Non metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except

that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exteriortransformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not containan equipment grounding conductor.

3. Metal conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided formechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entranceand exit from the conduit.

G. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders, powerand lighting branch circuits.

H. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device

box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes.2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to

terminate the equipment grounding conductors.

I. Motors and Starters: Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing or motor controlcenter compartment to terminate equipment grounding conductors.

J. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a jumper fromthe receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and the branch circuitequipment grounding conductor.

K. Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system when thegreen ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems. Fixturesconnected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wiresfrom the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.

L. Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination ofthe equipment grounding conductor.

M. Raised Floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components.

N. Panelboard Bonding: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the normal and emergencybranch circuit panelboards shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copperconductor not less than No. 8 AWG where panels are in same room together or within 25’ ofeach other. These conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit.



3.4 CONDUCTIVE PIPING

A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the groundingelectrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipmentground bus.

3.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

A. Bond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrodesystem. Refer to Section 27 1300, INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

3.6 GROUND RESISTANCE

A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 ohms. Make necessarymodifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additionalcost to the Owner. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met and test results shall besubmitted to the Owner with final close out documents.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE Standard 81. Ground resistance measurements shall bemade before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dryconditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separategrounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together belowgrade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the requiredresistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

C. Services at Pacific Gas and Electric Company interface point shall comply with their groundresistance requirements.

D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the IOR prior to backfilling. TheContractor shall notify the IOR 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.

E. Furnish a copy of tests to Owner at completion of project.

3.7 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION

A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 7 1/2’ in depth.

B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by theexothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections withmechanical pressure type ground connectors.

C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or groundingelectrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.

3.8 GROUNDING FOR RF/EMI CONTROL

A. Install bonding jumpers to bond all conduit, cable trays, sleeves and equipment for low voltagesignaling and data communications circuits. Bonding jumpers shall consist of 4” wide copperstrip or two No. 10 copper conductors spaced minimum 4” apart. Use No. 6 copper whereexposed and subject to damage.



B. Comply with the following when shielded cable is used for communication circuits.1. Shields shall be continuous throughout each circuit.2. Connect shield drain wires together at each circuit connection point and insulate from

ground. Do not ground the shield.3. Do not connect shields from different circuits together.4. Shield shall be connected at one end only. Connect shield to signal reference at the

origin of the circuit. Consult with equipment manufacturer to determine signal reference.

END OF SECTION


26 0529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 5

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Section 26 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and

installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensiveengineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements anddesign criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supportedsystems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supportedequipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loadscalculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times theapplied force.


A. Product Data: For the following:



1. Steel slotted support systems.2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for thefollowing:1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural WeldingCode - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These itemsare specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for fieldassembly.1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.



C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designedfor types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or theirsupports to building surfaces include the following:1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate forsupported loads and building materials where used.a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are notlimited to, the following:1) Hilti Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use inhardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are notlimited to, the following:1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSSType 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable forattached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensionsof supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapesand plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electricalequipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.



B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports forEMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) indiameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted supportsystem, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceedingspecified design load limits.1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in thisArticle.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMCmay be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strengthwill be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supportedcomponents plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fastenelectrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methodsunless otherwise indicated by code:1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabsless than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by meansthat meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcingbars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricatedmetal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevationto support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger inboth directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters fromedge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-PlaceConcrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to beembedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shoppainting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION


26 0533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 11

SECTION 26 0533

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Conduit and fittings.2. Outlet boxes.3. Weatherproof outlet boxes.4. Junction and pull boxes.5. Floor boxes and poke-through.6. Cabinets, termination cabinets.7. Gutters.8. Concrete boxes and vaults.9. Fiberglass or composite boxes and vaults.10. Hazardous Location: Sealing Fitting

B. Related Work:1. Installation of all wire, cable, conductor, boxes/gutters, pull ropes, fiber optic cable

raceway, conduit, innerduct, cable sleeve and duct as described on the plans and/or asspecified here-in. This scope shall include pathways to be installed underground on siteand offsite, underslab, above grade, both concealed and exposed, overhead concealedand exposed as appropriately applied. Raceways/boxes shall be installed in accordancewith their intended and allowed uses and as specified here-in whichever is morerestrictive. Size and capacity of all raceway/boxes shall be as specified here-in or asdepicted on the drawings, but shall not be less than that required by code. Largerraceway sizes may be specified than code would permit. The specifications shall govern.

2. Listed products for termination, coupling, extending, benching supports of raceways shallbe used.

3. Raceways/boxes described by this section shall include, but not be limited to, power forsite utilities and lighting, site and building communications, controls, fire alarm, security,access control, sound systems, data system, energy management systems, powerdistribution, lighting, lighting controls, video, CATV, voice communications, intercom,nurse call, HVAC and other building low voltage/communications systems controls asmay be required. Raceways, boxes and duct paths required for utility companies shall beinstalled per plans unless utility company requirements are more restrictive at which timethose requirements shall take precedence.

4. Protection of and cleanliness of pathways and raceways must be assured during theconstruction process in order to eliminate the possibility of debris entering the conduit,duct, pathway resulting in decreased wire capacity and potential damage to installedconductors and cables.

5. Pathways are shown in a diagrammatic way and are generally accurate as to routing,however, it is the Contractor’s responsibility as a means and methods process to



coordinate with all other trades that require space within a building. The Contractor shall obtain approval for installation of raceways routing through structural footings, retaining walls, columns, beams, perlins, grade beams, etc.

6. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to insure that all raceway and boxes systemspenetrate fire assemblies and sound rated assemblies in an approved manner using theappropriate and listed products for the purpose.

7. Trenching and backfilling for all underground conduit systems installed by the ElectricalContractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Conduits shall have minimumcover requirement of 36” below finish grade with the exception of site lighting conduitswhich may be 24” below finish grade minimum. More stringent depth requirements maybe imposed by the local agency and utility company and shall be adhered to, and / or thisspecification or as detailed on the plans. Joint trenching may be utilized wherepracticable and where permitted by this specification. Concrete, native material and sandshall be used as backfill material and shall be compacted in accordance with andcoordinated with the grading and site preparation requirements. Conduits shall rest in aminimum of 4” bed of sand prior to backfill and compaction. Locations of existingunderground (UG) utility systems shall be determined by calling Underground ServiceAlert (USA) at least 48 hours prior to any excavation. Also refer to Section 26 0546.13,ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEMS.

8. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2" except if plan shows or code requires larger size.Exception: Use minimum 3/4" for underslab and below grade applications outside ofbuilding exterior walls.

9. All electrical, control, communications systems shall be installed in metallic conduitsystem. This shall include but not be limited to all systems described in Section B.3above, except for voice and data systems which shall be installed as described on theseplans and as specified here-in but shall not be less than the recommendations of EIA/TIAstandards.

10. All line voltage wiring within the building shall be installed in metallic conduit.11. All conduit, concrete pads, underground concrete or fiberglass substructures shall be

furnished and installed with the approved materials and type for the application. Provideproper traffic control during construction as well as barriers and protection of allexcavations and trenching.

12. Empty or future conduits shall be properly plugged with plastic caps or inserts with a 3/8”polyethylene pull rope. Plastic or "duct" tape will not be acceptable.

13. Exterior installations: After conductors are installed, seal conduit ends to prevententrance of foreign material using pliable duct seal, caps or waterproof expanding foam.

14. All low voltage systems including intercom, fire alarm, public address, etc. shall be indedicated conduit systems. Voice / Data and Direct Digital Control (DDC) systems forHVAC cabling shall be routed as specified in Section 27 1300,INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS and as recommended by EIA/TIA standards. Itshall be the contractor’s responsibility to provide raceway down walls to outlet boxes andto provide sleeves across inaccessible ceiling spaces.

15. Underground conduits entering building shall have the open end of conduit within buildingabove the elevation of the conduit outside the building such that water cannot enterbuilding through conduit. If such a condition exists, a pull box outside of building footprintshall be installed in conduit route before conduit enters building whereby top of pull box isbelow finish floor of building and moisture may exit box before entering building.

16. No single conduit run of any type shall exceed 300 degrees of radius bend fromtermination box to termination box.

17. Separate Raceway System: Provide a separate dedicated raceway system for eachsystem installed, do not combine different systems into a raceway or cable tray system,unless otherwise noted or allowed.

18. Spare, Future Conduits: Conduits labeled conduit only, spare, or for future use, shall beprovided with a pullrope, capped at each end, labeled as spare with destination marked,and turned over to the Owner in an unused state. Contractor shall not utilize theseconduits for the installation of cabling or conductors as part of this scope of work.



Contractor to verify and install at no additional cost to the Owner, additional conduits as required for the installation of the systems being installed.

19. Outlet System: Provide electrical boxes and fittings as required for a completeinstallation. Including but not limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes,bushings, locknuts, covers and all other necessary components.

20. Code Compliance: Comply with CEC as applicable to construction and installation ofelectrical boxes and fittings and size boxes according to CEC 312, 314 and 366 exceptas noted otherwise.

21. Outlets to be flush mounted: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier. Unlessotherwise noted, flush mount all outlet boxes.

22. Provide putty pads of proper type around outlet boxes and/or as detailed on plan to meetsound transmission restrictions and fire ratings of walls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide Shop Drawings and Product Data for the Following Equipment:1. Conduit and fittings.2. Outlet boxes.3. Weatherproof outlet boxes.4. Junction and pull boxes.5. Floor boxes and poke-through.6. Cabinets, termination cabinets.7. Gutters.8. Concrete boxes and vaults.9. Fiberglass or composite boxes and vaults.10. Putty pads.11. Raceways12. Hazardous Location: Sealing Fitting

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of the CEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs.

B. Furnish products listed by UL or other independent and nationally recognized testing firm.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Heavy wall Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit, shall be PVC schedule 40 manufactured in accordancewith NEMA Standard TC-2, UL-651 and WC 1094A specifications.

B. Extra heavy wall non-metallic conduit, shall be PVC schedule 80 manufactured in accordancewith NEMA Standard TC-2, UL-651 and WC 1094A specifications.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized, zinc coated and shallcomply with Underwriters Laboratories UL-6, ANSI Specification C-80.1 and FederalSpecification WW-C-581E.



D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be zinc coated, with a protective coating applied to the inside surface and shall comply with Underwriter Laboratories UL-797 ANSI Specification C-80.3 and Federal Specification WW-C-563A.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) shall be continuous wound reduced wall galvanized steel produced to UL standards.

F. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall have a thermoplastic cover over a galvanized steel core containing an integral copper ground in sizes to 1 1/4" and shall be in compliance with UL standards and CEC Article 350.

G. Wire basket tray shall be 12” wide with 4” side rails unless otherwise noted. It shall be U.L. listed and use listed connectors, elbows, tees, etc. and be cut and installed using listed equipment. Material shall be zinc electroplated steel.

H. Cable runway tray shall be 12” wide with 4” side rails unless otherwise noted. It shall be U.L. listed and use listed connectors, elbows, tees, etc. Material shall be hollow steel with gray painted finish.

I. Manufacturers: 1. Outlet Boxes: Bowers, Raco, Steel City or equal. 2. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Bell, Red Dot, [Carlon] or equal. 3. Floor Boxes: Wiremold/Walker, Hubbell, Steel City, or equal. 4. Junction and Pull Boxes: Circle AW, Hoffman, Wireguard or equal. 5. Box Extension Adapter: Bell, Red Dot, [Carlon] or equal. 6. Conduit Fittings: O-Z Gedney, Thomas & Betts, or equal. 7. Vaults: Christy, Brooks, Utility Vault or equal. 8. Putty pads: 3M, Hilti, or equal. 9. Heavy wall rigid non-metallic conduit, Carlon, Certainteed, R&G Sloane or equal. 10. Extra heavy wall non-metallic conduit, Carlon, Certainteed, R&G Sloane or equal. 11. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized, zinc coated and

shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL-6, ANSI Specification C-80.1 and Federal Specification WW-C-581E.

12. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be zinc coated, with a protective coating applied to the inside surface and shall comply with Underwriter Laboratories UL-797 ANSI Specification C-80.3 and Federal Specification WW-C-563A.

13. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC), Alflex, American Flexible Conduit or equal. 14. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit, Anacanda (type UA), Electri-flex Liquatite or equal. 15. Surface mount raceway, Wiremold, Three Compartment Series 5500 or equal 16. Wire basket tray, B-line, GS Metals, Cablofil or equal. 17. Cable runway tray, B-line, CPI, Homaco or equal. 18. Floor Boxes, Single Gang, Walker/Wiremold 880 CS Series or approved equal. 19. Floor Boxes, Multiple Gang, Walker/Wiremold RFB Series or Walker Omnibox multi-

service floor box with carpet plates, and/or water resistant device covers. 20. Masonry Boxes, outlets in concrete, Raco Series 690 or equal. 21. Floor Boxes, Poke-Thru, Hubbell PT7 Series, Walker/Wiremold RC4 Series, or approved

equal unless otherwise noted. 22. Floor Boxes, Poke-Thru, Furniture Feed, Walker/Wiremold RC9 Series or approved

equal. 23. Exterior In-Grade Boxes for Non-Utility Company, Precast concrete or polymer concrete,

Utility Vault and Christy. 24. Hazardous Location: Sealing Fitting – Killark, Crouse-Hinds or Appleton.



2.2 OUTLET BOXES

A. NEMA 1 gutter, junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated from code gage steel finished in greyenamel with screw cover fronts and concentric knockouts in all sides.

B. NEMA 3R gutter, junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated from code gage galvanized steelwith screw cover fronts and concentric knockouts in the bottom only. Any penetrations to theside, top or back shall be weatherproofed in an approved manner such as “MYERS” gasketedtype hub or equal.

C. Steel outlet boxes and plaster rings shall be galvanized rigid assemblies, either one piecepressed or factory welded construction containing the size and number of knockouts required.Steel outlet boxes shall be manufactured, sized and installed in accordance with CEC Article314. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4” square,minimum 1 1/2" deep. Single or 2 gang flush device plaster ring. Raco Series 681 and 686 orequal.

D. Luminaire Outlet: minimum 4” square with correct plaster ring depth, minimum 1 1/2” deep with3/8” luminaire stud if required. Provide proper depth plaster ring on bracket outlets and onceiling outlets.

E. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install 1 piece gang boxes with 1piece device plastering. Install one device per gang unless otherwise allowed.

F. Construction: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size,including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed withstamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing boxcovers or wiring devices. Boxes shall be properly secured to the structure such that they areflush with the finish surface. Boxes shall be made structurally secure by means of the properfastening devices.

G. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, includingmounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, plaster rings, luminaire studs, cableclamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being usedand meeting requirements of individual wiring situations.

2.3 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES

A. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in awatertight manner. Weatherproof boxes in wet locations as described in CEC 406.8 (B) shall beprovided with a “while-in-use” cover; red dot ‘CK’ Series of aluminum die-cast construction,NEMA 3R, with lacquer finish.

2.4 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Construction: Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; ofthe type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seamsand equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

B. Location:1. Install junction boxes above accessible ceilings for drops into walls for receptacle outlets

from overhead.



2. Install junction boxes and pull boxes as required to facilitate the installation of conductors and limiting the accumulated angular sum of bends between boxes, cabinets and appliances to 300 degrees.

3. Locations: Junction boxes shall be located only where necessary and only in equipment rooms, closets, and accessible attic and underfloor spaces. A horizontal distance of 24” shall separate outlet boxes on opposite sides of occupancy separation walls, fire-rated walls or partitions.

4. Labeling: Junction box covers shall be marked with indelible ink indicated the circuit numbers passing through the box.

2.5 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER

A. Construction: Diecast aluminum.

B. Location: Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible raceway extension from flush outlet to fixed or movable equipment.

2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Requirements: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and plastic conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each respective use and installation.

B. Steel boxes may allow for field knock-out modifications, but shall in all other ways conform to code requirements.

2.7 FLOOR BOXES - MULTIPLE GANG

A. Construction: Deep cast iron, fully adjustable before and after pour. Equal to Walker/Wiremold RFB Series or Walker Omnibox multi-service floor box with carpet plates, and/or water resistant device covers. Verify color. Partition for different power or signal applications. Provide required power receptacle devices and signal grommets or receptacles as noted. Flange type shall be compatible with floor covering for either carpet or vinyl as required and shall be brass type not polycarbonate.

B. Floor mounted boxes shall be water tight and cast iron when installed in grade level concrete slab floor, fully adjustable with interior and exterior leveling screws. Receptacle flange shall be brass with a duplex lift lid. Flange type shall be compatible with floor type. Before installation, coordinate exact location with Architect.

2.8 EXTERIOR IN-GRADE BOXES FOR NON-UTILITY COMPANY USE SHALL BE:

A. Precast concrete or polymer concrete type with full bottoms and draining into gravel drywell. . Open bottom splice/pull boxes 24” x 36” and smaller shall be open bottom, with minimum 12” of gravel below for drainage.

B. Flushmount in hardscape and 1” above grade in softscape.

C. Provided with correct traffic type lid, i.e., full vehicular, intermediate incidental vehicular or pedestrian-rated as applicable stamped with “ELECTRIC”, “LIGHTING”, COMMUNICATIONS”, etc. cover identification as shown on the drawings or as applicable. All boxes or vaults located



in streets, driveways, sidewalks wider than 8’, and turf areas where mowing takes place shall be traffic rated.

D. Provided with brass hold-down bolts in cover.

E. Provided with necessary box extensions to gain proper depth.

F. Seal all conduits in underground boxes with duct seal after conductors have been installed.

2.9 HAZARDOUS LOCATION SEALING FITTING

A. Copper free aluminum gas seal fitting to prevent passage of gases and vapor through electricalconduit.

B. Provide proper sealing fitting listed for the hazard classification and orientation of installation.

C. Include a drain canal and drain plug in installations which have a probability that liquid or vaporcondensation may be trapped in raceway.

D. Splices are not allowed in sealing fitting.

E. Install packing fiber and sealing compound per manufacturers recommendations.

2.10 IN-GRADE UTILITY COMPANY BOXES AND VAULTS

A. In-grade boxes and pads for utility company, shall be as specified by the respective utilitycompany with all of the company’s requirements and construction methods met.

2.11 PUTTY PADS

A. Intumescent moldable firestop putty designed to protect electrical outlet boxes.

B. Designed to install around outside of outlet boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit systems listed below are for use in installations where they are permitted to be used byCEC and/or other occupancy restrictions. The below installation methods do not intend tosuggest that these materials be installed in conflict with any applicable code. Special attentionto applications shall be made in building types such as Educational, Health Care, wet location,hazardous locations, assembly occupancy and multi-story, but not limited to these.Requirements which are more restrictive than the CEC may be called for by the drawings and /or these specifications. These requirements must be adhered to. The Electrical Contractorshall be responsible to use the proper conduit system for the application. Exposed conduit isnot allowed below ceilings or above slab of floor, without the permission and approval of theArchitect. All conduits shall be concealed except in electrical and telecommunication rooms orwhere shown to be surface mounted. Exposed conduit (where allowed) shall be run square andplumb with building lines in an approved manner. Support roofmount conduits, where allowed,



with minimum 12” wide blocks (use Dura-Block or equivalent) set in mastic unless otherwise detailed in roof requirements or as specified in roofing specification, by the Architect. Strap conduits to blocks with proper sized conduit straps. Spacing of support shall be a minimum as provided for in the CEC. All exposed conduit mounted below 8’ above finished grade shall be strapped at a minimum of 5’ spacing.

B. Non-Metallic Rigid Conduit shall be used in concrete slabs, below concrete slabs on grade, orunderground outside of a building slab or foundation. Maintain minimum depth requirementsand cover with appropriate fill material. Minimum 4” of bedding and cover of backfill material1/4" size grain and smaller maximum. Conduit shall be heavy wall Schedule 40 or 80, rigidPVC only. Rigid utility P&C duct shall not be used in any application. Properly sized groundingconductors shall be installed per CEC article 250, in all non-metallic conduit branch circuit andfeeder runs. PVC conduit shall be formed or field bent only with the use of properly approvedbending tools such as to not decrease the internal bore of the conduit. All conduits shall be cutsquare and reamed of burrs. Approved and compatible glue shall be used on all PVC fittings toattain watertight joints. All non-metallic conduit runs over 150’ in length and over 1 1/4" tradesize conduit shall utilize galvanized rigid steel elbows.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be used where exposed less than 8’–0” abovefinished grade to 18” below finished grade and where subject to physical damage. Conduitsshall be cut square and reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges. Strap conduit below 8’above grade at 5’ intervals. Unless otherwise noted, threadless setscrew and threadlessweathertight fittings may be used in lieu of threaded fittings. All threaded ends entering ajunction box of any type shall require one locknut on the inside and one on the outside of theenclosure and be provided with a plastic bushing or grounding bushing where necessary forproper grounding. Where exposed to moisture, a watertight hub or other approved method shallbe required. All conduits shall be stubbed up straight and uniform into junction boxes, panels,cabinets, etc., and shall be (GRS) properly supported and strapped. All GRS conduit locatedbelow grade, shall be tape wrapped.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used as allowed by code and as permitted by thisspecification. It shall not be in contact with soil or the concrete slab on the ground floor of anystructure. Connectors and couplings shall be steel insulated set screw type where installed inindoor dry locations not subject to moisture. Where the potential for moisture is present,compression type weathertight fittings are required. One hole conduit straps are permitted from1/2" to 1” and two hole conduit straps are required for size 1 1/4” and larger. EMT shall not beallowed in areas subject to severe physical damage. Install copper ground wire sized per CEC250-122 in all EMT conduits.

E. Flexible conduit may be used where concealed in building construction or above droppedceilings, but shall meet the following criteria: No individual circuit path from distribution panel tolast device shall exceed a cumulative length of 30’ of flexible conduit from start to end. Flexibleconduit shall not exceed a total directional change of 270 bending degrees in any one runbetween conduit terminations. Squeeze type or Jake type steel flex fittings of a grounding typeare required. Flexible conduit must be supported in accordance with CEC. Where exposed tothe weather, moisture, or spray down flexible conduit shall be of the liquidtight type. Fittingsshall be manufactured for use with liquidtight flexible conduit. All motor connections shall bemade with liquidtight flex. Flexible conduit may not be used where exposed except for last 2’ ofequipment connection and unless otherwise noted or approved. A copper ground wire sizedper CEC 250-122 shall be installed in all flexible conduit runs. Flexible conduit may not be usedexposed. Weatherproof liquid tight conduit shall not be used at roof level for equipmentconnections with lengths exceeding 24” nor shall it be used to circumvent a rigid conduit systemin a horizontal direction. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with a maximum of6’ of flexible metal conduit extending from junction box to fixture. “Master” “Slave” fixtures arepermitted to use manufactured flexible cable of longer dimension up to 12’ between “Master”and “Slave” only and only as a U.L. listed system component.



F. Underground conduits and transition to above grade/slab shall be as follows:1. PVC elbows allowed if top of elbow is minimum 18” BFG or below top of slab, otherwise

GRS elbows are required.2. GRS elbows are required if conduit run is 150’ or greater.3. GRS risers are required from elbow below grade to equipment (device, outlet, panel,

cabinet, etc.) above grade.4. GRS elbows/risers to be PVC coated or 10 MIL taped wrapped (1/2” lapped) to 3” above

finish grade or top of slab.

G. Conduit Supports: Conduit runs may be supported by one-hole and two-hole straps or supportsas manufactured by Unistrut, Minerallac, Caddy or equals. Supports may be fastened bymeans of anchors, shields, beam clamps, toggle bolts, or other approved methods appropriatefor the application and size of conduit. Pipe nailers (J-hooks) may only be used for 1” conduitand smaller and only in wood frame construction. Conduit support methods are subject toreview by the engineer and authority having jurisdiction for adequacy. Installations deemedinadequate shall be corrected by the contractor at no cost to the Owner.

H. Bends and offsets shall be made with approved tools for the type of conduit being utilized.Bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the smooth bore of the conduit. Parallelconduits shall be run straight and true with bends uniform and symmetrical. Minimum radii shallbe per CEC 344-24.

I. Conduit Stub-outs below grade shall be capped with plastic cap, and identified by placing a pullbox marked with correctly identified utility such as “Elec”, “Tel”, etc. Dimension for exact locationon field record drawings. Provide lids for proper field application (i.e. traffic, incidental,pedestrian).

J. Conduit Seals: Where below grade conduits enter structure through slab or retaining wall ofbuilding or basement, seal the inside of each conduit as follows:1. Provide damming material around conductors 3” into conduit.2. Fill 3” of conduit with 3M #2123 sealing compound.3. Wrap conductors where they exit the conduit with 3M #2229 "Scotch Seal" mastic tape.

Lap tape to approximate diameter of the raceway and wrap outside of conduit openingwith (minimum) one turn.

4. Use conduit sealing bushings type CSB (O-Z/Gedney) or equal.5. Empty conduits shall be sealed with standard non-hardening duct seal compound and

then capped to prevent entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistancerequirements.

6. Provide cable drip loop minimum 12” high.

K. Marker tape: Place plastic yellow marker tape at 12” below finish grade along and above buriedconduits. Label tape "CAUTION: ELECTRICAL LINES BELOW" or similar wording.

L. Conduits for high voltage (12kv) systems shall be separated from all other conduits by aminimum of 12”. All power system conduits shall be separated from low voltage systems by aminimum of 12” when running parallel to each other and no less than 6” when runningperpendicular to each other at conduit crossings.

M. Medium voltage system conduits including 4,000 volt and above, shall be installed in conduitsystems or duct banks that are concrete encased by a minimum of 3” of concrete. Depth ofconduits shall remain as specified elsewhere in this specification or as required by the CEC.

N. Electrical and communications systems raceways routed underground shall not occupy thesame trench as plumbing utilities such as sewer, water, storm drain, gas or other wet or drygaseous utility system. A minimum of 12” of undisturbed earth is required. Where utilities must



cross in closer proximity to each other due to physical constraints, 6” minimum crossing distances are allowed, however 18” on all sides of a utility crossing must be concrete encased.

O. Duct bank defined here-in shall be four or more conduits in a common trench, conduit spacersand saddles shall be required in all trenches where more than two conduits over 2” in diametertravel in the same trench. Proper spacing between systems as outlined above shall be requiredand spacers shall be located each 5’ (maximum) along trench route from point to point.

P. Conduits, routed below footings, slabs, grade beams, columns, and other structural elementsshall be installed in strict compliance with structural details and criteria shown on structuralplans. Clearances below structural elements and sleeves through structural elements must becarefully planned to avoid conflict and must be approved by the structural engineer if conflictarises.

Q. All conduit or raceways passing through fire rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be installed witha listed penetration method which protects the opening to the same rating as the assembly andis non hardening.

R. Expansion Joints1. Conduits 3” and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a

building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplingsin accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Provide conduits smaller than 3” with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint.Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5”vertical drop midway between the end. All conduit shall have a copper green groundingbonding conductor installed.

S. Seismic Joints1. At seismic joints, provide conduits rigidly secured to the building structure on opposite

sides of a building expansion joint with junction boxes or approved fittings, on both sidesof the joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack flexible conduit suchthat these slack conduits are 1 1/2 times the distance between conduit ends. Flexibleconduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed.

T. Ladder tray shall be used in equipment rooms where shown on the plans. Ladder trayinstallations shall conform to the requirements of CEC Article 318. The contractor shall provideall mounting hardware, connectors and bracing as required and as recommended by themanufacturer for a complete system installation.

U. Wire basket tray shall be used in all concealed spaces (above ceiling spaces, under buildings inaccess tunnels, below raised floors, etc.) unless otherwise noted. Wire basket tray installationsshall conform to the requirements of CEC Article 318. The contractor shall provide all mountinghardware, connectors and bracing as required and as recommended by the manufacturer for acomplete system installation. All cutting of wire basket tray shall be per the manufacturer’srecommendation using tools designed for that purpose. Cable loading shall not exceed thelisting of the system and its support.

V. Location: Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.

W. Anchoring: Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidlyembed boxes in concrete or masonry.

X. Special Application: Provide weatherproof outlets for locations exposed to weather or moisture.



Y. Knockout Closures: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blankshave been removed.

Z. Mount outlet boxes, unless otherwise required by ADA, or noted on drawings, the followingdistances above the finished floor:1. Receptacles, Telephone, TV & Data outlets. (measured to bottom of outlet box): +15".2. Outlet above counter (measured to top of outlet box): +46".3. Control (light) Switches. (measured to top of outlet box): +48".4. Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations, T-stats. (measured to top of outlet box): +48".5. Fire Alarm Visuals: the lower of +80" to bottom of lens, or 6" below ceiling.6. Other Outlets: As indicated in other sections of specifications or as detailed on drawings.

AA. Coordinate all electrical device locations with the architectural floor plan and interior and exterior elevations to prevent mounting devices within elements that they may conflict such as cabinetry, mirrors, planters, etc.

BB. Size outlet and junction boxes to minimum wire fill space requirements. Upsize box as required to allow ease of wire installation and device installation.

CC. Outlet and junction boxes in fire rated walls shall be gauged and spaced so as not to exceed themaximum penetration allowed by the assembly without compromising the fire rating. If a conflictarises relative to a specific condition, the contractor shall follow the requirements of the fireauthority and ask for guidance from the design team. At no time should a larger box beinstalled prior to resolution of conflict.

END OF SECTION


26 0534 – CABINETS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 26 0534

CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Cabinets where shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work:1. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.2. Section 26 0553, IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Type: Cabinets shall be flush or surface mounted type as indicated on the contract drawing, asper Code and U.L. Standard 50.

B. Cabinet Construction: Sizes as indicated, constructed of code gauge sheet steel with hingedlockable doors, common keyed with panelboards. Equip cabinets with 3/4" fire retardant treatedplywood backboards and/or barriers as applicable, terminal blocks for connection; index cardholders and cards mounted behind heavy plastic on inside of cabinet doors.

C. Finish: Cabinets shall be chemically cleaned and the fronts shall be finished in same way aspanelboards and switchboards.

D. Controls: As indicated on the contract drawings.

E. Identification: Provide on exterior of cabinet doors engraved plastic nameplate identifying thecabinet as designated on the Contract Drawing. Lettering shall be white on black finish andshall be minimum 3/16” high. Affix nameplates to cabinet doors with a minimum of twoescutcheon pins or screws.


26 0534 – CABINETS Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Required: To be located where indicated on the Contract Drawing and installed as permanufacturer's instruction. Securely fasten to structural members or Unistrut support in verticaland plumb position and at heights indicated.

B. Nameplates: Conform to provisions noted in 2.1E above or as designated on the plans.

END OF SECTION


26 0536 – CABLE TRAYS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 26 0536

CABLE TRAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all labor materials and equipment necessary for cable trays where shown on thecontract drawings and specified herein including the following:1. Cable Tray System: Complete with all required fittings, supports and accessories.2. System Components: Free of burrs and sharp projections.3. Fittings and Accessories: Consistent with minimum load carrying capacity of tangent-

sections.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Section 26 0519.16, BUSWAYS.


A. In accordance with the California Electric Code Article 318.

B. In accordance with EIA/TIA standards/recommendations.

1.4 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer's catalog cuts of the following:1. Tray2. Supports3. Accessories4. Load and deflection tables5. Grounding6. Wall penetration details both rated and non-rated fire assembly wall.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Cablofil.

B. B-Line.


26 0536 – CABLE TRAYS Page 2 of 2

C. P-W Industries.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cable Trays:1. Solid Bottom Type: Two longitudinal side members connected by solid bottom.2. Construction:

a. 6063-T6 extruded aluminum. Minimum thickness:1) Longitudinal side members: .105”.2) Bottom: .080”.

b. Dimensions: 12’ long sections x 4” deep, width as indicated on drawings.3. Accessories: To match tray, including:

a. Bends: 30, 45, 60, 90 degree horizontal, inside and outside vertical as required.b. Reducers, horizontal crosses and tees.c. Splice Connectors, Plates and Extensions:

1) Maximum resistance across any splice connection: 50 micro ohms.Provide bonding jumpers.

2) Fittings: Same load-carrying capacity as straight sections.d. Miscellaneous Attachments: As required.

4. Grounding: Provide continuous ground from section to section and from cable tray tobuilding ground in accordance with Section 26 0526, GROUNDING of Specifications.

5. Loading: 50 pounds per linear ft., uniformly distributed and/or consistent with trayspecification.

6. Safety Factor: 1.65 based on guaranteed minimum yield strength or 2.0 based onultimate or buckling strength of material.

7. Span Deflection: 1/100.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Arrange to permit accessible lay-in of cable over entire length of tray assembly using cantileversupports except trapeze hangers where cantilever supports are not practicable.

B. Installation shall be coordinated with other trades and shall maintain cable installation accessspace around trays as follows:1. Top and Bottom: 6” clear.2. Sides: 6” clear.

C. Penetrations through firewalls shall be made via tray-to-box connectors and sealed byContractor following installation of all cables. Firestop assembly shall be listed and shall haveapproved fire rating equal to the wall being penetrated.

D. Clearance From Water, Steam or Other Piping: Minimum 12” separation from parallel runs ofsteam and hot water pipes, except 3” from pipe cover at crossings. Cable installation accessspace clearance may be part of the piping clearance.

E. Allow for building expansion at expansion joints by discontinuing the cable tray for crossing thejoint and providing bonding jumpers between sections.

END OF SECTION


26 0546.13 – ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEMS Page 1 of 4

SECTION 26 0546.13

ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Manholes, handholes and ducts to form a complete underground raceway system.2. “Duct” and “conduit”, and “raceway” are used interchangeably in this specification and

have the same meaning. Refer to Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FORELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for approved raceway and materials as well as execution.

3. Scope of Work: Furnishing, installation and connection of manholes, handholes andducts to form a complete underground raceway system for distribution of electrical andsignal systems and utility service entrance facilities. This specification shall also provideguidance for construction of the utility company underground and substructurerequirements. Contact serving company directly and obtain current detailedrequirements of installation and adhere by same. Provide trenching, conduit, backfill,boxes and equipment pads as applicable. Nothing here in shall be construed to be inconflict with the requirements of the utility company, which shall take precedence overany possible conflicting requirement.

B. Related Work:1. SITEWORK.2. FLATWORK.3. LANDSCAPING.4. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.5. Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits,

fittings and boxes for raceway systems.6. Section 26 0526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.7. Section 31 2200, GRADING

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with

drawings and specifications.2. Include manholes, handholes, duct materials, and hardware. Proposed deviations from

details on the drawings shall be clearly marked on the submittals.3. If necessary to locate manholes or handholes at locations other than shown on the

drawings, show the proposed locations accurately on scaled site drawings.



4. Precast manholes and handholes: Submit detail drawings and design calculations forapproval prior to installation.

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata)form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the textby the basic designation only.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment2. UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit3. UL 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. 70 California Electrical Code (CEC)

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. RN 1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and

Intermediate Metal Conduit2. TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing And Conduit3. TC 3 PVC Fittings For Use With Rigid PVC Conduit And Tubing

E. American Concrete Institute (ACI):1. 318 Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete

F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. C478 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections2. C478M Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

(Metric).3. F512-95 Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and

Fittings for Underground Installation

G. Utility company Handout Package and Construction Requirements for Underground andSubstructure Installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete: ACI 318, 3000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Number 4 minimum.

C. Manhole Hardware:1. Frames and covers (traffic type).2. Sump frames and gratings.3. Pulling Irons: 7/8” diameter hot dipped galvanized steel bar with exposed triangular

shaped opening.4. Cable supports:



a. Cable stanchions, hot rolled, heavy duty, hot dipped galvanized "T" section steel2 1/4" by 1/4" in size and punched with 14 holes on 1 1/2" centers for attachingcable arms.

b. Cable arms, 3/16” gage, hot rolled, hot dipped galvanized sheet steel pressed tochannel shape. Arms shall be approximately 2 1/2" wide and 14” long.

c. Insulators for cable supports, high glazed, wet process porcelain.d. Spares: Equip each cable stanchion with two spare cable arms and six spare

insulators for future use.e. Miscellaneous hardware, hot dipped galvanized steel.

D. Handhole Hardware:1. Frames and covers configuration as shown on the drawings.2. Pulling irons, 7/8” diameter galvanized steel bar with exposed triangular shaped opening.

E. Cable supports are not required.

F. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a 3” PVC sleeve in manhole floors so that a driven ground rodmay be installed.

G. Manholes and Handholes shall be precast units and be constructed as described below. Unitsshall comply with ASTM C478, C478M.1. Size: Plan area and clear height shall be not less than that shown on the drawings.2. Accessories, hardware, and facilities shall be the same as required for poured in place

type.3. Assume ground water level 3’ below ground surface unless a higher water table is shown

in the boring logs and adjust design accordingly.

H. Ducts:1. Size shall be as shown on drawings.2. Ducts (concrete encased):

a. Plastic Conduit:1) NEMA TC6 & 8 and TC9 plastic utilities conduit UL 651 and 651A Schedule

40 PVC.2) Duct shall be suitable for use with 90 degree C rated conductors.

3. Ducts (direct burial):a. Plastic duct:

1) NEMA TC2 and TC3, EPC-40, Type II.2) UL 651 and 651A, Schedule 40 Schedule 80 PVC.3) Duct shall be suitable for use with 75 degree C rated conductors.

b. Rigid metal conduit, PVC-coated: UL6 and NEMA RN1 galvanized rigid steel,threaded type, coated with PVC sheath bonded to the galvanized exterior surface,nominal 0.040” thick.

I. Ground Rods: Per Section 26 0526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS.

J. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper No. 6 AWG minimum.

K. Conduit Spacers: Prefabricated plastic.

L. Warning Tape: Standard 4 mil polyethylene 3” wide tape, detectable type, red with black letters,imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW”.

M. Pull Rope: Plastic with 200 pound minimum tensile strength.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCHING

A. Refer to EARTHWORK section of specification for trenching back-filling, and compactionrequirements.

B. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities to avoiddamaging them.

C. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly for utility company trenches, notify for inspections byutility company a minimum of 48 hours in advance.

D. Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas, roads, and railroad tracks which are not tobe disturbed shall be protected into place. Conduits shall be minimum 36” cover.

E. Trench Preparation: A 4” sand bedding is required if trench bottom is not rock free. A 4” sandcovering over the cable is required if the native backfill is not rock free. Backfill and compactionshould meet City, County, State and utility company requirements. The serving utility companymay required 100% sand backfill. All backfill requirements shall also meet or exceed those setforth in the earthwork or civil section of this specification.

F. Excavation: Provide 6” gravel in bottom of excavated holes for subsurface transformers and allconcrete boxes. Spare gravel shall be available for final adjustment. The Contractor isresponsible for final grade level of enclosures and boxes. Non-conformance will be correctedby electrical contractor at his expense.

G. Conduit Routing: Sharp turns, bends, or other irregularities in the conduit must be avoided.Minimum radius bends shall be as required by the serving utility company. Every effort shouldbe made to obtain a straight water tight conduit line. The end of all spare conduits must becapped. The utility company Inspector must approve deviation from layout.

H. Conformance: All work must conform to the utility company “handout package” andSpecification 59 and/or 99. Copies are available from the utility company upon request.

I. Joint Trenching: Maintain all required depths, clearance and separations as required by code,ordinance or utility company policies. Coordinate with other utilities to confirm requirements.

3.2 OTHER PADMOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. Provide adequately sized and reinforced concrete pads with openings for conduit(s) asnecessary by the utility company and or the equipment manufacturer.

B. A grounding system shall be installed at each padmounted piece of equipment including, but notlimited to, a ground rod, grounding conductor, ufer, and ground grid (if called for).

C. Padmounted equipment shall be bolted to concrete pad with minimum 5/8” x 7 1/2" anchorbolts, one in each of 4 corners of each section of padmounted equipment.

END OF SECTION


26 0546.16 – TELEPHONE UTILITY SERVICE Page 1 of 2

SECTION 26 0546.16

TELEPHONE UTILITY SERVICE

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Related Work:1. Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.2. Section 31 2200, GRADING

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contact the serving utility company at start of construction and again 30 days prior to date thatservice cable placement will be required.

B. Compliance with Standards: the serving utility company reserves the right to refuse to use anyconduit, pullboxes, manholes or utility boxes that deviate from applicable building codes, plansand/or specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. MTTB: Main Telephone Terminal Board

B. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit

C. UFER: concrete-encased electrode

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Main Telephone Terminal Board (MTTB) shall be provided with a #6 THHN solid copper groundwire in 1/2" conduit run to a main electric service ground: either the concrete-encased electrode("UFER") or the metal underground water pipe. Provide with minimum of 30" clear workingspace shall be provided in front of MTTB. If in a closet, no door sills or center posts shallobstruct access.


26 0546.16 – TELEPHONE UTILITY SERVICE Page 2 of 2

B. Interior MTTB shall be 4'x8'x3/4" fire retardant material located per plan. Fasten securely to wall.Provide with adjacent 120 volt double duplex receptacle on dedicated 20amp circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Service Conduits shall be RNC Schedule 40 or GT-80 below grade except at bends up to andincluding above grade which shall be RNC Schedule 80. Verify with utility prior to installation.1. Mandrel and measure conduits end-to-end to facilitate the utility ordering of cables.2. Provide minimum 3/16" pull rope in each conduit.3. Minimum cover for conduit shall be 30".4. Minimum separation from power conduit(s) in joint trench shall be 12" of compacted soil

or 3" of concrete.5. Conduits at backboard shall extend 2" above finish floor or 6" below ceiling and 1" out

from face of backboard.6. Minimum radius of bends from trench to building shall be 36".

B. 300' Conduit length and bending limits: Unless otherwise shown on the plan, service entranceconduit length shall not exceed for 4" conduit or 250' for 2" conduit. Not including risers,conduits shall have a maximum of 270 degrees total of bending including a maximum of two 90degree bends. If these limits are exceeded, a pull box will be required.

C. All manholes, pullboxes and utility boxes shall be sized per plan with cover marked"TELEPHONE" as manufactured by Associated Concrete or Plastic Products "Quikset", Brooks,Christy or equal as approved by the utility company.1. Pullboxes shall be provided with cable racking and torsion parkway cover. If required by

the utility, also provide with 5' ground rod driven 4' into ground.2. Utility boxes shall be provided with 5' ground rod driven 4' into ground if required by the

utility.

END OF SECTION


26 0546.19 – CABLE TELEVISION (CATV) UTILITY SYSTEMS Page 1 of 2

SECTION 26 0546.19

CABLE TELEVISION (CATV) UTILITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Related Work:1. Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.2. Section 31 2200, GRADING

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contact the serving Cable Television (CATV) utility company at start of construction and again30 days prior to date CATV service cable placement will be required.

B. Compliance with Standards: The utility company reserves the right to refuse to use any conduit,pullboxes, manholes or utility boxes that deviate from applicable building codes, utilitystandards, plans and/or specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide a complete conduit infrastructure for installation of the utility service cable. Materialsshall comply with applicable portions of specification sections 26 0533, RACEWAYS ANDBOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide all trenching, excavations, and rock-free backfill (1/4” screen) and service conduits.Notify serving company 48 hours before backfill.

B. Service Conduits shall be RNC Schedule 40 or GT-80 below grade except at bends up to andincluding above grade which shall be RNC Schedule 80. Verify with utilities prior to installation.


26 0546.19 – CABLE TELEVISION (CATV) UTILITY SYSTEMS Page 2 of 2

1. Mandrel and measure conduits end-to-end to facilitate installation of CATV cables.2. Provide minimum 3/16" pull rope in each conduit.3. Minimum cover for conduit shall be 24".4. Minimum separation from power conduit(s) in joint trench shall be 12" of compacted soil

or 3" of concrete.5. Conduits at backboard shall extend 2" above finish floor or 6" below ceiling and 1" out

from face of backboard.6. Minimum radius of bends from trench to building shall be 36".

C. Conduit length and bending limits: Unless otherwise shown on the plan, service entranceconduit length shall not exceed 500’. Not including risers, conduits shall have a maximum of270 degrees total of bending including a maximum of two 90-degree bends. If these limits areexceeded, a pull box will be required.

D. All manholes, pullboxes and utility boxes shall be sized per plan with cover marked "Cable TV"as manufactured by Associated Concrete or Plastic Products "Quikset", Brooks, Christy orequal as approved by utility company.

E. Conduits must enter boxes with a 90 degree sweep and shall be no more than a 15 degreeangle from the main line trench.

F. Pullropes: Install 3/16" polypropylene 800 lb. minimum test pull line in 2" conduits and 1/8"polypropylene 200 lb. minimum test pull line in 1" conduits.

G. Locations of existing underground facilities shall be obtained by calling Underground ServiceAlert at least 48 hours in advance, 800-642-2444.

END OF SECTION


26 0548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 6

SECTION 26 0548

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads.2. Channel support systems.3. Restraint cables.4. Hanger rod stiffeners.5. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonlyused electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.b. Component Response Modification Factor: 3.0.c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second):SDS=1.361g.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: SD1=0.663g.


A. Product Data: For the following:



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibrationisolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish foreach type and size of seismic-restraint component used.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical componentswith other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismicrestraints.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testinglaboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Sectionare more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "StructuralWelding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis andshall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, orpreapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showingmaximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferredto ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittalsbased on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear andtensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by aqualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:



1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. California Dynamics Corporation.4. Isolation Technology, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Mason Industries.7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

C. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading overpad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cutto sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant rubber.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Hilti Inc.5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.6. Mason Industries.7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, andapplication requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout forceof components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to whichthey will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made ofslotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one endand to building structure at the other end and other matching components and withcorrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steelassemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cableservice; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internallybolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigidequipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.



G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neopreneelements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to typeand size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistantneoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steelfor interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors withstrength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length ofeight times diameter.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devicesfor compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affectingperformance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locationsbefore installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member withclamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled onDrawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due toseismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizesof components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismicloads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where

clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).



3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals forcomponent.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged toprovide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attachedto wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing tostructure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concretemembers.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drillingholes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items duringcoring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or otherembedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressedtendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout hasachieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in thestructural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust priorto installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottomof the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoidintroduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for

exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways and cables where they cross seismicjoints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structuralelements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to adifferent structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests andinspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Engineer before connecting anchorage device to restrainedcomponent (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at leastseven days' advance notice.



3. Obtain Engineer’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Providetemporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fastenersselected by Engineer.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until

satisfactory results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operatingheight. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out ofcontact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION


26 0553 – IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 4

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Nameplates and warning signs where specified herein and as shown on contract

documents including the following:a. Nameplates and warning signs permanently installed on all electrical equipment

and devices including, but not limited to, the following items:1) Enclosures for transformers, switchboards, motor control, panels, pullboxes,

cabinets, motors, generators, transfer switches.2) Enclosures for all separately enclosed devices including, but not limited to,

disconnect switches, circuit breakers, contactors, time switches, controlstations and relays, fire alarm panels and lighting control panel.

3) Wall switches not within sight of outlet controlled.4) Special systems such as, but not limited to, telephone, fire alarm, warning

and signal systems. Identification shall be at each equipment rack, terminalcabinet, control panel, annunciator and pullbox.

5) Devices mounted within and part of equipment including circuit breakers,switches, control devices, control transformers, relays, indication devicesand instruments.

2. Conductor and Cable Identification.

B. Related Work:1. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.2. Section 26 0519, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES.3. Section 26 2416, PANELBOARDS.4. Section 26 2816, ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS.5. Section 26 2413, SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL DESIGNATIONS

A. Equipment labels indicating equipment designations both emergency and normal. Designationdata per drawings or to be supplied with shop drawings approval.

B. Panelboard labels showing panel designation, voltage, phase and source.



C. In accordance with CEC 110.16, provide arc flash protection warning labels on all switchboards,panelboards, distribution panels, transformers, safety switches, transfer equipment, etc. Labelsshall be per ANSI Z535.4 guidelines.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. For Labels: Three layer laminated plastic or micarta with engraved white letters over blackbackground.

B. For Emergency Equipment: Use engraved white letters over red background.

C. For Warning Signs: Minimum 18 gauge steel with red lettering on white porcelain enamel finish.

D. Arc flash labels shall be provided as required by CEC Article 70E.

E. Conductor tape number markers: TayMac MX4280 Series non-fading permanent adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING

A. Equipment labels shall be mounted by self-tapping, threaded screws and bolts, or by rivets.Adhesive types are not acceptable unless specifically noted in this section.

B. Conductor tape markers shall be consistently placed for ready conductor identification.

3.2 HEIGHTS ON LABELS

A. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers and Special Systems Enclosures: 1/4"identify equipment designation; 1/8” identify voltage rating and source.

B. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Panelboards, Switchboards, andMotor Control Centers: 3/16” identify circuit and load served, including location of equipment.

C. Enclosed Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 3/16” identify load served.

D. Transformers: 3/16” identify equipment designation; 1/8” identify primary and secondaryvoltages, primary source and secondary load. Include location of primary source or secondaryload if remote from transformer.

3.3 WARNING SIGNS

A. Warning signs shall be permanently mounted with cadmium plated steel screws or nickel-platedbrass bolts.

B. Warning signs to read "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE", with letters 1 1/2" high, 3/16” strokeminimum.

C. Provide warning sign on all doors or immediately next to door for equipment rooms, enclosuresor closets containing equipment energized above 150 volts to ground as per CEC, and/or as



directed by the Architect. For interior finish spaces and interior doors, signage shall be coordinated and approved with the Architect in advance of installation.

END OF SECTION


26 0573 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION Page 1 of 9

SECTION 26 0573

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the requirements of the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination.

B. A short circuit and coordination study shall be prepared for the electrical overcurrent devices tobe installed under this project to assure selective coordination, proper equipment and personnelprotection.

C. The study shall present an organized time current analysis of each protective device in seriesfrom the individual overcurrent device back to the utility and the on-site generator sources. Thestudy shall reflect the operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions.

D. Implement as part of this contract, all manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum protectionand best selective coordination at no additional cost to Owner.

E. The Contractor shall furnish an ARC Flash analysis study per NFPA 70E – Standard ForElectrical Safety In The Workplace, Reference Article 130.3 and Appendix D.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Section 26 2416, PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL, submitthe following:1. Complete short circuit and coordination study as described herein.2. Protective equipment shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously with or after the

protective device study. Protective equipment shop drawings will not be accepted prior toprotective device study.

3. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to theEngineer:a. Certification by the Contractor that the protective devices have been adjusted and

set in accordance with the approved protective device study.b. Final setting values for each adjustable trip device.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):1. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems



2. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial andCommercial Power Systems

3. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power SystemAnalysis

4. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings5. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.6. IEEE 1584 - Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI C57.12.00 – Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution,

Power, and Regulating Transformers2. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures3. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated

on a Symmetrical Current Basis4. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed

Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories.

C. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition2. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

The protective device study shall be prepared by qualified engineers of the high voltage switchgear manufacturer or an approved consultant. The Contractor is responsible for providing all pertinent information required by the preparers to complete the study. Submit engineer’s qualifications with study.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS

A. The complete study shall include a system one line diagram, short circuit and ground faultanalysis, and protective coordination plots.

B. One Line Diagram:1. Show on the one line diagram, all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the

overcurrent devices installed under this project. Clearly show, on the one line, theschematic wiring of the electrical distribution system.

2. Also show on the one line diagram the following specific information:a. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short circuit values at each bus.b. Breaker and fuse ratings.c. Generator kW and Transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R

ratios, and wiring connections.d. Voltage at each bus.e. Identification of each bus.f. Conduit material, feeder sizes, length, and X/R ratios.

C. Short Circuit Study:1. Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short circuit and

ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor contribution in determining themomentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices.



2. The study shall be calculated by means of a computer program. Pertinent data and therationale employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductoryremarks of the study.

3. Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format. Include thefollowing:a. Device identification.b. Operating voltage.c. Protective device.d. Device rating.

D. Calculated short circuit current.

E. Coordination Curves:1. Prepare the coordination curves to determine the required settings of protective devices

to assure selective coordination. Graphically illustrate on log paper that adequate timeseparation exists between series devices, including the utility company upstream device.Plot the specific time current characteristics of each protective device in such a mannerthat all upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one sheet.

2. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves:a. Device identification.b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.c. 3-phase and 1-phase ANSI damage points for each transformer.d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.e. Cable damage curves.f. Transformer inrush points.g. Maximum short circuit cutoff point.

3. Develop a table to summarize the settings selected for the protective devices. Includethe following in the table:a. Device identification.b. Relay CT ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup.c. Circuit breaker sensor rating, long time, short time, and instantaneous settings,

and time bands.d. Fuse rating and type.e. Ground fault pickup and time delay.

1.7 ANALYSIS

A. Analyze the short circuit calculations, and highlight any equipment that is determined to beunderrated as specified. Propose approaches to effectively protect the underrated equipment.

B. After developing the coordination curves, highlight areas lacking coordination. Present atechnical evaluation with a discussion of the logical compromises for best coordination.

1.8 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS

A. Necessary final field adjustments, settings and minor modifications shall be made to conformwith the protective device study without additional cost to the Owner.

B. All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be made in accordance with therecommendations of the protective device study.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STUDIES

A. Contractor to furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as prepared byequipment manufacturer or an approved consultant.

B. The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard forElectrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D.

2.2 DATA COLLECTION

A. Contractor shall furnish all data as required by the power system studies. The Engineerperforming the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysisstudies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of thecontract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of thestudies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or priorto the release of the equipment for manufacturing.

B. Source combination may include present and future motors and generators.

C. Load data utilized shall include proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents provided byOwner, or Contractor.

D. Include fault contribution of existing motors in the study, with motors greater than 25 hp. TheContractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the studyrequirements.

2.3 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVAULATION STUDY

A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedancesbased on IEEE Standards 141-1993.

B. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.

C. Provide the following:1. Calculation methods and assumptions2. Selected base per unit quantities3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution

characteristics5. Typical calculations6. Tabulations of calculated quantities7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations.

D. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted faultat each:

1. Electric utility’s supply termination point2. Incoming switchgear3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals4. Low voltage switchgear5. Motor control centers



6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches7. Branch circuit panelboards8. Other significant locations throughout the system.

E. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as definedfor the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

F. Protective Device Evaluation:1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand

short-circuit stresses3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating5. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the

calculated available fault current.

2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed onlog-log scale paper.

B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying thespecific portion of the system covered.

C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical orasymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.

D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable,tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable:1. Electric utility’s protective device2. Medium voltage equipment relays3. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing,

tolerance, and damage bands4. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance

bands5. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer

withstand parameters6. Conductor damage curves7. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable8. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points9. Pertinent generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point10. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder

circuit breaker in each motor control center.

F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation isprovided, while providing proper protection.

2.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations thatare presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.



B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal.

C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 45 kVA.

E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary.

H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2.

2.6 REPORT SECTIONS

A. Input Data: 1. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines 2. Cable and conduit materials 3. Bus ducts 4. Transformers 5. Reactors 6. Aerial lines 7. Circuit resistance and reactive values.

B. Short-Circuit Data: 1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions 2. X to R ratios 3. Asymmetry factors 4. Motor contributions 5. Short circuit kVA 6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

C. Recommended Protective Device Settings: 1. Phase and Ground Relays:

a. Current transformer ratio b. Current setting c. Time setting d. Instantaneous setting e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

2. Circuit Breakers:



a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground)b. Adjustable time-current characteristicc. Adjustable instantaneous pickupd. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations1. Arcing fault magnitude2. Device clearing time3. Duration of arc4. Arc flash boundary5. Working distance6. Incident energy7. Hazard Risk Category8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT AND FIELD ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings tableprovided by the coordination study. Field adjustments to be completed by the engineeringservice division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testingcontract portion.

B. Make modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit andprotective device coordination studies and include all recommendations.

C. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the field engineeringservice division of the equipment manufacturer, a 2-year warranty shall be provided on allcomponents manufactured by the engineering service parent manufacturing company.

3.2 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. The Contractor shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesionpolyester for each work location analyzed, a sample is included in this specification.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, “WARNING, ARC FLASH HAZARD”,and shall include the following information:

1. Location designation2. Nominal voltage3. Flash protection boundary4. Hazard risk category5. Incident energy6. Working distance7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based onrecommended overcurrent device settings.

1. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboards, one arc flash label shall beprovided.



2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided.3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided.4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided.5. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided

E. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipmentmanufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

3.3 ARC FLASH TRAINING

A. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated withworking on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures inaccordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E, Standard For Electrical Safety RequirementsFor Employee Workplaces, shall be provided in the equipment manuals. The training shall becertified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for ContinuingEducation Training (IACET).



END OF SECTION 16051

END OF SECTION


26 0590 – CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION Page 1 of 2

SECTION 26 0900

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Control devices, shown on the drawings and/or required by other sections, to assure a

complete and operating system.2. Furnish submittals/shop drawings for all equipment in this section as described in Section

26 0500, 1.4, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Terminal and Control Cabinets shall be manufactured from code gauge galvanized steel withhinged locking covers finished in grey or hammer tone enamel. Knockouts, barriers andplywood backing shall be provided where required. Cabinets shall be of raintight constructionwhere exposed to the weather. Approved manufacturers are Circle AW, Wireguard, Benner-Nawman, or equal.

B. Photocontrols and time switches shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Approvedmanufacturers are Intermatic, Paragon, Tork or equal. Where indicated on the fixture schedule,photocells in outdoor fixtures shall be factory installed and wired.

C. Lighting Contactors shall be of the correct number of poles with suitable contact ampere ratings.Provide fusing protection for all lighting contactor control circuits. Verify all coil voltages prior toinstallation. Approved manufacturers are General Electric, Westinghouse, Square "D" or equal.

D. Motor Controls shall be manual or magnetic with motor overload thermal relays. Individualthermal elements sized to the correct motor full load amps shall be used. Provide correctNEMA rated enclosure. Select proper voltage, class, size and horsepower rating. Select thecorrect coil voltage if magnetic.


26 0590 – CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Power to all irrigation controllers shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor as required forthe irrigation equipment. Also provide and install conduit sweeps as required to house lowvoltage wiring between controller and exterior below grade.

B. General Purpose Control Contactors shall be rated for the use with the correct ampere rating,voltage, size and horse power rating. Select the correct control coil voltage.

END OF SECTION


26 0943 – NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 1 of 14

SECTION 26 0943

NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The lighting control system specified in this section shall provide time-based, sensor-based(both occupancy and daylight), and manual lighting control.

B. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if lightingload is capable of being dimmed)

C. All system devices shall be networked together enabling digital communication and shall beindividually addressable.

D. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices tofunction in some default capacity even if network connectivity to the greater system is lost.

E. The system architecture shall facilitate remote operation via a computer connection.

F. The system shall not require any centrally hardwired switching equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Datasheets (general device descriptions, dimensions, wiring details, nomenclature)

B. Riser Diagrams – typical per room type (detailed drawings showing device interconnectivity ofdevices)

C. Other Diagrams – as needed for special operation or interaction with other system(s)

D. Example Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet – must be completed prior to factorystart-up

E. Hardware and Software Operation Manuals

F. Other operational descriptions as needed


A. All steps in sensor manufacturing process shall occur in the USA; including population of allelectronic components on circuit boards, soldering, programming, wiring, and housing.

B. All components and the manufacturing facility where product was manufactured must be ROHScompliant.

C. In high humidity or cold environments, the sensors shall be conformably coated and rated forcondensing humidity and -40 degree Fahrenheit (and Celsius) operation.



D. All applicable products must be UL / CUL Listed or other acceptable national testingorganization.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatiblecomponents.

B. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS (if necessary) either through IP based intercommunicationof system or hardwired auxiliary relay outputs.

C. The installing contractor shall be responsible for a complete and functional system inaccordance with all applicable local and national codes.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. All devices in lighting control system shall have a 5 year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. This specification is based on the nLight® Network Control System from Sensor Switch, anAcuity Brands Company (800-727-7483, www.sensorswitch.com).

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts; 1) intelligent lightingcontrol devices 2) standalone lighting control zones 3) network backbone for remote or timebased operation.

B. Intelligent lighting control devices shall consist of one or more basic lighting controlcomponents; occupancy sensors, photocell sensors, relays, dimming outputs, manual switchstations, and manual dimming stations. Combining one or more of these components into asingle device enclosure should be permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system.

C. System must interface directly with intelligent LED luminaires such that only CAT-5 cabling isrequired to interconnect luminaires with control components such as sensors and switches.

D. Intelligent lighting control devices shall communicate digitally, require ~3 mA of current tofunction (Graphic WallPod excluded), and possesses at least two RJ-45 connectors.

E. Lighting control zones shall consist of one or more intelligent lighting control components, becapable of stand-alone operation, and be capable of being connected to a higher level networkbackbone.



F. Devices within a lighting control zone shall be connected with CAT-5 low voltage cabling in any order.

G. Lighting control zone shall be capable of automatically configuring itself for default operation without any start-up labor required.

H. Individual lighting zones must continue to provide a user defined default level of lighting control in the event of a system communication failure with the backbone network or the management software becoming unavailable.

I. Power for devices within a lighting control zone shall come from either resident devices already present for switching (relay device) or dimming purposes, or from the network backbone. Standalone “bus power supplies” shall not be required in all cases.

J. All switching and dimming for a specific lighting zone shall take place within the devices located in the zone itself (i.e. not in a remotely located devices such as panels) to facilitate system robustness and minimize wiring requirements. Specific applications that require centralized or remote switching shall be capable of being accommodated.

K. System shall have one or more primary wall mounted network control “gateway” devices that are capable of accessing and controlling connected system devices and linking into an Ethernet LAN.

L. System shall use “bridge” devices that route communication and distribute power for up to 8 directly connected lighting zones together for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements.

M. System shall have a web-based software management program that enables remote system control, status monitoring, and creation of lighting control profiles.

N. Individual lighting zones shall be capable of being segmented into several channels of occupancy, photocell, and switch functionality for more advanced configurations and sequences of operation.

O. System shall be capable of operating a lighting control zone according to several sequences of operation. System shall be able to change a spaces sequence of operation according to a time schedule so as to enable customized time-of-day, day-of-week utilization of a space. Note operating modes should be utilized only in manners consistent with local energy codes. 1. Auto-On / Auto-Off (via occupancy sensors):

a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.

b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient daylight is detected.

c. Pressing a switch will turn lights off. The lights will remain off regardless of occupancy until switch is pressed again, restoring the sensor to Automatic On functionality.

2. Manual-On / Auto-Off (also called Semi-Automatic) a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on. b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or

sufficient daylight is detected. 3. Manual-On to Auto-On/Auto-Off

a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on. b. After initial lights on, zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights

on/off according to occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight conditions. c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events.



4. Auto-to-Override On a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is

detected. b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until

the next time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control. c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events

5. Manual-to-Override On a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on. b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until

the next time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control. c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events

6. Auto On / Predictive Off a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is

detected. b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or

sufficient daylight is detected. c. If switch is pressed, lights turn off and a short “exit timer” begins. After timer

expires, sensor scans the room to detect whether occupant is still present. If no occupancy is detected, zone returns to auto-on. If occupancy is detected, lights must be turned on via the switch.

7. Multi-Level Operation (multiple lighting levels per manual button press) a. Operating mode designed specifically for bi-level applications b. Enables the user to cycle through the up to four potential on/off lighting states

using only a single button. c. Eliminates user confusion as to which of two buttons controls which load d. Three different transition sequences are available in order to comply with energy

codes or user preference) e. Mode available as a setting on all nLight devices that have single manual switch

(ex. nWSD, nPODM, nPODM-DX).



f. Depending on the sequence selected, every button push steps through relaysstates according to below table:

Sequence Altern. Seq Full On Seq. 3 Step On Seq. State # Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 1 Relay 2 1 On Off On Off On Off 2 Off On - - Off On 3 - - On On On On 4* Off Off Off Off Off Off

(*step only present for devices without separate off button)

P. Task bar style desktop application shall be available for personal lighting control.

Q. An application that runs on “smart” handheld devices (such as an Apple® IPhone®) shall beavailable for personal lighting control.

R. Control software shall enable logging of system performance data and presenting usefulinformation in a web-based graphical format and downloadable to .CSV files.

S. Control software shall enable integration with a BMS via BACnet IP.

T. System shall provide the option of having pre-terminated plenum rated CAT-5 cabling suppliedwith hardware.

2.3 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS

A. Control Module (Gateway)1. Module shall be a wall mounted user accessible device that is capable of communicating

and controlling downstream system control devices and linking into an Ethernet.2. Devices shall be powered by low voltage, fit within a two gang switch box (or mounting

ring), and have a backlit LCD panel.3. User control shall be made available via finger-touch buttons with no moving parts.

Buttons shall be capable of being locked for security.4. Device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices (bridges)

or directly to a lighting control zones devices.5. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it.6. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.7. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection.8. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 400 devices to the management

software.9. Device shall be capable of using a dedicated or DHCP assigned IP address.10. Network Control Gateway device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:

nGWY.

B. Networked System Occupancy Sensors1. Occupancy sensors system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired

space and fully control the on/off function of the lights.2. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to

initially turn lights on from an off state; thus preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic orMicrowave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.

3. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detectmaintained occupancy (such as in rooms with obstructions), a sensor with an additional“dual” technology shall be used.



4. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be acceptable.

5. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive meaning they do not transmit sounds waves of any frequency (for example in the Ultrasonic range), as these technologies have the potential for interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.

6. Sensors shall be available with zero, one, or two integrated Class 1 switching relays, and up to one 0-10 VDC dimming output. Sensors shall be capable of switching 120 / 277 / 347 VAC. Load ratings shall be 800 W @ 120 VAC, 1200 W @ 277 VAC, 1500 W @ 347 VAC, and ¼ HP motor. Relays shall be dry contacts.

7. Sensors shall be available with one or two occupancy “poles”, each of which provides a programmable time delay.

8. Sensors shall be available in multiple lens options which are customized for specific applications.

9. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.

10. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports. 11. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication

(via CAT-5 connections) and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate of a potential wiring issue

12. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button.

13. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide expanded coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5 cabling.

14. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100 hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements.

15. Wall switch sensors shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.

16. Wall switch sensors must meet NEC grounding requirements by providing a dedicated ground connection and grounding to mounting strap. Line and load wire connections shall be interchangeable. Sensor shall not allow current to pass to the load when sensor is in the unoccupied (Off) condition.

17. Wall switch sensors shall have optional features for photocell/daylight override, vandal resistant lens, and low temperature/high humidity operation.

18. Wall switch sensors shall be available in four standard colors .match wiring device color. 19. Wall switch sensors shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device

color and optional features as specified: a. nWSD (PIR, 1 Relay) b. nWSD PDT (Dual Technology, 1 Relay) c. nWSD 2P (PIR, 2 Relays) d. nWSD PDT 2P (Dual Technology, 2 Relays) e. nWSD NL (PIR w/ Night Light, 1 Relay) f. nWSD PDT NL (Dual Technology w/ Night Light, 1 Relay) g. nWSD LV (PIR, No Relay) h. nWSD PDT LV (Dual Technology w/ Night Light, No Relay)

20. Network system shall also have ceiling, fixture, recessed, & corner mounted sensors available.

21. Sensors shall have optional features for photocell/daylight override, dimming control, and low temperature/high humidity operation.



22. Sensors with dimming can control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by sinking up to 20 mAof Class 2 current (typically 40 or more ballasts).

23. Sensors shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options asspecified:

Model # Series Occup. Poles # of Relays Lens Type Det. Tech. nCM(B) 9 1 - Standard PIRnCM(B) 9 2P 2 - Standard PIRnCMR(B) 9 1 1 Standard PIR nCMR(B) 9 2P 2 2 Standard PIR nCM(B) PDT 9 1 - Standard DualnCM(B) PDT 9 2P 2 - Standard DualnCMR(B) PDT 9 1 1 Standard Dual nCMR(B) PDT 9 2P 2 2 Standard Dual nCM(B) 10 1 - Extended PIRnCM(B) 10 2P 2 - Extended PIRnCMR(B) 10 1 1 Extended PIR nCMR(B) 10 2P 2 2 Extended PIR nCM(B) PDT 10 1 - Extended DualnCM(B) PDT 10 2P 2 - Extended DualnCMR(B) PDT 10 1 1 Extended Dual nCMR(B) PDT 10 2P 2 2 Extended Dual nWV 16 1 - Wide View PIRnWV PDT 16 1 - Wide View DualnHW13 1 - Hallway PIRnCM(B) 6 1 - High Bay PIRnCMR(B) 6 1 1 High Bay PIR nCMR(B) 6 2P 2 2 High Bay PIR nCMR(B) 6 480 1 2 High Bay PIR

Note: Recessed mount versions of the above ceiling (fixture) mount versions also shall be availa-ble (e.g. nCMR(B) 9 => nRMR 9)

C. Networked System Daylight (Photocell and or Dimming) Sensors1. Photocell shall provide for an on/off set-point, and a deadband to prevent the artificial

light from cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to prevent rapid responseto passing clouds.

2. Photocell and dimming sensor’s set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibratedthrough the sensor’s microprocessor by initiating an “Automatic Set-point Programming”procedure. Min and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered.

3. Deadband setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every timethe lights cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts,lamp depreciation, or lamp outages).

4. Dimming sensors shall control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by sinking up to 20 mA ofclass 2 current (typically 40 or more ballasts).

5. Photocell and dimming sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100hour burn-in of lamps. This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements.(Note: This function should be performed prior to any dimming of the lamps including the“auto set-point” setting.)

6. Combination units that have all features of on/off photocell and dimming sensors shallalso be available.

7. A dual zone option shall be available for On/Off Photocell, Automatic Dimming ControlPhotocell, or Combination units. The second zone shall be capable of being controlled asan “offset” from the primary zone.

8. Line voltage versions of the above described photocell and combinationphotocell/dimming sensors shall be capable of switching both 120 VAC, 277 VAC, and



347 VAC. Load ratings shall be 800 W @ 120 VAC, 1200 W @ 277 VAC, 1500 W @ 347 VAC, and ¼ HP motor load. Relays shall be dry contacts.

9. Sensor shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options asspecified:a. nCM(B) PC (on/off)b. nCM(B) ADC (dimming)c. nCM(B) PC ADC (on/off, 0-10 VDC dimming)d. nCMR(B) PC (on/off, single relay)e. nCMR(B) PC ADC (on/off, 0-10 VDC dimming, single relay)

Note: Recessed mount versions of the above ceiling (fixture) mount versions also shall be available (e.g. nCMR(B) PC => nRMR PC)

D. Networked System Power (Relay) Packs1. Power Pack shall incorporate one or more Class 1 relays and contribute low voltage

power to the rest of the system. Secondary Packs shall incorporate the relay(s), shallhave an optional 2nd relay, 0-10 VDC dimming output, or line voltage dimming output,but shall not be required to contribute system power. Power Supplies shall providesystem power only, but are not required to switch line voltage circuit. Auxiliary RelayPacks shall switch low voltage circuits only.

2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated, andprovide Class 2 power to the system.

3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the

software and locally via the device push-button.5. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded ½ inch chase

nipple. Plastic clips into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall passthrough chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. Note:UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control Equipment automaticallymeets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet this safetyrequirement.

6. When required by local code, Power Pack must install inside standard electricalenclosure and provide UL recognized support to junction box. All Class 1 wiring is to passthrough chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads.

7. Power (Secondary) Packs shall be available that provide up to 16 Amp switching of allload types, and be rated for 400,000 cycles.

8. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching aswell as 0-10 VDC dimming of fluorescent ballasts.

9. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching andcan dim 120 VAC incandescent lighting loads or 120/277 VAC line voltage dimmablefluorescent ballasts (2-wire and 3-wire versions).

10. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching ofdual phase (208/240/480 VAC) lighting loads.

11. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that require a manual switch signal (via anetworked Wall Station) in order to close its relay.

12. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that are UL924 listed for switching ofEmergency Power circuits.

13. Power (Relay) Packs and Supplies shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers:a. nPP16 (Power Pack w/ 16A relay)b. nSP16 (Secondary Pack w/ 16A relay)c. nSP16 SA (Secondary Pack w/ 16A relay, Manual On)d. nSP5 2P (Secondary Pack w/ two 5A relays)e. nSP5 D (Secondary Pack w/ 5A relay and 0-10VDC dimming output)f. nSP5 D ER (UL924 Listed Secondary Pack w/ 5A relay and 0-10VDC dimming

output for switching emergency power circuits)



g. nSP5 PCD 2W (Secondary Pack w/ 5A relay and incandescent dimming or 2-wire line voltage fluorescent dimming output)

h. nSP5 PCD 3W (Secondary Pack w/ 5A relay and 3-wire line voltage fluorescent dimming output)

i. nSP5 480 (Secondary Pack w/ 5A relay for switching 208/240/480 VAC loads j. nPS 80 (Power Supply) k. nAR 40 (Low voltage auxiliary relay pack)

E. Networked System Relay & Dimming Panels 1. Panel shall incorporate up to 4 normally closed latching relays capable of switching

120/277 VAC or up to 2 Dual Phase relays capable of switching 208/240/480 VAC loads. 2. Relays shall be rated to switch up to a 30A ballast load at 277 VAC. 3. Panel shall provide one 0-10VDC dimming output paired with each relay. 4. Panel shall power itself from an integrated 120/277 VAC supply. 5. Panel shall be capable of operating as either two networked devices or as one. 6. Panel shall supply current limited low voltage power to other networked devices

connected via CAT-5. 7. Panel shall provide auxiliary low voltage device power connected wired directly to a

dedicated terminal connection 8. Power (Relay) Packs and Supplies shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers:

a. nPANEL 4 (Panel w/ four 120/277 VAC relays and four 0-10 VDC dimming outputs)

b. nPANEL 2 480 (Panel w/ two dual phase relays (208/240/480 VAC) and two 0-10 VDC dimming outputs).

F. Networked Auxiliary Input / Output Devices 1. Devices shall be plenum rated and be inline wired, screw mountable, or have an

extended chase nipple for mounting to a ½” knockout. 2. Devices shall have two RJ-45 ports 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard

CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. Devices shall have a dimming control output that can control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable

ballasts or LED drivers by sinking up to 20 mA of current (typically 40 or more ballasts). 5. Devices shall have an input that read a 0 to 10 VDC signal from an external device. 6. Device shall have a switch input that can interface with either a maintained or momentary

switch and run a switch event, or run a local/remote control profile 7. A specific I/O device shall sense state of low voltage outdoor photocells 8. Auxiliary Input/Output Devices shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers:

a. nIO (I/O device with dimming or contact closure input and 0-10VDC dimmng output )

b. nIO KO (1/2 knockout mountable, I/O device with dimming or contact closure input and 0-10VDC dimmng output )

c. nIO NLI (Input device for detecting state of low voltage outdoor photocell; sold in nIO PC KIT only)

G. Networked LED Luminaires 1. LED luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device. 2. LED luminaire shall have two RJ-45 ports 3. LED luminaire shall be able to digitally network directly to other network control devices

(sensors, photocells, switches, dimmers) 4. LED luminaire shall provide low voltage power to other networked control devices 5. System shall be able to turn on/off LED luminaire without using a relay 6. System shall be able to maintain constant lumen output over the specified life of the LED

luminarie (also called lumen compensation) by varying the input control power (and thus saving up to 20% power usage).



7. System shall indicate (via a blink warning) when the LED luminaire has reached its expected life (in hrs).

8. LED Luminaires shall be the following Lithonia model families: a. RTLED b. TLED c. VLED d. ACLED

H. Networked System Wall Switches & Dimmers 1. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 2. Devices shall be available with zero or one integrated Class 1 switching relay. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard

CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports. 5. All devices shall provide toggle switch control. Dimming control and low temperature/high

humidity operation are available options. 6. Devices shall be available in four colors (Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray). 7. Devices with dimming control outputs can control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by

sinking up to 20 mA of current (typically 40 or more ballasts). 8. Devices with capacitive touch buttons shall provide audible user feedback with different

sounds for on/off, raise/lower, start-up, and communication offline. 9. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback. 10. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall be made available with custom button

labeling 11. Devices with a single on button shall be capable of selecting all possible lighting

combinations for a bi-level lighting zone such that the user confusion as to which of two buttons (as is present in multi-button scenarios) controls which load is eliminated.

12. Wall switches & dimmers shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options as specified: a. nPOD (single on/off, capacitive touch, audible user feedback) b. nPOD 2P (dual on/off, capacitive touch, audible user feedback) c. nPODR (single on/off, one relay, capacitive touch, audible user feedback) d. nPODM (single on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback) e. nPODM 2P (dual on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback) f. nPODM DX (single on/off, single dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user

feedback) g. nPODM 2P DX (dual on/off, dual dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user

feedback) h. nPODM 4P (quad on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback) i. nPODM 4P DX (quad on/off, quad dimming raise-lower, push-buttons, LED user

feedback)

I. Networked System Graphic Wall Station 1. Device shall have a 3.5” full color touch screen for selecting up to 8 programmable

lighting control presets or acting as up to 16 on/off/dim control switches. 2. Device shall enable configuration of lighting presets, switched, and dimmers via

password protected setup screens. 3. Device shall enable user supplied .jpg screen saver image to be uploaded. 4. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box 5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity. 6. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports for communication 7. Device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:

a. nPOD GFX

J. Networked System Scene Controllers



1. Device shall have two to four buttons for selecting programmable lighting control profilesor acting as on/off switches.

2. Device shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.3. Devices shall provide LED user feedback.4. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via

standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.5. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports.6. Device shall have four touch sensitive buttons for selecting programmable lighting control

scenes/profiles.7. Device shall be capable of reprogramming other devices in its zone so as to implement

user selected lighting scene.8. Device shall be capable of selecting a lighting profile be run by the system’s upstream

Gateway so as to implement selected lighting profile across multiple zones (and not justits local zone).

9. Device shall have LEDs indicating current selection.10. Scene Selector device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:

a. nPODS (4 Scene, capacitive touch)b. nPODM 2S (2 Scene, push-button)c. nPODM 4S (4 Scene, push-button)

K. Communication Bridges1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4” x 4” square junction box.2. Device shall have 8 RJ-45 ports.3. Device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting control

zones for purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to ControlGateway.

4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wiredpower supply or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.

5. Device shall be careful of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lightingcontrol zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power.This architecture also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful onnetwork lighting control system.

6. Communication Bridge devices shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers:a. nBRG 8 (8 Ports)

2.4 LIGHTING CONTROL PROFILES

A. Changes to the operation of the system shall be capable of being made in real-time orscheduled via lighting control profiles. These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how acollection of devices function for a defined time period.

B. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device, zoneof devices, or customized group of zones.

C. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignoreinformation regarding occupancy, daylight, and local user switches via lighting control profiles.

D. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be configurablevia a lighting control profile.

E. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network control gateway device and on thesoftware’s host server.



F. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the followingcalendar options: start date/hour/minute, end date/hour/minute, and sunrise/sunset +/- timedoffsets.

G. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using anastronomical clock.

H. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired.

I. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrencesettings: daily, weekday, weekend, weekly, monthly, and yearly.

J. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control profiles.

2.5 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available andconfigurable remotely from the software

B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for alldevices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, currentMicrophonics Status, remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell reading, currentphotocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions time remaining, current dim level, devicetemperature, and device relay state(s).

C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software: modelnumber, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), andparent network device.

D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.

E. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.

F. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.

G. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.

H. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall beencrypted.

I. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download andinstallation via the internet.

J. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network).

2.6 BMS COMPATIBILITY

A. System shall provide a BACnet IP gateway as a downloadable software plug-in to itsmanagement software. No additional hardware shall be required.

B. BACnet IP gateway software shall communicate information gathered by networked system toother building management systems.



C. BACnet IP gateway software shall translate and forward lighting relay and other select controlcommands from BMS system to networked control devices.

2.7 SYSTEM ENERGY ANALYSIS & REPORTING SOFTWARE

A. System shall be capable of reporting lighting system events and performance data back to themanagement software for display and analysis.

B. Intuitive graphical screens shall be displayed in order to facilitate simple viewing of systemenergy performance.

C. An “Energy Scorecard” shall be display that shows calculated energy savings in dollars, KWHr,or CO2.

D. Software shall calculate the allocation of energy savings to different control measures(occupancy sensors, photocells, manual switching, etc).

E. Energy savings data shall be calculated for the system as a whole or for individual zones.

F. A time scaled graph showing all relay transitions shall be presented.

G. A time scaled graph showing a zones occupancy time delay shall be presented

H. A time scaled graph showing the total light level shall be presented.

I. User shall be able to customize the baseline run-time hours for a space.

J. User shall be able to customize up to four time-of-day billing rates and schedules.

K. Data shall be made available via a .CSV file

2.8 START-UP & SUPPORT FEATURES

A. To facilitate start-up, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall automatically begrouped together into a functional lighting control zone.

B. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once adequatepower is applied and before any system software is installed.

C. Once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices withoutrequiring any commissioning.

D. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.

E. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed remotely andwithout being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date.

F. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink itsLED in a specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.

END OF SECTION


26 2413 – SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD Page 1 of 4

SECTION 26 2413

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Service and distribution switchboard where shown on the contract drawings and specified

herein.


A. Conform to applicable Codes and NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 01 3300 of Division 01, Submittals and of Section26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.

B. Shop Drawings shall show and contain the following information:1. Plans showing top and bottom of switchboards.2. Front, rear and side elevations of switchboards.3. Schematic Wiring Diagrams showing the following:

a. One-line diagram with each circuit numbered.b. Schedule showing circuit number, description and rating of protective device(s).c. Complete short circuit with standability of bus.

4. One-half inch equal to one-foot scale drawings of electrical rooms or areas overalldimensions for equipment layout including space available for conduits and protectivedevices.

C. Manufacturer shall provide certification that the equipment supplied under this Section has beenreviewed and certified to meet the current criteria for special seismic certification in compliancewith 2013 CBC 1705.12.3. Include seismic companion anchorage requirements from the testingand as approved by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide an approved label on theequipment enclosure stating that the equipment has been awarded a certificate of compliancefor special seismic certification.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Each switchboard shall be U.L. listed deadfront, deadrear, completely self-supporting, with therequired number of vertical sections bolted together to form one floorstanding switchboard.Construction shall be NEMA Class II with line and load and main bus connections accessiblefrom the front. Provide switchboards of 1000 amperes or greater rating with line and loadinsulated bus bars. Overcurrent protective devices shall be grouped in convertible typeconstruction. Vertical sections shall have full height bussing and where space for future devicesis indicated on the Drawings all the necessary mounting hardware shall be furnished.Switchboards shall include all protective devices and other equipment indicated on the ContractDrawings with the necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring. Bus shall becopper with plated joints, or tin plated aluminum. Bus bars shall be mounted on supports ofhigh impact-resistant, non-tracking insulating material, and braced to withstand the maximumavailable fault current as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Other ratings shall be asindicated on the Contract Drawings. Series-connected or "integrated equipment" short circuitratings shall not be applied in lieu of, or to comply with, short circuit and interrupting capacityratings indicated on the Drawings, unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

B. Service and distribution sections shall contain circuit breakers, fusible switches, andcombination motor starters, with shunt trips, motor operators, ground fault protection, and otheraccessories, as indicated on the Drawings, as well as provisions for utility metering inaccordance with the serving electric utility requirements. Each disconnecting means shall beprovided with a means for individual padlocking. Switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make andquick-break, and horsepower rated through 500 HP. Switches rated over 600 amperes shall bebolted pressure contact type. Ratings of disconnecting means and overcurrent protectivedevices shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Finish: Interior finish shall be a gray lacquer or enamel; exterior finish shall be a gray baked-onenamel or lacquer. Apply all finish coatings over a rust-inhibiting metal primer.

D. Identification: Each switchboard shall have an engraved laminated plastic nameplate identifyingthe switchboard as designated and located on the Contract Drawings, and indicating voltage,phase, and number of system conductors. For example, "Switchboard MS 277/480V. 3Ø 4W.Lettering shall be white on black finish and 2” high minimum. Nameplates shall be affixed by aminimum of two escutcheon pins or screws. Each device on the switchboard shall be providedwith an engraved plastic nameplate as specified in Section 26 0553, IDENTIFICATION OFELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Switchboard(s) shall be securely bolted to the flooring or structure. Final attachment meansshall be in compliance with the seismic requirements of governing authority. Shop Drawingsindicating the bolt down requirements shall be provided by the manufacturer along with allnecessary calculations and shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings of the switchboardequipment. Refer to other Sections of the Specifications related to seismic requirements.

B. Switchboard(s) shall be installed on a level floor, with shims provided where necessary to attainboth horizontal and vertical "plumb" conditions.



C. Switchboard(s) equipment shall be protected during construction in such a manner to preventplaster, paint, dust, etc. from defacing the finish of equipment. Prior to final acceptance of theequipment, the interior of the equipment shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and debris. Anyblemishes or defects on the exterior of the equipment shall be repaired by painting theequipment with paint supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to match the factoryfinishes.

D. All floor mounted switchgear and panelboards shall be sealed with caulking between bottom ofmetal housing and the concrete pad or slab to prevent entrance of dust and debris.

E. All openings in switchgear and panelboards that are unused shall be sealed with bolts andwashers. Use caulking where holes or openings cannot be sealed by way of a washer, or boltsor conduit seals.

F. All ventilated openings in panelboards and switchboards shall be furnished with dust filters toprevent entrance of dust and debris.

G. No operating handles in any switchboard shall be located above 6’- 6” above finish floor. Codeclearances on all sides of the switchboard equipment shall be maintained.

H. Switchboards shall be mechanically grounded to the grounding system.

I. Furnish ammeters, voltmeters, current and potential transformers, test blocks, control switches,fuses and circuit breakers, and other devices as indicated on the Drawings. Meters shall beswitchboard type semi-flush mounted, with phase selector switches. The height of all devicesshall comply with Code and utility company requirements with the switchboard installed on a 2”high concrete pad.

J. For solidly grounded "wye" services of more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600volts phase to phase, provide ground fault protection of equipment for each servicedisconnecting means for services rated 1000 amperes or more, without a single maindisconnecting means. Provide ground fault protection of equipment for other systems asindicated on the Drawings.

K. Ground fault sensors shall be zero sequence type unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.Trip settings shall be as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

L. Protection: Keep switchboards covered during construction operations. Clean interior andexterior after all connections are completed. Factory connections shall be checked and re-torqued tight as required. Damage shall be field or factory repaired to a condition acceptable tothe Engineer at no added cost to the Owner.

M. Operational Test of the ground fault protection system using the primary current injectionmethod shall be performed by qualified personnel with suitable testing/recording equipment inthe presence of the Owner. Provide the Owner with a "Certified Test Report" including testparameters.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General:1. Inspect for physical damage.2. Compare equipment nameplate information with latest single line diagram and report

discrepancies.3. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage and grounding.



4. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method.Refer to manufacturer's instruction for proper foot pound levels.

5. Key interlock systems shall be physically tested to insure proper function.a. Closure attempt shall be made on locked open devices. Opening attempt shall be

made on locked closed devices.b. Key exchange shall be made with devices operated in off-normal positions.

6. All doors, panels and sections shall be inspected for paint, dents, scratches.

END OF SECTION


26 2416 – PANELBOARDS Page 1 of 6

SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Panelboards.2. Manufacturer shall provide certification that the equipment supplied under this Section

has been reviewed and certified to meet the current criteria for special seismiccertification in compliance with 2013 CBC 1705.12.3. Include seismic companionanchorage requirements from the testing and as approved by the manufacturer. Themanufacturer shall provide an approved label on the equipment enclosure stating that theequipment has been awarded a certificate of compliance for special seismic certification.

B. Related Work:1. Division 09 “PAINTING”: Identification and painting of panelboards.2. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.3. Section 26 0573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY:

Requirements for the over current protective devices to be installed to ensure properequipment and personnel protection.

4. Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.5. Section 26 0519, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.6. Section 26 0526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possibleground fault currents.

1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the textby the basic designation only.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. No. 50-1995 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment2. No. 67-1993 Panelboards3. No. 489-1991 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker enclosures

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. No. 70-2010 California Electrical Code (CEC)

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):



1. No. PB-1-2002 Panelboards.2. No. AB-3-1996 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, CEC and as shown on the drawings.Approved manufacturers are Cutler Hammer, Square D, Seimens, General Electric.

B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboardsshall be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of allpanelboards to be of the same manufacturer.

C. All panelboards shall be dead front safety type. Arrange sections for easy removal withoutdisturbing other sections.

D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers. Allfactory wiring shall be checked for correct tightness and visually inspected to insure thatbussing and terminations have not become loose in transit to job site.

E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed,and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings. Refer to single line diagram andpanel schedules on drawings. Terminals shall be minimum 75 degree rated. Back fed maincircuit breakers are not allowed. Main circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted.

F. Panelboards shall have the following features:1. Nonreduced size copper bus bars, and connection straps bolted together and rigidly

supported on molded insulators. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shallbe arranged for sequence phasing of branch circuit devices.

2. Full size neutral bar, mounted on insulated supports.3. Ground bar and isolation ground bar (where called for in panel schedule) with sufficient

terminals for all grounding wires. Buses braced for the available short circuit current.4. All breakers and phase bus connections shall be arranged so that it will be possible to

substitute a 2-pole breaker for two single pole breakers, and a 3-pole breaker for threesingle pole breakers, when trip is 30 amps or less and frame size is 100 amperes or less,without having to drill and tap the main bus bars at bus straps. Where used for heatingand air conditioning, and refrigeration equipment, use only HACR type U.L. listed circuitbreakers.

5. Design interior so that protective devices can be replaced without removing adjacentunits, main bus connectors, and without drilling or tapping.

6. Where designated on panel schedule as "space", include all necessary bussing, devicesupport and connections. Provide blank cover for each space.

7. In two section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The firstsection shall be furnished with subfeed lugs on the line side with cable connections to thesecond section. Panelboard sections with tapped bus or crossover bus are notacceptable.

8. Series rated panelboards are not permitted.9. Label all panels in accordance with Section 26 0553, IDENTIFICATION OF

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.10. Recessed panel space conduit: Provide (1) ¾ inch spare conduit stubbed to accessible

ceiling space and/or interstitial space below floor for every (5) spaces and sparesindicated on panel schedules.



G. Panelboards serving as building mains shall be “service entrance rated” and UL Listed as“service equipment”.

2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS

A. Cabinets:1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. Cabinets for outdoor panels

shall be factory primed and suitably treated with a corrosion-resisting paint finish meetingUL standard for outdoor applications.

2. All ventilated openings in panelboards and switchboards, shall be furnished with dustfilters to prevent entrance of dust and debris.

3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel withend and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.

4. Provide necessary hardware for "in" and "out" adjustment of panel interior.5. Cabinets for two section panelboards shall be arranged side by side, and shall be the

same height. Flush mounted cabinets should be 1 1/2" apart and coupled by conduitnipple if necessary.

6. Gutter size in panel boxes, on all sides, shall be in accordance with the CEC.Penetrations through gutter to live area of the panelboard shall incorporate approvednon-metallic-grommet type of insulation to protect wire passing through.

B. Trims:1. Fabricate trim of sheet steel consisting of frame with door attached by concealed hinges.

Provide flush or surface trim as shown on the drawings.2. Flush trims shall overlap the box by at least 3/4" all around.3. Surface trim shall have the same width and height as the box.4. Flush or surface trims shall not have ventilating openings.5. Secure trims to back boxes by indicating trim clamps.6. Provide a welded angle on rear of trim to support and align trim to cabinet.7. Provide separate trims for each section of multiple section panelboards. Trims and doors

of sections shall be of the same height.

C. Doors:1. Provide doors with flush type latch and manufacturer's standard lock. Doors over 48

inches in height shall have a vault handle and a three-point catch, arranged to fastendoor at top, bottom, and center.

2. In making switching devices accessible, doors shall not uncover any live parts.3. Provide concealed hinges welded to the doors and trims.4. For lighting or power contactors incorporated in panelboards, provide separate doors for

the contactors.5. Provide keyed alike system for all panelboards.6. Provide a directory card, metal holder, and transparent cover. Permanently mount

holders on inside of doors.

D. Painting:1. Thoroughly clean and paint trims and doors at the factory with primer and manufacturer's

standard finish.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Breakers shall be UL listed and labeled, in accordance with the CEC, as shown on thedrawings, and as specified.



B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar or branch circuit bar.1. Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall

have minimum interrupting rating as indicated or as dictated by Section 26 0573OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.

2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time,and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100 ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip shall beadjustable from 3 times to 10 times for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher.Factory setting shall be HI, unless otherwise noted.

C. Breaker features shall be as follows:1. Integral housing of molded insulating material.2. Silver alloy contacts.3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and

instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.6. Electrically and mechanically trip free.7. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions.

a. Line connections shall be bolted.b. Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current

available at the line terminals as indicated on the drawings, and as shown on theelectrical system protective device study as required in Section 26 0573OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY. Theinterrupting rating shall not be less than the minimum identified requirement.

8. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles ofthe breaker to open.

2.4 SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breakers are shown on the drawings, providecircuit breakers in accordance with the applicable requirements of those specified forpanelboards.

B. Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the drawings. Where the types are notshown, they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the environmental conditions where thebreakers are being installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with CEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected.Coordinate the sizes and layout of cabinets within the designated spaces. All equipment mustbe dimensioned in order to physically fit in the spaces provided and to comply with all coderequired clearances.

C. Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard. Include the room numbers (asfinally described by the Owner) and items served on the cards. Obtain final room numbers fromArchitect prior to creating schedule.



D. Mount the panelboard so that maximum height of the top circuit breaker above finished floorshall not exceed 78 inches.

E. For panelboards located in areas accessible to the public, paint the exposed surfaces of thetrims, doors, and boxes with finishes to match surrounding surfaces after the panelboards havebeen installed.

F. Circuit numbers shall correspond to the approved panel schedule. Provide as-built drawingsshowing the actual circuit numbers being used for each device on each branch circuit if changesare required.

G. Verify depth of all flushmounted enclosures in walls to be certain wall depth will accommodatepanel depth prior to installation.

H. All openings in switchgear and panelboards that are unused shall be sealed with bolts andwashers. Use caulking where holes or openings cannot be sealed by way of a washer, or boltsor conduit seals.

I. Contractor shall include the services of an independent testing company to test GFI circuitbreakers in distribution and main panelboards.

END OF SECTION


26 2726 – WIRING DEVICES Page 1 of 3

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. Wiring devices.

B. Related Work:1. Section 26 0500, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL.2. Section 26 0533, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.3. Section 26 0519, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES.4. Section 26 0526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A. General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-

grounding feature (this feature does not substitute for a grounding conductor terminatedon grounding strap of device). Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copperalloy metal.

2. Receptacles shall be of a screw terminal type, “pressure type quick wire” terminations arenot allowed.

B. Duplex receptacles shall be Style Line/Decora single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole,3-wire, and conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The duplex type shallhave bussing break-off feature for two-circuit operation. The ungrounded pole of eachreceptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal.1. Bodies shall be white in color. Verify wiring device color selection to be provided by

Architect. Contractor to verify device color with Architect prior to procurement.2. Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top receptacle is switched.

The remaining receptacle shall be unswitched.3. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit suitable for

mounting in a standard outlet box.a. Ground fault interrupter shall be commercial grade and consist of a differential

current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. Itshall be rated for operation on a 60 Hz, 120 volt, 20-ampere branch circuit. Device



shall meet CEC requirements. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a second. Devices shall meet UL 943.

C. Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete and match with appropriatecord grip plug. Devices shall meet UL 231.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a listed weather resistant duplex receptacle,mounted in box with a gasketed, while in use weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and capreceptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. Approved manufacturers: Intermatic WP10 Series, Thomas & Betts/Red Dot 2CKSeries, or engineer approved equal.

2.2 SWITCHES AND DIMMERS

A. Style Line/Decora rocker switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenoliccompound. Toggle handles color to match receptacle device color unless otherwise specified.1. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty general-purpose use

with an integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and be of ascrew terminal type.

2. Shall be color coded for current rating, listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and meetthe requirements of NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty and UL 20.

3. Ratings:a. 120 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.b. 277 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 277 volts AC.

4. The switches shall be mounted on the strike plate side of doors.5. Incorporate barriers between switches with multi-gang outlet boxes where required by the

CEC.6. All toggle switches shall be of the same manufacturer.

B. Dimmers: Incandescent lamp loads. Wall-mounted incandescent dimmers shall be specificationgrade with capability of raising and lowering the lighting from completely off to full intensity.Dimmers shall maintain full load rating even when two or more units are installed adjacent toone another. All wall-mounted dimmers shall be of the same manufacturer and of a “slide” type.Color shall match all other wiring devices on project.

C. Dimmers: Fluorescent lamp loads. Wall-mounted fluorescent lamp dimmers shall bespecification grade and shall be capable of raising and lowering the lighting from five percentlight output. Dimmers shall have low end intensity adjustment and maintain full load rating evenwhen two or more units are installed adjacent to one another. All wall-mounted dimmers shallbe of the same manufacturer and of a “slide” type. Dimming ballast shall be provided for eachlamp or pair of lamps. Dimmers shall have adequate capacity for the load served and theenvironment in which installed.

2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be thermo plastic

B. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be interchangeable.Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be accordance with NEMA WD1.

C. For receptacles or switches ganged together, wall plates shall be a single ganged plate.



D. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in theassociated specification.

E. Surface mounted boxes, NEMA1, shall be industrial grade raised galvanized steel covers. Inshop areas all receptacles shall be dust proof and or waterproof where applicable.

F. Waterproof device covers shall be cast iron, 4-corner screw type, for FS and FD type mounting.Device covers shall be zinc galvanized finish. Weatherproof covers shall be lockable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with the CECand as shown on the drawings.

B. Installation shall be in accordance with the CEC, NECA “Standard of Installation”, and as shownas on the drawings.

C. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved greenbonding jumper, and also be connected to the green equipment grounding conductor.

D. General: Devices shall be of the type specified herein. All devices shall be installed with“pigtailed” leads from the outlet box. No device shall be used in the “feed through” application.Screw terminals shall be used to connect all devices to the circuit and shall be grounded bymeans of a ground wire where grounding terminals are provided in the device.

E. Installation: Devices and plates shall be installed in a “plumb” condition and must be flush withthe finish surface of the wall where boxes are recessed.

F. Mounting heights: All control and convenience devices shall comply with California Code ofRegulations Title 24 and ADA with respect to accessibility requirements. Mounting heightsindicated on plans shall have precedence.

G. Install switches with the off position down.

H. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

I. Provide extension rings as required to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface orcasework.

J. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

END OF SECTION


26 4300 – SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES Page 1 of 4

SECTION 26 4300

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:1. SPD for service entrance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit all related SPD Specifications, Drawings, maintenance manuals, installation instructions,and UL 1449, third edition, listed surge suppression ratings of specified protection modes.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: ISO-9001 certification or SPD manufacturer's complete qualitycontrol and documentation procedures of firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of SPDproduct for Category-C3 (ANSI/IEEE C62.41) and whose product have been in satisfactoryservice for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide local support for the SPD.

C. Warrant the service entrance SPD for 5 years for complete parts and factory provided on sitelabor. Warrant the distribution panel SPD for 1 year.

D. Both the service entrance and distribution panel SPD of the same manufacturer.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Listed per UL 1449, third edition, and complimentary listed per UL 1283 as an RFI/EMI filter.

B. Comply with ANSI/IEEE (C62.1 or C62.11) and C62.45 test procedures for Category-C3established in C62.41 (1991).

C. Comply with NEMA as applicable to construction and NEC 280 for installation and NEC110.9/110.10 for overcurrent protection.



D. Design and tested to survive the following 8x20 microsecond surge currents following IEEE TestProcedures and wait times established in C62.1/C62.11 and C62.45:

Wye Systems Delta Systems

Line to Ground: 10 x 25 KA Line to Line: 10 x 25 KA Line to Neutral: 10 x 25 KA Line to Ground: 10 x 25 KA Neutral to Ground: 10 x 25 K

E. The individual protection mode designed and tested to survive 1250 Category-C3 (10KA) surgecurrents as described in IEEE C62.41 (1991).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPD FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Install SPD devices at service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser diagram.

B. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the systemneutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutralconductor and ground.

C. Each phase shall have a minimum of two modules. Fuse the surge modules at a minimumrating of 10 amp and a current limit rating of 200,000 AIC. Modules and fuses field replaceable.

D. Provide visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation. The indicator consists of anLED array. Use no single LED or neon indicators.

E. Equip the SPD device with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surgecircuitry has been damaged. Provide a silence button with the alarm.

F. The SPD shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry and shall provide high frequency noisefiltering up to 40dB attenuation (100KHZ to 100MHZ).

G. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:1. Minimum single impulse current rating (l-N + l-G): 100,000 amp per phase.



2. Incorporate hybrid circuitry.3. UL 1449, third edition, (ANSI C62.41-1991 Category-C) clamping voltage shall not

exceed the following:Voltage L-N L-G N-G120/208 400 volt 400 volt 400 volt 277/480 800 volt 800 volt 800 volt

4. The Category-C3 clamping voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62-41-1991 (20KV-1.2/50microseconds, 10KA-8.20 microseconds shall not exceed the following:Voltage L-N L-G N-G120/208 550 volt 550 volt 550 volt 277/480 975 volt 975 volt 975 volt

H. Provide full redundant protection for each phase that consists of solid-state components andshall operate bi-directionally.

I. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage of the SPD: Greater than 110 percent of the nominalsystem voltage.

J. Provide an internal disconnect (3-pole, UL listed).

K. Manufacturers: EFI Electronics Corporation, Titan SE Series, Lea International.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Install one SPD at each utility service entrance or as indicated on Drawings. Followmanufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install SPD on the load side of the service entrance. Provide breaker for disconnect in serviceentrance equipment, size breaker to manufacturers installation instructions.

C. Provide 6AWG stranded copper conductor or larger conductors between SPD and point ofattachment. Keep the conductors short and straight as possible. Provide 36-inch maximumlead length of connecting conductors.

D. Bond SPD's ground to the service entrance ground.

END OF SECTION

SPECIFICATION NO. CP21-01 PROJECT NO. 18020

Documents

Transcript of SPECIFICATION NO. CP21-01 PROJECT NO. 18020